JP7404198B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to advantageous conditions that are advantageous to players.

Conventionally, a gaming machine is known in which a plurality of parts (for example, an introduction part, a win/fail decision part, an epilogue part, etc.) are provided from the start to the end of a variable display to increase player's interest (Patent Document 1) ). In addition, among the jackpot symbols, a gaming machine that executes a re-lottery effect in which the jackpot symbol changes again after a temporary stop with a non-probability variable symbol (normal jackpot symbol), and then the non-probability variable symbol or the probability variable symbol stops, is known. (Patent Document 2).

JP2019-118411A Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-179389

According to the gaming machine described above, there is still room for improvement in making the flow of a series of performances executed look better.

The present invention was devised in view of such circumstances, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can more suitably display a series of effects to be executed.

(1) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
A movable body,
sound output means;
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
In the success/failure notification part of the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
The light emission control means includes:
In the success/failure notification part, when the movable body advances to the second position, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for moving the movable body, and the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. During the evacuation, the luminance data table for moving the movable body is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part, and the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is used to control the light emitting means,
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part,
The sound output means is
In a specific scene in the introduction part, output the dialogue sounds made by the character and the action sounds corresponding to the character's actions,
In the specific scene, the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output louder than the action sound corresponding to the character's action,
The brightness data table for moving the movable body is configured to use brightness data representing chromatic colors and brightness data representing achromatic colors,
The brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part includes brightness data representing the first chromatic color,
Brightness data representing a second chromatic color, and brightness data representing a plurality of chromatic colors including:
The time used is different between the brightness data representing chromatic colors in the brightness data table for movable body movement and the brightness data representing chromatic colors in the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part,
The light emission control means includes:
When an error occurs, controlling the light emitting means by using an error brightness data table,
In a normal state, controlling the light emitting means by using a normal state background brightness data table,
controlling the light emitting means to give priority to the error brightness data table over the brightness data table for moving the movable body;
controlling the light emitting means so as to give priority to a brightness data table for movable body movement over a brightness data table for normal state background;
It is characterized by

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include the invention related to the gaming machine (2) below. Conventionally, in gaming machines, the number of times a special figure game is executed in a normal gaming state (the number of times a variable display is executed) is 1000, as shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2005-95449 (0058, 0133, etc.). When a jackpot (advantageous state) does not occur even after reaching the number of times (special number of times), the gaming state is controlled to a variable probability state, and the probability of a jackpot being determined as a result of the special drawing game is increased. It has been increased to about 1/100, and jackpots are more likely to occur in subsequent special game games, and jackpots will occur even if the number of special game games (the number of times variable display is executed) reaches 1000 in normal gaming conditions. When there was no such thing, there was something that generated a short time state instead of a variable state. However, in such a gaming machine, the degree of relief for the player is insufficient when the number of executions of the variable display reaches a special number, and in view of this, it is possible to suitably realize relief for the player. There is a demand for the provision of gaming machines.

(2) Perform variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and when a specific display result (e.g. jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed, an advantageous advantageous state (e.g. jackpot gaming state) is achieved. A controllable gaming machine,
a state control means capable of controlling a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state;
an updating means capable of updating numerical information based on execution of variable display;
Equipped with
The state control means is capable of controlling to a special state when a special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times,
The updating means updates numerical information depending on whether variable display of the first identification information is executed or when variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 281-16). , the part that executes step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100).
According to such a configuration, relief for the player can be suitably realized. Specifically, even if the gaming state changes and any identification information is displayed variably, the numerical information continues to be updated, making it easier for the player to be rescued and increasing his or her desire to play. Can be done.

Further, the embodiments of the invention described below include the invention related to the gaming machine (3) below. Conventionally, in gaming machines, the number of times a special figure game is executed in a normal gaming state (the number of times a variable display is executed) is 1000, as shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2005-95449 (0058, 0133, etc.). When a jackpot (advantageous state) does not occur even after reaching the number of times (special number of times), the gaming state is controlled to a variable probability state, and the probability of a jackpot being determined as a result of the special drawing game is increased. It has been increased to about 1/100, and jackpots are more likely to occur in subsequent special game games, and jackpots will occur even if the number of special game games (the number of times variable display is executed) reaches 1000 in normal gaming conditions. When there was no such thing, there was something that generated a short time state instead of a variable state. However, in such gaming machines, there is room for improvement in control in those that can be controlled to a special state based on the number of times the variable display is executed. There is a need to provide gaming machines that provide sound gameplay.

(3) Variable display of identification information including first identification information (e.g., first special symbol) and second identification information (e.g., second special symbol) is performed, and a specific display result (e.g., jackpot symbol) is derived. A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when displayed,
A special state control means (for example, a part that executes steps 120IWS150, S160, and S537 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can control a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state;
An updating means (for example, a part that executes step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can update numerical information (for example, a relief time reduction counter) based on execution of the variable display;
Equipped with
The special condition control means determines that when the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value (for example, "0") corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 900 times), a special condition is satisfied (for example, the relief time is shortened). (established), it can be controlled to a special state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS150),
The updating means updates numerical information depending on whether variable display of the first identification information is executed or when variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, when variable display of the first special symbol is executed). Regardless of whether it is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the value of the relief time reduction counter is uniformly updated),
special state control means capable of controlling to a special state (for example, a small winning game state) different from the advantageous state when a special display result (for example, a small winning symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed; For example, a part that executes steps 120IWS114 to S116 in the game control microcomputer 100),
A special counting means (for example, a part that executes step 120IWS73 in the game control microcomputer 100) that counts the number of times the special state has occurred in the special state;
A special state ending means for ending the special state (for example, a part that executes step 120IWS143 in the game control microcomputer 100);
Furthermore,
The special state terminating means is capable of terminating the special state based on the number of times the special state counted by the special counting means reaches the specific number of times (for example, once). When the game control microcomputer 100 determines Y in step 120IWS74, it sets the time saving end flag in step 120IWS75, determines Y in step 120IWS141, and executes step 120IWS143),
When the special display result is derived and displayed in a variable display where the special condition is satisfied, the special state control means is capable of controlling the special state to the special state during the special state based on the derived and displayed special display result. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS150 if the relief time saving determination flag is set in 120IWS148 at the timing of the end of the symbol confirmation period even if there is a small hit fluctuation, and the subsequent In the small winning game state, it is controlled to the time saving state C),
The special counting means does not count the special state based on the derivation and display of the special display result in the variable display where the special condition is satisfied (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS73 at the start of the variation). Then, the small hit number counter is decremented by 1, and when the relief time is shortened, step 120IWS149 is executed at the end of the fluctuation and the small hit number counter is set. After the number counter is set, the small hit number counter is not immediately decremented in the fluctuation display.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform suitable control in a situation where both a special state and a special state occur.

Note that the present invention may have only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may have configurations other than the matters specifying the invention together with the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention. It may be something.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a figure for explaining a frame lamp. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between a special figure LED board, a 4th pattern unit, and a 4th pattern unit and a game effect lamp. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a display mode of a screen in an image display device. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining various boards etc. installed in a pachinko game machine. It is a figure for explaining a hit type. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining each random number. It is a diagram for explaining a jackpot determination table and a jackpot type determination table. It is a diagram for explaining an example of a production control command. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining an example of a pre-variation pattern on the main side. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a post-fluctuation pattern on the main side. It is a figure for explaining the post-fluctuation pattern determination table at the time of a loss. It is a diagram for explaining a post-change pattern determination table at the time of a jackpot. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a previous variation pattern determination table. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining an example of a total variation pattern on the main side. It is a figure for explaining an example of lottery of performance patterns on the sub side. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart showing starting winning prize determination processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during jackpot opening. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot release post-processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. It is a diagram for explaining the flow of a series of performances. It is a diagram for explaining the relationship before and after determination of success, SP first half reach A jackpot, and SP final reach jackpot. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a scenario of a start part. It is a figure for explaining the scenario of the inciting part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A) and the losing epilogue part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the scenario of the inciting part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B) and the losing epilogue part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the scenario of the accessory action part (at the time of SP latter half development). It is a figure for explaining the scenario of the inciting part (SP second half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach A) and the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the scenario of the inciting part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B) and the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach B). It is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the scenario of the inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the scenario of a winning epilogue part (SP final reach) and a loss epilogue part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the scenario of the relief part. It is a figure for explaining the scenario of the re-lottery part (odd number symbol or even number symbol derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the scenario of the re-lottery part (odd number symbols are derived after button operation) and the fanfare part. It is a figure for explaining the scenario of the re-lottery part (even number pattern derivation after button operation) and the fanfare part. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a mechanism of output to an LED driver. It is a diagram for explaining the lighting mode of the game effect lamp. It is a figure for explaining the lighting mode of the game effect lamp. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in a start part. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the start part. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the start part. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the start part. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the start part. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in a start part. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the start part. It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the presentation aspect in a loss epilogue part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the presentation aspect in a loss epilogue part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B). It is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the losing epilogue part (SP first half reach B). It is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the losing epilogue part (SP first half reach B). FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the accessory action part (at the time of SP second half development). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B). It is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach B). It is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B). It is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach B). It is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the winning epilogue part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the winning epilogue part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the winning epilogue part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the winning epilogue part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in a loss epilogue part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in a loss epilogue part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the relief hit part. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the relief hit part. It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design or even number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design or even number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design or even number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design or even number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design or even number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design or even number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design or even number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design or even number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design or even number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design or even number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design or even number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design or even number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design or even number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design or even number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design or even number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design or even number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in a fanfare part. It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (even number pattern derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (even number pattern derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (even number pattern derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in a fanfare part. It is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (b11) to (b13). FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the volume level. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the volume level. It is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (r24) to (r27). FIG. 3 is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (r28) to (r31). FIG. 3 is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (r32) to (r35). It is a detailed explanatory diagram of the accessory motion in (b18) to (i1). It is a detailed explanatory diagram of the accessory motion in (b18) to (i1). It is a detailed explanatory diagram of the accessory motion in (r54) to (s4). It is a detailed explanatory diagram of the accessory motion in (r54) to (s4). FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the number of subtitles and the number of lines. FIG. 3 is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (A1) to (A23). It is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (A24) to (A46). They are detailed explanatory diagrams of portions (b4) to (b6) and comparison diagrams during the jackpot round. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the transmittance of subtitles for dialogue and the output of sound. They are detailed explanatory diagrams of portions (b4) to (b6) and detailed explanatory diagrams of portions (o3) to (o5). FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a comparative example of subtitles. FIG. 3 is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (B4) to (B11). It is a figure for explaining the modification of pattern display. It is a figure for explaining the modification of re-lottery. It is a figure for explaining the modification of re-lottery. It is a figure for explaining the modification of re-lottery. It is a figure for explaining the modification of re-lottery. It is a detailed explanatory diagram of a symbol confirmation period. It is a detailed explanatory diagram of blackout. FIG. 7 is a detailed explanatory diagram of a game effect lamp at the time of a loss and a diagram for explaining a modification example at the time of a loss. (r48) is a detailed explanatory diagram of the portion. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a luminance data table used in a start part. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used in a start part. It is a figure for explaining an example of the parent table in the brightness data table used for the inciting part of SP first half reach A. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the child table for frame lamps in the brightness|luminance data table used for the inciting part of SP first half reach A. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table and child table for frame lamps in the brightness|luminance data table used for the winning epilogue part of SP first half reach A. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table and child table for frame lamps in the brightness|luminance data table used for the loss epilogue part of SP first half reach A. It is a figure for explaining an example of the parent table in the brightness data table used for the inciting part of SP first half reach B. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the child table for frame lamps in the brightness|luminance data table used for the inciting part of SP first half reach B. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table and child table for frame lamps in the brightness|luminance data table used for the winning epilogue part of SP first half reach B. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table and child table for frame lamps in the brightness|luminance data table used for the loss epilogue part of SP first half reach B. It is a figure for explaining an example of the child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used for the accessory motion part during the second half of SP development. It is a figure for explaining an example of the parent table in the brightness data table used for the inciting part of SP second half reach A. It is a figure for explaining an example of the child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used for the inciting part of SP second half reach A. It is a figure for explaining an example of the child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used for the inciting part of SP second half reach A. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table and child table for frame lamps in the brightness|luminance data table used for the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach A. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table and child table for frame lamps in the brightness|luminance data table used for the loss epilogue part of SP second half reach A. It is a figure for explaining an example of the parent table in the luminance data table used for the inciting part of SP second half reach B. It is a figure for explaining an example of the child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used for the inciting part of SP second half reach B. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table and child table for frame lamps in the brightness|luminance data table used for the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach B. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table and child table for frame lamps in the brightness|luminance data table used for the loss epilogue part of SP second half reach B. It is a figure for explaining an example of the parent table in the brightness data table used for the promotion part of SP final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the child table for frame lamps in the brightness|luminance data table used for the promotion part of SP final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the child table for frame lamps in the brightness|luminance data table used for the promotion part of SP final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table and child table for frame lamps in the brightness|luminance data table used for the winning epilogue part of SP final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table and child table for frame lamps in the brightness|luminance data table used for the loss epilogue part of SP final reach. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used for a relief part. It is a figure for explaining an example of the parent table in the brightness data table used for the re-lottery part. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used in the re-lottery part (before operation promotion). It is a figure for explaining an example of the child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used for the re-lottery part (symbol promotion after operation promotion). It is a figure for explaining an example of the child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used for the re-lottery part (design maintenance after operation promotion). FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used for a fanfare part. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a smooth rainbow luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in a smooth rainbow luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a smooth rainbow luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an accessory lamp and a grandchild table for a panel left lamp in the smooth rainbow luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an attacker lamp in a smooth rainbow luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the accessory action red blinking brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a yellow haze luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a white blinking (white flash) brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a common red cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in a common red cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the common red cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the common red cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the common red cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for accessory lamps in the common red cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the panel left lamp in the common red cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an attacker lamp in a common red cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an attacker lamp in a common red cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a common green cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in a common green cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the common green cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the common green cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the common green cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for accessory lamps in the common green cut-in brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the panel left lamp in the common green cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an attacker lamp in a common green cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an attacker lamp in a common green cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the unpromoted operation brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a trigger display brightness data table and an operation promotion brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a shutter brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a lost brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table per rescue. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table per rescue. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the hit confirmation brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the hit confirmation brightness data table. It is a figure for explaining an example of the grandchild table for frame lamps in the re-lottery production brightness data table. It is a figure for explaining an example of the grandchild table for frame lamps in the re-lottery production brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in a background brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a background luminance data table. It is a figure for explaining the comparison of lamp control in the case of a hit and the time of a loss. It is a figure for explaining the comparison of lamp control in the case of a hit and the time of a loss. It is a figure for explaining the comparison of lamp control in the case of a hit and the time of a loss. It is a figure for explaining the shaking mode of a pattern. It is a figure for explaining the modification of the re-lottery performance. It is a figure for explaining the modification of the re-lottery performance. It is a figure for explaining the modification of the re-lottery performance. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining reference to a brightness data table. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining reference to a brightness data table. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining reference to a brightness data table. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining reference to a brightness data table. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a grandchild table based on timer management of a child table. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in characteristic part 120IW. It is an explanatory view showing a configuration example of a special variable winning ball device in the characteristic part 120IW. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards etc. in the characteristic part 120IW. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a jackpot determination table, a small hit determination table, and a time saving loss determination table. It is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table and a small hit type determination table. It is an explanatory diagram showing a time saving type determination table. It is an explanatory diagram showing a symbol determination table. It is an explanatory diagram showing a symbol determination table. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining an opening pattern of a small winning game. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern table in the feature section 120IW. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the production control command. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the production control command. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing in the feature section 120IW. It is a flowchart showing an example of special design process processing in the feature section 120IW. It is a flowchart showing special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart showing special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart showing special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart showing special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart showing special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows small hit release preprocessing. It is a flowchart which shows processing during small hit opening. It is a flowchart which shows small hit closure post-processing. It is a flowchart showing jackpot end processing. FIG. 7 is a state transition diagram for explaining state transitions in the feature section 120IW. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example of command analysis processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example of command analysis processing. 3 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing. It is an explanatory diagram of a setting suggestion effect determination table at the time of relief. It is a flowchart which shows production processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows production processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows waiting processing per special figure. It is a flowchart which shows waiting processing per special figure. It is an explanatory diagram of a setting suggestion performance determination table at the time of jackpot. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a performance mode when shifting to a relief time reduction mode. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a performance mode when shifting to a relief time reduction mode. It is a flowchart which shows special symbol stop processing in modification 1. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit closure post-processing in the modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit closure post-processing in the modification 3. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end process in modification 4. It is a flowchart which shows special symbol normal processing in modification 5. It is a flowchart which shows special symbol stop processing in modification 5. It is a flowchart which shows special symbol normal processing in modification 6. 12 is a timing chart showing the timing of a pre-read preview performance restriction period in Modification Example 7. 12 is a timing chart showing control timings of various time saving states in Modification 8. FIG. It is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table and a small hit type determination table. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining an opening pattern of a small winning game. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern table in the feature section 090IW. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern table in the feature section 090IW. It is a flowchart which shows small hit closure post-processing. It is a flowchart which shows waiting processing per special figure. It is a flowchart which shows waiting processing per special figure. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the performance mode when a small hit occurs. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the performance mode when a small hit occurs. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a modification of the opening pattern of the small winning game. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the performance mode when a small hit occurs. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the performance mode when a small hit occurs. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a modification of the opening pattern of the small winning game. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern table in the feature section 113IW. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern table in the feature section 113IW. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing related to the output of each test signal in test terminal processing. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing related to the output of each test signal in test terminal processing. It is a flowchart which shows customer waiting demonstration performance control processing. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a telop display execution lottery table and a telop display mode determination lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prefetch notice setting process. 3 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows production processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows production processing during variable display. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode until the transition to relief time reduction. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode until the transition to relief time reduction. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode until the transition to relief time reduction. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode until the transition to relief time reduction. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode until the transition to relief time reduction. It is an explanatory diagram showing time saving types. It is an explanatory view showing a variation pattern of special symbols and decorative symbols. It is an explanatory view showing a variation pattern of special symbols and decorative symbols. It is an explanatory view showing a variation pattern of special symbols and decorative symbols. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation process. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol stop processing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an external output signal. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the gaming state changes. It is a time chart for explaining an example of control of a gaming state. 3 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a performance aspect of a time-saving rush performance. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a production mode of a time-saving rush production in modification example 1-3. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining how to change the gaming state in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol normal process in modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol normal process in modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol normal process in modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol normal process in modification 2. 12 is a timing chart showing the timing of executing each effect in Modification 2. FIG. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode of an inciting reach in Modification 2. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the performance mode of notification of relief time saving completion in Modification 2. FIG. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a control example of a gaming state in modification 2.

<Configuration of pachinko machine, etc.>
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 1 shows an arrangement layout of main components in a pachinko game machine 1, which is an example of a game machine. A pachinko game machine 1, which is an example of a game machine, is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. There is. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a game is played by variably displaying special symbols. "Variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

It should be noted that two types of special symbols are provided as the special symbols that are variably displayed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, one special symbol is also referred to as a "first special symbol" or "first special symbol," and the other special symbol is also referred to as a "second special symbol" or "second special symbol." Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game".

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (electro luminescence), and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special patterns are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative symbols are displayed variably (for example, vertically scrolling display or (updated display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern which are executed synchronously is collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. The sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

On the game board 2 on the left side of the image display device 5, a character named Yumu-chan who appears in the performance executed by the pachinko game machine 1 is drawn. Yumu-chan is the main character that appears in the content used in the pachinko game machine 1. Further, on the game board 2 at the lower right of the image display device 5, a character called Jam-chan that appears in the performance executed by the pachinko game machine 1 is drawn. Jam-chan is a character that appears in the content used in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole which is always kept in a constant open state into which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening (electric chew) that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 6). The variable prize winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position, so that the ball enters the second starting winning hole. It becomes a closed state in which game balls do not enter (it is also said that the second starting prize opening enters a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the movable wing pieces of the variable winning ball device 6B are in the tilted position, so that the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning hole (second starting winning ball). It is also said that the prize opening will be open.) When the game ball enters the second starting prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one that includes an electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations on the lower left side of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), there are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiver members. A general prize opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7A having a big winning hole is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7A includes a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 6), and a big winning hole (as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state) by the big winning hole door. (hereinafter referred to as a large winning opening).

For example, the special variable winning ball device 7A has a game board 2 located at the back of the pachinko game machine 1, and a glass door frame 3a (see FIG. 2) located at the front side (player side) of the pachinko game machine 1. A big winning opening door is provided in the space between, and by sliding open and closing horizontally between the back side and the front side of the pachinko game machine 1, the regular big winning opening with game balls is opened. The route to is opened. Specifically, when the solenoid 82 is in the OFF state, the big prize opening door slides toward the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, thereby closing the regular winning opening, and the game ball enters the regular winning opening. (to pass) becomes impossible. On the other hand, when the solenoid 82 is in the on state, the big prize opening door slides toward the back of the pachinko game machine 1, thereby opening the regular winning opening, making it easier for game balls to enter the regular winning opening. .

The game ball that has entered the normal big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23 by passing through an area provided inside the normal big winning opening. When the game balls are detected by the count switch 23 (see FIG. 6), game balls corresponding to the detection (for example, 10 balls per detection) are paid out to the player as prize balls. When a game ball enters a normal big prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters, for example, a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, and a general winning opening 10. Further, when the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23 reaches the upper limit number (for example, 10 balls), one round ends and the normal big prize opening is controlled to be closed.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a V variable winning ball device 7B is provided next to the special variable winning ball device 7A. The V variable winning ball device 7B is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 83 (see FIG. 6), and a big winning hole (hereinafter referred to as a V big winning hole) that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. (referred to as the winning opening).

For example, the special variable winning ball device 7B is equipped with a big winning opening door in the space between the game board 2 and the glass door frame 3a, and this big winning opening door is connected to the back side and the front side of the pachinko game machine 1. By sliding horizontally between the slots to open and close, the path for the game ball to the V grand prize opening is opened. Specifically, when the solenoid 83 is in the OFF state, the big prize opening door slides toward the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 to close the V big prize opening, and the game ball enters the V big prize opening. (to pass) becomes impossible. On the other hand, when the solenoid 83 is in the on state, the big prize opening door slides to the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, thereby opening the V big prize opening, making it easier for game balls to enter the V big winning opening. .

The game ball that has entered the V big winning hole is detected by the V winning switch 24 (see FIG. 6) by passing through a specific area (also referred to as the V winning area) provided inside the V big winning hole. When the game ball is detected by the V winning switch 24, the game state is controlled to a variable probability state. In other words, in this embodiment, a V winning occurs on the condition that a game ball enters the V big winning opening during a round in a jackpot gaming state, and the gaming state is controlled to be in a variable probability state. . In addition, the regular big winning hole and the V big winning hole are collectively referred to as the big winning hole. Also, the big winning opening is also called an attacker.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

In the pachinko game machine 1, normal symbols are variably displayed as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

At the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, speakers 8L and 8R are provided for reproducing sound effects and the like.

A movable body 32 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1) that operates according to the performance. The movable body 32 is composed of a character string "POWERFULII". "POWERFULII" may be the model name of the pachinko game machine 1, or may be a name representing content used in the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, the title of an anime, the name of a singer, etc.). Further, the characters attached to the movable body 32 may indicate the name of a character appearing in the content used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, "Yumemu" indicating the main character Yume-chan). In this embodiment, the model name (Powerful II) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown on the movable body 32.

In this embodiment, the movable body 32 is movable between a position above the image display device 5 and a position overlapping (superimposing) the front surface of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. Specifically, the movable body 32 covers the front surface of the image display device 5 by causing the letters "POWER FUL II" to fall diagonally (falling so that "P" is downward and "II" is upward) ( (overlap) position. Note that the movable body 32 is also referred to as an accessory.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). In addition, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout section (hitting ball supply tray) apart from the upper tray from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, there is a stick controller 31A that serves as an operation stick that can be held by the player and tilted (operation in front, back, left, and right directions, and operation in which the player pulls it toward the player). is installed. A controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 6) is provided inside the main body of the stick controller 31A to detect a tilting operation on the operation stick. Further, the stick controller 31A has a built-in vibrator motor (not shown) for vibrating the stick controller 31A. Note that the stick controller 31A is also referred to as a "trigger" because it can be pulled toward the player by the player.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 6).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's actions (operations, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

The pachinko game machine 1 includes a special map LED board 9020 at the lower left of the game board 2. The special figure LED board 9020 is an LED board that is controlled by the game control microcomputer 100 and notifies the first pending memory number, the second pending memory number, etc. by lighting/blinking/extinguishing the LED. In the special pattern LED board 9020, the type of special pattern (first special pattern) in the first special pattern game and the special pattern in the second special pattern game are determined by the combination of lighting modes such as lighting/blinking/lighting out by a plurality of LEDs. (2nd special figure) represents the type. For example, as shown in FIG. 4(a), which will be described later, in the special figure LED board 9020, by combining lighting modes such as lighting/blinking/lighting out by a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display section 9021, The type of the first special figure is represented, and the type of the second special figure is represented by a combination of lighting modes such as lighting/blinking/lighting out by a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 2 variable display section 9022. Note that in this embodiment, the term "lighting mode" is used as a concept that includes lighting, blinking, and turning off in various lamps such as a frame lamp described later.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a fourth symbol unit 9050 at the lower left of the image display device 5. The fourth symbol unit 9050 is an LED board that is controlled by the performance control CPU 120 and notifies changes in special symbols, number of reserved memories, right hit display, etc. by lighting/blinking/extinguishing the LED. In the fourth symbol unit 9050, the type of special symbol (first special symbol) in the first special symbol game and the special symbol in the second special symbol game are determined by combinations of lighting modes such as lighting/blinking/lighting out by a plurality of LEDs. (2nd special figure) represents the type. For example, as shown in FIG. 4(b), which will be described later, in the fourth symbol unit 9050, by combining lighting modes such as lighting/blinking/lighting out by a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display section 9053, The type of the first special figure is represented, and the type of the second special figure is represented by a combination of lighting modes such as lighting/blinking/lighting out by a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 2 variable display section 9054.

The pachinko game machine 1 includes a plurality of lamps (also referred to as game effect lamps) on the game board 2 and the game machine frame 3. Specifically, the pachinko game machine 1 includes an accessory lamp 9A provided on the movable body 32, a board left lamp 9B provided on the left side of the game board 2, and a special variable winning ball device 7B provided near the special variable winning ball device 7B. The V attacker lamp 9E and the V attacker lamp 9F provided near the special variable winning ball device 7A indicate that the V jackpot is open and the round is in a jackpot game state in which a V winning can occur. A V lamp 9G that notifies the occurrence of the occurrence, an electric chew lamp 9H provided near the variable winning ball device 6B, a stick controller lamp 9J provided on the stick controller 31A, and a push button provided on the push button 31B. It includes a button lamp 9K, a frame left lamp 9L provided on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3, and a frame right lamp 9R provided on the right side of the gaming machine frame 3. The V lamp may notify that a jackpot has occurred.

The accessory lamp 9A is composed of a plurality of lamps such as accessory lamps 9A1 to 9A4. Specifically, a member included in the movable body 32 and labeled with the letters "POWER FULII" is divided into four parts, with the accessory lamp 9A1 being the back side of the "P" and "O" parts, and the accessory lamp 9A2 being the part labeled "POWERFULII". The accessory lamp 9A3 is placed on the back side of the "W" and "E" parts, the accessory lamp 9A3 is placed on the back side of the "R" and "F" parts, and the accessory lamp 9A4 is placed on the back side of the "U" and "L" parts. There is. As a result, when the accessory lamps 9A1 to 9A4 light up (light-emit) on the back side of the member labeled with the characters "POWER FULII", "POWER FULII" lights up (light-emits).

The board left lamp 9B is composed of a plurality of lamps such as board left lamps 9B1 to 9B5. On the left side of the game board 2, the main character (for example, "Yumemu" indicating the main character Yume-chan) in the content used in the pachinko game machine 1 is drawn, and the board left lamps 9B1 to 9B5 depict the main character. are placed on the back side of the portion of the game board 2 where is drawn. As a result, the board left lamps 9B1 to 9B5 light up (light up) on the back side of the part of the game board 2 where the main character is drawn, so that the part of the game board 2 where the main character is drawn starts to light up (light up). ing.

The attacker lamp 9E is arranged on the back side of the game board 2 near the special variable winning ball device 7B. As a result, the attacker lamp 9E lights up (lights up) on the back side of the game board 2, so that the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7B lights up (lights up). Further, the V attacker lamp 9F is arranged on the back side of the game board 2 near the special variable winning ball device 7A. As a result, the V attacker lamp 9F lights up (lights up) on the back side of the game board 2, so that the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7A lights up (lights up).

The V lamp 9G is arranged on the back side of the part of the game board 2 where "V" is drawn. As a result, the V lamp 9G lights up (lights up) on the back side of the part of the game board 2 where "V" is drawn, so that the part of the game board 2 where "V" is drawn lights up (lights up). It has become. The electric chew lamp 9H is arranged near the variable winning ball device 6B, and when turned on (lights up), it lights up (lights out) the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7B.

The stick controller lamp 9J is provided on the stick controller 31A, and when lit (emits light), the stick controller 31A lights up (emits light). The push button lamp 9K is provided on the push button 31B, and when turned on (emits light), the push button 31B is turned on (emits light).

The frame left lamp 9L is composed of a plurality of lamps 9L1 to 9L12 (described later in FIG. 3) provided on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3, and when each lamp lights up (lights up), the gaming machine The left side of frame 3 is designed to light up (light emit light). The frame right lamp 9R is composed of a plurality of lamps 9R2 to 9L12 (described later in FIG. 3) provided on the right side of the gaming machine frame 3, and when each lamp lights up (emits light), the gaming machine The right side of frame 3 is designed to light up (light emit light). Note that the left frame lamp 9L and the right frame lamp 9R are also collectively referred to as a frame lamp. Also, accessory lamp 9A, board left lamp 9B, attacker lamp 9E, V attacker lamp 9F, V lamp 9G, electric chew lamp 9H, stick controller lamp 9J, push button lamp 9K, frame left lamp 9L, and frame right lamp 9R. are also collectively referred to as game effect lamps 9.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment. A main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17 (see FIG. 6).

A display monitor 29 is arranged at the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 30 (see FIG. 6) is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is viewed with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, winning ratios, and bases. The consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the big prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The winning ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the second starting prize opening (electronic chew) to the number of prize balls that land in the big prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display monitor 29 only needs to be capable of displaying setting values to be changed or checked when the settings are changed or checked.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is in a closed state. The gaming machine frame 3 is rotatably provided with a glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end portion of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. The security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back side when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the frame lamp. The frame left lamp 9L has a group of 12 lamps including left frame lamps 9L1 to 9L12 running counterclockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame left lamp 9L illuminates the left side of the gaming machine frame 3 by lighting or blinking a plurality of lamps (12 lamps in this example). On the other hand, the frame right lamp 9R has a group of 11 lamps including left frame lamps 9R2 to 9L12 running clockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame right lamp 9R illuminates the right side of the gaming machine frame 3 by lighting or blinking a plurality of lamps (11 lamps in this example).

FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the special pattern LED board 9020 and the fourth pattern unit 9050. As shown in FIG. 4(a), the special figure LED board 9020 includes a special figure 1 variable display part 9021 that shows a variable display of the first special figure, and a special figure 2 variable display part that shows a variable display of the second special figure. 9022, a special figure 1 memory display section 9023 indicating the first pending memory number corresponding to the first special figure game, and a special figure 2 memory display section 9024 indicating the second pending memory number corresponding to the second special figure game. , a normal pattern memory display section 9025 that shows the number of stored normal symbols, a normal pattern display section 9026 that shows a variable display of normal symbols, a right hitting display section 9030 that prompts the player to play right, and the presence or absence of a probability change state. , a time saving display section 9029 indicating the presence or absence of a time saving state, and a round display section 9027 indicating the number of jackpot rounds. Each display section can notify the player of the presence or absence of variable display of special symbols and regular symbols, the results thereof, the current gaming status, the number of reservations, etc. by lighting or blinking using lighting means such as LEDs. can.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display section 9021 determines whether or not the first special symbol in the first special symbol game is being displayed in a variable manner, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined based on the result of the variable display. The player is notified by lighting/flashing/turning off the light using lighting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display section 9022 determines whether or not the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is being displayed in a variable manner, and displays the stop symbol of the second special symbol determined based on the result of the variable display using an LED or the like. The player is notified by lighting/blinking/turning off the lighting means.

Furthermore, the special figure LED board 9020 can encourage the player to play right-handed by lighting/flashing/turning off the light using lighting means such as LEDs in the right-handed hitting display section 9030. In this embodiment, when the player is encouraged to play right-handed, the lighting means such as an LED in the right-handed display section 9030 lights up (lights up), and when the player is not encouraged to play right-handed, That is, when urging the player to play left-handed, the lighting means such as an LED in the right-handed display section 9030 is turned off. After the symbol is determined, the CPU 103 sends a right-handed display lighting designation command to the performance control CPU 120, and also lights up the right-handed display section 9030, and after the symbol is determined by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. , sends a right-handed hit display light-off designation command to the performance control CPU 120, and turns off the right-handed hit display section 9030. In addition, when the pachinko game machine 1 has a jackpot that is not controlled to a high base after the jackpot game state, the performance control CPU 120 may light the right hit display section 9030 only during the jackpot round. In this case, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot end designation command to the production control CPU 120, and turns off the right hit display section 9030.

Here, hitting right means firing the game ball toward the second downstream path of the first downstream path and the second downstream path through which the game medium can flow down in the game area provided on the game board 2. This is how to operate the ball hitting operation handle 30 (how to hit the ball). The first downstream route is, for example, a route that passes through the left side area of the gaming area, and beyond that there is a first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, while the variable winning ball device This is a route in which the second starting prize opening formed in 6B does not exist. The second downstream route is, for example, a route that passes through the right side area of the gaming area, and beyond that there is a second starting winning opening and a big winning opening (usually a big winning opening) formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. , V big prize opening) exists. When a player fires a game ball toward the first downstream path, the game ball flows toward the first starting prize opening through the first downstream path. When a player launches a game ball toward the second downstream path, the game ball passes through the second downstream path and is directed toward the second starting prize opening or the grand prize opening (normal grand prize opening, V grand prize opening). flows into.

In this embodiment, in a jackpot game after a jackpot occurs, and in a gaming state (time saving state or variable probability state) after a jackpot game, when the player hits right, a The game ball is made to enter the second starting winning hole or the big winning hole, and during this time, the right-handed display section 9030 urges the player to hit the right-handed ball. By hitting right while a display prompting the player to hit right, the player enters the game ball into the second starting prize opening and a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out. The right to the second special figure game can be obtained, or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls can be paid out by entering the game ball into the normal big prize opening. Furthermore, as will be described in detail later, the V-big prize opening will be open during the round of the probability jackpot, but the player can win the V-big prize by hitting right while the display prompting the player to hit right. It is also possible to obtain the right to be controlled in a variable probability state by entering a game ball into the winning hole. For this reason, the player can gain an overall advantage by hitting the ball to the right while a display prompting the player to hit the ball to the right is displayed. Note that, unlike right-handed hitting, operating the ball-hitting operation handle 30 so as to launch the game ball toward the first downstream path (hitting method) is also referred to as left-handed hitting.

As shown in FIG. 4(b), the fourth symbol unit 9050 includes a special symbol 1 memory display section 9051 indicating the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special symbol game, and a special symbol 1 memory display section 9051 indicating the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special symbol game, and 2 special figure 2 memory display section 9052 indicating the number of reserved memories, special figure 1 variable display section 9053 indicating the variable display status or display result of the first special figure, and the variable display status or display result of the second special figure. This game includes a special figure 2 variable display section 9054 that shows , and a right-handed display section 9055 that prompts the player to play right-handed. Each display section can inform the player of the presence or absence of a variable display of special symbols, the number of reservations, right-handed instruction, etc. by lighting/flashing/turning off the lights using lighting means such as LEDs.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display section 9053 determines whether or not the first special symbol in the first special symbol game is being displayed in a variable manner, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined based on the result of the variable display. The player is notified by lighting/flashing/turning off the light using lighting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display section 9054 determines whether or not the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is being variably displayed, and displays the stop symbol of the second special symbol determined based on the result of the variable display using an LED or the like. The player is notified by lighting/blinking/turning off the lighting means.

In the following, the variation display (variable display) of the first special symbol indicates that the variation of the stop symbol of the first special symbol is represented by lighting means such as LED in the special symbol 1 variable display section 9021 and the special symbol 1 variable display section 9053. Also called. In addition, it is also referred to as the variable display of the second special symbol (variable display) that the variation of the stop symbol of the second special symbol is represented by lighting means such as LED in the special symbol 2 variable display section 9022 and the special symbol 2 variable display section 9054. to be called.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when urging the player to play right, the lighting means such as an LED in the right play display section 9055 of the fourth symbol unit 9050 lights up (lights up), prompting the player to play right. If the player is not prompted to play left-handed, that is, if the player is encouraged to play left-handed, the lighting means such as an LED in the right-handed display section 9055 is turned off. After the symbol is determined, the performance control CPU 120 lights the right-handed display section 9055 based on the reception of the right-handed display lighting designation command from the CPU 103, and displays the symbol by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. After the determination is made, the right-handed player display unit 9055 is turned off based on the reception of the right-handed player display extinguishing designation command from the CPU 103. In addition, when the pachinko game machine 1 has a jackpot that is not controlled to a high base after the jackpot game state, the performance control CPU 120 may light the right hit display section 9055 only during the jackpot round. In this case, the performance control CPU 120 turns off the right hit display section 9055 based on receiving the jackpot end designation command from the CPU 103.

FIG. 4(c) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the fourth symbol unit and the game effect lamp. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a before variation pattern command, a after variation pattern command, or a symbol confirmation command, which will be described later, among the production control commands, the fourth symbol unit 9050 and the game effect lamp are activated. , the switching of the lighting mode such as lighting/blinking/lighting out is made different. The front fluctuation pattern command and the rear fluctuation pattern command are commands output from the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100, which will be described later, to the production control CPU 120 of the production control board 12. One set of commands is output from the CPU 103 to the performance control CPU 120. Hereinafter, the pre-variation pattern command and the post-variation pattern command will also be collectively referred to as variation pattern commands.

Specifically, when receiving a variation pattern command from the CPU 103, the performance control CPU 120 changes the lighting mode of the LED (special pattern 1 variable display 9053 and special pattern 2 variable display 9054) in the fourth symbol unit 9050. . For example, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a variable pattern command corresponding to the first special symbol game from the CPU 103, the production control CPU 120 changes the lighting mode of the special symbol 1 variable display 9053 to the first special symbol based on the received variable pattern command. Switching from extinguishing, which indicates a stop, to blinking, which indicates a change in the first special symbol. Furthermore, upon receiving a variable pattern command corresponding to the second special symbol game from the CPU 103, the performance control CPU 120 changes the lighting mode of the special symbol 2 variable display 9054 to the second special symbol based on the received variable pattern command. Switching from extinguishing, which indicates a stop, to blinking, which indicates a change in the second special symbol.

On the other hand, even if the performance control CPU 120 receives a variable pattern command from the CPU 103, the lighting mode of the LED (frame lamp, etc.) in the game effect lamp is not changed, and the lighting mode remains the same as before receiving the variable pattern command. maintain it.

In addition, when receiving the symbol confirmation command from the CPU 103, the production control CPU 120 changes the lighting mode of the LED (special symbol 1 variable display 9053 and special symbol 2 variable display 9054) in the fourth symbol unit 9050. For example, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a symbol confirmation command from the CPU 103 that specifies the end of symbol variation in the first special symbol game, the special symbol 1 variable display 9053 lights up based on the received symbol confirmation command. The mode is switched from blinking indicating the fluctuation of the first special symbol to extinguishing indicating the stoppage of the first special symbol. In addition, when the production control CPU 120 receives a symbol confirmation command from the CPU 103 that specifies the end of symbol variation in the second special symbol game, the special symbol 2 variable display 9054 lights up based on the received symbol confirmation command. The mode is switched from blinking indicating the fluctuation of the second special symbol to extinguishing indicating the stoppage of the second special symbol.

On the other hand, even if the CPU 120 for effect control receives the symbol confirmation command from the CPU 103, the lighting mode of the LED (frame lamp, etc.) in the game effect lamp is not changed, and the lighting mode remains the same as before receiving the symbol confirmation command. maintain it.

In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the mode of the lamp (LED) in the fourth symbol unit 9050 changes in response to receiving the variable pattern command or the symbol confirmation command. On the other hand, in the pachinko game machine 1, the lamp mode is maintained in the game effect lamp 9 before and after receiving the command, regardless of whether the variable pattern command or the symbol confirmation command is received. Note that the pachinko game machine 1 may change the mode of the game effect lamp 9 in response to receiving the variable pattern command. For example, when the gaming state changes from the normal state to the time-saving state after a jackpot, the pachinko gaming machine 1 changes the lighting mode from the normal state to the time-saving state in response to receiving a variable pattern command that starts the time-saving state. The mode of the game effect lamp 9 may be changed to the lighting mode.

FIG. 5 is a diagram for explaining the display mode of the screen on the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. Most of the display area of the image display device 5 displays images such as a variable display of decorative symbols and a reach effect. Specifically, in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (designs indicating numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special patterns are displayed. etc.) are displayed in a variable manner. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern which are executed synchronously is collectively referred to as simply variable display.

At the lower end of the screen of the image display device 5, there is a first pending memory display area 5D in which the first pending memory number can be displayed by the number of circular pending displays, and a second pending memory number can be displayed by the number of circular pending displays. A displayable second pending storage display area 5U and an active display area 5A for displaying a pending display corresponding to the variable display being executed as an active display are provided.

At the upper right end of the screen of the image display device 5, a fourth symbol 5J indicating that a special symbol is being variably displayed is displayed. At the bottom of the fourth symbol 5J, numbers indicating the first pending memory number and the second pending memory number are displayed. As for the numbers indicating the number of reservations, the left side shows the first reservation storage number, and the right side shows the second reservation storage number. At the bottom of the display showing the number of reservations, a small pattern 5M smaller in size than each decorative pattern is displayed. The small designs are the decorative patterns displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative patterns displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C, and the decorative patterns displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R. The symbols corresponding to each of the ornamental symbols are arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction. Moreover, the small pattern 5M is a pattern that is always displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 without being hidden during variable display.

As shown in FIG. 5, a decorative pattern is arranged at the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the small pattern 5M is smaller in size than the decorative pattern at the right end of the screen of the image display device 5. It is located. Therefore, the visibility of the small pattern 5M is lower than the visibility of the decorative pattern.

As shown in FIG. 5(a), the screen of the image display device 5 has a rectangular or substantially rectangular shape, and the game board 2 is fixed so as to cover the edge of the screen of the image display device 5. has been done. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 5(b), when the pachinko game machine 1 is viewed from the front, a part of the screen of the image display device 5 (particularly the edge) is not visible or is difficult to see due to the game board 2. It has become.

<Substrate configuration>
FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining various boards etc. mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 6, the pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a relay board 15, and the like. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, etc. are arranged on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 connected to a power switch 91 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards with conductor patterns on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit boards that are configured to have electrical components mounted on them to achieve specific electrical functions. This concept includes electronic circuit mounting boards.

In the pachinko game machine 1, power from an AC power source such as AC 100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12 through the power board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage into a specific direct current voltage (for example, 12 V DC, 5 V DC, etc.), and the like. We are prepared.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 106.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is, for example, an input port for inputting various signals (detection signals described later), and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the special LED board 9020, etc., solenoid drive signals). It consists of:

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals ( A detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and a switch has been turned on) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

A reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of a control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. Good to have. The power-off signal becomes an OFF state when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and becomes an ON state when a period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is below a predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The output circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81, solenoid 82, or solenoid 83.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 30, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), the game status (for example, the start and end of variable display, the opening status of the big prize opening, the occurrence of a prize, the number of pending memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has the function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions on At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The performance control CPU 120 supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the audio control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the performance image, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9. For this purpose, the LED driver is supplied with brightness data (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

As will be described in detail later, each game effect lamp has a game effect lamp LED board on which an LED (lamp) and an LED driver that supplies current to the LED are mounted. The LED driver lights/blinks/extinguishes the game effect lamp 9 by adjusting the current to each LED (lamp) included in the game effect lamp 9 based on the brightness data from the performance control CPU 120. In this way, the performance control CPU 120 controls lighting/blinking/extinguishing of the game effect lamp 9.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and transmits various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, brightness data signal). It consists of an output port for

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12 and the audio control board 13, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

The fourth symbol unit 9050 is connected to the production control board 12, and is capable of lighting (blinking) each display section under the control of the production control CPU 120.

<Outline of game progress>
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the above-described configuration, the game progresses as follows. When a player rotates a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, a game ball is launched toward a game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passage gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (symbol per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol losing". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting prize opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game is started by the special figure 1 variable display section 9021 of the special figure LED board 9020.

When the game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special figure game is started by the special figure 2 variable display section 9022 of the special figure LED board 9020.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting winning hole (winning) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when the jackpot game state described below is being controlled (a starting winning has occurred, but the starting winning is based on the starting winning). If the special figure game cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4) is reached.

In the special figure game, the combination of lighting modes of the plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display section 9021 and the special figure 2 variable display section 9022 of the special figure LED board 9020 is a specific special symbol (jackpot symbol, described later). The actual pattern differs depending on the type of jackpot.) When a combination of lighting modes corresponding to the above is achieved, a "jackpot" is achieved. In addition, in the combination of lighting modes of a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display section 9021 and the special figure 2 variable display section 9022 of the special figure LED board 9020, the lighting mode corresponding to a specific special symbol (jackpot symbol) is also referred to as a "specific display result." In addition, the combination of lighting modes of the plurality of LEDs provided in the special pattern 1 variable display section 9021 and the special pattern 2 variable display section 9022 of the special pattern LED board 9020 corresponds to a special pattern (losing pattern) that is different from the jackpot pattern. When a combination of lighting modes is reached, the result is a "lose". In addition, it corresponds to a special symbol (losing symbol) different from the jackpot symbol in the combination of lighting modes of multiple LEDs provided in the special symbol 1 variable display section 9021 and special symbol 2 variable display section 9022 of the special symbol LED board 9020. This lighting mode is also referred to as a "missing display result."

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player. It should be noted that the advantageous state may be controlled to be a small winning game state. Here, a small win is a win that is allowed up to a smaller number of openings of the big winning opening than a jackpot. Note that when the small winning gaming state ends, the gaming state does not change. That is, before and after the small winning gaming state, there is no transition from the variable probability state to the normal state or from the normal state to the variable probability state. Further, similar to the jackpot type, a small hit type may also be provided for the "small hit".

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is determined by either the timing at which a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses, or the timing until the number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). It will continue until the earliest possible time. This predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (10 or 7 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

In addition, a jackpot type is set for "jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and upper limit opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc.), and set the jackpot type accordingly. has been done. As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which hardly any prize balls can be obtained.

After the jackpot gaming state ends, the game may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state depending on the type of jackpot.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of a common figure (the period during which a common figure changes) is shorter than in the normal state, and the probability of hitting a "normal figure" in the common figure game is improved compared to the normal state. Accordingly, control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-saving number-cutting, variable number-cutting probability, etc.).

A normal state is a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", is set to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

Note that the gaming state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, control may be performed to change the probability state after the jackpot game state.

In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. Note that the presentation is performed by displaying various presentation images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting of the game effect lamp 9, etc. The effect may be performed by turning off the lights, moving the movable body 32, or using any effect device including some or all of these.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern game. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach. Further, the super reach includes the first half of the super reach that ends with the first half of the super reach, the second half of the super reach that develops from the first half of the super reach, and the final reach that develops from the first half of the super reach. In the present embodiment, the jackpot reliability is higher when the display result of the variable display is derived in the first half of the super reach than when the display result of the variable display is derived during the normal reach. Moreover, the jackpot reliability is higher when the display result of the variable display is derived in the second half of the super reach than when the display result of the variable display is derived in the first half of the super reach. Moreover, the jackpot reliability is higher when the display result of the variable display is derived in the final reach than when the display result of the variable display is derived in the latter half of the super reach. In addition, in the following, "super reach" is referred to as "SP reach", "first half of super reach" is "SP first half (SP first half reach)", "second half of super reach" is "SP second half (SP second half reach)", " "Final reach" is also referred to as "SP final (SP final reach)".

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a "jackpot" (the above-mentioned specific display result), a predetermined display result is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as a display result of the variable display of decorative symbols. A determined decorative pattern that is a jackpot combination is derived (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative patterns (for example, "7", etc.) will be stopped and displayed, and the state will be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed. As the promotion performance, for example, a re-lottery performance may be performed to incite whether or not to promote to a probability variable symbol after temporarily stopping a non-probability variable symbol (normal symbol) as a jackpot display result. Further, a round promotion effect may be executed during the jackpot game state in which a non-probable variable jackpot is promoted to a certain variable jackpot.

If the display result of the special figure game is a combination of lighting modes corresponding to "losing" (the above-mentioned losing display result), the variable display mode of the decorative symbol will not be the reach mode, but the variable display mode of the decorative symbol will be changed. As a display result, a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also referred to as a "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns may become a "non-reach loss"). In addition, if the display result is a "lose", after the variable display mode of the decorative design becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss") is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The fixed decorative pattern (also referred to as "decorative pattern") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "reach loss").

The performances that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

<Various tables regarding jackpots>
Various tables related to jackpots will be explained with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8.

[Win type]
FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining the winning types. As shown in FIG. 7, in the hit type table, for each type of hit in the jackpot, the jackpot probability after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the base after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and the number of openings in the jackpot ( number of rounds) is shown.

Specifically, as the types of jackpots, normal jackpots 1 and 2 and variable probability jackpots 1 to 9 are provided. Note that, hereinafter, each round may be denoted by "R". For example, the first round is also called the 1R, and the second round is also called the 2R.

Normal jackpot 1 is a jackpot that is controlled to a low probability state and a high base state after the end of three rounds of jackpot gaming states. In the normal jackpot 1, such a low certainty high base state continues until the variable display (special symbol variation) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times).

Normal jackpot 2 is a jackpot that is controlled to a low probability state and a high base state after the completion of three rounds of jackpot gaming states. In the normal jackpot 2, such a low certainty high base state continues until the variable display (special symbol variation) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

Variable probability jackpots 1 to 5 are jackpots that are controlled to be in a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the three rounds of jackpot game states. In the probability variable jackpot 1, such a high probability high base state continues until the variable display (special symbol variation) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

Probable variable jackpot 6 is a jackpot that is controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the 5-round jackpot game state. In the probability variable jackpot 6, such a high probability high base state continues until the variable display (special symbol variation) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

Probable variable jackpot 7 is a jackpot that is controlled to be in a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the 7th round jackpot game state. In the probability variable jackpot 7, such a high probability high base state continues until the variable display (special symbol variation) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

Variable probability jackpots 8 and 9 are jackpots that are controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the 10-round jackpot game state. In probability variable jackpots 8 and 9, such a high probability high base state continues until the variable display (special symbol variation) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

[Random numbers]
FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining each random number. As shown in FIG. 8, each random number is used as follows. Specifically, Random 1 is a random counter for determining whether or not to win a jackpot. Random 1, for example, is updated by adding 1 from 1 to the upper limit of 65536, and then is updated from 1 again. Random 2 is a random counter (for jackpot type determination) that determines the jackpot type (type).

Random 3 and Random 4 are random counters (for determining a post-variation pattern) that determine a variation pattern (hereinafter referred to as a post-variation pattern) (variation time) corresponding to a post-variation among the variation patterns. The later variation refers to the variation in the latter half of the variation of the special symbol. Note that Random 3 is a random counter that determines the post-fluctuation pattern that corresponds to a loss.For example, it is updated by 1, and then added and updated from 1 to its upper limit of 65519, and then added again from 1. Updated. Random 4 is a random counter that determines a post-variation pattern corresponding to the winning time, and for example, is incremented and updated from 1 to 239, which is the upper limit, and then added and updated again from 1.

Random 5 is a random counter (for determining the previous variation pattern) that determines a variation pattern (hereinafter referred to as the previous variation pattern) (variation time) corresponding to the previous variation among the variation patterns. The front fluctuation refers to the fluctuation in the first half of the fluctuation of the special symbol. Random 5, for example, is updated by adding 1 from 1 until it reaches the upper limit of 251, and then is updated again from 1. Random 6 is a random counter (for normal symbol hit determination) that determines whether or not to generate a hit based on the normal symbol. Random 6, for example, is updated by adding 1 from 1 to the upper limit of 201, and then is updated again from 1.

In this embodiment, it is determined based on the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random 1) whether or not the control is to be controlled to a jackpot gaming state which is an advantageous state for the player. Then, out of the plurality of types of jackpots, which jackpot is to be determined is determined based on the value of the jackpot type determination random number (random 2). At this time, the jackpot symbol may also be determined based on the value of Random 2.

In addition, first, the post-variation pattern is determined according to the hit or loss using the random numbers for determining the post-variation pattern (Random 3, 4), and the pre-variation pattern is determined using the random number for determining the pre-variation pattern (Random 5). be done. In this manner, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process.

[Jackpot determination table, jackpot type determination table]
FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot determination table and the jackpot type determination table. These tables are stored in the ROM 101.

FIG. 9(a) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with random 1 is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal (non-probability variable) jackpot determination table that is used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability variable state, that is, a non-probability variable state), and a probability variable jackpot determination table that is used in a probability variable state.

In the normal time jackpot determination table, jackpot determination values are set as many as the number of determination values listed in the upper column of FIG. 9(a), and in the variable probability jackpot determination table, the jackpot determination values are set in the lower column of FIG. 9(a). Jackpot determination values are set for the number of determination values listed in . The jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table when the probability is variable is the same as the jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table during normal times, by adding the jackpot judgment value unique to the jackpot judgment value when the probability is variable. A larger number of jackpot judgment values than the jackpot judgment table are set. As a result, in the variable probability state, a jackpot is determined with a higher probability than in the normal state.

The CPU 103 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 104 at a predetermined time and compares the extracted value with the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random 1). If it matches the jackpot determination value, it is determined that the special symbol will be a jackpot (normal jackpot or probability variable jackpot). Note that FIG. 9(a) shows the probability (proportion) of hitting the jackpot or the probability (proportion) of losing.

FIGS. 9(b) and 9(c) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table. FIG. 9(b) is a first special pattern jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is determined based on the first special symbol. FIG. 9(c) is a second special pattern jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is determined based on the second special symbol.

The first special figure jackpot type determination table in FIG. 9(b) contains numerical values that are compared with the random 2 value for determining the jackpot type, and correspond to normal jackpots 1 and 2 and probability variable jackpots 1 to 4. Judgment values are set for the number of judgment values that have been set. For example, as shown in FIG. 9(b), for the first special figure, the normal jackpot 1 is assigned the value of 25 random 2s out of 100 random 2s, and the normal jackpot 2 is assigned the value of 25 random 2s out of 100 random 2s. 25 random 2 values out of 1 are assigned, probability variable jackpot 1 is assigned 5 random 2 values out of 100 random 2s, and probability variable jackpot 2 is assigned 37 out of 100 random 2 values. random 2 values are assigned, probability variable jackpot 3 is assigned 4 random 2 values out of 100 random 2s, and probability variable jackpot 4 is assigned 4 random 2 values out of 100 random 2s. is assigned a value of

In the second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 9(c), judgment values are set as many as the number of judgment values corresponding to each of probability variable jackpots 5 to 9, which are numerical values to be compared with the value of random 2. has been done. For example, as shown in FIG. 9(c), for the second special figure, the probability variable jackpot 5 is assigned the value of 10 random 2s out of 100 random 2s, and the probability variable jackpot 6 is assigned the value of 10 random 2s. 5 random 2 values out of 100 random 2's are assigned, probability variable jackpot 7 is assigned 5 random 2 values out of 100 random 2's, and probability variable jackpot 8 is assigned 70 random 2 values out of 100 random 2's. 10 random 2 values out of 100 random 2 values are assigned to probability variable jackpot 9.

Using such various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 103 determines, as the jackpot type, the type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value with which the value of Random 2 matches, and determines, as the jackpot symbol, the type corresponding to the jackpot type judgment value with which the value of Random 2 matches. Determine the jackpot symbol. Thereby, the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot type are determined at the same time.

<Production control command>
FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of the production control command. The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, which is the main side control board, transmits various performance control commands to the performance control CPU 120 depending on the game control state. The production control command has, for example, a two-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). Note that the command format shown in FIG. 10 is an example, and other command formats may be used. In addition, although "(H)" indicates a hexadecimal number in the following, it may be omitted in this specification.

Command 80XX(H) is a variation pattern that specifies a variation pattern corresponding to a previous variation (previous variation pattern) among variation patterns of decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to variable display of special symbols. This is a command (XX corresponds to the number of the previous fluctuation pattern). The front variation on the sub side refers to the variation in the first half of the variation in the decorative pattern that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. When a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of types of previous variation patterns, there is a previous variation pattern command corresponding to each of the previous variation patterns specified by the number.

Command 84XX(H) is a variation pattern that specifies a variation pattern corresponding to a later variation (later variation pattern) among the variation patterns of decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols. This is a command (XX corresponds to the number of the post-variation pattern). The after variation on the sub-side refers to the variation in the latter half of the variation of the decorative symbol variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. When a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of types of post-fluctuation patterns, there is a post-fluctuation pattern command corresponding to each post-fluctuation pattern specified by the number.

The pre-variation pattern command and the post-variation pattern command are transmitted as a set of two commands from the CPU 103 to the performance control CPU 120. The production control CPU 120 cannot specify a variation pattern by only receiving either one of the previous variation pattern command and the subsequent variation pattern command, but receives both the previous variation pattern command and the subsequent variation pattern command. By doing so, it is possible to identify fluctuation patterns.

Command 8101 (H) is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display of the first special figure. Command 8102 (H) is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display of the second special figure. When the performance control CPU 101 receives the command 8101 (H) or the command 8102 (H), it controls the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols.

Command 8C01 (H) is a display result 1 designation command (loss designation command) indicating that the game has been determined to be a loss. Command 8C02 (H) is a display result 2 designation command (normal jackpot 1 designation command) indicating that the normal jackpot 1 has been determined. Command 8C03 (H) is a display result 3 designation command (normal jackpot 2 designation command) indicating that the normal jackpot 2 has been determined. Command 8C04 (H) is a display result 4 designation command (probability variable jackpot 1 designation command) indicating that the probability variable jackpot 1 has been determined. Command 8C05 (H) is a display result 5 designation command (probability variable jackpot 2 designation command) indicating that the probability variable jackpot 2 has been determined. Command 8C06 (H) is a display result 6 designation command (probability variable jackpot 3 designation command) indicating that the probability variable jackpot 3 has been determined. Command 8C07 (H) is a display result 7 designation command (probability variable jackpot 4 designation command) indicating that the probability variable jackpot 4 has been determined. Command 8C08 (H) is a display result 8 designation command (probability variable jackpot 5 designation command) indicating that the probability variable jackpot 5 has been determined. Command 8C09 (H) is a display result 9 designation command (probability variable jackpot 6 designation command) indicating that the probability variable jackpot 6 has been determined. Command 8C10(H) is a display result 10 designation command (probability variable jackpot 7 designation command) indicating that the probability variable jackpot 7 has been determined. Command 8C11 (H) is a display result 11 designation command (probability variable jackpot 8 designation command) indicating that the probability variable jackpot 8 has been determined. Command 8C12 (H) is a display result 12 designation command (probability variable jackpot 9 designation command) indicating that the probability variable jackpot 9 has been determined. Each of the loss specification command, the normal jackpot 1 and 2 specification commands, and the probability variable jackpot 1 to 9 specification commands, or these collectively are also referred to as 8C series commands.

Command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating to start variable display of the first special symbol. Command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating to start variable display of the second special symbol. Each of the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command, or these collectively, are also referred to as 8D series commands. Command 8F00 (H) is a symbol confirmation designation command that designates ending the variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Command 9000 (H) is an initialization designation command that designates initialization (designates displaying the initial screen when the power is turned on) to be sent when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is a power outage recovery designation command that is sent when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed and designates recovery from a power outage (specifies displaying a power outage recovery screen). Command 9500 (H) is a normal state designation command that designates the background of the normal state. Command 9501 (H) is a time-saving state designation command that designates the background of the time-saving state. Command 9502 (H) is a variable probability state designation command that specifies the background of the variable probability state. Each of the normal state designation command, time-saving state designation command, and variable probability state designation command, or these commands collectively, are also referred to as 95-series commands or background designation commands.

Command 9F00(H) is a customer waiting demonstration designation command that specifies transition to a customer waiting demonstration display. The performance control CPU 120 determines that there is currently no reservation after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command. Then, the production control CPU 120 causes the demonstration video to be displayed on the image display device 5 30 seconds after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command. Note that the performance control CPU 120 lights up the game effect lamp 9 in a demonstration lamp mode 30 seconds after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command. Note that the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 for demonstration is more lively (higher brightness, more flashing modes, rainbow lighting, etc.) than the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 in the normal state. Thereby, the appeal of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be shown to the players. In addition, in the demonstration display while waiting for a customer, a background in a normal state (hereinafter also referred to as a normal background) is displayed, and decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. Further, in the demonstration display while waiting for a customer, the title of the gaming machine 1 (for example, "POWER FUL II") may be displayed, or an introductory image (still image or video) of a part of the performance may be displayed.

Command A001 (H) is a jackpot start 1 designation command that specifies the start of normal jackpot 1. Command A002 (H) is a jackpot start 2 designation command that designates the start of normal jackpot 2. Command A003 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 3 designation command that specifies the start of probability variable jackpot 1. Command A004 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 4 designation command that specifies the start of probability variable jackpot 2. Command A005 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 5 designation command that specifies the start of probability variable jackpot 3. Command A006 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 6 designation command that specifies the start of probability variable jackpot 4. Command A007 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 7 designation command that specifies the start of probability variable jackpot 5. Command A008 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 8 designation command that specifies the start of probability variable jackpot 6. Command A009 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 9 designation command that specifies the start of probability variable jackpot 7. Command A010 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 10 designation command that specifies the start of probability variable jackpot 8. Command A011 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 11 designation command that specifies the start of probability variable jackpot 9. Each of the jackpot start specification commands 1 to 11 or these collectively are also referred to as A0 series commands.

A1XX(H) is a command indicating that the big winning hole is being opened for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. The grand prize opening designation command is also referred to as the A1 series command. A2XX(H) is a specified command after the opening of the grand prize opening indicating the closing of the grand prize opening of the number (round) indicated by XX. The command specified after opening the big prize opening is also referred to as the A2 series command.

Command A301 (H) is a jackpot end 1 designation command that designates the end of normal jackpot 1. Command A302 (H) is a jackpot end 2 designation command that designates the end of normal jackpot 2. Command A303 (H) is a jackpot end 3 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 1. Command A304 (H) is a jackpot end 4 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 2. Command A305 (H) is a jackpot end 5 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 3. Command A306 (H) is a jackpot end 6 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 4. Command A307 (H) is a jackpot end 7 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 5. Command A308 (H) is a jackpot end 8 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 6. Command A309 (H) is a jackpot end 9 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 7. Command A310 (H) is a jackpot end 10 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 8. Command A311 (H) is a jackpot end 11 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 9. Each of the jackpot end 1 to 11 designation commands or these collectively are also referred to as A3 series commands.

Command AD00(H) is a probability change determination device passage designation command that designates that a V winning has occurred. The probability change determination device passing designation command is a command that is sent when the game ball that has passed through the V big winning opening enters the V winning area and is detected by the V winning switch 24.

Command B100 (H) is a first starting winning designation command that specifies that there is a first starting winning. Command B200 (H) is a second starting winning designation command that specifies that there is a second starting winning.

Command C1XX(H) is a first pending storage number designation command that specifies that the first pending storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The first pending storage number designation command is also referred to as a C1 series command. Command C2XX(H) is a second pending storage designation command that specifies that the second pending storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The second pending storage number designation command is also referred to as a C2-based command.

Command C4XX (H) and command C6XX (H) display the contents of the winning determination results such as jackpot determination, jackpot type determination, fluctuation pattern type determination, etc. at the time of starting winning into the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. This is the production control command shown. Among these, the command C4XX(H) is a symbol designation command that indicates whether or not it will be a jackpot among the winning determination results and the determination result of the type of jackpot.

C7XX(H) is a grand prize opening designation command that indicates passage of the game ball to the grand prize opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

A command in which the MODE is FD (H) and the 4th bit of EXT is 0 is a right-handed player display light-off designation command indicating that the right-handed player display is turned off. A command in which the MODE data is FD (H) and the 4th bit of the EXT data is 1 is a right-handed hitting display lighting designation command indicating lighting of the right-handed hitting display. In this embodiment, the right-handed display lighting designation command is also referred to as an FD-related command.

The game control microcomputer 100 determines, at the time of starting winning, whether or not there will be a jackpot, the type of jackpot, and which judgment value range the value of the random number for determining the type of variation pattern falls within. Then, a value that specifies a jackpot and a value that specifies the type of jackpot are set in the EXT data of the symbol designation command, and control is performed to transmit them to the performance control CPU 120. Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a value specifying the range of the determination value as a determination result of the fluctuation pattern type in the EXT data of the fluctuation type command, and performs control to send it to the performance control CPU 120. The production control CPU 120 can recognize whether the display result is a jackpot or not and the type of jackpot based on the value set in the symbol designation command, and can also recognize the variation pattern type based on the variation type command. .

<Variation pattern>
The contents of the variation pattern, determination of the variation pattern, etc. will be explained with reference to FIGS. 11 to 17.

In this embodiment, a plurality of types of variation patterns are set by the main game control microcomputer 100. Each variation pattern is managed by a main variation number, and is composed of a combination of a previous variation pattern, which is a variation pattern corresponding to the previous variation, and a subsequent variation pattern, which corresponds to the subsequent variation, and the combination has different contents. It is now included. Note that the previous variation pattern corresponds to the previous variation pattern command (80XX(H)) explained using FIG. 10, and the after variation pattern corresponds to the after variation pattern command (84XX(H)) explained using FIG. corresponds to

[Main side previous fluctuation pattern]
FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a pre-variation pattern on the main side. Among the plurality of types of previous variation patterns each assigned a previous variation number, the previous variation number 1 is a previous variation pattern command (8000 (H)) that specifies a normal variation (for example, a variation of a decorative pattern for 13 seconds). It is. The previous variation number 2 is a previous variation pattern command (8001(H)) that specifies a shortened variation (for example, a variation of a decorative pattern over 7 seconds). The pre-variation number 3 is a pre-variation pattern command (8002(H)) that specifies a super-shortened variation (for example, a variation of a decorative pattern over 3 seconds).

Pre-variation number 4 is a pre-variation pattern command (8003(H)) that specifies normal reach (normal or SP first half) (reach that ends with normal reach or SP first half reach after entering the reach mode). Pre-variation number 5 is a pre-variation pattern command (8004(H)) that specifies normal reach (SP late development) (a reach that develops into SP latter half reach after becoming a reach mode). Pre-variation number 6 is a pre-variation pattern command (8005(H)) that specifies a normal reach (final reach development) (a reach that develops into a final reach after becoming a reach mode).

Pre-variation number 7 is a pre-variation pattern command (8006(H)) that specifies that a normal reach (normal or SP first half) is executed after one pseudo variation. Pseudo-variation means that after the variable display (variable display) of a decorative pattern starts until the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed, the variable display is temporarily stopped and then restarted. This is a variable display (variable display). A performance that repeats such pseudo fluctuations is also called a pseudo-run. By executing the pseudo series, a variable display based on one suspended memory can be shown to the player as if it were a plurality of pseudo variable displays. Note that a variable display that restarts after being temporarily stopped is also referred to as a "re-variable display." Pre-variation number 8 is a pre-variation pattern command (8007(H)) that specifies to execute a normal reach (SP second half development) after one pseudo variation. Pre-variation number 9 is a pre-variation pattern command (8008(H)) that specifies normal reach (final reach development) after one pseudo variation.

The pre-variation number 10 is a pre-variation pattern command (8009(H)) that specifies to execute the normal reach (normal or SP first half) after performing the pseudo variation twice. Pre-variation number 11 is a pre-variation pattern command (800A(H)) that specifies that a normal reach (SP second half development) is to be executed after pseudo-variation is performed twice. Pre-variation number 12 is a pre-variation pattern command (800B(H)) that specifies normal reach (final reach development) after performing pseudo variation twice.

A variation time is specified for each of the previous variation patterns, and an animation (moving picture) is displayed on the image display device 5 over each variation time. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, it takes approximately 33.3 msec for one still image (referred to as a frame) constituting a moving image. For example, in the case of patterns with previous variation numbers 7 to 9, 41500 mse is set as the variation time, and the number of frames is approximately 1246. Furthermore, in the case of patterns with previous variation numbers 10 to 12, 62000 mse is set as the variation time, and the number of frames is approximately 1861.

[Main side post-variation pattern]
FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining an example of a post-variation pattern on the main side. Among the plurality of types of post-fluctuation patterns to which post-fluctuation numbers are assigned, post-fluctuation number 1 is a post-fluctuation pattern command (8400(H)) that specifies a 13-second variation. Post-variation number 2 is a post-variation pattern command (8401(H)) that specifies a 7-second variation. Post-variation number 3 is a post-variation pattern command (8402(H)) that specifies a 3-second variation. Post-variation number 4 is a post-variation pattern command (8403(H)) that designates execution of a pseudo continuous sequence. Pseudo-sequence is a performance that pretends to execute a pseudo-sequence but ends up not executing the pseudo-sequence.

Post-variation number 5 is a post-variation pattern command (8404(H)) that specifies a normal reach (loss) (a variation of a decorative pattern that becomes a reach mode but becomes a loss mode without developing into an SP reach). Post-variation number 6 is a post-variation pattern command (8405 (H)) that specifies the first half of SP (loss) (a variation of decorative symbols that develops into SP reach but becomes a loss mode in the first half of SP reach). Post-variation number 7 is a post-variation pattern command (8406 (H)) that specifies the second half of SP (loss) (a variation of decorative symbols that develops in the second half of SP reach but becomes a loss mode in the second half of SP reach). Post-variation number 8 is a post-variation pattern command (8407(H)) that specifies the final reach (loss) (a variation of the decorative pattern that develops into the final reach but becomes a loss mode in the final reach).

Post-variation number 9 is a post-variation pattern command (8408(H)) that specifies normal reach (win) (variation of decorative symbols that becomes a reach mode and becomes a win mode). Post-variation number 10 is a post-variation pattern command (8409(H)) that specifies the first half of SP (win) (the variation of the decorative symbol that develops into SP reach and becomes a winning mode in the first half of SP reach). Post-variation number 11 is a post-variation pattern command (840A(H)) that specifies the second half of SP (win) (the variation of the decorative symbol that develops in the second half of SP reach and becomes a winning mode in the second half of SP reach). Post-variation number 12 is a post-variation pattern command (840B(H)) that specifies the final reach (win) (the variation of the decorative symbol that develops into the final reach and becomes a winning mode at the final reach).

[Determination of post-change pattern]
The post-change pattern is determined using a different random counter depending on whether the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot or a loss in the jackpot determination. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the post-variation pattern determination table at the time of a loss. As shown in FIG. 13, if the jackpot determination is determined to be a loss, a post-variation pattern is determined using Random 3 explained in FIG. Furthermore, if it is determined that the jackpot is a loss in the jackpot determination, the post-variation pattern is determined using a different number of determination values depending on the number of retained memories after consumption, and the determined post-variation number also differs.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13(a), when the number of retained memories after digestion is 0, one of the post-change patterns from post-change numbers 1, 4, 5 to 8 is determined, A different number of determination values is provided for each of the post-fluctuation patterns. Note that the probability of being determined to be one of post variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post variation numbers 6 to 8) is approximately 1/102.

When the number of retained memories after digestion is one, one of the post-fluctuation patterns is determined from post-fluctuation numbers 1, 4, and 5 to 8, and a different number of judgment values is provided for each post-fluctuation pattern. ing. Note that the probability of being determined to be one of post variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post variation numbers 6 to 8) is approximately 1/102.

When the number of retained memories after digestion is two, one of the post-fluctuation patterns is determined from post-fluctuation numbers 2, 4, and 5 to 8, and a different number of judgment values is provided for each post-fluctuation pattern. ing. Note that the probability of being determined to be one of post variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post variation numbers 6 to 8) is approximately 1/102.

When the number of retained memories after digestion is three, one of the post-variation patterns is determined from post-variation numbers 3, 4, and 5 to 8, and a different number of judgment values is provided for each post-variation pattern. ing. Note that the probability of being determined to be one of post variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post variation numbers 6 to 8) is approximately 1/102.

In this way, the post-fluctuation pattern is determined using a different number of judgment values depending on the number of retained memories after consumption, and furthermore, the post-fluctuation number is determined using a different number of judgment values depending on the number of retained memories after consumption. Therefore, the type of variation pattern changes depending on the number of remaining reserved memories, thereby making it possible to add variety to the game and improve the interest of the game.

FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining a post-change pattern determination table at the time of a jackpot. As shown in FIG. 14, when a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination, a post-variation pattern is determined using Random 4 explained in FIG. Further, when a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination, a post-variation pattern is determined using different numbers of judgment values depending on the type of jackpot.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14(a), if it is determined to be a normal jackpot 1 or 2, a definite variable jackpot 1, 2, or 5 to 8, then any one of the post variation numbers 9 to 12 is determined. Post-fluctuation patterns are determined, and a different number of determination values is provided for each post-fluctuation pattern. Note that the probability of being determined to be one of the post variation numbers 10 to 12 that develops into SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post variation numbers 10 to 12) is approximately 1/1.1.

When it is determined to be either a probability change jackpot 3 or 9, one of the after fluctuation patterns is determined from among the after fluctuation numbers 9 to 12, and a different number of judgment values is provided for each of the after fluctuation patterns. . Note that the probability of being determined to be one of the post variation numbers 10 to 12 that develops into SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post variation numbers 10 to 12) is approximately 1/1.1.

When the probability variable jackpot is determined to be 4, one of the later variation patterns is determined from among the later variation numbers 9 to 12, and a different number of determination values is provided for each of the later variation patterns. Note that the probability of being determined to be one of the post variation numbers 10 to 12 that develops into SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post variation numbers 10 to 12) is approximately 1/1.1.

In this way, since the post-fluctuation pattern is determined using a different number of judgment values depending on the type of jackpot, the type of fluctuation pattern changes depending on the type of jackpot, and this makes it possible to add variety to the game. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, as shown in Figure 13, the probability of being determined to be one of the fluctuation numbers 6 to 8 after developing to SP reach or final reach is about 1/102 in the case of a loss, whereas Since the time is higher than that, approximately 1/1.1, it is possible for the player to expect that a jackpot will occur if the SP reach or final reach develops.

[Judgment of previous fluctuation pattern]
FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining the previous variation pattern determination table. The pre-fluctuation pattern is determined using the number of random 5 determination values that differ depending on the type of the pre-determined post-fluctuation pattern. Further, the pre-variation number to be determined also differs depending on the type of the post-variation pattern previously determined.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15(a), when the subsequent variation pattern with the subsequent variation number 1 is determined, the previous variation pattern with the previous variation number 1 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15(b), when the subsequent variation pattern with the subsequent variation number 2 is determined, the previous variation pattern with the previous variation number 2 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15(c), when the post-variation pattern with post-variation number 3 is determined, the pre-variation pattern with pre-variation number 3 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15(d), when the post-variation pattern with post-variation number 4 is determined, the pre-variation pattern with pre-variation number 1 is determined.

As shown in FIG. 15(e), when the subsequent variation pattern with the subsequent variation numbers 5 and 9 is determined, the previous variation pattern with the previous variation numbers 4 and 7 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15(f), when any of the post-variation patterns with post-variation numbers 6 and 10 is determined, the previous variation pattern with pre-variation numbers 4, 7, and 10 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15(g), when the post-variation pattern with post-variation number 7 is determined, the pre-variation pattern with pre-variation numbers 5, 8, or 11 is determined.

As shown in FIG. 15(h), when the post-variation pattern with post-variation number 11 is determined, the pre-variation pattern with any of pre-variation numbers 5, 8, and 11 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15(i), when the after fluctuation pattern with the after fluctuation number 8 is determined, the previous fluctuation pattern with any of the previous fluctuation numbers 6, 9, and 12 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15(j), when the subsequent variation pattern with the subsequent variation number 12 is determined, the previous variation pattern with any of the previous variation numbers 6, 9, and 12 is determined.

[Total fluctuation pattern]
FIG. 16 is a diagram for explaining an example of a total variation pattern on the main side. When the post-variation pattern and the pre-variation pattern are determined as explained in FIGS. 13 to 15, one of the variation patterns with main variation numbers 1 to 26 as shown in FIG. 16 will be obtained.

FIG. 17 is a diagram for explaining an example of a lottery of production patterns on the sub side. As shown in FIG. 17, the performance control CPU 120 on the sub side determines the performance pattern by lottery based on the variable pattern command received from the CPU 103 on the main side.

For example, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a variation pattern command corresponding to any of the main variation numbers 7 to 9 from the CPU 103, the production control CPU 120 performs a production of a loss pattern of SP first half reach A, which will be described later, among multiple types of reach production, or , SP first half reach B loss pattern performance is decided. When the performance control CPU 120 receives a variation pattern command corresponding to any of the main variation numbers 18 to 20 from the CPU 103, the production control CPU 120 performs the SP first half reach A winning pattern production, which will be described later, among the multiple types of reach production, or the SP Decide on one of the winning patterns of the first half reach B.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives a variation pattern command corresponding to any of the main variation numbers 10 to 12 from the CPU 103, the production control CPU 120 performs a production of a loss pattern of SP second half reach A, which will be described later, among multiple types of reach production, or SP Decide on one of the second half reach B losing pattern productions. When the effect control CPU 120 receives a variation pattern command corresponding to any of the main variation numbers 21 to 23 from the CPU 103, the production control CPU 120 performs a SP second half reach A winning pattern production, which will be described later, among multiple types of reach production, or SP Decide on one of the winning patterns of the second half reach B.

<Operation>
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

[Main operations of main board 11]
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained.

(Special design process processing)
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 18, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Subsequently, the CPU 103 performs necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. For example, if the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed when power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, a clear signal in an on state is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102, which serves as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (Y in step S3), the CPU 103 executes the setting confirmation process (step S5) after executing the recovery process (step S4). The CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 through the recovery process in step S4. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the gaming state can be restored to the state it was in when the power supply was stopped. For example, if the special symbols are changing, the special It is sufficient if the fluctuation of the symbols can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (N in step S3), the CPU 103 executes the initialization process (step S6) and then executes the setting change process (step S7). The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether predetermined setting confirmation conditions are satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including that the clear signal is in the OFF state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation conditions are satisfied in the setting confirmation process in step S5, the setting confirmation state is reached in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. When the game is in the stopped state, the firing of the game ball by operating the ball-hitting operation handle 30, the detection of the game ball by various switches, etc. are stopped, and losing symbols etc. are stopped and displayed, and a game stopping state different from the losing symbol is displayed. The display may be controlled so that a display corresponding to the display is performed. When the setting confirmation state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, the CPU 103 determines whether a predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the on state.

If the setting change conditions are satisfied in the setting change process in step S7, the setting change state is entered in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. A start change command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed every time an operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected. Thereafter, the CPU 103 stores (updates and stores) the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 in the backup area of the RAM 102 based on the fact that the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by an attendant at the game parlor or the like. The display monitor 29 is turned off. When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be placed in the game stop state, similar to when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

On the production control board 12 side, when receiving the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may be caused to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on, for example, by pressing a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, and if the clear switch 92 is on, the initialization process in step S6 and The setting change process in step S7 is executed and control becomes possible in the setting change state, and if the clear switch 92 is off, the setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed along with the recovery process in step S4 and control becomes possible in the setting confirmation state. . When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, if the clear switch 92 is on, the initialization process in step S6 is executed. Although it is executed, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch 92 is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the CPU 103 sets the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and permits the interrupt. (Step S10). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

(Timer interrupt processing for game control)
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an example of game control timer interrupt processing. When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, the CPU 103 performs an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by executing a predetermined main-side error process, and can generate a warning if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, the CPU 103 outputs, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1. Data such as information (information indicating the number of starting winnings, etc.), probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability change state, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, the CPU 103 executes a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side using software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the jackpot game state, control of the game state, and the like.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The game is executed by driving the game card display section 9026, and the number of pending game cards is displayed by lighting the game card memory display section 9025.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing for when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

(Special design process processing)
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. The special symbol process process is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, processing for pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to the production control board 12 to send a production control command for specifying judgment results such as the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and pre-reading judgment. be exposed. The performance control command at the time of start winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 19 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S117 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S117) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, the display result determines whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" and if it is a "jackpot", the jackpot type. is determined (predetermined) before it is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also referred to as special pattern 2 priority consumption). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the production control board 12. In the production control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns using random values for determining the fluctuation pattern, based on the pre-determined result of whether or not the displayed result is a "jackpot". It is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (whether or not there is reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process for making settings to vary the special symbol in the special symbol 1 variable display section 9021 and special symbol 2 variable display section 9022, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to vary. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". This special symbol stopping process involves stopping the variation of the special symbols in the special symbol 1 variable display section 9021 and the special symbol 2 variable display section 9022, and stopping and displaying (deriving) the confirmed special symbol that will be the display result of the special symbol. Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". Moreover, when the display result is "lost", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "lose", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the variable probability state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot release post-processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of executions of the round with the jackpot opening in the open state has reached the set upper limit number of executions, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of executions has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate change depending on the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate are changed. For example, the set value has six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning the jackpot, and decreasing the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the probability of winning the jackpot. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, it is the highest advantage for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. . If the probability of winning the jackpot changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the probability of winning a jackpot is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change depending on the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are notified by transmitting a setting value designation command from the main board 11 side to the performance control board 12 side.

The number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it may be to the player. The gameplay may be changed depending on the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the gameplay is such that the probability of winning in the variable state is looped at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type), When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and during the jackpot game, the game ball is While the game state after the end of the jackpot game is controlled to be a variable state based on passing through the switch, the gaming state (so-called V When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320, and the game ball is special variable winning ball device 7 during the high base (during time saving control). The game may be controlled to a jackpot game state based on passage of a predetermined switch provided inside the player (a so-called 1 type, 2 type mixed type). If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is one of 1 to 3, the gameplay is the same, but the jackpot probability is higher than if the setting value is one of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a jackpot game is small (for example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is one of 4 to 6). When changing the gameplay depending on the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a production switch (for executing a predetermined production each time a game ball passes a predetermined area). switch), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the specified switch is used as a gaming switch (for controlling the gaming state to a variable probability state or a jackpot gaming state based on the game ball passing through the specified switch). It can also be used as a switch.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the setting value based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by a common ratio regardless of the setting value. The variation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The setting value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by varying the execution rate of normal reach and super reach depending on the setting value. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the setting value. In addition, it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on the setting value.

(Start winning determination process)
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the starting winning determination process. The CPU 103 executes the starting winning determination process in S101 of the special symbol process shown in FIG. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not (step S51). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is on (Y in step S51), the number of reserved memories of the first special figure, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is set to the predetermined upper limit value. (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step S52). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the first special symbol pending storage number by reading the first pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the first pending storage number counter provided in a game control counter setting section (not shown), for example. When the first special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value in step S52 (N in step S52), for example, the stored value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section (not shown) is set to "1". (Step S53).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off in step S51 (N in step S51) or when the number of stored first special symbols has reached the upper limit value in step S52 (Y in step S52), the variable Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is on (step S54). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is on (Y in step S54), the number of second special pattern pending memories, which is the number of pending memories of the special pattern game using the second special pattern, is set to the predetermined upper limit value. (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step S55). The CPU 103 may specify the second special symbol pending storage number by reading the second pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the second pending storage number counter provided in a game control counter setting section (not shown), for example. When the second special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value in step S55 (N in step S55), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section (not shown) is set to "2". (Step S56).

After executing either of the processes of step S53 or step S56, the number of special symbols pending stored according to the starting opening buffer value, which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer, is updated to be incremented by 1 (step S57). For example, when the starting port buffer value is "1", the first pending storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is "2", the second pending storage number count value is added by 1. In this way, the first pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting prize opening and the first starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the first special pattern is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting prize opening and the second starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the second special pattern is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of pending memories is also updated by adding 1 (step S58). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section (not shown), may be updated by adding one.

After executing the process of step S58, the CPU 103 selects a random number 1 for jackpot determination and a random number 1 for jackpot determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting section (not shown). Numerical data indicating random number random 2 and random number random 3 and 4 for fluctuation pattern determination are extracted (step S59). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as reservation information at the head of an empty entry in the special figure reservation storage section corresponding to the starting opening buffer value (step S60). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers Random 1 to Random 4 is stored in the first special figure holding storage section (not shown), while when the starting opening buffer value is "2" At some point, numerical data indicating random numbers Random 1 to Random 4 is stored in a second special figure reservation storage section (not shown).

The numerical data indicating random number random 1 for jackpot determination and random number random 2 for jackpot type determination determines whether or not the fluctuating display result of special symbols and decorative symbols is considered a "jackpot". It is used to determine the type of jackpot in the case of "jackpot". The random numbers 3 and 4 for determining the fluctuation pattern are used to determine the fluctuation pattern including the fluctuation display time of special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of step S59, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random numbers used to determine the variable display mode including the variable display results and variable display times of special symbols and decorative symbols.

Following the process of step S59, transmission settings for a starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value are performed (step S60). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the effect control board 12 Settings are made to send the first start prize designation command to. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", by storing the storage address of the second starting winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area of the sending command buffer, 2. Configure settings for sending the start prize designation command. The start winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 19 after the special symbol process process is completed. Ru.

Following the process of step S60, the CPU 103 stores the random number value in the storage area corresponding to the pending storage (step S61). Thereafter, the CPU 103 clears the starting opening buffer and initializes the stored value to "0" (step S62), and then ends the starting winning determination process. Thereby, even when both the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B detect valid starting winnings of game balls at the same time, processing based on detection of both effective starting winnings can be surely completed.

(Special design normal processing)
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. As shown in FIG. 22, in the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 stores the first reservation storage buffer (a storage buffer for storing reservation storage information of the first special symbol) or the second reservation storage buffer (the storage buffer for storing reservation storage information of the second special symbol). It is determined whether there is any pending storage data in the storage buffer for storing pending storage information (step S1001). If there is no pending storage data in either the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer (N in step S1001), it is determined whether a predetermined period of time has passed since the fluctuation stopped (step S1002). If the predetermined period has not elapsed since the fluctuation stopped (N in step S1002), the special symbol normal processing is ended. On the other hand, if a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the fluctuation was stopped (Y in step S1002), a process for transmitting a customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed (step S1003), and the special symbol normal process is ended. Here, when the customer waiting demonstration designation command is transmitted, a customer waiting demonstration designation command sent flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration designation command has been transmitted is set. Then, when executing the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interrupt after sending the customer waiting demo designation command, the customer waiting demo designation command sent flag is set. It is controlled so that the waiting demo specification command is not sent. Such a customer waiting demonstration designation command sent flag is reset when the next variable display of special symbols starts.

When there is pending storage data in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer (Y in step S1001), the CPU 103 determines that the first data among the data set in the pending specific area indicates "second". It is determined whether it is data (step S1004). If the first data set in the reservation specific area is not data indicating "second" (that is, data indicating "first") (N in step S1004), CPU 103 moves the special symbol pointer (second Data indicating "first" is set in a flag indicating whether the special symbol process is being performed for the first special symbol or the second special symbol (step S1005). If the first data set in the reservation specific area is data indicating "second" (Y in step S1004), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "second" in the special symbol pointer (step S1006). ).

In this embodiment, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner depending on whether data indicating "first" or "second" is set in the special symbol pointer. The variable display of symbols is executed using a common processing routine. When data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, a variable display of the first special symbol is performed based on the pending storage data stored in the first pending storage buffer. On the other hand, when data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, a variable display of the second special symbol is performed based on the pending storage data stored in the second pending storage buffer.

Through the control in steps S1004 to S1006, if even one piece of data in the second pending memory exists in the second pending memory buffer, the variable display of the second special symbol based on the data in the second pending memory is This is executed in priority to the variable display of the first special symbol based on the data of the first reserved memory.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the pending storage number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer and stores it in the pending storage buffer of the RAM 102 (step S1007). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number = 1 in the first pending storage buffer. is read out and stored in the pending storage buffer of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number = 1 in the second pending storage buffer. The data is stored in the pending storage buffer of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the pending storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S1008). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first pending storage number counter, and adds the value of each storage area in the first pending storage buffer. Shift content. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second pending storage number counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second pending storage buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores data in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the first pending storage buffer of the RAM 102. Each stored random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number=n-1. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each of the items stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second pending storage buffer of the RAM 102 The random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number=n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number) is extracted is always based on the first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number). The second pending storage number) is arranged to match the order of 1, 2, 3, and 4.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a pending memory number designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the performance control CPU 120 based on the value of the pending memory counter indicated by the special symbol pointer after subtraction ( Step S1009). In this case, if a value indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a first pending storage number designation command. Further, when the value indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a second pending storage number designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a background designation command (step S1010), reads random R (random number for jackpot determination) from the pending storage buffer, and executes the jackpot determination module (step S1011). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random numbers for jackpot determination extracted in the starting winning determination process and stored in the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer in advance, and performs the jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that compares a predetermined jackpot determination value (see FIG. 8) with a random number for jackpot determination, and executes a process of determining a jackpot if they match. In other words, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process.

In the jackpot determination process, when the gaming state is variable probability state (high probability state), the probability of hitting the jackpot is higher than when the gaming state is non-probable variable state (normal gaming state and time saving state). ing. Specifically, there is a variable-probability jackpot determination table in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance (the table in which the numbers in the lower column of FIG. 9(a) are set), and a table in which the number of jackpot determination values is A normal jackpot judgment table (table in which the numerical values in the upper column of FIG. 9(a) are set) is provided, which is set smaller than the jackpot judgment table. Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the gaming state is in a variable probability state, and when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the CPU 103 performs processing to determine a jackpot using the variable probability jackpot determination table, and when the gaming state is normal. When the game is in the state or the time saving state, the jackpot judgment process is performed using the normal jackpot judgment table. That is, when the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random 1) matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 9(a), the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot. If it is determined to be a jackpot (Y in step S1011), the process moves to step S1012. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a jackpot means deciding whether to move to a jackpot gaming state, but also deciding whether to make a stop symbol in a special symbol a jackpot symbol. .

It should be noted that confirmation of whether the current gaming state is a variable probability state is performed based on whether or not a variable probability flag is set. The variable probability flag is set when the gaming state is transferred to a variable probability state, and is reset when the variable probability state is ended. Specifically, the probability variation flag is set in the process of ending the jackpot game, and then the variation display is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), and the next jackpot has been determined. It is reset at the timing when the earlier of the following conditions is satisfied, the variable display of the special symbol is ended and the stop symbol is stopped and displayed.

If the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random 1) does not match any jackpot determination value (N in step S1011), the process advances to step S1015, which will be described later.

If the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random 1) matches any jackpot determination value in step S1011, the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot (step S1012). Note that the jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. The first special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 9(b) and the second special symbol jackpot type shown in FIG. 9(c) are tables used to determine the jackpot type to one of the plurality of types. Select one of the determination tables. Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 selects the first special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 9(b). Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 selects the second special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 9(c). Then, the CPU 103 reads out the random numbers for jackpot type determination extracted in the starting winning determination process and stored in the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer in advance, and stores them in the pending storage buffer using the selected jackpot type determination table. The jackpot type and jackpot symbol corresponding to the value of the random number (random 2) for jackpot type determination are determined (step S1013).

Further, the CPU 103 sets jackpot type data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step S1014).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a stop symbol as a special symbol (step S1015). Specifically, if the jackpot flag is not set, a "-" which is a losing symbol is set as a stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot flag is set, the jackpot symbol determined in step S1014 is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a display result designation command (step S1016), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step S1017).

(Fluctuation pattern setting process)
FIG. 23 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variation pattern setting process. As shown in FIG. 23, in the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 determines a post-variation pattern based on random numbers 3 and 4, depending on the number of pending memories and the presence or absence of a jackpot (step S1101). Specifically, in the case of a loss, the CPU 103 selects the post-variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. Determine the fluctuation pattern. In addition, in the case of a jackpot, the CPU 103 selects the after fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 14 according to the type of jackpot, and determines the after fluctuation pattern based on the selected after fluctuation pattern determination table and the value of random 4. decide.

Next, the CPU 103 determines a previous variation pattern based on Random 5 (step S1102). Specifically, the CPU 103 selects the previous variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. Decide on a pattern.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern (previous variation pattern and subsequent variation pattern) to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1103).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 102 (step S1104). Then, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a symbol variation designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1105), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step S112) (step S1105). S1106).

(Special symbol variation processing)
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variation processing. As shown in FIG. 24, in the special symbol fluctuation process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the fluctuation time timer (step S1201), and when the fluctuation time timer times out (Y in step S1202), the value of the special symbol process flag is changed to the special symbol It is updated to a value corresponding to the stop processing (step S113) (step S1203). If the variable time timer has not timed out (N in step S1202), the process ends.

(Special pattern stop processing)
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. As shown in FIG. 25, in the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 sets the end flag to end the variable display of the special symbol, and displays the stop symbol on the special symbol 1 variable display section 9021 or the special symbol 2 variable display section 9022. Control is performed to derive and display (step S1301). In addition, when data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the first special symbol in the special symbol 1 variable display section 9021 is ended, and "second" is indicated in the special symbol pointer. If the data is set, the variation of the second special symbol on the special symbol 2 variable display section 9022 is ended. Further, a symbol confirmation designation command is set in the production control CPU 120 (step S1302). As a result, a symbol confirmation designation command is sent to the production control CPU 120. Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot flag is set (step S1303). If the jackpot flag is not set (N in step S1303), the process moves to step S1309.

If the jackpot flag is set (Y in step S1303), the CPU 103 resets the probability change flag and the time saving flag (step S1304). Next, a jackpot start designation command and a right hit display lighting command are transmitted to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1305).

Also, with reference to the opening pattern data stored in the ROМ101, the number of openings (for example, 5 times or 10 times), the opening time (for example, 29 seconds), and the time between rounds for the normal big winning hole and the V big winning hole. Data indicating an opening mode such as an interval time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set in a predetermined storage area (step S1306). For example, in the case of a 3R normal jackpot, opening modes for opening the normal jackpot in all of 1 to 3R are stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102. In the case of a 5R probability-variable jackpot, opening modes such as opening a normal big prize opening in the 1st to 3rd and 5th rounds and opening a V big winning opening in the 4th round are stored in a predetermined storage area provided in a RAM 102. In addition, in the case of a 10R variable jackpot, opening modes such as opening the regular big prize opening in the 1st to 8th rounds and the 10th round, and opening the V big winning opening in the 9th round are stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102. . Data on the number of openings (5 times or 10 times) is set in an opening number counter for counting the number of openings.

Further, a value corresponding to the fanfare time (for example, the time when the occurrence of the jackpot is announced on the image display device 5) which is the jackpot display time is set in the jackpot control timer (step S1307). Thereafter, in the jackpot opening preprocessing, the jackpot opening control timer is decremented by 1, and when it becomes 0, the jackpot opening is opened and a round is started. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S114) (step S1308), and the process ends.

If it is determined in step S1303 that the jackpot flag is not set (N in step S1304), the CPU 103 determines whether or not a time-saving flag indicating that the time-saving state is set (step S1309). . If the time saving flag is not set (N in step S1309), the process moves to step S1316. If the time saving flag is set (Y in step S1309), the counter value of the time saving number counter indicating the remaining number of fluctuations in the time saving state is subtracted by 1 (step S1310). Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the time saving number counter has become 0 (step S1311). When the value of the time saving number counter becomes 0 (Y in step S1311), it is determined that the duration of the time saving state has ended, and the time saving flag is reset (step S1312). As a result, when a variable display that results in a loss display is performed a specific number of times (100 times) in the time saving state, the gaming state shifts from the time saving state to the non-time saving state. In step S1311, if the value of the time saving number counter is not 0 (N in step S1311), the process moves to step S1316.

After step S1312, it is determined whether a variable probability flag indicating a variable probability state is set (step S1313). If the probability variation flag is set (Y in step S1313), the probability variation flag is reset (step S1314). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a normal state designation command to the production control CPU 120 in response to the transition of the gaming state from the time saving state to the normal state (low probability/low base state) (step S1315), and proceeds to step S1316. move on. If the probability change flag is not set in step S1313 (N in step S1313), the process moves to step S1315 without performing the process in step S1314. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S110) (step S1316), and the process ends.

(Jackpot release preprocessing)
FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot release preprocessing. As shown in FIG. 26, in the jackpot release preprocessing, the CPU 103 updates the value of the jackpot control timer by -1 (subtraction update) (step S1401). Then, it is determined whether the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (step S1402), and if the value of the big winning opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S1402), the process is ended.

When the value of the big winning hole control timer is 0 (Y in step S1402), a big winning hole opening designation command is transmitted to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1403). Then, the solenoid 82 is driven according to the opening pattern to open the normal big prize opening (step S1404). As a result, in the 1st round, the normal big prize opening is opened.

Next, based on the opening pattern data (for example, the data stored in the RAM 102 in step S1306), the CPU 103 sets the big winning opening control timer to the maximum time that the big winning opening can be opened (big winning opening opening time). A corresponding grand prize opening opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is set (step S1405). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening process (step S115) (step S1406), and the process ends.

(Processing during jackpot opening)
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot opening process. As shown in FIG. 27, in the jackpot opening process, the CPU 103 updates the value of the jackpot control timer by -1 (subtraction update) (step S1501).

Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the big winning opening control timer has become 0 (step S1502). When the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S1502), the process moves to step S1511. When the value of the big winning hole control timer is not 0 (N in step S1502), it is determined whether the normal big winning hole or the V big winning hole is being opened (step S1503). Whether the normal big winning hole or the V big winning hole is open can be determined based on the value of the opening number counter.

In step S1503, if it is determined that the normal big winning hole or the V big winning hole is not open (N in step S1503), the process ends.

If the normal big winning hole or the V big winning hole is open (Y in step S1503), it is determined whether the count switch 23 or the V winning switch 24 is turned on (step S1504). If neither the count switch 23 nor the V winning switch 24 is turned on (N in step S1504), the process ends. On the other hand, if either the count switch 23 or the V winning switch 24 is turned on (Y in step S1504), the winning prize counter is incremented by +1 (updated) (step S1505).

Next, it is determined whether the probability variation determination flag is set (step S1506). The variable probability determination flag is a flag that is set when it is determined that control is to be performed in a variable probability state when a V winning occurs. If the probability variation determination flag is set (Y in step S1506), the process moves to step S1510. On the other hand, if the probability change determination flag is not set (N in step S1506), it is determined whether or not the V winning switch 24 is turned on (step S1507). If the V winning switch 24 is not turned on (N in step S1507), the process moves to step S1510. On the other hand, if the V winning switch is turned on (Y in step S1507), the probability variation determination flag is set (step S1508), a probability variation determination device passage designation command is transmitted (step S1509), and the process moves to step S1510. do.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the winning prize counter is a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step S1510). If the value of the winning prize counter does not reach the predetermined value (N in step S1510), the process ends.

When the value of the number of winnings counter reaches a predetermined value (Y in step S1510), the CPU 103 controls to close the normal big winning opening by driving the solenoid 82, or controls to close the normal big winning opening by driving the solenoid 83 to close the V big winning opening. One of the controls for closing is performed (step S1511). Next, the CPU 103 performs processing to clear (set to 0) the value of the winning prize counter (step S1512). Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot release post-processing (step S116) (step S1513), and ends the process.

(Post-processing after jackpot release)
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot release post-processing. As shown in FIG. 28, in the jackpot release post-processing, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the release number counter is 0 (step S1601).

If the value of the opening number counter is 0 (Y in step S1601), a jackpot end designation command is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1602), and a jackpot end time (indication that the jackpot game has ended) is sent to the jackpot control timer. For example, set a value corresponding to the time to be notified on the image display device 5 (step S1603), update the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (step S117) (step S1604), Finish the process.

In step S1601, if the value of the number of openings counter is not 0 (N in step S1601), a specified command after opening the big winning opening is sent to the production control CPU 120 (step S1605), and the round is set in the big winning opening control timer. A value corresponding to the interval time from the end to the start of the next round is set (step S1606).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the round before the V big prize opening is opened (also referred to as the V opening round), that is, the next round is the V opening round (step S1607). If it is not before the V opening round (N in step S1607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 82 to open the normal big prize opening (step S1608). On the other hand, if it is before the V opening round (Y in step S1607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 83 to open the V big prize opening (step S1609).

After step S1608 or step S1609, the CPU 103 transmits a command for specifying that the big prize opening is open to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1610). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening process (step S115) (step S1611), and ends the process.

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot termination process. As shown in FIG. 29, in the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot control timer to which the jackpot end time is set (step S1701). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the jackpot control timer is 0 (whether or not the jackpot end time has elapsed) (step S1702). If the value of the big winning opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S1702), the process ends. If the value of the jackpot control timer is 0 (Y in step S1702), the jackpot flag is reset (step S1703).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the probability variation determination flag, which is set by passing through the V winning area, is set (step S1704). If the probability variation determination flag is not set (N in step S1704), the process moves to step S1705. In step S1704, if the probability variation determination flag is set (Y in step S1704), a probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state is set (step S1707). Next, a probability variation state designation command is transmitted to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1708), a probability variation determination flag is reset (step S1709), and the process moves to step S1710.

In step S1710, a time saving flag indicating the time saving state is set (step S1710), and a time saving number counter is set to 100 (step S1711). Then, the process moves to step S1712.

On the other hand, in step S1704, if the probability change determination flag is not set (N in step S1704), in step S1705, a time saving flag indicating that the time saving state is in effect is set (step S1705), and a time saving number counter is set to 100. (step S1706), and the process moves to step S1712.

In step S1712, a time saving state designation command is transmitted to the production control CPU 120 (step S1712). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S110) (step S1713), and ends the process. Note that the performance control CPU 120 side can recognize whether the game is in a variable probability, time saving, or normal gaming state by a variable probability state designation command transmitted from the CPU 103.

[Main operations of the production control board 12]
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained.

(Production control main processing)
When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 30. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of the production control main process. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the on-board CTC (counter/timer circuit). In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and checking a predetermined operation.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register settings of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (N in step S73), the process in step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to emit a prohibition command (DI command). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (Y in step S73), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the control contents of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to step S73.

(Production control process processing)
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of the production control process. The production control process process is a process executed in step S76 of FIG. 30. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 31, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the production control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S175, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , by driving the movable body 32, by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 to output audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R, by outputting a command (lamp control data) to the LED driver. Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative symbols, such as lighting/extinguishing/blinking the game effect lamps 9 and decorative LEDs. After performing such performance control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative symbols has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative symbols should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., a determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state. When receiving a production control command specifying the start of the jackpot game state, if the command specifies the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4". In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state, it is determined that the display result in the special game is a "lose", and the production process flag is flagged. The value of is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The jackpot performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "4". In this jackpot performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. ” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "5". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 32 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. As shown in FIG. 32, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the result of the variable display is determined to be a loss (step S7101). If it is determined to be a loss, the production control CPU 120 checks whether a command corresponding to a non-reach variation pattern has been received as a variation pattern command (step S7103).

When determining that the command corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern has been received, the performance control CPU 120 determines the display result of a loss that does not become a reach as the final stop of the performance symbol using the data table for determining a loss symbol (step S7105), the process advances to step S7106.

If it is determined in the process of step S7103 that it is not a non-reach variation pattern (if it is determined that it is a reach variation pattern), the stop symbols of the production symbols constituting the combination of reach symbols are determined (step S7104), and in step S7106 Proceed to.

Further, if it is not determined to be a loss in the process of step S7101 (if it is determined to be a jackpot), the performance control CPU 101 configures a combination of jackpot symbols according to the type of jackpot. A stop symbol of the production symbol is determined (step S7102), and the process advances to step S7106.

Next, after executing a performance setting process (step S7106) for setting various performances in the variable display, the process advances to step S7107. For example, the performance control CPU 101 determines whether to execute a performance that suggests a jackpot (incites whether or not it is a jackpot) in the performance setting process of step S7106. Specifically, the performance control CPU 101 determines whether to execute a cut-in performance shown in FIG. 128 (r41), which will be described later, as a performance that suggests a jackpot (incites whether or not it is a jackpot). In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 101 specifies whether or not the final reach will develop based on the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern command, and if it develops into the final reach, the performance control CPU 101 determines whether or not the final reach will develop, and if it develops into the final reach, the performance control CPU 101 determines whether or not it will develop into the final reach, based on the fluctuation pattern. Based on the identified result of whether or not it is a jackpot, determine whether or not to execute a cut-in effect, and if so, determine the type of cut-in effect (red cut-in effect, green cut-in effect). do. When executing a cut-in effect, the effect control CPU 101 sets information for executing the cut-in effect in the effect setting process.

In step S7107, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types of effect control patterns. In step S7107, the symbol fluctuation control pattern is determined according to the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern command and various performance control (performance movement) patterns specified by the performance control pattern of the performance determined in the process of step S7106. Among the plurality of types of symbol variation control patterns stored in the table, one of the performance control patterns corresponding to the designated various performance operation patterns is selected and determined as the pattern to be used.

The control pattern table stored in the ROM 121 includes, for example, the performance symbols in the display area of the image display device 5 during the period from the start of variation of the performance symbols until the final stop symbol, which is the final stop symbol, is stopped and displayed. Multiple types of data indicating the control contents of various production operations such as the variation display operation in the reach production, the production display operation due to the pseudo series production, and the production display operation in the preview production are stored in multiple types as symbol variation control patterns. has been done.

In addition, each symbol fluctuation control pattern corresponds to the fluctuating display of the performance symbol, for example, the performance control process timer setting value, the performance control process timer judgment value, the performance display control data, the audio control data, the brightness data, and the end code. It includes control data for controlling various performance operations, and the content of various performance controls, switching timing of performance control, etc. are set in chronological order.

Next, a process table corresponding to the production control pattern is selected (step S7108). Then, a process timer (effect setting process timer) in the process data of the selected process table is started (step S7109).

After executing the process in step S7109, the production device (the image display device 5 as production components, various lamps as production components, and Control of the speakers 8L and 8R (as performance components) is started (step S7110). For example, in accordance with the display control execution data, a command is outputted to cause the image display device 5 to display an image (including a production pattern) according to the variation pattern. Further, in order to control the lighting/extinguishing of light emitting bodies such as various LEDs, a control signal (lamp control data) is output to the LED driver. Furthermore, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step S7111), and the value of the production control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the variable display production process (step S172). (Step S7112), the variable display start setting process ends.

<Details of game progress>
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 configured as described above, the game progresses as follows. In the pachinko game machine 1, the player first hits the game ball to the left to launch the game ball toward a first downstream path passing through the left side area of the game area. When the fired game ball enters the first starting prize opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game is started. As a result of the first special figure game, when the special figure 1 variable display section 9021 changes to a display mode showing a jackpot symbol, a jackpot occurs.

As described above, the types of jackpots in the first special figure game include normal jackpots 1 and 2, and probability-variable jackpots 1 to 4. When a jackpot occurs, a fanfare performance is performed, and a right-hand-hitting promotion performance is also performed to urge the player to play right-handed. The effect to promote right-handed hitting includes characters (for example, "right-handed hitting") and figures (for example, an arrow pointing to the right, which is the direction of the second downstream path) that encourage right-handed hitting on the screen of the image display device 5. While displaying the image, right-handed hitting is encouraged by lighting means such as LEDs in the right-handed hitting display section 9030 of the special pattern LED board 9020 and the right-handed hitting display section 9055 of the fourth symbol unit 9050. As a result, the player will play right-handed from then on.

During a round in the jackpot game state, the jackpot is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times for a 3R regular jackpot, 10 times for a 10R jackpot). One opening of the grand prize opening is the timing at which a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed, and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two.

When the ending performance after the jackpot game state ends, the game state is controlled to be a time saving state over a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times). Further, when a V win occurs during a jackpot round, the gaming state is controlled to be variable in probability over a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) controlled to be in a time saving state.

Even in the variable probability state or time saving state after the jackpot round, the image display device 5, the right-hand game display section 9030, and the right-hand game display section 9055 continue to perform the right-hand game promotion effect. Therefore, after the first jackpot (also referred to as the first hit) occurs, the player is always urged to play right-handed by the right-handed hitting promotion performance even in a time-saving state after the jackpot round ends.

In the short time state, control is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (the period in which the special symbol is varied) compared to the normal state, and the average regular symbol fluctuation time (the period in which the regular symbol is varied) is executed. Control is performed to shorten the period of time compared to the normal state, and furthermore, control is performed to improve the probability of "hitting the common drawing" in the common drawing game compared to the normal state. In addition, in the time saving state, by increasing the frequency of the variable winning ball device 6B forming the second starting winning hole being in the open state, the frequency at which game balls enter the second starting winning hole is increased, and the second starting winning hole is increased. Electric chew support control may be performed to facilitate winning into the winning opening (increase the number of entries, increase the frequency).

In the time saving state after the jackpot round, the second special drawing game is started by the fired game ball entering the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. As a result of the second special figure game, when the special figure 2 variable display section 9022 changes to a display mode showing a jackpot symbol, a jackpot (also referred to as a consecutive winning) occurs.

As described above, the types of jackpots in the second special figure game include probability-variable jackpots 5 to 9. When a jackpot occurs, a fanfare performance is performed. Note that the right-hand hitting promotion effect by the image display device 5, the right-hand hitting display section 9030, and the right-hand hitting display section 9055 continues from the time of the first hit.

During a round in the jackpot game state, the jackpot is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). One opening of the grand prize opening is the timing at which a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed, and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two.

Then, when the ending performance after the jackpot game state is finished, the game state is controlled to be a time-saving state and a variable probability state (high probability, high base state) for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times), similar to the first winning state. be done. Even in the variable probability state after the jackpot round in consecutive winnings, the image display device 5, the right-handed hitting display section 9030, and the right-handed hitting display section 9055 continue to perform the right-handed hitting promotion effect. For this reason, after the first hit occurs, the player may receive consecutive winnings in a variable probability state or time saving state after the end of the jackpot round, and the player may be in a variable probability state or time saving state after the jackpot round for the consecutive winnings has ended. Even in this state, the player is always encouraged to hit the ball to the right by the right-hand ball promotion performance.

The variable probability state or short time state ends without a jackpot occurring in either the variable probability state or short time state after the first jackpot round ends, or the variable probability state or short time state after the jackpot round for consecutive wins ends. Then, the gaming state is controlled to the normal state (low probability low base state), and the right-handed hitting promotion effect by the image display device 5, right-handed hitting display section 9030, and right-handed hitting display section 9055 also ends. As a result, the player again hits the game ball to the left to launch the game ball toward the first downstream path passing through the left area of the game area.

<Production flow>
Next, the flow of a series of performances executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained. FIG. 33 is a diagram for explaining the flow of a series of effects. In the pachinko game machine 1, the notification effect is executed from when the fluctuating display starts until when the fluctuating display stops. The notification performance is a performance that notifies the player whether or not the fluctuations of the special symbols and decorative symbols will stop in a manner indicating a jackpot, that is, whether or not the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state. The notification performance is made up of multiple performance parts, and in this embodiment, it includes a start part, an incitement part, a winning epilogue part, a loss epilogue part, a role model action part, a relief winning part, a re-lottery part, and Includes fanfare part. After the re-lottery part, there is a fanfare part that is executed before transitioning to the jackpot game state. Note that the inciting part is also referred to as the introduction part. In addition, the winning epilogue part and the losing epilogue part are collectively referred to as the epilogue part.

[Start part]
The start part is a part in which a performance corresponding to the previous variation pattern is executed. The start part is also a part that indicates the period from when the fluctuation is started and the pseudo link or normal reach is executed until the SP reach is started. Note that the starting part also includes fluctuations that result in non-reach losses.

[Inciting part (introduction part)]
The incitement part (introduction part) includes the time from the start of SP Reach (also called Super Reach) (the start timing of the title display of SP Reach) to the timing when you can reach the branch of jackpot or loss. Moreover, the inciting part is a part that incites whether it will be a jackpot or a loss depending on the performance executed. The inciting part corresponds to the part corresponding to SP first half reach A or SP first half reach B that is executed after the start part, or the SP second half reach A, SP second half reach B, or SP final reach that develops from SP first half reach. Parts included. Note that the SP first half reach A and the SP first half reach B may be collectively referred to as the SP first half, the SP second half reach A, the SP second half reach B, and the SP final reach may be collectively referred to as the SP second half.

[Epilogue part]
The epilogue part includes a winning epilogue part that informs that a jackpot display result will be obtained after each promotion part, and a loss epilogue part that informs that a loss display result will be obtained. In the winning epilogue part, at least in the final part of the epilogue part, an effect based on a story development is executed to notify that the fluctuating symbols become a jackpot display result and the jackpot game state is controlled. In the loss epilogue part, at least in the final part of the epilogue part, an effect based on a story development is executed to notify that the fluctuating symbols become a loss display result and are not controlled to a jackpot game state.

In addition, in the epilogue part, the notification of the jackpot display result is notified by movable accessories when announcing the win or failure after the introduction part, like the final reach described later, and when SP reach other than the final reach is announced. There are times when notifications are made by the development of a story on the liquid crystal display (image display device 5) without using any accessories. Among the epilogue parts, the winning epilogue part that is notified by movable accessories is also referred to as the win/fail notification part. Specifically, in SP first half reach A, B and SP second half reach A, B, if a jackpot occurs in the epilogue part that is executed after the introduction part, the liquid crystal is used in the hit epilogue part as described above. It is reported that the game state is controlled to be a jackpot game state as the conclusion of the story performance, and when a jackpot does not occur, it is reported by a loss epilogue part that the control is not controlled to the jackpot game state as the conclusion of the story performance using a liquid crystal. Depending on the first story development in the story direction, it may be suggested whether or not the game is a success. On the other hand, in the final reach, in the epilogue part that is executed after the introduction part, first of all, the win/fail notification part (accessory object movement part) determines whether or not the action of the accessory will lead to a jackpot game state. After that, if a jackpot occurs, the winning epilogue part as described above will notify you that the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state as the conclusion of the story production using the liquid crystal, and if a jackpot does not occur, the loss epilogue part will notify you that the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state. As the conclusion of the story production using , it is announced that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state. In this way, the winning epilogue part in the final reach includes a win/fail notification part and a subsequent winning epilogue part or loss epilogue part.

In addition, corresponding to SP first half reach A, a winning epilogue part of SP first half reach A and a loss epilogue part of SP first half reach A are executed. Corresponding to SP first half reach B, a winning epilogue part of SP first half reach B and a loss epilogue part of SP first half reach B are executed. Corresponding to SP second half reach A, a winning epilogue part of SP second half reach A and a loss epilogue part of SP second half reach A are executed. Corresponding to SP second half reach B, a winning epilogue part of SP second half reach B and a loss epilogue part of SP second half reach B are executed. Corresponding to the SP final reach, a winning epilogue part of the SP final reach and a loss epilogue part of the SP final reach are executed.

[Accessory action part]
The accessory motion part is a part corresponding to the period during which the SP second half develops, in which a performance indicating the development from the first half SP to the second half SP is performed by moving the movable body 32. The accessory motion part is executed after the inciting part of the first half of the SP reach A or the inciting part of the first half of the SP reach B. After the accessory motion part, any one of the SP second half reach A promotion part, the SP second half reach B promotion part, and the SP final reach promotion part is executed.

[Relief part]
The relief winning part is a part in which a relief winning performance is performed that first appears to be a loss and then suggests a jackpot. The relief hit part is a part that may develop from any of the loss epilogue part of the SP second half reach A, the loss epilogue part of the SP second half reach B, or the loss epilogue part of the SP final reach.

[Re-lottery part]
The re-lottery part is a part that is executed after the winning epilogue part in which the jackpot display result is displayed. Specifically, the re-lottery performance is the winning epilogue part of the first half of SP reach A, the winning epilogue part of first half of SP reach B, the winning epilogue part of second half of SP reach A, the winning epilogue part of second half of SP reach B, and the winning epilogue part of SP final reach. Executed after the win epilogue part and the rescue win part. In addition, in this embodiment, the re-lottery part is always executed after each winning part (winning epilogue part, relief winning part), but there may be cases where the re-lottery presentation part does not proceed. For example, the re-lottery part may not be executed after the relief part, the re-lottery part may not be executed after the winning epilogue part, or the jackpot display result may be a variable probability symbol (probably variable). The re-lottery part may not be executed when an odd number symbol (shown in the figure) is derived.

[Relationship before and after determination of validity]
Next, an example will be described in which a series of effects are divided at timings before and after the decision of success or failure. FIG. 34 is a diagram for explaining the relationship before and after determination of success, SP first half reach A jackpot, and SP final reach jackpot. Here, the success/failure determination is an effect that indicates a branching of whether the result is a jackpot display result or a loss display result at the final stage of the promotion part. As shown in FIG. 34(A), the series of performances can be divided into parts that are executed before and after the decision is made, at timings before and after the decision is made, from the start of the variation to the stop of the variation. The parts before the determination of whether or not the answer is correct include a starting part and an inciting part. In addition, the part after the success/failure determination includes an epilogue part (win, loss), a relief part, and a re-lottery part.

In this way, the series of performances from the start of fluctuation to the stop of fluctuation consists of multiple parts. Furthermore, the period from the start of variation to the stop of variation can be divided into before and after the start of SP reach (post-variation start). In such a case, before the start of SP reach corresponds to the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern of the before fluctuation, and after the start of SP reach corresponds to the fluctuation pattern of the after fluctuation described above.

Next, the fluctuation pattern of main fluctuation number 20, which is the fluctuation pattern of the SP first half reach A jackpot among the fluctuation patterns, will be explained using FIG. 34(B). In the variation pattern of SP first half reach A jackpot, the starting part is from the start of variation to the start of SP reach (later variation start). Then, the period from the start of SP reach (start of post-variation) to the determination of validity is the inciting part (SP first half reach A). In the fluctuation pattern of the SP first half reach A jackpot, the accessory does not move at the timing of the success or failure decision. The period from the determination of success to the start of the re-lottery performance is the epilogue part (SP first half reach A hit). The re-lottery part is from the start of the re-lottery performance to the stop of the variation. For example, in the fluctuation pattern of SP first half reach A jackpot, the start part is 60 seconds, the incitement part (SP first half reach A) is 20 seconds, the epilogue part (SP first half reach A hit) is 15 seconds, and the re-drawing part is 20 seconds. A time has been set for this.

Next, the variation pattern of main variation number 26, which is the variation pattern of the SP final reach jackpot, will be explained using FIG. 34(C). In the variation pattern of the SP final reach jackpot, the starting part is from the start of variation to the start of SP reach (post-variation start). Then, the period from the start of SP reach (start of post-fluctuation) to the development of the second half of SP becomes the inciting part (first half of SP reach A). The incitement part (SP final reach) is from the development of the second half of the SP to the determination of validity. In the fluctuation pattern of the SP final reach jackpot, the accessory does not move at the timing of the success/fail determination. The period from the determination of success to the start of the re-lottery performance is the epilogue part (SP final reach hit). The re-lottery part is from the start of the re-lottery performance to the stop of the variation. For example, in the SP final reach jackpot variation pattern, the start part is 60 seconds, the incitement part (SP first half reach A) is 20 seconds, the incitement part (SP final reach) is 25 seconds, and the epilogue part (SP final reach) is 30 seconds. The time is set such that the re-lottery part is 20 seconds.

As shown in FIGS. 34(B) and (C), the SP final reach, which has a higher expectation level, has a longer fluctuation time than the SP first half reach A. In addition, the total duration of the incitement part and the duration of the epilogue part are longer in the SP final reach, which has higher expectations than in the SP first half reach A. As a result, the period of time that excites the player can be lengthened as the variation has a higher degree of expectation, and the lingering time when the game wins can also be lengthened, making it possible to increase the sense of celebration.

<About the scenario>
Next, the correspondence between the performance contents executed in a series of performances and the game effect lamps 9 will be explained using scenarios for each part. The scenario described here serves as a script that summarizes how each scene in a series of productions will proceed. The scenario of each part corresponds to a diagram for explaining the presentation mode corresponding to each part, which will be described later. Contents such as the effect executed on the screen of the image display device 5 and the mode of the game effect lamp 9 will be explained in detail using diagrams for explaining the mode of effect described later. Below, the correspondence relationship between the diagrams for explaining the scenario of each part and the diagrams for explaining the production mode described later will be explained.

FIG. 35 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the start part. The scenario of the start part corresponding to number 1 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 55 to 61, which will be described later. FIG. 36 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the inciting part (SP first half reach A). The scenario of the inciting part (SP first half reach A) corresponding to number 2 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 62 to 67, which will be described later. FIG. 38 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A) and the losing epilogue part (SP first half reach A). The scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A) corresponding to number 3 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 68 to 69, which will be described later. The scenario of the lose-lose epilogue part (SP first half reach A) corresponding to number 4 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 70 to 71, which will be described later.

FIG. 38 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the inciting part (SP first half reach B). The scenario of the inciting part (SP first half reach B) corresponding to number 5 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 72 to 77, which will be described later. FIG. 39 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B) and the losing epilogue part (SP first half reach B). The scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B) corresponding to number 6 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 78 to 80, which will be described later. The scenario of the lose-lose epilogue part (SP first half reach B) corresponding to number 7 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 81 to 82, which will be described later. FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the accessory action part (at the time of second half SP development). The scenario of the accessory action part (at the time of second half development of SP) corresponding to number 8 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the presentation mode of FIG. 83, which will be described later.

FIG. 41 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the inciting part (SP second half reach A). The scenario of the inciting part (SP second half reach A) corresponding to number 9 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the performance modes shown in FIGS. 84 to 96, which will be described later. FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach A) and the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach A). The scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach A) corresponding to number 10 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the presentation mode of FIGS. 97 to 98, which will be described later. The scenario of the lose-lose epilogue part (SP second half reach A) corresponding to number 11 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 99 to 100, which will be described later.

FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the inciting part (SP second half reach B). The scenario of the inciting part (SP second half reach B) corresponding to number 12 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 101 to 109, which will be described later. FIG. 44 is a diagram for explaining scenarios of the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B) and the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach B). The scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B) corresponding to number 13 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 110 to 112, which will be described later. The scenario of the lose-lose epilogue part (SP second half reach B) corresponding to number 14 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 113 to 114, which will be described later.

FIG. 45 and FIG. 46 are diagrams for explaining the scenario of the inciting part (SP final reach). The scenario of the inciting part (SP final reach) corresponding to number 15 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the performance modes of FIGS. 115 to 132, which will be described later. FIG. 47 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP final reach) and the losing epilogue part (SP final reach). The scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP final reach) corresponding to number 16 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 133 to 136, which will be described later. The scenario of the lose-lose epilogue part (SP final reach) corresponding to number 17 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 137 to 138, which will be described later. FIG. 48 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the relief part. The scenario of the relief hit part corresponding to number 18 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 139 to 140, which will be described later.

FIG. 49 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the re-lottery part (odd-numbered symbols or even-numbered symbols derived after button operation). The scenario of the re-lottery part (odd-numbered symbols or even-numbered symbols derived after button operation) corresponding to number 19 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the performance modes of FIGS. 141 to 156 described later. FIG. 50 is a diagram for explaining scenarios of the re-lottery part (odd number symbols are derived after button operation) and the fanfare part. The scenario of the re-lottery part (odd-numbered symbols are derived after button operation) corresponding to number 20 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 157 to 159, which will be described later. The scenario of the fanfare part corresponding to number 22 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIG. 160, which will be described later. FIG. 51 is a diagram for explaining scenarios of the re-lottery part (even number symbols are derived after button operation) and the fanfare part. The scenario of the re-lottery part (even-numbered symbols are derived after button operation) corresponding to number 21 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 161 to 163, which will be described later. The scenario of the fanfare part corresponding to number 22 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIG. 164, which will be described later.

<Mechanism of output to LED driver (lamp driver)>
FIG. 52 is a diagram for explaining the mechanism of output to the LED driver. In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 mounted on the performance control board 12 lights/blinks/turns off one or more lamps (LEDs) among the plurality of lamps (LEDs) included in the game effect lamp 9. The brightness data for the LED driver (also referred to as a lamp driver) is output to the LED driver (also referred to as a lamp driver). In addition, below, the control of lighting/blinking/lights out performed on lamps, such as LED, by CPU120 for performance control is also called lamp control. Based on the brightness data received from the performance control CPU 120, the LED driver adjusts the current flowing through each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 that is the target of lamp control in order to turn on/blink/extinguish the lamp. Each game effect lamp 9 turns on/blinks/extinguishes based on the current adjusted by the LED driver.

More specifically, the ROM 121 and RAM 122 of the performance control board 12 store a brightness data table in which brightness data for controlling each game effect lamp 9 is stored. The brightness data table includes the error brightness data table used when an error occurs, and the SP reach brightness used in each part of the SP reach (incitement part, winning epilogue part, loss epilogue part, role model action part, etc.) It includes a data table and a background brightness data table.

Furthermore, the background brightness data table includes a normal background brightness data table used in a low-accuracy low base state (normal state), a fanfare background brightness data table used in a fanfare state where a fanfare performance is executed, and a fanfare background brightness data table used in a fanfare state where a fanfare performance is executed. The brightness data table for the jackpot background used during the round of the jackpot game state, the brightness data table for the ending background used in the ending state in which the ending performance that notifies the end of the jackpot game state, and the brightness data table for the ending background used during the round of the high-accuracy high base state This includes a variable background brightness data table used in the following conditions.

Each of the background brightness data tables described above is used without overlapping, and is controlled to any one of a plurality of gaming states such as a normal state, a fanfare state, a jackpot gaming state, an ending state, and a variable probability state. One of the background brightness data tables is used depending on the background brightness data table. That is, the performance control CPU 120 uses one of the background brightness data tables for each game state under control, and outputs brightness data based on the background brightness data table to the LED driver. As a result, each game effect lamp 9 is controlled according to the game state being controlled.

Furthermore, the priority level when used is determined for each of the error brightness data table, the SP reach brightness data table, and the background brightness data table. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52, the priority level increases when the error brightness data table, the SP reach brightness data table, and the background brightness data table are used in this order.

For example, when outputting brightness data based on the normal background brightness data table in the normal state and the SP reach develops, the production control CPU 120 outputs the SP reach brightness data table corresponding to the SP reach as the normal background. The brightness data is output to the LED driver based on the SP reach brightness data table. As a result, when the game effect lamp 9 is controlled in a manner corresponding to the normal state based on the brightness data table for normal background and it develops into SP reach, the mode corresponding to SP reach is based on the brightness data table for SP reach. The game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled. Note that during the period when the brightness data based on the brightness data table for SP reach is output to the LED driver, the brightness data based on the brightness data table for background is not normally output to the LED driver, but after SP reach ends, the brightness data is normally output to the LED driver. When the state returns to normal, the brightness data based on the brightness data table for the background is output to the LED driver, and when it becomes a jackpot and enters the fanfare state, the brightness data based on the brightness data table for the fanfare background is output to the LED driver. Output.

More specifically, the performance control CPU 120 uses a timer to measure the lamp control time corresponding to the game state under control, and controls the LED driver using the background brightness data table corresponding to the game state under control. However, when it develops into SP reach, etc., the SP reach brightness data table corresponding to the SP reach is used preferentially over the background brightness data table to output brightness data to the LED driver. During this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to update the timer value without stopping the lamp control time measurement using the background brightness data table. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 continues to update the brightness data included in the background brightness data table even while controlling the game effect lamp 9 based on the SP reach brightness data table, but the background brightness Since the brightness data included in the data table has a lower priority than the brightness data contained in the SP reach brightness data table, the brightness data contained in the background brightness data table is not output to the LED driver. ing. Then, after the SP reach ends, the performance control CPU 120 starts outputting the brightness data included in the background brightness data table to the LED driver again from the continuation of the brightness data that has been updated.

For example, if an error occurs while outputting brightness data based on the brightness data table for SP reach during SP reach, the production control CPU 120 outputs the error brightness data table corresponding to the error to SP reach. The brightness data is output to the LED driver based on the error brightness data table using priority over the error brightness data table. As a result, if an error occurs while the game effect lamp 9 is being lamp-controlled in a manner corresponding to SP reach based on the brightness data table for SP reach, the game effect is controlled in a manner corresponding to the error based on the brightness data table for error. Lamp 9 is lamp controlled. In addition, during the period when the brightness data based on the brightness data table for error is being output to the LED driver, the brightness data based on the brightness data table for SP reach is not output to the LED driver, but when the error is cleared and SP reach is in progress again. When returning to the gaming state, brightness data based on the SP reach brightness data table is output to the LED driver.

More specifically, the performance control CPU 120 uses a timer to measure the lamp control time corresponding to the SP reach that is being controlled, and uses the SP reach brightness data table corresponding to the SP reach to control the brightness of the LED driver. Data is output, but when an error occurs, the error brightness data table corresponding to the error is used preferentially over the SP reach brightness data table to output brightness data to the LED driver. During this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to update the timer value without stopping the time measurement of the lamp control using the SP reach brightness data table. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 continues to update the brightness data included in the SP reach brightness data table even while controlling the game effect lamp 9 based on the error brightness data table, but the SP reach The brightness data included in the brightness data table has a lower priority than the brightness data contained in the error brightness data table, so the brightness data contained in the SP reach brightness data table should not be output to the LED driver. It has become. After the error is cleared, the performance control CPU 120 starts outputting the brightness data included in the SP ready-to-reach brightness data table to the LED driver again from the continuation of the brightness data that has been updated.

<Lighting mode of game effect lamp>
In this embodiment, each game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled by outputting brightness data to the LED driver by the effect control CPU 120 as described above. Here, the lighting mode of each game effect lamp 9 will be explained in detail with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. 53 and 54 are diagrams for explaining the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9.

In this embodiment, terms related to the lighting of each game effect lamp 9, such as the frame lamp, accessory lamp 9A, board left lamp 9B, attacker lamp 9E, V attacker lamp 9F, and electric chew lamp 9H, are used as "lights out", " Use terms such as "almost off," "on," and "blinking." Further, as described above, the mode of each game effect lamp 9 by "lighting" and "blinking" is also referred to as "lighting mode".

The term "lights out" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is not lit and the brightness is 0. The term "substantially off" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is on but its brightness is extremely low (for example, brightness "1" to be described later).

For example, as shown in FIG. 53 (X1), when the RGB (Red, Green, Blue) data defined as the luminance data of the frame lamp is "000", the frame lamp is "extinguished". Further, when the luminance data (RGB data) of the frame lamp is "111", the frame lamp lights in white at extremely low luminance. In this embodiment, the state of the frame lamp in which the RGB data is "111" may be referred to as "substantially off" for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 53 (X1), when the data of RRRR (Red, Red, Red, Red) defined as the brightness data of the accessory lamp 9A is "0000", the accessory lamp 9A is "extinguished". . Further, when the brightness data (RRRR data) of the accessory lamp 9A is "1111", the accessory lamp 9A lights up in red at extremely low brightness. In the present embodiment, the state of the accessory lamp 9A in which the RRRR data is "1111" may be referred to as "substantially off" for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 53 (X1), when the data of WWWWW (White, White, White, White, White) defined as the brightness data of the panel left lamp 9B is "00000", the panel left lamp 9B is "off". "do. Further, when the brightness data (WWWWW data) of the left panel lamp 9B is "11111", the left panel lamp 9B is lit at extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of the panel left lamp 9B in which the WWWWW data is "11111" may be referred to as "substantially off" for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 53 (X1), when the RGB (Red, Green, Blue) data defined as the brightness data of the attacker lamp 9E is "000", the attacker lamp 9E is "turned off". Further, when the brightness data (RGB data) of the attacker lamp 9E is "111", the attacker lamp 9E is lit at extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of the attacker lamp 9E in which such RGB data is "111" may be referred to as "substantially off" for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 53 (X1), when the WWW (White, White, White) data defined as the brightness data of the V attacker lamp 9F is "000", the V attacker lamp 9F is "extinguished". Further, when the brightness data (WWW data) of the V attacker lamp 9F is "111", the V attacker lamp 9F is lit at extremely low brightness. In the present embodiment, the state of the V attacker lamp 9F in which the WWW data is "111" may be referred to as "substantially off" for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 53 (X1), when the RGB (Red, Green, Blue) data defined as the brightness data of the electric lamp 9H is "000", the electric lamp 9H is turned off. Further, when the brightness data (RGB data) of the electric lamp 9H is "111", the electric lamp 9H is lit at extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of the electric lamp 9H in which the RGB data is "111" may be referred to as "substantially off" for convenience.

The term "lighting" refers to constant lighting in which the game effect lamp 9 is always on, wave lighting in which a plurality of side-by-side lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 are switched from off to on in order, and wave lighting in which the game effect lamp 9 is turned on and off in order. This includes haze lighting, which is dimly lit while changing the brightness. Specifically, "lighting" includes lighting of the game effect lamp 9 when the brightness data is any one of "2" to "F". The brightness data is hexadecimal data and can be specified from "0" to "F", where "0" is no brightness, "1" is the lowest brightness, and "F" is the highest brightness. becomes higher.

For example, as shown in FIG. 53 (X2), when the luminance data (RGB data) of the frame left lamps 9L1 to 9L12 is "AAA", the frame left lamps 9L1 to 9L12 are "lit", and especially in this case, Since the brightness is high, the lamps 9L1 to 9L12 on the left side of the frame are lit brightly.

As shown in FIG. 53 (X3), when the brightness data (RGB data) of the right frame lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is "AAA", the right frame lamps 9R2 to 9R12 are "lit", and especially in this case, the brightness is Since the height is high, the lamps 9R2 to 9R12 on the right side of the frame are lit brightly.

As shown in FIG. 54 (X4), when the brightness data (RRRR data) of the accessory lamp 9A is "AAAA", the accessory lamp 9A is "lit", and especially in this case, since the brightness is high, the accessory lamp 9A is "lit". The object lamp 9A lights up brightly.

As shown in FIG. 54 (X5), when the brightness data (WWWWW data) of the board left lamp 9B is "AAAAAA", the board left lamp 9B is "lit", and especially in this case, since the brightness is high, the board left lamp 9B is "lit". The left lamp 9B lights up brightly.

As shown in FIG. 54 (X6), when the brightness data (RGB data) of the attacker lamp 9E is "AAA", the attacker lamp 9E is "lit", and especially in this case, since the brightness is high, the attacker lamp 9E lights up brightly. When the brightness data (WWW data) of the V attacker lamp 9F is "AAA", the V attacker lamp 9F is "lit", and especially in this case, since the brightness is high, the V attacker lamp 9F is lit brightly. When the brightness data (RGB data) of the electric light lamp 9H is "AAA", the electric light lamp 9H is "lit", and especially in this case, since the brightness is high, the electric light lamp 9H is lit brightly.

The term "blinking" refers to a mode in which the game effect lamps 9 are in a state other than "turning off" or "on" as described above, and the brightness of each lamp when lit is a first brightness and a second brightness higher than the first brightness. This includes an aspect in which the mode is alternately switched between. For example, "blinking" includes repeating lighting and turning off or almost turning off, and specifically, "blinking" means when the brightness data is one of "2" to "F", This includes switching over time between cases where the brightness data is "0" or "1". As described above, in this embodiment, the lighting mode of the lamp is hazy lighting, but the hazy lighting is a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is dimly lit while changing the brightness. , and blinking differ from each other in that each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 repeats lighting and turning off or almost turning off.

<Production mode of pachinko game machine 1>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 55 to 164, the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during a game will be described. In the present embodiment, a presentation mode will be described when any of the variation patterns of main variation numbers 9, 12, 15, 20, 23, and 26 is selected.

Specifically, when the fluctuation pattern with main fluctuation number 9 is selected, among the multiple routes shown in FIG. The production transitions in the order of the losing epilogue part (4), or the production transitions in the order of the start part (1), the SP first half reach B inciting part (5), and the SP first half reach B losing epilogue part (7). .

When the variation pattern with main variation number 12 is selected, the start part (1), SP first half reach A incitement part (2), accessory movement part (8), SP second half reach A incitement part (9), SP The production transitions in the order of the losing epilogue part (11) of the second half of reach A, or the start part (1), the inciting part of the first half of the SP reach A (2), the role-playing part (8), and the inciting part of the second half of the SP reach B. (12), the production transitions in the order of the loss epilogue part (14) of the second half of SP reach B, the start part (1), the instigation part of reach B of the first half of SP (5), the character movement part (8), and the second half of SP The production transitions in the following order: Reach A's inciting part (9), SP second half Reach B's loss epilogue part (14), or start part (1), SP first half Reach B's inciting part (5), and role-playing part ( 8), the promotion part (12) of SP second half reach B, and the loss epilogue part (14) of SP second half reach B.

When the variation pattern with main variation number 15 is selected, the start part (1), the SP first half reach A incitement part (2), the accessory movement part (8), the SP final reach incitement part (15), and the SP final The production transitions in the order of the reach loss epilogue part (17), the start part (1), the SP first half reach B incitement part (5), the role movement part (8), the SP final reach incitement part (15) , the performance transitions in the order of SP final reach loss epilogue part (17).

If the variation pattern with main variation number 20 is selected, the production will transition in the order of start part (1), SP first half reach A incitement part (2), SP first half reach A hit epilogue part (3), or start The production transitions in the order of part (1), SP first half reach B incitement part (5), and SP first half reach B winning epilogue part (6).

When the variation pattern with main variation number 20 is selected, the start part (1), SP first half reach A incitement part (2), accessory movement part (8), SP second half reach A incitement part (9), SP The production transitions in the order of the hit epilogue part (10) of the second half reach A, or the start part (1), the inciting part of the first half of the SP reach A (2), the role movement part (8), the inciting part of the second half of the SP reach B (12), the production transitions in the order of SP second half reach B hit epilogue part (13), start part (1), SP first half reach B incitement part (5), role model movement part (8), SP second half The production transitions in the order of Reach A's incitement part (9), SP second half Reach B's hit epilogue part (10), or start part (1), SP first half Reach B's incitement part (5), and role-playing part ( 8), the SP second half reach B incitement part (12), and the SP second half reach B hit epilogue part (13).

When the variation pattern with main variation number 26 is selected, the start part (1), the SP first half reach A incitement part (2), the accessory movement part (8), the SP final reach incitement part (15), and the SP final The production transitions in the order of reach epilogue part (16), start part (1), SP first half reach B incitement part (5), role-playing part (8), SP final reach incitement part (15) , and the SP final reach hit epilogue part (16).

Further, in the figure, the mode of each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 and the effect sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R are also shown. In this embodiment, the re-lottery part is always executed after the winning epilogue, but there may be a variation pattern in which the re-lottery effect is not executed and ends with the winning epilogue part. Furthermore, although the description of the variation pattern corresponding to the relief part is omitted in the example of the total variation pattern, the variation pattern corresponding to the relief part will also be explained. In addition, in the case of a win, since the variation time is longer than the variation pattern of a loss, the rescue winning part that pretends to be a loss and becomes a win may perform a performance by the rescue winning part using the variation time.

[Production style in the start part]
The production mode in the start part will be explained with reference to FIGS. 55 to 61.

As shown in FIG. 55(a1), when the variable display (fluctuating display) starts based on one pending memory, the decorative symbols are displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the screen of the image display device 5. At the same time, the fourth symbol 5J is variably displayed, and furthermore, the small symbol 5M is variably displayed. On the screen, a background image including images of characters and scenery is displayed as a background during variable display. In this embodiment, an image of a girl named Yume-chan flying is displayed as a character that appears in variations during the normal game state. Yumu-chan is a main character that appears as an ally character in the performance executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1.

At the start of the variation, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow, which corresponds to the normal background. Note that during the variable display, effect sounds are outputted from the speakers 8L and 8R as appropriate, but only some of the drawings are shown regarding the effect sounds. Further, the lighting of yellow corresponding to the normal background by the game effect lamp 9 is referred to as "background yellow lighting". The performance control CPU 120 lights the game effect lamps 9 in a yellow background lighting pattern based on the normal background brightness data table described with reference to FIG. Note that "lighting" here includes constant lighting, wave lighting, hazy lighting, etc., as described with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54, and the same applies in the following description.

As shown in FIG. 55(a2), after the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped at the "2" symbol in a ready-to-reach mode, the "NEXT" symbol as a pseudo-continuous symbol stops at the middle symbol. When the "NEXT" symbol stops, it is indicated that the second variation of the pseudo variation is started. When the "NEXT" symbol is stopped, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in red. Note that "blinking" here includes the lamp repeating turning on and off, as described with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54, and the same applies in the following description. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 55(a3), the characters "x2" are displayed to indicate that the second variable display based on the pseudo-continuous effect will be performed. When "x2" is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 blinks twice in white.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 56(a4), a second variation of the pseudo variation is performed. At the upper left of the screen, small characters "x2" are displayed, indicating that this is the second variable display. At the time of re-fluctuation, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a pattern of background yellow lighting. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 56(a5), after the ready-to-reach mode is established, the "NEXT" symbol as a pseudo-continuous symbol stops in the middle symbol. When the "NEXT" symbol stops, it is indicated that the third pseudo fluctuation is started. When the "NEXT" symbol is stopped, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in red. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 56(a6), the characters "x3" are displayed, indicating that the third variable display based on the pseudo-continuous effect will be performed. When "x3" is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 57(a7), a pseudo re-variation is performed as the third variable display. At the upper left of the screen, small characters "x3" are displayed, indicating that this is the third variable display. At the time of re-fluctuation, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a pattern of background yellow lighting. After that, as shown in FIG. 57(a8), "2" stops in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, and "2" also stops in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, which is called reach tenpai. It becomes a mode. At the time of reach tenpai, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. Then, as shown in FIG. 57(a9), the background starts to darken and the screen becomes dark while the middle symbol changes in the mode of reach-ten-pai. When the background darkens, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 58 (a10), a shutter-shaped image (hereinafter also simply referred to as a shutter) is displayed so as to hide the display of the decorative pattern and Yumu-chan's character image. The shutter layer has a higher priority than the decorative pattern layer or Yumu-chan's character layer. High priority means that the image layer (image layer) is located on the front side. As shown in FIG. 58 (a10), the shutter is displayed so as to close from the top and bottom of the screen toward the center of the screen. Due to the image of the shutter, images behind the shutter become invisible. In addition, the screen brightness gradually decreases as the shutter gradually closes. When the shutter is closed (a10), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red while decreasing the brightness step by step.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 58 (a11), the shutter is further closed and the screen brightness is lower than at the time (a10). In the state where the shutter is closed (a11), the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 further decreases from the time point (a10), and the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 58 (a12), the shutter is further closed and the screen brightness is lower than at the time (a11). In the state in which the shutter is closed (a12), the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 further decreases from the time point (a11), and the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red. The screen brightness gradually decreases from (a10) to (a12) such that, for example, (a10) 75%>(a11) 50%>(a12) 25%. Further, the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 gradually decreases from (a10) to (a12).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 59 (a13), the shutter is completely closed. When the shutter is closed in (a13), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red with the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 maintaining the same brightness as at the time (a12). Thereafter, the shutter remains closed from FIG. 59(a14) to FIG. 59(a15). In the state where the shutter is kept closed in (a14) and (a15), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red with the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 maintaining the same brightness as at the time (a13).

Thereafter, from (a16) to (a18) in FIG. 60, the screen brightness gradually increases as the shutter gradually opens. When the shutter is open in (a16), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red with the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 maintaining the same brightness as at the time (a15). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 60 (a17), the shutter is further opened and the screen brightness is improved compared to the time (a16). When the shutter is open in (a17), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red with the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 maintaining the same brightness as at the time (a16). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 60 (a18), the shutter is further opened and the screen brightness is improved compared to the time (a17). When the shutter is open in (a18), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red with the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 maintaining the same brightness as at the time (a17).

The screen brightness gradually increases from (a16) to (a17) such that, for example, (a16) 25%<(a17) 50%<(a18) 75%. Further, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red while maintaining the brightness from (a16) to (a18). Then, as shown in FIG. 61 (a19), when the shutter is completely opened, a screen corresponding to SP first half reach A is displayed. When the shutter (a19) is open, the screen brightness is 100%. Furthermore, when the shutter (a19) is open, the game effect lamp 9 is off. Note that it may be "substantially off" instead of "lights off". Further, when the shutter is opened, if it has been determined to move to SP first half reach B, a screen corresponding to SP first half reach B will be displayed. When SP first half reach A is executed from the state of (a19), the process moves to the effect of FIG. 62(b1), and when SP first half reach B is executed from the state of (a19), the effect shown in FIG. Shift to e1) performance.

[Production mode in the inciting part (SP first half reach A)]
With reference to FIGS. 62 to 67, the production mode in the inciting part (SP first half reach A) will be described. The inciting part (SP first half reach A) is the part where the story unfolds in which the ally character Yumu-chan chases the enemy character Bakuchu. In the inciting part (SP first half reach A), a story is told that if Yume-chan can catch Bakuchu, it will be a jackpot, and if Yume-chan can't catch Bakuchu, it will be a loss.

As shown in FIG. 62(b1), in the inciting part in which the SP first half reach A is executed, a title corresponding to the SP first half reach A, "Catch the Bakushu!", is displayed. The title display indicates the content of the performance in the first half of the SP that will be executed from now on. In the state where the title display (b1) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is off. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 62(b2), the title display is erased and an image showing the enemy character Bakuchu landing is displayed. When the title display of (b2) disappears, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in red. Furthermore, at the timing when the image related to the title display in (b2) disappears, the BGM corresponding to the SP first half reach A is output. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 62(b3), an image of the enemy character Bakuchu landing in the center of the screen and posing is displayed. In the state (b3) where the enemy character appears, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 63(b4), an image of a confrontation between the ally character Yumu-chan and the enemy character Bakuchu in the center of the screen is displayed. In the confrontation state of (b4), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green on the left side where Yume-chan is displayed, corresponding to Yume-chan's character. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red on the right side where the Bakushu is displayed, corresponding to the Bakushu character. After that, as shown in (b5), a subtitle display "I found it" corresponding to Yumu-chan's line "I found it" is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the confrontation state of (b5), the left game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in response to Yumu-chan uttering her lines. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 63(b6), a subtitle display "Found" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "Found" is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the confrontation state of (b6), the left game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to the Yume-chan character. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side blinks in red in response to Bakuchu saying his lines.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 64(b7), Yumu-chan, who is an ally character, is displayed enlarged on the screen. Further, as shown in (b7), a subtitle display "I'll catch you!" corresponding to Yumu-chan's line "I'll catch you!" is displayed on the Yume-up screen. In addition, in the state of (b7) where Yume-chan is up, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in response to Yume-chan uttering lines. After that, as shown in (b8), an image of Yumu-chan chasing Bakuchu is displayed. In addition, in the state of chasing Yume (b8), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in response to Yume-chan uttering the line "To". After that, as shown in (b9), an image of Bakuchu running away from Yumu-chan is displayed. Furthermore, in the state of Bakuchu running away (b9), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red in response to Bakuchu uttering the line "Hehehe".

Thereafter, the background of the room is displayed on the screen as shown in FIG. 65 (b10). In the room background state of (b10), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in (b11), an image of Yumu-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (b11), a subtitle display "Wait~" corresponding to Yume-chan's line "Wait~" is displayed on the Yume Chasing screen. In addition, a physical sound (hereinafter referred to as physical sound) of Yume-chan's footsteps, ``zazazaza'', is output in accordance with Yume-chan's video. In addition, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps, ``tatatatat'', is output along with the image of Bakuchu. In addition, in the Yume-chasing state of (b11), the left game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in response to Yume-chan uttering lines. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (b12), an image of Yumu-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is successively displayed. As shown in (b11), the sound of Yume-chan's footsteps "zazazaza" as a physical sound is output in accordance with Yume-chan's video. In addition, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps, ``tatatatat'', is output along with the image of Bakuchu. Further, in the state of Yumemu chasing (b12), the left game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to the character of Yume-chan. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 66 (b13), Bakuchu's back view is displayed, and a part of Yumu-chan's hand is also displayed, resulting in a screen where Bakuchu runs away from Yumu-chan. As shown in (b13), on the screen of Bakuchu running away, the subtitle display "Catch me!" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "Catch me!" is displayed. In addition, the physical sound of Yume-chan's footsteps, ``zazazaza'', is output in conjunction with Yume-chan's video. In addition, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps, ``tatatatat'', is output along with the image of Bakuchu. Furthermore, in the state of (b13) in which Bakuchu runs away, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red in response to Bakuchu uttering lines.

After that, as shown in FIG. 66 (b14), an image of Bakuchu on the right side of the screen jumping to escape from Yumu-chan on the left side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (b14), Bakuchu's jumping sound "pyon" is output as a pseudo sound (hereinafter referred to as onomatopoeia) in accordance with the video of Bakuchu's jump. Furthermore, in the Bakuchu jumping state (b14), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white twice in response to the Bakuchu jumping. Thereafter, as shown in (b15), the enemy character Bakuchu is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Further, as shown in (b15), on the Baku Chew Up screen, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red corresponding to the Baku Chew character.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 67 (b16), Yumu-chan, who is an ally character, is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Further, as shown in (b16), on the Yume-up screen, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to the Yume-chan character. After that, as shown in (b17), an image of Yumu-chan jumping towards Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (b17), Yume-chan's line "Toriya~!" is output on the Yume Jump screen. Furthermore, in the state of Yume-Yume jumping (b17), the BGM is turned off and the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times in response to Yume-chan jumping.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 67 (b18), a screen is displayed in which Yumu-chan is displayed in an enlarged manner for deciding whether or not to accept the decision. In addition, in the scene before the decision of success or failure (b18), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the white lighting so as to correspond to the scene of the decision of success or failure. Since the scene before the decision is made is muted, it is easy to understand that the scene is a branching scene of the decision. In the state of (b18), if it has been determined that there will be a jackpot in the SP first half reach A, the process moves to the performance of (c1). In the state of (b18), if it is determined that the SP first half reach A will be a loss, the process moves to the performance of (d1). If it is determined that the state of (b18) will develop to SP reach in the latter half, the state shifts to the performance of (h1).

[Production mode in the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A)]
The production mode in the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A) will be explained with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69. The winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A) is a part where it is announced that the story of Yumu-chan catching Bakuchu unfolds and the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 68 (c1), in the hit epilogue part of the first half of the SP Reach A, an image of Yumu-chan catching Bakuchu's tail with her hand is displayed. In addition, in the state of (c1) where Bakuchu is caught, a physical sound of Yumu-chan catching "Bashi!" is output in accordance with the video of Yumu-chan catching Bakuchu. Further, in the state of catching a Bakushu (c1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in a white color brighter than the white color of (tb18) indicating the lighting mode of (b18) in response to catching a Bakushu.

After that, as shown in FIG. 68(c2), an image of Yumu-chan, who caught the Bakuchu, giving the buoy sign is displayed. As shown in (c2), in the state of catching Bakushu, the subtitle display ``Rakusho yo!'' corresponding to Yumu-chan's line ``Rakusho yo!'' is displayed. Further, in the state (c2), the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in a rainbow color to indicate that a jackpot has been won. Hereinafter, smooth lighting in rainbow colors will also be referred to as rainbow lighting (smooth). Furthermore, in the state (c2), BGM for winning is output. After that, as shown in (c3), an image of Yumu-chan, who caught Bakuchu, giving a buoy sign is displayed as a still image in the style of a comic book. In the still image state of (c3), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a rainbow manner (smoothly).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 69(c4), a symbol display effect is executed in which the decorative symbol combination "222" indicating the jackpot display result is displayed in a large size on the screen. As shown in (c4), the "222" symbol is enlarged and emphasized by the concentrated lines in the symbol display. In the state of displaying symbols (c4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in bright white. Thereafter, as shown in (c5), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than in the state of (c4). In the state of displaying symbols (c5), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (c6), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced in size than the state in (c5) and displayed in the normal size. In the state of 2 symbols (normal size) of (c6), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) lighting mode.

[Production style in the losing epilogue part (SP first half reach A)]
With reference to FIGS. 70 and 71, the effect mode in the loss epilogue part (SP first half reach A) will be explained. The lose-lose epilogue part (SP first half reach A) is the part where it is announced that the story of Yumu-chan not being able to catch the Bakushu unfolds and that the game will not be controlled by the jackpot game state.

As shown in FIG. 70 (d1), in the loss epilogue part of the first half of the SP Reach A, an image of Yumu-chan failing to catch the Bakuchu is displayed. In addition, in the state of (d1) where Bakuchu cannot be caught, the onomatopoeic sound "Sukak" that Yumu-chan was unable to catch is output in conjunction with the video of Yumu-chan failing to catch Bakuchu. In addition, in the state of (d1) in which the Bakushu cannot be caught, the game effect lamp 9 changes to a darker white than the lighting mode (tb18) of (b18) in response to the failure to catch the Bakushu. Lights up in white.

After that, as shown in FIG. 70 (d2), an image is displayed in which Yumu-chan, who was unable to catch Bakuchu, is kneeling in regret, and Bakuchu is happy. As shown in (d2), in the disappointing state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a white color darker than the white color (td1) showing the lighting mode in (d1). Thereafter, as shown in (d3), the screen is darkened. In the screen darkening state of (d3), the game effect lamp 9 is turned off. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 71(d4), the symbol "232", which is a losing symbol combination, is displayed on the normal screen. In the state where the normal screen (d4) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in the same background yellow lighting pattern as (ta1) showing the lighting mode of (a1).

[Production style in the inciting part (SP first half reach B)]
With reference to FIGS. 72 to 77, the production mode in the inciting part (SP first half reach B) will be explained. The inciting part (SP first half reach B) is the part where the story unfolds in which the ally character Yumu-chan and the enemy character Boingo face off in a hockey game. In the incitement part (SP first half reach B), a story is developed that incites that if Yume-chan wins against Boingo, it will be a jackpot, and if Yume-chan loses to Boingo, it will be a loss.

As shown in FIG. 72(e1), in the inciting part in which SP first half reach B is executed, a title corresponding to SP first half reach B with "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" is displayed. The title display indicates the content of the performance in the first half of the SP that will be executed from now on. In the state where the title display (e1) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is off. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 72(e2), an image is displayed in which the screen is cracked and the title display is erased. In the state (e2) where the screen is cracked and the title display has disappeared, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green. Thereafter, as shown in (e3), an image of the opposing characters appearing on the screen is displayed, in which the ally character Yumu-chan and the enemy character Boingo appear on the screen. In the state (e3) where the opponent character appears, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 73(e4), an image of a confrontation between the friendly character Yumu-chan in the front left of the screen and the enemy character Boingo in the back right of the screen is displayed. In the confrontation state (e4), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green on the left side where Yume-chan is displayed, corresponding to Yume-chan's character. Further, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in cream color on the right side where Boingo is displayed, corresponding to the Boingo character. Furthermore, at the timing when the title display (e4) disappears, BGM corresponding to SP first half reach B is output. After that, as shown in (e5), a subtitle display ``I won't lose'' corresponding to Yumu-chan's line ``I won't lose'' is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the confrontation state (e5), the left game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in response to Yumu-chan uttering her lines. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in cream color corresponding to the Boingo character.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 73(e6), a subtitle display "Come on, come on," corresponding to Boingo's line "Come on," is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the confrontation state of (e6), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in green corresponding to Yumu-chan's character. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side flashes in cream color in response to Boingo uttering lines.

After that, as shown in FIG. 74 (e7), an image of Yumu-chan, who is an ally character, hitting a puck is displayed. Furthermore, as shown in (e7), on the screen that is Yumu-chan's turn, Yumu-chan's line "Ya~" is output. Furthermore, in the state of Yumu-chan (e7), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in response to Yumu-chan uttering lines. Thereafter, as shown in (e8), the puck hit by Yumu-chan is displayed in an enlarged manner. In addition, in the pack display state (e8), the game effect lamp 9 blinks twice in white in response to the physical sound "shoo" of the pack operating. After that, as shown in (e9), an image of Boingo blocking Yumu-chan's pack is displayed. Further, in the state of preventing Boingo (e9), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in cream color corresponding to the Boingo character.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 75 (e10), an image of the puck flying in the air is displayed. In the state of (e10) dancing in the puck, the physical sound of the puck rotating "shururu" is output. Further, in the state (e10), the left game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to the character Yumu-chan. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in cream color corresponding to the Boingo character. Thereafter, as shown in (e11), an image of Boingo, the enemy character, hitting the puck is displayed. Further, as shown in (e11), on the screen that is Boingo's turn, Boingo's line "Yoisho~" is output. Furthermore, in the Boingo turn state (e11), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in cream color in response to Boingo uttering lines. Thereafter, as shown in (e12), the puck hit by Boingo is displayed in an enlarged manner. Furthermore, in the pack display state of (e12), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times in response to the physical sound "shoo" of the pack operating.

After that, as shown in FIG. 76 (e13), Yumu-chan is damaged by being directly hit by the pack, and an image is displayed in which electricity is running and her bones are visible. As shown in (e13), in the state of Yumu damage, Yumu-chan's line "Wow" is output. Furthermore, in the state of Yumemu damage (e13), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white twice in response to Yumeme receiving damage. After that, as shown in (e14), an image of Yumu-chan being damaged and electricity running through her bones is displayed. Furthermore, in the state of Yumemu damage (e14), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white twice in response to Yumeme receiving damage. After that, as shown in (e15), an image of Yumu-chan being damaged and electricity running through her bones is displayed with the same content as (e13). Furthermore, in the state of Yumemu damage (e15), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white twice in response to Yumeme receiving damage.

After that, as shown in FIG. 77 (e16), an image of Yumu-chan being damaged and electricity running through her bones is displayed with the same content as (e14). Further, in the state of Yumu-chan damage (e16), the BGM is turned off and the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white twice in response to Yumu-chan receiving damage. After that, as shown in (e17), the scene before the decision is made where the state in which Yumu-chan has been damaged is displayed. In the scene before the determination of success or failure (e17), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the white lighting so as to correspond to the scene before the determination of success or failure. Since the scene before the decision is made is muted, it is easy to understand that the scene is a branching scene of the decision. In the state of (e17), if it has been determined that there will be a jackpot in the SP first half reach B, the process moves to the performance of (f1). If it is determined from the state of (e17) that there will be a loss in the first half of SP reach B, the process moves to the performance of (g1). If it is determined that the state of (e17) will develop to SP reach in the latter half, the state shifts to the performance of (h1).

[Production mode in the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B)]
With reference to FIGS. 78 to 80, the production mode in the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B) will be explained. The winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B) is a part where it is announced that the story of Yumu-chan's victory over Boingo unfolds and the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 78 (f1), in the first half of the SP reach B hit epilogue part, an image of Yumu-chan hitting the puck back is displayed. Further, in the state of the Yumu attack (f1) in which Yumu-chan attacks by hitting the puck back, a subtitle display "Go!" corresponding to Yumu-chan's line "Go!" is displayed. In addition, in the state of Yumu attack (f1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in a white color brighter than the white color of (te17) indicating the lighting mode of (e17) in response to Yumu-chan's attack. do.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 78 (f2), an image of Boingo being blown away by Yumu-chan's attack is displayed. As shown in (f2), in the state of being attacked by Boingo, a subtitle display "Wow!" corresponding to Boingo's line "Wow!" is displayed. Further, in the state (f2), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a rainbow direction (smoothly) indicating that a jackpot has been won. Furthermore, in the state (f2), BGM for winning is output. After that, as shown in (f3), an image of Yumu-chan doing a fist pump and Boingo falling down is displayed. As shown in (f3), in the state of Yumu-chan's victory, a subtitle display ``Easy victory!'' corresponding to Yumu-chan's line ``Easy victory!'' is displayed. Further, in the state (f3), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a rainbow manner (smoothly).

Thereafter, as shown in (f4), the image of Yumu Shoshi is displayed as a still image in the style of a comic book. In the still image state of (f4), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a rainbow manner (smoothly). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 79 (f5), a symbol display effect is executed in which the decorative symbol combination "222" indicating the jackpot display result is displayed in a large size on the screen. As shown in (f5), the symbol "222" is enlarged and emphasized by the concentrated line in the symbol display. In the state of displaying symbols (f5), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (f6), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than in (f5). In the state of displaying symbols (f6), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 80 (f7), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced in size than the state in (f6) and displayed in the normal size. In the state of 2 symbols (normal size) (f7), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) lighting mode.

[Production style in the losing epilogue part (SP first half reach B)]
With reference to FIGS. 81 and 82, the effect mode in the losing epilogue part (SP first half reach B) will be explained. The loss epilogue part (SP first half reach B) is a part where the story of Yumu-chan being defeated by Boingo unfolds and it is announced that the game will not be controlled by the jackpot game state.

As shown in FIG. 81 (g1), in the loss epilogue part of reach B in the first half of the SP, an image of Yumu-chan being blown away after being attacked by Boingo is displayed. As shown in (g1), in the state of Yume-chan being blown away, the game effect lamp 9 is darker than the white color of (te17) indicating the lighting mode of (e17) in response to Yume-chan being blown away. Lights up in white. After that, as shown in (g2), an image of Yumu-chan flying further away than in the state (g1) is displayed. As shown in (g2), in the state of Yume-chan being blown away, the game effect lamp 9 is darker than the white color of (te17) indicating the lighting mode of (e17) in response to Yume-chan being blown away. Lights up in white.

After that, as shown in FIG. 81 (g3), an image of Yumu-chan kneeling down in regret after being defeated by Boingo and Boingo smiling is displayed. As shown in (g3), in the regrettable state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a white color darker than the white color of (tg1) and (tg2) indicating the lighting modes of (g1) and (g2). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 82 (g4), the screen is darkened. In the screen darkening state of (g4), the game effect lamp 9 is turned off. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 82 (g5), the symbol "232" which is a losing symbol combination is displayed on the normal screen. In the state where the normal screen (g5) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in the same background yellow lighting pattern as (ta1) showing the lighting mode of (a1).

[Production style in the character movement part (second half development)]
With reference to FIG. 83, the performance mode in the accessory action part (second half development) will be described.

As shown in FIG. 83 (h1), when developing from SP first half reach A or SP first half reach B to SP second half reach A, SP second half reach B, or SP strongest reach, the accessory The movable body 32 operates. Specifically, an effect is performed in which the accessory falls from the top of the screen toward the front of the screen while tilting diagonally. As shown in (h1), a radial effect image is displayed on the screen at the beginning of the falling of the accessory. Due to the effect image, Yumu-chan's character and the reduced "2" decorative pattern are no longer visible. Further, in the state (h1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red in accordance with the falling of the accessory.

Thereafter, in the state (h2), the accessory falls further from the state (h1). In the state (h2), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red in accordance with the falling of the accessory. After that, in the state of (h3), the accessory is further moved so that the letter "P" among the characters of the accessory is located at a position that overlaps with the place where the reduced decorative pattern of "2" was displayed. Fall. In the state (h3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. An effect in which the accessory rises from the state of (h3) is executed. If it has been determined that the SP will develop into second half reach A after the rise of the accessory, the transition is made to the production (i1). If it has been determined that the SP will develop into second half reach B after the rise of the accessory, the process moves to the production of (n1). If it has been determined that the SP will develop into the final reach after the accessory rises, the process moves to the production (r1).

[Production mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach A)]
With reference to FIGS. 84 to 96, the production mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach A) will be described. The inciting part (SP second half reach A) is a part in which the story unfolds in which the ally characters Yumu-chan and Jam-chan chase the enemy character Bakuchu. In the inciting part (SP second half reach A), a story is told that if Yume-chan and Jam-chan can catch Bakuchu, it will be a jackpot, and if Yumu-chan and Jam-chan can't catch Bakuchu, it will be a loss. Ru.

As shown in FIG. 84 (i1), in the inciting part in which the SP second half reach A is executed, a title corresponding to the SP second half reach A, "Catch the Bakushu!", is displayed. The title display indicates the contents of the SP second half reach performance that will be executed from now on. In the state where the title display (i1) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in yellow. Thereafter, as shown in (i2), an image of a confrontation between the friendly characters Yumu-chan and Jam-chan (characters on the far left) and the enemy character Bakuchu is displayed in the center of the screen. In the confrontation state (i2), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white on the left side where Yume-chan and Jam-chan are displayed, corresponding to the two characters. Further, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red on the right side where the Bakushu is displayed, corresponding to the Bakushu character. Furthermore, at the timing when the image related to the title display (i2) disappears, the BGM corresponding to the SP second half reach A is output. After that, as shown in (i3), a subtitle display ``I won't let you escape!'' corresponding to Yumu-chan's line ``I won't let you escape!'' is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the confrontation state (i3), the left game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in response to Yumu-chan uttering her lines. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 85 (i4), a subtitle display ``I'll help you too!'' corresponding to Jam-chan's line ``I'll help you too!'' is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the confrontation state (i4), the left game effect lamp 9 blinks in purple in response to Jam-chan's lines. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character. After that, as shown in (i5), a subtitle display ``I'll run away again!'' corresponding to Bakuchu's line ``I'll run away again!'' is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the confrontation state (i5), the left game effect lamp 9 lights up in white corresponding to the two characters Yumu-chan and Jam-chan. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side blinks in red in response to Bakuchu saying his lines.

After that, as shown in FIG. 85 (i6), when Jam-chan is displayed, a subtitle display "I'll catch you!" corresponding to Jam-chan's line "I'll catch you!" is displayed. In the jam display state of (i6), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in purple in response to Jam-chan's lines being uttered. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 86 (i7), when Yumu-chan is displayed, a subtitle display "Let's go" corresponding to Yumu-chan's line "Let's go" is displayed. In the dream display state of (i7), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in response to Yume-chan uttering lines.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 86 (i8), when Bakuchu is displayed, a subtitle display "Come on!" corresponding to the line "Come on!" of Bakuchu is displayed. In the Bakuchu display state (i8), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in red in response to the Bakuchu uttering lines. After that, as shown in (i9), when an image of Jam-chan chasing Bakuchu is displayed, a subtitle display "Wait!" corresponding to Jam-chan's line "Wait!" is displayed. In the jam chasing state (i9), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in purple in response to Jam-chan uttering lines.

After that, as shown in FIG. 87 (i10), when an image of Bakuchu running away from Jam-chan is displayed, the sound of Bakuchu's footsteps "tatatap" is output as a physical sound. Further, in the state (i10) where the Bakushu is running away, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in red in response to the Bakushu running away. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 87 (i11), the background of the room is displayed on the screen. In the room background state (i11), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in (i12), an image of Jam-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is displayed. Further, as shown in (i12), a subtitle display "Wait!" corresponding to Jam-chan's line "Wait!" is displayed on the Jam Chasing screen. As shown in (i12), Jam-chan's footsteps "Za-Za-Za" as a physical sound are output in accordance with Jam-chan's image. In addition, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps, ``tatatatat'', is output along with the image of Bakuchu. In addition, in the jam chasing state (i12), the left game effect lamp 9 flashes in purple in response to Jam-chan uttering lines. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 88 (i13), an image of Jam-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is successively displayed. As shown in (i13), Jam-chan's footsteps "za-za-za-za" as a physical sound are outputted in accordance with Jam-chan's image. In addition, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps, ``tatatatat'', is output along with the image of Bakuchu. Furthermore, in the jam chasing state (i13), the left game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple corresponding to the character of Jam-chan. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character. After that, as shown in (i14), an image of Jam-chan jumping and pouncing on Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (i14), in the jam jump state, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times in response to the fact that Jam-chan is jumping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 88 (i15), an image of Bakuchu on the right side of the screen jumping to escape from Jam-chan on the left side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (i15), Bakuchu's jumping sound "Pyon" is output as an onomatopoeic sound in conjunction with the video of Bakuchu's jump. Further, in the Bakuchu jumping state (i15), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white twice in response to the Bakuchu jumping. After that, as shown in FIG. 89 (i16), an image of Jam-chan failing to catch Bakuchu is displayed. In addition, in the state of not being able to catch Bakuchu (i16), the subtitle display ``I can't catch you'' corresponding to Jam-chan's line ``I can't catch you'' is displayed. Additionally, in conjunction with the video of Jam-chan failing to catch Bakuchu, the onomatopoeic sound ``Sukak'' that Jam-chan was unable to catch is output. Furthermore, in the state (i16) where Bakuchu cannot be caught, the game effect lamp 9 on the left side flashes in purple in response to Jam-chan uttering lines. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 89 (i17), when Yumu-chan is displayed, the subtitle display "Next is me!" corresponding to Yumu-chan's line "Next is me!" is displayed. . In the dream display state of (i17), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in response to Yume-chan uttering lines. After that, as shown in (i18), an image of Yumu-chan chasing Bakuchu is displayed. In the Bakuchu chasing state (i18), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in response to Yumu-chan's movement.

After that, as shown in FIG. 90 (i19), when an image of Bakuchu running away from Yumu-chan is displayed, the sound of Bakuchu's footsteps "tatatatat" is output as a physical sound. In addition, in the state (i19) where the Bakushu is running away, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red in response to the Bakushu running away. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 90 (i20), the background of the room is displayed on the screen. In the state of the room background (i20), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in (i21), an image of Yumu-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (i21), the subtitle display ``Wait!'' corresponding to Yumu-chan's line ``Wait!'' is displayed on the Yume Chasing screen. Further, as shown in (i21), the sound of Yume-chan's footsteps "Zazazaza" as a physical sound is output in accordance with Yume-chan's video. In addition, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps, ``tatatatat'', is output along with the image of Bakuchu. In addition, in the state of chasing Yume (i21), the left game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in response to Yume-chan uttering lines. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 91 (i22), an image of Yumu-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is successively displayed. As shown in (i22), the sound of Yume-chan's footsteps "Zazazaza" as a physical sound is output in accordance with Yume-chan's video. In addition, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps, ``tatatatat'', is output along with the image of Bakuchu. In addition, in the state of chasing Yume (i22), the left game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to Yume-chan's character. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character. After that, as shown in (i23), an image of Yumu-chan jumping towards Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (i23), in the state of Yumu-chan jumping, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white three times in response to Yumu-chan jumping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 91 (i24), an image of Bakuchu on the right side of the screen jumping to escape from Jam-chan on the left side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (i24), Bakuchu's jumping sound "Pyon" is output as an onomatopoeic sound in conjunction with the video of Bakuchu's jump. Further, in the Bakuchu jumping state (i24), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white twice in response to the Bakuchu jumping. After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (i25), an image in which Yumu-chan was unable to catch Bakuchu is displayed. In addition, in the state of not being able to catch Bakuchu in (i25), the subtitle display ``I can't catch you'' corresponding to Yumu-chan's line ``I can't catch you'' is displayed. Additionally, in conjunction with the video of Yumu-chan not being able to catch Bakuchu, the onomatopoeic sound "Sukak" that Yumu-chan was unable to catch is output. Furthermore, in the state (i25) where Bakuchu cannot be caught, the game effect lamp 9 on the left side flashes in green in response to Yumu-chan uttering lines. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (i26), two allies, Yumu-chan and Jam-chan, are displayed. As shown in (i26), when two allies are displayed, a subtitle display "Next time, two people!" corresponding to the two allies' dialogue "Next time, two people!" is displayed. In the state of displaying two allies (i26), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side flashes in purple in response to Jam-chan's lines. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side blinks in green in response to Yumu-chan uttering lines. After that, as shown in (i27), Yumu-chan is displayed enlarged on the screen. In addition, in the state of (i27) Yume-up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to the Yume-chan character.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 93 (i28), Jam-chan is enlarged and displayed on the left side of the screen, and Yumu-chan is displayed on the right side of the screen. As shown in (i28), in the state of Yumu and Jam Up, the left game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple corresponding to the Jam-chan character. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in green corresponding to the Yumu-chan character. After that, as shown in (i29), an image of Yumu-chan and Jam-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (i29), when two characters are chasing each other, the left game effect lamp 9 lights up in white corresponding to the two characters. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 30 (i30), an image of Yumu-chan and Jam-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is successively displayed. In (i30), an image in which the two people are closer to Bakushu than in (i29) is displayed. As shown in (i30), the physical sound of Yume-chan and Jam-chan's footsteps ``za-za-za'' is output along with the images of Yume-chan and Jam-chan. In addition, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps, ``tatatatat'', is output along with the image of Bakuchu. Further, in the state of (i30) where two players are chasing each other, the left game effect lamp 9 lights up in white corresponding to the two characters. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94 (i31), Jam-chan is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Further, as shown in (i31), on the Jam Up screen, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple corresponding to the Jam-chan character. After that, as shown in (i32), an image of Jam-chan jumping towards Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (i32), Jam-chan's line "Wow" is output on the Jam Jump screen. Further, in the jam jumping state (i32), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in purple in response to Jam-chan jumping.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 94 (i33), Yumu-chan is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Further, as shown in (i33), on the Yume-up screen, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to the Yume-chan character. After that, as shown in FIG. 95 (i34), an image of Yumu-chan jumping towards Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (i35), Yumu-chan's line "Wow" is output on the Yumu Jump screen. Furthermore, in the state of Yume-Yume jumping (i34), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in response to Yume-chan jumping. After that, as shown in (i35), an image of Yumu-chan and Jam-chan jumping towards Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (i35), in a two-person jump state, a subtitle display ``Wait!'' corresponding to the lines ``Wait!'' from two allies is displayed. In the two-player jumping state (i35), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times in response to the two players jumping.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 95 (i36), an image of Yume-chan and Jam-chan jumping is displayed as still image 1. In the state of two people jumping (i36), the BGM is turned off and the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white in response to the fact that two people are jumping. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 96 (i37), an image of Yume-chan and Jam-chan jumping is displayed as still image 2. In the two-player jumping state (i37), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white in response to the two players jumping. Thereafter, as shown in (i38), an image of Yumu-chan and Jam-chan jumping is displayed as still image 3. In the two-player jumping state (i38), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white in response to the two players jumping.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 96 (i39), an image of Yumu-chan and Jam-chan jumping is displayed as still image 4 in a scene before the determination of validity. In the scene before the determination of success or failure (i39), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the white lighting so as to correspond to the scene before the determination of success or failure. Since the scene before the decision is made is muted, it is easy to understand that the scene is a branching scene of the decision. If it has been determined from the state (i39) that there will be a jackpot in reach A in the second half of the SP, the process shifts to the performance (j1). In the state of (i39), if it has been determined that the second half of the SP will be a loss in reach A or that it will be a relief hit, the process moves to the performance of (k1).

[Production mode in the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach A)]
With reference to FIGS. 97 and 98, the production mode in the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach A) will be explained. The winning epilogue part (SP second half reach A) is a part in which it is announced that the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state as the story of Yumu-chan and Jam-chan catching Bakuchu unfolds.

As shown in FIG. 97 (j1), in the hit epilogue part of reach A in the second half of the SP, an image of Yumu-chan and Jam-chan catching Bakuchu's tail with their hands is displayed. In addition, in the (j1) state of catching Bakuchu, the physical sound of Yumu-chan and Jam-chan catching ``Bashi!'' is output in conjunction with the video of Yumu-chan and Jam-chan catching Bakuchu. In addition, in the state of (j1) of catching a Bakuchu, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in a white color brighter than the white color of (ti39) indicating the lighting mode of (i39) in response to catching a Bakuchu.

After that, as shown in FIG. 97 (j2), Yumu-chan, who caught Bakuchu, makes a buoy sign, and an image of Jam-chan sitting on Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (j2), in the state of catching Bakushu, the subtitle display ``It was a shame!'' corresponding to Jam-chan's line ``It was a shame!'' is displayed. Further, in the state (j2), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a rainbow direction (smoothly) indicating that a jackpot has been won. Also, in the state (j2), BGM for winning is output. After that, as shown in (j3), Yumu-chan who caught Bakuchu makes a buoy sign, and an image of Jam-chan sitting on Bakuchu is displayed as a still image in the style of a comic book. In the still image state of (j3), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a rainbow manner (smoothly).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 98 (j4), a symbol display effect is executed in which the decorative symbol combination "222" indicating the jackpot display result is displayed in a large size on the screen. As shown in (j4), the symbol "222" is enlarged in the symbol display, and the symbol is emphasized by concentrated lines. In the state of displaying symbols (j4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (j5), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than in (j4). In the state of displaying symbols (j5), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (j6), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced in size than the state in (j5) and displayed in the normal size. In the state of the two symbols (normal size) (j6), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) lighting mode.

[Production style in the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach A)]
With reference to FIGS. 99 to 100, the production mode in the loss epilogue part (SP second half reach A) will be explained. The loss epilogue part (SP second half reach A) is the part where the story of Yumu-chan and Jam-chan not being able to catch the Bakushu unfolds, and it is announced that the game will not be controlled by the jackpot game state.

As shown in FIG. 99 (k1), in the loss epilogue part of Reach A in the second half of the SP, an image of Yumu-chan and Jam-chan failing to catch Bakuchu is displayed. In addition, in the state of (k1) where Bakuchu could not be caught, the onomatopoeic sound ``sukak'' is output along with the video of Yumu-chan and Jam-chan failing to catch Bakuchu. In addition, in the state of (k1) where the Bakushu cannot be caught, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in a color darker than the white of (ti39) indicating the lighting mode of (i39) in response to the failure to catch the Bakushu. Lights up in white.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 99(k2), the Bakushu is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Further, as shown in (k2), on the Bakushu-up screen, a subtitle display "Usssssss!" corresponding to the line "Usssssssssssssssssssssssssssss" in Bakusshu is displayed. In the explosive chew-up state of (k2), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a white color darker than the white color of (tk1) indicating the lighting mode of (k1). After that, as shown in (k3), an image of Yumu-chan and Jam-chan kneeling down and disappointed in not being able to catch Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (k3), in the regrettable state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a white color darker than the white color in (tk1) indicating the lighting mode in (k1). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 100 (k4), the screen is darkened. In the screen darkening state (k4), the game effect lamp 9 is turned off. Thereafter, as shown in (k5), the symbol "232", which is a losing symbol combination, is displayed on the normal screen. In the state where the normal screen (k5) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in the same background yellow lighting pattern as (ta1) showing the lighting mode of (a1). From the state (k5), if it has been determined that the game will be rescued, the process moves to the performance (v1).

[Production mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach B)]
With reference to FIGS. 101 to 109, the presentation mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach B) will be described. The inciting part (SP second half reach B) is a part in which a story develops in which ally characters Jam-chan and Nana-chan confront the enemy character crab robot. In the incitement part (SP second half reach B), a story is developed in which Jam-chan and Nana-chan incite that if the crab robot beats Boingo, they will win the jackpot, and if Jam-chan and Nana-chan lose to the crab robot, they will lose.

As shown in FIG. 101 (n1), in the inciting part in which the SP second half reach B is executed, a title corresponding to the SP second half reach B, "Gekushin Robo Battle", is displayed. The title display indicates the content of the performance in the second half of the SP that will be executed from now on. Below the title display, the number of stars indicates the expected jackpot in this reach. Note that this display indicating the jackpot expectation level may be displayed at another SP reach. In the state where the title display (n1) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in yellow. Thereafter, as shown in (n2), an image of a confrontation between friendly characters Jam-chan and Nana-chan (leftmost characters) and an enemy character crab robot is displayed. As shown in (n2), on the screen where the characters are facing each other, a subtitle display ``I will not lose!'' is displayed corresponding to the lines ``I will not lose!'' of the two allies. In the confrontation state (n2), the left game effect lamp 9 blinks in white in response to the two players saying their lines. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the crab character. Further, at the timing when the image related to the title display (n2) disappears, the BGM corresponding to the second half of the SP reach B is output.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 101 (n3), an image of a crab attack in which the enemy character crab shoots a beam is displayed. Furthermore, in the crab attack state (n3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white twice in response to the crab attack. After that, as shown in FIG. 102 (n4), an image of Jam-chan and Nana-chan running away from the crab's beam is displayed. As shown in (n4), on the screen where the two people are running away, a subtitle display "Kya!" corresponding to the two allies' lines "Kya!" is displayed. In the state (n4) of two people running away, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times in response to the action of two people running away.

After that, as shown in FIG. 102 (n5), an image of Jam-chan and Nana-chan running into a hollow in a rocky area to escape from the crab's beam is displayed. In the two-person jump state (n5), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. Thereafter, as shown in (n6), an image of the beam passing over the rocky area is displayed. In the state where the beam (n6) is passing, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in FIG. 103 (n7), an image of Jam-chan and Nana-chan relaxing in the shadow of a rocky area is displayed. As shown in (n7), on the screen where the two people are relieved, a subtitle display "Haaha" corresponding to Jam's line "Haaha" is displayed. In the confrontation state (n7), the left game effect lamp 9 blinks in purple in response to Jam-chan's lines. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in pink color corresponding to Nana's character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 103 (n8), Jam-chan is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Further, as shown in (n8), a subtitle display ``It's my turn!'' corresponding to Jam-chan's line ``It's my turn!'' is displayed on the Jam Up screen. Furthermore, in the jam-up state (n8), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in purple in response to Jam-chan uttering lines. After that, as shown in (n9), an image of Jam-chan attacking the crab using the technique described by Delta Break is displayed. Further, in the jam attack state (n9), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in purple in response to Jam-chan uttering the line "Delta Break".

After that, as shown in FIG. 104 (n10), an image of the crab being damaged by Jam-chan's attack is displayed. Furthermore, in the crab attack state (n10), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red in response to the crab uttering the line "Gununu~". After that, as shown in (n11), an image of a confrontation between Jam-chan and Nana-chan and the crab is displayed. In the confrontation state of (n11), the left game effect lamp 9 lights up in white corresponding to the two characters. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the crab character. Thereafter, as shown in (n12), an image of a crab attack in which the enemy character crab shoots a beam is displayed. Furthermore, in the crab attack state (n12), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white twice in response to the crab attack.

After that, as shown in FIG. 105 (n13), an image of Jam-chan and Nana-chan running away from the crab's beam is displayed. As shown in (n13), on the screen where the two people are running away, a subtitle display "Kya!" corresponding to the two allies' lines "Kya!" is displayed. In the state of (n13) where two people run away, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times in response to the two people running away. After that, as shown in (n14), an image of the beam approaching Jam-chan and Nana-chan is displayed. In the beam state of (n14), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in (n15), an image of Jam-chan and Nana-chan receiving damage from the crab's beam is displayed. Further, in the state (n15) in which two players receive damage, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times in response to the fact that two players have received damage.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 106 (n16), an image of Jam-chan and Nana-chan standing up after receiving damage is displayed. As shown in (n16), on the screen where the two people stand up, a subtitle display "From now on!" corresponding to the two allies' lines "From now on!" is displayed. In the state of (n16) where two people stand up, the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in purple corresponding to the character of Jam-chan. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in pink color corresponding to Nana's character. After that, as shown in (n17), Nana-chan is displayed enlarged on the screen. Further, in the Nana-up state (n17), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in pink color corresponding to Nana's character. After that, as shown in (n18), a screen in which Nana-chan offers a prayer is displayed. Nana-chan's prayer movement is performed to confuse the enemy. Furthermore, in the state of Nana's prayer (n18), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in pink in response to Nana's praying motion.

After that, as shown in FIG. 107 (n19), an image of the crab being confused by Nana's prayer performance is displayed. Furthermore, in the state of crab confusion (n19), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times in response to the crab's confusing movement. After that, as shown in (n20), an image of the crab recovering from the confusion and getting angry is displayed. In the crab angry state (n20), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red corresponding to the crab character. After that, as shown in (n21), an image of a crab waving its arms to attack is displayed. Further, in the crab attack state (n21), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red in response to the crab attack.

After that, as shown in FIG. 108 (n22), an image of Nana receiving damage similar to that of a crab attack is displayed. Further, in the state of Nana receiving damage (n22), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times in response to Nana receiving damage. After that, as shown in (n23), an image of Jam-chan holding and operating the remote control is displayed. As shown in (n23), the subtitle display ``Leave it to me!'' corresponding to Jam's line ``Leave it to me!'' is displayed on the Jam remote control operation screen. Furthermore, in the Jam remote control operation state (n23), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in purple in response to Jam-chan uttering lines. After that, as shown in (n24), an image of Jam-chan trying to press a button on the remote control is displayed. As shown in (n24), in the Jam remote control operation state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple in response to Jam operating the remote control.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 109 (n25), an effect in which a hand appears from the sky is performed. As shown in (n25), the game effect lamp 9 blinks twice in white when the hand is out of the sky. After that, as shown in (n26), an image of a hand extending from the sky going to catch a crab is displayed. As shown in (n26), while the player is going to catch crabs, the BGM is turned off and the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white. Thereafter, as shown in (n27), the scene before the decision of whether the decision is made or not, in which an enlarged image of the crab and hand is displayed. In the scene before the determination of success or failure (n27), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the white lighting so as to correspond to the scene before the determination of success or failure. Since the scene before the decision is made is muted, it is easy to understand that the scene is a branching scene of the decision. From the state of (n27), if it has been determined that there will be a jackpot in reach B in the second half of the SP, the process shifts to the performance of (o1). In the state of (n27), if it has been determined that the second half of the SP will be a loss in reach B or that it will be a relief hit, the process moves to the performance of (p1).

[Production mode in the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B)]
With reference to FIGS. 110 to 112, the effect mode in the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B) will be explained. The winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B) is a part in which it is announced that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state as the story of Jam-chan and Nana-chan winning against the crab robot unfolds.

As shown in FIG. 110 (o1), in the hit epilogue part of reach B in the second half of the SP, an image of a hand reaching out from the sky and catching a crab is displayed. Further, as shown in (o1), on the screen where the crab is caught, a subtitle display "Yareta~" corresponding to the crab's line "Yareta ~" is displayed. In addition, in the crab catching state (o1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in a white color brighter than the white color of (tn27) indicating the lighting mode of (n27) in response to catching a crab. Thereafter, as shown in (o2), an image of the caught crab installed as a shop sign is displayed. Also, (o2) in the state of the shop where the crab is the signboard, the game effect lamp 9 turns on in a rainbow light (smoothly) indicating that the player has won the jackpot. Also, in the state (o2), BGM for winning is output.

After that, as shown in FIG. 110 (o3), a screen appears in which Jam-chan and Nana-chan are displayed in front of a shop whose signboard is a crab. Further, as shown in (o3), on the screen of a shop with a crab as a signboard, a subtitle display ``Nice signboard'' corresponding to Jam-chan's line ``Nice signboard'' is displayed. Further, in the state of the shop (o3) where the crab is the signboard, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a rainbow direction (smoothly). After that, as shown in FIG. 111 (o4), the screen continues where Jam-chan and Nana-chan are displayed in front of a shop whose signboard is a crab. Furthermore, as shown in (o4), a subtitle display ``Work hard'' corresponding to Nana's line ``Work hard'' is displayed on the screen of a shop with a crab as a signboard. Further, in the state of the shop (o4) where the crab is the signboard, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a rainbow direction (smoothly). Thereafter, as shown in (o5), an image of a shop with a crab as a signboard is displayed as a still image in the style of a comic book. In the still image state of (o5), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a rainbow manner (smoothly).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 111 (o6), a symbol display effect is executed in which the decorative symbol combination "222" indicating the jackpot display result is displayed in a large size on the screen. As shown in (o6), the symbol "222" is enlarged and emphasized by the concentrated line in the symbol display. In the state of displaying symbols (o6), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 112 (o7), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than in the state (o6). In the state of displaying symbols (o7), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (o8), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced in size than the state in (o7) and displayed in the normal size. In the state of 2 symbols (normal size) (o8), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) lighting mode.

[Production style in the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach B)]
With reference to FIGS. 113 and 114, the effect mode in the loss epilogue part (SP second half reach B) will be explained. The loss epilogue part (SP second half reach B) is a part where the story of Jam-chan and Nana-chan being defeated by a crab robot unfolds, and it is announced that the game will not be controlled by the jackpot game state.

As shown in FIG. 113 (p1), in the loss epilogue part of reach B in the second half of the SP, an image of a hand extending from the sky failing to catch a crab is displayed. In addition, in the state of not being able to catch a crab (p1), the game effect lamp 9 is a darker white than the white color of (tn27) indicating the lighting mode of (n27) in response to not being able to catch a crab. Light. After that, as shown in (p2), an image of a crab running away sideways is displayed. In the crab running away state of (p2), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a white color darker than the white color of (tp1) indicating the lighting mode of (p1). After that, as shown on page 3, an image of Jam-chan and Nana-chan looking down in regret after being run away by crabs is displayed. Furthermore, as shown in (p3), on the disappointing screen, a subtitle display ``Sonone~'' corresponding to the lines ``Sonone~'' of the two allies is displayed. Further, as shown in (p3), in the unfortunate state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a white color darker than the white color (tp1) indicating the lighting mode in (p1).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 114 (p4), the screen is darkened. In the screen darkening state of (p4), the game effect lamp 9 is turned off. Thereafter, as shown in (p5), the symbol "232" which is a losing symbol combination is displayed on the normal screen. In the state where the normal screen (p5) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in the same background yellow lighting pattern as (ta1) showing the lighting mode of (a1). If it is determined from the state (p5) that the game will be rescued, the process moves to the performance (v1).

[Production mode in the inciting part (SP final reach)]
With reference to FIGS. 115 to 132, the production mode in the inciting part (SP final reach) will be described. The inciting part (SP final reach) is the part where a story unfolds in which six ally characters, Yumu-chan, Jam-chan, Nana-chan, Maid A, Maid B, and AD, chase after the enemy character Bakuchu. It is. In the inciting part (SP final reach), a story is told that if 6 people can catch Bakchu, it will be a jackpot, and if 6 people can't catch Bakchu, it will be a loss. Moreover, the inciting part (SP final reach) is the reach with the highest jackpot expectation among all the reaches.

As shown in FIG. 115 (r1), in the inciting part in which the SP final reach is executed, a title corresponding to the SP final reach, ``Six people catch Bakuchu!'' is displayed. The title display indicates the content of the SP final reach performance that will be executed from now on. In the state where the title display (r1) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in yellow. After that, as shown in (r2), six friendly characters AD, Maid A, Maid B, Nana-chan, Jam-chan, and Yumu-chan face off against the enemy character Bakuchu in the center of the screen. The image is displayed. On the screen where the characters are facing each other, the lines of the six allies, ``This is the last time,'' are output. Furthermore, in the confrontation state (r2), the left game effect lamp 9 blinks in white in response to the six characters saying their lines. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character. Furthermore, at the timing when the image related to the title display (r2) disappears, BGM corresponding to the SP final reach is output.

After that, as shown in FIG. 115 (r3), Bakuchu's line ``I'll run away again'' is output on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the confrontation state (r3), the left game effect lamp 9 lights up in white corresponding to the six characters. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side flashes in red in response to Bakuchu saying his lines. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 116 (r4), when AD is displayed, a subtitle display "Leave it to me!" corresponding to the AD's line "Leave it to me!" is displayed. In the AD display state of (r4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in orange in response to the AD uttering lines. Thereafter, as shown in (r5), when Maid A is displayed, the subtitle display ``Watch'' corresponding to Maid A's line ``Watch'' is displayed. In the maid A display state of (r5), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in blue in response to the maid A uttering the lines. Thereafter, as shown in (r6), when Maid B is displayed, the subtitle display ``I'll do my best'' corresponding to Maid B's line ``I'll do my best'' is displayed. In the state of Maid B display (r6), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in Hawaiian blue color in response to Maid B uttering lines.

After that, as shown in FIG. 117 (r7), when Nana-chan is displayed, a subtitle display "I'm going to catch you" corresponding to Nana-chan's line "I'm going to catch you" is displayed. In the Nana-chan display state of (r7), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in pink in response to Nana-chan uttering lines. Thereafter, as shown in (r8), when Jam-chan is displayed, the subtitle display ``Yoraku dho'' corresponding to Jam-chan's line ``Yoraku dho'' is displayed. In the Jam-chan display state of (r8), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in purple in response to Jam-chan uttering lines. After that, as shown in (r9), when Yumu-chan is displayed, a subtitle display "Everyone is going!" corresponding to Yumu-chan's line "Everyone is going!" is displayed. In the state of displaying Yume-chan (r9), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in response to Yume-chan uttering lines.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 118 (r10), when Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitle display ``Anyone can come over'' corresponding to the Bakuchu's line ``Anyone can come over'' is displayed. In the Bakuchu display state of (r10), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red in response to the Bakuchu uttering its lines. Thereafter, as shown in (r11), when an image of Maid A chasing Bakuchu is displayed, a subtitle display "Wait!" corresponding to Maid A's line "Wait!" is displayed. In the jam chasing state of (r11), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in blue in response to Maid A uttering lines. After that, as shown in (r12), when the image of AD and Maid A chasing Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitles "Wait, wait!" corresponding to the two allies' lines "Wait, wait!" are displayed. Is displayed. In the state of AD & Maid A chasing (r12), the left game effect lamp 9 blinks in orange in response to the AD character uttering lines. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side flashes in blue in response to the maid A character uttering lines.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 119 (r13), when an image of Bakuchu escaping is displayed, a subtitle display ``Will you be caught!'' corresponding to Bakuchu's line ``Will you be caught?'' is displayed. In addition, the sound of Bakuchu's footsteps "tatatatat" is output as a physical sound. In addition, in the state (r13) where the Bakushu is running away, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red in response to the Bakushu running away. After that, as shown in (r14), an image of Bakuchu running away from the screen is displayed. In addition, the sound of Bakuchu's footsteps "tatatatat" is output as a physical sound. Furthermore, in the state of (r14) where the game is running away, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red. Thereafter, as shown in (r15), the background of the city is displayed on the screen. In the city background state (r15), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow.

After that, as shown in Figure 120 (r16), when an image of Nana-chan chasing Bakuchu is displayed, a subtitle display "Wait!" corresponding to Nana-chan's line "Wait!" is displayed. . In the Nana chasing state (r16), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in pink in response to Nana uttering lines. Later, as shown in (r17), when an image of Maid B and Nana-chan chasing Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitles corresponding to the two allies' lines "Wait, wait!" are displayed, "Wait, wait!" is displayed. In the state where Maid B and Nana are chasing (r17), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side flashes in Hawaiian blue color in response to Maid B's character uttering lines. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side blinks in pink in response to the Nana character uttering lines.

After that, as shown in FIG. 120 (r18), when an image of Bakuchu running away is displayed, a subtitle display "Wow!" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "Wow!" is displayed. In addition, the sound of Bakuchu's footsteps "tatatatat" is output as a physical sound. In addition, in the state (r18) where the Bakushu is running away, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red in response to the Bakushu running away. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 121 (r19), the background of the city is displayed on the screen. In the city background state (r19), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow.

After that, as shown in Figure 121 (r20), when an image of Yumu-chan chasing Bakuchu is displayed, a subtitle display "Wait!" corresponding to Yumu-chan's line "Wait!" is displayed. be done. In the dream chasing state of (r20), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in response to Yume-chan uttering lines. Later, as shown in (r21), when an image of Yume-chan and Jam-chan chasing Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitles corresponding to the two allies' lines "Wait, wait!" are displayed, "Wait, wait!" is displayed. In the dream dream & jam chase state of (r21), the left game effect lamp 9 blinks in purple in response to the jam character uttering lines. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side blinks in green in response to the Yumu-chan character uttering lines.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 122 (r22), the background of the city is displayed on the screen. In the city background state (r22), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in (r23), when an image of Bakuchu escaping is displayed, a subtitle display "Dangerous!" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "Dangerous!" is displayed. In addition, the sound of Bakuchu's footsteps "tatatatat" is output as a physical sound. Furthermore, in the state of (r23) where the Bakushu is running away, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in red in response to the Bakushu running away.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 122 (r24), in a scene where the AD character is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in orange color corresponding to AD. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 123 (r25), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in orange in a scene where the AD performs a jumping action. At this time, "Ai!" is output as the AD dialogue sound, but no subtitles are displayed. Thereafter, as shown in (r26), in a scene where Maid A's character is close-up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in blue color corresponding to Maid A. Thereafter, as shown in (r27), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in blue in a scene where Maid A performs a jumping action. At this time, "To!" is output as Maid A's dialogue sound, but no subtitles are displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 124 (r28), in a scene where Maid B's character is close-up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in Hawaiian blue color corresponding to Maid B. Thereafter, as shown in (r29), in a scene where Maid B performs a jumping action, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in Hawaiian blue color. At this time, Maid B's dialogue sound, which is the same as Maid A's "Too!", is output, but no subtitles are displayed. Thereafter, as shown in (r30), in a scene where Nana-chan's character is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in pink color corresponding to Nana-chan. After that, as shown in FIG. 125 (r31), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in pink in a scene where Nana-chan performs a jumping action. At this time, "Teiya!" is output as Nana's dialogue sound, but subtitles are not displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 125 (r32), in a scene where the Jam-chan character is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple color corresponding to Jam-chan. Thereafter, as shown in (r33), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in purple in a scene where Jam-chan performs a jumping action. At this time, ``Toriya!'' is output as Jam-chan's dialogue sound, but subtitles are not displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 126 (r34), in a scene where Yume-chan's character is close-up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to Yume-chan. After that, as shown in (r35), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in the scene where Yumu-chan performs a jumping action. At this time, "Oya!" is output as Yumu-chan's dialogue sound, but subtitles are not displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 126 (r36), an image in which the faces of six characters are close-up is displayed on the divided screen. As shown in (r36), when a close-up image of six allies is displayed, a subtitle display "This is the last!" corresponding to the six allies' lines "This is the last!" is displayed. Furthermore, in the state of (r36) where six allies are up, the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white in response to the six players saying lines. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 127 (r37), a close-up image of six allies is continuously displayed. Furthermore, in the state of (r37) with six allies up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 127 (r38), Bakuchu is displayed along with the city background. Further, in the state of Bakuchu display (r38), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character. Thereafter, as shown in (r39), the Bakushu is enlarged and displayed. Also, as shown in (r39), when the image of Bakuchu-up is displayed, the subtitle display "Yabee!!!" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "Yabee!!!" is displayed. Ru. Furthermore, in the Bakuchu-up state (r39), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red in response to the Bakuchu uttering lines.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 128 (r40), an image indicating the push button 31B and a time gauge are displayed together with a concentrated line superimposed on the image of the explosive chew-up. Further, in the state of (r40) Baku Cheup + button display, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times. After that, when the player operates the button within the valid button operation period, the three main characters of the pachinko machine 1, Nana-chan, Yumu-chan, and Jam-chan, are cut in on the screen, as shown in (r41). will be displayed. A cut-in display is an effect in which another image is displayed by cutting into the currently displayed image. Further, the cut-in display can also indicate the degree of jackpot expectation by the color of the cut-in display. For example, when the cut-in display is red, the expectation of a jackpot is higher than when it is green. Further, in the cut-in state (r41), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red or green depending on the color of the cut-in display.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 128 (r42), after the cut-in display is finished, an image of six people jumping towards Bakuchu is displayed. Further, in the state of cut-in and release (r42), the BGM is turned off and the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 129 (r43), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white when the screen displays six allies. Thereafter, as shown in (r44), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red when the screen where Bakushu is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in (r45), when the six allies are displayed in a larger size than in (r43), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 130 (r46), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red when the Bakushu is displayed in a larger size than in (r44).

After that, as shown in Figure 130 (r47), when the six allies are displayed enlarged than in (r45), the subtitles corresponding to the six allies' lines "We've cornered you!" are displayed "We've cornered you!" " is displayed. Furthermore, in the state of displaying six allies (r47), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times in response to the six allies saying lines. Thereafter, as shown in (r48), the display of Bakuchu and the display of six people are alternately displayed. In the state (r48), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 131 (r49), an image in which images corresponding to the stick controller 31A (trigger) are gathered in the center of the screen is displayed. As shown in (r49), in response to the trigger display converging toward the center, a sound corresponding to operation promotion is outputted to encourage the player to perform the operation. Further, in the state of (r49) where the trigger display is at the center, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red. Thereafter, as shown in (r50), an image is displayed in which the trigger display is more concentrated in the center of the screen than in (r49). As shown in (r50), in response to the trigger display converging toward the center, a sound corresponding to operation promotion to encourage the player to perform the operation is output. Further, in the state (r50) where the trigger display is at the center, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 131 (r51), the image of Bakuchu is displayed as still image 1. At this time, the words "Cut!" are displayed over the Bakuchu image, as well as a prompt to operate the trigger and a time gauge. In a state in which the close display (still image 1) of (r51) is displayed, a sound corresponding to the operation promotion to encourage the player to perform the operation is output. Further, in a state where the close display (still image 1) of (r51) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 132 (r52), the image of Bakuchu is displayed as still image 2. At this time, the text "Cut!" is displayed over the image of Bakuchu, along with a prompt to operate the trigger and a time gauge. The time gauge has decreased since (r51). In a state where the close display (still image 2) of (r52) is displayed, a sound corresponding to the operation promotion is outputted, and the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. Thereafter, as shown in (r53), the image of Bakuchu is displayed as still image 3. At this time, the text "Cut!" is displayed over the image of Bakuchu, along with a prompt to operate the trigger and a time gauge. The time gauge has decreased since (r52). In a state where the close display (still image 3) of (r53) is displayed, a sound corresponding to the operation promotion is outputted, and the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 132 (r54), the scene before the decision is made where the image of Bakuchu is displayed as still image 4 appears. At this time, the text "Cut!" is displayed over the image of Bakuchu, along with a prompt to operate the trigger and a time gauge. The time gauge has decreased since (r53). In a state where the draw display (still image 4) is displayed as a pre-determined scene of (r54), a sound corresponding to the operation promotion is outputted, and the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. If it has been determined from the state (r54) that there will be a jackpot in the SP final reach, the process moves to the performance (s1). In the state of (r54), if it has been determined that the SP final reach will be a loss or that it will be a relief hit, the process moves to the performance of (u1).

[Production mode in the winning epilogue part (SP final reach)]
With reference to FIGS. 133 to 136, the effect mode in the winning epilogue part (SP final reach) will be explained. The winning epilogue part (SP final reach) is a part in which it is announced that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state as the story in which six people catch Bakuchu unfolds.

As shown in FIG. 133 (s1), in the epilogue part of the SP final reach, a radial effect image is displayed on the screen as the object starts to fall, as shown in (s1). be done. This effect image has a more flashy presentation than the effect image when the SP reach develops into the second half. Further, due to the effect image, the Bakuchu character and the reduced "2" decorative pattern are no longer visible. Further, in the state (s1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow colors in accordance with the falling of the accessory.

Thereafter, in the state of FIG. 133 (s2), the accessory falls further from the state of (s1). In the state of (s2), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow colors in accordance with the falling of the accessory. After that, in the state of (s3), the accessory is further moved so that the letter "P" among the characters of the accessory is located at a position that overlaps with the place where the reduced decorative pattern of "2" was displayed. Fall. In the state of (s3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow colors. From the state of (s3), an effect in which the accessory rises is executed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 134 (s4), in the state after the accessory has been raised, a scene in which Yumu-chan catches Bakuchu is displayed. Further, as shown in (s4), a subtitle display "Uuu, I got caught" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "Uuu, I got caught" is displayed. In the state of catching the Bakushu (s4), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a rainbow manner (smoothly). Furthermore, in the state (s4), BGM for winning is output.

After that, as shown in FIG. 134 (s5), an image of six people being happy after catching Bakuchu is displayed. Furthermore, as shown in (s5), a subtitle display "Everyone did it!" corresponding to Yumu-chan's line "Everyone did it!" is displayed. In the state of catching the Bakushu (s5), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a rainbow manner (smoothly). After that, as shown in (s6), an image of the six people being happy after catching Bakuchu is displayed. Further, as shown in (s6), the subtitle display "Everyone did it!" is displayed continuously. In the state of catching the Bakushu (s6), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a rainbow manner (smoothly).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 135 (s7), an image of six people celebrating after catching Bakuchu is displayed as a still image in the style of a comic book. In the still image state of (s7), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a rainbow manner (smoothly). Thereafter, as shown in (s8), a symbol display effect is executed in which the decorative symbol combination "222" indicating the jackpot display result is displayed in a large size on the screen. As shown in (s8), in the pattern display, the ``222'' pattern is enlarged and the pattern is emphasized by concentrated lines. In the state of displaying symbols (s8), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (s9), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than the state in (s8). In the state of displaying symbols (s9), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 136 (s10), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced in size than the state in (s9) and displayed in the normal size. In the state of 2 symbols (normal size) of (s10), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) lighting mode.

[Production mode in the losing epilogue part (SP final reach)]
With reference to FIGS. 137 and 138, the production mode in the loss epilogue part (SP final reach) will be explained. The lose-lose epilogue part (SP final reach) is a part in which it is announced that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state as the story unfolds in which the six players were unable to catch the Bakushu.

As shown in FIG. 137 (u1), in the loss epilogue part of the SP final reach, an image of Bakuchu running away is displayed. In addition, in the state of (u1) where the Bakushu escapes, the game effect lamp 9 is a darker white than the white color of (tr54) indicating the lighting mode of (r54) in response to the failure to catch the Bakushu. Light. After that, as shown in (u2), an image is displayed in which the six people are disappointed that Bakchu ran away into the distance and were unable to catch him. Further, as shown in (u2), on the Sorry screen, a subtitle display ``Unfortunate~'' corresponding to Bakuchu's line ``Unfortunate~'' is displayed. As shown in (u2), in the unfortunate state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a white color darker than the white color in (tu1) showing the lighting mode in (u1).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 137 (u3), the screen is darkened. In the screen darkening state (u3), the game effect lamp 9 is turned off. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 138 (u4), the symbol "232", which is a losing symbol combination, is displayed on the normal screen. In the state where the normal screen (u4) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in the same background yellow lighting pattern as (ta1) showing the lighting mode of (a1). If it has been determined from the state (u4) that the game will be a relief hit, the process moves to the performance (v1).

[Production style in the rescue part]
With reference to FIGS. 139 to 140, the effect mode in the rescue part will be explained. The rescue winning part is a part in which a story is developed based on a rescue performance that becomes a jackpot after the story of a loss is developed. In the rescue part, a premium character named Drum-kun, who does not appear in other reaches, appears.

As shown in FIG. 139 (v1), in the relief part, a relief effect in which a character named Drum-kun is displayed on the screen is executed. By displaying Mr. Drum, the player can recognize that he has won a comeback disguised as a loss. In the rescue performance of (v1), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a brighter red than (td4, tg5, tp5, tu4). After that, as shown in (v3), the screen becomes white-out. In the whiteout (v2), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 140 (v3), a symbol display effect is executed in which the decorative symbol combination "222" indicating the jackpot display result is displayed in a large size on the screen. As shown in (v3), the "222" symbol is enlarged and emphasized by concentrated lines in the symbol display. In the state of displaying symbols (v3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 140 (v4), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than in the state (v3). In the state of displaying symbols (v4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (v5), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced in size than the state in (v4) and displayed in the normal size. In the state of 2 symbols (normal size) (v5), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) lighting mode.

[Production mode in the re-lottery part (odd or even symbols derived after button operation)]
With reference to FIGS. 141 to 156, the performance mode in the re-lottery part (odd number or even number design derived after button operation) will be described. In FIGS. 141 to 156, the flow of a series of presentations from detailed presentation of symbols in the promotion presentation to button operation in the re-lottery presentation will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 141 (A1), a symbol display effect is executed in which the decorative symbol combination "222" indicating the jackpot display result is displayed in a large size on the screen. As shown in (A1), in the state of 2-symbol enlargement, the symbol "222" is enlarged and the symbol is emphasized by the concentrated line. In the state of 2-symbol enlargement (A1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (A2), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a larger size than in (A1). In the state of 2-symbol enlargement (A2), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (A3), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a reduced size. In the state of 2-symbol reduction (A3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 142 (A4), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced and displayed. In the state of 2-symbol reduction (A4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (A5), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced and displayed in normal size. When the two symbols (A5) are in the normal size state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in a rainbow color. Thereafter, as shown in (A6), the background changes and the re-lottery effect starts. In the state (A6), there is a shaking period in which the symbol combination "222" swings up and down. In (A6), a screen in which the symbols are raised upward from the normal position is displayed. In the two-symbol shaking state (A6), the game effect lamp 9 is turned off.

Here, from the state (A5) to the state (A6), the period in which the symbols are shaking is omitted. Specifically, when the pattern is normal size, the pattern is shaking. Then, after the size becomes normal, the symbol fluctuation of the re-lottery part starts. At this time, at a timing related to the completion of symbol dispensing (for example, including the timing immediately before the normal size, the timing after the normal size, the timing when the symbol swing starts, etc.), the game effect lamp 9 The light switches from blinking white to smoothly lighting in rainbow colors. As a result, it is possible to perform smooth symbol display from symbol display to re-lottery performance, smooth transition to a swinging period, and blessings due to alignment of the symbols by illumination of the screen and lamp. After that, in the symbol fluctuation period shown in FIG. 143 (A7), a screen in which the symbols have moved downward from the normal position is displayed. In the two-symbol shaking state of (A7), the game effect lamp 9 is turned off.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 143 (A8), during the symbol fluctuation period, a screen with the symbol displayed in the center is displayed. As shown in (A8), the game effect lamp 9 is turned off in the state of two symbol fluctuations. Thereafter, as shown in (A9), during the movement start period of the re-lottery performance, the two symbols are displayed in a smaller size than in the state of (A8). In the state of 2-symbol reduction (A9), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 144 (A10), two symbols are further reduced and displayed from the state of (A9). In the state of 2-symbol reduction (A10), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red.

Thereafter, from FIG. 144 (A11) to FIG. 148 (A24), the numbers used as decorative patterns change at high speed to perform replacement display. When the replacement display is performed, the temporarily stopped decorative pattern is sequentially replaced with another pattern, and thus the decorative pattern is switched one after another. For example, as shown in (A11), two symbols are displayed faintly during high-speed fluctuation. In the state of variation (A11), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. Thereafter, as shown in (A12), the three symbols are clearly displayed during high-speed fluctuation. In the state of the three symbols (A12), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. From then on, from Figure 145 (A13) to Figure 148 (A23), the symbols are changed at high speed, such as 3 symbols, 4 symbols, 5 symbols, 6 symbols, 7 symbols, 1 symbol, etc., and the display becomes thinner. A clear display is repeated. From FIG. 145 (A13) to FIG. 148 (A23), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red.

After that, in FIG. 148 (A24), where the high-speed fluctuation that started from the 2 symbols passes through one cycle and the 2 symbols are clearly displayed again, a button image and a time gauge are faintly displayed below the 2 symbols. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 149 (A25), when the two symbols are displayed faintly during high-speed fluctuation, the button image and time gauge are clearly displayed. After that, from Figure 149 (A26) to Figure 156 (A46), 3 symbols, 4 symbols, 5 symbols, 6 symbols, 7 symbols, 1 symbol, 2 symbols, 3 symbols, 4 symbols, 5 symbols, 6 symbols, etc. , the symbols are replaced while changing at high speed, and a thin display and a clear display are repeated. Also, the time gauge gradually decreases over time. From FIG. 148 (A24) to FIG. 156 (A46), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. Then, when the push button 31B is operated from the state of (A46), if it has been determined that an odd numbered symbol will be derived, the process moves to the performance of (B1). When the push button 31B is operated from the state of (A46), if it has been determined that an even numbered symbol will be derived, the process moves to the performance of (C1).

[Production mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design derived after button operation)]
With reference to FIGS. 157 to 160, the production mode in the re-lottery part (odd-numbered symbols derived after button operation) will be described. 157 to 160, the flow of a series of performances from when a button is operated until an odd numbered symbol is derived in the re-lottery performance will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 157 (B1), a symbol display effect is executed in which the decorative symbol combination "333" indicating the jackpot display result is displayed in a large size on the screen. As shown in (B1), in the three-symbol enlargement state, the background becomes brighter, the "333" symbol is enlarged, and the symbol is emphasized by the concentrated line. In the state of 3-symbol enlargement (B1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (B2), the symbol combination "333" is displayed in a larger size than in (B1). In the state of 3-symbol enlargement (B2), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (B3), the symbol combination "333" is displayed in a reduced size. In the state of 3-symbol reduction (B3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 158 (B4), the symbol combination "333" is further reduced and displayed. In the state of 3-symbol reduction (B4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (B5), the symbol combination "333" is further reduced and displayed in normal size. In the state of the three symbols (B5) of normal size, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow color. Thereafter, as shown in (B6), there is a shaking period in which the symbol combination "333" swings up and down. In (B6), a screen is displayed in which the symbols are raised upward from the normal position. In the three-symbol shaking state (B6), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow colors. Thereafter, the background changes to a normal background as shown in FIG. 159 (B7). The symbol shaking period continues even in the normal background (B7). In the normal background shaking state (B7), a screen is displayed in which the symbols are lowered from the normal position. In the normal background shaking state of (B7), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow colors.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 159 (B8), the decorative pattern "333" is fixed and stopped. In addition, in the symbol confirmation period (B8), the small symbol is also fixed and stopped at "333". During the symbol determination period (B8), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors. Thereafter, as shown in (B9), the symbol confirmation period continues. During the symbol determination period (B9), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the flashing rainbow color lighting mode. Thereafter, during the fanfare period of FIG. 160 (D1), the same screen as in the state of (B9) is displayed. However, the game effect lamp 9 turns off in accordance with the fanfare. Thereafter, as shown in (D2), the screen changes to a screen on which the characters "FEVER" indicating the fanfare mode and Yume-chan are displayed, after the mode of the game effect lamp 9 is delayed. Further, at this time, the game effect lamp 9 remains lit in a fanfare manner.

[Production mode in the re-lottery part (even numbered symbols are derived after button operation)]
With reference to FIGS. 161 to 164, the production mode in the re-lottery part (even number symbols are derived after button operation) will be described. 161 to 164, the flow of a series of performances from when a button is operated until an even numbered symbol is derived in the re-lottery performance will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 161 (C1), a symbol display effect is executed in which the decorative symbol combination "222" indicating the jackpot display result is displayed in a large size on the screen. As shown in (C1), in the state of two-symbol enlargement, the background becomes brighter, the "222" symbol is enlarged, and the symbol is emphasized by the concentrated line. In the state of 2-symbol enlargement (C1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (C2), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a larger size than in the state of (C1). In the state of 2-symbol enlargement (C2), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (C3), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a reduced size. In the state of 2-symbol reduction (C3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 162 (C4), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced and displayed. In the state of 2-symbol reduction (C4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (C5), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced and displayed in normal size. In the state of the two symbols (C5) of normal size, the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in a rainbow color. Thereafter, as shown in (C6), the background returns to the state of (A46), and a shaking period begins in which the symbol combination "222" swings up and down. In (C6), a screen is displayed in which the symbols are raised upward from the normal position. In the two-symbol shaking state (C6), the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in a rainbow color. Thereafter, the background changes to a normal background as shown in FIG. 163 (C7). The symbol shaking period continues even in the normal background (C7). In the normal background shaking state (C7), a screen is displayed in which the symbols are lowered from the normal position. In the normal background shaking state of (C7), the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in rainbow colors.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 163 (C8), the decorative pattern "222" is fixed and stopped. In addition, in the symbol confirmation period (C8), the small symbols are also fixed and stopped at "222". During the symbol determination period (C8), the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in rainbow colors. Thereafter, as shown in (C9), the symbol confirmation period continues. During the symbol determination period (C9), the game effect lamp 9 maintains smooth lighting in rainbow colors. Thereafter, during the fanfare period of FIG. 164 (E1), the same screen as in the state of (C9) is displayed. However, the game effect lamp 9 turns off in accordance with the fanfare. Thereafter, as shown in (E2), the screen changes to a screen on which the characters "FEVER" indicating the fanfare mode and Yume-chan are displayed after the mode of the game effect lamp 9 is delayed. Further, at this time, the game effect lamp 9 remains lit in a fanfare manner.

<Explanation of the characteristic parts of the production mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1>
Next, the characteristic parts and modifications of the production mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above will be explained in detail.

(Start 5)
The above-mentioned shutter is an image that, when closed, makes the image of the effect being executed behind the camera invisible, and when it is closed and then opened, the image of the effect that is being executed becomes visible. Further, the shutter is executed at a timing related to the inciting part, that is, before the inciting part starts. When the shutter closes, the screen brightness decreases as the area where the effects are visible becomes narrower, and when the shutter opens, the screen brightness decreases as the area where the effects become visible becomes wider. becomes higher. According to this, by making the closing and opening of the shutter realistic, it is possible to suitably show the flow of the performance. In addition, although the image of the shutter was used to make the image of the performance being performed in the background invisible or visible, it could be an image other than the shutter, and the same performance could be performed using a role model. It's okay.

(Start 6)
Furthermore, the shutter described above is configured to close from the top and bottom edges of the screen toward the center of the screen. According to this, it is possible to suitably display an effect in which the screen brightness gradually changes. Further, the shutter may be configured to close from both ends of the screen toward the center, like a sliding door. Further, the shutter may be configured to close from the top end of the screen toward the bottom end of the screen.

(Start 7)
Further, as shown in FIG. 58 described above, the image of the edge of the shutter is expressed in black. According to this, when the shutter is about to close as shown in FIG. 58 (a12), the boundary between the effect performed when the screen brightness is lowered and the edge of the shutter can be blurred, and the sense of discomfort can be eliminated. . Similarly, when the shutter starts to open as shown in FIG. 60 (a16), the sense of discomfort can be eliminated.

(Start 8)
Further, as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61 described above, after the shutter is opened, the SP first half reach is started. Until the shutter is fully opened, the SP first half reach performance does not start, and the screen brightness gradually increases, and after the shutter is opened, the SP first half performance progresses. According to this, since the SP first half reach performance is a performance that the player wants to pay attention to, it is possible to prevent dissatisfaction caused by the performance being executed before the shutter is opened.

(Start 10)
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 57 (a9) described above, the brightness of the screen is first lowered before the shutter starts closing, and the shutter is completely closed at the timing when the shutter is completely closed. . Here, if the brightness of the screen is reduced at the same time as the shutter closes, there is a risk that the screen will darken too quickly. Therefore, by starting to reduce the screen brightness in advance, the speed of the screen darkening can be set to an appropriate value, and a series of effects can be presented in a suitable manner.

(Start 12)
In addition, the player does not know which SP first half reach will start until the aforementioned shutter is opened. According to this, it is possible to have expectations as to which performance will be executed.

(Start 13)
Note that the effect using the shutter described above may be performed at a timing other than the timing that develops in the first half of the SP. For example, the timing may be from the second re-variation to the third re-variation in the pseudo-association. In addition, when the shutter closes and then opens, an icon image (for example, a green pending image) that suggests a change in the active pending display, which is a pending display of the change, is displayed, and the active pending display corresponds to the icon image. It may also be configured to change (for example, change from blue to green). Furthermore, a shutter effect may be performed at the timing of the development from the SP first half reach to the SP second half reach. According to this, it is possible to improve the interest of the performance using the shutter.

(Start 15)
In addition to the above-described pattern in which the shutter closes and opens automatically, a pattern may be provided in which a button image is displayed after the shutter is closed, and the shutter is opened by performing a button operation. According to this, since a plurality of types of effects by the shutter are provided, the interest of the effects by the shutter is improved.

(Inciting 1)
In addition, the above-mentioned inciting part in which the validity is incited was updated as the friendly characters and enemy characters alternately fight each other (for example, SP first half reach B, SP second half reach B, etc.). In this kind of inciting part, there are scenes in which an ally character takes damage. Furthermore, in the production of such an inciting part, the image display switching interval is faster and the number of image display switching is greater than that of the epilogue part. According to this, the inciting part can be shown suitably by making the inciting part develop faster than the epilogue part.

(Inciting 2)
Further, as shown in FIG. 63(b5) and the like described above, in the inciting part, the ally character's dialogue occurs first, and subtitles corresponding to the dialogue are displayed. According to this, it is possible to suitably recognize the ally character in the inciting part.

(Inciting 3)
Note that the subtitle display of the ally character displayed first may be set to be displayed for a longer period than the subtitle display in another scene of the inciting part. According to this, the ally character can be clearly recognized.

(Inciting 4)
Further, as shown in FIG. 67 (b17) described above, there are scenes in which subtitles are not displayed when an ally character utters a line. According to this, while suitably displaying the subtitle display of the ally character displayed first, it is possible to display the screen display more suitably than when subtitle display is attached to all lines.

(Inciting 5)
In addition, in the above-mentioned inciting part, SP first half reach A, SP first half reach B as the first inciting part that is executed at the timing of the first half, and SP second half reach A as the second inciting part that is executed at the timing of the second half. , SP late reach B, and SP final reach. There are also scenes in which ally characters play an active role, whether in the first inciting part or in the second inciting part. Also, in any of the incitement parts, a line from an ally character occurs first, and subtitles corresponding to the line are displayed. According to this, it is possible to suitably recognize the ally character in any of the inciting parts.

(Inciting 6)
In addition, in the aforementioned inciting part, the character of Yumu-chan plays an active role in the inciting part corresponding to reach B in the first half of the SP, and the characters of Jam-chan and Nana-chan play an active role in the inciting part corresponding to reach B in the second half of the SP. There were scenes where he was active. Then, in the first half of the SP Reach B, a line by Yumu-chan, the first ally character to play an active role, occurred, and subtitles corresponding to the line were displayed. In addition, in the second half of the SP Reach B, dialogues by the first ally characters Jam-chan and Nana-chan occurred, and subtitles corresponding to the dialogues were displayed. According to this, the ally character can be suitably recognized in any of the provocation parts. Note that the number of active characters may be one or two or more. Furthermore, the same character may play an active role in the first half and the second half.

(Inciting 11)
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 63(b5) and 63(b6), there are scenes in which each character speaks a line in a situation where an ally character and an enemy character are displayed. Under such circumstances, subtitles for lines are displayed in a fixed size and at a fixed display position. According to this, by not changing the display mode of lines for each character, it is possible to reduce the chances of bugs and the like getting angry.

(Inciting cut-in 2)
Further, as shown in FIGS. 127 (r39) to 128 (r42) described above, at the timing when the cut-in display is executed, the subtitle display is displayed before the button image promotion display is displayed. According to this, the button image can be continuously shown to the player who is watching the screen with attention to the subtitle display, so that the button image can be prevented from being overlooked, and the cut-in display can be suitably executed. Can be done.

(Inciting cut-in 3)
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 128 (r41) to FIG. 130 (r47) described above, the design is such that there is no dialogue for a predetermined period after the cut-in display is completed. Then, after a predetermined period of time without dialogue has elapsed, dialogue is uttered, and subtitles are displayed for the dialogue. According to this, the player can be made to concentrate on the performance during the period after the cut-in display, and a suitable cut-in display can be achieved.

(True or false 1)
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 132 (r54) described above, the scene where the decision was made was between the provocation part and the epilogue part. In the scene of determining whether or not the game is a jackpot, the player is notified of whether or not he or she has won the jackpot by operating a trigger as an operating means. In addition, in the scene of deciding whether to win or not, the accessory was moved after the trigger was operated in case of a jackpot. According to this, the interest of the performance is improved by creating a scene where appropriate decision is made using the operating means.

(True or false 2)
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 130 (r47) to 132 (r54) described above, subtitles are displayed by the ally character before the image corresponding to the operating means is displayed, and after that, the screen corresponding to the operating means displays the subtitles. The performance that was being performed becomes no longer visible. Then, the performance that was executed after that can be recognized again together with the image of the operating means. According to this, it is possible to give an impact by displaying the introduction of the operation means over the entire screen, and to display the performance that was being executed properly at the timing when the operation means can be operated, so that the progress of the performance can be shown in a suitable manner. .

(True or false 3)
In addition, as shown in FIGS. 130 (r48) to 131 (r51), while the introduction images (images (r49) to (r50)) for enabling the operation means are being displayed, The production is also in progress. According to this, by allowing the performance to proceed in the background, it is possible to draw attention to the image (image (r51)) in which the operating means can be operated, and also to draw attention to the development of the performance.

(True or false 4)
In addition, in FIGS. 132 (r51) to 132 (r54) described above, when the trigger image was displayed as a promotion display, the tail of the Bakuchu image moved slightly every time the image changed. In this way, the performance may be performed while the promotion display is being displayed. Here, the progression of the presentation may include scene changes and character movements, rather than just the tail moving. According to this, it is possible to draw attention to the development of the performance during the promotion display.

(True or false 5)
Furthermore, the performance that progresses while the promotion display is being displayed is slower than the performance that was being executed before the promotion display was displayed. According to this, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the promotion display for operating the operating means, and it is possible to maintain a balance between the promotion display and the progress of the performance. Note that the performance that progresses while the promotion display is being displayed may progress at a slower speed than the performance that progresses while the introduction image is being displayed. According to this, the speed of progress of the performance can be made different between when the promotion display is being displayed and when the introduction image is being displayed.

(True or false 6)
Further, it is preferable to apply an echo to the lines before the introduction image as shown in FIG. 130 (r47) is displayed. According to this, the players can be excited before the introduction image is displayed.

(True or false 7)
Further, as shown in FIG. 130 (r47) to FIG. 131 (r49) described above, the introduction image is displayed after the subtitle display before the introduction image is displayed is deleted. According to this, it is possible to prevent the display timings of the introduction image and the subtitle display from overlapping.

(True or false 14)
In addition, from FIG. 95 (i36) to FIG. 96 (i39) described above, the image in which the two characters Yume-chan and Jam-chan are displayed is gradually enlarged and displayed, and at the timing of (i39), 1 The images are displayed in a static state for a predetermined period of time. After that, if you hit the jackpot, the winning epilogue part will be shown, and if you lose, the losing epilogue part will be shown. During the period in which one image is displayed stationary for a predetermined period of time, one image can be reused and used, so it is possible to reduce the data capacity and suitably stimulate the scene of determination of validity. In addition, during the period in which the images in which the two characters are displayed are gradually enlarged and displayed, more images (for example, 10 images) than shown in FIGS. 95 (i36) to 96 (i39) are displayed. May be used.

(True or false 16)
Further, from FIG. 131 (r49) to FIG. 132 (r54) described above, there is an introduction image display period in which images corresponding to the stick controller 31A (trigger) are gathered in the center of the screen. After that, there is a period in which a prompt to operate the trigger is displayed. During the display period of the promotion display, a plurality of images are gradually moved to make it appear as if the character is moving. Thereafter, by operating the trigger at a branching scene to determine whether the game is a success or not, if it is a jackpot, the video of the winning epilogue part will be played, and if it is a loss, the video of the losing epilogue part will be played. All of these periods are periods in which the video is dynamically displayed so that it appears to be moving. According to this, a series of performances can be executed in a dynamic flow, and a suitable flow of performances can be achieved.

(True or false 18)
Also, the winning epilogue part and the losing epilogue part after the scenes of the decision of validity shown in FIG. 133 (s1) to FIG. 136 (s10) and FIG. 137 (u1) to FIG. 138 (u4) described above will be explained. In the winning epilogue part, a video corresponding to the winning epilogue part is played after the performance of the character's action. In addition, in the lose-lose epilogue part, the screen turns black after the effect corresponding to the lose-lose epilogue part, and then returns to the normal screen. According to this, since the flow is such that a plurality of images are switched after the scene where the decision is made, a suitable flow of presentation can be achieved.

(Epilogue 1)
The above-mentioned win epilogue part is a part that does not shift in the event of a loss, and is a part that includes a scene where the enemy character is at a disadvantage and a scene where the ally character is at an advantage. Also, in the winning epilogue part, the number of image display changes in the performance is smaller than in the promotion part. According to this, it is possible to perform an appropriate performance in each part, and it is possible to suitably show the flow of a series of performances.

(Epilogue 4)
As shown in FIG. 104 (n10) described above, subtitles are not displayed for the lines of the enemy character in the scene where the enemy character receives damage in the provocation part. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 110(o1), subtitles are displayed for the lines of the enemy character in the scene where the enemy character receives damage in the winning epilogue part (crab catching scene). According to this, the subtitle display that was not displayed in the promotion part is displayed in the winning epilogue part, so that the feeling of celebration can be emphasized.

(Epilogue 6)
As shown in FIGS. 134 (s5) to (s6) described above, the subtitle display displayed in the winning epilogue part is designed to be displayed for a longer period than the subtitle display displayed in the provocation part. According to this, by displaying the subtitles in the final winning epilogue part for a long period of time, it is possible to immerse the player in the afterglow of the jackpot and emphasize the sense of celebration. Note that when displaying subtitles, a subtitle with a larger number of characters may be displayed for a longer time than a subtitle with a smaller number of characters. Even in such a case, if the same number of subtitles (for example, 5 characters) are displayed in the winning epilogue part and the provocation part, the subtitle display period will be longer for the winning epilogue part. It should be designed like this.

(Epilogue 15)
As shown in FIG. 134 (s6) to FIG. 135 (s8) described above, the final subtitle display for the final line in the winning epilogue part is designed to be erased before the symbol display is executed. . According to this, it is possible to prevent the subtitle display from covering the decorative pattern and from mistaking it as a message in the presentation of the pattern. Therefore, the performance in the winning epilogue part can be shown suitably.

(Epilogue 17)
As shown in FIG. 136 (s10) described above, when the presentation of the symbols is completed and the player can recognize the decorative symbols, the decorative symbols and images such as characters displayed as the background become still images. There is. According to this, it is possible to prevent the decorative pattern from becoming difficult to see because the background of the decorative pattern is a moving image.

(Epilogue 18)
As shown in FIG. 135 (s7) described above, the video that was being played during the winning epilogue part becomes a still image at a timing before the symbol appearance is executed. According to this, it is possible to prevent the symbols from becoming difficult to see from the timing of the start of symbol display.

(Epilogue 19)
As shown in FIG. 135 (s7) described above, the still image displayed in the winning epilogue part has a special feature similar to a comic book. According to this, by adding a special type of effect to a still image, it is possible to emphasize that the video is still, and to suggest that the scene has changed, thereby making it possible to make it a suitable epilogue part.

(Epilogue 21)
It is desirable that the subtitle display before the display of the symbols shown in FIG. 134 (s6) described above does not have a fade effect that gradually erases the display. Here, subtitles displayed at other timings may be given a fade effect that gradually erases the display. According to this, by adding a fade effect to the display of subtitles other than the final one, effective switching can be achieved, and by instantly erasing the final subtitle display, the final subtitle display can overlap the decorative pattern. It is possible to prevent the message from being put away and from being mistakenly recognized as a message in the presentation of the symbols. Therefore, the performance in the winning epilogue part can be shown suitably.

(Epilogue 22)
As shown in FIG. 136 (s10) described above, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern are displayed when the pattern is displayed. An effect image of saturated lines is added to the decorative pattern, but no effect image is added to the small pattern. Furthermore, the decorative pattern has a higher priority than the decorative pattern and the effect image and is displayed on the near side. According to this, it is possible to enhance the production effect of the effect image regarding the decorative symbols, and to make it possible to recognize that the small symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, thereby making it possible to provide a suitable winning epilogue part.

(Epilogue 23)
As shown in FIG. 136 (s10) described above, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern are displayed when the pattern is displayed. Here, the movement of the decorative pattern and the small pattern may be synchronized at the timing when the pattern display of the decorative pattern ends. Specifically, during the symbol shaking period in which the display of the decorative symbols is finished and the symbols are shaking up and down, the small symbols may also be made to swing up and down with the same movement as the decorative symbols. According to this, by matching the movement of the decorative pattern and the small pattern, it is possible to suitably show the flow of the performance in the winning epilogue part.

(Epilogue 24)
As shown in FIGS. 157 (B1) to 158 (B5) described above, both decorative symbols and small symbols are displayed during the presentation of symbols in the re-lottery part. An effect image of saturated lines is added to the decorative pattern, but no effect image is added to the small pattern. Furthermore, the decorative pattern has a higher priority than the decorative pattern and the effect image and is displayed on the near side. According to this, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of the effect image regarding the decorative pattern, and to make it possible to recognize that the small pattern is being displayed in a variable manner.

(Epilogue 25)
As shown in FIG. 136 (s10) described above, when presenting a pattern, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern may be displayed in a state where the pattern is aligned. Then, in conjunction with the transition to the re-lottery part, both the decorative symbols and the small symbols may be changed again. According to this, the decorative pattern and the small pattern can be synchronized and suitably displayed.

(Re-lottery performance 3)
As shown in FIG. 142 (A5) described above, in the final state of the symbol presentation in the winning epilogue part, the decorative symbols are displayed in a swaying manner and an effect image with concentrated lines is added. Even when switching from that state to the background of the re-lottery effect as shown in (A6), the effect image with concentrated lines continues to be added. Further, the game effect lamp 9 is switched from smoothly lighting up in a rainbow manner to being turned off. In other words, from the appearance of the symbols to the re-lottery presentation, the pattern shaking and effects continue, and the background and lamps are designed to switch. According to this, it is possible to easily understand from which decorative pattern the re-lottery performance has started.

(Re-lottery performance 6)
As shown in the flow shown in FIG. 144 (A10) to FIG. 156 (A46) and FIG. 157 (B1) to FIG. The operation promotion display will be displayed. Then, when the player operates a button, a pattern display effect is executed in which the pattern is enlarged and displayed. In other words, the decorative pattern that is finally announced is displayed in an enlarged manner from the moment the pattern is put out. According to this, since the symbol is finally notified from the beginning of expansion, it is possible to clearly show the player what the final notified symbol is.

(Re-lottery performance 16)
The pattern display in the portions of FIGS. 141 (A1) to 142 (A5) and the pattern placement in the portions of FIGS. 161 (C1) to 162 (C5) described above are executed using substantially the same video. Specifically, the same image is used for the pattern display and effect image using the "2" pattern, and the pattern pattern is executed in such a manner that the background portions are different. According to this, since the images of the symbols appearing can be made substantially the same, it is possible to clearly show to the player that the symbols have not been promoted to the variable probability symbols. In addition, the image of the pattern part including the background may be made completely the same.

(Re-lottery performance 17)
In the above-mentioned pattern display, a series of effects is performed in which the pattern is once enlarged and then displayed in its normal size at the center of the screen. According to this, by enlarging and reducing the symbols, it is possible to suitably display a series of symbols.

(Re-lottery performance 18)
In the above-mentioned symbol presentation performance, common symbol presentation data may be used in the data for the symbol presentation performance in the winning epilogue part and the data for the symbol presentation performance in the re-lottery performance. Then, a series of symbol presentation effects may be executed using the common symbol presentation data and a combination of a plurality of decorative patterns. According to this, it is possible to reduce the data capacity while presenting a suitable design effect. It should be noted that substantially the same data may be used in the data for the symbol presentation performance in the winning epilogue part and the data for the symbol presentation performance in the re-lottery presentation.

<Detailed explanation regarding production mode>
Next, with regard to the above-mentioned production mode, characteristic parts and modifications that should be particularly mentioned will be explained in detail with reference to FIGS. 165 to 191.

[About Inciting 12, 13, 15]
In FIG. 165, the characteristic parts of the inciting part are numbered and explained.

(Detailed explanatory diagram of (b11) to (b13) parts)
FIG. 165 is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (b11) to (b13) of the SP first half reach A described above. As shown in FIG. 165 (b11), the relationship between Yume-chan and Bakuchu on the screen is such that in the left-right direction, Yume-chan is on the left and Bakuchu is on the right. In line with this character arrangement, the lamp on the left side of the frame lights up in green, corresponding to Yumu-chan, and the lamp on the right side of the frame lights up in red, corresponding to Bakuchu. In addition, in the state of (b11), Yumu-chan's line "Wait~" is output as a dialogue sound, Yumu-chan's footsteps "Zazazaza" is output as a physical sound, and Bakuchu's footsteps "Zazaza" are output as a physical sound. "Tatatatat" is output.

Further, as shown in (b11), the relationship between Yumu-chan and Bakuchu on the screen is such that in the front-rear direction, Bakuchu is in the front and Yumu-chan is behind. The positional relationship seen from the player's perspective is that Bakuchu is nearby and Yumu-chan is far away. On the other hand, the relationship between the volumes is as follows: ``Wait~'', the sound of Yumu-chan's line > Bakuchu's footsteps, ``ta-ta-ta-ta'' > Yumu-chan's footsteps, ``za-za-za-za''. In this way, the volume data is set so that the sounds of Yumu-chan's lines in the distance are louder than the footsteps of Bakuchu, who are closer.

In FIG. 165 (b12), the relationship between Yumu-chan and Bakuchu on the screen is the same as in (b11) in both the left-right direction and the front-back direction. In (b12), no dialogue sound is output, and the physical sounds of Yumu-chan's footsteps "zazazaza" and Bakuchu's footsteps "tatatatat" are output as physical sounds. The relationship between the volumes is ``Bakuchu's footsteps ``tatata tat'' > Yume-chan's footsteps ``zazazaza''. In this way, when dialogue sounds are not output, the volume data is set so that Bakuchu's nearby footsteps are louder than Yumu-chan's distant footsteps to match the context on the screen.

In FIG. 165 (b13), the relationship between Yumu-chan and Bakuchu on the screen is such that in the left-right direction, Yumu-chan is on the left and Bakuchu is on the right. In addition, in the state of (b13), Bakuchu's line "Catch me!" is output as a dialogue sound, Yumu-chan's footsteps "Zazazaza" is output as a physical sound, and Bakuchu's footsteps as a physical sound. "Tatatatat" is output. Further, as shown in (b13), the relationship between Yumu-chan and Bakuchu on the screen is such that Yumu-chan is in the front and Bakuchu is behind her in the front-rear direction. The positional relationship seen from the player's perspective is that Yumu-chan is nearby and Bakuchu is far away. On the other hand, the relationship between the volume is as follows: Bakuchu's line sound in ``Let's get caught!'' > Yumu-chan's footsteps, ``Za-za-za'' > Baku-chu's footsteps, ``Tata-ta-tat''. In this way, the volume data is set so that the sound of Bakuchu's lines in the distance is louder than the sound of Yumu-chan's footsteps, which are closer.

(Inciting 12)
In the inciting part, the BGM of SP Reach is output, and there are also scenes where dialogue sounds and physical sounds (also referred to as action sounds) are output at the same timing. When the dialogue sound and the physical sound are output at the same timing, the dialogue sound is output at a louder volume than the physical sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. According to this, by outputting physical sounds as part of the performance, the reality of the performance is created, and when the dialogue sound and physical sound overlap, the dialogue sound is output louder, so that the contents of the performance can be conveyed to the player. It can be easily communicated. Therefore, as a result, the performance in the inciting part can be shown better.

(Inciting 13)
Here, the working process when actually creating various performances in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained. First, in the pachinko game machine 1, videos for each effect corresponding to variable times such as SP reach are created. To match this video, special software is used to add production sounds such as background music, physical sounds, onomatopoeia, sound effects, and dialogue sounds one by one. The finished video and sound are played, and the strength of the sound is further added. In this series of work processes, rather than outputting sound with a sense of reality while maintaining the actual sense of distance on the video, it is better to abandon reality and output sound that ignores the actual sense of distance that is easier to convey to the player. The sound data is set as follows. Thereby, a series of performances can be suitably shown.

(Inciting 15)
Additionally, if the dialogue sound of a character who is far away from the player overlaps with the physical sound from a character who is closer to the player, the sound data is set so that the dialogue sound is heard louder than the physical sound. has been done. As a result, a sound is output that ignores the actual sense of distance that is easy to convey to the player, abandoning reality, so that the content of the performance can be easily conveyed to the player.

[About Inciting 14 and 16]
In FIGS. 166 and 167, characteristic parts of the inciting part will be explained by assigning numbers.

(Explanation of volume level)
FIG. 166 is a diagram for explaining the volume level. As shown in FIG. 166(A), among the sounds output from the pachinko game machine 1, the relationship among the volume levels of dialogue sounds, physical sounds (footsteps), and SP reach BGM will be described. The output volume level has a relationship of dialogue sound>physical sound (footsteps)>SP reach BGM. Furthermore, when these three sounds overlap, the way the sound is output is different depending on whether the sound is a dialogue sound with subtitles or a dialogue sound without subtitles.

As shown in FIG. 166(B), in the case of dialogue sound with subtitles, when the dialogue sound (with subtitles), physical sound, and SP reach BGM are output at the same timing, the volume of SP reach BGM is It is controlled to output at a lower level. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 166(C), in the case of dialogue sound without subtitles, when the dialogue sound (without subtitles) is output at the timing when the physical sound and SP reach BGM overlap, the dialogue sound> It is controlled to output without changing any volume level while maintaining the relationship of physical sound (footsteps)>SP reach BGM.

(Inciting 14)
In this way, when the physical sound of the character and the dialogue sound are outputted in an overlapping manner, the dialogue sound is adjusted and output so that it is heard louder than the physical sound. For example, when the physical sound and the dialogue sound are output in an overlapping manner, as shown in FIG. 166(B), the BGM of the SP reach is adjusted to be small in accordance with the output period of the dialogue sound. In this way, it is possible to make the content of the performance easier to convey to the players while creating a sense of reality.

(Inciting 16)
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 166(B) and (C), there is a subtitle on the dialogue sound that overlaps with the physical sound, and a case where there is no subtitle on the dialogue sound that overlaps with the physical sound. In the case, the BGM of SP Reach is adjusted so that it sounds louder by lowering the volume. Dialogue sounds with subtitles are more related to the content of SP reach than dialogue sounds without subtitles. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the content of the performance by outputting loud dialogue sounds with subtitles that are related to the content of the SP reach.

(Explanation of volume level)
FIG. 167 is a diagram for explaining the volume level. A method for effectively outputting the volume by a method different from that shown in FIG. 166 will be explained with reference to FIG. 167. In FIG. 167 and FIG. 166, the relationship of output volume levels is the same: dialogue sound>physical sound (footsteps)>SP reach BGM. However, as shown in FIG. 167(B), when the character's physical sound and the dialogue sound overlap and are output, the dialogue sound is adjusted to be louder than the physical sound.

(Inciting 16)
As shown in Figures 167(B) and (C), there is a difference between a case where a dialogue sound that overlaps with a physical sound has a subtitle, a case where a dialogue sound that overlaps with a physical sound has a subtitle, and a case where a dialogue sound that overlaps with a physical sound has a subtitle. The volume will be adjusted to be louder only for those who are listening. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the content of the performance by outputting loud dialogue sounds with subtitles that are related to the content of the SP reach.

[About incitement 7 and 8]
In FIGS. 168 to 170, the characteristic parts of the inciting part are numbered and explained.

(Detailed explanatory diagram of (r24) to (r27) parts)
FIG. 168 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (r24) to (r27) portions of the final reach mentioned above. As shown in (r24), in a scene where the AD character is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in orange color corresponding to AD. Thereafter, as shown in (r25), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in orange in a scene where the AD performs a jumping action. At this time, "Ai!" is output as the AD dialogue sound, but no subtitles are displayed. After that, as shown in (r25'), when the AD is removed from the screen, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times.

Thereafter, as shown in (r26), in a scene where Maid A's character is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in blue color corresponding to Maid A. Thereafter, as shown in (r27), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in blue in a scene where Maid A performs a jumping action. At this time, "To!" is output as Maid A's dialogue sound, but no subtitles are displayed. Thereafter, as shown in (r27'), in the scene where Maid A is removed from the screen, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times.

(Detailed explanatory diagram of (r28) to (r31) parts)
FIG. 169 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (r28) to (r31) portions of the final reach mentioned above. As shown in (r28), in a scene where Maid B's character is close-up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in Hawaiian blue color corresponding to Maid B. Thereafter, as shown in (r29), in a scene where Maid B performs a jumping action, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in Hawaiian blue color. At this time, Maid B's dialogue sound, which is the same as Maid A's "Too!", is output, but no subtitles are displayed. After that, as shown in (r29'), in the scene where Maid B is removed from the screen, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times.

Thereafter, as shown in (r30), in a scene where Nana-chan's character is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in pink color corresponding to Nana-chan. Thereafter, as shown in (r31), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in pink in a scene where Nana-chan performs a jumping action. At this time, "Teiya!" is output as Nana's dialogue sound, but subtitles are not displayed. After that, as shown in (r31'), in the scene where Nana-chan is released from the screen, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times.

(Detailed explanatory diagram of (r32) to (r35) parts)
FIG. 170 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (r32) to (r35) portions of the final reach mentioned above. As shown in (r32), in a scene where Jam-chan's character is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple color corresponding to Jam-chan. Thereafter, as shown in (r32), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in purple in a scene where Jam-chan performs a jumping action. At this time, the sound of Jam-chan's dialogue, "Toriya!", is output, but no subtitles are displayed. After that, as shown in (r32'), in the scene where Jam-chan is released from the screen, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times.

Thereafter, as shown in (r34), in a scene where Yume-chan's character is close-up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to Yume-chan. After that, as shown in (r35), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in a scene where Yumu-chan performs a jumping action. At this time, "Oya!" is output as Yumu-chan's dialogue sound, but subtitles are not displayed. After that, as shown in (r35'), in the scene where Yume-chan is released from the screen, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times.

Here, in scenes such as r25, r27, r29, r31, r33, and r35, the output lines are one-word lines that seem to be enthusiastic. In these specific scenes, the scene switching is faster than in other scenes. Furthermore, in these specific scenes, the subtitles are not directly related to the story development compared to other subtitled scenes. For these reasons, subtitles corresponding to the lines are not displayed.

(Inciting 7)
As shown in FIGS. 168 to 170, there are scenes in which characters utter lines in the provocative part, but no subtitles are attached (for example, scenes r25, r27, r29, r31, r33, and r35). However, even in such a specific scene, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) of the game effect lamp 9 is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. In this way, even in a scene where subtitles are not displayed for dialogue sounds, the effect can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. Thereby, the performance corresponding to the character can be suitably executed, and the inciting part can be suitably shown to the player.

(Inciting 8)
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 168 to 170, in scenes where characters appear (for example, r24, r26, r28, r30, r32, r34), colors other than those corresponding to the character in the previous scene are used. Control is performed to turn on the game effect lamp 9. Specifically, before the scene (r24), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in yellow (r22) or red (r23), and then the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in orange corresponding to the AD character. This is a scenario where the lights turn on. Also, before the scene of (r26), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/blinks in the orange color of (r25) or the white color of (r25'), and then the game effect lamp 9 lights up in blue color corresponding to the character of Maid A. This is the scenario. Also, before the scene of (r28), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in the blue color of (r27) or the white color of (r27'), and then the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in the blue color of (r27) and the color of Hawaiian blue corresponding to the character of Maid B. This is a scenario where the lights turn on. In addition, before the scene of (r30), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in the Hawaiian blue color of (r29) or the white color of (r29'), and then the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in the pink color corresponding to Nana's character. This is the scenario in which the light is lit. In addition, before the scene of (r32), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in the pink color of (r31) and the white color of (r31'), and then the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple color corresponding to the Jam-chan character. This is the scenario. In addition, before the scene of (r34), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple (r33) and white (r33'), and then the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to Yume-chan's character. becomes. In this way, before a character appears, control is performed to light up the game effect lamp 9 in a color different from the color corresponding to the relevant character, and then the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in the color corresponding to the character. Control takes place. Therefore, it is possible to express in the form of a lamp that the displayed character changes and to clearly indicate to the player which character the changed character is, which can be a suitable inciting part.

[About start 1 to 4]
Characteristic parts in FIGS. 171 and 172 will be explained by assigning numbers.

(Detailed explanatory diagram of accessory movements in (b18) to (i1))
FIG. 171 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the accessory motion in (b18) to (i1). In the scene shown in (b18) before the determination of validity, the game effect lamp 9 maintains a white lighting state. Thereafter, when the SP develops into a second half reach, the movable body 32 as an accessory operates. Specifically, an effect is performed in which the accessory falls from the top of the screen toward the front of the screen while tilting diagonally. As shown in (h1), a radial effect image is displayed on the screen at the beginning of the falling of the accessory. Due to the effect image, Yumu-chan's character and the reduced "2" decorative pattern are no longer visible. Further, in the state (h1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red in accordance with the falling of the accessory.

After that, in the state of (h2), the accessory is further moved so that the letter "P" among the characters of the accessory is located at a position that overlaps with the place where the reduced decorative pattern of "2" was displayed. Fall. In the state (h2), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. In addition, a sound corresponding to an accessory that corresponds to the falling of an accessory is output as a sound effect. Thereafter, in the state (h3), the position of the accessory is maintained at the falling position in the state (h2). In the state (h3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red.

Thereafter, as shown in (h4), the accessory starts to rise (the accessory moves from the advanced position to the retreated position). In the state (h4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in yellow. When changing from the (h3) state to the (h4) retreating state, the brightness data table output from the brightness data table of the accessory action part to the brightness data table of the SP second half reach A (inciting part) changes. . After that, in the state (h5), the accessory increases further. In the state (h5), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in yellow.

FIG. 172 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the accessory movements in (b18) to (i1). After (h5), in the state of (h6), the accessory increases further. In the state (h6), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in yellow. Thereafter, as shown in (h7), when the accessory further rises, the effect image displayed corresponding to the accessory becomes lighter. As the effect image becomes thinner (transmittance becomes higher), the background corresponding to reach A in the second half of the SP starts to be slightly visible. In the state (h7), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. Furthermore, a sound corresponding to the second half of the SP, which is BGM corresponding to the second half of the SP reach, is output as a sound effect. Note that sound effects related to the title in the latter half of the SP may be output together with the BGM. Thereafter, in the state (h8), the accessory increases further from the state (h7). In the state (h8), the effect image is lighter than in the state (h7), so the background display becomes easier to see. In the state (h8), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow.

After that, in the state (h9), the accessory increases further. In the state (h9), the effect image is lighter than in the state (h8), so the background display becomes easier to see. In the state (h9), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, in the state (h10), the accessory increases further. In the state (h10), the effect image is lighter than in the state (h9), so the background display becomes easier to see. In the state (h10), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. Thereafter, in the state (i1), the effect image disappears and the title corresponding to the scene of the start of SP second half reach A is clearly displayed. In the state (i1), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow.

(Start 1)
As shown in FIGS. 171 and 172, as the accessory moves, the performance switches from the SP first half reach A performance to the SP second half reach A performance. Further, in accordance with the motion of the accessory falling, an effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory is displayed. Thereafter, while the accessory is rising, the display gradually switches from the effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory to the screen corresponding to reach A in the second half of the SP. In addition, while the accessory is rising, the brightness data table of the accessory movement part (child table WD8 shown in FIG. 202 described later) to the brightness data table of SP second half reach A (child table WD9 shown in FIGS. 204 and 205 described later) is changed. ) The brightness data table is switched to Further, while the accessory is rising, a sound corresponding to the second half of the SP (for example, BGM of the second half of the SP) is output. Here, the effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory is displayed on the premise that the accessory is in a position superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the accessory returns to its initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the second half of the SP before the accessory completes the return operation to the initial position, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be prevented. Further, since the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the second half of the SP while the accessory returns to its initial position, the inciting part of the second half of the SP can be suitably displayed.

(Start 2)
As shown in FIGS. 171 and 172, as the accessory moves, the performance switches from the SP first half reach A performance to the SP second half reach A performance. Furthermore, before the accessory moves, a reduced "2" symbol is displayed at the lower left and right corners of the screen. When the accessory moves, the accessory falls so that the letter "P" among the characters on the accessory is located at a position that overlaps with the place where the reduced decorative pattern of "2" was displayed. do. Further, in accordance with the motion of the accessory falling, an effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory is displayed in a prioritized layer in front of the "2" symbol that is displayed in a reduced size. Then, after the accessory rises from the falling position and the "2" symbol does not overlap with the accessory, the effect image gradually becomes lighter, and the background and "2" symbol corresponding to reach A in the second half of the SP disappear. It is displayed faintly. According to this, it is possible to prevent an aesthetically unsightly display from being displayed due to the reduced decorative pattern being displayed during the action of the accessory. Furthermore, the effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory is displayed on the premise that the accessory is located at a position where it is superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the accessory returns to its initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the second half of the SP before the accessory completes the return operation to the initial position, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be prevented. Further, since the reduced decorative pattern is displayed during the ascending of the accessory, it is possible to switch the performance appropriately according to the action of the accessory.

(Start 3)
As shown in FIG. 171, the effect image is displayed before the accessory moves and reaches the lowest position of the fall. According to this, it is possible to quickly hide the reduced decorative pattern, and it is possible to change the suitable performance by adding accessories.

(Start 4)
Note that an image related to the accessory may be displayed when switching from the effect image to the image of the performance that will develop in the latter half. Specifically, in the scenes corresponding to FIG. 172 (h7) to (h10), when the accessory rises, the words "POWERFULII" and images of the main characters Yumu-chan, Jam-chan, Nana-chan, etc. may be displayed. According to this, by providing interlocking when the production changes, it is possible to show a suitable change in production that includes the use of accessories.

[About Epilogue 7, 8, 10-14, 20]
In FIGS. 173 and 174, the characteristic parts of the epilogue part are numbered and explained.

(Detailed explanatory diagram of accessory movements in (r54) to (s4))
FIG. 173 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the accessory motion in (r54) to (s4). In the scene before determining the validity of (r54), a sound corresponding to the operation promotion is outputted, and the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. At this time, an operation image corresponding to the stick controller 31A (trigger) is displayed on the screen together with the Bakuchu character. Furthermore, a time gauge is displayed below the operation image as an operation promotion display to encourage the operation. The movable body 32 as an accessory operates when the player performs an action of pulling the stick controller 31A within a predetermined period or when the predetermined period elapses. Specifically, an effect is performed in which the accessory falls from the top of the screen toward the front of the screen while tilting diagonally. Here, the period of time during which the accessory is falling in the scene of the success/failure notification is longer than the time during which the accessory is falling in the scene that develops in the second half of the SP.

As shown in (s1), a radial effect image is displayed on the screen with respect to the accessory as the accessory begins to fall. This effect image has a more flashy presentation than the effect image when the SP reach develops into the second half. Specifically, the effect image in the scene of the success/failure notification like (s1) is a rainbow color. Note that the effect images in scenes that develop in the latter half of the SP are blue and red. In addition, due to the effect image, the Bakuchu character and the reduced "2" decorative pattern are no longer visible. Further, in the state (s1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow colors in accordance with the falling of the accessory.

After that, in the state (s2), the accessory falls so that the letter "P" among the characters of the accessory is located at a position that overlaps with the place where the reduced decorative pattern of "2" was displayed. do. In the state (s2), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow colors. Thereafter, in the state (s3), the position of the accessory is maintained at the falling position in the state (s2). In the state of (s3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow colors.

Thereafter, as shown in (s3-2), the accessory starts to rise (the accessory moves from the advanced position to the retreated position). In the state of (s3-2), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. When the state of (s3) changes to the saving state of (s3-2), the brightness that is output from the brightness data table for the role object movement of the winning epilogue part to the brightness data table for the winning epilogue of the winning epilogue part The data table changes. After that, in the state (s3-3), the accessory increases further. In the state of (s3-3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white.

FIG. 174 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the accessory motion in (r54) to (s4). After (s3-3), in the state of (s3-4), the accessory increases further. In the state of (s3-4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (s3-5), when the accessory further rises, the effect image displayed corresponding to the accessory becomes lighter. As the effect image becomes thinner (transmittance becomes higher), the background corresponding to the epilogue part of the SP final reach begins to be faintly visible. In the state of (s3-5), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. In addition, a sound corresponding to the winning epilogue part, which is BGM corresponding to the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach, is output as a sound effect. Thereafter, in the state (s3-6), the accessory increases further from the state (s3-5). In the state (s3-6), the effect image is lighter than in the state (s3-5), so the background display becomes easier to see. In the state of (s3-6), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white.

After that, in the state of (s3-7), the accessory increases further. In the state of (s3-7), the effect image is lighter than in the state of (s3-6), so the background display becomes easier to see. In the state of (s3-7), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, in the state of (s3-8), the accessory increases further. In the state (s3-8), the effect image is lighter than in the state (s3-7), so the background display becomes easier to see. In the state of (s3-8), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, in the state (s4), a scene in which Yumu-chan catches Bakuchu is displayed. At this time, the sound when the production is successful is output as a sound effect. In addition, subtitles are displayed along with Bakuchu's line ``Ugh, I got caught.'' In the state (s4), the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in rainbow colors.

(Epilogue 7)
As shown in FIGS. 173 and 174, an effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory object is displayed in accordance with the action of the accessory object falling. Thereafter, the accessory moves to the initial position according to a predetermined retreat pattern. While the accessory is rising, the display gradually switches from the effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory to the screen corresponding to the epilogue part of the final reach of the SP. Here, the effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory is displayed on the premise that the accessory is in a position superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the accessory returns to its initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the SP first half reach before the accessory completes the return operation to the initial position, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be prevented.

(Epilogue 8)
It is assumed that the accessory performs an action to return to its initial position, and the timing at which the display changes to the one corresponding to the epilogue is the timing during the ascent, which is related to the timing at which the return action starts. According to this, since the display is switched to the one corresponding to the epilogue at a timing related to the start of the return motion, the display of the effect image corresponding to the accessory motion ends before the accessory returns to the initial position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation where the effect image is displayed when the accessory returns to the initial position, and the aesthetic appearance of the performance is not spoiled. Note that the timing of switching to the display corresponding to the epilogue may be the same timing as the timing when the accessory starts to rise. Furthermore, the accessory may perform a rotating motion or a moving motion at the falling position.

(Epilogue 10)
BGM corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the accessory returning to its initial position and the display corresponding to the epilogue starting. According to this, the epilogue part can be suitably started by suggesting the start of the epilogue part using the BGM.

(Epilogue 11)
A sound effect corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the accessory returning to its initial position and the display corresponding to the epilogue starting. According to this, the epilogue part can be suitably started by suggesting the start of the epilogue part with the sound effect.

(Epilogue 12)
BGM and sound effects corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the accessory returning to its initial position and the display corresponding to the epilogue starting. According to this, the epilogue part can be suitably started by suggesting the start of the epilogue part using BGM and sound effects.

(Epilogue 13)
In situations where the accessory returns to its initial position and a display corresponding to the epilogue is displayed, dialogue sounds are not output, and dialogue sounds are output and subtitles are displayed in the epilogue display after the accessory returns to its initial position. Just display it. According to this, it is possible to avoid displaying the subtitles at a timing when the subtitles are difficult to see, and it is possible to suitably execute the epilogue part.

(Epilogue 14)
At the timing when the accessory returns to its initial position, dialogue sounds may be output and subtitles may be displayed in the epilogue display. According to this, the lines can be clearly recognized and the epilogue part can be suitably executed.

(Epilogue 20)
As shown in FIGS. 173 and 174, the performance changes from the scene before the win/fail decision in the incitement part to the winning epilogue part by moving the accessory. Further, in accordance with the motion of the accessory falling, an effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory is displayed. Thereafter, while the accessory is rising, the display gradually switches from the effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory to a screen corresponding to the SP final reach hit epilogue part. Further, while the accessory is rising, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table corresponding to the action of the accessory to the brightness data table corresponding to the winning epilogue part. Also, while the accessory is rising, a sound corresponding to the winning epilogue part is output. Also, during the background display corresponding to the hit epilogue part that is displayed before the accessory changes to its initial position from (s3-5) to (s3-8), no dialogue sound is output. . Thereafter, in a state in which the movement of the accessory to the initial position is completed and the display of the effect image is completed (s4), dialogue sounds are output and subtitles are displayed. Here, the effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory is displayed on the premise that the accessory is in a position superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the accessory returns to its initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the epilogue part before the accessory completes its return operation to the initial position, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be prevented. Further, since the sound effect and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the winning epilogue part while the accessory is rising, the winning epilogue part can be suitably displayed. Furthermore, by displaying the subtitles after completing the return operation to the initial position, the winning epilogue part can be suitably displayed.

[About Epilogue 2, 3, and 5]
In FIG. 175, the characteristic parts in the epilogue part are numbered and explained.

(Relationship between number of subtitles and number of lines)
FIG. 175 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the number of subtitles and the number of lines. FIG. 175 shows the number of lines of characters being produced and the number of subtitles corresponding to the lines for each type of SP reach and the type of epilogue corresponding to each SP reach. For example, in the case of SP first half reach A, the number of lines is 8 and the number of subtitles is 5. Also, in the case of the winning epilogue part of the first half of SP Reach A, the number of lines is 1 and the number of subtitles is 1. In the case of the losing epilogue part of Reach A in the first half of the SP, there is no dialogue, so there are no subtitles.

In addition, in the case of SP first half reach B, the number of lines is 5 and the number of subtitles is 3. In addition, in the case of the winning epilogue part of the first half of SP Reach B, the number of lines is 3 and the number of subtitles is 3. In the case of the losing epilogue part of Reach B in the first half of the SP, there are no dialogues, so there are no subtitles. In addition, in the case of SP second half reach A, the number of lines is 16 and the number of subtitles is 14. In addition, in the case of the winning epilogue part of the second half of SP Reach A, the number of lines is 1 and the number of subtitles is 1. In the case of the lose-lose epilogue part of the second half of the SP Reach A, the number of lines is 1 and the number of subtitles is 1.

In addition, in the case of SP second half reach B, the number of lines is 9 and the number of subtitles is 7. In addition, in the case of the winning epilogue part of the second half of SP Reach B, the number of lines is 3 and the number of subtitles is 3. In the case of the lose-lose epilogue part of the second half of SP Reach B, the number of lines is 1 and the number of subtitles is 1. In addition, in the case of SP final reach, the number of lines is 27 and the number of subtitles is 19. In addition, in the case of the epilogue part of the SP final reach, the number of lines is 2 and the number of subtitles is 2. In the case of the losing epilogue part of the SP final reach, the number of subtitles is 1 for each line of dialogue.

(Epilogue 2)
As shown in FIG. 175, the proportion of subtitles displayed for characters' lines in the epilogue part is higher than the proportion of subtitles displayed for characters in SP reach, which is the incitement part. According to this, by clearly displaying subtitles in the epilogue part, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the character is saying. Also, in the winning epilogue part, subtitles can be used to create a feeling of blessing. Also, in the inciting part, there are more screen changes than in the epilogue part, so even if subtitles are displayed, the display time will be shorter, so that the display of auxiliary subtitles will not interfere with the production. , it is possible to convey the effect primarily through image switching. Thereby, suitable performance can be performed in the inciting part.

(Epilogue 3)
As shown in FIG. 175, in the epilogue part, subtitles are always displayed for the dialogue. According to this, in the winning epilogue part, it is possible to emphasize the sense of congratulations by clearly showing what the characters are saying.

(Epilogue 5)
As shown in FIG. 175, there are multiple types of SP reach, which is the inciting part, and each type has a different development and a different number of lines. However, in any SP reach, the proportion of subtitles displayed for characters' lines in the epilogue part is higher than the proportion of subtitles displayed for characters in SP reach. According to this, by clearly displaying subtitles in the epilogue part no matter which SP reach is executed, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the character is saying. Also, in the winning epilogue part, subtitles can be used to create a feeling of blessing. Also, in the inciting part, there are more screen changes than in the epilogue part, so it is possible to convey the effect primarily through image switching, and to prevent the effect from getting in the way by displaying auxiliary subtitles. . Thereby, suitable performance can be performed in the inciting part.

[About re-lottery effects 1, 4, 5, 7-18]
In FIGS. 176 and 177, characteristic parts in the re-lottery part will be explained by assigning numbers.

(Detailed explanation of re-lottery part)
FIG. 176 is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (A1) to (A23) in the re-lottery part. FIG. 177 is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (A24) to (A46) in the re-lottery part.

When the jackpot display result is derived, the symbols are enlarged and displayed as shown in (A1) and (A2), and then the symbols are reduced as shown in (A3) and (A4). Thereafter, as shown in (A5), the pattern becomes normal size. Then, as shown in (A6), the background is switched to the background for the re-lottery effect and the re-lottery effect is started. Here, from the state (A5) to the state (A6), the period in which the symbols are shaking is omitted. Specifically, when the pattern is normal size, the pattern is shaking. Then, after the size becomes normal, the symbol fluctuation of the re-lottery part starts. At this time, at a timing related to the completion of symbol dispensing (for example, including the timing immediately before the normal size, the timing after the normal size, the timing when the symbol starts swinging, etc.), the game effect lamp 9 The light switches from blinking white to smoothly lighting in rainbow colors. As a result, it is possible to perform smooth symbol display from symbol display to re-lottery performance, smooth transition to a swinging period, and blessings due to alignment of the symbols by illumination of the screen and lamp.

Thereafter, as shown in (A7) and (A8), there is a period of oscillation in which the symbol oscillates up and down. Thereafter, as shown in (A9) and (A10), the "2" symbol located in the center is once reduced. After that, "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1" used as decorative patterns from (A11) to (A23) are all displayed. A high-speed fluctuation is performed at After that, "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1" used as decorative patterns are displayed again from (A10') to (A23'). The high-speed fluctuations are performed in a manner similar to the above.

Thereafter, as shown in (A24), after all the decorations have been displayed twice, the button image is faintly displayed together with the "2" symbol that was initially displayed. After that, from (A25) to (A46), the decorative pattern changes rapidly as "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1", and as time passes The time gauge displayed under the button image will decrease accordingly. The time gauge is a display indicating the valid period of button operation. If the push button 31B is operated within the valid operation period, or if the push button 31B is not operated within the valid operation period and the valid period of button operation has ended, an odd number is displayed as shown in FIGS. 157 to 164. A symbol or an even number symbol is derived and displayed, and the game shifts to a jackpot.

(Re-lottery performance 1)
As shown in Figure 176, in the re-lottery performance, after the "2" symbol that was temporarily stopped and displayed before the re-lottery is enlarged, reduced, and oscillated, the "2" symbol is used as it is for the re-lottery. The performance begins. At the start of the re-extraction performance, the "2" symbol is reduced, and the variation of the re-lottery performance is started from the reduced "2" symbol. During the re-lottery performance, a symbol feeding performance is executed in which the symbols are replaced by high-speed fluctuations starting from the "2" symbol. In this way, the re-lottery effect will be started using the decorative symbols that were once temporarily stopped and displayed, and at the start of the re-lottery effect, the symbol forwarding effect will be executed using the symbols that were once temporarily stopped and displayed. , it is easy for the player to understand from which decorative symbol the re-lottery starts. As a result, the flow of a series of performances can be clearly shown.

(Re-lottery performance 4)
At the start of the symbol feeding performance in the re-lottery performance, the variation starts from the reduced state of the decorative symbols that have been displayed from the winning epilogue part. According to this, it is possible to clearly show the flow of a series of effects without executing the process of changing to a different decorative pattern.

(Re-lottery performance 5)
In the symbol feeding performance, the fluctuation is started by the reduced symbol, and the size of the symbol being fluctuated is a uniform reduced size. According to this, it is possible to make the appearance of the fluctuation during the symbol feeding performance smooth, and it is possible to clearly show the flow of a series of performances.

(Re-lottery performance 7)
As shown in FIG. 176, in the re-lottery performance, the "2" symbol that was once temporarily stopped and displayed before the re-lottery is enlarged, reduced, and oscillated, and then the "2" symbol is used for the re-lottery. The performance begins. At the start of the re-extraction performance, the "2" symbol is reduced, and the variation of the re-lottery performance is started from the reduced "2" symbol. During the re-lottery performance, a symbol feeding performance is executed in which the symbols are replaced by high-speed fluctuations starting from the "2" symbol. During the re-lottery performance, all the decorative symbols are sent out in order: "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "1", and then "2" again. ” A symbol feeding performance in which symbols are displayed is executed. In this way, a re-lottery performance is started using the ornamental symbols that were once temporarily stopped and displayed, and after a plurality of types of variations in the ornamental symbols are changed, the ornamental symbols that were initially temporarily stopped and displayed are displayed again. According to this, the flow of a series of effects can be clearly shown by the pattern advancing effect in which all decorative patterns are shown without displaying the final display result immediately.

(Re-lottery performance 8)
In the symbol feeding performance in the re-lottery performance, all decorative symbols are sent in order of "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "1", and again "2". '', ``3'', ``4'', ``5'', ``6'', ``7'', and ``1'', all the decorative patterns are sent in order. In this way, since the numbers of the decorative designs are sent in order, it is possible to clearly see the flow of a series of effects.

(Re-lottery performance 9)
In the symbol feeding performance in the re-lottery performance, all symbols are displayed with the transparency of the symbols when temporarily stopped, and the transparency is increased during fluctuation. Specifically, the "2" symbol with 0% transparency, the "2" symbol with 50% transparency, the "3" symbol with 0% transparency, the "3" symbol with 50% transparency, and the "3" symbol with 50% transparency. The symbols change, such as a "4" symbol with a transparency of 0% and a "4" symbol with a transparency of 50%. According to this, all the symbols can be clearly displayed with low transparency during the symbol feeding performance, so that it is possible to grasp what kind of symbol is being sent.

(Re-lottery performance 10)
In the pattern sending effect in the re-lottery effect, all the decorative patterns are sent in order of ``2'', ``3'', ``4'', ``5'', ``6'', ``7'', and ``1'', but each symbol The displayed time is the same. According to this, all the symbols can be displayed for a certain period of time, and the flow of a series of effects can be clearly shown.

(Re-lottery performance 11)
During the symbol feeding performance, a promotion display formed from a button image and a time gauge is displayed. The position where the promotion display is displayed is a position that does not overlap with the position where the fluctuation of the decorative symbols during the symbol feeding performance is displayed. In this way, since the promotion display does not overlap with the decorative symbols during the symbol feeding performance, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the symbol feeding. Note that a part of the promotion display may partially overlap with a decorative pattern during the pattern feeding performance.

(Re-lottery performance 12)
As shown in FIGS. 176 and 177, the promotion display starts at (A24) and (A25) after repeating twice the variation in which all decorative symbols are displayed during the symbol feeding performance. Since the promotion image is not displayed until the predetermined pattern of symbol feeding is repeated twice in this way, the player can be made to clearly recognize the pattern of pattern feeding.

(Re-lottery performance 13)
Note that the symbols at the start of the re-lottery performance may be other than two symbols. Even in such a case, the timing at which the button image is displayed as an action promotion display is constant. For example, in the case of 2 symbols, the timing at which the movement promotion display is displayed is the timing at which 2 symbols are displayed again. Similarly, in the case of 5 symbols, the timing at which the movement promotion display is displayed may be the timing at which 5 symbols are displayed again. In other words, no matter which symbol is used to start the re-lottery performance, the number of symbols sent is the same. According to this, the control can be made constant, so that the processing load can be reduced.

(Re-lottery performance 14)
In the lottery performance, there are two patterns: a pattern in which an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) is displayed and then an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) is displayed, and a pattern in which an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) is displayed and then an odd numbered symbol (for example, 3 symbols) is displayed. It was set up. In addition to this, a pattern may be provided in which an odd numbered symbol (for example, 7 symbols) is displayed after an odd numbered symbol (for example, 7 symbols) is displayed. In a performance in which symbols are sent from an odd numbered symbol to an odd numbered symbol, all the same odd numbered symbols may be sent at the time of symbol feeding. However, regardless of the pattern, the length of the performance during the symbol feeding period in the re-lottery performance may be designed to be the same. According to this, it is possible to provide a suitable re-lottery effect for any pattern without increasing the data capacity.

(Re-lottery performance 15)
In the lottery performance, a pattern in which an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) is displayed after which an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) is displayed, a pattern in which an odd numbered symbol (for example, 3 symbols) is displayed after an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) is displayed, Common data is used in any of the patterns in which an odd numbered symbol (for example, 7 symbols) is displayed after an odd numbered symbol (for example, 7 symbols) is displayed. In other words, the production data is the same, but the design is such that the data related to the decorative design is changed depending on the pattern. According to this, there is no need to provide a dedicated pattern, so the amount of data can be reduced.

[About Inciting 21-27]
In FIGS. 178 to 181, characteristic parts of the inciting part will be explained by assigning numbers.

(fade effect)
FIG. 178 is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (b4) to (b6) in the promotion part and a comparison diagram during the jackpot round. In the provocative part, a fade effect is applied to the subtitles for the dialogue. The fade effect is an effect consisting of a fade-in in which the display gradually becomes clearer and a fade-out in which the display gradually disappears. In FIG. 178(A), a part of the production with a fade effect in SP first half reach A, which is the inciting part, will be explained.

In state (b4), a screen where Yumu-chan and Bakuchu are facing each other is displayed. After that, as shown in (b4'), the subtitle "I found it" corresponding to Yumu-chan's line is displayed with a transparency of 70%. After that, as shown in (b5), the subtitle "I found it" corresponding to Yumu-chan's line is displayed with a transparency of 0%. In this way, a fade-in effect is added when subtitles corresponding to dialogue are displayed. In addition, in the state (b4'), the dialogue sound for "I found it" is not output, but as in the state (b5), the dialogue sound is output when the subtitle transparency is 0%. .

After that, as shown in (b5'), in the layer below the subtitle with 0% transparency for "I found it", which corresponds to Yume-chan's dialogue, "I found it", which corresponds to Bakuchu's dialogue, is transparent. Subtitles with a rate of 70% are displayed with a fade-in effect. Thereafter, as shown in (b5''), the subtitle "I found it" and the subtitle "I found it" are displayed in such a state that their transparency is both 40%. After that, as shown in (b6), the subtitle "Found" corresponding to Bakuchu's line is displayed with a transparency of 0%. In this way, the subtitle "I found it" that corresponds to Yumu-chan's lines gradually fades out from (b5') to (b6). On the other hand, the subtitle "Found" that corresponds to Bakuchu's line gradually fades in from (b5') to (b6). Note that in the states (b5') and (b5''), the dialogue sound for "found" is not output, and when the subtitle transparency is 0% as in the state (b6), the dialogue sound is not output. There is output.

As shown in FIG. 178 (B), during the jackpot round, a performance in which the characters sing along with the music is performed. For example, in FIG. 178(B), subtitles (lyrics) such as "I'll definitely get it someday" are displayed as the song sung by Nana-chan progresses. Immediately afterwards, subtitles (lyrics) appear as the song progresses, saying, ``I'll grab it with my little hands.'' If such subtitles (lyrics) are displayed continuously during the jackpot round, no fade effect is applied. This is because when a song is playing, the progress of the song can be understood by the rhythm, so even if the subtitles (lyrics) are switched without adding a fade effect, the timing of the change is easy to understand.

(Inciting 21)
In the provocation part, as shown in FIG. 178(A), there is a scene in which subtitles are displayed for the character's dialogue. When subtitles are displayed, there is a period in which the first subtitles are displayed so that the first subtitle display period overlaps with the second subtitle display period that is displayed next. A fade effect is applied when the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed so as to overlap. A fade effect causes a change in the transparency of the displayed text with different states. According to this, even if the subtitles are displayed so as to overlap, the change in the subtitles is made easier to understand due to the fade effect, so that the switching of the subtitles can be made easier to understand.

(Inciting 22)
As shown in FIG. 178(A), in a scene where characters confront each other, a first subtitle corresponding to one character's line is displayed, followed by a second subtitle corresponding to another character's line. Sometimes. In this case, the second subtitle is displayed at a transmittance of 70%, overlapping the location where the first subtitle is displayed at a transmittance of 0%. After that, the first subtitle fades out, and the second subtitle fades in, resulting in a display with a transmittance of 0%. According to this, even if the subtitles are displayed so as to overlap, the switching of the subtitles is easy to understand due to the fade effect.

(Variation example of subtitle display)
When the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed at the same timing, instead of adding a fade effect to both of the two subtitles, a fade effect may be applied to one of the subtitles. . Specifically, a pattern in which a fade effect is not applied to the first subtitle display and a fade effect is applied to the second subtitle display, and a pattern in which a fade effect is applied to the first subtitle display and a fade effect is applied to the second subtitle display. A pattern that does not include is possible. Either pattern may be applied by replacing the pattern with the above-described pattern in which a fade effect is applied to the first subtitle display and a fade effect is applied to the second subtitle display. Furthermore, when applying a fade effect, the second subtitle display may be superimposed on the first subtitle display, or the second subtitle display may be superimposed on the first subtitle display.

Further, the subtitles for the lines of the first character and the second character have been described in the case where the timings at which the subtitles are displayed overlap. However, when the same character utters lines consecutively, the subtitle display for the second line may be overlapped with the subtitle display for the first line. In such a case, a fade effect may be added to the subtitle display.

(Inciting 24)
As shown in FIG. 178 (B), during the jackpot round, a performance in which the characters sing along with the music is performed. Subtitles (lyrics) are then displayed as the song progresses. However, during the jackpot round, even if subtitles (lyrics) are continuously displayed, no fade effect is applied. This is because when a song is playing, the progress of the song can be understood from the rhythm, so even if the subtitles (lyrics) are switched without adding a fade effect, it is easy to understand the timing of the change. In addition, since the music during the jackpot round is a representative music of the content installed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the lyrics to be displayed next are easy for the player to understand even without adding a fade effect. According to this, the work of adding a fade effect can be omitted during the jackpot round, and the series of performances can be made to look good.

(About the relationship between subtitle transparency and sound output)
FIG. 179 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the transmittance of subtitles for dialogue and sound output. FIG. 179 shows the situation when Yume-chan's line "I found it" and Bakuchu's line "I found it" in FIG. 178(A) are uttered. In FIG. 179, the horizontal axis of the graph indicates the number of frames. The subtitle "I found it" is displayed at 70% transparency one frame after 100% transparency. Furthermore, after one frame, the image is displayed with a transmittance of 0%. As a result, the subtitle "I found it" is displayed with a fade-in effect over a period of two frames. During this period, the sound of the line "I found it" was not output.

After that, the subtitle "I found it" is displayed with a transparency of 0% while the sound of the dialogue "I found it" is output. Then, during period T1, which is a three-frame silent period after the output of the dialogue sound of "I found it", the subtitle "I found it" is continuously displayed with a transparency of 0% for two frames. . Thereafter, for the remaining one frame period of T1, the subtitle "I found it" is displayed with a transparency of 0% to 100%. As a result, the subtitle "I found it" is displayed with a fade-out effect over a period of one frame.

Also, during the T1 period, the dialogue sound for "found" is not output, but starting from one frame after the start of the T1 period, the subtitle "found" is faded in. Is displayed. Specifically, the subtitle "Found" is displayed at a transmittance of 70% one frame after the transmittance is 100%. Furthermore, after one frame, the image is displayed with a transmittance of 0%. As a result, the subtitle "Found" is displayed with a fade-in effect over a period of two frames.

After that, the subtitle "Found" is displayed with a transparency of 0% during the period when the dialogue sound "Found" is output. Then, during a period T2, which is a three-frame silent period after the output of the dialogue sound of "found," the subtitle "found" is continuously displayed with a transmittance of 0% for two frames. Thereafter, for the remaining one frame period of T2, the subtitle "Found" is displayed with a transparency of 0% to 100%. As a result, the subtitle "Found" is displayed with a fade-out effect over a period of one frame.

As shown in Figure 179, the first subtitle "I found it" corresponding to Yumu-chan's character and the second subtitle "I found it" corresponding to Bakuchu's character have the same fade-in and fade-out. Effects are added. Furthermore, fade-in is performed over a period of two frames, whereas fade-out is performed over a period of one frame.

(Inciting 23)
As shown in Figure 179, the output timing of the dialogue sound corresponding to the second subtitle "found" is displayed so that the first subtitle and the second subtitle overlap, and is output during the period when the fade effect is applied. Not done. Then, the dialogue sound corresponding to the second subtitle is output from when the second subtitle is displayed with a transparency of 0%. According to this, the switching of subtitles is easy to understand due to the fade effect, and since the dialogue sound is output after the second subtitle is displayed, it is possible to easily understand the content of the performance visually and audibly.

(Comparison of subtitles between the incitement part and the epilogue part)
FIG. 180 is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (b4) to (b6) and a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (o3) to (o5). FIG. 180(A) is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (b4) to (b6) in the inciting part. Further, FIG. 180(B) is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (o3) to (o5). 180(A) and 180(B) have in common that subtitles are displayed consecutively for lines uttered by two characters. However, the period from when the first subtitle is displayed to when the second subtitle is displayed is different between FIG. 180(A) and FIG. 180(B).

As shown in FIG. 180(A), in parts (b4) to (b7), in (b4), it is displayed that Yumu-chan and Bakuchu are facing each other. After that, in (b5), the first subtitle corresponding to Yumu-chan's line "I found it" is displayed. After that, in (b6), a second subtitle corresponding to Bakuchu's line "I found it" is displayed. After that, in (b6'), Yumu-chan is enlarged and displayed on the screen. After that, subtitles corresponding to Yumu-chan's line "I'll catch you!" are displayed. The time t1 from the start of (b4) to the end of (b6) is about 3 seconds.

As shown in Figure 180(B), in parts (o3) to (o5), a shop whose signboard was the crab that Jam-chan and Nana-chan defeated in (o3) is displayed, and Jam-chan's line " The first subtitle corresponding to "Signboard Nene" is displayed. After that, from (o3') to (o3''), the background of a shop with a crab as a signboard is displayed without subtitles. After that, at (o4), a second subtitle corresponding to Nana's line "Work hard" is displayed. Afterwards, the background of the shop with the crab as its sign becomes a still image. The time t1 from the start of (o3) to the end of (o5) is about 10 seconds.

As shown in FIGS. 180(A) and (B), in the incitement part and the epilogue part, subtitles corresponding to the dialogue are displayed multiple times in one scene (period 0 to t1 and period 0 to t2). There are cases. In the case where subtitles are displayed multiple times, if there is enough time, it may be possible to erase the subtitle display that has been displayed to make it easier to understand the change in subtitle display. However, when there is not enough time, such as during the period from 0 to t1, it is difficult to temporarily erase the subtitle display. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, by adding a fade effect to the subtitle display, it is possible to make the switching of subtitles easier to understand.

Here, in the pachinko game machine 1, a video is first created, and then audio such as dialogue is added. After that, subtitles corresponding to each line are added. Suppose that it would be time-consuming to recreate a video with a longer period for temporarily erasing the subtitle display during the period 0 to t1, where a large amount of time is not available. Therefore, by adding a fade effect, it is possible to make the change in subtitles easier to understand without having to recreate the video. In addition, even when there is sufficient time, such as the epilogue part when the crab signboard shop is displayed, by uniformly applying a fade effect, the overall workload is reduced, and when switching subtitles. This can prevent any discomfort from occurring.

(Inciting 26)
As shown in FIG. 180, a fade effect is applied to the subtitle display even in predetermined scenes in the portions (o3) to (o5) where the first subtitle and the second subtitle do not overlap. As for the fade effect, at least one of fade-in and fade-out may be applied. In the subtitle display created after the video is created, it is time-consuming to add a fade effect depending on whether the subtitle display overlaps or not. Therefore, by uniformly applying a fade effect to subtitle display, it is possible to prevent the workload from increasing.

(Inciting 25)
Here, although not shown, the timing of subtitle display may overlap even in the epilogue part. However, as shown in FIG. 180, in the epilogue part, there are many scenes in which the period from subtitle display to subtitle display is longer than that in the provocation part. This is because the direction in the inciting part progresses quickly, and the direction in the epilogue part does not progress as quickly as in the inciting part. As a result, the provocation part is displayed at a higher rate than the epilogue part when the subtitles overlap. In such a case, by effectively applying a fade effect to the subtitle display, it is possible to prevent the user from feeling uncomfortable when switching between subtitles.

[About Inciting 27]
In FIG. 181, the characteristic parts of the inciting part are numbered and explained.

(Inciting 27)
FIG. 181 is a diagram for explaining a comparative example of subtitle display. For example, as shown in Comparative Example 1 in FIG. 181(A), subtitles for similar lines such as "I found it" and "I found it" may be displayed consecutively. In such a case, if the subtitle display is switched without any fade effect or blank period, it will be difficult to understand the subtitle display switching. Furthermore, when displaying subtitles for long lines or for lines that progress quickly, an unnatural feeling may occur if the subtitles are switched without providing a blank period. In such a case, the sense of discomfort can be eliminated by adding a fade effect to the subtitle display. Furthermore, as shown in Comparative Example 2 in FIG. 181(B), it is also possible to overlay "found" on the subtitle display of "found" and then display "found". In such a case, subtitle display becomes difficult to see by not adding a fade effect. Furthermore, as shown in Comparative Example 3 in FIG. 181(C), it is also possible to display the subtitle display of "I found it" and the subtitle display of "I found it" in two upper and lower rows. In such a case, the subtitle display reduces the area for displaying the effect, which impedes the effect in areas other than the area where the subtitle display is displayed. On the other hand, such a problem can be solved by adding a fade effect to subtitle display as in the present embodiment.

[About Epilogue 23]
In FIG. 182, the characteristic parts in the epilogue part are numbered and explained.

FIG. 182 is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (B4) to (B11). With reference to FIG. 182, a description will be given of the correspondence between effects using decorative patterns and small patterns on the screen and effects using the game effect lamp 9. As shown in (B4), the enlarged "3" symbol is reduced in the symbol presentation performance of the re-lottery part. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Next, as shown in (B5), the "3" symbol is displayed in normal size. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow colors. Next, as shown in (B6), the "3" symbol is displayed with slight vertical shaking. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow colors.

Next, as shown in (B7), the screen changes from the background for the re-lottery to the normal background, and in this normal background, the "3" symbol continues to be displayed with slight vertical shaking. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow colors. Thereafter, based on receiving the symbol confirmation command, the decorative symbols and small symbols are fixed and stopped, as shown in (B8). At this time, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow colors. As shown in (B9), the symbol confirmation period continues for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 s), and the same display as in (B8) is maintained on the screen. At this time, the mode of the game effect lamp 9 is maintained in a flashing rainbow-colored lighting mode.

Thereafter, based on the reception of the fanfare command, the mode of the game effect lamp 9 is changed after about 10 msec to correspond to the fanfare. Furthermore, based on the reception of the fanfare command, the screen changes after approximately 33 msec to display "FEVER". Specifically, as shown in (D1), the screen maintains the state of (B9) during the fanfare period after receiving the fanfare command. On the other hand, the mode of the game effect lamp 9 changes to correspond to the fanfare earlier than the mode of the screen. The state of the game effect lamp 9 in (D1) is off. Next, as shown in (D2), after the game effect lamp 9 appears, the screen changes to a screen where the words "FEVER" and Yume-chan, which indicate the fanfare mode, are displayed. Further, at this time, the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 corresponding to the fanfare is maintained.

[About Epilogue 28-31]
In FIG. 183, the characteristic parts in the epilogue part are numbered and explained.

FIG. 183 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of pattern placement. In a modified example, the symbols may be put out in the order of (Y1) to (Y7). Specifically, as shown in (Y1), the reduced decorative patterns (reduced patterns) in the scene of catching the Bakuchu are aligned in the state of "222" at the upper left of the screen. The mode of the game effect lamp 9 is rainbow lighting (smooth). Next, as shown in (Y2), the screen becomes a still image and the reduced pattern slightly shakes up and down. The mode of the game effect lamp 9 at this time is rainbow lighting (smooth).

Next, as shown in (Y3), the reduced decorative pattern at the upper left of the screen is temporarily erased. The mode of the game effect lamp 9 at this time is rainbow lighting (smooth). Next, as shown in (Y4), the decoration "222" which had been erased from the center of the screen is enlarged and displayed. The mode of the game effect lamp 9 at this time is white blinking. Next, as shown in (Y5), the decorative pattern "222" is enlarged from the state in (Y4) and displayed. The mode of the game effect lamp 9 at this time is white blinking. Next, as shown in (Y6), the decorative pattern "222" is enlarged from the state in (Y5) and displayed. The mode of the game effect lamp 9 at this time is white blinking. Next, as shown in (Y7), the decorative pattern "222" is enlarged from the state in (Y6) and displayed. The mode of the game effect lamp 9 at this time is white blinking.

In the pattern display of the modified example, the decorative patterns move to the upper left corner of the screen in a reach mode at the start of SP reach, and the symbols are aligned at the winning epilogue part as shown in (Y1). Then, the reduced symbol once deleted after the reduced symbol fluctuation period as shown in (Y2) is enlarged from the center position of the screen and the first symbol effect is executed.

(Epilogue 28)
In the winning epilogue part, when the images that make up the winning epilogue are being displayed in sequence (the winning epilogue video is being played), the decorative pattern is placed at the edge of the display area of the screen (in the upper left corner of the screen). location). In relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image and the epilogue video ends, a reduced pattern is erased and a pattern display effect is executed in which the reduced pattern is erased and enlarged using the center area of the screen. Further, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table corresponding to the winning epilogue part to the brightness data table corresponding to the symbol display in relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image. According to this, when the image of the winning epilogue part is flowing, the reduced symbol is positioned at the edge of the screen so that it does not interfere with the image of the winning epilogue part, and the image of the winning epilogue part is finished and the symbol is released. When playing, the jackpot symbols can be emphasized and shown to the player by enlarging and displaying the decorative symbols in a continuous manner using the edge of the screen and the center of the screen. Furthermore, by switching the brightness data table, it is possible to suitably show the change of scenes. In this way, the winning epilogue part can be shown suitably.

(Epilogue 29)
In the winning epilogue part, when the images that make up the winning epilogue are being displayed in sequence (the winning epilogue video is being played), the decorative pattern is placed at the edge of the display area of the screen (in the upper left corner of the screen). ``222'' is displayed in the same position as ``222''. According to this, even while the winning epilogue video is being played, the player can be made aware of the fact that a jackpot display result has been obtained by the reduced decorative pattern.

(Epilogue 30)
In the winning epilogue part, when the images that make up the winning epilogue are being displayed in sequence (the winning epilogue video is being played), the decorative pattern is placed at the edge of the display area of the screen (in the upper left corner of the screen). position). In addition, in relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image and the epilogue video ends, the subtitle display that was displayed at (Y1) is erased, the reduced image at the upper left corner is erased, and the image at the center of the screen is erased. The decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the area. According to this, it is possible to prevent the subtitle display from being displayed overlapping with the decorative pattern, or from being misunderstood to be showing some kind of message when the pattern is displayed, and to appropriately display the winning epilogue part. I can show you.

(Epilogue 31)
In a modified example, the decorative pattern moves to the upper left corner of the screen in a reach mode at the start of SP reach. According to this, by positioning it from the start of the SP reach, it is possible to avoid disturbing the development of the performance even during the SP reach, and it is possible to suitably show a series of performances.

FIGS. 184 to 187 are diagrams for explaining modified examples of the re-lottery. In a modified example, a case will be described in which, for example, a re-lottery is executed from the drawing of symbols in the order of (F1) to (F12). Specifically, after the symbols are enlarged and displayed as shown in (F1) and (F2), the symbols are reduced as shown in (F3) and (F4). Thereafter, as shown in (F5), the pattern becomes normal size. Then, as shown in (F6), the background is switched to the background for the re-lottery effect, and the re-lottery effect starts. Thereafter, as shown in (F7), there is a shaking period in which the symbols shake up and down. Thereafter, from (F8) to (F9), the "3" symbol is displayed in a reduced size.

Thereafter, as shown in (F10), a button image and a time gauge are faintly displayed below the "3" symbol. Thereafter, as shown in (F11), the button image and time gauge are clearly displayed with the "3" symbol displayed. Then, as shown in (F12), the time gauge decreases as time passes. The time gauge is a display indicating the valid period of button operation.

FIG. 185 shows a case where the player operates the push button 31B from the state (F12). In FIG. 185, the re-lottery effect executed in (G1) to (G27) will be explained. When the player operates the push button 31B from the state (F12), "3", "4", "5", "6", which are used as decorative symbols from (G1) to (G13), A high-speed fluctuation is performed in such a manner that "7", "1", and "2" are all displayed. After that, as shown in (G14), the "3" symbol that was displayed before the high-speed fluctuation is displayed.

Thereafter, the symbols are enlarged and displayed as shown in (G15) and (G16), and then reduced as shown in (G17) and (G18). Thereafter, as shown in (G19), the pattern becomes the normal size. Then, the background is switched to a background for pattern shaking. Here, as the symbol shaking, an operation of shaking the symbol is performed by rotating the symbol on the screen from the back side to the front side. Specifically, after the symbol swings toward the back from (G20) to (G21), the symbol swings toward the front from (G22) to (G23), thereby changing to the initial position. Thereafter, the symbol swings toward the front from (G24) to (G25), and then swings toward the back from (G26) to (G27), thereby changing to the initial position.

FIG. 186 shows a case where the player does not operate the push button 31B from the state (F12). In FIG. 186, the re-lottery effect executed in (H1) to (H27) will be explained. If the player does not operate the push button 31B from the state (F12), the "3" symbol will remain displayed from (H1) to (H6), and the time gauge will decrease as time passes. . Thereafter, as shown in (H7), the button image is displayed faintly and then erased. After that, "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "1", and "2" used as decorative patterns from (H8) to (H20) are all displayed. A high-speed fluctuation is performed at After that, as shown in (H21), the "3" symbol that was displayed before the high-speed fluctuation is displayed.

Thereafter, the symbols are enlarged and displayed as shown in (H22) and (H23), and then are reduced in size as shown in (H24) and (H25). Thereafter, as shown in (H26), the pattern becomes the normal size. Then, as shown in (H27), the background is switched to the backgrounds shown in (G20) to (G27). The movement of the symbols in (H22) to (H26) when the push button 31B is not operated is the same as the movement of the symbols in (G15) to (G19) when the push button 31B is operated. However, when the push button 31B is operated, the amount of time the time gauge decreases when the push button 31B is not operated is absorbed by the period in which the effect of shaking three symbols is executed. In other words, no matter what timing the button is operated, the period until the button is operated is absorbed by the duration of the effect of shaking the three symbols.

Then, after (G27) or (H27), an effect as shown in FIG. 187 is executed. In FIG. 187, the re-lottery effect executed in (J1) to (J18) will be explained. After (G27) or (H27), the screen temporarily goes white out as shown in (J1). After that, the "3" symbol rotates once from (J2) to (J9). Specifically, from the state (J2), move counterclockwise around the vertical direction of the "3 symbols" to (J3), (J4), (J5), (J6), (J7), (J8), ( J9) and rotate. The rotation is so fast that the design appears to rotate in an instant.

After that, as shown in (J10), after the "3" symbol is displayed in a reduced size, the symbol swings toward the back from (J11) to (J12), and then from (J13) to (J14), the symbol moves toward the front. It changes to the initial position by swinging. Thereafter, the symbol swings toward the front from (J15) to (J16), and then swings toward the back from (J17) to (J18), thereby changing to the initial position. The shaking movement of the symbols from (J11) to (J18) is the same as the shaking movement of the symbols from (G20) to (G27). Then, at (J18), the symbol stops neatly at the normal position.

[About losses 1 to 7]
The characteristic parts of the failure epilogue part will be explained by numbering them.

(About the design confirmation period)
FIG. 188 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the symbol determination period. (X1) in FIG. 188 is a diagram showing the timing of determination of validity corresponding to (r54) in FIG. 132. The details of the symbol confirmation period when moving from this state to the winning epilogue part will be explained using (X2) to (X5). Further, the details of the symbol confirmation period when the state moves from the state (X1) to the losing epilogue part will be explained using (X6) to (X9).

When transitioning from the state (X1) to the hit epilogue part, an image of the state in which the Bakuchu is caught (s5) is displayed, as shown in (X2). Thereafter, as shown in (X3), after being controlled to the normal screen, a symbol determination period begins in which symbols such as (B8) are determined and stopped. The symbol confirmation period continues for 0.5 seconds after receiving the symbol confirmation designation command. After that, as shown in (X4), a fanfare period like (B11) begins. After that, as shown in (X5), a jackpot round period begins.

When transitioning from the state (X1) to the loss epilogue part, as shown in (X6), an image of the state of regret (u2) of not being able to catch the Bakuchu is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in (X7), the background is blacked out and a symbol combination indicating a losing display result of "232" is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in (X8), an eye-catching image depicting a character image that has the effect of attracting the player's attention is displayed. Thereafter, after being controlled to the normal screen, there is a symbol determination period in which symbols such as (X9) are determined and stopped. The symbol confirmation period continues for 0.5 seconds after receiving the symbol confirmation designation command. If there is a pending memory corresponding to the next variable display after the symbol confirmation period ends, the next variable display will be started.

(Detailed explanation of blackout)
FIG. 189 is a detailed explanatory diagram of blackout. The details of blackout will be explained in the order of FIG. 189 (X10) to (X22). As shown in (X10), an image of the unfortunate state (u2) of not being able to catch Bakuchu is displayed. From this state, the blackout background will be displayed with its transmittance gradually decreasing, and the background of the middle design showing "3", which is one of the decorative designs displayed in the center, will gradually decrease its transmittance. displayed. By lowering the transmittance, the blackout background gradually becomes darker, and the middle design gradually becomes clearer.

After (X10), as shown in (X11), the blackout background is displayed with a transmittance of 70% and the medium pattern with a transmittance of 100%. Thereafter, as shown in (X12), the blackout background is displayed with a transmittance of 60% and the medium pattern with a transmittance of 90%. Thereafter, as shown in (X13), the blackout background is displayed with a transmittance of 50% and the medium pattern with a transmittance of 80%. Thereafter, as shown in (X14), the blackout background is displayed with a transmittance of 40% and the medium pattern with a transmittance of 60%. Thereafter, as shown in (X15), the blackout background is displayed with a transmittance of 30% and the medium pattern with a transmittance of 40%. Thereafter, as shown in (X16), the blackout background is displayed with a transmittance of 20% and the medium pattern with a transmittance of 20%. Thereafter, as shown in (X17), the blackout background is displayed with a transmittance of 10% and the medium pattern with a transmittance of 0%. Thereafter, as shown in (X18), the blackout background is displayed with a transmittance of 0% and the medium pattern with a transmittance of 0%.

After that, from (X19) to (X20), there is a symbol shaking period in which the middle symbol "3" swings up and down. After the symbol shaking period, an eye-catching image is displayed as shown in (X21). After that, as shown in (X22), the symbol confirmation period begins. As shown in Figure 189, the background blackout starts earlier than the medium pattern fade-in, and the background blackout has more stages of transmittance switching than the medium pattern fade-in. .

(Loss 1)
As shown in FIG. 188, if the game is a loss after the determination of success or failure, a loss symbol is displayed during the blackout background in the loss epilogue part. After that, a switching image based on the eye-catching screen is displayed, and then the screen switches to the normal background at the start of the reach. According to this, by using the eye-catching screen, it is possible to suitably show the switching of the screen when the game loses.

(Loss 2)
As shown in FIG. 189, in the loss epilogue part, the background at the time of loss gradually blacks out, and the middle symbol gradually fades in. According to this, since the image at the time of a loss and the medium symbol are displayed in inverse proportion to each other due to the relationship between blackout and fade-in, the display at the time of a loss can be made to look suitable due to the relationship between the two.

(Loss 3)
As shown in Figure 189, in the loss epilogue part, the number of stages required to black out the background at the time of loss from 100% to 0% transparency is as follows: The number of steps is greater than the number of steps required to progress in the process. Specifically, the blackout of the background is in 8 steps from (X11) to (X18), while the fade-in of the middle pattern is in 6 steps from (X12) to (X17). According to this, the image at the time of loss and the middle symbol are displayed in inverse proportion due to the relationship between blackout and fade-in, and the number of stages of change in transmittance is different, so the display at the time of loss depends on the relationship between the two. can be displayed in a suitable manner.

(Loss 4)
As shown in FIG. 189, the change in which the background is blacked out at the time of a loss starts earlier than the change in which the middle symbol fades in. According to this, the image at the time of a loss and the middle symbol are displayed in inverse proportion to each other due to the relationship between blackout and fade-in, and since the blackout is faster than the fade-in of the symbol, the loss occurs due to the relationship between the two. It is possible to display the time in a suitable manner.

(Loss 5)
The image displayed at the time of the loss before the blackout changes, whereas the image displayed at the time of the blackout does not change. According to this, blackout can be made to look suitable by starting blackout when the image remains unchanged. Note that switching images includes switching the picture on the screen, switching the angle of the video, and switching the displayed scene itself. In addition, the expression "no change in the image" includes that the image is the same still image, that the angle of the image does not change even if it is a moving image, and that even if the image is moving, only part of the image moves slightly.

(Loss 6)
As the background at the time of loss blacked out, the medium symbol faded in, and as shown in (X18) to (X20), the medium symbol with a transmittance of 0% and the medium symbol with a transmittance of 0% A blacked-out background is displayed for a predetermined period of time. This predetermined period includes symbol fluctuation periods as shown in (X19) to (X20). The symbol shaking period may be such that the symbol oscillates repeatedly for at least two cycles, with one cycle being the period in which the middle symbol is moved from the center position to the upper position, the center position, the lower position, and the center position. The predetermined period including such a period may be set to be longer than the period during which the fade-in is executed from the state where the medium symbol changes from 100% transmittance to 0% transmittance. Further, the predetermined period may be set longer than the period during which the eye catch is displayed. According to this, in a display in which the background is blacked out with a transmittance of 0%, there is a predetermined period in which the middle symbol is displayed in a clear state, so that it is possible to suitably show that the player has lost.

(Loss 7)
As shown in FIGS. 188 and 189, the eye-catching screen displays the title "POWERFULII" and images of the main characters Yume-chan, Jam-chan, and Nana-chan as information about the pachinko machine 1. be done. According to this, information about the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be accurately conveyed using the eye-catching image.

[Regarding losses 8, 10 to 17]
The characteristic parts of the failure epilogue part will be explained by numbering them.

(About the game effect lamp when you lose)
FIG. 190 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the game effect lamp in the case of a loss and a diagram for explaining a modification example in the case of a loss. FIG. 190 also describes the lighting mode of the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050. 190 (X30) to (X36) are detailed explanatory diagrams of the game effect lamps when the game is lost, and (X40) to (X46) are diagrams showing modified examples when the game is lost. The example shown in FIG. 190 shows the performance when losing in the final SP reach, but the performance when losing in other reaches such as SP first half reach A, B and SP second half reach A, B, etc. The technique shown in FIG. 190 may be applied.

In this embodiment, the brightness data table at the time of loss is used from the effect (X30) in which six ally characters are disappointed to the effect in (X31) in which the background image is blacked out. Note that the brightness data table at the time of loss shown in FIG. 190 corresponds to the grandchild table specified by the times tu1 to tu3 of child table WD17 in the loss epilogue part shown in FIG. 216, which will be described later.

The featured image appears after the background image blacks out. An eye-catching image is an image that attracts the player's attention, and in this embodiment, as a result of a series of effects in SP reach, the eye-catching image is displayed before returning to the normal screen after a losing symbol is derived (temporarily stopped). The image is displayed.

A brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is used from the switching period to the eye-catching screen (X32) to the display of the eye-catching screen (X33). After that, through the switching period to the normal screen (X34) and the symbol confirmation period (X35), the background changes to the next fluctuation (X36), which is executed when the fluctuation pattern command with hold is received. A brightness data table is used. Note that the background brightness data table shown in FIG. 190 corresponds to the grandchild table 26 specified at time tu4 of the child table WD17 in the lose epilogue part shown in FIG. 216, which will be described later.

Note that the background brightness data table is maintained even when a customer waiting command is received when there is no reservation after the pattern confirmation period (X35). In addition, in response to receiving the customer waiting command, the presentation screen may be displayed as a demonstration, and a brightness data table for demonstration may be used.

In relation to the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050, the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 is blinking from (X30) to (X34). Then, by receiving the symbol confirmation command, the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 is turned off in the state (X35). After that, by receiving the variation pattern command when there is reservation, the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 becomes blinking in the state of (X36). In addition, when there is no hold after the symbol confirmation period of (X35), the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 remains off even if a customer waiting command is received.

Furthermore, as a modification in case of a loss, the brightness data table in each state may be different from that in this embodiment. Specifically, the brightness data table at the time of failure is used from the disappointment of (X40) to the background blackout of (X41). After that, during the (X42) eye-catch screen switching period, (X43) eye-catch screen, (X44) normal screen switching period, and (X45) symbol confirmation period, the brightness data table for switching (eye-catching) is It may also be used. Then, in the next variation of (X36), the background brightness data table may be used.

Here, the first brightness data in the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) has a higher brightness than the last brightness data (lights out) in the brightness data table before eye-catching display (when losing). In addition, the first brightness data in the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is higher in brightness than the first brightness data in the brightness data table (not including turning off) corresponding to the background at the start of variation.

(Loss 8)
Characteristic parts of the detailed explanatory diagram of the game effect lamp 9 when the game is lost will be explained. The production screen will be switched to the image of the loss after the performance of the success/fail decision. Thereafter, after a blackout display in which the losing display result is displayed, the screen is switched to an eye-catching screen. Furthermore, after that, a screen is displayed in which the symbols are fixed and stopped after switching to the normal screen. Further, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table at the time of success/failure determination to the brightness data table at the time of loss. Thereafter, the display is switched to a brightness data table for switching (eye-catching). Furthermore, after that, the table is switched to the background luminance data table at the start of the fluctuation. Here, at the timing of switching to the eye-catching screen, the brightness data table is switched to a brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching). Furthermore, the brightness data table is switched to the background brightness data table at the timing when the screen is switched to the normal screen. The special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 is switched from blinking to off upon receiving the symbol confirmation command, but the background brightness data table is not switched even upon reception of the symbol confirmation command. Further, the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 switches from off to blinking upon reception of the next variation variation pattern command, but the background brightness data table does not switch even upon reception of the symbol confirmation command. According to this, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for the background when the eye-catching screen ends, and that brightness data table is continued until the next change, so the brightness data table corresponding to the reception of the symbol confirmation command There is no need to create a separate performance, and the performance by the lamp can be shown without any discomfort from the performance at the time of loss to the next change, and a series of performances can be suitably shown.

(Loss 10)
After the brightness data table is switched to the background brightness data table with the end of the eye-catching screen, the background brightness data table continues to be used even if there is no pending memory and a customer waiting demo designation command is received. According to this, after switching to the brightness data table for the background, the same brightness data table can be used continuously, so it is possible to show the effect using the lamp without any discomfort, and it is possible to show a series of effects suitably. Can be done.

(Loss 11)
The special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 switches from blinking to extinguishing upon reception of a symbol confirmation command that triggers a performance in which the symbols are fixed and stopped. According to this, regarding the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050, the flow when losing can be clearly shown to the player.

(Loss 12)
The special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 is switched from extinguished to blinking upon reception of a variation pattern command for the next variation, which triggers the start of the next variation. According to this, regarding the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050, the flow when losing can be clearly shown to the player.

(Loss 13)
A modification example in case of a loss will be explained. The brightness data table at the time of failure is used from the effect in which the six ally characters are disappointed in (X40) to the effect in which the background image is blacked out in (X41). The featured image is displayed after the background image is blacked out. A brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is used from the switching period to the eye-catching screen (X42) to the symbol confirmation period (X45). Thereafter, when a variation pattern command for when there is suspension is received, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for the background. In other words, at the timing of switching to the eye-catching screen, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching), and that brightness data table is maintained during the symbol confirmation period, and at the timing of switching to the next variation, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for switching (eye-catching). can be switched to the brightness data table. Further, in the symbol determination period, the final brightness data of the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is used. According to this, after switching to the background brightness data table, the final brightness data of the switching (eye-catching) brightness data table is maintained until the next fluctuation pattern command is received, so it is a loss. As a result, losses can be shown in an appropriate manner.

(Loss 14)
The final brightness data in the brightness data table for switching (eye-catching) is data that is maintained when the light is turned off. The background brightness data table does not use data for keeping the lights off. According to this, the brightness data table for the background does not use brightness data for keeping the lights off, so the fact that the lights are off when the background is displayed is a characteristic of losing, so This can make it easier to recognize that

(Loss 15)
After the symbol is determined, if there is no pending memory, the brightness data table for switching (for eye catching) is switched to the brightness data table for background by receiving a customer waiting designation command. According to this, when the customer waiting designation command is received, the brightness data table for the background is switched to, so that it is possible to easily recognize that there was a loss.

(Loss 16)
The first brightness data in the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) has a higher brightness than the last brightness data (lights out) in the brightness data table before displaying the eye-catching image (when losing). According to this, the game effect lamp 9 can be made to emit light at a higher brightness than before switching to the eye-catching screen, so that the eye-catching screen and the game effect lamp 9 make it easier to recognize the change.

(Loss 17)
The first brightness data in the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is higher in brightness than the first brightness data in the brightness data table (not including turning off) corresponding to the background at the start of variation. According to this, since the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light at high brightness when switching to the eye-catching screen, the switching can be easily recognized by the eye-catching screen and the game effect lamp 9.

[Regarding validity 8 to 12]
The characteristic parts in the parts related to the determination of validity will be explained by assigning numbers.

(Detailed explanation of (r48) part)
FIG. 191 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (r48) portion. FIG. 191 (r48) shows a scene in which the final instigation is performed before the decision is made. FIG. 191(A) is an explanatory diagram showing screen switching, and FIG. 191(B) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between screen switching and time. As shown in FIG. 191(A), in the (r48) part, after the Bakushu (r48-1) is displayed, six allies are displayed as (r48-2). After that, the display of Bakushu like (r48-1) is displayed again, and then the display of 6 allies like (r48-2) is displayed. Thereafter, switching between still images (r48-1) and (r48-2) is repeated, and the switching speed gradually increases as shown in FIG. 191(B). The image of the friendly character and the image of the enemy character are gradually enlarged and displayed as time passes.

(True or false 8)
The scene before the determination of the validity of (r48) in the provocation part is a slow motion period in which the movement of the video is slowed down. Also, the effect executed before (r48) depicts the character's movement from multiple image data, whereas the effect executed in (r48) depicts the image of Bakuchu and the six allies. This is done using images. Then, the image of the friendly character and the image of the enemy character are gradually enlarged and displayed over time to make it appear as if the characters are moving. Here, if a video is created using the same amount of image data during the slow motion period as during the non-slow motion periods, the amount of data will be small and the motion will be awkward. However, if a large amount of data is used to smooth the movement during the slow motion period, the capacity will become too large. Therefore, the data capacity can be reduced by reducing the number of images used during the slow motion period and by switching and enlarging the display to make it appear as if the character is moving. Note that the number of images used in the slow-motion period may be any number as long as it is smaller than in the periods other than the slow-motion period.

(True or false 9)
As shown in FIG. 191(B), the image switching speed between the image of the ally character and the image of the enemy character gradually becomes faster. According to this, a promotion display prompting the trigger operation will be displayed after the image switching speed becomes the fastest, so a scene will develop where the friendly character has an advantage, or the enemy character will have an advantage. It becomes possible to stimulate the development of the game, increasing interest. Furthermore, by alternately switching the images, it is possible to make it difficult to notice that one image is used for each of the friendly character and the enemy character.

(True or false 10)
The effect of the slow motion period in (r48) may be executed at the timing of development from SP first half reach to SP second half reach and SP final reach. According to this, it is possible to suitably perform the performance even at the timing when the SP first half reach develops.

(True or false 11)
In the slow motion period in (r48), at least one of the ally character and the enemy character may be configured using two or more images. For example, if it is an ally character, you can make it look like the character's hair and clothes are gradually moving by repeatedly using four images: image 1, image 2, image 3, image 4, image 1... good. According to this, by reusing the data of the character itself and changing only part of the data, it is possible to more faithfully represent the movement of the character while reducing the amount of work required to change the data.

(True or false 12)
During the slow motion period in (r48), when making it appear that the character's hair and clothes gradually move from multiple images, the movement of the hair and clothes will now move at the same speed as the period other than the slow motion period. It may be designed to be visible. Here, if the number of images is increased to match the slow motion motion in order to make the motion appear smooth during the slow motion period, the capacity will increase. However, by speeding up the movement during the slow motion period, the movement does not become jerky even if the number of images used is reduced, and it is possible to more faithfully represent the movement while reducing the amount of data. can.

<Explanation regarding game effect lamps>
Next, lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 192 to 260.

[About lamp control of game effect lamps using brightness data table]
The performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table stored in the ROM 121 or the RAM 122 to turn on/blink/extinguish one or more of the plurality of lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 by lamp control.

Specifically, the display control unit 124 sets the sub fluctuation time according to a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the CPU 105 mounted on the main board 11. The sub-variation time is a counter that is decremented by 1 every frame (33 msec) of the displayed image. The display control unit 124 stores information in the ROM 121 and RAM 122 when the sub-variable time reaches the timing to start display corresponding to each part (for example, various displays (reach display, etc.) for each part such as the start part and the inciting part). Display control of the image display device 5 is performed based on the image data (video data, animation data) stored in the image display device 5 . The display control unit 124 sets an extended command corresponding to the effect display (effect scene) to be displayed on the image display device 5 according to the display control performed by itself, and transmits the extended command to the effect control CPU 120. do. Based on the extended command received from the display control unit 124, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the address of the parent table corresponding to the performance display (performance scene) whose display is controlled by the display control unit 124.

For example, FIG. 272 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 272, when the display control unit 124 performs display control on the winning epilogue of the SP first half reach A, it transmits an extended command for specifying the winning epilogue of the SP first half reach A to the performance control CPU 120. Based on the extended command received from the display control unit 124, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the address of the parent table corresponding to the winning epilogue of SP first half reach A.

The parent table contains information that specifies which lamps (lighting locations) are subject to lamp control among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, and information that specifies the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each lamp. , information specifying a child table to be referred to during lamp control for each lamp (child table designation address) are stored. Note that in the parent table, only lamps that are subject to lamp control are specified, and lamps that are not subject to lamp control are not specified. For example, in the parent table shown in FIG. 192, which will be described later, the frame lamp, accessory lamp 9A, panel left lamp 9B, attacker lamp 9E, V attacker lamp 9F, and electric tube lamp 9H are the objects of lamp control. 600000 msec is specified as the maximum time during which lamp control is performed for each lamp. In the parent table shown in FIG. 192, child table WD1 is specified for the frame lamp, child table YD1 is specified for the accessory lamp 9A, and child table LD1 is specified for the panel left lamp 9B. , the child table AD1 is designated for the attacker lamp 9E, the V attacker lamp 9F, and the electric lamp 9H.

The details will be described later using FIG. 206, but as shown in FIG. 272, in the parent table for the epilogue per reach A in the first half of SP, 600000 msec (10 minutes) is the maximum time for lamp control to be performed on the frame lamp. This is specified, and the performance control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the counter every 10 msec in order to time this 600000 msec (10 minutes). That is, the performance control CPU 120 has timed 600,000 msec (10 minutes) by executing the counter subtraction process 60,000 times. The performance control CPU 120 is configured to perform lamp control using the child table specified by the parent table until a maximum of 600,000 msec (10 minutes) is counted. In the parent table for the epilogue per SP first half reach A, WD3 is specified as the child table.

The child table specifies information that specifies the lamp (lighting location) that is the target of lamp control among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, and the grandchild table that is referred to at each time when lamp control is performed. information (designated address of grandchild table) is stored. For example, in the child table for frame lamps shown in FIG. 193, which will be described later, grandchild tables (W4, W11, W12, W21, etc.) are designated for each time such as ta1 to ta19.

The details will be described later using FIG. 206, but as shown in FIG. 272, in the child table WD3 for the epilogue per SP first half reach A, 300 msec is specified as the time for lamp control to be performed for the frame lamp. , the performance control CPU 120 measures 3000 msec by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 msec, and performs lamp control using the grandchild table specified by the child table WD3 until the time reaches 3000 msec. ing. In the child table WD3 for the epilogue per SP first half reach A, W4 is designated as the grandchild table.

The grandchild table stores information that specifies the lamp (lighting location) that is the target of lamp control among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, and brightness data that is used at each time when lamp control is performed. ing. For example, in the grandchild table W4 shown in FIG. 230, which will be described later, luminance data corresponding to RGB used every 30 msec is stored.

The value of the brightness data corresponds to the current value output to the lamp that is the target of lamp control. For example, a frame lamp is composed of LEDs consisting of three elements, "R", "G", and "B", and the brightness data for each element corresponds to the current value output for each element. . Specifically, the brightness data has current values divided into 16 levels from 0 to F. When the brightness data is 0, the current value is the lowest value (for example, 0), and when the brightness data is F, the current value is the lowest value (for example, 0). The current value reaches its maximum value. For example, when luminance data of "A" is output to the "R" element, a current corresponding to the "A" luminance data flows to the "R" element, and "1" is output to the "G" element. When brightness data is output, a current corresponding to the brightness data of "1" flows through the "G" element, and when brightness data of "F" is output to the "G" element, the current corresponding to the brightness data of "1" flows through the "F" element. A current corresponding to the luminance data flows through the "G" element.

The frame lamp can emit light in various colors by causing currents corresponding to brightness data to flow through each RGB element. Further, the frame lamp can be lit in a color corresponding to each character described above by emitting light based on the luminance data. For example, in a production where Yume-chan appears, the data "F00" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as the brightness data, and when the current corresponding to the data flows, the LED lights up in red. . In a production in which Maid A appears, data of "00F" is outputted from the LED lamp to the LED as luminance data, and when a current corresponding to the data flows, the LED lights up in blue. In a production where Maid B appears, data of "0AC" is outputted from the LED lamp to the LED as luminance data, and as a current corresponding to the data flows, the LED lights up in Hawaiian blue color. In a performance where an AD appears, data of "FF0" is outputted from the LED lamp to the LED as luminance data, and when a current corresponding to the data flows, the LED lights up in yellow. In a production in which Jam-chan appears, the data "A5F" is outputted from the LED lamp to the LED as luminance data, and when a current corresponding to the data flows, the LED lights up in purple. In a performance where Nana-chan appears, "F3F" data is output from the LED lamp to the LED as brightness data, and when a current corresponding to the data flows, the LED lights up in pink. In a production where Bakuchu appears, data "F00" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as brightness data, and when a current corresponding to the data flows, the LED lights up in red. In a performance in which Boingo appears, "FEA" data is output from the LED lamp to the LED as luminance data, and when a current corresponding to the data flows, the LED lights up in cream color.

Details will be described later using FIG. 230, but as shown in FIG. 272, in the grandchild table W4, "000" and "AAA" are alternately displayed at 30 msec intervals as luminance data (RGB data) for each lamp. specified. The performance control CPU 120 measures 3000 msec, which is the time specified by the child table, by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 msec, and reads the brightness data at 30 msec intervals based on the grandchild table W4 until the time reaches 300 msec. Output to LED driver. Based on the received brightness data, the LED driver causes a current corresponding to the brightness data to flow through the designated LED. Thereby, the performance control CPU 120 can perform lamp control on each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 via the LED driver.

As described above, the production control CPU 120 has a timer corresponding to each of the parent table, child table, and grandchild table, and while subtracting the timer at a constant cycle (for example, a 10 msec cycle), Performs ramp control based on tables, child tables, and grandchild tables.

Specifically, the production control CPU 120 starts outputting the brightness data from the first designated location of the grandchild table, and when the output of brightness data is completed up to the last designated location of the grandchild table, the production control CPU 120 outputs the grandchild table. If the timer value corresponding to the specified child table still remains, outputting the luminance data is started again from the first specified location in the child table. On the other hand, while outputting the brightness data based on the grandchild table, if the value of the timer corresponding to the child table that specifies the grandchild table becomes 0, the production control CPU 120 will output the brightness data based on the child table. A timer corresponding to another child table specified by the parent table specifying is set, and output of luminance data is started from the first specified location of the grandchild table specified by the child table. As a result, the grandchild table is switched, and lamp control is performed based on the switched grandchild table.

The timer management of the child table by the performance control CPU 120 will be explained with reference to the drawings. FIG. 273 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a grandchild table based on timer management of a child table. As shown in FIG. 273, in the child table for the epilogue per reach A in the first half of SP, 3000 msec is specified as the time for lamp control to be performed on the frame lamp, and W4 is specified as the grandchild table. In the grandchild table W4, "000" and "AAA" are alternately specified at 30 msec intervals as luminance data (RGB data) for each lamp. For convenience of explanation, data "000" in the first 30 msec is data 1, data "AAA" in the next 30 msec is data 2, data "000" in the next 30 msec is data 3, and data "AAA" in the next 30 msec. is referred to as data 4, data “000” in the next 30 msec is referred to as data 5, data “AAA” in the next 30 msec is referred to as data 6, and data “000” in the next 30 msec is referred to as data 7.

The performance control CPU 120 measures 3000 msec specified by the child table WD3 by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 msec, and updates data 1 to data 7 at 30 msec intervals based on the grandchild table W4 until the time reaches 3000 msec. However, after outputting data 1 to data 7, if the time measurement has not yet reached 3000 msec, the luminance data is outputted to the LED driver again in order from data 1. When the time measurement reaches 3000 msec, the performance control CPU 120 stops outputting the brightness data based on the grandchild table W4 at that point, and starts outputting the brightness data based on the next grandchild table W1 specified by the child table. do. In this way, the effect control CPU 120 loops the output of brightness data until the time specified by the child table has elapsed.

Note that, as in the parent table shown in FIG. 192, which will be described later, child data is specified for 600,000 msec (10 minutes), and such 10-minute data in the parent table plays the role of troubleshooting. That is, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control by switching the parent table based on the production control command from the CPU 103, but if some problem occurs while the lamp control is being performed based on a certain parent table, the production control Even if the CPU 120 does not receive a production control command from the CPU 103, lamp control is performed based on the same parent table for 10 minutes, which prevents different lamp control from being performed one after another from where a problem occurs. can do.

In addition, as in the child table shown in Figure 193, which will be described later, grandchild data is specified for 600,000 msec (10 minutes) at the last specified location, and the 10-minute data in such a child table corresponds to the child table. When the value of the timer reaches 0, the timer of the parent table still remains, which plays a role in preventing lamp control from being performed again from the first specified location of the child table.

In addition, as in the grandchild table shown in Figure 235, which will be described later, luminance data is specified for 600000 msec (10 minutes) at the final specified location, and the 10-minute data in such a grandchild table corresponds to the grandchild table. When the value of the timer becomes 0, the timer of the child table still remains, which plays the role of preventing ramp control from being performed again from the first specified location of the grandchild table.

In this way, by setting the luminance data specified at the end of the grandchild table as 10-minute data, the lamp is maintained with one fixed light emission, which prevents the problem of the lamp lighting constantly changing. Can be done. Furthermore, by specifying luminance data for 600000 msec (10 minutes) at the end of the grandchild table specified at the end of the child table, it is possible to more effectively prevent the problem of continuous changes in lamp lighting. can.

As mentioned above, the brightness data table is composed of a parent table, a child table, and a grandchild table. However, in the brightness data table used in each part explained below, the parent table, child table, and grandchild table Among them, only characteristic tables are shown and other tables may be omitted.

[Luminance data table used in the start part]
FIG. 192 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the luminance data table used for the start part. As shown in FIG. 192, in the parent table of the brightness data table used in the start part, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes), and the lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 is set as 600000 msec (10 minutes). Information specifying child tables (WD1, YD1, LD1, AD1) to be referenced during control is stored.

FIG. 193 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for frame lamps in the luminance data table used in the start part. As shown in FIG. 193, in the frame lamp child table WD1, the time of the start part of the frame lamp is subdivided, and a grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified. In this embodiment, only particularly characteristic grandchild tables are described as child tables, and other grandchild tables are indicated by "omitted" and their explanations are omitted.

For example, at time ta1, time ta4, and time ta7, grandchild table W21 is specified. The grandchild table W21 is included in the normal background brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52, and corresponds to the frame lamp grandchild table W21 in the background brightness data table shown in FIG. 260, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 260, in the grandchild table W21, "550", "770", or "880" is specified as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W21, thereby lighting the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the normal background (background yellow lighting pattern).

At time ta3 and time ta6, grandchild table W4 is specified. The grandchild table W4 corresponds to the grandchild table W4 for the frame lamp in the white blinking (white flash) brightness data table shown in FIG. 230, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 230, in the grandchild table W4, "000" and "AAA" are specified alternately at 30 msec intervals as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 to cause the frame lamp to blink in white. In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp for 150 msec (30 msec x 5) based on the grandchild table W4, thereby causing the frame lamp to blink twice in white.

During times ta10 to ta12, grandchild table W11 is designated. The grandchild table W11 corresponds to the grandchild table W11 for the frame lamp in the shutter 1 brightness data table shown in FIG. 251, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 251, in the grandchild table W11, as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, the luminance data is gradually lowered from "A00" to "600" at 30 msec intervals. specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W11 to gradually reduce the brightness in response to effects such as shutter closing as shown in FIGS. 58 (a10) to (a12). While doing so, the frame lamp lights up in red.

During times ta13 to ta18, grandchild table W12 is designated. The grandchild table W12 corresponds to the grandchild table W12 for the frame lamp in the shutter 2 luminance data table shown in FIG. 251, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 251, in the grandchild table W12, "600" is specified at 30 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W12 to change the state from the fully closed state of the shutter as shown in FIGS. 59 (a13) to (a15) and FIGS. The frame lamp is lit in red while maintaining the brightness in a reduced state, corresponding to the effect of opening in stages after being maintained for a period of time.

In this way, in the child table WD1 of the start part, during the time ta1 to ta12 before the shutter is completely closed, the frame lamp changes color and brightness, such as background lighting in yellow, flashing red, flashing white, and lighting red. While the brightness data switches so that it lights up/blinks while changing the brightness, at times ta13 to ta18 after the shutter is completely closed, the frame lamp lights up in red while maintaining its brightness in a lowered state. Brightness data is maintained. As a result, before the shutter closes, the lighting mode of the frame lamp enhances the performance in the start part, and when the shutter is closed, by maintaining the lighting mode of the frame lamp, the player can enjoy the content of the performance when the shutter opens. As a result, the subsequent performance in the inciting part can be shown better to the player.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59 (a13), the luminance data is set such that the frame lamp lights up in red while maintaining the reduced luminance from the timing when the shutter is completely closed. maintained, but is not limited to this. For example, even if the brightness data is maintained so that after a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed after the shutter is fully closed, the frame lamp remains in a reduced brightness state and turns on in red. good. Alternatively, from the timing related to the shutter closing operation (for example, the timing when the shutter starts to close, the timing just before the shutter starts to close, etc.), the brightness can be adjusted so that the frame lamp lights up in red while maintaining the brightness in a reduced state. Data may be maintained.

At time ta19, which is the end of the start part, the frame lamp is turned off in response to an effect in which the shutter is kept fully open as shown in FIG. 61 (a19). Note that "lights out" here refers to a state in which the luminance data is "0" as explained with reference to FIG. It's okay to be. In addition, in the following description, "lights out" may also be "substantially lights out". At time ta19, ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the frame control is performed based on the grandchild table for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD1 becomes 0. The lamp remains off.

In this manner, the frame lamp is turned off when the shutter is fully open, so the timing at which the shutter is fully opened can be clearly communicated to the player by the lighting manner of the frame lamp. In addition, the inciting part of SP first half reach A and the inciting part of SP first half reach B, which are executed after the start part, are started with the shutter fully open and the frame lamp turned off, and correspond to each SP first half reach. The frame lamp starts lighting or blinking based on the brightness data table. In this way, after the shutter is fully open and the frame lamp is turned off, the frame lamp starts lighting up in accordance with the progress of the SP first half reach, so the player cannot know that the SP first half reach has started. can be conveyed in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Brightness data table used in the first half of SP Reach A fanning part]
FIG. 194 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used for the inciting part of SP first half reach A. As shown in FIG. 194, in the parent table of the brightness data table used for the inciting part of the first half of SP reach A, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes), and each game Information specifying child tables (WD2, YD2, LD2, AD2) to be referenced when controlling the effect lamp 9 is stored.

FIG. 195 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used for the inciting part of the SP first half reach A. Each grandchild table included in the child table WD2 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52. As shown in FIG. 195, in the child table WD2 of the frame lamp, the time of the promotion part of the SP first half reach A is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table to be referred to in each time period is specified.

For example, grandchild table W3 is specified during 1560 msec of time tb10. The grandchild table W3 corresponds to the grandchild table W3 for the frame lamp in the yellow haze luminance data table shown in FIG. 229, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 229, in the grandchild table W3, "440", "660", and "880" are sparsely specified at 180 msec intervals as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. . The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 to light the frame lamp in a hazy yellow color corresponding to the background of the SP reach.

Grandchild table W4 is designated for 150 msec of time tb14 and 210 msec of time tb17, respectively. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 to cause the frame lamp to blink in white.

Here, as shown in FIG. 230, in the grandchild table W4, "000" and "AAA" are specified alternately at 30 msec intervals as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. , the first 30 msec is "000" (lit), the next 30 msec is "AAA" (lit in white), the next 30 msec is "000" (lit), the next 30 msec is "AAA" (lit in white), and the next 30 msec is "000" (lit in white). 30 msec is "000" (light off), the next 30 msec is "AAA" (lit in white), and the last 30 msec is "000" (light off). That is, the frame lamp blinks in white multiple times (white flash) by alternately repeating "off" and "on" of the frame lamp over one cycle of 210 msec (30 msec x 7). For example, when the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 for one cycle of 210 msec (30 msec x 7), the frame lamp flashes white three times, and the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control for 150 msec. When lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W4 for (30 msec x 5), the frame lamp flashes white twice.

At both time tb14 and time tb17, the grandchild table W4 is specified, but at time tb14, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 in a time shorter than one cycle of 150 msec. The frame lamp flashes white twice, and at time tb17, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, and the frame lamp flashes white three times at time tb17. Flashing.

In this way, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table WD2, thereby causing the frame lamp to blink in white at a plurality of mutually different timings. By controlling the lamp to vary the time to refer to the grandchild table W4 between a plurality of mutually different timings, the number of times the frame lamp blinks in white can be set to two or three times. As a result, by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of a plurality of different timings, the data capacity used for lamp control can be reduced. The number of white flashes can be varied. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

At time tb18, which is the last part of the promotion part of the first half of SP reach A, Yumu-chan makes a Bakuchu before the decision of success or failure (jackpot, loss, development of the second half of SP reach) as shown in Figure 67 (b18). The frame lamp lights up in white in response to a performance that incites whether or not the player will catch it. At time tb18, lamp control is performed for a maximum of 10 minutes based on grandchild table W8. For example, the grandchild table W8 corresponds to the grandchild table W8 for the frame lamp in the second brightness data table without operation promotion shown in FIG. 249, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 249, in the grandchild table W8, "FDC" is specified at 100000 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and the value of the timer corresponding to the child table WD2 is The frame lamp remains lit white based on the grandchild table W8 for 10 minutes until it reaches 0.

As a result, in the win/fail decision in the inciting part of the first half of the SP reach A, as shown in FIG. 67 (b18), the frame lamp remains lit white with the sound muted, and the player Can communicate branching (decisive timing) in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, in the child table WD2 of the SP first half reach A inciting part, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character appears, the frame lamp is lit in the color corresponding to the character, When a character utters a line, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp blinks in a color corresponding to the character.

For example, at time tb4, the performance control CPU 120 is configured to correspond to a performance in which Yumu-chan, who is located on the left side of the screen, and Bakuchu, who is located on the right side of the screen, confront each other, as shown in FIG. 63 (b4). , the lamp on the left side of the frame lights up in green, which corresponds to Yumu-chan, and the lamp on the right side of the frame lights up in red, corresponding to Bakuchu. At time tb5, the performance control CPU 120 creates a green frame corresponding to Yume-chan in response to the performance in which Yume-chan, who is located on the left side of the screen, utters lines as shown in FIG. 63 (b5). Make the left lamp blink. At time tb6, the production control CPU 120 displays a frame right lamp in red corresponding to Bakuchu in response to a production in which Bakuchu located on the right side of the screen utters lines as shown in FIG. 63 (b6). flash.

As a result, in a scene where multiple characters uttering lines are displayed, which character is uttering lines can be appropriately expressed by lighting/blinking of the frame lamp, and the production in the inciting part can be suitably expressed in the game. can be shown to others.

In addition, in the child table WD2 of the SP first half reach A incitement part, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character takes an action, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. ing.

For example, at time tb11, the performance control CPU 120 responds to Yume-chan by making it correspond to the performance in which Yume-chan, who is located on the left side of the screen, chases Bakuchu as shown in FIG. 65 (b11). The lamp on the left side of the frame blinks in green. Furthermore, at time tb8 and time tb9, when a character has dialogue as shown in FIGS. 63(b8) and 63(b9) but no subtitles, the production control CPU 120 creates a frame with a color corresponding to the character. Make the lamp blink.

In this way, as shown in Figures 64 (b8) and (b9), even if a character has dialogue but no subtitles, the frame lamp lights/flashes in the color corresponding to the character. Luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified. As a result, even in scenes where subtitles are not displayed, it is possible to suitably express that the character is uttering lines by the lighting manner of the game effect lamp 9, and it is possible to suitably show the production of the inciting part to the player. can.

[Brightness data table used in the epilogue part per reach A in the first half of SP]
FIG. 196 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used in the winning epilogue part of SP first half reach A.

As shown in FIG. 196 (a1), in the parent table for the winning epilogue used for the winning epilogue part of SP first half reach A, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). and information specifying child tables (WD3, YD3, LD3, AD3) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 196 (a2), in the child table WD3 for winning epilogue used for the winning epilogue part of SP first half reach A, the time of the winning epilogue part in the winning epilogue part of SP first half reach A is subdivided for the frame lamp. In addition to specifying a grandchild table to be referenced in each time period. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD3 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52.

For example, at time tc1, grandchild table W4 is specified. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, the performance control CPU 120 supports a performance such as catching a Bakushu as shown in FIG. 68 (c1) after the right/fail branch shown in FIG. 67 (b18). to make the frame lamp flash white.

As mentioned above, the white lighting at the win/fail branch (tb18) has RGB data of "FDC", whereas the white flashing at tc1 after the win is determined has RGB data of "FFF". At the time of winning, the frame lamp flashes in the same color (white) as the win/fail branch and brighter than the win/fail branch, so that the winning can be clearly communicated to the player by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9.

At time tc2 and time tc3, grandchild table W1 is specified. The grandchild table W1 corresponds to the grandchild table W1 for the frame lamp in the smooth rainbow luminance data table shown in FIG. 225, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 225, in the grandchild table W1, various brightness data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified at 30 msec intervals as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. ing. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 to ensure that the frame lamp hits in response to a performance that looks like catching a Bakushu as shown in FIGS. 68(c2) and (c3). Lights up in the corresponding rainbow color.

As shown in FIG. 196 (b1), in the parent table for common symbol display used in the winning epilogue part of SP first half reach A, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes). ) and information specifying child tables (WD0, YD0, LD0, AD0) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 196 (b2), in the child table WD0 for common symbol display used in the winning epilogue part of SP reach A in the first half, the time for the symbol display part in the winning epilogue part of SP reach first half A is calculated for the frame lamp. In addition to subdivision, a grandchild table that is referenced in each time period is specified. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD0 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52. Further, the child table WD0 for common symbol display is commonly used in the first half of SP reach A and B, the second half of SP reach A and B, and the final SP reach.

For example, grandchild table W4 is specified for 5000 msec between time tc4 and time tc5. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, so as to make the frame lamp correspond to a performance that brings out winning symbols as shown in FIGS. 69(c4) and (c5). Flashes the corresponding bright white color.

At time tc6, which is the last of the winning epilogue part, the frame lamp is colored smoothly in rainbow colors to correspond to the final winning symbol displayed in the center of the screen as shown in Figure 69 (c6). Light. At time tc6, ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD3 becomes 0. The frame lamp remains lit in rainbow colors.

In this way, in the child table of the winning epilogue part, the grandchild table W1 is specified for time tc2 and time tc3, and based on the grandchild table W1, the frame lamp is lights up smoothly in a rainbow color, and furthermore, the grandchild table W1 is specified for time tc6, and the frame lamp is set to correspond to the effect that the winning symbol is displayed in the center of the screen based on the grandchild table W1. lights up smoothly in rainbow colors. As a result, in the winning epilogue part, by making the grandchild table for the winning epilogue used when notifying the win and the grandchild table for drawing the symbol used when displaying the winning symbol, different It is possible to enliven each performance by creating a sense of unity while reducing the amount of data used to control the lamps to light them in rainbow colors without having to prepare a grandchild table. As a result, the performance in the winning epilogue part can be shown better to the player by using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

[Brightness data table used in SP first half reach A loss epilogue part]
FIG. 197 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used in the loss epilogue part of SP first half reach A.

As shown in FIG. 197 (a1), in the parent table for the common loss epilogue used for the loss epilogue part of the first half of SP reach A, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). ) and information specifying child tables (WD4, YD4, LD4, AD4) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 197 (a2), in the child table WD4 for the common loss epilogue used for the loss epilogue part of the first half of SP reach A, the time of the loss epilogue part in the first half of SP reach A is subdivided and , the grandchild table that is referenced in each time period is specified. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD4 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52. Further, the child table WD4 for the common loss epilogue is commonly used in the first half of SP reach A and B, the second half of SP reach A and B, and the final SP reach.

For example, during 200 msec of time td1, grandchild table W13 is specified. The grandchild table W13 corresponds to the grandchild table W13 for the frame lamp in the loss 1 luminance data table shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 252, in the grandchild table W13, "888" is specified in the first 10 msec, and "444" is specified in the next 190 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. ing. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W13, the performance control CPU 120 creates a performance in which the player fails to catch the Bakuchu as shown in FIG. 70 (d1) after the decision is made as shown in FIG. Correspondingly, the frame lamp lights up in white.

As mentioned above, the white lighting at the win/fail branch (tb18) has RGB data of "FDC", whereas the white lighting at td1 after the loss notification has RGB data of "888" or "444". . As a result, in the event of a loss, while maintaining the same color by using the white lighting in the win/fail branch (tb18), the frame lamp can be illuminated in a darker white color, allowing the player to conveniently notify the player of the loss. can be notified.

During 5800 msec of time td2, grandchild table W14 is designated. The grandchild table W14 corresponds to the grandchild table W14 for the frame lamp in the loss 2 luminance data table shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 252, in the grandchild table W14, "444" or "111" is specified at 250 msec intervals as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W14, thereby changing the frame lamp from td1 in response to the performance in which Yume-chan loses and is disappointed, as shown in FIG. 70 (d2). It also lights up in a dark white color.

As mentioned above, when the rainbow lights up at the time of winning (tc2, tc3), the RGB data switches at intervals of 30 msec, whereas when the darker white lighting occurs at the time of loss (td2), the RGB data changes for 250 msec longer than at the time of winning. Switch at intervals. Thereby, since the lighting color of the frame lamp changes at a shorter interval when winning, than when losing, it is possible to clearly inform the player that he has won by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. Furthermore, while the lighting of the frame lamp is more emphasized in the event of a win than in the case of a loss, the lighting of the frame lamp can be made more subdued in the event of a loss. This can be conveyed to players in an easy-to-understand manner.

At time td3, grandchild table W15 is designated. The grandchild table W15 corresponds to the grandchild table W15 for the frame lamp in the loss 3 luminance data table shown in FIG. 253, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 253, in the grandchild table W15, "444" is specified in the first 10 msec, and "111" is specified in the next 550 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. , "111" is specified in the last 600000 msec (10 minutes). The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W15 to turn off the frame lamp in response to a performance in which a loss is notified and the screen darkens as shown in FIG. 70(d3). .

At time td4, grandchild table W21 is specified. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W21, the effect control CPU 120 changes the frame lamp to a background yellow lighting pattern in response to an effect in which a normal screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 71 (d4). Turn it on. That is, the grandchild table W21 used when the normal screen is displayed at the time of a loss has a lighting mode corresponding to the normal background, and is different from the grandchild table W21 specified by time ta1, time ta4, and time ta7 in the start part. Common.

At time td4, lamp control is performed while repeatedly referring to the luminance data included in the grandchild table W21. Specifically, based on the grandchild table W21 shown in FIG. 260, which will be described later, the production control CPU 120 controls the time until it receives a variation pattern command that specifies the next variation when there is a hold, or when there is no hold. The lamp control is performed while switching the RGB data until the customer waiting command is received in the progress, and even if the lamp control is performed based on the final RGB data, if the fluctuation pattern command or the customer waiting command is not received yet, the lamp control is performed again. Lamp control is performed based on the initial RGB data.

As shown in FIG. 190, during the period from when the frame lamp goes out at time td3 until when the frame lamp lights up in a yellow background lighting pattern in response to the display of the normal screen at time td4. In this case, an eye-catching screen is displayed and a frame lamp based on the brightness data table corresponding to the eye-catching screen is lit. In this way, in the lamp control of the frame lamp at the time of failure, the brightness data table (grandchild table) corresponding to the eye-catching screen is used, and then the grandchild table, which is also used in the start part, is used as the brightness data table corresponding to the normal screen. Table W21 is used. As a result, there is no need to separately prepare a brightness data table to be used after the eye-catching screen is displayed and before the design is finalized, and lamp control can be performed based on the grandchild table W21 that is also used in the start part. , the performance using the frame lamp can be shown to the player without any discomfort.

[Brightness data table used in the first half of SP reach B fanning part]
FIG. 198 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used for the inciting part of the SP first half reach B. As shown in FIG. 198, in the parent table of the brightness data table used for the inciting part of the first half of SP reach B, the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes), and each game Information specifying child tables (WD5, YD5, LD5, AD5) to be referred to when controlling the effect lamp 9 is stored.

FIG. 199 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used for the inciting part of the first half of SP reach B. Each grandchild table included in the child table WD5 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52. As shown in FIG. 199, in the child table WD5 of the frame lamp, the time of the promotion part of the SP first half reach B is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table to be referred to in each time period is specified.

For example, grandchild table W4 is specified for 150 msec of time te8 and for 210 msec of time te12. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 to cause the frame lamp to blink in white. At both time te8 and time te12, the grandchild table W4 is specified, but at time te8, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 in a time shorter than one cycle of 150 msec. The frame lamp flashes white twice, and at time te12, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, and the frame lamp flashes white three times at time te12. Flashing.

In this way, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table WD5, thereby causing the frame lamp to blink in white at a plurality of mutually different timings. By controlling the lamp to vary the time to refer to the grandchild table W4 between a plurality of mutually different timings, the number of times the frame lamp blinks in white can be set to two or three times. As a result, by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of a plurality of different timings, the data capacity used for lamp control can be reduced. The number of white flashes can be varied. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

At time te17, which is the last part of the promotion part of the first half of SP reach B, the player tries to incite whether or not Yumu-chan loses in the win/fail branch (jackpot, loss, second half development of SP reach) as shown in Figure 77 (e17). The frame lamp lights up in white to correspond to the performance. At time te18, lamp control is performed for a maximum of 10 minutes based on grandchild table W8.

As a result, in the win/fail branch in the inciting part of the first half of the SP reach B, as shown in FIG. 77 (e17), the frame lamp remains lit white with the sound muted, and the player Can communicate branching (decisive timing) in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, in the child table WD5 of the SP first half reach B incitement part, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character appears, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character, When a character utters a line, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp blinks in a color corresponding to the character.

For example, at time te4, the performance control CPU 120 sets the performance to correspond to a performance in which Yumu-chan, who is located on the left side of the screen, and Boingo, who is located on the right side of the screen, confront each other, as shown in FIG. 73 (e4). The lamp on the left side of the frame lights up in green, which corresponds to Yume-chan, and the lamp on the right side of the frame lights up in cream color, corresponding to Boingo. At time te5, the performance control CPU 120 creates a green frame corresponding to Yume-chan in response to the performance in which Yume-chan, who is located on the left side of the screen, utters lines as shown in FIG. 73 (e5). Make the left lamp blink. At time te6, the effect control CPU 120 lights the frame right lamp in cream color corresponding to Boingo in response to an effect in which Boingo located on the right side of the screen utters lines as shown in FIG. 73 (e6). Make it blink.

As a result, in a scene where multiple characters uttering lines are displayed, which character is uttering lines can be appropriately expressed by lighting/blinking of the frame lamp, and the production in the inciting part can be suitably expressed in the game. can be shown to others.

In addition, in the child table WD5 of the first half of SP reach B incitement part, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character takes an action, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. ing.

For example, at time te11, the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in cream color corresponding to Boingo in response to a performance such as Boingo hitting the puck as shown in FIG. 75 (e11). Further, at time te7, the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in green corresponding to Yume-chan when there is Yume-chan's dialogue but no subtitles as shown in FIG. 74 (e7). let

In this way, as shown in Figure 74 (e7), even if a character has dialogue but no subtitles, the luminance data (subtitles RGB data in the table) are specified. As a result, even in scenes where subtitles are not displayed, it is possible to suitably express that the character is uttering lines by the lighting manner of the game effect lamp 9, and it is possible to suitably show the production of the inciting part to the player. can.

[Brightness data table used in the epilogue part per reach B in the first half of SP]
FIG. 200 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used in the winning epilogue part of SP first half reach B.

As shown in FIG. 200 (a1), in the parent table for the winning epilogue used for the winning epilogue part of SP first half reach B, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). and information specifying child tables (WD6, YD6, LD6, AD6) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 200 (a2), in the child table WD6 for winning epilogue used for the winning epilogue part of SP first half reach B, the time of the winning epilogue part in the winning epilogue part of SP first half reach B is subdivided for the frame lamp. In addition to specifying a grandchild table to be referenced in each time period. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD6 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG.

For example, at time tf1, grandchild table W4 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs ramp control based on the grandchild table W4, so that after the right/fail branch shown in FIG. 77 (e17), Yumu-chan hits the puck back as shown in FIG. 78 (f1). The frame lamp blinks in white in accordance with the performance.

The white lighting in the win/fail branch (te17) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. The data is "FFF".As a result, at the time of a win, the frame lamp flashes in the same color (white) as the win/fail branch and brighter than the win/fail branch, so it can be determined that the win has occurred depending on the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. can be conveyed to players in an easy-to-understand manner.

During times tf2 to tf4, grandchild table W1 is designated. The production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 to correspond to productions in which Boingo is attacked and Yume-chan wins, as shown in FIGS. 78 (f2) to (f4). The frame lamp lights up smoothly in a rainbow color that corresponds to the confirmed hit.

As shown in FIG. 200 (b1), in the parent table for common symbol display used in the hit epilogue part of SP first half reach B, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). ) and information specifying child tables (WD0, YD0, LD0, AD0) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 200 (b2), in the child table WD0 for common symbol display used in the winning epilogue part of the first half of SP reach B, regarding the frame lamp, the time of the symbol display part in the winning epilogue part of the first half of SP reach B is In addition to subdivision, a grandchild table that is referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, grandchild table W4 is specified for 5000 msec between time tf5 and time tf6. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, so as to make the frame lamp correspond to the performance that brings out winning symbols as shown in FIGS. 79 (f5) and (f6). Flashes the corresponding bright white color.

At time tf7, which is the last of the winning epilogue part, the frame lamp is colored smoothly in rainbow colors to correspond to the final winning symbol displayed in the center of the screen as shown in Figure 80 (f7). Light. At time tf7, ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD6 becomes 0. The frame lamp remains lit in rainbow colors.

In this way, in the child table of the winning epilogue part, the grandchild table W1 is specified for times tf2 to tf4, and based on the grandchild table W1, an effect is created in which Boingo is attacked and Yumu-chan wins. Correspondingly, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors, and furthermore, the grandchild table W1 is specified for time tf7, and the winning symbol is displayed in the center of the screen based on the grandchild table W1. Correspondingly, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors. As a result, in the winning epilogue part, by making the grandchild table for the winning epilogue used when notifying the win and the grandchild table for drawing the symbol used when displaying the winning symbol, different It is possible to enliven each performance by creating a sense of unity while reducing the amount of data used to control the lamps to light them in rainbow colors without having to prepare a grandchild table. As a result, the performance in the winning epilogue part can be shown better to the player by using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

[Brightness data table used in SP first half reach B loss epilogue part]
FIG. 201 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used in the loss epilogue part of SP first half reach B.

As shown in FIG. 201 (a1), in the parent table for the common loss epilogue used for the loss epilogue part of the SP first half reach B, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). ) and information specifying child tables (WD4, YD4, LD4, AD4) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 200 (a2), in the child table WD4 for common loss epilogue used for the loss epilogue part of SP first half reach B, the time of the loss epilogue part in SP reach first half B is subdivided and , the grandchild table that is referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, grandchild table W13 is specified for 200 msec between time tg1 and time tg2. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W13, the performance control CPU 120 creates a performance in which Yumu-chan is blown away as shown in FIG. 81 (g1) after the right/fail branch shown in FIG. 77 (e17). The frame lamp lights up in white in response to this.

The white lighting in the win/fail branch (te17) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. 249, which will be described later, and its RGB data is "FDC", whereas the white lighting in tg1 after the loss notification is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. 249, which will be described later. It is based on the grandchild table W13 shown in FIG. 252, and its RGB data is "888" or "444". As a result, in the event of a loss, while maintaining the same color by using the white lighting in the win/fail branch (te17), the frame lamp can be illuminated in a darker white color, allowing the player to conveniently notify the player of the loss. can be notified.

During 5800 msec of time tg3, grandchild table W14 is designated. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W14, so as to correspond to the performance in which Yumu-chan is disappointed after losing, as shown in FIGS. 70 (g2) and (g3), and sets the frame Light the lamp in a white color darker than tg1.

The rainbow lighting at the time of winning (tf2 to tf4) is based on the grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. 225, which will be described later, and the RGB data switches at intervals of 30 msec, while the darker white lighting at the time of loss (tg3) is based on the grandchild table W14 shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later, and its RGB data is switched at an interval of 250 msec, which is longer than that at the time of hit. Thereby, since the lighting color of the frame lamp changes at a shorter interval when winning, than when losing, it is possible to clearly inform the player that he has won by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. Furthermore, while the lighting of the frame lamp is more emphasized in the event of a win than in the case of a loss, the lighting of the frame lamp can be made more subdued in the event of a loss. This can be conveyed to players in an easy-to-understand manner.

At time tg4, grandchild table W15 is designated. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W15 to turn off the frame lamp in response to a performance in which a loss is notified and the screen darkens as shown in FIG. 82 (g4). .

At time tg5, grandchild table W21 is designated. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W21, the effect control CPU 120 changes the frame lamp to a yellow background lighting pattern in response to an effect in which a normal screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 81 (g5). Turn it on. Further, at time tg5, lamp control is performed while repeatedly referring to the luminance data included in the grandchild table W21.

[Brightness data table used in the role model movement part during the second half of SP development]
FIG. 202 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used for the accessory motion part during the second half of SP development. The grandchild table included in the child table WD8 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52. As shown in FIG. 202, in the child table WD8 of the frame lamp, a grandchild table that is referred to in the accessory action part is specified for the frame lamp. In addition, the child table WD8 is used for lamp control of the frame lamp corresponding to the first half (falling part) of the accessory movement shown in Fig. 171 (h1) to (h3) (Fig. 83 (h1) to (h3)). It will be done.

For example, grandchild table W2 is specified during 7000 msec from time th1 to th3. The grandchild table W2 corresponds to the grandchild table W2 for the frame lamp in the accessory action red blinking brightness data table shown in FIG. 228, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 228, in the grandchild table W2, "A00" is specified in the first 40 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and "333" is specified in the next 30 msec. ing. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W2, the performance control CPU 120 causes the accessories to fall as shown in FIGS. 83 (h1) to (h3) after the validity branch shown in FIG. 77 (e17). In response to this effect, the frame lamp flashes in red.

It should be noted that lamp control is also performed on the accessory lamp 9A during the period of 7000 msec from time th1 to th3 during which the accessory falls. For example, during the 7000 msec period from time th1 to th3 when the accessory falls, the performance control CPU 120 controls the child table corresponding to the falling motion of the accessory on the accessory lamp 9A and the grandchild table specified by the child table. Based on this, the accessory lamp 9A is blinked in red.

Thereby, depending on the lighting mode of the frame lamp and the accessory lamp 9A, it is possible to more effectively draw the player's attention to the presentation in which the accessory falls.

[Brightness data table used in the second half of SP Reach A fanning part]
FIG. 203 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used for the inciting part of the second half of the SP reach A. As shown in FIG. 203, in the parent table of the brightness data table used for the inciting part of reach A in the second half of SP, the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes), and each game Information specifying child tables (WD9, YD9, LD9, AD9) to be referenced when controlling the effect lamp 9 is stored.

FIGS. 204 and 205 are diagrams for explaining an example of a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used for the inciting part of SP second half reach A. Each grandchild table included in the child table WD9 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach luminance data table described with reference to FIG. 52. As shown in FIGS. 204 and 205, in the child table WD9 of the frame lamp, the time of the inciting part of the SP second half reach A is subdivided for the frame lamp, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified. There is.

The brightness data corresponding to times th4 to th10 is used for lamp control of the frame lamp corresponding to the latter half (rising portion) of the accessory motion shown in FIGS. 171 (h4) to 172 (h10). Specifically, from time th4 to th6, the frame lamp blinks in yellow in response to the effect that the accessory rises, and then from time th7 to th10, the frame lamp flashes in yellow based on the grandchild table W3. It lights up in a hazy yellow color that corresponds to the background. As a result, the frame lamp gradually changes from flashing yellow to yellow and hazy lighting that corresponds to the background of SP second half reach A, making it easier for players to understand that SP second half reach A has developed. I can tell you.

Incidentally, during the time period th4 to th10 when the accessory rises, lamp control is also performed on the accessory lamp 9A. For example, between times th4 and th10 when the accessory rises, the performance control CPU 120, based on the child table corresponding to the raising motion of the accessory in the accessory lamp 9A and the grandchild table specified by the child table, The brightness of the accessory lamp 9A is gradually lowered so that the accessory lamp 9A is gradually turned off.

As a result, the lighting mode of the accessory lamp 9A does not make the player aware that the accessory is rising, while the lighting mode of the frame lamp allows the screen to indicate that the SP has reached reach A in the second half. This can draw the attention of players.

The grandchild table W3 is specified for 1130 msec of time ti1, 1330 msec of time ti20, and 1560 msec of time ti11. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 to light the frame lamp in a hazy yellow color corresponding to the background of the SP reach.

Here, as shown in FIG. 229, in the grandchild table W3, the luminance data of the frame lamp is switched over one period consisting of 720 msec (180 msec x 4). From time th7 to th10 and time ti1, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1130 msec, which is more than one cycle, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1130 msec, and at time ti20, The production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1330 msec, which is more than one cycle, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1330 msec, and at time ti11, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control for 1560 msec, which is more than two cycles. As the CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3, the frame lamp lights in yellow for 1560 msec.

In this way, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W3 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table WD9, thereby lighting the frame lamp in yellow at a plurality of mutually different timings. By changing the time for referring to the grandchild table W3 using the lamp control between a plurality of mutually different timings, it is possible to change the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow. As a result, one child table WD9 can be used for lamp control by changing its reference time while using the common grandchild table W3, without having to prepare separate grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings. While reducing data capacity, it is possible to vary the amount of time the frame lamp lights up in yellow, which corresponds to the background of SP Reach. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

The grandchild table W4 is specified for 150 msec between time ti15 and time ti24, and for 210 msec between time ti14, ti23, and time ti35. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 to cause the frame lamp to blink in white. The grandchild table W4 is specified at time ti15, time ti24, time ti14, time ti23, and time ti35, but at time ti15 and time ti24, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, the frame lamp flashes white twice, and at time ti14, time ti23, and time ti35, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 in one cycle of 210 msec. By performing lamp control based on table W4, the frame lamp flashes white three times.

In this way, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table WD9, thereby causing the frame lamp to blink in white at a plurality of mutually different timings. By controlling the lamp to vary the time to refer to the grandchild table W4 between a plurality of mutually different timings, the number of times the frame lamp blinks in white can be set to two or three times. As a result, by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of a plurality of different timings, the data capacity used for lamp control can be reduced. The number of white flashes can be varied. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

Grandchild table W7 is designated for 1000 msec from time ti36 to time ti38. The grandchild table W7 corresponds to the grandchild table W7 for the frame lamp in the 1 brightness data table without operation promotion shown in FIG. 249, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 249, in the grandchild table W7, "FDC" and "300" are specified alternately at 30 msec intervals as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W7 to cause the frame lamp to blink in white.

At time ti39, which is the last part of the promotion part of reach A in the second half of SP, Yume-chan and Jam-chan incite whether or not they will catch Bakuchu in the win/fail branch (jackpot, loss) as shown in Figure 95 (i39). In response to the effect, the frame lamp lights up in white. At time ti39, lamp control is performed for a maximum of 10 minutes based on grandchild table W8. As shown in FIG. 249, in the grandchild table W8, "FDC" is specified at 100000 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and the value of the timer corresponding to the child table WD2 is The frame lamp remains lit white based on the grandchild table W8 for 10 minutes until it reaches 0.

In this way, in the child table WD9 in the SP second half reach A, the reach is without operation promotion, and after the frame lamp flashes in white based on the grandchild table W7, the frame lamp lights up in white based on the grandchild table W8. Specifically, the final brightness data (RGB data) of grandchild table W7, "FDC" (white lighting), is used for the right/fail decision in the incitement part of reach A in the second half of the SP where no operation promotion is performed. In addition, since the brightness data (RGB data) of the grandchild table W8 is designed, it is possible to clearly communicate the win/fail branch (timing of decision) to the player without increasing the data capacity used for lamp control too much. can.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 95 (i39), the frame lamp remains illuminated in white with the sound muted, making it possible to clearly inform the player of the decision (timing of decision). .

Further, as shown in FIG. 249, "FDC" is specified for the last RGB data of the grandchild table W7 used for 1000 msec from time ti36 to ti38, and furthermore, "FDC" is specified for the data of the last RGB of the grandchild table W7 used for 1000 msec from time ti36 to ti38. Similarly, "FDC" is designated for the last RGB data. As a result, the production control CPU 120 maintains the state in which the brightness data of "FDC" is output to the LED driver based on the grandchild table W7, and thereafter continues to output the brightness data of "FDC" based on the grandchild table W8 and outputs the brightness data of "FDC" to the LED driver. Since it is output to the driver, it is possible to suitably produce the timing for deciding whether or not to proceed by using simpler ramp control without increasing the amount of data too much.

In addition, in the child table WD9 of the second half of the SP reach A incitement part, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character appears, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character, When a character utters a line, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp blinks in a color corresponding to the character.

For example, at time ti2, the production control CPU 120 creates a production in which Yumu-chan and Jam-chan, who are located on the left side of the screen, confront Bakuchu, who is located on the right side of the screen, as shown in FIG. 84 (i2). Correspondingly, the lamp on the left side of the frame is lit in white, which corresponds to Yumu-chan and Jam-chan, and the lamp on the right side of the frame is lit in red, corresponding to Bakuchu. At time ti3, the performance control CPU 120 creates a green frame corresponding to Yume-chan in response to the performance in which Yume-chan, who is located on the left side of the screen, utters lines as shown in FIG. 84 (i3). Make the left lamp blink. At time ti4, the performance control CPU 120 displays a frame left lamp in purple corresponding to Jam-chan in response to a performance in which Jam-chan, who is located on the left side of the screen, utters lines as shown in FIG. 85 (i4). flash. At time ti5, the production control CPU 120 displays a frame right lamp in red corresponding to Bakuchu in response to a production in which Bakuchu located on the right side of the screen utters lines as shown in FIG. 85 (i5). flash.

As a result, in a scene where multiple characters uttering lines are displayed, which character is uttering lines can be appropriately expressed by lighting/blinking of the frame lamp, and the production in the inciting part can be suitably expressed in the game. can be shown to others.

In addition, in the child table WD9 of the reach A incitement part in the second half of the SP, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character takes an action, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. ing.

For example, at time ti21, the performance control CPU 120 responds to Yume-chan by making it correspond to the performance in which Yume-chan, who is located on the left side of the screen, chases Bakuchu as shown in FIG. 90 (i21). The lamp on the left side of the frame blinks in green. Further, at time ti32 and time ti34, the production control CPU 120 controls the color of the character corresponding to the character in the case where the character has dialogue as shown in FIG. 94 (i32) and FIG. 95 (i34) but there is no subtitle. to make the frame lamp blink.

In this way, as shown in Figure 94 (i32) and Figure 95 (i34), even if a character has dialogue but no subtitles, the frame lamp lights/flashes in the color corresponding to the character. The brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified as follows. As a result, even in scenes where subtitles are not displayed, it is possible to suitably express that the character is uttering lines by the lighting manner of the game effect lamp 9, and it is possible to suitably show the production of the inciting part to the player. can.

[Brightness data table used in the epilogue part per reach A in the second half of SP]
FIG. 206 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used in the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach A.

As shown in FIG. 206 (a1), in the parent table for the winning epilogue used for the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach A, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). and information specifying child tables (WD10, YD10, LD10, AD10) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 206 (a2), in the child table WD10 for winning epilogue used for the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach A, the time of the winning epilogue part in the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach A is subdivided for the frame lamp. In addition to specifying a grandchild table to be referenced in each time period. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD10 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach luminance data table described with reference to FIG. 52.

For example, during times tj1 to tj3, grandchild table W4 is specified. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, the performance control CPU 120 supports a performance such as catching a Bakushu as shown in FIG. 97 (j1) after the right/fail branch shown in FIG. 96 (i39). to make the frame lamp flash white.

The white lighting in the win/fail branch (ti39) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. The data is "FFF".As a result, at the time of a win, the frame lamp flashes in the same color (white) as the win/fail branch and brighter than the win/fail branch, so it can be determined that the win has occurred depending on the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. can be conveyed to players in an easy-to-understand manner.

At times tj2 and tj3, grandchild table W1 is designated. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 to ensure that the frame lamp hits in response to effects such as catching a Bakushu as shown in FIGS. Lights up smoothly in the corresponding rainbow color.

As shown in FIG. 206 (b1), in the parent table for common symbol display used in the hit epilogue part of SP second half reach A, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). ) and information specifying child tables (WD0, YD0, LD0, AD0) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 206 (b2), in the child table WD0 for common symbol display used in the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach A, the time period of the symbol display part in the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach A is calculated for the frame lamp. In addition to subdivision, a grandchild table that is referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, grandchild table W4 is specified for 5000 msec between time tj4 and time tj5. The production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, so as to make the frame lamp display a symbol in correspondence with a production that produces a winning symbol as shown in FIGS. 98 (j4) and (j5). Flashes the corresponding bright white color.

At time tj6, which is the last of the winning epilogue part, the frame lamp is colored smoothly in rainbow colors to correspond to the final winning symbol displayed in the center of the screen as shown in Figure 98 (j6). Light. At time tj6, ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD10 becomes 0. The frame lamp remains lit in rainbow colors.

In this way, in the child table of the winning epilogue part, the grandchild table W1 is specified for times tj2 and tj3, and based on the grandchild table W1, the frame lamp is set to correspond to the effect of catching a Bakushu. It lights up smoothly in a rainbow color, and furthermore, the grandchild table W1 is specified for time tj6, and the frame lamp lights up in response to the effect that the winning symbol is displayed in the center of the screen based on the grandchild table W1. Lights up smoothly in rainbow colors. As a result, in the winning epilogue part, by making the grandchild table for the winning epilogue used when notifying the win and the grandchild table for drawing the symbol used when displaying the winning symbol, different It is possible to enliven each performance by creating a sense of unity while reducing the amount of data used to control the lamps to light them in rainbow colors without having to prepare a grandchild table. As a result, the performance in the winning epilogue part can be shown better to the player by using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

[Brightness data table used in SP second half reach A loss epilogue part]
FIG. 207 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used in the lose epilogue part of SP second half reach A.

As shown in FIG. 207 (a1), in the parent table for the common loss epilogue used for the loss epilogue part of the second half of SP Reach A, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). ) and information specifying child tables (WD4, YD4, LD4, AD4) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 207 (a2), in the child table WD4 for the common loss epilogue used for the loss epilogue part in the second half of SP reach A, the time of the loss epilogue part in the first half B of SP reach is subdivided for the frame lamp, and , a grandchild table that is referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, during 200 msec of time tk1, grandchild table W13 is specified. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W13, the performance control CPU 120 creates a performance in which the player fails to catch the Bakuchu as shown in FIG. 99 (k1) after the decision is made as shown in FIG. Correspondingly, the frame lamp lights up in white.

The white lighting in the win/fail branch (ti39) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. It is based on the grandchild table W13 shown in FIG. 252, and its RGB data is "888" or "444". As a result, in the event of a loss, it is possible to maintain the same color by using the white lighting in the win/fail branch (ti39), while lighting the frame lamp darker in white, allowing the player to conveniently notify the player of the loss. can be notified.

The grandchild table W14 is designated for 5800 msec between time tk2 and time tk3. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W14, so as to correspond to the performance in which Yumume-chan loses and is disappointed, as shown in FIGS. 99(k2) and (k3). Light the lamp in a white color darker than tk1.

The rainbow lighting at the time of winning (tj2, tj3) is based on the grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. The white lighting is based on the grandchild table W14 shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later, and the RGB data is switched at an interval of 250 msec, which is longer than that at the time of hit. Thereby, since the lighting color of the frame lamp changes at a shorter interval when winning, than when losing, it is possible to clearly inform the player that he has won by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. Furthermore, while the lighting of the frame lamp is more emphasized in the event of a win than in the case of a loss, the lighting of the frame lamp can be made more subdued in the event of a loss. This can be conveyed to players in an easy-to-understand manner.

At time tk4, grandchild table W15 is designated. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W15 to turn off the frame lamp in response to a performance in which a loss is notified and the screen darkens as shown in FIG. 100 (k4). .

At time tk5, grandchild table W21 is designated. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W21, the effect control CPU 120 changes the frame lamp to a background yellow lighting pattern in response to an effect in which a normal screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 100 (k5). Turn it on. Further, at time tk5, lamp control is performed while repeatedly referring to the luminance data included in the grandchild table W21.

[Brightness data table used in the second half of SP Reach B fanning part]
FIG. 208 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used for the inciting part of the second half of the SP reach B. As shown in FIG. 208, in the parent table of the brightness data table used for the inciting part of the second half of SP reach B, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes), and each game Information specifying child tables (WD12, YD12, LD12, AD12) to be referenced when controlling the effect lamp 9 is stored.

FIG. 209 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used for the inciting part of the second half of the SP reach B. Each grandchild table included in the child table WD12 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52. As shown in FIG. 209, in the child table WD12 of the frame lamp, the time of the inciting part of the SP second half reach B is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table to be referred to in each time period is specified.

The brightness data corresponding to times th4 to th10 is used for lamp control of the frame lamp corresponding to the latter half (rising portion) of the accessory motion shown in FIGS. 171 (h4) to 172 (h10). Specifically, from time th4 to th6, the frame lamp blinks in yellow in response to the effect that the accessory rises, and then from time th7 to th10, the frame lamp flashes in yellow based on the grandchild table W3. It lights up in a hazy yellow color that corresponds to the background. As a result, the frame lamp gradually changes from flashing yellow to yellow and hazy lighting that corresponds to the background of SP second half reach B, making it easier for players to understand that SP second half reach B has developed. I can tell you.

Incidentally, during the time period th4 to th10 when the accessory rises, lamp control is also performed on the accessory lamp 9A. For example, between times th4 and th10 when the accessory rises, the performance control CPU 120, based on the child table corresponding to the raising motion of the accessory in the accessory lamp 9A and the grandchild table specified by the child table, The brightness of the accessory lamp 9A is gradually lowered so that the accessory lamp 9A is gradually turned off.

As a result, the lighting mode of the accessory lamp 9A does not make the player aware that the accessory is going up, while the lighting mode of the frame lamp allows the screen to indicate that the SP has reached reach B in the second half. This can draw the attention of players.

Grandchild table W3 is specified for 1130 msec at time tn5, 1330 msec at time tn14, and 1560 msec at time tn6. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 to light the frame lamp in a hazy yellow color corresponding to the background of the SP reach.

Here, as shown in FIG. 229, in the grandchild table W3, the luminance data of the frame lamp is switched over one period consisting of 720 msec (180 msec x 4). At time th7 to th10, time tn1, and time tn5, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1130 msec, which exceeds one cycle, so that the frame lamp lights in yellow for 1130 msec, and the time At time tn14, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1330 msec, which is more than one cycle, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1330 msec, and at time tn6, for 1560 msec, which is more than two cycles. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1560 msec.

In this way, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W3 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table WD12, thereby lighting the frame lamp in yellow at a plurality of mutually different timings. By changing the time for referring to the grandchild table W3 using the lamp control between a plurality of mutually different timings, it is possible to change the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow. As a result, one child table WD12 can be used for lamp control by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W3, without having to prepare separate grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings. While reducing data capacity, it is possible to vary the amount of time the frame lamp lights up in yellow, which corresponds to the background of SP Reach. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

The grandchild table W4 is specified for each of the 150 msec period of time tn3, time tn12, and time tn25, and the 210 msec period of time tn4, tn13, time tn15, time tn19, and time tn22. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 to cause the frame lamp to blink in white. The grandchild table W4 is specified at time tn3, time tn12, time tn25, time tn4, time tn13, time tn15, time tn19, and time tn22, but at time tn3, time tn12, and time tn25, The production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 in a time shorter than one cycle of 150 msec, so that the frame lamp flashes white twice, time tn4, time tn13, time tn15, time tn19, At time tn22, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 in one cycle of 210 msec, so that the frame lamp flashes white three times.

In this way, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control in one child table WD12 based on the same grandchild table W4 at a plurality of mutually different timings, thereby causing the frame lamp to blink in white at a plurality of mutually different timings. By controlling the lamp to vary the time to refer to the grandchild table W4 between a plurality of mutually different timings, the number of times the frame lamp blinks in white can be set to two or three times. As a result, by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of a plurality of different timings, the data capacity used for lamp control can be reduced. The number of white flashes can be varied. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

At time tn27, which is the last part of the inciting part of reach B in the second half of the SP, in response to the effect of inciting whether or not to catch a crab in the win/fail branch (jackpot, loss) as shown in FIG. 109 (n27), The frame lamp lights up white. At time tn27, lamp control is performed for a maximum of 10 minutes based on grandchild table W8.

As a result, in the win/fail branch in the inciting part of reach B in the second half of the SP, as shown in FIG. 109 (n27), the frame lamp remains lit white with the sound muted, and the player Can communicate branching (decisive timing) in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, in the child table WD12 of the SP second half reach B incitement part, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character appears, the frame lamp is lit in the color corresponding to the character, When a character utters a line, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp blinks in a color corresponding to the character.

For example, at time tn2, the performance control CPU 120 responds to a performance in which Jam-chan and Nana-chan located on the left side of the screen confront a crab located on the right side of the screen, as shown in FIG. 101 (n2). Then, the lamp on the left side of the frame blinks in white, corresponding to Jam-chan and Nana-chan, and the lamp on the right side of the frame lights up in red, corresponding to the crab. Furthermore, since Jam-chan and Nana-chan, who are located on the left side of the screen, are uttering lines, the performance control CPU 120 causes the left lamp of the frame to blink in white.

As a result, in a scene where multiple characters uttering lines are displayed, which character is uttering lines can be appropriately expressed by lighting/blinking of the frame lamp, and the production in the inciting part can be suitably expressed in the game. can be shown to others.

In addition, in the child table WD12 of the reach B incitement part in the second half of the SP, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character takes an action, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. ing.

For example, at time tn18, the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in pink color corresponding to Nana-chan in response to the performance in which Nana-chan prays as shown in FIG. 106 (n18). Furthermore, at time tn10, the performance control CPU 120 displays the color (red) corresponding to the character (crab) when there is dialogue of the character (crab) as shown in FIG. 104 (n10) but no subtitles. to make the frame lamp blink.

In this way, as shown in Figure 104 (n10), even if a character has dialogue but no subtitles, the luminance data (subtitles RGB data in the table) are specified. As a result, even in scenes where subtitles are not displayed, it is possible to suitably express that the character is uttering lines by the lighting manner of the game effect lamp 9, and it is possible to suitably show the production of the inciting part to the player. can.

[Brightness data table used in the epilogue part per reach B in the second half of SP]
FIG. 210 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used in the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach B.

As shown in FIG. 210 (a1), in the parent table for the winning epilogue used for the winning epilogue part of the second half of SP Reach B, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). and information specifying child tables (WD13, YD13, LD13, AD13) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 210 (a2), in the child table WD13 for the winning epilogue used for the winning epilogue part of the SP second half reach B, the time of the winning epilogue part in the winning epilogue part of the SP second half reach B is subdivided for the frame lamp. In addition to specifying a grandchild table to be referenced in each time period. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD13 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52.

For example, at time to1, grandchild table W4 is specified. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, the performance control CPU 120 corresponds to a performance such as catching a crab as shown in FIG. 110 (o1) after the decision-making shown in FIG. 109 (n27). to make the frame lamp flash white.

The white lighting in the win/fail branch (tn27) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. The data is "FFF".As a result, at the time of a win, the frame lamp flashes in the same color (white) as the win/fail branch and brighter than the win/fail branch, so it can be determined that the win has occurred depending on the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. can be conveyed to players in an easy-to-understand manner.

During times to2 to to5, grandchild table W1 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1, so that Jam-chan and Nana-chan can use the caught crabs as shown in FIGS. In response to the pleasing effect, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in a rainbow color that corresponds to the confirmed win.

As shown in FIG. 210 (b1), in the parent table for common symbol display used in the hit epilogue part of the second half of SP Reach B, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes). ) and information specifying child tables (WD0, YD0, LD0, AD0) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 210 (b2), in the child table WD0 for common symbol display used in the winning epilogue part of the second half of SP reach B, the time period of the symbol display part in the winning epilogue part of the second half of SP reach B is set for the frame lamp. In addition to subdivision, a grandchild table that is referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, grandchild table W4 is specified for 5000 msec between time to6 and time to7. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, the performance control CPU 120 changes the frame lamp to a pattern in response to a performance that produces winning symbols as shown in FIG. 111 (o6) and FIG. 112 (o7). Flashes in a bright white color that corresponds to the current state.

At time to8, which is the last part of the winning epilogue part, the frame lamp is colored smoothly in rainbow colors to correspond to the final winning symbol displayed in the center of the screen as shown in Figure 112 (o8). Light. At time to8, ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD13 becomes 0. The frame lamp remains lit in rainbow colors.

In this way, in the child table of the winning epilogue part, the grandchild table W1 is specified for times to2 to to5, and based on the grandchild table W1, Jam-chan and Nana-chan make the caught crab work as a signboard for the shop. In response to the pleasing effect, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors, and furthermore, the grandchild table W1 is specified for time to8, and the winning symbol is displayed in the center of the screen based on the grandchild table W1. The frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors to match the effect. As a result, in the winning epilogue part, by making the grandchild table for the winning epilogue used when notifying the win and the grandchild table for drawing the symbol used when displaying the winning symbol, different It is possible to enliven each performance by creating a sense of unity while reducing the amount of data used to control the lamps to light them in rainbow colors without having to prepare a grandchild table. As a result, the performance in the winning epilogue part can be shown better to the player by using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

[Brightness data table used in SP second half reach B loss epilogue part]
FIG. 211 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used in the lose epilogue part of the second half of SP Reach B.

As shown in FIG. 211 (a1), in the parent table for the common loss epilogue used for the loss epilogue part of the second half of SP Reach B, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). ) and information specifying child tables (WD4, YD4, LD4, AD4) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 211 (a2), in the child table WD4 for the common loss epilogue used for the loss epilogue part in the second half of SP reach B, the time of the loss epilogue part in the second half of SP reach B is subdivided with respect to the frame lamp. , the grandchild table that is referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, during 200 msec of time tp1, grandchild table W13 is specified. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W13, the performance control CPU 120 can respond to a performance in which the crab fails to be caught as shown in FIG. 113 (p1) after the correct/false branch shown in FIG. 109 (n27). to light the frame lamp white.

The white lighting in the win/fail branch (tn27) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. 249, which will be described later, and its RGB data is "FDC", whereas the white lighting in tp1 after the loss notification is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. 249, which will be described later. It is based on the grandchild table W13 shown in FIG. 252, and its RGB data is "888" or "444". As a result, in the event of a loss, it is possible to maintain the same color by using the white lighting in the win/fail branch (tn27), while lighting the frame lamp darker in white, so that the player can conveniently notify the player of the loss. can be notified.

The grandchild table W14 is designated for 5800 msec between time tp2 and time tp3. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W14 to correspond to the performance in which Jam-chan and Nana-chan are disappointed after losing, as shown in FIGS. 113 (p2) and (p3). Light the frame lamp in a white color darker than tp1.

The rainbow lighting at the time of winning (to2 to to5) is based on the grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. The white lighting is based on the grandchild table W14 shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later, and the RGB data is switched at an interval of 250 msec, which is longer than that at the time of hit. Thereby, since the lighting color of the frame lamp changes at a shorter interval when winning, than when losing, it is possible to clearly inform the player that he has won by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. Furthermore, while the lighting of the frame lamp is more emphasized in the event of a win than in the case of a loss, the lighting of the frame lamp can be made more subdued in the event of a loss. This can be conveyed to players in an easy-to-understand manner.

At time tp4, grandchild table W15 is designated. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W15 to turn off the frame lamp in response to a performance in which a loss is notified and the screen goes dark as shown in FIG. 114 (p4). .

At time tp5, grandchild table W21 is designated. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W21, the effect control CPU 120 changes the frame lamp to a background yellow lighting pattern in response to an effect in which a normal screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 114 (p5). Turn it on. Further, at time tp5, lamp control is performed while repeatedly referring to the luminance data included in the grandchild table W21.

[Brightness data table used in SP final reach promotion part]
FIG. 212 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used for the promotion part of the SP final reach. As shown in FIG. 212, in the parent table of the brightness data table used for the SP final reach promotion part, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes), and each game effect Information specifying child tables (WD15, YD15, LD15, AD15) to be referenced when controlling the lamp 9 is stored.

FIGS. 213 and 214 are diagrams for explaining examples of child tables for frame lamps in the brightness data table used for the promotion part of the SP final reach. Each grandchild table included in the child table WD15 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52. As shown in FIGS. 213 and 214, in the child table WD15 of the frame lamp, the time of the SP final reach promotion part is subdivided for the frame lamp, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified. .

The brightness data corresponding to times th4 to th10 is used for lamp control of the frame lamp corresponding to the latter half (rising portion) of the accessory motion shown in FIGS. 171 (h4) to 172 (h10). Specifically, from time th4 to th6, the frame lamp blinks in yellow in response to the effect that the accessory rises, and then from time th7 to th10, the frame lamp flashes in yellow based on the grandchild table W3. It lights up in a hazy yellow color that corresponds to the background. As a result, the frame lamp gradually changes from blinking yellow to yellow and hazy lighting that corresponds to the background of the SP final reach, thereby clearly informing the player that the SP final reach has been reached. Can be done.

Incidentally, during the time period th4 to th10 when the accessory rises, lamp control is also performed on the accessory lamp 9A. For example, between times th4 and th10 when the accessory rises, the performance control CPU 120, based on the child table corresponding to the raising motion of the accessory in the accessory lamp 9A and the grandchild table specified by the child table, The brightness of the accessory lamp 9A is gradually lowered so that the accessory lamp 9A is gradually turned off.

As a result, the lighting mode of the accessory lamp 9A does not make the player aware that the accessory is going up, while the lighting mode of the frame lamp makes it possible for the player to place the player on the screen indicating that the SP has reached the final reach. can draw people's attention.

The grandchild table W3 is specified for 1130 msec of time tr1, 1330 msec of time tr19 and time tr22, and 1560 msec of time tr15. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 to light the frame lamp in a hazy yellow color corresponding to the background of the SP reach.

Here, as shown in FIG. 229, in the grandchild table W3, the luminance data of the frame lamp is switched over one period consisting of 720 msec (180 msec x 4). At time th7 to th10 and time tr1, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1130 msec, which is more than one cycle, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1130 msec, and at time tr19 and time At time tr22, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1330 msec, which is more than one cycle, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1330 msec, and at time tr15, for 1560 msec, which is more than two cycles. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1560 msec.

In this way, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W3 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table WD15, thereby lighting up the frame lamp in yellow at a plurality of mutually different timings. By changing the time for referring to the grandchild table W3 using the lamp control between a plurality of mutually different timings, it is possible to change the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow. As a result, one child table WD15 can be used for lamp control by changing its reference time while using the common grandchild table W3, without having to prepare separate grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings. While reducing data capacity, it is possible to vary the amount of time the frame lamp lights up in yellow, which corresponds to the background of SP Reach. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

Furthermore, child table WD9 used in the promotion part of SP second half reach A, child table WD12 used in the promotion part of SP second half reach B, and child table WD15 used in the promotion part of SP final reach are all different from each other. In order to change the reference time while using a common grandchild table W3 without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of multiple timings, the data capacity used for ramp control is reduced in multiple reach effects, You can vary the time the frame lamp lights up in yellow, which corresponds to the background of SP Reach. Similarly, for the child table WD2 used in the promotion part of SP first half reach A and the child table WD5 used in the promotion part of SP first half reach B, different grandchild tables should be prepared at each of a plurality of mutually different timings. By changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W3, the amount of data used for lamp control can be reduced, and the time to light the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the background of SP reach can be changed. Good too.

Grandchild table W4 is designated for 150 msec of time tr36 and for 210 msec of time tr40 and time tr47. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 to cause the frame lamp to blink in white. The grandchild table W4 is specified at time tr36, time tr40, and time tr47, but at time tr36, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 in a time shorter than one cycle of 150 msec. By doing so, the frame lamp flashes white twice, and at time tr40 and time tr47, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 in one cycle of 210 msec, so that the frame lamp flashes white three times.

In this way, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control in one child table WD15 based on the same grandchild table W4 at a plurality of mutually different timings, thereby causing the frame lamp to blink in white at a plurality of mutually different timings. By controlling the lamp to vary the time to refer to the grandchild table W4 between a plurality of mutually different timings, the number of times the frame lamp blinks in white can be set to two or three times. As a result, by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of a plurality of different timings, the data capacity used for lamp control can be reduced. The number of white flashes can be varied. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

Furthermore, child table WD2 used in the inciting part of SP first half reach A, child table WD5 used in the inciting part of SP first half reach B, child table WD9 used in the inciting part of SP second half reach A, and child table WD9 used in the inciting part of SP second half reach B. In both the child table WD12 used in the part and the child table WD15 used in the SP final reach promotion part, a common grandchild table W4 can be used without preparing separate grandchild tables at each of a plurality of mutually different timings. By changing the reference time while using the lamp, it is possible to reduce the amount of data used for lamp control and to vary the number of white flashes. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

At time tr41, grandchild table W5 or grandchild table W6 is designated. When the information to execute the red cut-in effect is set in the effect setting process, the grandchild table W5 is specified at time tr41, and when the information to execute the green cut-in effect is set in the effect setting process, Grandchild table W6 is designated at time tr41.

The grandchild table W5 corresponds to the grandchild tables W5a to W5e for frame lamps in the common red cut-in luminance data table shown in FIGS. 233 to 235, which will be described later. As shown in FIGS. 233 to 235, in the grandchild table W5 (W5a to W5e), as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, only the R data is initially changed at 30 msec intervals. Data showing various brightnesses is specified, then data showing various brightnesses is specified only for R data at intervals of 20 msec, and finally, various brightnesses are specified for only R data alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec. Data indicating that is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W5 to light the frame lamp in red in response to the cut-in performance (red cut-in performance) as shown in FIG. 128 (r41).

The grandchild table W6 corresponds to the grandchild tables W6a to W6e for frame lamps in the common green cut-in luminance data table shown in FIGS. 242 to 244, which will be described later. As shown in FIGS. 242 to 244, in the grandchild table W6 (W6a to W6e), as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, only G data is first changed at 30 msec intervals. Data showing various brightness is specified, then data showing various brightness is specified only for G data at the next 20 msec interval, and finally, various brightness is specified for only G data alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec. Data indicating that is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W6 to light the frame lamp in green in response to the cut-in performance (green cut-in performance) as shown in FIG. 128 (r41).

As shown in FIGS. 128 (r40) and (r41), when the push button 31B is displayed and the cut-in effect is executed, the character does not utter any lines and no subtitles are displayed. Furthermore, the frame lamp that is the target of lamp control in scenes other than the cut-in performance in the SP final reach continues to be the target of lamp control in the cut-in performance.

As a result, the display prompting the player to operate the push button 31B (button display) and the subtitle display do not overlap when executing the cut-in effect, and the overlap between the two makes it difficult to recognize either display. It is possible to prevent the display contents from being stored away or from being misunderstood. Furthermore, the brightness data of the lamp control in the cut-in effect and the button display for the cut-in effect (RGB data in grandchild tables W4, W5, W6) is in the same frame as the lamp control in the inciting part of the SP final reach. By being designed to use lamps, it is possible to prevent unnecessary lighting/blinking of lamps from being mixed in and spoil the aesthetic appearance, and it is possible to provide a suitable effect during the inciting part.

In addition, in this embodiment, the target of lamp control is common in that the button display and cut-in performance and other SP final reach performances use frame lamps. Not exclusively. For example, only one or more of the game effect lamps 9, such as the frame lamp, accessory lamp 9A, and board left lamp 9B, are used for button display and cut-in effects, and other SP final reach effects. The object of lamp control may be common in that point, or the object of lamp control may be common in that all game effect lamps 9 are used.

At 860 msec of time tr49 and time tr50, grandchild table W9 is designated. The grandchild table W9 corresponds to the grandchild table W9 for the frame lamp in the trigger display brightness data table shown in FIG. 250, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 250, in the grandchild table W9, "D00" is specified at 30 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W9 to correspond to effects in which the stick controller 31A (trigger) is displayed in the center as shown in FIGS. 131 (r49) and (r50). to light the frame lamp in red.

In the time period tr51 to tr54, which is the last part of the promotion part of the SP final reach, the grandchild table W10 is specified. The grandchild table W10 corresponds to the grandchild table W10 for the frame lamp in the operation promotion brightness data table shown in FIG. 250, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 250, in the grandchild table W10, "500" or "D00" is specified at 30 msec intervals as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. , by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W10, it is possible to correspond to effects that encourage the player to pull the stick controller 31A (trigger) as shown in FIGS. 131 (r51) to 132 (r54). , the frame lamp blinks in red. During times tr51 to tr54, lamp control is performed for a maximum of 10 minutes based on grandchild table W10, and the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD15 becomes 0. The frame lamp continues blinking in red based on the grandchild table W10 for 10 minutes.

As a result, in the correctness branch in the SP final reach incitement part, the sound corresponding to the operation promotion and the sound (BGM) corresponding to the reach are output as shown in Figures 131 (r49) to 132 (r54). In this state, the frame lamp will be switched one after another, such as flashing white, lighting red, and flashing red, thereby making it possible to enhance the effect of promoting operations for the player at the winning/failing branch (deciding timing).

Here, child table WD2 used in the inciting part of SP first half reach A, child table WD5 used in the inciting part of SP first half reach B, child table WD9 used in the inciting part of SP second half reach A, and SP second half reach B. When the operation promotion that prompts the player to pull the stick controller 31A (trigger) is not performed, such as the child table WD12 used in the inciting part, the frame lamp is displayed at the final success/fail branch of the inciting part. It remains lit white and then moves to the winning epilogue part or the losing epilogue part. On the other hand, when an operation promotion that prompts the player to pull the stick controller 31A (trigger), such as the child table WD15 used in the promotion part of the SP final reach, is shown in FIG. 130 (r47). As shown in Figure 130 (r48), after the white flashing is performed to encourage whether or not the ally character will capture Bakuchu, the display alternates between Bakuchu and the ally character, as shown in Figure 130 (r48). After the frame lamp lights up in red in response to such an effect, the switch is made to the grandchild table W9, and the stick controller 31A (trigger) as shown in FIGS. 131 (r49) and (r50) is activated based on the grandchild table W9. The frame lamp lights up in red in response to the effect displayed in the center.

In this way, in the SP reach effect where no operation promotion is performed to encourage the player to perform an operation in the win/fail situation, by muting the sound and keeping the frame lamp illuminated in white, the effect can be created as if the effect had stopped. can be shown to the player, and the win/fail branch (timing of decision) can be clearly communicated to the player. On the other hand, in the SP reach performance where operation promotion is performed to encourage the player to perform an operation in a win/fail situation, a sound corresponding to the operation promotion and a sound (BGM) corresponding to the reach are output, and furthermore, the operation promotion By switching and using the grandchild table multiple times in order to control the frame lamp in a mode corresponding to the above, it is possible to suitably produce the timing for deciding whether or not to make a decision based on the lighting mode of the frame lamp. In this way, the timing of deciding whether to decide whether to decide whether to decide whether to decide whether or not to win can be suitably produced by different sound control and lamp control depending on whether operation promotion is not performed or when operation is promoted in the case of a judgment or failure. Furthermore, in the SP final reach where operation promotion is performed to encourage the player to perform an operation in the win/fail branch, the brightness data (RGB data) is changed to "500" and "D00" at 30 msec intervals based on the grandchild table W10. As a result, the timing for deciding whether or not to make a decision can be suitably expressed by the lighting mode of the frame lamp.

In addition, in the child table WD15 of the SP final reach promotion part, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character appears, the frame lamp is lit in the color corresponding to the character. Luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when the character utters lines, the frame lamp blinks in the color corresponding to the character.

For example, at time tr2, the performance control CPU 120 supports a performance in which six ally characters located on the left side of the screen and a Bakushu located on the right side of the screen face each other as shown in FIG. 115 (r2). Then, the lamp on the left side of the frame flashes in white, corresponding to the six friendly characters, and the lamp on the right side of the frame lights up in red, corresponding to Bakuchu. Furthermore, since the six ally characters located on the left side of the screen are uttering lines, the performance control CPU 120 causes the left lamp of the frame to blink in white. In addition, at time tr3, the performance control CPU 120 creates a red frame corresponding to the Bakushu, in response to the performance where the Bakushu located on the right side of the screen utters lines as shown in FIG. 115 (r3). Make the right lamp blink.

As a result, in a scene where multiple characters uttering lines are displayed, which character is uttering lines can be appropriately expressed by lighting/blinking of the frame lamp, and the production in the inciting part can be suitably expressed in the game. can be shown to others.

In addition, in the child table WD15 of the SP final reach promotion part, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character takes an action, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. There is.

For example, at time tr11, the performance control CPU 120 flashes the frame lamp in blue corresponding to Maid A in response to a performance in which Maid A chases Bakuchu as shown in FIG. 118 (r11). Furthermore, at time tr25, time tr27, time tr29, time tr31, time tr33, and time tr35, the production control CPU 120 operates as shown in FIG. 123 (r25), (r27), FIG. 124 (r29), FIG. 125 (r31), (r33) and FIG. 126 (r35), when a character has dialogue but no subtitles, the frame lamp is blinked in the color corresponding to the character.

In this way, as shown in Figure 123 (r25), (r27), Figure 124 (r29), Figure 125 (r31), (r33), and Figure 126 (r35), while the characters have dialogue, subtitles are Even if there is no such character, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights/blinks in the color corresponding to the character. As a result, even in scenes where subtitles are not displayed, it is possible to suitably express that the character is uttering lines by the lighting manner of the game effect lamp 9, and it is possible to suitably show the production of the inciting part to the player. can.

[Brightness data table used in the epilogue part per SP final reach]
FIG. 215 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used in the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach.

As shown in FIG. 215 (a1), in the parent table for the accessory movement used in the epilogue part of the SP final reach, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). and information specifying child tables (WD16a, YD16a, LD16a, AD16a) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 215 (a2), in the child table WD16a for accessory movements used in the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach, the time of the accessory action part in the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach is subdivided for the frame lamp. In addition to specifying a grandchild table to be referenced in each time period. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD16a of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52.

For example, grandchild table W18 is specified during 10000 msec from time ts1 to ts3. The grandchild table W18 corresponds to the grandchild table W18 for the frame lamp in the winning confirmation brightness data table shown in FIG. 256, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 256, in the grandchild table W18, various brightness data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified in the first 40 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. "333" is specified in the next 30 msec, and such RGB data is repeatedly specified. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W18, the performance control CPU 120 causes the accessories shown in FIGS. 133 (s1) to (s3) to fall after the validity branch shown in FIG. 132 (r54). In response to the effect, the frame lamp flashes in seven colors.

As shown in FIG. 215 (b1), in the parent table for the winning epilogue used for the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). , information specifying child tables (WD16b, YD16b, LD16b, AD16b) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 215 (b2), in the winning epilogue child table WD16b used for the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach, the time of the winning epilogue part in the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach is subdivided for the frame lamp. In addition, a grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD16b of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach luminance data table described with reference to FIG. 52.

For example, from time ts3-2 to ts3-8, grandchild table W4 is designated. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, so that as the ornaments shown in FIGS. 173 (s3-2) to 174 (s3-8) rise, it appears as if a bomb has been caught. The frame lamp is made to flash in white corresponding to the rise of the accessory in accordance with the performance in which the display appears.

During times ts4 to ts7, grandchild table W1 is designated. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 to control the frame lamp in response to the performance that looks like catching a Bakushu as shown in FIGS. 134 (s4) to 135 (s7). Lights up smoothly in a rainbow color that corresponds to a confirmed win.

As shown in FIG. 215 (c1), in the parent table for common symbol display used in the epilogue part of the SP final reach, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). and information specifying child tables (WD0, YD0, LD0, AD0) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 215 (c2), in the child table WD0 for common symbol display used in the SP final reach epilogue part, the time of the symbol display part in the SP final reach epilogue part is divided into small parts for the frame lamp. At the same time, a grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, grandchild table W4 is specified for 5000 msec between time ts8 and time ts9. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, so as to make the frame lamp correspond to the performance that brings out winning symbols as shown in FIGS. 135 (s8) and (s9). Flashes the corresponding bright white color.

At time ts10, which is the last of the winning epilogue part, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in a rainbow color in response to an effect in which the winning symbol is displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 136 (s10). At time ts10, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD16 becomes 0. The frame lamp remains lit in rainbow colors.

In this way, in the child table of the winning epilogue part, the grandchild table W1 is specified for time ts4 to ts7, and based on the grandchild table W1, the frame lamp is set to correspond to the effect of catching a Bakushu. It lights up smoothly in a rainbow color, and furthermore, the grandchild table W1 is specified for time ts10, and the frame lamp lights up in response to an effect such that the winning symbol is displayed in the center of the screen based on the grandchild table W1. Lights up smoothly in rainbow colors. As a result, in the winning epilogue part, by making the grandchild table used when notifying the win and the grandchild table used when displaying the winning symbol common, there is no need to prepare separate grandchild tables for each of multiple different timings. , it is possible to reduce the amount of data used to control the lamps to turn them on in rainbow colors, while enlivening each performance by creating a sense of unity. As a result, the performance in the winning epilogue part can be shown better to the player by using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

In addition, in the child table WD16 of the epilogue part per SP final reach, in the production where objects fall, the rainbow chromatic color and achromatic color (RGB data of "333") are alternately switched. The frame lamp is lamp controlled. As a result, by occasionally interposing achromatic colors between the chromatic colors of the rainbow, it is possible to perform an effect that congratulates the player by emphasizing that he has won the jackpot. After that, when an ally character catches a Bakuchu, a smooth rainbow color is lit without any achromatic colors, and the player is calmly congratulated on winning the jackpot. be able to. As a result, the performance in the epilogue part of the SP final reach can be suitably shown to the player.

[Brightness data table used in SP final reach loss epilogue part]
FIG. 216 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used in the loss epilogue part of the SP final reach.

As shown in FIG. 216(a1), in the parent table for the lose-lose epilogue used for the lose-lose epilogue part of the SP final reach, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes). , and information specifying child tables (WD17, YD17, LD17, AD17) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 216 (a2), in the child table WD17 for loss epilogue used for the loss epilogue part of SP final reach, the time of the loss epilogue part in SP final reach is subdivided for the frame lamp, and each time A grandchild table referenced in the band is specified. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD17 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52.

For example, during 200 msec of time tu1, grandchild table W13 is specified. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W13, the performance control CPU 120 supports a performance in which Bakushu runs away as shown in FIG. 137 (u1) after the correct/false branch shown in FIG. 132 (r54). to light the frame lamp white.

The red blinking in the win/fail branch (tr54) is based on the grandchild table W10 shown in FIG. It is based on the grandchild table W13 shown in FIG. 252, and its RGB data is "888" or "444". Thereby, in the event of a loss, the frame lamp can be lit in white, darker than the flashing red in the win/fail branch (tr54), so that it is possible to suitably notify the player of the loss.

During 3900 msec of time tr2, grandchild table W14 is designated. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W14, thereby changing the frame lamp to tu1 in response to the performance in which six ally characters lose and are disappointed, as shown in FIG. 137 (u2). Lights up in a darker white color.

The rainbow lighting at the time of winning (ts4 to ts7) is based on the grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. 225, which will be described later, and the RGB data switches at intervals of 30 msec, while the darker white lighting at the time of loss (tu1) is based on the grandchild table W14 shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later, and its RGB data is switched at an interval of 250 msec, which is longer than that at the time of hit. Thereby, since the lighting color of the frame lamp changes at a shorter interval when winning, than when losing, it is possible to clearly inform the player that he has won by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. Furthermore, while the lighting of the frame lamp is more emphasized in the event of a win than in the case of a loss, the lighting of the frame lamp can be made more subdued in the event of a loss. This can be conveyed to players in an easy-to-understand manner.

Also, child table WD4 of SP first half reach A, child table WD7 of SP first half reach B, child table WD11 of SP second half reach A, and child table WD14 of SP second half reach B are the same as child table WD17 of SP final reach. Based on the grandchild table W14, the frame lamp is lit in the lighting mode when the game loses. However, the performance control CPU 120 controls the frame lamp for 5800 msec based on the grandchild table W14 in the SP first half reach A, B and the SP second half reach A, B, whereas in the SP final reach, it controls the frame lamp for 3900 msec. During this time, the frame lamp is controlled based on the grandchild table W14. In this way, while the grandchild table used for ramp control in the event of a loss is common among a plurality of different reaches, the time for performing ramp control with reference to the grandchild table can be made different. As a result, in the child table used in each of the different reaches, the reference time can be changed while using the common grandchild table W4 without having to prepare a grandchild table for use in case of a loss in each of the different reaches. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the amount of data used for lamp control and to vary the time during which the frame lamp is lit depending on the lighting mode corresponding to the failure. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of a loss in a suitable manner for each of the plurality of reaches.

At time tu3, grandchild table W15 is specified. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W15, the performance control CPU 120 turns off the frame lamp in response to a performance in which a loss is notified and the screen darkens as shown in FIG. 137 (u3). .

At time tu4, grandchild table W21 is specified. By controlling the lamps based on the grandchild table W21, the effect control CPU 120 changes the frame lamp to a background yellow lighting pattern in response to an effect in which a normal screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 138 (u4). Turn it on. Further, at time tu4, lamp control is performed while repeatedly referring to the luminance data included in the grandchild table W21.

[Luminance data table used in the relief part]
FIG. 217 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used for the relief part. Each grandchild table included in the child table WD18 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52. As shown in FIG. 217, in the child table WD18 of the frame lamp, the time of the part per relief is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table to be referred to in each time period is specified.

For example, at 1980 msec of time tv1, grandchild table W16 is specified. The grandchild table W16 corresponds to the grandchild table W16 for frame lamps in the one brightness data table per relief shown in FIG. 254, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 254, in the grandchild table W16, "D00" is specified for each lamp in the first 30 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and in the next 30 msec, each "B00" is specified for the lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W16, thereby lighting the frame lamp in red in response to the rescue performance shown in FIG. 139(v1).

In this way, from the lighting mode of the frame lamp based on the grandchild table W21 specified last in each of the child tables WD4, WD7, WD11, WD14, and WD17 used in the event of a loss, the lighting mode of the frame lamp is changed to the lighting mode at the beginning of the child table WD18 used in the case of a rescue. By switching to the lighting mode of the frame lamp based on the designated grandchild table W16, the frame lamp lights even brighter. As a result, at the time of a rescue win, the frame lamp lights up brighter than in the state after the loss notification, so that depending on the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, the loss notification and the subsequent rescue win notification can be easily understood by the player. I can show you.

In addition, in this embodiment, after a loss is reported, the frame lamp is lit once in yellow, which corresponds to the normal background, and furthermore, when a rescue is successful, the frame lamp is lit even brighter in red, which corresponds to the rescue performance. there were. However, the present invention is not limited to this embodiment. For example, at the end of each of the child tables WD4, WD7, WD11, WD14, and WD17 used in the event of a loss, the grandchild table W15 is specified, and "111" is specified as the final luminance data (RGB data). may be done. As a result, at the end of a losing game, the frame lamp turns off in white. Further, "AAA" may be designated as the first luminance data (RGB data) in the first designated grandchild table W16 of the child table WD18 used at the time of relief. As a result, the frame lamp lights up brightly in the white range at the beginning when the rescue is successful after the failure notification. In this way, at the time of winning the rescue, the frame lamp lights up in the same color (white) as the state after the loss notification and brighter than the state after the loss notification, so the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 can be used to prevent the loss. The notification and the subsequent relief hit notification can be shown more easily to the player.

At 700 msec of time tv2, grandchild table W17 is designated. The grandchild table W17 corresponds to the grandchild table W17 for the frame lamp in the two-brightness data table per relief shown in FIG. 255, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 255, in the grandchild table W17, as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, white system data such as "AAA" and "DDD" is output to each lamp at 30 msec intervals. is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W17 to light the frame lamp in white in response to the white-out performance shown in FIG. 139(v2).

Grandchild table W4 is designated between 5000 msec between time tv3 and time tv4. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 to cause the frame lamp to blink in white in response to the symbol presentation shown in FIGS. 140 (v3) and (v4).

At time tv5, which is the last part of the rescue part, the grandchild table W1 is designated. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 to smoothly light up the frame lamp in a rainbow color corresponding to the confirmation of a hit, corresponding to the design presentation shown in FIG. 140 (v5). . At time tv5, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD18 becomes 0. The frame lamp remains lit in rainbow colors.

[Brightness data table used in the re-lottery part]
FIG. 218 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used for the re-lottery part. As shown in FIG. 218, in the parent table in the brightness data table used for the re-lottery part, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes), and the maximum time for each game effect lamp 9 to be Information specifying child tables (WD19, YD19, LD19, AD19) to be referenced during lamp control is stored.

(Brightness data table used before operation promotion)
FIG. 219 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used in the re-lottery part (before operation promotion). As shown in FIG. 219, as the child table WD19 of the frame lamp, there are prepared a child table that is used before the symbol starts moving, and a child table that is used after the symbol starts moving. In each child table in these re-lottery parts, the time of the re-lottery part is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table to be referred to in each time period is specified.

FIG. 219(a) shows a child table that is used before the symbol begins to move. For example, from time tA6 to tA8, a grandchild table for turning off the frame lamp is designated. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the designated grandchild table, so that after the re-lottery performance is started, the symbols are changed by the re-lottery performance, as shown in FIGS. 142 (A6) to 143 (A8). Before it starts moving, turn off the frame lamp.

In this way, once the frame lamp goes out, the frame lamp lights up in a lighting mode that corresponds to an effect in which the symbols start to move due to the re-lottery effect, so depending on the lighting mode of the frame lamp, the symbols start to move due to the re-lottery effect. This can be communicated to players in an easy-to-understand manner.

FIG. 219(b) shows a child table used after the symbol begins to move. At times tA9 and tA10, grandchild table W19 is designated. The grandchild table W19 corresponds to the grandchild table W19 for the frame lamp in the re-lottery performance brightness data table shown in FIG. 257, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 257, in the grandchild table W19, "F00" and "700" are alternately specified at 60 msec intervals as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W19, the performance control CPU 120 corresponds to the performance in which the "2" symbol is reduced as shown in FIG. 143 (A9) and FIG. 144 (A10). Make the frame lamp flash red.

During times tA11 to tA46, grandchild table W20 is designated. The grandchild table W20 corresponds to the grandchild table W20 for frame lamps in the re-lottery performance brightness data table shown in FIG. 258, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 258, in the grandchild table W20, "F00" and "700" are alternately specified at intervals of 30 msec, which is shorter than in the grandchild table W20, as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. has been done. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W20 to correspond to effects such as those shown in FIGS. 144 (A11) to 156 (A46) that change at high speed while switching symbols, Make the frame lamp blink red rapidly.

(Brightness data table used when symbols are promoted after operation promotion)
FIG. 220 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used in the re-lottery part (symbol promotion after operation promotion). The frame lamp child table WD20 shown in FIG. 220 is a continuation of the frame lamp child table WD19 shown in FIG. 219. As shown in FIG. 220, in the frame lamp child table WD20, the time of the re-lottery part is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table to be referred to in each time period is specified.

For example, grandchild table W4 is specified for 5000 msec from time tB1 to tB4. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, the performance control CPU 120 performs "3" after the operation promotion is executed in the re-lottery part, as shown in FIGS. 157 (B1) to 158 (B4). The frame lamp is made to flash in white in response to a design display in which the design is enlarged and displayed.

During times tB5 to tB9, grandchild table W18 is designated. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W18, the performance control CPU 120 displays the "3" symbol as shown in FIGS. 157 (B5) to (B9) in a reduced size and in normal size, A frame lamp is made to flash in rainbow colors in response to a performance in which the symbol "3" is displayed in a swaying manner and then the symbol is confirmed.

It should be noted that the rainbow-colored blinking caused by the lamp control from time tB5 to tB9 is more intense than the smooth rainbow-colored lighting caused by the lamp control based on the grandchild table W1. For example, from time tB5 to tB9, the rainbow color flashes more intensely than smoothly. From time tB5 to tB9, ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes. Based on this, the frame lamp will continue to flash in rainbow colors.

In this way, in the child table WD20 of the re-lottery part, as a lamp control when the symbol is finally decided after the re-lottery, the rainbow is used in the same way as the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 of the winning epilogue part. The frame lamp lights up with the color, but when the "2" symbol is promoted and replaced with the "3" symbol by re-drawing, the rainbow color blinks from time tB5 to tB9, and once in the winning epilogue part, the "2" symbol is displayed. The lighting pattern is more intense than the smooth rainbow-colored lighting that would occur if the symbol was temporarily stopped. As a result, the player can more effectively congratulate the player on the promotion of winning symbols in the re-lottery, depending on the lighting manner of the frame lamp.

In addition, when the symbols start to move due to the re-lottery effect after the lights are turned off, and the symbols are displayed in a swaying manner, the brightness data corresponding to the re-lottery effect (for example, RGB data on grandchild table W19) is used to change the color to a smooth rainbow color. has a different lighting mode, and the frame lamp flashes in red. This prevents the player from being misled into thinking that the winning symbol that was temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part has been determined, depending on the lighting manner of the frame lamp.

In addition, the frame lamp is designed to flash in rainbow colors when the ``3'' symbol shown in Figures 159 (B7) to (B9) is displayed in a swaying manner and then the design is confirmed. This makes it easy for the designer to decide when to start blinking the frame lamp in rainbow colors.

Furthermore, the flashing rainbow color when the "3" symbol as shown in FIG. 159 (B7) is displayed in a swaying manner will be changed during the period when the symbol is confirmed as shown in FIGS. 159 (B8) and (B9). will also be taken over. In this way, during the short symbol determination period, the lamp control corresponding to the fanfare part is performed without preparing a special brightness data table for lamp control. There is no need to increase capacity excessively.

(Brightness data table used when the symbol is not promoted after operation promotion)
FIG. 221 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used in the re-lottery part (after operation promotion). The frame lamp child table WD21 shown in FIG. 221 is a continuation of the frame lamp child table WD19 shown in FIG. 219. As shown in FIG. 221, in the frame lamp child table WD21, the time of the re-lottery part is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table to be referred to in each time period is specified.

For example, grandchild table W4 is specified for 5000 msec from time tC1 to tC4. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, the performance control CPU 120 performs "2" after the operation promotion is executed in the re-lottery part, as shown in FIGS. 161 (C1) to 162 (C4). The frame lamp is made to flash in white in response to a design display in which the design is enlarged and displayed.

During times tC5 to tC9, grandchild table W1 is designated. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 to create a performance in which the symbol "2" is displayed in a swaying manner as shown in FIGS. 162 (C5) to 163 (C9) and then the symbol is finalized. The frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors in response to the . From time tC5 to tC9, ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the grandchild table W1 is used for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to the child table WD21 becomes 0. Based on this, the frame lamp will remain lit in rainbow colors.

In this way, in the child table WD21 of the re-lottery part, in common with the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 of the winning epilogue part, the grandchild table is used as a lamp control when the symbol is finally determined after the re-lottery part. Table W1 is used. As a result, there is no need to prepare separate grandchild tables for lighting in rainbow colors for the winning epilogue part and the re-drawing part, reducing the amount of data used for lamp control, and creating a sense of unity even when the parts (timings) are different. A certain performance can be shown to the player. As a result, the performance in the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part can be shown better to the player while reducing the data capacity.

In addition, in the winning epilogue part, when the winning symbols are temporarily stopped, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors, and then the lights are turned off, and then the symbols start moving by re-drawing effect, and the symbols are displayed shaking. When there is, the frame lamp blinks in red in a lighting manner different from the smooth rainbow color based on the brightness data (for example, RGB data in grandchild table W19 and W20) corresponding to the re-lottery effect. This prevents the player from being misled into thinking that the winning symbol that was temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part has been determined, depending on the lighting manner of the frame lamp.

In addition, when the "2" symbol is promoted by the re-drawing and replaced with the "3" symbol, the rainbow color lights up from time tB5 to tB9, and the "2" symbol is not promoted from the "2" symbol by the re-lottery and is replaced by the "3" symbol. The lighting pattern is more intense than the smooth lighting of the rainbow color from time tC5 to tC9 when the symbol is maintained. As a result, if the winning symbol is promoted in the re-drawing, the player can effectively celebrate the promotion of the winning symbol in the re-drawing, depending on the lighting mode of the frame lamp, and the winning symbol will be promoted in the re-drawing. If not, the data capacity can be reduced by using a common grandchild table W1 used in the winning epilogue part.

Also, as shown in Figures 163 (C7) to (C9), after the "2" symbol has finished appearing, the "2" symbol becomes the normal size and the design is confirmed. Since the frame lamp is designed to light up in rainbow colors, the designer can easily decide when to start lighting the frame lamp in rainbow colors.

Furthermore, the rainbow color lighting when the "3" symbol as shown in FIG. 163 (C7) is displayed in a swaying manner will be continued during the symbol confirmation period as shown in FIGS. 163 (C8) and (C9). will also be taken over. In this way, during the short symbol determination period, the lamp control corresponding to the fanfare part is performed without preparing a special brightness data table for lamp control. There is no need to increase capacity excessively.

[Luminance data table used in fanfare part]
FIG. 222 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used for a fanfare part. Each grandchild table included in the child table WD22 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52. As shown in FIG. 222, in the frame lamp child table WD22, the time of the fanfare part is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, at times tD1 and tE1, a grandchild table for turning off the frame lamp is specified. By performing lamp control based on the specified grandchild table, the production control CPU 120 temporarily turns off the frame lamp before the fanfare display is performed, as shown in FIG. 160 (D1) or FIG. 164 (E1). Turn off the lights.

At times tD2 and tE2, a grandchild table is specified for lighting the frame lamp in a fanfare manner. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the specified grandchild table, so as to correspond to the fanfare performance, as shown in FIG. 160 (D2) or FIG. Turn it on in the lighting mode. At times tD2 and tE2, ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the ramp control is performed on the grandchild table for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD22 becomes 0. Based on this, the frame lamp remains lit in a fanfare manner.

[Smooth rainbow luminance data table]
FIG. 223 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the smooth rainbow luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 223, in the parent table of the smooth rainbow luminance data table, 600000 msec (10 minutes) is the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9, and is referenced when controlling the lamp for each game effect lamp 9. Information specifying the child table (WS1, YS1, LS1, AS1) to be used is stored.

FIG. 224 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the smooth rainbow luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 224, in the child table of the smooth rainbow brightness data table, grandchild tables (W1, Y1, L1, A1) that are referred to in a predetermined time period are specified for each game effect lamp 9.

FIG. 225 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the smooth rainbow luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 225, in the grandchild table W1 for the frame lamp, various brightness values corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are displayed at 30 msec intervals as "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. Data is sparsely specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 to smoothly light up the frame lamp in a rainbow color corresponding to a confirmed win.

FIG. 226 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an accessory lamp and a grandchild table for a board left lamp in the smooth rainbow luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 226, in the accessory lamp grandchild table Y1, "FFFF" data is specified for 600000 msec (10 minutes) as "RRRR" data output to the accessory lamp 9A. There is. The production control CPU 120 lights up the accessory lamp 9A in red by controlling the lamp based on the grandchild table Y1. In the grandchild table L1 for the board left lamp, data "FFFFF" is specified for 600000 msec (10 minutes) as the "WWWWW" data output to the board left lamp 9B. The production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table L1, thereby lighting the board left lamp 9B in white.

FIG. 227 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the attacker lamp in the smooth rainbow luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 227, in the grandchild table A1 for the attacker lamp, "RGB" data is output to the attacker lamp 9E, "WWW" data is output to the V attacker lamp 9F, and data is output to the power lamp 9H. As the "RGB" data to be displayed, various brightness data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified at intervals of 30 msec. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table A1 to smoothly light up each of the attacker lamp 9E, V attacker lamp 9F, and electric chew lamp 9H in a rainbow color corresponding to a confirmed win.

[Accessory object action red flashing brightness data table]
FIG. 228 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the red blinking luminance data table for accessory motion. As shown in FIG. 228, in the grandchild table W2 for the frame lamp, "A00" is specified in the first 40 msec as "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and in the next 30 msec. "333" is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W2 to cause the frame lamp to blink in red.

[Yellow haze brightness data table]
FIG. 229 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the yellow haze luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 229, in the grandchild table W3, "440", "660", and "880" are sparsely specified at 180 msec intervals as "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. ing. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W3 to light the frame lamp in a hazy yellow color.

[White blinking (white flash) brightness data table]
FIG. 230 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the white blinking (white flash) brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 230, in the grandchild table W4, "000" and "AAA" are specified alternately at 30 msec intervals as "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The first 30msec is "000" (lights off), the next 30msec is "AAA" (lights in white), the next 30msec is "000" (lights off), the next 30msec is "AAA" (lights in white), the next 30 msec is "000" (light off), the next 30 msec is "AAA" (white light on), and the last 30 msec is "000" (light off). That is, the frame lamp blinks in white multiple times (white flash) by alternately repeating "off" and "on" of the frame lamp over one cycle of 210 msec (30 msec x 7). The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 to cause the frame lamp to blink in white.

[Common red cut-in luminance data table]
FIG. 231 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the common red cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 231, in the parent table of the common red cut-in brightness data table, 3970 msec is the time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9, and the child referenced when lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9. Information specifying the table (WS5, YS5, LS5, AS5) is stored.

FIG. 232 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the common red cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 232, in the child table of the common red cut-in luminance data table, for each game effect lamp 9, the grandchild table (W5 (W5a to W5e), Y5 (Y5a to Y5e)) is referenced in a predetermined time period. , L5 (L5a to L5e), A5 (A5a to A5e)) are specified.

233 to 235 are diagrams for explaining examples of grandchild tables for frame lamps in the common red cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIGS. 233 to 235, in the grandchild tables W5a, W5b, and W5c, as "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, various changes are made to only R data at 30 msec intervals. Data indicating brightness is specified. In the grandchild table W5d, as "RGB" data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, data indicating various luminances is specified for only R data at 20 msec intervals. In the grandchild table W5e, as "RGB" data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, data indicating various luminances is specified for only R data alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W5 (W5a to W5e) to light the frame lamp in red.

FIG. 236 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for accessory lamps in the common red cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 236, in the accessory lamp grandchild tables Y5a, Y5b, and Y5c, data indicating various brightnesses are specified at 30 msec intervals as "RRRR" data output to the accessory lamp 9A. There is. In the grandchild table Y5d, data indicating various luminances at 20 msec intervals is designated as "RRRR" data output to the accessory lamp 9A. In the grandchild table Y5e, data indicating various luminances alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec is specified as the "RRRR" data output to the accessory lamp 9A. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table Y5 (Y5a to Y5e) to turn on or blink the accessory lamp 9A in the color corresponding to the common red cut-in.

FIG. 237 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the panel left lamp in the common red cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 237, in the grandchild tables L5a, L5b, and L5c for the panel left lamps, data indicating various brightnesses are specified at 30 msec intervals as "WWWWW" data output to the panel left lamp 9B. There is. In the grandchild table L5d, data indicating various luminances at intervals of 20 msec is specified as the "WWWWW" data output to the panel left lamp 9B. In the grandchild table L5e, data indicating various luminances alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec is specified as the "WWWWW" data output to the panel left lamp 9B. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table L5 (L5a to L5e) to turn on or blink the board left lamp 9B in the color corresponding to the common red cut-in.

238 and 239 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the attacker lamp in the common red cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIGS. 238 and 239, in the grandchild tables A5a, A5b, and A5c for the attacker lamp, "RGB" data is output to the attacker lamp 9E, and "WWW" data is output to the V attacker lamp 9F. , and data indicating various luminances at 30 msec intervals is specified as "RGB" data output to the electric lamp 9H. In particular, as the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric lamp 9H, data indicating various brightnesses are specified for only the R data. In the grandchild table A5d, the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E, the "WWW" data output to the V attacker lamp 9F, and the "RGB" data output to the electric tube lamp 9H are stored for 20 msec. Data indicating various luminances at intervals is specified. In particular, as the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric lamp 9H, data indicating various brightnesses are specified for only the R data. In the grandchild table A5e, the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E, the "WWW" data output to the V attacker lamp 9F, and the "RGB" data output to the electric tube lamp 9H are stored for 30 msec. Data indicating various luminances are specified alternately at intervals of 40 msec and 40 msec. In particular, as the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric lamp 9H, data indicating various brightnesses are specified for only the R data. The production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table A5 (A5a to A5e) to light up each of the attacker lamp 9E, V attacker lamp 9F, and electric light lamp 9H in a color corresponding to the common red cut-in. Or blink.

[Common green cut-in luminance data table]
FIG. 240 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the common green cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 240, in the parent table of the common green cut-in brightness data table, 3970 msec is the time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9, and the child table that is referred to when lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9. Information specifying the table (WS6, YS6, LS6, AS6) is stored.

FIG. 241 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the common green cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 241, in the child table of the common green cut-in brightness data table, for each game effect lamp 9, the grandchild table (W6 (W6a to W6e), Y6 (Y6a to Y6e)) is referenced in a predetermined time period. , L6 (L6a to L6e), A6 (A6a to A6e)) are specified.

FIGS. 242 to 244 are diagrams for explaining examples of grandchild tables for frame lamps in the common green cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIGS. 242 to 244, in the grandchild tables W6a, W6b, and W6c, as "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, various changes are made to only the G data at 30 msec intervals. Data indicating brightness is specified. In the grandchild table W6d, as the "RGB" data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, data indicating various luminances is specified for only the G data at 20 msec intervals. In the grandchild table W6e, as "RGB" data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, data indicating various luminances is specified for only G data alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W6 (W6a to W6e) to light the frame lamp in green.

FIG. 245 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for accessory lamps in the common green cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 245, in the accessory lamp grandchild tables Y6a, Y6b, and Y6c, data indicating various brightnesses are specified at 30 msec intervals as "RRRR" data output to the accessory lamp 9A. There is. In the grandchild table Y6d, data indicating various luminances at 20 msec intervals is specified as "RRRR" data output to the accessory lamp 9A. In the grandchild table Y6e, data indicating various brightnesses alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec is specified as the "RRRR" data output to the accessory lamp 9A. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table Y6 (Y6a to Y6e) to turn on or blink the accessory lamp 9A in a color corresponding to the common green cut-in.

FIG. 246 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the panel left lamp in the common green cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 246, in the grandchild tables L6a, L6b, and L6c for the panel left lamps, data indicating various luminances is specified at 30 msec intervals as the "WWWWW" data output to the panel left lamp 9B. There is. In the grandchild table L6d, data indicating various luminances at 20 msec intervals is specified as the "WWWWW" data output to the panel left lamp 9B. In the grandchild table L6e, data indicating various luminances alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec is specified as the "WWWWW" data output to the panel left lamp 9B. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table L6 (L6a to L6e) to turn on or blink the board left lamp 9B in a color corresponding to the common 6 cut-ins.

247 and 248 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the attacker lamp in the common green cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIGS. 247 and 248, in the grandchild tables A6a, A6b, and A6c for the attacker lamp, "RGB" data is output to the attacker lamp 9E, and "WWW" data is output to the V attacker lamp 9F. , and data indicating various luminances at 30 msec intervals is specified as "RGB" data output to the electric lamp 9H. In particular, as the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric lamp 9H, data indicating various brightnesses are specified for only the G data. In the grandchild table A6d, the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E, the "WWW" data output to the V attacker lamp 9F, and the "RGB" data output to the electric tube lamp 9H are stored for 20 msec. Data indicating various luminances at intervals is specified. In particular, as the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric lamp 9H, data indicating various brightnesses are specified for only the G data. In the grandchild table A6e, the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E, the "WWW" data output to the V attacker lamp 9F, and the "RGB" data output to the electric tube lamp 9H are stored for 30 msec. Data indicating various luminances are specified alternately at intervals of 40 msec and 40 msec. In particular, as the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric lamp 9H, data indicating various brightnesses are specified for only the G data. The production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table A6 (A6a to A6e) to light up each of the attacker lamp 9E, V attacker lamp 9F, and electric light lamp 9H in a color corresponding to the common green cut-in. Or blink.

[Agitation brightness data table when no operation promotion is performed]
FIG. 249 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the unprompted operation brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 249, in the grandchild table W7, "FDC" and "300" are specified alternately at 30 msec intervals as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W7 to cause the frame lamp to blink in white.

In the grandchild table W8, "FDC" is specified at 100000 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W8 to light the frame lamp in white.

[Agitation brightness data table with operation promotion]
FIG. 250 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the trigger display brightness data table and the operation promotion brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 250, in the grandchild table W9, "D00" is specified at 30 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W9 to light the frame lamp in red.

In the grandchild table W10, "500" or "D00" is specified at 30 msec intervals as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp.The production control CPU 120 outputs the lamp data based on the grandchild table W10. By controlling it, the frame lamp flashes in red.

[Shutter brightness data table]
FIG. 251 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the shutter brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 251, in the grandchild table W11, as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, the luminance data is gradually lowered from "A00" to "600" at 30 msec intervals. specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W11, thereby lighting the frame lamp in red while decreasing the brightness in stages.

In the grandchild table W12, "600" is specified at 30 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W12 to light the frame lamp in red.

[Loss luminance data table]
FIGS. 252 and 253 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the lost brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 252, in the grandchild table W13, "888" is specified in the first 10 msec, and "444" is specified in the next 190 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. ing. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W13 to light the frame lamp in white.

In the grandchild table W14, "444" or "111" is specified at 250 msec intervals as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W14, thereby lighting the frame lamp in a white color darker than td1.

As shown in FIG. 253, in the grandchild table W15, "444" is specified in the first 10 msec, and "111" is specified in the next 550 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. , "111" is specified in the last 600000 msec (10 minutes). The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W15 to turn off the frame lamp.

[Brightness data table per relief]
FIGS. 254 and 255 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the per-relief brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 254, in the grandchild table W16, "D00" is specified for each lamp in the first 30 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and in the next 30 msec, each "B00" is specified for the lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W17 to light the frame lamp in red.

As shown in FIG. 255, in the grandchild table W17, as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, white system data such as "AAA" and "DDD" is output to each lamp at 30 msec intervals. is specified. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W18 to light the frame lamp in white.

[Confirmed hit brightness data table]
FIG. 256 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the hit confirmation brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 256, in the grandchild table W18, various brightness data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified in the first 40 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. "333" is specified in the next 30 msec, and such RGB data is repeatedly specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W18 to cause the frame lamp to blink in seven colors.

[Re-lottery performance brightness data table]
FIGS. 257 and 258 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the re-lottery performance brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 257, in the grandchild table W19, "F00" and "700" are alternately specified at 60 msec intervals as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W19 to cause the frame lamp to flash in red.

As shown in FIG. 258, in the grandchild table W20, "F00" and "700" are alternately specified at 30 msec intervals as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 causes the frame lamp to blink in red. In this way, the grandchild table W20 is designed to blink the frame lamp in red while switching the luminance data faster than the grandchild table W19.

[Background brightness data table]
FIG. 259 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the background luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 259, the child tables in the background brightness data table include grandchild tables (W21 (W21a, W21b), Y21 (Y21a, Y21b), L21( L21a, L21b) and A21 (A21a, A21b)) are specified.

FIG. 260 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the background luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 260, in the grandchild table W21a, "550" or "880" is specified as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W21a to light the frame lamp in yellow (background yellow lighting pattern).

In the grandchild table W21b, "550", "770", or "880" is specified as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W21b to light the frame lamp in yellow (background yellow lighting pattern).

<Regarding brightness data reference>
The brightness data table has been explained above, but below, the brightness data table used for lamp control after the winning epilogue part will be explained while being organized by performance content.

FIGS. 268 to 271 are diagrams for explaining reference to the luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 268, during times ts1 to ts3 of the winning epilogue part, the child table for the accessory movement in the winning epilogue part is used, and ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table 18. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W18, so that after the validity branch shown in FIG. 132 (r54), the accessory shown in FIGS. 133 (s1) to (s3) The frame lamp flashes in seven colors to correspond to the effect of falling objects.

During times ts3-2 to ts3-8 of the winning epilogue part, the child table for the winning epilogue in the winning epilogue part is used, and ramp control based on the grandchild table 4 is performed. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, so that the ornaments as shown in FIG. 173 (s3-2) to FIG. 174 (s3-8) rise and the explosion Corresponding to the appearance of a display that looks like it has been caught, the frame lamp is made to flash in white corresponding to the rise of the accessory.

During the time period ts4 to ts7 of the winning epilogue part, the child table for the winning epilogue in the winning epilogue part is used, and ramp control based on the grandchild table 1 is performed. As a result, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 to correspond to productions such as those shown in FIGS. The frame lamp lights up smoothly in a rainbow color corresponding to a confirmed hit.

As shown in FIG. 269, during times tA1 to tA4 of the winning epilogue part, the child table for displaying symbols in the winning epilogue part is used, and ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table 4. As a result, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, so as to correspond to productions that produce winning symbols as shown in FIGS. 141 (A1) to 142 (A4), and The lamp blinks in a bright white color corresponding to the pattern display.

At time tA5 of the winning epilogue part, the child table for displaying symbols in the winning epilogue part is used, and ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table W1. As a result, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1, so as to correspond to the production in which the winning symbol is displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 141 (A5), and the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors.

As shown in FIG. 270, during times tA6 to tA8 of the re-lottery part, the child table before the movement of symbols in the re-lottery part is used, and lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table to turn off the light. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the specified grandchild table, so that after the re-lottery effect is started, as shown in FIGS. 142 (A6) to 143 (A8), Before the design begins to move due to the effect, the frame lamp is temporarily turned off.

At times tA9 and tA10 of the re-lottery part, the child table after the start of movement of symbols in the re-lottery part is used, and ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table W19. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W19, thereby supporting effects such as the reduction of the "2" symbol as shown in FIG. 143 (A9) and FIG. 144 (A10). to make the frame lamp blink in red.

During the time period tA11 to tA46 of the re-lottery part, the child table after the start of movement of symbols in the re-lottery part is used, and ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table W20. As a result, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W20, thereby supporting productions in which the symbols change at high speed as shown in FIG. 144 (A11) to FIG. 156 (A46). to make the frame lamp flash red rapidly.

As shown in FIG. 271, during times tC1 to tC4 of the re-lottery part, the child table for displaying symbols in the re-lottery part is used, and lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table 4. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, so that after the operation promotion is executed in the re-lottery part, as shown in FIGS. 161 (C1) to 162 (C4), A frame lamp is made to flash in white in response to a pattern presentation performance in which the pattern "2" is displayed in an enlarged manner.

During times tC5 to tC9 of the re-lottery part, the child table for displaying symbols in the re-lottery part is used, and lamp control based on the grandchild table 1 is performed. As a result, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1, thereby finalizing the symbol after the "2" symbol as shown in FIGS. 162 (C5) to 163 (C9) is displayed in a swaying manner. In response to this kind of effect, the frame lamps are lit smoothly in rainbow colors.

At time tE1 of the fanfare part, a child table for the fanfare part is used, and a grandchild table for turning off the frame lamp is designated. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the specified grandchild table, so that the effect is temporarily displayed before the fanfare display is performed, as shown in FIG. 160 (D1) or FIG. 164 (E1). Turn off the frame lamp.

At time tE2 of the fanfare part, a child table for the fanfare part is used, and a grandchild table for lighting the frame lamp in a fanfare manner is specified. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the specified grandchild table to adjust the frame lamp in response to the fanfare performance, as shown in FIG. 160 (D2) or FIG. 164 (E2). Lights up in a fanfare lighting mode.

In this way, a predetermined child table is set at each timing of each performance part, and the performance control CPU 120 refers to the child table set at each timing of each performance part, and uses the child table to Luminance data (for example, RGB data) included in a specified grandchild table (luminance data table) is used to perform lamp control corresponding to the effect.

In addition, in FIGS. 268 to 271, the child table from the winning epilogue to the fanfare part via the re-drawing part when the symbol is not promoted is illustrated, but if the symbol is changed from the winning epilogue through other routes, for example, As for the child tables leading to the fanfare part via the re-lottery part in the case of promotion, predetermined child tables are set at each timing of each production part, as shown in FIGS. 192 to 260. There is.

<Explanation of the characteristic parts of the lamp control of the pachinko gaming machine 1>
Next, the characteristic parts and modifications of the lamp control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above will be explained in detail.

(Start 9)
As shown in FIG. 193, in the child table WD1 of the start part, the frame lamp is turned off when the shutter is fully open, so the lighting state of the frame lamp makes it easy for the player to know when the shutter is fully open. I can tell you. In addition, the inciting part of SP first half reach A and the inciting part of SP first half reach B, which are executed after the start part, are started with the shutter fully open and the frame lamp turned off, and correspond to each SP first half reach. The frame lamp starts lighting or blinking based on the brightness data table. In this way, after the shutter is fully open and the frame lamp is turned off, the frame lamp starts lighting up in accordance with the progress of the SP first half reach, so the player cannot know that the SP first half reach has started. can be conveyed in an easy-to-understand manner.

(Start 11, Start 14)
As shown in FIG. 193, in the child table WD1 of the start part, during the time ta1 to ta12 before the shutter is fully closed, the frame lamp lights up in yellow, blinks red, blinks white, and lights red, etc. The brightness data changes so that it lights up/blinks while changing the color and brightness, but from time ta13 to ta18 after the shutter is completely closed, the frame lamp remains red while maintaining its brightness in a lowered state. Brightness data is maintained to ensure lighting. As a result, before the shutter closes, the lighting mode of the frame lamp enhances the performance in the start part, and when the shutter is closed, by maintaining the lighting mode of the frame lamp, the player can enjoy the content of the performance when the shutter opens. As a result, the subsequent performance in the inciting part can be shown better to the player.

(Inciting 7, Inciting 9)
Figure 64 (b8), (b9), Figure 74 (e7), Figure 94 (i32), Figure 95 (i34), Figure 104 (n10), Figure 123 (r25), (r27), Figure 124 (r29), As shown in Figures 125 (r31), (r33), and 126 (r35), even if a character has dialogue but no subtitles, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. /The brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified to blink. As a result, even in scenes where subtitles are not displayed, it is possible to suitably express that the character is uttering lines by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, and it is possible to suitably show the production of the inciting part to the player. can.

(Inciting 10)
When a character appears, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in the color that corresponds to that character, and when the character speaks lines, the frame lamp lights up in the color that corresponds to that character. Luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp blinks. For example, in response to an effect where Yumu-chan, who is located on the left side of the screen, and Bakuchu, who is located on the right side of the screen, confront each other as shown in Figure 63 (b4), a green frame corresponding to Yumu-chan is created. Light up the left lamp, and light the right lamp in the frame in red, which corresponds to Bakuchu. At time tb5, the performance control CPU 120 creates a green frame corresponding to Yume-chan in response to the performance in which Yume-chan, who is located on the left side of the screen, utters lines as shown in FIG. 63 (b5). Make the left lamp blink. At time tb6, the production control CPU 120 displays a frame right lamp in red corresponding to Bakuchu in response to a production in which Bakuchu located on the right side of the screen utters lines as shown in FIG. 63 (b6). flash. As a result, in a scene where multiple characters uttering lines are displayed, which character is uttering lines can be appropriately expressed by lighting/blinking of the frame lamp, and the production in the inciting part can be suitably expressed in the game. can be shown to others.

(Inciting 17)
The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W3 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table used in the inciting part, thereby lighting up the frame lamp in yellow at a plurality of mutually different timings. By changing the time for referring to the grandchild table W3 using the lamp control between a plurality of mutually different timings, it is possible to change the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow. As a result, one child table WD9 can be used for lamp control by changing its reference time while using the common grandchild table W3, without having to prepare separate grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings. While reducing data capacity, it is possible to vary the amount of time the frame lamp lights up in yellow, which corresponds to the background of SP Reach. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

(Inciting 18)
The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table used in the inciting part, thereby causing the frame lamp to blink in white at a plurality of mutually different timings. By controlling the lamp to vary the time at which the grandchild table W4 is referenced between a plurality of mutually different timings, the number of times the frame lamp is blinked in white can be set to two or three times. As a result, by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of a plurality of different timings, the data capacity used for lamp control can be reduced. The number of white flashes can be varied. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

(Inciting 19)
In each of the child table WD9 used in the promotion part of the SP second half reach A, the child table WD12 used in the promotion part of the SP second half reach B, and the child table WD15 used in the promotion part of the SP final reach, there are multiple tables that are different from each other. In order to change the reference time while using the common grandchild table W3 without preparing a separate grandchild table for each timing, SP reach is possible while reducing the data capacity used for ramp control in multiple reach effects. You can change the amount of time the frame lamp lights up in yellow, which corresponds to the background. Similarly, for the child table WD2 used in the promotion part of SP first half reach A and the child table WD5 used in the promotion part of SP first half reach B, different grandchild tables should be prepared at each of a plurality of mutually different timings. By changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W3, the amount of data used for lamp control can be reduced, and the time to light the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the background of SP reach can be changed. Good too.

(Instigation 20)
Child table WD2 used in the inciting part of SP first half reach A, child table WD5 used in the inciting part of SP first half reach B, child table WD9 used in the inciting part of SP second half reach A, child table WD9 used in the inciting part of SP second half reach B. In both the child table WD12 used and the child table WD15 used in the inciting part of the SP final reach, a common grandchild table W4 is used without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings. By changing the reference time, the number of white flashes can be varied while reducing the amount of data used for lamp control. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

(Inciting cut-in 1)
The brightness data of the lamp control in the cut-in effect and the button display for the cut-in effect (RGB data in grandchild tables W4, W5, W6) uses the frame lamp at the same location as the lamp control in the SP final reach inciting part. designed to be used. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary lighting/blinking of lamps from being mixed in and spoil the aesthetic appearance, and it is possible to provide a suitable performance in the inciting part.

(True or false 13)
In the SP reach performance where no operation promotion is performed to encourage the player to perform an operation in the win/fail branch, the sound is muted and the frame lamp is kept lit in white to give the player the impression that the performance has stopped. It is possible to clearly convey to the player the win/fail branch (timing of decision). On the other hand, in the SP reach performance where operation promotion is performed to encourage the player to perform an operation in a win/fail situation, a sound corresponding to the operation promotion and a sound (BGM) corresponding to the reach are output, and furthermore, the operation promotion By switching and using the grandchild table multiple times in order to control the frame lamp in a mode corresponding to the above, it is possible to suitably produce the timing for deciding whether or not to make a decision based on the lighting mode of the frame lamp. In this way, the timing of deciding whether to decide whether to decide whether to decide whether to decide whether or not to win can be suitably produced by different sound control and lamp control depending on whether operation promotion is not performed or when operation is promoted in the case of a judgment or failure.

(True or false 15)
In the child table WD9 in the SP second half reach A, there is no operation promotion, and after the frame lamp flashes in white based on the grandchild table W7, the frame lamp lights up in white based on the grandchild table W8. Specifically, the final brightness data (RGB data) of grandchild table W7, "FDC" (white lighting), is used for the right/fail decision in the incitement part of reach A in the second half of the SP where no operation promotion is performed. In addition, since the brightness data (RGB data) of the grandchild table W8 is designed, it is possible to clearly communicate the win/fail branch (timing of decision) to the player without increasing the data capacity used for lamp control too much. can.

(True or false 17)
In the child table WD15 at the SP final reach, as shown in FIG. 131 (r49) to FIG. 132 (r54), the frame lamp is displayed while the sound corresponding to operation promotion and the sound (BGM) corresponding to reach are output. will be switched one after another, such as flashing white, lighting red, and flashing red, thereby making it possible to enhance the effect of encouraging operations for the player at the win/fail branch (decisive timing).

(True or false 20)
In child table WD4 of SP first half reach A, child table WD7 of SP first half reach B, child table WD11 of SP second half reach A, and child table WD14 of SP second half reach B, similarly to child table WD17 of SP final reach, Based on the grandchild table W14, the frame lamp is lit in the lighting mode when the game loses. However, the performance control CPU 120 controls the frame lamp for 5800 msec based on the grandchild table W14 in the SP first half reach A, B and the SP second half reach A, B, whereas in the SP final reach, it controls the frame lamp for 3900 msec. During this time, the frame lamp is controlled based on the grandchild table W14. In this way, while the grandchild table used for ramp control in the event of a loss is common among a plurality of different reaches, the time for performing ramp control with reference to the grandchild table can be made different. As a result, in the child table used in each of the different reaches, the reference time can be changed while using the common grandchild table W4 without having to prepare a grandchild table for use in case of a loss in each of the different reaches. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the amount of data used for lamp control and to vary the time during which the frame lamp is lit depending on the lighting mode corresponding to the failure. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of a loss in a suitable manner for each of the plurality of reaches.

(True or false 21)
From the lighting mode of the frame lamp based on the last specified grandchild table W26 in each of the child tables WD4, WD7, WD11, WD14, and WD17 used in the case of a loss, the first specified grandchild of the child table WD18 used in the case of rescue is determined. By switching to the lighting mode of the frame lamp based on table W16, the frame lamp lights up in the same color (yellow) and even brighter. As a result, at the time of a rescue win, the frame lamp is lit in the same color (yellow) as the state after the loss notification and brighter than the state after the loss notification, so depending on the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, the loss notification and The subsequent relief winning notification can be shown more easily to the player.

(Epilogue 9)
When the accessory rises, the production control CPU 120 gradually moves the accessory lamp 9A based on the child table corresponding to the ascending movement of the accessory in the accessory lamp 9A, and the grandchild table specified by the child table. The brightness of the accessory lamp 9A is gradually lowered so as to turn it off. As a result, the lighting mode of the accessory lamp 9A does not make the player aware that the accessory is rising, while the lighting mode of the frame lamp allows the screen to indicate that the SP has reached reach A in the second half. This can draw the attention of players.

(Epilogue 26)
In the winning epilogue part, by making the grandchild table used when notifying the win and the grandchild table used when displaying the winning symbol common, there is no need to prepare separate grandchild tables for each of the multiple timings that are different from each other, and the rainbow color While reducing the amount of data used to control the lamps to turn them on, it is possible to enhance each performance by creating a sense of unity. As a result, the performance in the winning epilogue part can be shown better to the player by using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

(Epilogue 27)
In the child tables WD21 and WD22 of the re-lottery part, grandchild table W1 is used in common with the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 of the winning epilogue part as a lamp control when the symbol is finally determined after the re-lottery. is used. As a result, there is no need to prepare separate grandchild tables for lighting in rainbow colors for the winning epilogue part and the re-drawing part, reducing the amount of data used for lamp control, and creating a sense of unity even when the parts (timings) are different. A certain performance can be shown to the player. As a result, the performance in the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part can be shown better to the player while reducing the data capacity.

(Re-lottery performance 2)
As shown in FIG. 142 (tA6), in the winning epilogue part, when the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors and the winning symbol is temporarily stopped, before executing the re-lottery effect, the frame lamp is temporarily turned off. After the light goes out, the frame lamp is lit in a lighting manner corresponding to the re-lottery performance, so that the start of the re-lottery performance can be clearly communicated to the player by the lighting manner of the frame lamp.

(Re-lottery effect 7, re-lottery effect 14, re-lottery effect 16)
In the winning epilogue part, when the winning symbols are temporarily stopped, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors, and then the re-lottery effect is executed with the lights turned off, and when the symbols are oscillating, the re-lottery effect is activated. Based on the brightness data corresponding to (for example, RGB data in the grandchild table W25), the frame lamp blinks in red in a lighting manner different from the smooth rainbow color. This prevents the player from being misled into thinking that the winning symbol that was temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part has been determined, depending on the lighting mode of the frame lamp. Further, the lighting of the rainbow color when the symbol "3" or "2" is displayed in a swaying manner continues during the subsequent period when the symbol is determined. In this way, during the short pattern determination period, the lamp control corresponding to the fanfare part is performed without preparing a special brightness data table for lamp control, so the data There is no need to increase capacity excessively.

(Re-lottery performance 19)
In the child table WD21 of the re-lottery part, the grandchild table W1 is used in common with the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 of the winning epilogue part as lamp control when the symbol is finally determined after the re-lottery. It will be done. As a result, there is no need to prepare separate grandchild tables for lighting in rainbow colors for the winning epilogue part and the re-drawing part, reducing the amount of data used for lamp control, and creating a sense of unity even when the parts (timings) are different. A certain performance can be shown to the player. As a result, the performance in the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part can be shown better to the player while reducing the data capacity.

(Re-lottery performance 20)
In the child table WD20 of the re-lottery part, the frame lamp lights up in the same rainbow color as the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 of the winning epilogue part as a lamp control when the symbol is finally determined after the re-lottery part. However, when the "2" symbol is promoted to the "3" symbol due to the re-drawing, the rainbow color lights up from time tB7 to tB9, and the "2" symbol temporarily stops during the winning epilogue part. The lighting pattern is more intense than the smooth rainbow-colored lighting in the case. As a result, the player can more effectively congratulate the player on the promotion of winning symbols in the re-lottery, depending on the lighting manner of the frame lamp.

<Detailed explanation regarding lamp control>
Next, with regard to the above-mentioned lamp control, characteristic parts that should be particularly mentioned will be explained in detail with reference to FIGS. 261 to 263.

[Comparison of lamp control when winning and losing]
FIGS. 261 to 263 are diagrams for explaining a comparison of lamps when winning and when losing.

First, with reference to FIG. 261, lamp control in the event of a loss will be described. As shown in FIG. 261, at the end of the inciting part in each of the SP first half reaches A and B and the SP second half reaches A and B, ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table W8. In the grandchild table W8, "FDC" is specified at 100000 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W8 to light the frame lamp in white in accordance with the performance of the win/fail branch (decisive timing). Further, at the end of the inciting part in the SP final reach, ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table W10. In the grandchild table W10, "500" or "D00" is specified as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp.The production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W10. As a result, the frame lamp flashes in red in response to the effect of winning or failing (deciding timing).

After that, in the loss epilogue part via the instigation part in each of the SP first half reach A, B, SP second half reach A, B, and SP final reach, ramp control is first performed based on the grandchild table W13. . In the grandchild table W13, "888" is specified in the first 10 msec, and "444" is specified in the next 190 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W13 to light the frame lamp in white in response to a performance in which an ally character loses in a ready-to-reach performance after a win/fail decision.

After lamp control has been performed based on the grandchild table W13, lamp control is now performed based on the grandchild table W14. In the grandchild table W14, "444" or "111" is specified at 250 msec intervals as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W14 to light the frame lamp in a darker white color than the white lighting based on the grandchild table W13 in response to the effect that the ally character is disappointed in. let

After lamp control has been performed based on the grandchild table W14, lamp control is now performed based on the grandchild table W15. In the grandchild table W15, as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, "444" is specified for the first 10 msec, "111" is specified for the next 550 msec, and the last 600000 msec (10 minutes ), "111" is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W15 to turn off the frame lamp in response to a performance in which a loss is notified and the screen darkens.

After the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W15, as explained with reference to FIG. Lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W26 which was also used in the previous example. In the grandchild table W26, data corresponding to a yellow pattern that normally corresponds to the background is designated as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W26 to light the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the normal background (background yellow lighting pattern), similarly to the start part before the reach.

Next, with reference to FIG. 262, the ramp control at the time of winning will be described in the case where the game moves to the winning epilogue part via the promotion part in each of SP first half reaches A and B and SP second half reaches A and B.

As shown in FIG. 262, at the end of the inciting part in each of the SP first half reaches A and B and the SP second half reaches A and B, ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table W8. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W8, thereby lighting the frame lamp in white in accordance with the performance of the win/fail branch (decisive timing).

After that, in the winning epilogue part via the promotion part in each of the SP first half reaches A and B and the SP second half reaches A and B, ramp control is first performed based on the grandchild table W19. In the grandchild table W19, "FFF" is specified for the first 40 msec, and "333" is specified for the next 30 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W19 to cause the frame lamp to blink in white in response to a performance in which the ally character wins.

After lamp control has been performed based on the grandchild table W19, lamp control is now performed based on the grandchild table W1. In the grandchild table W1, various brightness data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified at 30 msec intervals as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 to smoothly light the frame lamp in a rainbow color corresponding to a confirmed win.

After lamp control has been performed based on grandchild table W1, lamp control is now performed based on grandchild table W21. In the grandchild table W21, "AAA" is specified for each lamp in turn at 20 msec intervals as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and finally for each lamp at 600000 msec (10 minutes). "000" is specified for this. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W21, thereby lighting up the frame lamp in a bright white color corresponding to the appearance of a winning symbol in response to a performance such as the appearance of a winning symbol.

After lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W21, lamp control is performed again based on the grandchild table W1. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 to smoothly light the frame lamp in rainbow colors in response to a performance in which the winning symbol is finally displayed in the center of the screen.

Next, with reference to FIG. 263, the ramp control at the time of winning will be described in the case of transitioning to the winning epilogue part via the promotion part in the SP final reach.

As shown in FIG. 263, at the end of the inciting part in the SP final reach, ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table W10. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W10, thereby causing the frame lamp to blink in red in response to the performance of the win/fail branch (decisive timing).

After that, in the winning epilogue part via the promotion part in the SP final reach, ramp control is first performed based on the grandchild table W20. In the grandchild table W20, various brightness data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified in the first 40 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and in the next 30 msec, " 333'' is specified, and such RGB data is repeatedly specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W20 to cause the frame lamp to flash in seven colors in response to a performance such as a falling accessory.

After lamp control has been performed based on the grandchild table W20, lamp control is now performed based on the grandchild table W1. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 to smoothly light the frame lamp in a rainbow color corresponding to a confirmed win.

After lamp control has been performed based on grandchild table W1, lamp control is now performed based on grandchild table W21. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W21, thereby lighting up the frame lamp in a bright white color corresponding to the appearance of a winning symbol in response to a performance such as the appearance of a winning symbol.

After lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W21, lamp control is performed again based on the grandchild table W1. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 to smoothly light the frame lamp in rainbow colors in response to a performance in which the winning symbol is finally displayed in the center of the screen.

Characteristic parts of the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 261 to 263 will be described below.

(True or false 19)
As shown in FIG. 261, when transitioning to the losing epilogue part via the inciting parts in each of SP first half reach A, B and SP second half reach A, B, the final brightness data (RGB data) in the inciting part is In contrast to "FDC", the first luminance data (RGB data) in the lose epilogue part is "888" or "444". As a result, in the event of a loss in each of SP first half reaches A and B and SP second half reaches A and B, it is possible to use the white lighting at the win/fail branch to maintain the same color while lighting the frame lamp darker in white. Therefore, it is possible to suitably notify the player of the loss. In addition, when moving to the losing epilogue part via the inciting part in the SP final reach, the final brightness data (RGB data) in the inciting part includes "D00", but the first brightness in the losing epilogue part The data (RGB data) is "888" or "444". Thereby, when there is a loss in the SP final reach, the frame lamp can be lit in white, darker than the flashing red in the win/fail branch, so that the player can be suitably informed of the loss.

(Accessory action 1)
As shown in FIGS. 262 and 263, in the winning epilogue part, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors based on the grandchild table W1, and the RGB data switches at intervals of 30 msec. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 261, in the case of a loss, the frame lamp lights up in a darker white color based on the grandchild table W14, and the RGB data is switched at an interval of 250 msec, which is longer than in the case of a win. As a result, when a win occurs, the lighting color of the frame lamp changes at a shorter interval than when a loss occurs, so that it is possible to clearly inform the player that the player has won by the lighting manner of the frame lamp. Furthermore, while the lighting of the frame lamp is more emphasized in the event of a win than in the case of a loss, the lighting of the frame lamp can be made more subdued in the event of a loss. This can be conveyed to players in an easy-to-understand manner.

(Accessory action 2)
As shown in FIG. 263, in the epilogue part of the final reach of the SP, in the production where the objects fall, the frame lamp is lamp controlled based on the grandchild table W20, and the chromatic color of the rainbow and the achromatic color ("333'' RGB data) and the frame lamp lights up alternately. As a result, by occasionally interposing achromatic colors between the chromatic colors of the rainbow, it is possible to perform an effect that congratulates the player by emphasizing that he has won the jackpot. After that, in a performance in which an ally character wins, the frame lamp is controlled based on the grandchild table W21, and the frame lamp lights up in a smooth rainbow color without intervening achromatic colors, indicating that a jackpot has been won. It is possible to perform a performance that congratulates the player in a calm manner. As a result, the performance in the epilogue part of the SP final reach can be suitably shown to the player.

(About the shaking pattern of the pattern)
Here, the manner in which the symbols swing will be explained in detail using FIG. 264. FIG. 264 is a diagram for explaining how the symbols swing. During the symbol fluctuation period in the above-mentioned inciting part and re-lottery part, the decorative symbols move in the first to third modes shown in FIG. 264(a) or in the first to third modes shown in FIG. 264(b). It moves like 3 modes. Specifically, the first mode shown in FIG. 264(a) is a mode in which the decorative pattern is located at the center of the screen. The second mode shown in FIG. 264(a) is a mode in which the decorative pattern is located above the first mode. The third mode shown in FIG. 264(a) is a mode in which the decorative pattern is located lower than the first mode.

Moreover, the first mode shown in FIG. 264(b) is a mode in which the decorative pattern is located at the center of the screen when viewed from the front. The second mode shown in FIG. 264(b) is a mode in which the decorative pattern is rotated clockwise about the center of the vertical axis so that the decorative pattern is oriented more to the left than in the first mode. The third mode shown in FIG. 264(b) is a mode in which the decorative pattern is rotated counterclockwise about the center of the decorative pattern as a vertical axis, so that the decorative pattern is in a position facing rightward more than in the first mode.

(Variation example of re-lottery performance)
FIG. 265 is a diagram for explaining a modification of the re-lottery effect. FIG. 265(A) is a detailed explanatory diagram of the re-lottery effect using 7 symbols. Moreover, FIG. 265(B) is a timing chart of each re-lottery performance. As shown in FIG. 265(A), after the symbols are enlarged as shown in (D1) and (D2), the symbols are reduced as shown in (D3) and (D4). Thereafter, as shown in (D5), the pattern becomes normal size. Then, as shown in (D6), the background is switched to the background for the re-lottery effect, and the re-lottery effect is started. Thereafter, as shown in (D7), there is a shaking period in which the symbols shake up and down. Thereafter, the "7" symbol is displayed in a reduced size from (D8) to (D9).

Thereafter, as shown in (D10), a button image and a time gauge are faintly displayed below the "7" symbol. Thereafter, as shown in (D11), the button image and time gauge are clearly displayed with the "7" symbol displayed. Then, as shown in (F12), the time gauge decreases as time passes. The time gauge is a display indicating the valid period of button operation. When the player operates the push button 31B from the state (D12), as shown in (D13) to (D20), the number "7" changes rapidly, and the light display and the clear display are repeated. Similar high-speed fluctuations are repeated after (D20).

As shown in the timing chart of each re-lottery effect as shown in FIG. 265(B), the symbol feeding period when the re-lottery effect in which the symbols change rapidly by button operation is executed is the same for all re-lottery effects. be. Here, the re-lottery effects include a first re-lottery effect in which even-numbered symbols become odd-numbered symbols, a second re-lottery effect that does not change from even-numbered symbols to even-numbered symbols, and a third re-lottery effect that does not change from 7 symbols to 7 symbols. There is a performance. For example, in the first re-lottery performance, if the button is operated immediately after the timing when the button can be operated and the symbol feeding performance is started, there is a swinging period (t1) of the decorative symbol after the symbol feeding period ends, after which the symbol is determined. do.

In addition, in the second re-lottery performance, if the button is operated after t2 from the timing when the button can be operated and the symbol feeding performance is started, there is a swinging period (t1-t2) of the decorative symbols after the end of the symbol feeding period, After that, the design is finalized. In addition, in the third re-lottery performance, if the button is operated after t1 from the timing when the button can be operated and the symbol feeding performance is started, there is no swinging period of the decorative symbol after the symbol feeding period ends, and the symbol is determined as it is. . In this way, no matter what timing the button is operated, the symbol feeding period is constant, and the time from the subsequent symbol shaking period to the symbol confirmation absorbs the time even when the button is pressed. . Such a relationship holds true even when the button operation is performed in any of the first re-lottery performances to the third re-lottery performances.

[About re-lottery effects 26-28]
The characteristic parts of the re-lottery part will be explained by assigning numbers.

(Variation example of re-lottery performance)
FIG. 266 is a diagram for explaining a modification of the re-lottery effect. As shown in (K1) to (K3) in FIG. 266, no matter at which timing the button is operated in the scene of determining the validity, the decorative pattern moves in the same way after the whiteout. Specifically, if the button is operated immediately after the promotion display is displayed as shown in (K1), the role object movement and winning epilogue part will be executed, and the epilogue part as shown in (K4) will be executed. A pattern is drawn. Thereafter, after 5 seconds during the symbol shaking period, the three symbols will be in a state facing forward as shown in (K5).

In addition, if the button is operated 1 second after the promotion display is displayed in the scene of winning or rejecting as shown in (K2), the movement of the accessory and the winning epilogue part are executed, and as shown in (K4) The pattern will be displayed in the epilogue part. Thereafter, after 4 seconds during the symbol shaking period, the three symbols are in a state facing leftward from the front as shown in (K6). In addition, if the button is operated 2 seconds after the promotion display is displayed in the scene of winning or rejecting as shown in (K3), the movement of the accessory and the winning epilogue part will be executed, and as shown in (K4). The pattern will be displayed in the epilogue part. Thereafter, after 3 seconds during the symbol shaking period, the three symbols will be in a state where they are facing to the right from the front, as shown in (K7).

In this way, at the first operation timing, the symbol is in the front position after the symbol shaking period, at the second operation timing, the symbol is in the position facing left after the symbol shaking period, and at the third operation timing, After the symbol swing period, the symbol may be in a position facing to the right. However, even if the direction of the symbol changes depending on the operation timing, there is a common effect after that, as shown in (K8) to (K17), which rotates and reduces the symbol after whiteout. A lottery performance is executed. Then, after (K17), a symbol feeding effect is executed. In addition, in FIG. 266, although the description has been made using odd numbered symbols, the same effect is performed even with even numbered symbols.

(Re-lottery performance 26)
As shown in FIG. 266, when the image indicating the stick controller 31A and the time gauge are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, no matter which timing the stick controller 31A is operated, the re-lottery effect will be executed thereafter. In the time until the predetermined timing, a time period may be provided for the symbols to absorb the scale (symbol fluctuation period from (K4)). Then, when the re-lottery effect is executed at a predetermined timing, a common effect with whiteout as shown in (K8) to (K17) may be executed. According to this, no matter at which timing the stick controller 31A is operated, the re-lottery effect is executed after the symbols are displayed in a shaking manner and then a common effect involving whiteout is executed, so that the re-lottery effect is executed at the start of the re-lottery. It is possible to prevent the movement of the symbols from causing a sense of discomfort, and it is possible to present a series of effects in a suitable manner.

(Re-lottery performance 27)
From the time the whiteout screen appears until the re-lottery effect is executed, any of the multiple reaches may be made the same. According to this, the data capacity of the performance data can be reduced.

(Re-lottery performance 28)
The movement of the symbols after the white-out screen may be an extension of the movement of the symbols before the white-out screen. For example, if the movement of the design in front of the whiteout screen is a movement that swings from the front side to the back side on the spot due to an axis rotation centered on the vertical direction of the design, the movement after the whiteout screen is It may be a movement in which the image is rotated clockwise around the vertical direction of the pattern while being enlarged. According to this, by displaying a whiteout in between movements that are extensions of the same axis rotation, it is possible to prevent the movement of the design from feeling strange, and to make a series of effects appear more suitable. be able to.

(Re-lottery performance 29)
Among the plurality of SP reaches, there is one in which no prompting for operation such as button operation is notified at the branch when determining whether or not to be controlled to an advantageous state. With such an SP reach, there is no difference in scale due to operation. However, even in such an SP reach, a re-lottery effect similar to the SP reach where a scale deviation occurs may be executed. According to this, it is possible to avoid causing a sense of discomfort even when there is only one re-lottery effect due to the common effect regardless of the presence or absence of a scale shift. In addition, data capacity can be reduced by using only one re-lottery effect.

(Re-lottery performance 30)
As shown in FIG. 266, the timing is set so that the movement of the symbols after the white-out screen is an extension of the movement of the symbols before the white-out screen. For example, the movement of the symbol in front of the whiteout screen is any position in a series of movements in which the symbol moves from the right position (K3) to the front position (K5) to the left position (K6). It is designed to be. In other words, when one of the series of movements in which the symbol swings clockwise occurs, a whiteout is performed by the re-lottery effect, and then the symbol continues to enlarge and rotate clockwise. According to this, it is possible to prevent the movement of the symbols from causing a sense of discomfort due to the series of clockwise movement of the symbols from the period of symbol fluctuation to the re-lottery presentation.

[About re-lottery effects 21-25]
The characteristic parts of the re-lottery part will be explained by numbering them.

(Variation example of re-lottery performance)
FIG. 267 is a diagram for explaining a modification of the re-lottery effect. (L1) is a diagram when the operation is performed at an early timing after the movement promotion display is displayed during the symbol feeding period. (L2) is a diagram when the operation is performed at a later timing than (L1) after the operation promotion display is displayed. (L3) is a diagram when the operation is performed at a later timing than (L2) after the operation promotion display is displayed. Then, as shown in (L1) to (L3) in FIG. 267, symbols are put out in the same way no matter which timing the button is operated during the symbol feeding period in the re-lottery performance. After that, the decorative pattern moves in the same way across the whiteout, and then stops. Specifically, as shown in (L1), if the button is operated immediately after the movement promotion display is displayed, the symbols are displayed as shown in (L4) to (L5), and then the symbols are displayed. is the normal size. Thereafter, as shown in (L6), the symbols start to shake, and after a predetermined period of time, the three symbols are in a state where they face to the right rather than the front as shown in (L7).

In addition, as shown in (L2), if the button is operated at a later timing than (L1) after the movement promotion display is displayed, the symbols shown in (L4) to (L5) are executed. After that, the pattern becomes normal size. After that, as shown in (L6), the symbols start to shake, and after a shorter symbol shaking period than in (L1), the three symbols turn to the right rather than the front as shown in (L8). Become. In addition, as shown in (L3), if the button is operated at a later timing than (L2) after the movement promotion display is displayed, the symbols shown in (L4) to (L5) are executed. After that, the pattern becomes normal size. Thereafter, as shown in (L6), the symbols start to shake, and after a shorter symbol shaking period than in (L2), the three symbols are in a state facing forward as shown in (L9).

In this way, at the first operation timing, the symbol is in a position facing right after the symbol shaking period, at the second operation timing, the symbol is in a position facing left after the symbol shaking period, and at the third operation timing In this case, the symbol may be in a position facing forward after the symbol oscillation period. However, even if the direction of the symbol changes depending on the operation timing during the symbol shaking period, there is a common effect after that, as shown in (J1) to (J10), which rotates and reduces the symbol after whiteout. is executed. Thereafter, as shown in (J11) to (J17), the symbols stop after a period of shaking of the symbols. In addition, in FIG. 267, the description has been made using odd numbered symbols, but the same effect is performed even with even numbered symbols.

(Re-lottery performance 21)
In a modified example, as shown in (L1) to (L3) in FIG. 267, an action promotion display using a button image and a time gauge is displayed during symbol feeding in the re-lottery performance. When the player operates the push button 31B during the period in which the movement promotion display is displayed, the common symbol presentation effects shown in (L4) to (L6) are executed. No matter at which timing the push button 31B is operated, a common pattern display effect is performed by enlarging and reducing the pattern as shown in (L4) to (L5). Thereafter, the symbols are shaken during the symbol shake period. The shaking period of the symbol differs depending on the button operation timing. Therefore, after the symbol shaking period, for example, at the first operation timing, the symbol will be in a position facing the right side, at the second operation timing, the symbol will be in a position facing left, and at the third operation timing, the symbol will be in a position facing to the left. , the design may be in a position facing forward. However, regardless of the operation timing, a white-out effect is then interposed as a common effect from (J1) to (J18), and an effect in which the symbol swings after rotation and reduction of the symbol is performed. According to this, by performing a common effect regardless of when the push button 31B is operated, the symbols can be stopped neatly, and a series of effects can be presented suitably.

(Re-lottery performance 22)
When the push button 31B is operated at the first timing during the valid operation period, the decorative pattern is displayed in a swaying manner after notification of whether or not to be promoted is performed (example of no operation in FIG. 267 (L3)). ). When the push button 31B was operated at the second timing earlier than the first timing during the operation validity period, the display of the decorative pattern shaking was earlier than the first timing after the notification of whether or not to be promoted was executed. (The operation in FIG. 267 (L2) is an example of the second timing). When the push button 31B was operated at the third timing earlier than the second timing during the valid operation period, after the notification of whether or not to be promoted was executed, the display of the decorative pattern shaking was earlier than the second timing. (example where the operation in FIG. 267 (L1) is the first timing). In this way, even if the push button 31B is operated at any timing, the duration of the performance can be absorbed by the shaking time of the symbols. By performing a common effect after that, the symbols can be stopped neatly, and a series of effects can be displayed suitably.

(Re-lottery performance 23)
As shown in FIG. 267, after performing a whiteout as a common performance, a performance different from the previous pattern is performed in which the swaying decorative pattern is enlarged and rotated once. According to this, no matter what position the symbol is in when the symbol is shaken during shaku absorption, by performing a different style of presentation after the whiteout, the flow of the presentation until the symbol stops is changed. This can be done so that it does not make you feel uncomfortable.

(Re-lottery performance 24)
As shown in FIG. 267, during the symbol swinging period, the symbol swings to the back from (J10) to (J12), and then swings to the front from (J13) to (J14) to return to the initial position. Change. Thereafter, the symbol swings toward the front from (J15) to (J16), and then swings toward the back from (J17) to (J18), thereby changing to the initial position. Such a series of movements may be repeated multiple times. However, during the period in which the symbols are determined, the design is such that the symbols are always located at the initial position facing forward as shown in (J18). According to this, the symbols can be fixed and stopped in a manner that does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

(Re-lottery performance 25)
The game effect lamp 9 is designed to light up in rainbow colors at the whiteout timing (J1) in FIG. 267. The timing (J1) is a performance that is executed as a common performance regardless of the operation timing. By setting the point where such a common performance is executed as the starting point for changing the game effect lamp 9, the designer can easily determine the start timing. Note that the timing (J2) at which the common start display is started may be used as the start trigger instead of the timing (J1), and the start trigger may be any timing of the commonly executed performance.

<Main composition and effects>
Below, technical effects obtained by various configurations of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be individually listed.

(F2019-116)
A gaming machine (for example, gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
A movable body (for example, an accessory, a movable body 32),
Display means (for example, image display device 5),
It is possible to execute a notification performance that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled (for example, a notification performance that notifies whether or not there will be a jackpot),
The notification effect includes an introductory part (for example, an incitement part) in which the validity of whether or not the control is controlled to be in the advantageous state is announced, and a validity notification part (for example, the winning epilogue part) in which the success or failure is notified. (a win/fail notification part that notifies you of a jackpot by moving a role object), and an epilogue part (for example, a win epilogue part) that is executed after the win/fail notification and when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state. It consists of
In the introduction part, the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output, and the first character whose dialogue subtitles are displayed for the dialogue sound is an ally character (for example, the example shown in FIG. 115 (r2)),
The display means makes the performance display difficult to visually recognize by giving priority to the introduction display of the promotion display that prompts a specific action over the performance display of the introduction part at the timing of transition from the introduction part to the success/failure notification part. state, and then performs a promotion display in a state where the effect display is visible (for example, examples shown in FIGS. 131 (r49) to 132 (r54)),
In the success/failure notification part of the notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state, the movable body moves from the first position (e.g., the retracted position) to the second position on the front side of the display means. advance to a position (for example, advance position) (for example, the example shown in FIG. 133);
The display means is
Displaying an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and terminating the effect display while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position; A display corresponding to the epilogue part is performed (for example, the examples shown in FIGS. 173 and 174),
In the epilogue part, the final dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to the final dialogue sound emitted by the character, and after the display of the final dialogue subtitle is finished, the decorative pattern is enlarged using the center of the display area (for example, Examples shown in FIGS. 134 to 136),
In the epilogue part, the ratio of dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds uttered by the character is higher than the ratio of dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds uttered by the character in the introduction part (for example, the example shown in FIG. 175). .

Specifically, in each SP reach as an incitement part, the character who first speaks a line is an ally character (for example, FIG. 115 (r2)). According to this, it is possible to make the player accurately recognize the ally character at the start of SP reach. In addition, at the timing of transition from the incitement part to the success/failure notification part, the introductory image of the trigger display that prompts you to operate the trigger is displayed with priority over the display of the effect in the incitement part, so that the effect display of the incitement part becomes invisible, and then The image of operating the trigger button and the effect in the inciting part become visible (for example, FIGS. 131 (r48) to (r51)). According to this, the introduction image gives an impact, and since the introduction image changes to the image of the trigger button, the performance of the inciting part can be confirmed, thereby making it possible to excite the players. In addition, it is possible to prevent the aesthetic appearance of the display from being spoiled during the flow of the performance, which becomes the background display for the epilogue part until the evacuation of the accessory is completed. In addition, since the symbols are enlarged and displayed after the display of the final dialogue subtitles has finished in the winning epilogue part, it is possible to prevent the subtitle display from overlapping the symbols and to prevent the player from mistaking it as a message for displaying the symbols. In addition, the above-mentioned inciting part in which the validity is incited was updated as the friendly characters and enemy characters alternately fight each other (for example, SP first half reach B, SP second half reach B, etc.). In this kind of inciting part, there are scenes in which an ally character takes damage. Furthermore, in the production of such an inciting part, the image display switching interval is faster and the number of image display switching is greater than that of the epilogue part. According to this, the inciting part can be shown suitably by making the inciting part develop faster than the epilogue part. In addition, subtitles are properly added to the slow-paced epilogue part, making it easier to understand what the characters are saying and emphasizing the sense of celebration. Furthermore, in the fast-paced inciting part, the content can be conveyed primarily through video switching, and auxiliary subtitles can be displayed so as not to disturb the video development. Thereby, a series of effects can be presented in a suitable manner.

(F2019-117)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
The notification performance includes a first notification performance and a second notification performance,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, dialogue sounds emitted by the characters are output,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, there are times when dialogue subtitles are displayed in response to dialogue sounds emitted by the character, and times when dialogue subtitles are not displayed.
The number of lines uttered by the character is different between the first notification performance and the second notification performance,
The ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds emitted by the character in the epilogue part of the first notification performance is higher than the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds emitted by the character in the introduction part of the first notification performance. high,
In the epilogue part of the second notification performance, the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds emitted by the character is higher than the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds produced by the character in the introduction part of the second notification performance. expensive.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 175, the proportion of subtitles displayed for characters' lines in the epilogue part is higher than the proportion of subtitles displayed for characters in SP reach, which is the incitement part. ing. According to this, by clearly displaying subtitles in the epilogue part, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the character is saying. Also, in the winning epilogue part, subtitles can be used to create a feeling of blessing. Also, in the inciting part, there are more screen changes than in the epilogue part, so even if subtitles are displayed, the display time will be shorter, so that the display of auxiliary subtitles will not interfere with the production. , it is possible to convey the effect primarily through image switching. Thereby, suitable performance can be performed in the inciting part.

(F2019-118)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A performance execution means,
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled;
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the lottery will be held, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The performance execution means is
When it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, a first re-lottery in which a first symbol is displayed in the first half part and then a second symbol is displayed in the second half part. It is possible to perform the production,
When it is determined to be controlled to the first advantageous state, among the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, after displaying the first symbol in the first half part, the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part. It is possible to perform the second re-lottery performance,
Executing the first re-lottery performance or the second re-lottery performance using the first symbol displayed in the epilogue part,
The light emission control means includes:
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow lighting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect to correspond to the first re-lottery effect. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance or a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance;
At a specific timing in the second half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. control the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and continue controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode during the subsequent symbol determination period;
At a timing related to the start of a fanfare performance, the brightness data table for rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. do.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 176, in the re-lottery performance, the "2" symbol that was temporarily stopped and displayed before the re-lottery is enlarged, reduced, and shaken, and then the "2" symbol is displayed as it is. The re-lottery performance will be started using . At the start of the re-extraction performance, the "2" symbol is reduced, and the variation of the re-lottery performance is started from the reduced "2" symbol. During the re-lottery performance, a symbol feeding performance is executed in which the symbols are replaced by high-speed fluctuations starting from the "2" symbol. In this way, the re-lottery effect will be started using the decorative symbols that were once temporarily stopped and displayed, and at the start of the re-lottery effect, the symbol forwarding effect will be executed using the symbols that were once temporarily stopped and displayed. , it is easy for the player to understand from which decorative symbol the re-lottery starts. As a result, the flow of a series of performances can be clearly shown.

(F2019-119)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A performance execution means,
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled;
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the lottery will be held, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The performance execution means is
When it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, after displaying the first symbol in the first half part, a replacement display is performed in which the first symbol is replaced with another symbol. It is possible to execute the first re-lottery effect in which the second symbol is displayed in the second half,
When it is determined that the first advantageous state is controlled, a second part of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects in which the replacement display is performed in the first half part and the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part. It is possible to perform a re-lottery performance,
The first re-lottery performance is a performance in which all other symbols are used to perform the replacement display from the start of the replacement display in the first half part until the second symbol is displayed in the second half part. can be,
The second re-lottery performance is a performance in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols between the time when the replacement display is started in the first half part and the time when the first symbol is displayed in the second half part. can be,
The light emission control means includes:
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow lighting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect to correspond to the first re-lottery effect. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance or a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance;
At a specific timing in the second half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and continuously controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for achieving the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent symbol determination period;
At a timing related to the start of a fanfare performance, the brightness data table for rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. do.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 176, in the re-lottery performance, the "2" symbol that was temporarily stopped and displayed before the re-lottery is enlarged, reduced, and shaken, and then the "2" symbol is displayed as it is. The re-lottery performance will be started using . At the start of the re-extraction performance, the "2" symbol is reduced, and the variation of the re-lottery performance is started from the reduced "2" symbol. During the re-lottery performance, a symbol feeding performance is executed in which the symbols are replaced by high-speed fluctuations starting from the "2" symbol. During the re-lottery performance, all the decorative symbols are sent in order: "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "1", and then "2" again. ” A symbol feeding performance in which symbols are displayed is executed. In this way, a re-lottery performance is started using the ornamental symbols that were once displayed in a temporary stop, and after a plurality of types of variations in the ornamental symbols, the ornamental symbols that were initially displayed in a temporary halt are displayed again. According to this, the flow of a series of effects can be clearly shown by the pattern advancing effect in which all decorative patterns are shown without displaying the final display result immediately.

(F2019-120)
A gaming machine (for example, gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
Production execution means (for example, production control CPU 120),
A light emitting means (for example, a frame lamp, etc.);
A light emission control means (for example, a production control CPU 120) for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data (for example, controls a frame lamp etc. using the brightness data table),
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled (for example, a notification performance that notifies whether or not there will be a jackpot),
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state (for example, a normal jackpot game state without promotion) and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state (for example, a probability variable jackpot game state with promotion),
The notification effect includes an introductory part (for example, an inciting part) until it is announced whether the control is to be controlled to the advantageous state or not, and a determination that the control is to be controlled to the advantageous state after the notification is made. It is composed of an epilogue part (for example, a winning epilogue part) that is executed when the game is played, and a re-lottery part (for example, a re-lottery part) that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-lottery part includes the first half (Fig. 142 (A6) to Fig. 156 (A46)) and the latter part (for example, Fig. 157 (B1) to Fig. 158 (B6) or Fig. 161 (C1) to Fig. 161 (C6)). including
The performance execution means is
When it is determined that the second advantageous state will be controlled, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, after displaying the first symbol (for example, two symbols) in the first half part, the first symbol is replaced with another symbol. The first re-lottery effect (for example, Fig. 142 (A6) to Fig. 156 (A46), Fig. 157 (B1) ) to FIG. 158 (B6)) can be executed,
When it is determined that the first advantageous state is controlled, the replacement display is performed in the first half of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, and the first symbol (for example, two symbols) is displayed in the second half. It is possible to perform a second re-lottery effect (for example, FIG. 142 (A6) to FIG. 156 (A46), FIG. 161 (C1) to FIG. 161 (C6)) that displays again,
When it is determined that the second advantageous state is controlled, the second symbol is displayed after the second symbol (for example, 7 symbols) is displayed in the first half of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects. A third re-lottery effect (for example, FIG. 142 (A6) to FIG. 156 (A46), FIG. 265 (D6) to (D20)) that repeatedly displays the second symbol and displays the second symbol again in the second half part. is feasible and
The first re-lottery performance, the second re-lottery performance, and the third re-lottery performance have the same performance length (for example, the performance length is the same as shown in FIG. 265(B)),
The light emission control means includes:
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for rainbow light emitting mode (for example, the frame lamp is controlled using a brightness data table corresponding to smooth rainbow color lighting shown in FIG. 142 (A5) etc.),
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow lighting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect to correspond to the first re-lottery effect. The light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the second lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect (for example, by switching to the brightness data table corresponding to the re-lottery effect shown in FIG. Control frame lamps, etc. using the brightness data table for lottery performance),
At a specific timing in the second half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. (For example, after FIG. 158 (B5) and after FIG. 162 (C5), the frame lamp etc. is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to smooth rainbow color lighting. ), and the light emitting means is continuously controlled using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode during the subsequent pattern determination period (for example, after FIG. 159 (B8), after FIG. 163 (C8) (control frame lamps, etc. using a brightness data table that corresponds to smooth rainbow-colored lighting),
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare performance, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. (For example, after FIG. 160 (D1) and after FIG. 164 (E1), the brightness data table corresponding to smooth rainbow-colored lighting is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to lighting compatible with fanfare, and the lighting corresponding to fanfare is switched. control the frame lamp, etc. using the brightness data table corresponding to the brightness data table).

Specifically, a pattern in which an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) is displayed after which an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) is displayed, a pattern in which an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) is displayed and then an odd numbered symbol (for example, 3 symbols) is displayed. was set up. In addition to this, a pattern may be provided in which an odd numbered symbol (for example, 7 symbols) is displayed after an odd numbered symbol (for example, 7 symbols) is displayed. In a performance in which symbols are sent from an odd numbered symbol to an odd numbered symbol, all the same odd numbered symbols may be sent at the time of symbol feeding. However, regardless of the pattern, the length of the performance during the symbol feeding period in the re-lottery performance may be designed to be the same. According to this, it is possible to provide a suitable re-lottery effect for any pattern without increasing the data capacity.

(F2019-121)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A performance execution means,
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled;
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the lottery will be held, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The performance execution means is
When it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, a first re-lottery in which a first symbol is displayed in the first half part and then a second symbol is displayed in the second half part. It is possible to perform the production,
When it is determined to be controlled to the first advantageous state, among the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, after displaying the first symbol in the first half part, the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part. It is possible to perform the second re-lottery performance,
Displaying the first symbol with the same or substantially the same animation when displaying the first symbol once in the epilogue part and when displaying the first symbol again in the second half of the second re-lottery performance,
The light emission control means includes:
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow lighting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect to correspond to the first re-lottery effect. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance or a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance;
At a specific timing in the second half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and continuously controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for achieving the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent symbol determination period;
At a timing related to the start of a fanfare performance, the brightness data table for rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. do.

Specifically, the pattern placement in the portions of FIGS. 141 (A1) to 142 (A5) and the pattern placement in the portions of FIGS. 161 (C1) to 162 (C5) described above are executed using approximately the same video. be done. Specifically, the same image is used for the pattern display and effect image using the "2" pattern, and the pattern pattern is executed in such a manner that the background portions are different. According to this, since the images of the symbols appearing can be made substantially the same, it is possible to clearly show to the player that the symbols have not been promoted to the variable probability symbols. In addition, the image of the pattern part including the background may be made completely the same.

(F2019-122)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A performance execution means,
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled;
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the lottery will be held, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The performance execution means is
When it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, a first re-lottery in which a first symbol is displayed in the first half part and then a second symbol is displayed in the second half part. It is possible to perform the production,
When it is determined to be controlled to the first advantageous state, among the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, after displaying the first symbol in the first half part, the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part. It is possible to perform the second re-lottery performance,
After the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part until the symbol confirmation period, the first symbol is displayed by changing the display mode to the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode. performs a shaking display that displays the first symbol as if it is shaking;
By changing the display mode of the second symbol to the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode from the time the second symbol is displayed in the second half part until the symbol confirmation period, the second symbol is displayed in the second half part. A shaking display is performed to display the second symbol as if the second symbol is shaking,
The first aspect is an aspect in which the symbols are easier for the player to visually recognize than either the second aspect or the third aspect,
The performance execution means is
In the re-lottery part, it is possible to display an action promotion display that encourages the player to take action.
When the action is performed at a first timing while the action promotion display is being executed in the first re-lottery performance, when a predetermined timing has come after the performance corresponding to the first re-lottery performance has been executed. displaying the second symbol in a shaking display while maintaining the shaking speed of the shaking display of the second symbol so that the second symbol is in the second mode;
When performing the action promotion display in the first re-lottery performance, if the action is performed at a second timing different from the first timing, after performing the performance corresponding to the first re-lottery performance. displaying the second symbol in a shaking display while maintaining the shaking speed of the shaking display of the second symbol so that the second symbol changes to the third mode when the predetermined timing comes;
When the movement promotion display is executed in the first re-lottery performance, the swinging display of the second symbol is started from the predetermined timing regardless of whether the movement is performed at the first timing or the second timing. A display that makes it difficult to see is performed, and then the second symbol is displayed again in a shaking display, and then, when the symbol confirmation period comes, the second symbol is displayed while maintaining the shaking speed of the shaking display of the second symbol. 2 symbols are stopped and displayed in the first mode,
When the action promotion display is executed in the second re-lottery performance, if the action is performed at the first timing, the predetermined timing is reached after the performance corresponding to the second re-lottery performance is executed. displaying the first symbol in a oscillating manner while maintaining the oscillating speed of the oscillating display of the first symbol so that the first symbol becomes in the second mode when
If the action is performed at the second timing while performing the action promotion display in the second re-lottery performance, the predetermined timing is reached after the performance corresponding to the second re-lottery performance is executed. displaying the first symbol in a oscillating manner while maintaining the oscillating speed of the oscillating display of the first symbol so that the first symbol assumes the third mode when
When performing the movement promotion display in the second re-lottery performance, the shaking display of the first symbol is started from the predetermined timing regardless of whether the movement is performed at the first timing or the second timing. A display that makes it difficult to see is performed, and then the first symbol is displayed again in a shaking manner, and then, when the symbol confirmation period comes, the first symbol is displayed while maintaining the shaking speed of the shaking display of the first symbol. Stop displaying one symbol in the first mode,
The light emission control means includes:
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow lighting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect to correspond to the first re-lottery effect. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance or a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance;
At a specific timing in the second half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and continuously controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for achieving the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent symbol determination period;
At a timing related to the start of a fanfare performance, the brightness data table for rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. do.

Specifically, as shown in (L1) to (L3) in FIG. 267, an action promotion display using a button image and a time gauge is displayed during symbol feeding in the re-lottery performance. When the player operates the push button 31B during the period in which the movement promotion display is displayed, the common symbol presentation effects shown in (L4) to (L6) are executed. No matter at which timing the push button 31B is operated, a common pattern display effect is performed by enlarging and reducing the pattern as shown in (L4) to (L5). Thereafter, the symbols are shaken during the symbol shake period. The shaking period of the symbol differs depending on the button operation timing. Therefore, after the symbol shaking period, for example, at the first operation timing, the symbol will be in a position facing the right side, at the second operation timing, the symbol will be in a position facing left, and at the third operation timing, the symbol will be in a position facing to the left. , the design may be in a position facing forward. However, regardless of the operation timing, a white-out effect is then interposed as a common effect from (J1) to (J18), and an effect in which the symbol swings after rotation and reduction of the symbol is performed. According to this, by performing a common effect regardless of when the push button 31B is operated, the symbols can be stopped neatly, and a series of effects can be presented suitably.

(F2019-126)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
There is a notification effect that notifies whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part after the notification is made when the control is made to be in the advantageous state. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
The introduction part is
A scene in which a dialogue sound emitted by a character is output and a dialogue subtitle for the dialogue sound is displayed,
A scene in which a dialogue sound emitted by a character is output and a dialogue subtitle for the dialogue sound is not displayed,
The brightness data table used in scenes where dialogue sounds emitted by characters are output and dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sounds are not displayed is such that the brightness data using the emitting color corresponding to the character changes in response to the character's actions. It is composed of

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 168 to 170, there are scenes in which characters utter lines in the provocative part but are not subtitled (for example, scenes r25, r27, r29, r31, r33, r35). ). However, even in such a specific scene, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) of the game effect lamp 9 is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. In this way, even in a scene where subtitles are not displayed for dialogue sounds, the effect can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. Thereby, the performance corresponding to the character can be suitably executed, and the inciting part can be suitably shown to the player. Also, Figures 64 (b8), (b9), Figure 74 (e7), Figure 94 (i32), Figure 95 (i34), Figure 104 (n10), Figure 123 (r25), (r27), Figure 124 (r29 ), as shown in Figures 125 (r31), (r33), and 126 (r35), even if a character has dialogue but no subtitles, a frame lamp is displayed in the color corresponding to the character. The brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that it lights up/blinks. As a result, even in scenes where subtitles are not displayed, it is possible to suitably express that the character is uttering lines by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, and it is possible to suitably show the production of the inciting part to the player. can.

(F2019-127)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
sound output means;
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
There is a notification effect that notifies whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part after the notification is made when the control is made to be in the advantageous state. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
Up to the success/failure notification part, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means, thereby notifying the change of the scene,
The display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and displays the effect while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. End the display, display the scene corresponding to the scene after switching, and
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a movable body movement brightness data table when the movable body advances to the second position, and the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. During the evacuation, the movable body movable brightness data table is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the scene after switching, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the scene after switching,
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. Outputs the sound corresponding to the subsequent scene.

Specifically, the performance may be switched from the performance at the start of the reach to the SP first half reach performance by the movement of the accessory. Furthermore, an effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory object may be displayed in accordance with the action of the accessory object falling. Thereafter, while the accessory is rising, the display may be gradually switched from the effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory to the screen corresponding to the SP first half reach. Further, the brightness data table may be switched from the brightness data table of the accessory movement part to the brightness data table of the SP first half reach while the accessory is rising. Furthermore, a sound corresponding to the SP first half reach may be output while the accessory is rising. Here, the effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory is displayed on the premise that the accessory is in a position superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the accessory returns to its initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the SP first half reach before the accessory completes the return operation to the initial position, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be prevented. Further, since the sound effect and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the first half of the SP during the ascending of the accessory, the inciting part of the first half of the SP can be suitably displayed.

(F2019-128)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part after the notification is made when the control is made to be in the advantageous state. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
The display means is
In the introduction part, a promotion display is displayed to encourage the player to perform a specific action, and when the specific action is performed, a cut-in display is performed,
In the introduction part, a dialogue sound emitted by the character is output, and a dialogue subtitle is displayed in a specific area of the display means for the dialogue sound,
At the timing of performing the promotion display in the introduction part, dialogue subtitles are not displayed in the specific area,
The brightness data table includes a cut-in display brightness data table corresponding to the cut-in display and an introduction part brightness data table corresponding to the introduction part,
The light emitting means for which brightness data is set in the cut-in display brightness data table includes at least the same location as the light emitting means for which brightness data is set in the introduction part brightness data table.

Specifically, the brightness data of the lamp control in the cut-in effect and the button display for the cut-in effect (RGB data in grandchild tables W4, W5, W6) is the same as the lamp control in the inciting part of the SP final reach. Designed to work with spot frame lamps. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary lighting/blinking of lamps from being mixed in and spoil the aesthetic appearance, and it is possible to provide a suitable performance in the inciting part.

(F2019-129)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
sound output means;
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
The notification performance includes a first notification performance and a second notification performance,
In the period before the transition from the introduction part to the success/failure notification part in the first notification performance,
The display means performs a promotion display to prompt a specific action by the player;
The sound output means continues to output sound,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a first notification effect brightness data table,
In the period before the transition from the introduction part to the success/failure notification part in the second notification performance,
The display means does not perform the promotion display that prompts the specific action, but displays a display that encourages success or failure;
The sound output means does not output sound,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a second notification effect brightness data table,
The first notification effect brightness data table is configured so that the brightness data changes,
The second notification effect brightness data table is configured so that the brightness data does not change.

Specifically, in the SP reach effect where no operation promotion is performed to encourage the player to perform an operation in the win/fail branch, by muting the sound and keeping the frame lamp lit in white, the effect appears as if the effect has stopped. The performance can be shown to the player, and the win/fail branch (timing of decision) can be clearly communicated to the player. On the other hand, in the SP reach performance where operation promotion is performed to encourage the player to perform an operation in a win/fail situation, a sound corresponding to the operation promotion and a sound (BGM) corresponding to the reach are output, and furthermore, the operation promotion By switching and using the grandchild table multiple times in order to control the frame lamp in a mode corresponding to the above, it is possible to suitably produce the timing for deciding whether or not to make a decision based on the lighting mode of the frame lamp. In this way, the timing of deciding whether to decide whether to decide whether to decide whether to decide whether or not to win can be suitably produced by different sound control and lamp control depending on whether operation promotion is not performed or when operation is promoted in the case of a judgment or failure.

(F2019-130)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
The introduction part includes a first scene and a second scene after the first scene,
In the first scene, first video data is used,
In the second scene, second video data is used,
The progress speed of the production in the second scene is slower than that in the first scene,
The first video data is video data in which the movement of a specific character is expressed by a plurality of specific character images,
The second video data is video data in which the movement of the specific character is expressed by one specific character image and an effect image.

Specifically, the scene before the determination of the validity of (r48) in the provocation part is a slow motion period in which the movement of the video is slowed down. Also, the effect executed before (r48) depicts the character's movement from multiple image data, whereas the effect executed in (r48) depicts the image of Bakuchu and the six allies. This is done using images. Then, the image of the friendly character and the image of the enemy character are gradually enlarged and displayed over time to make it appear as if the characters are moving. Here, if a video is created using the same amount of image data during the slow motion period as during the non-slow motion periods, the amount of data will be small and the motion will be awkward. However, if a large amount of data is used to smooth the movement during the slow motion period, the capacity will become too large. Therefore, the data capacity can be reduced by reducing the number of images used during the slow motion period and by switching and enlarging the display to make it appear as if the character is moving. Note that the number of images used in the slow-motion period may be any number as long as it is smaller than in the periods other than the slow-motion period.

(F2019-131)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part after the notification is made when the control is made to be in the advantageous state. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
There is a shielding display that makes the performance display invisible by going into a closed mode after a closing operation, and makes the performance display visible by performing an opening operation after entering the closed mode,
The shielding display can be executed at a timing related to the introduction part,
When the shielding display performs a closing operation, the brightness of the effect display decreases as the area where the effect display is visible becomes smaller;
When the shielding display performs an opening operation, the brightness of the effect display increases as the area where the effect display is visible becomes larger.

Specifically, the above-mentioned shutter is an image that, when closed, makes the image of the performance being performed behind the camera invisible, and when it is closed and then opened, the image of the performance that is being performed is made visible. Further, the shutter is executed at a timing related to the inciting part, that is, before the inciting part starts. When the shutter closes, the screen brightness decreases as the area where the effects are visible becomes narrower, and when the shutter opens, the screen brightness decreases as the area where the effects become visible becomes wider. becomes higher. According to this, by making the closing and opening of the shutter realistic, it is possible to suitably show the flow of the performance. In addition, although the image of the shutter was used to make the image of the performance being performed in the background invisible or visible, it could be an image other than the shutter, and the same performance could be performed using a role model. It's okay.

(F2019-132)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
There is a notification effect that notifies whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part after the notification is made when the control is made to be in the advantageous state. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
In the introduction part, there is a specific scene where the character's dialogue sounds and action sounds corresponding to the character's actions are output.
In the specific scene, the dialogue sound is output louder than the action sound.

Specifically, in the inciting part, there is a scene in which the BGM of SP Reach is output, and the dialogue sound and the physical sound (also referred to as action sound) are output at the same timing. When the dialogue sound and the physical sound are output at the same timing, the dialogue sound is output at a louder volume than the physical sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. According to this, by outputting physical sounds as part of the performance, the reality of the performance is created, and when the dialogue sound and physical sound overlap, the dialogue sound is output louder, so that the contents of the performance can be conveyed to the player. It can be easily communicated. Therefore, as a result, the performance in the inciting part can be shown better.

(F2019-133)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A performance execution means,
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled;
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the lottery will be held, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The performance execution means is
When it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, a first re-lottery in which a first symbol is displayed in the first half part and then a second symbol is displayed in the second half part. It is possible to perform the production,
When it is determined to be controlled to the first advantageous state, among the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, after displaying the first symbol in the first half part, the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part. It is possible to perform the second re-lottery performance,
In the epilogue part, when the first symbol is displayed once, the display mode of the first symbol is changed to the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode so that the first symbol appears to be shaking. It displays the first symbol,
In the case of transitioning from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part, there is a timing when the first symbol is displayed in the first mode and a transition from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part, and a timing when the first symbol is displayed in the second mode. There is a transition from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part at the displayed timing, and a transition from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part at the timing when the first symbol is displayed in the third mode,
The performance execution means is configured to perform a transition from an epilogue part to a re-lottery part at a timing when the first symbol is displayed in the first mode, and at a timing when the first symbol is displayed in the second mode. The first symbol is visually recognized both when transitioning from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part and when transitioning from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part at the timing when the first symbol is displayed in the third manner. perform a specific display that makes it difficult, display the first symbol in a common display mode, and execute the first re-lottery performance or the second re-lottery performance;
The light emission control means includes:
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow lighting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect to correspond to the first re-lottery effect. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance or a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance;
At a specific timing in the second half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. control the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and continue controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode during the subsequent symbol determination period;
At a timing related to the start of a fanfare performance, the brightness data table for rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. do.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 266, when the image indicating the stick controller 31A and the time gauge are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, no matter which timing the stick controller 31A is operated, after that, It is also possible to provide a period of symbol fluctuation for absorbing the length in the time up to a predetermined timing when the re-lottery performance is executed (symbol fluctuation period from (K4)). Then, when the re-lottery effect is executed at a predetermined timing, a common effect with whiteout as shown in (K8) to (K17) may be executed. According to this, no matter at which timing the stick controller 31A is operated, the re-lottery effect is executed after the symbols are displayed in a shaking manner and then a common effect involving whiteout is executed, so that the re-lottery effect is executed at the start of the re-lottery. It is possible to prevent the movement of the symbols from causing a sense of discomfort, and it is possible to present a series of effects in a suitable manner.

(F2020-005)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
In the introduction part, there is a specific scene where the first dialogue subtitle is displayed for the first dialogue sound emitted by the character, and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed for the second dialogue sound emitted by the character.
In the specific scene, display of the second serif subtitle is started while the first serif subtitle is being displayed, and then the display of the first serif subtitle is finished and the second serif subtitle is displayed. It becomes a state where
A fade effect is applied at least either when displaying the first serif subtitle ends or when displaying the second serif subtitle starts.

Specifically, in the provocation part, as shown in FIG. 178(A), there is a scene in which subtitles are displayed for the character's dialogue. When subtitles are displayed, there is a period in which the first subtitles are displayed so that the first subtitle display period overlaps with the second subtitle display period that is displayed next. A fade effect is applied when the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed so as to overlap. A fade effect causes a change in the transparency of the displayed text with different states. According to this, even if the subtitles are displayed so as to overlap, the change in the subtitles is made easier to understand due to the fade effect, so that the switching of the subtitles can be made easier to understand.

(F2020-006)
A gaming machine (for example, gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
Display means (for example, image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (for example, frame lamps, etc.);
A light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) that controls the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data (for example, controls a frame lamp etc. using the brightness data table),
It is possible to execute a notification performance that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled (for example, a notification performance that notifies whether or not there will be a jackpot),
The notification effect that notifies that the vehicle will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part (for example, an instigation part) until it is notified whether or not the vehicle will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part (for example, a winning epilogue part) in which the winning epilogue part is notified;
The notification effect that notifies the user of not being controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part (for example, an instigation part) until the propriety of being controlled to the advantageous state is announced, and a part that notifies the user of not being controlled to the advantageous state. and a second epilogue part (for example, a loser epilogue part) to be notified,
The display means is
In the second epilogue part, a display is made to notify that the control is not controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the disappointing display in FIG. 190 (X30)),
After that, a switching display is performed (for example, an eye catch display in FIG. 190 (X33)),
After that, the background is displayed (for example, the normal background display in FIG. 190 (X34) (X35)),
Thereafter, in response to the symbol confirmation command, the symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 190 (X35), the symbol is fixed and stopped by receiving the symbol confirmation command),
Thereafter, in response to the fluctuation command, the fluctuation display of the symbol is started (for example, as shown in FIG. 190 (X36), the symbol is fixed and stopped by receiving the symbol confirmation command),
The plurality of light emitting means includes a production light emitting means and a fourth symbol light emitting means (for example, a frame lamp or the like, an LED of the fourth symbol unit),
The light emission control means includes:
In the second epilogue part, the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part is used to control the lighting means for effect (for example, in the loss epilogue part, the frame lamp etc. is controlled using the brightness data table at the time of loss). do),
When the switching display is performed, the luminance data table is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the switching display, and the luminance data table corresponding to the switching display is used to control the lighting means for effect (for example, when the eye-catching display is control the frame lamp, etc. using the brightness data table for switching (eye-catching) when
When a background display is performed, the luminance data table is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the background display, and the luminance data table corresponding to the background display is used to control the lighting means for effect (for example, when the background display is normally control frame lamps, etc. using the brightness data table for the background),
When a symbol is stopped and displayed, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table for changing the fourth symbol to the brightness data table for stopping the fourth symbol, and the brightness data table for stopping the fourth symbol is used to display the brightness data table. The light emitting means for the fourth symbol is controlled (for example, when a symbol is displayed in a stopped state, the luminance data table is switched from the luminance data table for changing the fourth symbol to the luminance data table for stopping the fourth symbol, and Control the light emission of the LED of the 4th symbol using the brightness data table for stopping the 4th symbol),
When a symbol is displayed in a static state, the luminance data table corresponding to the background display is continuously used to control the production light emitting means (for example, when a symbol is displayed in a static state, the luminance data table for the background is (continuously using the table to control frame lamps, etc.),
When the symbol variation display is started, the luminance data table is switched to a luminance data table for fourth symbol variation, and the fourth symbol light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table for fourth symbol variation. (For example, when the fluctuating display of symbols starts, the luminance data table is switched to the luminance data table for the fourth symbol variation, and the luminance of the LED of the fourth symbol is controlled using the luminance data table for the fourth symbol. Control),
When the fluctuating display of symbols is started, the luminance data table corresponding to the background display is continuously used to control the production light emitting means (for example, when the fluctuating display of symbols is started, the luminance data table corresponding to the background The brightness data table is continuously used to control frame lamps, etc.).

Specifically, the characteristic parts of the detailed explanatory diagram of the game effect lamp 9 at the time of losing will be explained. The production screen will be switched to the image of the loss after the performance of the success/fail decision. Thereafter, after a blackout display in which the losing display result is displayed, the screen is switched to an eye-catching screen. Furthermore, after that, a screen is displayed in which the symbols are fixed and stopped after switching to the normal screen. Further, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table at the time of success/failure determination to the brightness data table at the time of loss. Thereafter, the display is switched to a brightness data table for switching (eye-catching). Furthermore, after that, the table is switched to the background luminance data table at the start of the fluctuation. Here, at the timing of switching to the eye-catching screen, the brightness data table is switched to a brightness data table for switching (eye-catching). Further, the brightness data table is switched to the background brightness data table at the timing when the screen is switched to the normal screen. The special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 is switched from blinking to off upon receiving the symbol confirmation command, but the background brightness data table is not switched even upon reception of the symbol confirmation command. Further, the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 is switched from off to blinking upon reception of the next variation variation pattern command, but the background brightness data table is not switched even upon reception of the symbol confirmation command. According to this, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for the background when the eye-catching screen ends, and that brightness data table is continued until the next change, so the brightness data table corresponding to the reception of the symbol confirmation command There is no need to create a separate performance, and the performance by the lamp can be shown without any discomfort from the performance at the time of loss to the next change, and a series of performances can be suitably shown.

[Start 1]
Up to the success/failure notification part, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means, thereby notifying the change of the scene,
The display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and ends the effect display while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. , performs a display corresponding to the scene after switching,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using the movable body movement brightness data table when the movable body advances to the second position, and controls the light emission means when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. , switching from the luminance data table for moving the movable body to a luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching, and controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching;
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. Output the corresponding sound.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 171 and 172, the performance switches from the SP first half reach A performance to the SP second half reach A performance as the accessory moves. Furthermore, as the accessory falls, an effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory is displayed. Thereafter, while the accessory is rising, the display gradually switches from the effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory to the screen corresponding to reach A in the second half of the SP. In addition, while the accessory is rising, the brightness data table of the accessory movement part (child table WD8 shown in FIG. 202 described later) to the brightness data table of SP second half reach A (child table WD9 shown in FIGS. 204 and 205 described later) is changed. ) The brightness data table is switched to Further, while the accessory is rising, a sound corresponding to the second half of the SP (for example, BGM of the second half of the SP) is output. Here, the effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory is displayed on the premise that the accessory is in a position superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the accessory returns to its initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the latter half of the SP before the accessory completes its return operation to the initial position, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be prevented. Further, since the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the second half of the SP while the accessory returns to its initial position, the inciting part of the second half of the SP can be suitably displayed.

[Start 2]
Before the movable body moves, a reduced design is displayed at a specific display position,
When the movable body moves, the movable body covers a specific display position,
In response to the movement of the movable body, an effect corresponding to the movement of the movable body is displayed in a layer that has priority over the display layer of the reduced-displayed pattern,
After the movable body starts retracting and is no longer located at the specific display position, the effect display is switched to a display corresponding to the performance after switching to a state in which a reduced pattern is displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 171 and 172, the performance switches from the SP first half reach A performance to the SP second half reach A performance as the accessory moves. Furthermore, before the accessory moves, a reduced "2" symbol is displayed at the lower left and right corners of the screen. When the accessory moves, the accessory falls so that the letter "P" among the characters on the accessory is located at a position that overlaps with the place where the reduced decorative pattern of "2" was displayed. do. Further, in accordance with the motion of the accessory falling, an effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory is displayed in a prioritized layer in front of the "2" symbol that is displayed in a reduced size. Then, after the accessory rises from the falling position and the "2" symbol does not overlap with the accessory, the effect image gradually becomes lighter, and the background and "2" symbol corresponding to reach A in the second half of the SP disappear. It is displayed faintly. According to this, it is possible to prevent an aesthetically unsightly display from being displayed due to the reduced decorative pattern being displayed during the action of the accessory. Furthermore, the effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory is displayed on the premise that the accessory is located at a position where it is superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the accessory returns to its initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the second half of the SP before the accessory completes the return operation to the initial position, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be prevented. Further, since the reduced decorative pattern is displayed during the ascending of the accessory, it is possible to switch the performance appropriately according to the action of the accessory.

[Start 3]
The movable body moves and effects are displayed before reaching a specific display position.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 171, the effect image is displayed before the accessory moves and reaches the lowest position of the fall. According to this, it is possible to quickly hide the reduced decorative pattern, and it is possible to change the suitable presentation including accessories.

[Start 4]
When the effect display is switched to the display of the developed production, the effect display is switched using an image related to the movable object.

Specifically, an image related to the accessory may be displayed when switching from the effect image to the image of the performance that will develop in the latter half. Specifically, in the scenes corresponding to FIG. 172 (h7) to (h10), when the accessory rises, the words "POWERFULII" and images of the main characters Yumu-chan, Jam-chan, Nana-chan, etc. may be displayed. According to this, by providing interlocking when the production changes, it is possible to show a suitable change in production that includes accessories.

[Start 5]
There is a shielding display that makes the performance display invisible by going into a closed mode after a closing operation, and makes the performance display visible by performing an opening operation after entering the closed mode,
Occlusion display can be executed at a timing related to the introduction part,
When the shielding display performs a closing operation, the brightness of the effect display decreases as the area where the effect display is visible becomes smaller.
When the shielding display performs an opening operation, the brightness of the effect display increases as the area where the effect display is visible becomes larger.

Specifically, the above-mentioned shutter is an image that, when closed, makes the image of the performance being performed behind the camera invisible, and when it is closed and then opened, the image of the performance that is being performed is made visible. Further, the shutter is executed at a timing related to the inciting part, that is, before the inciting part starts. When the shutter closes, the screen brightness decreases as the area where the effects are visible becomes narrower, and when the shutter opens, the screen brightness decreases as the area where the effects become visible becomes wider. becomes higher. According to this, by making the closing and opening of the shutter realistic, it is possible to suitably show the flow of the performance. In addition, although the image of the shutter was used to make the image of the performance being performed in the background invisible or visible, it could be an image other than the shutter, and the same performance could be performed using a role model. It's okay.

[Start 6]
The image corresponding to the shielding display has a shape in which a door closes from both ends of the screen at the center of the screen, or a shape in which a door closes from one end of the screen toward the other end.

Specifically, the shutter described above closes from the top and bottom edges of the screen toward the center of the screen. According to this, it is possible to suitably display an effect in which the screen brightness gradually changes. Further, the shutter may be configured to close from both ends of the screen toward the center, like a sliding door. Further, the shutter may be configured to close from the top end of the screen toward the bottom end of the screen.

[Start 7]
In the shielding display, the color of the edge between the facing doors that makes the production display invisible is expressed in black.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58 described above, the image of the edge of the shutter is expressed in black. According to this, when the shutter is about to close as shown in FIG. 58 (a12), the boundary between the effect executed when the screen brightness is lowered and the edge of the shutter can be blurred, and the sense of discomfort can be eliminated. . Similarly, when the shutter starts to open as shown in FIG. 60 (a16), the sense of discomfort can be eliminated.

[Start 8]
After the shielding display undergoes a closing operation and an opening operation, a display corresponding to the introduction part is displayed.
A display corresponding to the introduction part is displayed in the middle of the opening operation of the shielding display, and while the brightness of the display corresponding to the introduction part increases step by step, until the opening operation of the shielding display is completed. , the display corresponding to the introduction part does not progress, and the display corresponding to the introduction part starts to progress after the release operation of the shielding display is completed.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61 described above, after the shutter is opened, the SP first half reach is started. Until the shutter is fully opened, the SP first half reach performance does not start, and the screen brightness gradually increases, and after the shutter is opened, the SP first half performance progresses. According to this, since the SP first half reach performance is a performance that the player wants to pay attention to, it is possible to prevent dissatisfaction caused by the performance being executed before the shutter is opened.

[Start 9]
When the operation of releasing the shielding display is completed, the light emitting means is turned off,
After the release operation of the shielding display is completed and one frame worth of image is displayed, the display corresponding to the introduction part progresses and the light emitting means starts emitting light.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 193, in the child table WD1 of the start part, the frame lamp is turned off when the shutter is fully open, so the timing when the shutter is fully opened is determined by the lighting state of the frame lamp. It can be communicated to players in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, the inciting part of SP first half reach A and the inciting part of SP first half reach B, which are executed after the start part, are started with the shutter fully open and the frame lamp turned off, and correspond to each SP first half reach. The frame lamp starts lighting or blinking based on the brightness data table. In this way, after the shutter is fully open and the frame lamp is turned off, the frame lamp starts lighting up in accordance with the progress of the SP first half reach, so the player cannot tell that the SP first half reach has started. can be conveyed in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Start 10]
The effect display starts to darken before the closing operation of the shielding display is started, and the closing operation ends at the timing when the effect display completely darkens.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 57 (a9) described above, the brightness of the screen is lowered first before the shutter starts closing, and the shutter is completely closed at the timing when the shutter is completely closed. It has become. Here, if the brightness of the screen is reduced at the same time as the shutter closes, there is a risk that the screen will darken too quickly. Therefore, by starting to reduce the screen brightness in advance, the speed of the screen darkening can be set to an appropriate value, and a series of effects can be presented in a suitable manner.

[Start 11]
If the production display is not visible due to occlusion display,
The brightness data has a scenario configuration in which the brightness is switched until the shielding display is performed.
A scenario configuration in which brightness data is maintained from the period when the effect display is not visible due to the shielding display being in a closed mode until the timing when the effect display becomes visible due to the shielding display being in an open mode. It becomes.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 193, in the child table WD1 of the start part, during the time ta1 to ta12 before the shutter is completely closed, the background lights up in yellow, flashes in red, flashes in white, lights in red, etc. In contrast, the brightness data changes so that the frame lamp turns on/flashes while changing its color and brightness, while the frame lamp remains at a reduced brightness from time ta13 to ta18 after the shutter is fully closed. The brightness data is maintained so that it lights up in red. As a result, before the shutter closes, the lighting mode of the frame lamp enhances the performance in the start part, and when the shutter is closed, by maintaining the lighting mode of the frame lamp, the player can enjoy the content of the performance when the shutter opens. As a result, the subsequent performance in the inciting part can be shown better to the player.

[Start 12]
The production display includes a display before the introduction part starts and a display during the introduction part,
While the display corresponding to the predetermined effect is being displayed in the start part, the shielding display performs a closing action, and then the shielding display performs a releasing action, thereby starting the introduction part,
There are multiple types of introduction parts, and it is impossible to recognize which introduction part will be executed until the operation of releasing the shielded display is completed.

Specifically, the player does not know which SP first half reach will start until the aforementioned shutter is released. According to this, it is possible to have expectations as to which performance will be executed.

[Start 13]
The shielding display may be performed at a timing other than the transition to the introduction part.

Specifically, the effect using the shutter described above may be performed at a timing other than the timing that develops in the first half of the SP. For example, the timing may be from the second re-variation to the third re-variation in the pseudo-association. In addition, when the shutter closes and then opens, an icon image (for example, a green pending image) suggesting a change in active pending display, which is a pending display of the change, is displayed, and active pending is displayed in response to the icon image. It may also be configured to change (for example, change from blue to green). Furthermore, a shutter effect may be performed at the timing when the SP first half reach develops into the SP second half reach. According to this, it is possible to improve the interest of the performance using the shutter.

[Start 14]
The timing at which the brightness data is maintained is the timing when the closing operation of the shielding display ends, the timing when a predetermined period of time has passed after the closing operation of the shielding display ends, or the timing related to the closing operation of the shielding display.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 193, in the child table WD1 of the start part, during the time ta1 to ta12 before the shutter is completely closed, the background lights up in yellow, flashes in red, flashes in white, lights in red, etc. In contrast, the brightness data changes so that the frame lamp turns on/flashes while changing its color and brightness, while the frame lamp remains at a reduced brightness from time ta13 to ta18 after the shutter is fully closed. The brightness data is maintained so that it lights up in red. As a result, before the shutter closes, the lighting mode of the frame lamp enhances the performance in the start part, and when the shutter is closed, by maintaining the lighting mode of the frame lamp, the player can enjoy the content of the performance when the shutter opens. As a result, the subsequent performance in the inciting part can be shown better to the player.

[Start 15]
The period during which the brightness data is maintained is the period after the shielding display changes to the closed mode until a release operation is performed, or until the shielding display changes to the closed mode and a promotion display is performed to encourage the player to perform an action. This is the period of

Specifically, in addition to the above-described pattern in which the shutter closes and opens automatically, a pattern may be provided in which a button image is displayed after the shutter is closed, and the shutter is opened by performing a button operation. According to this, since a plurality of types of effects by the shutter are provided, the interest of the effects by the shutter is improved.

[Start 16]
At the timing when the shielding display is in a closed mode and the promotion display is performed, the brightness data that is maintained is switched to the brightness data that is changed, and after the promotion display is performed, the brightness data is switched again to the brightness data that is maintained.

Specifically, in a performance using a shutter display as shown in FIGS. 58 and 59, after the shutter is displayed in a closed state, the player's actions (for example, pressing a button, an infrared sensor A promotion display may be performed to encourage players to move their hands (such as holding their hands up), and when a movement of the player corresponding to the promotion display is detected, an effect such as opening a shutter may be performed. Then, while the shutter display is in the closed mode, the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 (for example, the frame lamp) is maintained.Lamp control is performed based on the brightness data table, while the shutter display is in the closed mode. At the timing when the promotion display is performed, the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is switched to a changing brightness data table, and lamp control is performed based on the brightness data table. After that, after the promotion display is performed ( In the state in which the promotion display continues, lamp control may be performed again based on the brightness data table in which the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is maintained. Note that the brightness data table for maintaining the lighting mode used again after the promotion display is performed may be the same as the brightness data table for maintaining the lighting mode used before the promotion display is performed. However, they may be different. According to this, the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is maintained while the shutter display is in the closed mode, so that the player will not be able to see the next effect after the shutter display is in the open mode. can make it easier to draw attention to.

[Start 17]
The promotion display is a display that includes a button image and promotion characters that encourage the player to perform an action.
When a promotion character is displayed, a sound corresponding to the promotion character is output, and brightness data is incorporated in which the brightness data changes in association with the sound.

Specifically, in a performance using a shutter display as shown in FIGS. 58 and 59, after the shutter is displayed in a closed state, the player's actions (for example, pressing a button, an infrared sensor A promotion display may be performed to encourage players to move their hands (such as holding their hands up), and when a movement of the player corresponding to the promotion display is detected, an effect such as opening a shutter may be performed. In the promotion display, a voice prompting the player to perform an action (for example, a sound saying "Press") is output, and characters prompting the player to perform a motion (for example, "Press") are displayed. good. Further, lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 may be performed based on a brightness data table that changes the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 (for example, a frame lamp) in response to a voice prompting a player's action. In this way, since the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 changes in response to the voice prompting the player's action, the player's motion changes depending on the sound prompting the player's motion and the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. It is possible to emphasize the character display encouraging the player to more effectively perform the action corresponding to the promotion display.

[Instigation 1]
The introduction part is
This is the part until it is announced whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state,
It includes scenes where the display is updated as friendly characters and enemy characters fight, and scenes where friendly characters receive damage.
The display switching interval is faster than the epilogue part,
The number of display switches is greater than the epilogue part.

Specifically, the above-mentioned inciting part, in which the contestants are asked whether it is right or wrong, was updated as friendly characters and enemy characters alternately fought each other (for example, SP first half reach B, SP second half reach B, etc.) . In this kind of inciting part, there are scenes in which an ally character takes damage. In addition, in the production of such an inciting part, the image display switching interval is faster than that of the epilogue part, and the number of image display switching is greater. According to this, the inciting part can be shown suitably by making the inciting part develop faster than the epilogue part.

[Instigation 2]
In the introduction part, first, the dialogue sound of the ally character is output, and the dialogue subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sound are displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 63 (b5) described above, in the inciting part, the ally character's dialogue occurs first, and subtitles corresponding to the dialogue are displayed. According to this, it is possible to suitably recognize the ally character in the inciting part.

[Instigation 3]
In the introductory part, the display length of the first dialogue subtitle is set to be long.

Specifically, the subtitle display of the ally character that is displayed first may be set to be displayed for a longer period than the subtitle display in other scenes of the inciting part. According to this, the ally character can be clearly recognized.

[Instigation 4]
There are scenes where the dialogue sound of an ally character is output, but the dialogue subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sound are not displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 67 (b17) described above, there are scenes in which subtitles are not displayed when an ally character utters a line. According to this, while suitably displaying the subtitle display of the ally character displayed first, it is possible to display the screen display more suitably than when subtitle display is attached to all lines.

[Instigation 5]
The first introduction part may be expanded to the second introduction part,
Ally characters play an active role in both the first and second introduction parts,
In the first introduction part, the dialogue sound of the ally character is first output, and the dialogue subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sound are displayed.
In the second introduction part, the dialogue sound of the ally character is first output, and the dialogue subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sound are displayed.

Specifically, in the above-mentioned inciting part, SP first half reach A and SP first half reach B as the first inciting part are executed at the timing of the first half, and SP as the second inciting part is executed at the timing of the second half. There was a second half reach A, a SP second half reach B, and a SP final reach. There are also scenes in which ally characters play an active role, whether in the first inciting part or in the second inciting part. Also, in any of the incitement parts, a line from an ally character occurs first, and subtitles corresponding to the line are displayed. According to this, it is possible to suitably recognize the ally character in any of the inciting parts.

[Instigation 6]
In the first introduction part, the first character plays an active role,
In the second introduction part, the second character plays an active role,
In the first introduction part, the first character's dialogue sound is first output, and dialogue subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sound are displayed,
In the second introduction part, the second character's dialogue sound is first output, and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed.

Specifically, in the inciting part mentioned above, Yumu-chan's character plays an active role in the inciting part corresponding to reach B in the first half of SP, and Jam-chan and Nana-chan play an active role in the inciting part corresponding to reach B in the second half of SP. There were scenes where the characters played an active role. Then, in the first half of the SP Reach B, a line by Yumu-chan, the first ally character to play an active role, occurred, and subtitles corresponding to the line were displayed. Also, in the second half of the SP, Reach B, dialogues by the first ally characters Jam-chan and Nana-chan occurred, and subtitles corresponding to the dialogues were displayed. According to this, the ally character can be suitably recognized in any of the provocation parts. Note that the number of active characters may be one or two or more. Furthermore, the same character may play an active role in the first half and the second half.

[Inciting 7]
The introduction part is
A scene in which a dialogue sound emitted by a character is output and a dialogue subtitle for the dialogue sound is displayed,
A scene in which a dialogue sound emitted by a character is output and a dialogue subtitle for the dialogue sound is not displayed,
The brightness data table used in scenes where a dialogue sound emitted by a character is output and a dialogue subtitle for the dialogue sound is not displayed is such that the brightness data using the emitting color corresponding to the character changes in response to the character's action. It is composed of

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 168 to 170, there are scenes in which characters utter lines in the provocative part but are not subtitled (for example, scenes r25, r27, r29, r31, r33, r35). ). In such specific scenes, sounds that are difficult to express with subtitles are output as dialogue, so subtitles are not displayed. However, even in such a specific scene, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) of the game effect lamp 9 is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. In this way, even in a scene where subtitles are not displayed for dialogue sounds, the effect can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. Thereby, the performance corresponding to the character can be suitably executed, and the inciting part can be suitably shown to the player. Also, Figures 64 (b8), (b9), Figure 74 (e7), Figure 94 (i32), Figure 95 (i34), Figure 104 (n10), Figure 123 (r25), (r27), Figure 124 (r29 ), as shown in Figures 125 (r31), (r33), and 126 (r35), even if a character has dialogue but no subtitles, a frame lamp is displayed in the color corresponding to the character. The brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that it lights up/blinks. As a result, even in scenes where subtitles are not displayed, it is possible to suitably express that the character is uttering lines by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, and it is possible to suitably show the production of the inciting part to the player. can.

[Inciting 8]
In a scene where a character appears, the light emitting means emits light in a color other than the color corresponding to the character.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 168 to 170, in scenes where characters appear (for example, r24, r26, r28, r30, r32, r34), the color corresponding to the corresponding character in the previous scene is Control is performed to light up the game effect lamp 9 in a color other than the color shown in FIG. Specifically, before the scene (r24), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in yellow (r22) or red (r23), and then the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in orange corresponding to the AD character. This is a scenario where the lights turn on. Also, before the scene of (r26), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/blinks in the orange color of (r25) or the white color of (r25'), and then the game effect lamp 9 lights up in blue color corresponding to the character of Maid A. This is the scenario. Also, before the scene of (r28), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in the blue color of (r27) or the white color of (r27'), and then the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in the blue color of (r27) and the color of Hawaiian blue corresponding to the character of Maid B. This is a scenario where the lights turn on. In addition, before the scene of (r30), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in the Hawaiian blue color of (r29) or the white color of (r29'), and then the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in the pink color corresponding to Nana's character. This is the scenario in which the light is lit. In addition, before the scene of (r32), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in the pink color of (r31) and the white color of (r31'), and then the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple color corresponding to the Jam-chan character. This is the scenario. In addition, before the scene of (r34), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple (r33) and white (r33'), and then the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to Yume-chan's character. becomes. In this way, before a character appears, control is performed to light up the game effect lamp 9 in a color different from the color corresponding to the relevant character, and then the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in the color corresponding to the character. Control takes place. Therefore, it is possible to express in the form of a lamp that the displayed character changes and to clearly indicate to the player which character the changed character is, which can be a suitable inciting part.

[Inciting 9]
The light emitting means emits light in a color corresponding to a character located on one side of the screen, and the light emitting means emits light in a color corresponding to a character located on the other side of the screen.

Specifically, Fig. 64 (b8), (b9), Fig. 74 (e7), Fig. 94 (i32), Fig. 95 (i34), Fig. 104 (n10), Fig. 123 (r25), (r27), Fig. As shown in Figure 124 (r29), Figure 125 (r31), (r33), and Figure 126 (r35), even if the character has dialogue but no subtitles, the color corresponding to the character The brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up/blinks. As a result, even in scenes where subtitles are not displayed, it is possible to suitably express that the character is uttering lines by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, and it is possible to suitably show the production of the inciting part to the player. can.

[Instigation 10]
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect is executed in the introduction part until the propriety of being controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and after the notification of the propriety or not, and when it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the advantageous condition. It consists of an epilogue part,
The introduction part is
a first scene in which a first character and a second character are displayed, and a dialogue sound emitted by the first character is output;
a second scene in which a first character and a second character are displayed, and a dialogue sound emitted by the second character is output;
The light emission control means includes:
In the first scene, controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the first scene,
In the second scene, controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the second scene,
In the brightness data table corresponding to the first scene, among the plurality of types of light emitting means, the light emitting means on the side where the first character is displayed is set to a light emitting color corresponding to the first character, and among the plurality of types of light emitting means, the second one When the luminance data in which the light emitting means on the side where the character is displayed is changed to a light emitting color corresponding to the second character is switched in response to the dialogue sound emitted by the first character, the first character among the plurality of types of light emitting means is switched. is configured such that the brightness of the light emitting means on the side where is displayed is switched, and the brightness of the light emitting means on the side where the second character is displayed among the plurality of types of light emitting means is not switched,
In the brightness data table corresponding to the second scene, among the plurality of types of light-emitting means, the light-emitting means on the side where the first character is displayed is set to the light-emitting color corresponding to the first character, and among the plurality of types of light-emitting means, the second When the luminance data in which the light-emitting means on the side where the character is displayed is changed to a light-emitting color corresponding to the second character is switched in response to the dialogue sound emitted by the second character, the first character among the plurality of types of light-emitting means The luminance of the light emitting means on the side where is displayed is not changed, but the brightness of the light emitting means on the side where the second character is displayed among the plurality of types of light emitting means is changed.

Specifically, when a character appears, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character, and when the character utters lines, the brightness data Luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp blinks in a color corresponding to . For example, in response to an effect where Yumu-chan, who is located on the left side of the screen, and Bakuchu, who is located on the right side of the screen, confront each other as shown in Figure 63 (b4), a green frame corresponding to Yumu-chan is created. Light up the left lamp, and light the right lamp in the frame in red, which corresponds to Bakuchu. At time tb5, the performance control CPU 120 creates a green frame corresponding to Yume-chan in response to the performance in which Yume-chan, who is located on the left side of the screen, utters lines as shown in FIG. 63 (b5). Make the left lamp blink. At time tb6, the production control CPU 120 displays a frame right lamp in red corresponding to Bakuchu in response to a production in which Bakuchu located on the right side of the screen utters lines as shown in FIG. 63 (b6). flash. As a result, in a scene where multiple characters uttering lines are displayed, which character is uttering lines can be appropriately expressed by lighting/blinking of the frame lamp, and the production in the inciting part can be suitably expressed in the game. can be shown to others.

[Instigation 11]
When the first character and the second character are displayed, dialogue subtitles are displayed in each of the scenes where the first character's dialogue sound is output and the second character's dialogue sound is output. , the serif subtitles are displayed in a certain font and at a certain position.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 63(b5) and 63(b6), there is a scene where each character speaks a line in a situation where an ally character and an enemy character are displayed. Under such circumstances, subtitles for lines are displayed in a fixed size and at a fixed display position. According to this, by not changing the display mode of lines for each character, it is possible to reduce the chances of bugs and the like getting angry.

[Instigation 12]
In the introduction part, there is a specific scene where the character's dialogue sounds and action sounds corresponding to the character's actions are output.
In the specific scene, the dialogue sound is output louder than the action sound.

Specifically, in the inciting part, there is a scene in which the BGM of SP Reach is output, and the dialogue sound and the physical sound (also referred to as action sound) are output at the same timing. When the dialogue sound and the physical sound are output at the same timing, the dialogue sound is output at a louder volume than the physical sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. According to this, by outputting physical sounds as part of the performance, the reality of the performance is created, and when the dialogue sound and physical sound overlap, the dialogue sound is output louder, so that the contents of the performance can be conveyed to the player. It can be easily communicated. Therefore, as a result, the performance in the inciting part can be shown better.

[Inciting 13]
Various sounds such as BGM, movement sounds, sound effects, and dialogue sounds are output in accordance with the production performed in the introduction part.
At the design stage, various sounds are output along with a display corresponding to the performance performed in the introduction part, and the volumes of the various sounds are adjusted.

Specifically, the working process when actually creating various performances in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained. First, in the pachinko game machine 1, videos for each effect corresponding to variable times such as SP reach are created. To match this video, special software is used to add production sounds such as background music, physical sounds, onomatopoeia, sound effects, and dialogue sounds one by one. The finished video and sound are played, and the strength of the sound is further added. In this series of work processes, rather than outputting sound with a sense of reality while maintaining the actual sense of distance on the video, it is better to abandon reality and output sound that ignores the actual sense of distance that is easier to convey to the player. The sound data is set as follows. Thereby, a series of performances can be suitably shown.

[Inciting 14]
When the output of the action sound and the output of the dialogue sound corresponding to one character overlap, the volume is adjusted so that the volume of the dialogue sound is louder than the volume of the action sound.

Specifically, when the character's physical sound and dialogue sound are outputted in a manner that overlaps with each other, the dialogue sound is adjusted and output so as to be heard louder than the physical sound. For example, when the physical sound and the dialogue sound are output in an overlapping manner, as shown in FIG. 166(B), the BGM of the SP reach is adjusted to be small in accordance with the output period of the dialogue sound. In this way, it is possible to make the content of the performance easier to convey to the players while creating a sense of reality.

[Instigation 15]
When the screen is viewed from the front, if the output of the dialogue sound of the first character who is far away overlaps with the output of the action sound of the second character who is closer, the volume of the dialogue sound will be higher than the volume of the action sound. The volume has been adjusted so that it becomes louder.

Specifically, when the dialogue sound of a character whose sense of distance to the player is far overlaps with the physical sound from which the player's sense of distance is closer, the sound is adjusted so that the dialogue sound is heard louder than the physical sound. Data is set. As a result, a sound is output that ignores the actual sense of distance that is easily conveyed to the player, abandoning reality, so that the content of the performance can be easily conveyed to the player.

[Instigation 16]
The volume of dialogue sound for which subtitles are not displayed differs between when the output of operation sound and dialogue sound overlaps and subtitles are not displayed, and when the output of operation sound and dialogue sound overlaps and subtitle display is performed. The volume is adjusted so that the volume of the dialogue sound used to display subtitles is louder than that of the subtitles.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 166(B) and (C), there is a difference between the case where the dialogue sound that overlaps with the physical sound has a subtitle, and the case where the dialogue sound that overlaps with the physical sound has no subtitle. When there are subtitles, the sound is adjusted to be louder by lowering the volume of SP Reach's BGM. Dialogue sounds with subtitles are more related to the content of SP reach than dialogue sounds without subtitles. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the content of the performance by outputting loud dialogue sounds with subtitles that are related to the content of the SP reach.

[Inciting 17]
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data according to time data set in an upper table,
The upper table includes a first upper table and a second upper table,
The brightness data table includes a specific brightness data table,
There is a notification effect that notifies whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect is executed in the introduction part until the propriety of being controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and after the notification of the propriety or not, and when it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the advantageous condition. It consists of an epilogue part,
The light emission control means includes:
In a first scene in the introduction part, controlling the light emitting means using a first upper table and a specific brightness data table,
In a second scene in the introduction part, controlling the light emitting means using a second upper table and a specific brightness data table,
The specific luminance data table used in the first scene in the introduction part and the specific luminance data table used in the second scene in the introduction part are a common luminance data table,
The specific luminance data table is composed of a plurality of luminance data, and is configured such that the total time for using each of the plurality of luminance data becomes the specific time,
The first upper table is composed of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table, and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a first time longer than the specific time,
The second upper table is composed of storage location data of the specific luminance data table and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a second time period longer than the specific time period.

Specifically, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W3 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table used in the inciting part, thereby controlling the frame lamp at a plurality of mutually different timings. While lighting the frame lamp in yellow, by controlling the lamp to vary the time for referring to the grandchild table W3 between a plurality of mutually different timings, it is possible to change the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow. As a result, one child table WD9 can be used for lamp control by changing its reference time while using the common grandchild table W3, without having to prepare separate grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings. While reducing data capacity, it is possible to vary the amount of time the frame lamp lights up in yellow, which corresponds to the background of SP Reach. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

[Inciting 18]
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data according to time data set in an upper table,
The upper table includes a first upper table and a second upper table,
The brightness data table includes a specific brightness data table,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect is executed in the introduction part until the propriety of being controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and after the notification of the propriety or not, and when it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the advantageous condition. It consists of an epilogue part,
The light emission control means includes:
In a first scene in the introduction part, controlling the light emitting means using a first upper table and a specific brightness data table,
In a second scene in the introduction part, controlling the light emitting means using a second upper table and a specific brightness data table,
The specific luminance data table used in the first scene in the introduction part and the specific luminance data table used in the second scene in the introduction part are a common luminance data table,
The specific luminance data table is composed of a plurality of luminance data, and is configured such that the total time for using each of the plurality of luminance data becomes the specific time,
The first upper table is composed of storage destination data of a specific luminance data table and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a specific time,
The second upper table is composed of storage location data of the specific luminance data table and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a predetermined time shorter than the specific time.

Specifically, the production control CPU 120 controls the frame lamp at a plurality of mutually different timings by performing lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table used in the inciting part. While blinking in white, the number of times the frame lamp blinks in white can be made two or three times by varying the time to refer to the grandchild table W4 using the lamp control between multiple different timings. Can be done. As a result, by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of a plurality of different timings, the data capacity used for lamp control can be reduced. The number of white flashes can be varied. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

[Inciting 19]
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data according to time data set in an upper table,
The upper table includes a first upper table and a second upper table,
The brightness data table includes a specific brightness data table,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect is executed in the introduction part until the propriety of being controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and after the notification of the propriety or not, and when it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the advantageous condition. It consists of an epilogue part,
The notification performance includes a first notification performance and a second notification performance,
The light emission control means includes:
In the first scene of the introduction part in the first notification performance, controlling the light emitting means using the first upper table and the specific brightness data table,
In the first scene of the introduction part in the second notification effect, controlling the light emitting means using a second upper table and a specific brightness data table,
The specific brightness data table used in one scene of the introduction part in the first notification effect and the specific brightness data table used in one scene of the introduction part in the second notification effect are a common brightness data table,
The specific luminance data table is composed of a plurality of luminance data, and is configured such that the total time for using each of the plurality of luminance data becomes the specific time,
The first upper table is composed of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table, and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a first time longer than the specific time,
The second upper table is composed of storage location data of the specific luminance data table and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a second time period longer than the specific time period.

Specifically, child table WD9 used in the promotion part of SP second half reach A, child table WD12 used in the promotion part of SP second half reach B, and child table WD15 used in the promotion part of SP final reach. , instead of preparing separate grandchild tables for each of multiple different timings, the reference time can be changed while using the common grandchild table W3, reducing the amount of data used for ramp control in multiple reach effects. At the same time, it is possible to vary the amount of time the frame lamp is lit in yellow, which corresponds to the background of SP Reach. Similarly, for the child table WD2 used in the promotion part of SP first half reach A and the child table WD5 used in the promotion part of SP first half reach B, separate grandchild tables are prepared at each of a plurality of mutually different timings. By changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W3, the amount of data used for lamp control can be reduced, and the time to light the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the background of SP reach can be varied. Good too.

[Instigation 20]
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data according to time data set in an upper table,
The upper table includes a first upper table and a second upper table,
The brightness data table includes a specific brightness data table,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect is executed in the introduction part until the propriety of being controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and after the notification of the propriety or not, and when it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the advantageous condition. It consists of an epilogue part,
The notification performance includes a first notification performance and a second notification performance,
The light emission control means includes:
In the first scene of the introduction part in the first notification performance, controlling the light emitting means using the first upper table and the specific brightness data table,
In the first scene of the introduction part in the second notification effect, controlling the light emitting means using a second upper table and a specific brightness data table,
The specific brightness data table used in one scene of the introduction part in the first notification effect and the specific brightness data table used in one scene of the introduction part in the second notification effect are a common brightness data table,
The specific luminance data table is composed of a plurality of luminance data, and is configured such that the total time for using each of the plurality of luminance data becomes the specific time,
The first upper table is composed of storage destination data of a specific luminance data table and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a specific time,
The second upper table is composed of storage location data of the specific luminance data table and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a predetermined time shorter than the specific time.

[Inciting 21]
In the introduction part, there is a specific scene where the first dialogue subtitle is displayed for the first dialogue sound emitted by the character, and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed for the second dialogue sound emitted by the character.
In a specific scene, the display of the second dialogue subtitle starts while the first dialogue subtitle is displayed, and then the display of the first dialogue subtitle ends and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed. Then,
A fade effect is applied at least either when displaying the first serif subtitle ends or when displaying the second serif subtitle starts.

Specifically, in the provocation part, as shown in FIG. 178(A), there is a scene in which subtitles are displayed for the character's dialogue. When subtitles are displayed, there is a period in which the first subtitles are displayed so that the first subtitle display period overlaps with the second subtitle display period that is displayed next. A fade effect is applied when the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed so as to overlap. A fade effect causes a change in the transparency of the displayed characters with different states. According to this, even if the subtitles are displayed so as to overlap, the change in the subtitles is made easier to understand due to the fade effect, so that the switching of the subtitles can be made easier to understand.

[Instigation 22]
In an exciting scene where multiple characters confront each other,
When one character's dialogue sound is output, the first subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed, and then when the other character's dialogue sound is output, the second subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed. is,
The second subtitle is displayed with a transparency of 50% so as to overlap the part where the first subtitle is displayed with a transparency of 0%, and then when the second subtitle is displayed with a transparency of 0%, the first subtitle is displayed. ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 178(A), in a scene where characters confront each other, a first subtitle corresponding to one character's line is displayed, followed by a second subtitle corresponding to another character's line. subtitles may be displayed. In this case, the second subtitle is displayed at a transmittance of 70%, overlapping the location where the first subtitle is displayed at a transmittance of 0%. After that, the first subtitle fades out, and the second subtitle fades in, resulting in a display with a transmittance of 0%. According to this, even when the subtitles are displayed so as to overlap, the switching of the subtitles is easy to understand due to the fade effect.

[Inciting 23]
The dialogue sound corresponding to the second subtitle is
When the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed so as to overlap, and at least one of them has a fade effect, they are not output,
Output when only the second subtitle is displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 179, the output timing of the dialogue sound corresponding to the second subtitle "found" is such that the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed so that they overlap, and a fade effect is added. It is not output during the period. Then, the dialogue sound corresponding to the second subtitle is output from when the second subtitle is displayed with a transparency of 0%. According to this, the switching of subtitles is easy to understand due to the fade effect, and since the dialogue sound is output after the second subtitle is displayed, it is possible to easily understand the content of the performance visually and audibly.

[Inciting 24]
In an advantageous state, the music is output and the lyrics are displayed,
When switching from displaying the first subtitle to displaying the second subtitle in lyrics display, no fade effect is applied to the display of any subtitle.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 178 (B), during the jackpot round, a performance in which the characters sing along with the music is performed. Subtitles (lyrics) are then displayed as the song progresses. However, during the jackpot round, even if subtitles (lyrics) are continuously displayed, no fade effect is applied. This is because when a song is playing, the progress of the song can be understood by the rhythm, so even if the subtitles (lyrics) are switched without adding a fade effect, it is easy to understand the timing of the change. In addition, since the music during the jackpot round is a representative music of the content installed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the lyrics to be displayed next are easy for the player to understand even without adding a fade effect. According to this, it is possible to omit the work of adding a fade effect during the jackpot round, and it is possible to make a series of performances look good.

[Inciting 25]
In both the introduction part and the epilogue part, the character's dialogue sounds may overlap,
The proportion of dialogue sounds that overlap is higher in the introduction part than in the epilogue part.

Specifically, although not shown, the timing of subtitle display may overlap even in the epilogue part. However, as shown in FIG. 180, in the epilogue part, there are many scenes in which the period from subtitle display to subtitle display is longer than that in the provocation part. This is because the direction in the incitement part progresses quickly, and the direction in the epilogue part does not progress as quickly as in the incitement part. As a result, the provocation part is displayed at a higher rate than the epilogue part when the subtitles overlap. In such a case, by effectively applying a fade effect to the subtitle display, it is possible to prevent the user from feeling uncomfortable when switching between subtitles.

[Instigation 26]
Even in certain scenes where subtitles do not overlap,
A fade effect is applied when subtitles are displayed or when the subtitles disappear.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 180, a fade effect is applied to the subtitle display even in predetermined scenes in the portions (o3) to (o5) where the first subtitle and the second subtitle do not overlap. As for the fade effect, at least one of fade-in and fade-out may be applied. In the subtitle display created after the video is created, it is time-consuming to add a fade effect depending on whether the subtitle display overlaps or not. Therefore, by uniformly applying a fade effect to subtitle display, it is possible to prevent the workload from increasing.

[Inciting 27]
The display of the first subtitle without a fade effect and the display of the second subtitle may be swapped,
It may be possible to provide a blank period in which nothing is displayed between the display of the first subtitle and the display of the second subtitle, but this may create a sense of discomfort if long dialogue sounds or fast-paced dialogue sounds are output. Therefore, the blank period is not provided.

Specifically, FIG. 181 is a diagram for explaining a comparative example of subtitle display. For example, as shown in Comparative Example 1 in FIG. 181(A), subtitles for similar lines such as "I found it" and "I found it" may be displayed consecutively. In such a case, if the subtitle display is switched without any fade effect or blank period, it will be difficult to understand the subtitle display switching. Furthermore, when displaying subtitles for long lines or for lines that progress quickly, an unnatural feeling may occur if the subtitles are switched without providing a blank period. In such a case, the sense of discomfort can be eliminated by adding a fade effect to the subtitle display. Furthermore, as shown in Comparative Example 2 in FIG. 181(B), it is also possible to overlay "found" on the subtitle display of "found" and then display "found". In such a case, subtitle display becomes difficult to see by not adding a fade effect. Furthermore, as shown in Comparative Example 3 in FIG. 181(C), it is also possible to display the subtitle display of "I found it" and the subtitle display of "I found it" in two upper and lower rows. In such a case, the subtitle display reduces the area for displaying the effect, which impedes the effect in areas other than the area where the subtitle display is displayed. On the other hand, such a problem can be solved by adding a fade effect to subtitle display as in the present embodiment.

[Inciting cut-in 1]
The display means is
In the introduction part, a promotion display is displayed to encourage the player to perform a specific action, and when the specific action is performed, a cut-in display is performed,
In the introduction part, a dialogue sound emitted by the character is output, and a dialogue subtitle is displayed in a specific area of the display means for the dialogue sound,
At the timing of the promotion display in the introduction part, dialogue subtitles are not displayed in a specific area,
The brightness data table includes a cut-in display brightness data table corresponding to the cut-in display and an introduction part brightness data table corresponding to the introduction part,
The light emitting means for which brightness data is set in the cut-in display brightness data table includes at least the same location as the light emitting means for which brightness data is set in the introduction part brightness data table.

Specifically, the brightness data of the lamp control in the cut-in effect and the button display for the cut-in effect (RGB data in grandchild tables W4, W5, W6) is the same as the lamp control in the inciting part of the SP final reach. Designed to work with spot frame lamps. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary lighting/blinking of lamps from being mixed in and spoil the aesthetic appearance, and it is possible to provide a suitable performance in the inciting part.

[Inciting cut-in 2]
Dialogue subtitles are displayed in the scene before the button where the promotion display is performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 127 (r39) to 128 (r42) described above, at the timing when the cut-in display is executed, the subtitle display is displayed before the button image promotion display is displayed. . According to this, the button image can be continuously shown to the player who is watching the screen with attention to the subtitle display, so that the button image can be prevented from being overlooked, and the cut-in display can be suitably executed. Can be done.

[Inciting cut-in 3]
At the timing when the cut-in display ends, the subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sounds are not displayed, and after a period in which the dialogue sounds are not output, the dialogue sounds are output and the subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sounds are displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 128 (r41) to FIG. 130 (r47) described above, the design is such that there is no dialogue for a predetermined period after the cut-in display is completed. Then, after a predetermined period of time without dialogue has elapsed, a dialogue is uttered, and subtitles are displayed for the dialogue. According to this, the player can be made to concentrate on the performance during the period after the cut-in display, and a suitable cut-in display can be achieved.

[True or false 1]
In the success/failure reporting part,
The player is informed as to whether or not the game is controlled to be advantageous;
A promotional display is displayed to encourage the player to perform a specific action.
It is executed between the introduction part and the epilogue part,
The movable body moves after the promotion display is performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 132 (r54) described above, the scene where the decision was made was between the provocation part and the epilogue part. In the scene of determining whether or not the game is a jackpot, the player is notified of whether or not he or she has won the jackpot by operating a trigger as an operating means. In addition, in the scene of deciding whether to win or not, the accessory was moved after the trigger was operated in case of a jackpot. According to this, the interest of the performance is improved by creating a scene where a suitable decision is made using the operating means.

[True or false 2]
In the success/failure notification part that is executed after the introduction part,
By performing the introductory display of the promotion display while the development display is being performed before the promotion display is performed, the development display becomes invisible, and then the promotion display is performed while the development display is visible. .

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 130 (r47) to 132 (r54) above, subtitles are displayed by the ally character before the image corresponding to the operating means is displayed, and then the subtitles corresponding to the operating means are displayed. The screen makes it impossible to see the performance that was being performed. Then, the performance that was executed after that can be recognized again together with the image of the operating means. According to this, it is possible to give an impact by displaying the introduction of the operation means over the entire screen, and to display the performance that was being executed properly at the timing when the operation means can be operated, so that the progress of the performance can be shown in a suitable manner. .

[True or false 3]
The expanded display is performed on the back side of the introduction display.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 130 (r48) to 131 (r51) described above, introduction images (images (r49) to (r50)) for enabling the operation means are displayed. The performance is also in progress. According to this, by allowing the performance to proceed in the background, it is possible to draw attention to the image (image (r51)) in which the operating means can be operated, and also to draw attention to the development of the performance.

[True or false 4]
The expansion display is performed while the promotion display is being performed.

Specifically, in FIGS. 132 (r51) to 132 (r54) described above, when the trigger image is displayed as a promotion display, the tail moves slightly every time the image of Bakuchu changes. was. In this way, the performance may be performed while the promotion display is being displayed. Here, the progress of the presentation may include scene changes and character movements, rather than just the movement of the tail. According to this, it is possible to draw attention to the development of the performance during the promotion display.

[True or false 5]
When the expansion display is performed while the promotion display is being performed, the expansion display progresses more slowly than before the promotion display is performed.

Specifically, the performance that progresses while the promotion display is being displayed is slower than the performance that was being executed before the promotion display was displayed. According to this, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the promotion display for operating the operating means, and it is possible to maintain a balance between the promotion display and the progress of the performance. Note that the performance that progresses while the promotion display is being displayed may progress at a slower speed than the performance that progresses while the introduction image is being displayed. According to this, the speed of progress of the performance can be made different between when the promotion display is being displayed and when the introduction image is being displayed.

[True or false 6]
An echo is applied to the dialogue sound before the introductory display.

Specifically, it is preferable to apply an echo to the lines before the introduction image as shown in FIG. 130 (r47) described above is displayed. According to this, the players can be excited before the introduction image is displayed.

[True or false 7]
The introduction display is performed after the output of the dialogue sound that was being displayed while the expansion display was being performed before the promotion display is performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 130 (r47) to FIG. 131 (r49) described above, the introduction image is displayed after the subtitle display before the introduction image is displayed is deleted. According to this, it is possible to prevent the display timings of the introduction image and the subtitle display from overlapping.

[True or false 8]
The introduction part consists of a predetermined period and a slow motion period after the predetermined period and before the success/failure notification.
During a predetermined period, the movement of the character is depicted using a plurality of image data,
During the slow motion period, an effect is added to one piece of image data to depict the movement of the character.

Specifically, the scene before the determination of the validity of (r48) in the provocation part is a slow motion period in which the movement of the video is slowed down. Also, the effect executed before (r48) depicts the character's movement from multiple image data, whereas the effect executed in (r48) depicts the image of Bakuchu and the six allies. This is done using images. Then, the image of the friendly character and the image of the enemy character are gradually enlarged and displayed over time to make it appear as if the characters are moving. Here, if a video is created using the same amount of image data during the slow motion period as during the non-slow motion periods, the amount of data will be small and the motion will be awkward. However, if a large amount of data is used to smooth the movement during the slow motion period, the capacity will become too large. Therefore, the data capacity can be reduced by reducing the number of images used during the slow motion period and by switching and enlarging the display to make it appear as if the character is moving. Note that the number of images used in the slow-motion period may be any number as long as it is smaller than in the periods other than the slow-motion period.

[True or false 9]
There is a production that includes an introduction part where friendly characters and enemy characters appear, and a conclusion part after the introduction part.
In the introductory part, there is a predetermined period in which scenes in which allies are displayed and scenes in which enemies are displayed alternate.
It is possible to move to the final part by performing an action by the player while the promotion display is being displayed during a predetermined period.
During a predetermined period of time, the speed at which scenes in which allies are displayed and scenes in which enemies are displayed gradually increases, and the promotion display is performed after the speed becomes the fastest.
Even in the depiction of scenes in which allies are displayed and scenes in which enemies are displayed, each of the enemies and allies is reproduced in one image data.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 191(B), the image switching speed between the image of the friendly character and the image of the enemy character gradually becomes faster. According to this, a promotion display prompting the trigger operation will be displayed after the image switching speed becomes the fastest, so a scene will develop where the friendly character has an advantage, or the enemy character will have an advantage. It becomes possible to stimulate the development of the game, increasing interest. Furthermore, by alternately switching the images, it is possible to make it difficult to notice that one image is used for each of the friendly character and the enemy character.

[True or false 10]
The above-mentioned predetermined period in which scenes in which allies are displayed and scenes in which enemies are displayed are alternately applied to scenes in which a reach effect develops from one reach effect to another reach effect.

Specifically, the slow motion period effect in (r48) may be performed at the timing of development from SP first half reach to SP second half reach and SP final reach. According to this, it is possible to suitably perform the performance even at the timing when the SP first half reach develops.

[True or false 11]
The enemy character is depicted using a plurality of image data in order to change a part of the enemy character, but the image data of the enemy character itself is used and only the part is changed.

Specifically, in the slow motion period in (r48), at least one of the ally character and the enemy character may be configured using two or more images. For example, if it is an ally character, you can make it look like the character's hair and clothes are gradually moving by repeatedly using four images: image 1, image 2, image 3, image 4, image 1... good. According to this, by reusing the data of the character itself and changing only part of the data, it is possible to more faithfully represent the movement of the character while reducing the amount of work required to change the data.

[True or false 12]
During the slow motion period, a portion of the character changes.

Specifically, in the slow motion period in (r48), when making it appear that the character's hair and clothes gradually move from multiple images, the movement of the hair and clothes is the same as that of periods other than the slow motion period. It may be designed to appear to move at speed. Here, if the number of images is increased to match the slow motion motion in order to make the motion appear smooth during the slow motion period, the capacity will increase. However, by speeding up the movement during the slow motion period, the movement does not become jerky even if the number of images used is reduced, and it is possible to more faithfully represent the movement while reducing the amount of data. can.

[True or false 13]
In the period before moving from the introduction part to the success/failure notification part in the first notification performance,
The display means performs a promotion display to encourage a specific action by the player;
The sound output means continues to output sound,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using the first notification effect brightness data table,
In the period before the transition from the introduction part to the success/failure notification part in the second notification performance,
The display means does not display a promotion display that prompts a specific action, but displays a display that encourages correctness or disapproval.
The sound output means does not output sound,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using the second notification effect brightness data table,
The first notification effect brightness data table is configured so that the brightness data changes,
The second notification effect brightness data table is configured so that the brightness data does not change.

Specifically, in the SP reach effect where no operation promotion is performed to encourage the player to perform an operation in the win/fail branch, by muting the sound and keeping the frame lamp lit in white, the effect appears as if the effect has stopped. The performance can be shown to the player, and the win/fail branch (timing of decision) can be clearly communicated to the player. On the other hand, in the SP reach performance where operation promotion is performed to encourage the player to perform an operation in a win/fail situation, a sound corresponding to the operation promotion and a sound (BGM) corresponding to the reach are output, and furthermore, the operation promotion By switching and using the grandchild table multiple times in order to control the frame lamp in a mode corresponding to the above, it is possible to suitably produce the timing for deciding whether or not to make a decision based on the lighting mode of the frame lamp. In this way, the timing of deciding whether to decide whether to decide whether to decide whether to decide whether or not to win can be suitably produced by different sound control and lamp control depending on whether operation promotion is not performed or when operation is promoted in the case of a judgment or failure.

[True or false 14]
When the promotion display is not performed, the display changes in the following order: a first display period consisting of a moving image, a second display period consisting of a still image, and a third display period consisting of a moving image that branches depending on whether the display is valid or not.

Specifically, from FIG. 95 (i36) to FIG. 96 (i39) described above, the image in which the two characters Yume-chan and Jam-chan are displayed is gradually enlarged, and the timing of (i39) is Now, one image is displayed while remaining still for a predetermined period of time. After that, if you hit the jackpot, the winning epilogue part will be shown, and if you lose, the losing epilogue part will be shown. During the period in which one image is displayed stationary for a predetermined period of time, one image can be reused and used, so it is possible to reduce the data capacity and suitably stimulate the scene of determination of validity. In addition, during the period in which the images in which the two characters are displayed are gradually enlarged and displayed, more images (for example, 10 images) than shown in FIGS. 95 (i36) to 96 (i39) are displayed. May be used.

[True or false 15]
The scenario for controlling the light emitting means using brightness data when no promotional display is performed is as follows:
a first scenario corresponding to a first display period;
a second scenario corresponding to a second display period;
There is a third scenario corresponding to the third display period,
The first scenario is a scenario in which multiple pieces of brightness data are switched,
The second scenario is a scenario in which predetermined brightness data is maintained,
The third scenario is a scenario in which multiple pieces of brightness data are switched.

Specifically, in child table WD9 in reach A in the second half of the SP, there is no operation promotion, and after the frame lamp flashes in white based on grandchild table W7, the frame lamp lights up in white based on grandchild table W8. . Specifically, the final brightness data (RGB data) of grandchild table W7, "FDC" (white lighting), is used for the right/fail decision in the incitement part of reach A in the second half of the SP where no operation promotion is performed. In addition, since the brightness data (RGB data) of the grandchild table W8 is designed, it is possible to clearly communicate the win/fail branch (timing of decision) to the player without increasing the data capacity used for lamp control too much. can.

[True or false 16]
When a promotion display is performed, the display changes in the order of a first display period in which an introductory display is performed before the promotion display is performed, a second display period consisting of a moving image, and a third display period consisting of a moving image that branches depending on whether it is correct or not. do.

Specifically, from FIG. 131 (r49) to FIG. 132 (r54) described above, the display period of the introductory image is such that the images corresponding to the stick controller 31A (trigger) are gathered in the center of the screen. be. After that, there is a period in which a prompt to operate the trigger is displayed. During the display period of the promotion display, a plurality of images are gradually moved to make it appear as if the character is moving. Thereafter, by operating the trigger at a branching scene to determine whether the game is a success or not, if it is a jackpot, the video of the winning epilogue part will be played, and if it is a loss, the video of the losing epilogue part will be played. All of these periods are periods in which the video is dynamically displayed so that it appears to be moving. According to this, a series of performances can be executed in a dynamic flow, and a suitable flow of performances can be achieved.

[True or false 17]
The scenario for controlling the light emitting means using brightness data when promoting display is performed is as follows.
a first scenario corresponding to a first display period;
a second scenario corresponding to a second display period;
There is a third scenario corresponding to the third display period,
The first scenario is a scenario in which multiple pieces of brightness data are switched,
The second scenario is a scenario in which multiple pieces of brightness data are switched,
The third scenario is a scenario in which multiple pieces of brightness data are switched.

Specifically, in the child table WD15 in the SP final reach, as shown in FIGS. 131 (r49) to 132 (r54), sounds corresponding to operation promotion and sounds (BGM) corresponding to reach are output. In this state, the frame lamp will be switched one after another, such as flashing white, lighting red, and flashing red, thereby making it possible to enhance the performance that encourages the player to operate at the winning/failing branch (deciding timing).

[True or false 18]
As a flow from the success/failure notification part,
When it is determined that the vehicle will not be controlled to an advantageous state, a display indicating that the vehicle will not be controlled to an advantageous state is displayed, and then a display corresponding to the normal background is displayed.

Specifically, the winning epilogue part and the losing epilogue part after the success/failure determination scenes shown in FIG. 133 (s1) to FIG. 136 (s10) and FIG. 137 (u1) to FIG. 138 (u4) described above will be explained. In the winning epilogue part, a video corresponding to the winning epilogue part is played after the performance of the character's action. In addition, in the lose-lose epilogue part, the screen turns black after the effect corresponding to the lose-lose epilogue part, and then returns to the normal screen. According to this, since the flow is such that a plurality of images are switched after the scene where the decision is made, a suitable flow of presentation can be achieved.

[True or false 19]
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the propriety of being controlled in the advantageous state is notified, and an introduction part after the notification of the propriety of being controlled in the advantageous condition. and a first epilogue part in which it is announced that the control is in the advantageous state,
The notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the propriety of being controlled to the advantageous condition is notified, and a part after the notification of the propriety or rejection. a second epilogue part in which it is announced that the control is not controlled in the advantageous state;
The light emission control means includes:
In the introduction part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the introduction part,
in a second epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
The luminance data used first in the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part is set lower in luminance than the luminance data used last in the luminance data table corresponding to the introduction part.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 261, when transitioning to the losing epilogue part via the inciting parts in each of SP first half reach A, B and SP second half reach A, B, the final brightness data in the inciting part ( While the RGB data) is "FDC", the first luminance data (RGB data) in the lose epilogue part is "888" or "444". As a result, in the event of a loss in each of SP first half reaches A and B and SP second half reaches A and B, it is possible to use the white lighting at the win/fail branch to maintain the same color while lighting the frame lamp darker in white. Therefore, it is possible to suitably notify the player of the loss. In addition, when moving to the losing epilogue part via the inciting part in the SP final reach, the final brightness data (RGB data) in the inciting part includes "D00", but the first brightness in the losing epilogue part The data (RGB data) is "888" or "444". Thereby, when there is a loss in the SP final reach, the frame lamp can be lit in white, darker than the flashing red in the win/fail branch, so that the player can be suitably informed of the loss.

[True or false 20]
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification performance includes a first notification performance and a second notification performance,
The first notification effect for notifying that the control will be in the advantageous state includes an introductory part until it is announced whether or not the control will be in the advantageous state, and a part after the notification that the control is in the advantageous state. It is composed of an epilogue part in which it is announced that it will be controlled,
The first notification effect that notifies the user that the control will not be in the advantageous state includes an introductory part until it is announced whether or not the control will be in the advantageous state, and a first part that will be performed after the notification of whether or not the control is in the advantageous state. It is composed of an epilogue part in which it is announced that it will not be done,
The second notification effect for notifying that the control is to be in the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the propriety of being controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and a part after the notification of whether or not the control is to be carried out to the advantageous condition. It is composed of an epilogue part in which it is announced that it will be controlled,
The second notification effect that notifies the user that the control will not be in the advantageous state includes an introductory part until it is announced whether or not the control will be in the advantageous state, and a second part that will be performed after the notification of whether or not the control is in the advantageous state. It is composed of an epilogue part in which it is announced that it will not be done,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data according to time data set in an upper table,
The upper table includes a first upper table, a second upper table, a third upper table, and a fourth upper table,
The brightness data table includes a first notification effect brightness data table, a second notification effect brightness data table, and a specific brightness data table,
The light emission control means includes:
In the introduction part of the first notification effect to notify that the control is not controlled to the advantageous state, controlling the light emitting means using a first upper table and a first notification effect brightness data table,
In the introduction part of the second notification effect to notify that the control is not controlled to the advantageous state, controlling the light emitting means using a second upper table and a second notification effect brightness data table,
In the epilogue part of the first notification effect to notify that the control is not controlled to the advantageous state, controlling the light emitting means using a third upper table and a specific brightness data table,
In the epilogue part of the second notification performance that notifies that the control is not controlled to the advantageous state, controlling the light emitting means using a fourth upper table and a specific brightness data table,
A specific brightness data table used in an epilogue part in a first notification performance that notifies that the control will not be in the advantageous state, and a specific brightness data table that is used in the epilogue part in the second notification performance that notifies that the control is not in the advantageous state. is a common brightness data table,
The third upper table is composed of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table and time data for using the specific luminance data table for the first time,
The fourth upper table is composed of storage location data of the specific luminance data table and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a second time period different from the first time period.

Specifically, child table WD4 of SP first half reach A, child table WD7 of SP first half reach B, child table WD11 of SP second half reach A, and child table WD14 of SP second half reach B are also child tables of SP final reach. Similar to WD17, the frame lamp is lit in the lighting mode at the time of a loss based on the grandchild table W14. However, the performance control CPU 120 controls the frame lamp for 5800 msec based on the grandchild table W14 in the SP first half reach A, B and the SP second half reach A, B, whereas in the SP final reach, it controls the frame lamp for 3900 msec. During this time, the frame lamp is controlled based on the grandchild table W14. In this way, while the grandchild table used for ramp control in the event of a loss is common among a plurality of different reaches, the time for performing ramp control with reference to the grandchild table can be made different. As a result, in the child table used in each of the different reaches, the reference time can be changed while using the common grandchild table W4 without having to prepare a grandchild table for use in case of a loss in each of the different reaches. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the amount of data used for lamp control and to vary the time during which the frame lamp is lit depending on the lighting mode corresponding to the failure. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of a loss in a suitable manner for each of the plurality of reaches.

[True or false 21]
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state is as follows:
It is configured to include an introduction part until the propriety of being controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and a first epilogue part after the notification of the propriety and failure to be controlled to the advantageous condition is notified. The first pattern to be
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state includes an introductory part until it is announced whether or not it will be controlled in the advantageous state, and an introduction part after the notification is made as to whether or not it will be controlled in the advantageous state. A second pattern includes a second epilogue part in which the user is notified that the control will not be in the advantageous state, and a relief notification part that is executed after the second epilogue part and is notified that the control is in the advantageous state. There is,
The notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the propriety of being controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and after the notification of the propriety or non-control. a second epilogue part in which it is announced that the control is not controlled in the advantageous state;
The light emission control means includes:
In a second epilogue part in the second pattern notification effect, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part,
In the relief notification part of the notification performance of the second pattern, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the relief notification part;
The brightness data used first in the brightness data table corresponding to the relief notification part is set higher in brightness than the brightness data used last in the brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part.

[Loss 1]
As a flow from the success/failure notification part,
When it has been determined that the game will not be controlled into an advantageous state, an image of the situation where it has been determined that the game will not be controlled into an advantageous state is displayed, and a decorative pattern notifies the user of the decision that the game will not be controlled into an advantageous state. When the epilogue part is executed,
After that, a switching display is performed, and the image is switched to an image corresponding to the background at the start of the reach.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 188, if the game is a loss after the determination of success or failure, a loss pattern is displayed during the blackout background in the loss epilogue part. After that, a switching image based on the eye-catching screen is displayed, and then the screen switches to the normal background at the start of the reach. According to this, by using the eye-catching screen, it is possible to suitably show the switching of the screen when the game loses.

[Loss 2]
In the epilogue part at the time of loss, the image when it is determined that it will not be controlled to an advantageous state is displayed in blackout, and the middle symbol of the decorative symbol is displayed in fade-in.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 189, in the loss epilogue part, the background at the time of loss gradually blacks out, and the middle symbol gradually fades in. According to this, since the image at the time of a loss and the medium symbol are displayed in inverse proportion to each other due to the relationship between blackout and fade-in, the display at the time of a loss can be made to look suitable due to the relationship between the two.

[Loss 3]
When blacking out an image when it is determined that it will not be controlled in an advantageous state, the number of stages from 100% to 0% for the transmittance of one image is to change the transmittance of the medium pattern image to 100%. This is more than the number of stages from % to 0%.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 189, in the loss epilogue part, the number of stages required to black out the background at the time of loss from 100% to 0% transparency is as follows: This is more than the number of steps required to fade in from 0% to 0%. Specifically, the blackout of the background is in 8 steps from (X11) to (X18), while the fade-in of the middle pattern is in 6 steps from (X12) to (X17). According to this, the image at the time of loss and the middle symbol are displayed in inverse proportion due to the relationship between blackout and fade-in, and the number of stages of change in transmittance is different, so the display at the time of loss depends on the relationship between the two. can be displayed in a suitable manner.

[Loss 4]
Blacking out of the image when it is determined that it will not be controlled in an advantageous state is performed earlier than fading in of the middle design of the decorative design.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 189, the change in which the background blacks out at the time of a loss starts earlier than the change in which the middle symbol fades in. According to this, the image at the time of a loss and the middle symbol are displayed in inverse proportion to each other due to the relationship between blackout and fade-in, and since the blackout is faster than the fade-in of the symbol, the loss occurs due to the relationship between the two. It is possible to display the time in a suitable manner.

[Loss 5]
When it is determined that the image will not be controlled to the advantageous state before blackout, the cut of the displayed image will change,
When it is determined that the image will not be controlled in an advantageous state for blackout, the cut of the displayed image does not change.

Specifically, the image displayed at the time of the loss before the blackout changes, whereas the image displayed at the time of the blackout does not change. According to this, blackout can be made to look suitable by starting blackout when the image remains unchanged. Note that switching images includes switching the picture on the screen, switching the angle of the video, and switching the displayed scene itself. In addition, the expression "no change in the image" includes that the image is the same still image, that the angle of the image does not change even if it is a moving image, and that even if the image is moving, only a part of the image moves slightly.

[Loss 6]
The image when it is determined that it will not be controlled in an advantageous state blacks out, and the middle symbol of the decorative symbol fades in. As a result, the transmittance of the middle symbol becomes 0%, and the 1 required for blackout. The period in which the transmittance of each image is 0% is maintained for a predetermined period,
During a predetermined period, the pattern itself oscillates for at least two cycles,
The predetermined period is longer than the period during which the medium symbol image changes from a state of 100% transmittance to a state of 0% transmittance, and longer than a period during which switching display is performed.

Specifically, at the time of a loss, the background blacked out and the medium symbol faded in, resulting in a medium symbol with a transmittance of 0%, as shown in (X18) to (X20). A blacked-out background with a transmittance of 0% is displayed for a predetermined period of time. This predetermined period includes symbol fluctuation periods as shown in (X19) to (X20). The symbol shaking period may be such that the symbol oscillates repeatedly for at least two cycles, with one cycle being the period in which the middle symbol is moved from the center position to the upper position, the center position, the lower position, and the center position. The predetermined period including such a period may be set to be longer than the period during which the fade-in is executed from the state where the medium symbol changes from 100% transmittance to 0% transmittance. Further, the predetermined period may be set longer than the period during which the eye catch is displayed. According to this, in a display in which the background is blacked out with a transmittance of 0%, there is a predetermined period in which the middle symbol is displayed in a clear state, so that it is possible to suitably show that the player has lost.

[Lose 7]
The switching display is a display configured to include information regarding the gaming machine.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 188 and 189, on the eye-catching screen, information about the pachinko machine 1 includes the title "POWER FULII" and the main characters Yume-chan, Jam-chan, and Nana-chan. The image will be displayed. According to this, information about the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be accurately conveyed using the eye-catching image.

[Loss 8]
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the control will be in an advantageous state is an introduction part until the notification is made as to whether or not the control will be controlled in an advantageous state, and an introductory part that is carried out after the notification is made as to whether or not the control will be controlled in an advantageous state. a first epilogue part in which it is announced that the state is controlled;
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the control will not be in an advantageous state is the introduction part until the notification is made as to whether or not the control will be controlled in an advantageous state, and the introductory part that is carried out after the notification of whether or not the control is in an advantageous state. and a second epilogue part in which it is announced that it is not controlled by
The display means are
In the second epilogue part, a display is displayed to notify that it is not controlled to an advantageous state,
After that, a switching display is performed,
After that, display the background,
After that, triggered by the symbol confirmation command, the symbol is stopped and displayed,
After that, with the fluctuation command as a trigger, the fluctuation display of the symbol starts,
The light emission control means is
In the second epilogue part, using the brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means for production,
When the switching display is performed, the luminance data table is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the switching display, and the lighting means for production is controlled;
When the background display is performed, the luminance data table is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the background display, and the lighting means for production is controlled;
When a symbol is stopped and displayed, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for stopping the fourth symbol, the light emitting means for the fourth symbol is controlled, and the brightness data table corresponding to the background display is continuously used. to control the lighting means for production,
When the fluctuating display of symbols is started, the luminance data table is switched to the luminance data table for the fourth symbol variation, the light emitting means for the fourth symbol is controlled, and the luminance data table corresponding to the background display is continued. It is used to control the light emitting means for production.

Specifically, the characteristic parts of the detailed explanatory diagram of the game effect lamp 9 at the time of losing will be explained. The production screen will be switched to the image of the loss after the performance of the success/fail decision. Thereafter, after a blackout display in which the losing display result is displayed, the screen is switched to an eye-catching screen. Furthermore, after that, a screen is displayed in which the symbols are fixed and stopped after switching to the normal screen. Further, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table at the time of success/failure determination to the brightness data table at the time of loss. Thereafter, the display is switched to a brightness data table for switching (eye-catching). Furthermore, after that, the table is switched to the background luminance data table at the start of the fluctuation. Here, at the timing of switching to the eye-catching screen, the brightness data table is switched to a brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching). Furthermore, the brightness data table is switched to the background brightness data table at the timing when the screen is switched to the normal screen. The special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 is switched from blinking to off upon receiving the symbol confirmation command, but the background brightness data table is not switched even upon reception of the symbol confirmation command. Further, the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 switches from off to blinking upon reception of the next variation variation pattern command, but the background brightness data table does not switch even upon reception of the symbol confirmation command. According to this, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for the background when the eye-catching screen ends, and that brightness data table is continued until the next change, so the brightness data table corresponding to the reception of the symbol confirmation command There is no need to create a separate performance, and the performance by the lamp can be shown without any discomfort from the performance at the time of loss to the next change, and a series of performances can be suitably shown.

[Loss 9]
The brightness data table corresponding to the background at the start of reach is a loop that references brightness data until the change conditions are met.
In the introduction part, the brightness data corresponding to the background is not used, but the brightness data corresponding to the background is updated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52, the lamp control based on the background brightness data table will respond to changes such as SP reach when certain change conditions are met, such as when SP reach develops. After that, lamp control is performed based on the SP reach brightness data table. In this case, while the SP reach effect is being executed, in the background of lamp control based on the SP reach brightness data table, switching of brightness data in the background brightness data table will stop over time. Continue without any trouble. In addition, lamp control based on the background brightness data table is switched to the error brightness data table corresponding to the error state when a specific change condition is met, such as when an error occurs, and from then on, the error brightness Lamp control is performed based on the data table. In this case, in the error state, switching of the luminance data in the background luminance data table continues without stopping over time in the background of lamp control based on the error luminance data table. Thereby, a series of effects to be executed can be shown more suitably.

[Loss 10]
After switching to the brightness data table corresponding to the background at the start of the introduction part, the brightness data table corresponding to the background will be used even if a pattern confirmation command is received, and after that, even if a customer waiting command is received when there is no hold. The brightness data table corresponding to the background continues to be used.

Specifically, after the brightness data table is switched to the background brightness data table when the eye-catching screen ends, the background brightness data table continues even if there is no pending memory and a customer waiting demo designation command is received. It is used as According to this, after switching to the brightness data table for the background, the same brightness data table can be used continuously, so it is possible to show the effect using the lamp without any discomfort, and it is possible to show a series of effects suitably. Can be done.

[Loss 11]
When the pattern is confirmed, the special pattern's light emitting means stops,
By receiving the symbol confirmation command, the light emitting means for the fourth symbol is switched from blinking to off.

Specifically, the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 is switched from blinking to extinguished upon reception of a symbol confirmation command that triggers a performance in which the symbols are fixed and stopped. According to this, regarding the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050, the flow when losing can be clearly shown to the player.

[Loss 12]
When the next change starts, the light emitting means of the special figure will blink,
By receiving the next variation command, the light emitting means for the fourth symbol switches from extinguished to blinking.

Specifically, the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 is switched from extinguished to blinking upon reception of the variation pattern command of the next variation, which is the trigger for starting the next variation. According to this, regarding the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050, the flow when losing can be clearly shown to the player.

[Loss 13]
Switching from the brightness data table corresponding to the success/failure notification part to the brightness data table corresponding to the determination that control will not be carried out in an advantageous state,
In response to the switching display being performed, the brightness data table is switched to correspond to the switching display,
After switching to the background at the start of reach, the final brightness data of the brightness data table corresponding to the switching display is used, and the brightness data does not change even if a symbol confirmation command is received, and the brightness data is used during the symbol confirmation period. Then, when the next variation command is received, the brightness data table is switched to the one corresponding to the next variation.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 190, the luminance data table at the time of loss is used from (X40) where six ally characters are disappointed to (X41) where the background image is blacked out. . The featured image is displayed after the background image is blacked out. A brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is used from the switching period to the eye-catching screen (X42) to the symbol confirmation period (X45). Thereafter, when a variation pattern command for when there is suspension is received, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for the background. In other words, at the timing of switching to the eye-catching screen, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching), and that brightness data table is maintained during the symbol confirmation period, and at the timing of switching to the next variation, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for switching (eye-catching). can be switched to the brightness data table. Further, in the symbol determination period, the final brightness data of the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is used. According to this, after switching to the background brightness data table, the final brightness data of the switching (eye-catching) brightness data table is maintained until the next fluctuation pattern command is received, so it is a loss. As a result, losses can be shown in an appropriate manner.

[Loss 14]
The final brightness data is lights-off data, and the brightness data table corresponding to the background at the start of the introduction part does not include brightness data that maintains lights-off.

Specifically, the final brightness data in the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is data that is maintained when the light is turned off. The background brightness data table does not use data for keeping the lights off. According to this, the brightness data table for the background does not use brightness data for keeping the lights off, so the fact that the lights are off when the background is displayed is a characteristic of losing, so This can make it easier to recognize that

[Loss 15]
By receiving the customer waiting command, the brightness data table corresponding to the switching display is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the customer waiting command.

Specifically, if there is no pending memory after the symbol is confirmed, the brightness data table for switching (for eye catching) is switched to the brightness data table for background by receiving a customer waiting designation command. According to this, when the customer waiting designation command is received, the brightness data table for the background is switched to, so that it is possible to easily recognize that there was a loss.

[Loss 16]
The first luminance data in the luminance data table corresponding to the switching display is set to be higher in luminance than the last luminance data in the luminance data table corresponding to the determination that control is not performed in an advantageous state.

Specifically, the first brightness data in the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is higher than the final brightness data (lights off) in the brightness data table before displaying the eye-catching image (when losing). It has become. According to this, the game effect lamp 9 can be made to emit light at a higher brightness than before switching to the eye-catching screen, so that the eye-catching screen and the game effect lamp 9 make it easier to recognize the change.

[Loss 17]
The first brightness data in the brightness data table corresponding to the switching display is set to be higher in brightness than the first brightness data in the brightness data table corresponding to the background at the start of the introduction part.

Specifically, the first brightness data in the brightness data table for switching (eye-catching) is higher than the first brightness data in the brightness data table (not including turning off) corresponding to the background at the start of the fluctuation. ing. According to this, since the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light at high brightness when switching to the eye-catching screen, the switching can be easily recognized by the eye-catching screen and the game effect lamp 9.

[Accessory action 1]
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the propriety of being controlled to the advantageous state is announced, and a notification part to notify the propriety of the control in the advantageous state. A notification part, and a first epilogue part in which it is notified that the control will be in the advantageous state after the notification of success or failure,
The notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control will not be in the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the propriety of being controlled in the advantageous state is announced, and a propriety notification that notifies the propriety of being controlled in the advantageous condition. part, and a second epilogue part in which it is notified that the advantageous state will not be controlled after the notification is made,
The light emission control means includes:
In both the introduction part in the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state and the introduction part in the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control is not in the advantageous state. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to a common introduction part;
Controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for winning after the win/fail notification part in the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the advantageous state;
Controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for loss after the success/failure notification part in the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control will not be in the advantageous state;
The average time from when brightness data 1 is used to switching to the next brightness data in the brightness data table for winning is longer than the average time from when brightness data 1 is used to switching to the next brightness data in the brightness data table for loses. It is set short.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 262 and 263, in the winning epilogue part, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in a rainbow color based on the grandchild table W1, and the RGB data switches at intervals of 30 msec. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 261, in the case of a loss, the frame lamp lights up in a darker white color based on the grandchild table W14, and the RGB data is switched at intervals of 250 msec, which are longer than in the case of a win. Thereby, since the lighting color of the frame lamp changes at a shorter interval when winning, than when losing, it is possible to clearly inform the player that he has won by the lighting manner of the frame lamp. Furthermore, while the lighting of the frame lamp is more emphasized in the event of a win than in the case of a loss, the lighting of the frame lamp can be made more subdued in the event of a loss. This can be conveyed to players in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Accessory action 2]
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
In the success/failure notification part of the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
The light emission control means includes:
In the success/failure reporting part, when the movable body advances to the second position, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for moving the movable body;
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using the epilogue part brightness data table,
The brightness data table for movable body movement is configured such that brightness data representing chromatic colors and brightness data representing achromatic colors are used in sequence,
The epilogue part brightness data table is configured such that brightness data representing a plurality of chromatic colors, including brightness data representing a first chromatic color and brightness data representing a second chromatic color, are sequentially used.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 263, in the epilogue part of the final reach of the SP, in the production where the accessory falls, the frame lamp is controlled based on the grandchild table W20, and the chromatic color of the rainbow and , achromatic color (RGB data of "333") and the frame lamp are lit alternately. As a result, by occasionally interposing achromatic colors between the chromatic colors of the rainbow, it is possible to perform an effect that congratulates the player by emphasizing that he has won the jackpot. After that, in a performance in which an ally character wins, the frame lamp is controlled based on the grandchild table W21, and the frame lamp lights up in a smooth rainbow color without intervening achromatic colors, indicating that a jackpot has been won. It is possible to perform a performance that congratulates the player in a calm manner. As a result, the performance in the epilogue part of the SP final reach can be suitably shown to the player.

[Epilogue 1]
The epilogue part is a blessing part after the decision to control the advantageous state is announced, and there is a scene where the enemy character is defeated, there is no scene where the ally character takes damage, and the number of display changes is the same as the introduction part. There are fewer parts.

Specifically, the above-mentioned winning epilogue part is a part that does not shift in the event of a loss, and is a part that includes a scene where the enemy character is at a disadvantage and a scene where the ally character is at an advantage. Also, in the winning epilogue part, the number of image display changes in the performance is smaller than in the promotion part. According to this, it is possible to perform an appropriate performance in each part, and it is possible to suitably show the flow of a series of performances.

[Epilogue 2]
In the epilogue part, the rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for the characters' lines is higher than at the introductory part.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 175, the proportion of subtitles displayed for characters' lines in the epilogue part is higher than the proportion of subtitles displayed for characters in SP reach, which is the incitement part. ing. According to this, by clearly displaying subtitles in the epilogue part, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the character is saying. Also, in the winning epilogue part, subtitles can be used to create a feeling of blessing. Also, in the inciting part, there are more screen changes than in the epilogue part, so even if subtitles are displayed, the display time will be shorter, so that the display of auxiliary subtitles will not interfere with the production. , it is possible to convey the effect primarily through image switching. Thereby, suitable performance can be performed in the inciting part.

[Epilogue 3]
Dialogue subtitles are always displayed in the epilogue part.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 175, subtitles are always displayed for dialogue in the epilogue part. According to this, in the winning epilogue part, it is possible to emphasize the sense of congratulations by clearly showing what the characters are saying.

[Epilogue 4]
In the introductory part, when the dialogue sound is output in the scene where the enemy character takes damage, the dialogue subtitles are not displayed.
In the epilogue part, if dialogue sounds are output in a scene where an enemy character takes damage, dialogue subtitles are displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 104 (n10) described above, subtitles are not displayed for the lines of the enemy character in the scene where the enemy character receives damage in the inciting part. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 110(o1), subtitles are displayed for the lines of the enemy character in the scene where the enemy character receives damage in the winning epilogue part (crab catching scene). According to this, the subtitle display that was not displayed in the promotion part is displayed in the winning epilogue part, so that the feeling of celebration can be emphasized.

[Epilogue 5]
There is a first introduction part and a second introduction part, and each has a different development and number of lines, but in the epilogue part, the ratio of dialogue subtitles to the character's dialogue sound output is different from that in the introduction part. This is higher than the rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed relative to the character's dialogue sound output.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 175, there are multiple types of SP reaches, which are inciting parts, and each type has a different development and a different number of lines. However, in any SP reach, the proportion of subtitles displayed for characters' lines in the epilogue part is higher than the proportion of subtitles displayed for characters in SP reach. According to this, by clearly displaying subtitles in the epilogue part no matter which SP reach is executed, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the character is saying. Also, in the winning epilogue part, subtitles can be used to create a feeling of blessing. Also, in the inciting part, there are more screen changes than in the epilogue part, so it is possible to convey the effect primarily through image switching, and to prevent the effect from getting in the way by displaying auxiliary subtitles. . Thereby, suitable performance can be performed in the inciting part.

[Epilogue 6]
The dialogue subtitles that are finally displayed in the epilogue part are displayed longer than the dialogue subtitles with the same number of characters that are displayed in other scenes.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 134 (s5) to (s6) above, the subtitle display displayed in the hit epilogue part is designed to be displayed for a longer period than the subtitle display displayed in the incitement part. ing. According to this, by displaying the subtitles in the final winning epilogue part for a long period of time, it is possible to immerse the player in the afterglow of the jackpot and emphasize the sense of celebration. Note that when displaying subtitles, a subtitle with a larger number of characters may be displayed for a longer time than a subtitle with a smaller number of characters. Even in such a case, if the same number of subtitles (for example, 5 characters) are displayed in the winning epilogue part and the provocation part, the subtitle display period will be longer for the winning epilogue part. It should be designed like this.

[Epilogue 7]
When the movable body is in the advanced position, the background display for the movable body is displayed,
The movable body moves according to an evacuation pattern in which the movable body retreats, and the background display for the movable body is switched to an epilogue display by the time the evacuation pattern ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 173 and 174, an effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory object is displayed in accordance with the action of the accessory object falling. Thereafter, the accessory moves to the initial position according to a predetermined retreat pattern. While the accessory is rising, the display gradually switches from the effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory to the screen corresponding to the epilogue part of the final reach of the SP. Here, the effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory is displayed on the premise that the accessory is in a position superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the accessory returns to its initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the SP first half reach before the accessory completes the return operation to the initial position, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be prevented.

[Epilogue 8]
The deformed member performs a storage operation and a return operation,
The timing of switching to the epilogue display is linked to the start timing of the return operation.

Specifically, it is assumed that the accessory performs an action to return to its initial position, and the timing at which the display is switched to the one corresponding to the epilogue is the timing during the rise, which is related to the timing at which the return action starts. According to this, since the display is switched to the one corresponding to the epilogue at a timing related to the start of the return motion, the display of the effect image corresponding to the accessory motion ends before the accessory returns to the initial position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation where the effect image is displayed when the accessory returns to the initial position, and the aesthetic appearance of the performance is not spoiled. Note that the timing of switching to the display corresponding to the epilogue may be the same timing as the timing when the accessory starts to rise. Furthermore, the accessory may perform a rotating motion or a moving motion at the falling position.

[Epilogue 9]
During the return operation, the light emitting means of the movable body fades out and approaches extinguishing.

Specifically, when the accessory rises, the production control CPU 120 adjusts the role based on the child table corresponding to the raising motion of the accessory on the accessory lamp 9A and the grandchild table specified by the child table. The brightness of the accessory lamp 9A is gradually lowered so that the object lamp 9A is gradually turned off. As a result, the lighting mode of the accessory lamp 9A does not make the player aware that the accessory is rising, while the lighting mode of the frame lamp allows the screen to indicate that the SP has reached reach A in the second half. This can draw the attention of players.

[Epilogue 10]
The change is suggested by BGM linked to the image corresponding to the epilogue,
BGM is output in conjunction with the start of the epilogue display.

Specifically, the BGM corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the accessory returning to its initial position and the display corresponding to the epilogue starting. According to this, the epilogue part can be suitably started by suggesting the start of the epilogue part using the BGM.

[Epilogue 11]
In conjunction with the start of the epilogue display, a sound effect suggesting a change is output.

Specifically, a sound effect corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the accessory returning to its initial position and the display corresponding to the epilogue being started. According to this, the epilogue part can be suitably started by suggesting the start of the epilogue part with the sound effect.

[Epilogue 12]
In conjunction with the start of the epilogue display, BGM and sound effects suggesting the change are output.

Specifically, BGM and sound effects corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the accessory returning to its initial position and the display corresponding to the epilogue starting. According to this, the epilogue part can be suitably started by suggesting the start of the epilogue part using BGM and sound effects.

[Epilogue 13]
In the epilogue display during the return movement of the movable body, the dialogue sound is not output,
In the epilogue display after the movable body is stored, a dialogue sound is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed.

Specifically, in a situation where the accessory returns to its initial position and a display corresponding to the epilogue is displayed, the dialogue sound is not output, and the dialogue sound is not output in the epilogue display after the accessory returns to the initial position. All you have to do is display subtitles while outputting. According to this, it is possible to avoid displaying the subtitles at a timing when the subtitles are difficult to see, and it is possible to suitably execute the epilogue part.

[Epilogue 14]
A dialogue sound is output and generated at the timing of the evacuation of the movable object,
When the movable body is completely retracted, a dialogue sound is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed.

Specifically, at the timing when the accessory returns to its initial position, dialogue sounds may be output and subtitles may be displayed in the epilogue display. According to this, the lines can be clearly recognized and the epilogue part can be suitably executed.

[Epilogue 15]
The display of the dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound output at the end of the epilogue part ends at the timing when the pattern display starts.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 134 (s6) to 135 (s8) described above, the final subtitle display for the final line in the winning epilogue part is erased before the symbol display is executed. It is designed. According to this, it is possible to prevent the subtitle display from covering the decorative pattern and from mistaking it as a message in the presentation of the pattern. Therefore, the performance in the winning epilogue part can be shown suitably.

[Epilogue 17]
The video that was played during the epilogue becomes a still image at the timing when the symbol display is completed and the player recognizes the final symbols.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 136 (s10) described above, when the presentation of the symbols is completed and the player can recognize the decorative symbols, the decorative symbols and images such as characters displayed as the background are It is a still image. According to this, it is possible to prevent the decorative pattern from becoming difficult to see because the background of the decorative pattern is a moving image.

[Epilogue 18]
The video that is played before the drawing of the symbols begins is taken as a still image.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 135 (s7) described above, the video that was being played in the winning epilogue part becomes a still image at a timing before the symbol appearance is executed. According to this, it is possible to prevent the symbols from becoming difficult to see from the timing of the start of symbol display.

[Epilogue 19]
Special effects are added while standing still.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 135 (s7) described above, the still image displayed in the winning epilogue part has a special feature similar to a comic book. According to this, by adding a special type of effect to a still image, it is possible to emphasize that the video is still, and to suggest that the scene has changed, thereby making it possible to make it a suitable epilogue part.

[Epilogue 20]
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
sound output means;
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
In the success/failure notification part of the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
The display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and displays the effect while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. After the display is finished, a display corresponding to the epilogue part is displayed, and after the movable body has retreated to the first position, a dialogue subtitle is displayed for the dialogue sound emitted by the character,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a movable body movement brightness data table when the movable body advances to the second position, and the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. During the evacuation, the movable body movable brightness data table is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part,
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs an epilogue sound while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. Outputs the sound corresponding to the part.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 173 and 174, the performance changes from the scene before the success/failure decision in the incitement part to the winning epilogue part by moving the accessory. Further, in accordance with the motion of the accessory falling, an effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory is displayed. Thereafter, while the accessory is rising, the display gradually switches from the effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory to a screen corresponding to the SP final reach hit epilogue part. Further, while the accessory is rising, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table corresponding to the action of the accessory to the brightness data table corresponding to the winning epilogue part. Also, while the accessory is rising, a sound corresponding to the winning epilogue part is output. Also, during the background display corresponding to the hit epilogue part that is displayed before the accessory changes to its initial position from (s3-5) to (s3-8), no dialogue sound is output. . Thereafter, in a state in which the movement of the accessory to the initial position is completed and the display of the effect image is completed (s4), dialogue sounds are output and subtitles are displayed. Here, the effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory is displayed on the premise that the accessory is in a position superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the accessory returns to its initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the epilogue part before the accessory completes its return operation to the initial position, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be prevented. Further, since the sound effect and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the winning epilogue part while the accessory is rising, the winning epilogue part can be suitably displayed. Furthermore, by displaying the subtitles after completing the return operation to the initial position, the winning epilogue part can be suitably displayed.

[Epilogue 21]
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to be in the advantageous state;
The notification effect is executed in the introduction part until the propriety of being controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and after the notification of the propriety or not, and when it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the advantageous condition. It consists of an epilogue part,
In the introduction part, the first scene displays dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sounds uttered by the characters,
In the epilogue part, a second scene in which a final dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to the final dialogue sound emitted by the character, and then, after the display of the final dialogue subtitle is finished, a decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area; There is,
A switching effect is not applied when the display of the final dialogue subtitles ends in the second scene, while a switching effect is applied when the display of the dialogue subtitles ends in the first scene.

[Epilogue 22]
When drawing out a pattern, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern are displayed.
Although an effect is attached to the decorative pattern, since the display layer of the small pattern is displayed with priority, the visual recognition of the small pattern is not obstructed by the effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 136 (s10) described above, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern are displayed during the pattern presentation. An effect image of saturated lines is added to the decorative pattern, but no effect image is added to the small pattern. Furthermore, the decorative pattern has a higher priority than the decorative pattern and the effect image and is displayed on the near side. According to this, it is possible to enhance the production effect of the effect image regarding the decorative symbols, and to make it possible to recognize that the small symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, thereby making it possible to provide a suitable winning epilogue part.

[Epilogue 23]
When drawing out a pattern, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern are displayed.
The movement of the decorative pattern and the small pattern are synchronized at the timing when the pattern display of the decorative pattern ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 136 (s10) described above, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern are displayed during the pattern presentation. Here, the movement of the decorative pattern and the small pattern may be synchronized at the timing when the pattern display of the decorative pattern ends. Specifically, during the symbol shaking period in which the display of the decorative symbols is finished and the symbols are shaking up and down, the small symbols may also be made to swing up and down with the same movement as the decorative symbols. According to this, by matching the movement of the decorative pattern and the small pattern, it is possible to suitably show the flow of the performance in the winning epilogue part.

[Epilogue 24]
When drawing out symbols in the re-lottery part, both decorative symbols and small symbols are displayed.
Although an effect is attached to the decorative pattern, since the display layer of the small pattern is displayed with priority, the visual recognition of the small pattern is not obstructed by the effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 157 (B1) to 158 (B5) described above, both decorative symbols and small symbols are displayed when the symbols are produced in the re-lottery part. An effect image of saturated lines is added to the decorative pattern, but no effect image is added to the small pattern. Furthermore, the decorative pattern has a higher priority than the decorative pattern and the effect image and is displayed on the near side. According to this, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of the effect image regarding the decorative pattern, and to make it possible to recognize that the small pattern is being displayed in a variable manner.

[Epilogue 25]
Before the re-drawing part, the small symbols are determined to be controlled in an advantageous state, and in conjunction with the transition to the re-drawing part, the small symbols change again.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 136 (s10) described above, when displaying a pattern, even if both the decorative pattern and the small pattern are once displayed in a state where the pattern is aligned. good. Then, in conjunction with the transition to the re-lottery part, both the decorative symbols and the small symbols may be changed again. According to this, the decorative pattern and the small pattern can be synchronized and suitably displayed.

[Epilogue 26]
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using an upper table made up of storage location data indicating a storage location of the brightness data table and a brightness data table made up of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect is executed in the introduction part until the propriety of being controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and after the notification of the propriety or not, and when it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the advantageous condition. It consists of an epilogue part,
The epilogue part is
A first scene in which a story development corresponding to the epilogue part is displayed;
a second scene in which the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area;
The light emission control means includes:
In the first scene in the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a first upper table,
In a second scene in the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a second upper table,
In a first scene in the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a first brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part, and at a specific timing, a rainbow light emission mode is set from the first brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part. switching to a brightness data table and controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for rainbow light emission mode;
In a second scene in the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for enlarged display, and the decorative pattern is set in a rainbow light emitting mode from the brightness data table for enlarged display at a timing related to the end of the enlarged display. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table of
The brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode used in the first scene in the epilogue part and the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode used in the second scene in the epilogue part are a common brightness data table. can be,
The first upper table is composed of storage destination data of a brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part and storage destination data of a brightness data table for making a rainbow light emission mode,
The second upper table is composed of storage location data of a luminance data table for enlarged display and storage location data of a luminance data table for setting a rainbow light emission mode.

Specifically, in the winning epilogue part, by making the grandchild table used during the win notification presentation and the grandchild table used when displaying the winning symbol common, separate grandchild tables are prepared at each of multiple different timings. It is possible to reduce the amount of data used to control the lamps to turn them on in rainbow colors, and to enliven each performance by creating a sense of unity. As a result, the performance in the winning epilogue part can be shown better to the player by using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

[Epilogue 27]
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using an upper table made up of storage location data indicating a storage location of the brightness data table and a brightness data table made up of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect is executed in the introduction part until the propriety of being controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and after the notification of the propriety or not, and when it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the advantageous condition. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The epilogue part includes a result notification scene in which the decoration pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area and the result of the notification effect is notified.
The re-lottery part includes a re-lottery result notification scene in which the decoration pattern is enlarged using the center of the display area and the re-lottery result is announced.
The light emission control means includes:
In the result notification scene in the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a first upper table,
In the re-lottery result notification scene in the re-lottery part, controlling the light emitting means using a second upper table,
In the result notification scene in the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using the result notification scene enlarged display brightness data table, and the decorative pattern is displayed from the result notification scene enlarged display brightness data table at a timing related to the end of the enlarged display. Controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery result notification scene in the re-lottery part, the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for enlarged display of the re-lottery result notification scene, and the re-lottery result notification scene is displayed at a timing related to the end of the enlarged display of the decorative pattern. Controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode from a brightness data table for enlarged display,
The brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode used in the result notification scene in the epilogue part and the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode used in the re-lottery result notification scene in the re-lottery part have a common brightness. is a data table,
The first upper table is composed of storage destination data of a brightness data table for enlarged display of result notification scenes, and storage destination data of a brightness data table for rainbow light emission mode,
The second upper table is composed of storage location data of a luminance data table for enlarged display of re-lottery result notification scene and storage location data of a luminance data table for rainbow light emission mode.

Specifically, in the child tables WD21 and WD22 of the re-lottery part, the lamp control when the symbol is finally determined after the re-lottery part is common to the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 of the winning epilogue part. Then, grandchild table W1 is used. As a result, there is no need to prepare separate grandchild tables for lighting in rainbow colors for the winning epilogue part and the re-drawing part, reducing the amount of data used for lamp control, and creating a sense of unity even when the parts (timings) are different. A certain performance can be shown to the player. As a result, the performance in the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part can be shown better to the player while reducing the data capacity.

[Epilogue 28]
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect is executed in the introduction part until the propriety of being controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and after the notification of the propriety or not, and when it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the advantageous condition. It consists of an epilogue part,
The display means is
In the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is displayed at the edge of the display area, and the story development corresponding to the epilogue part is displayed.
After that, the display in the story development corresponding to the epilogue part ends,
At a timing related to ending the display of the story development corresponding to the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area,
The light emission control means includes:
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part,
When displaying the decorative pattern in an enlarged manner using the center of the display area, the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is switched to a luminance data table for enlarged display, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table for enlarged display. .

Specifically, in the winning epilogue part, when the images constituting the winning epilogue are displayed sequentially (the video of the winning epilogue is being played), the decorative pattern is placed at the edge side of the display area of the screen. (at the top left corner of the screen). In relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image and the epilogue video ends, a reduced pattern is erased and a pattern display effect is executed in which the reduced pattern is erased and enlarged using the center area of the screen. Further, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table corresponding to the winning epilogue part to the brightness data table corresponding to the symbol display in relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image. According to this, when the image of the winning epilogue part is flowing, the reduced symbol is positioned at the edge of the screen so that it does not interfere with the image of the winning epilogue part, and the image of the winning epilogue part is finished and the symbol is released. When playing, the jackpot symbols can be emphasized and shown to the player by enlarging and displaying the decorative symbols in a continuous manner using the edge of the screen and the center of the screen. Furthermore, by switching the brightness data table, it is possible to suitably show the change of scenes. In this way, the winning epilogue part can be shown suitably.

[Epilogue 29]
In the epilogue part,
While the image corresponding to the epilogue is being displayed, the decorative patterns are aligned and positioned at the edge of the display area.

Specifically, in the winning epilogue part, when the images constituting the winning epilogue are displayed sequentially (the video of the winning epilogue is being played), the decorative pattern is placed at the edge side of the display area of the screen. (at the upper left corner of the screen) are displayed with "222" aligned. According to this, even while the winning epilogue video is being played, the player can be made aware of the fact that a jackpot display result has been obtained by the reduced decorative pattern.

[Epilogue 30]
In the epilogue part,
While the image corresponding to the epilogue is displayed, the decorative pattern is positioned at the edge of the display area,
In relation to the timing at which the display of the image corresponding to the epilogue ends, the output of the displayed dialogue sound ends, the state in which the decorative pattern is displayed at the edge of the display area ends, and the decorative pattern is displayed. Enlarge the display using the center of the area.

Specifically, in the winning epilogue part, when the images constituting the winning epilogue are displayed sequentially (the video of the winning epilogue is being played), the decorative pattern is placed at the edge side of the display area of the screen. (at the top left corner of the screen). In addition, in relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image and the epilogue video ends, the subtitle display that was displayed at (Y1) is erased, the reduced image at the upper left corner is erased, and the image at the center of the screen is erased. The decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the area. According to this, it is possible to prevent the subtitle display from being displayed overlapping with the decorative pattern, or from being misunderstood to be showing some kind of message when the pattern is displayed, and to appropriately display the winning epilogue part. I can show you.

[Epilogue 31]
At the start of the introduction part, a decorative pattern is positioned at the end of the display area.

Specifically, the decorative pattern may be moved to the upper left corner of the screen in a reach mode at the start of SP reach. According to this, by positioning it from the start of the SP reach, it is possible to avoid disturbing the development of the performance even during the SP reach, and it is possible to suitably show a series of performances.

[Re-lottery performance 1]
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance that notifies whether or not the control is controlled to an advantageous state;
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance consists of an introduction part until the propriety of controlling to an advantageous state is announced, a propriety notification part in which the propriety is notified, and a notification part that informs that the control is to be controlled to an advantageous condition after the propriety is notified. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed when the
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The performance execution means are
When it is determined that the second advantageous state will be controlled, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, the first re-lottery effect displays the first symbol in the first half part and then displays the second symbol in the second half part. is executable,
When it is determined that the first advantageous state will be controlled, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, a second symbol that displays the first symbol again in the second half part after displaying the first symbol in the first half part. It is possible to perform a re-lottery performance,
Using the first symbol displayed in the epilogue part, execute the first re-lottery effect or the second re-lottery effect,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for rainbow light emitting mode,
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow lighting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect to correspond to the first re-lottery effect. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect;
At a specific timing in the second half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. control the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and continue to control the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode during the subsequent symbol determination period;
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare performance, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 176, in the re-lottery performance, the "2" symbol that was temporarily stopped and displayed before the re-lottery is enlarged, reduced, and shaken, and then the "2" symbol is displayed as it is. The re-lottery performance will be started using . At the start of the re-extraction performance, the "2" symbol is reduced, and the variation of the re-lottery performance is started from the reduced "2" symbol. During the re-lottery performance, a symbol feeding performance is executed in which the symbols are replaced by high-speed fluctuations starting from the "2" symbol. In this way, the re-lottery effect will be started using the decorative symbols that were once temporarily stopped and displayed, and at the start of the re-lottery effect, the symbol forwarding effect will be executed using the symbols that were once temporarily stopped and displayed. , it is easy for the player to understand from which decorative symbol the re-lottery starts. As a result, the flow of a series of performances can be clearly shown.

[Re-lottery performance 2]
When the image corresponding to the background that temporarily stops the arrangement of decorative symbols is displayed, the light emitting means turns off, and when moving to the re-lottery screen, the light emitting means emits light in a light-emitting mode corresponding to the re-lottery. .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 142 (tA6), in the winning epilogue part, when the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors and the winning symbols are temporarily stopped, before executing the re-lottery effect, Once the frame lamp is turned off, the frame lamp is lit in a lighting manner corresponding to the re-lottery performance, so that it can be clearly communicated to the player that the re-lottery performance is to be started by the lighting manner of the frame lamp.

[Re-lottery performance 3]
When moving to the re-lottery screen, temporarily stop the arrangement of decorative symbols,
When temporarily stopped, the decorative patterns are displayed shaking with an effect, but while the shaking display with the effect is maintained, the image corresponding to the background and the light emitting mode of the light emitting means are regenerated. Switch to one for lottery.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 142 (A5) described above, in the final state of the symbol presentation in the winning epilogue part, the decorative symbols are displayed in a swaying manner and an effect image of concentrated lines is added. Even when switching from that state to the background of the re-lottery effect as shown in (A6), the effect image with concentrated lines continues to be added. Further, the game effect lamp 9 is switched from smoothly lighting up in a rainbow manner to being turned off. In other words, from the appearance of the symbols to the re-lottery presentation, the pattern shaking and effects continue, and the background and lamps are designed to switch. According to this, it is possible to easily understand from which decorative pattern the re-lottery performance has started.

[Re-lottery performance 4]
At the start of symbol feeding, the decorative symbols that have been kept displayed since the epilogue are reduced in size, and after being reduced, symbol feeding is started.

Specifically, at the start of the symbol feeding performance in the re-lottery performance, the variation starts from the reduced state of the decorative symbols that have been displayed from the winning epilogue part. According to this, it is possible to clearly show the flow of a series of effects without executing the process of changing to a different decorative pattern.

[Re-lottery performance 5]
The symbol feeding starts with the reduced size, and the reduced sizes of all other symbols become uniform.

Specifically, in the symbol feeding performance, the fluctuation is started by the reduced symbol, and the size of the symbol being fluctuated is a uniform reduced size. According to this, it is possible to make the appearance of the fluctuation during the symbol feeding performance smooth, and it is possible to clearly show the flow of a series of performances.

[Re-lottery performance 6]
While a plurality of types of decorative patterns are being fed in a reduced size, the transition is made in the following order: movement promotion display, movement acceptance, display of a decorative pattern slightly larger than the reduced size, and display of an enlarged decorative pattern.

Specifically, as shown in the flow shown in FIGS. 144 (A10) to 156 (A46) and FIGS. 157 (B1) to 158 (B5) described above, in the re-lottery performance, the symbols are moved by the reduced size decorative symbols. is executed, and a button operation promotion display is displayed. Then, when the player operates a button, a pattern display effect is executed in which the pattern is enlarged and displayed. In other words, the decorative pattern that is finally announced is displayed in an enlarged manner from the moment the pattern is put out. According to this, since the symbol is finally notified from the beginning of expansion, it is possible to clearly show the player what the final notified symbol is.

[Re-lottery performance 7]
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance that notifies whether or not the control is controlled to an advantageous state;
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance consists of an introduction part until the propriety of controlling to an advantageous state is announced, a propriety notification part in which the propriety is notified, and a notification part that informs that the control is to be controlled to an advantageous condition after the propriety is notified. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed when the
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The performance execution means are
When it is determined that the second advantageous state will be controlled, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, after displaying the first symbol in the first half part, a replacement display is performed in which the first symbol is replaced with another symbol. , it is possible to execute the first re-lottery effect that displays the second symbol in the second half,
When it is determined that the control will be in the first advantageous state, a second re-lottery effect in which a replacement display is performed in the first half of the multiple types of re-lottery effects, and the first symbol is displayed again in the second half. is executable,
The first re-lottery performance is a performance in which all other symbols are used to perform the replacement display from the start of the replacement display in the first half until the second symbol is displayed in the second half,
The second re-lottery performance is a performance in which all other symbols are used to perform the replacement display from the start of the replacement display in the first half to the display of the first symbol in the second half,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for rainbow light emitting mode,
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow lighting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect to correspond to the first re-lottery effect. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect;
At a specific timing in the second half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. control the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and continue to control the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode during the subsequent symbol determination period;
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare performance, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 176, in the re-lottery performance, the "2" symbol that was temporarily stopped and displayed before the re-lottery is enlarged, reduced, and shaken, and then the "2" symbol is displayed as it is. The re-lottery performance will be started using . At the start of the re-extraction performance, the "2" symbol is reduced, and the variation of the re-lottery performance is started from the reduced "2" symbol. During the re-lottery performance, a symbol feeding performance is executed in which the symbols are replaced by high-speed fluctuations starting from the "2" symbol. During the re-lottery performance, all the decorative symbols are sent in order: "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "1", and then "2" again. ” A symbol feeding performance in which symbols are displayed is executed. In this way, a re-lottery performance is started using the ornamental symbols that were once displayed in a temporary stop, and after a plurality of types of variations in the ornamental symbols, the ornamental symbols that were initially displayed in a temporary halt are displayed again. According to this, the flow of a series of effects can be clearly shown by the pattern advancing effect in which all decorative patterns are shown without displaying the final display result immediately. In addition, when the winning symbol is temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part, after the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors, the re-lottery effect is executed with the light turned off, and the symbol is displayed shaking. Based on the brightness data corresponding to the lottery performance (for example, RGB data in the grandchild table W25), the frame lamp blinks in red in a lighting manner different from the smooth rainbow color. This prevents the player from being misled into thinking that the winning symbol that was temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part has been determined, depending on the lighting manner of the frame lamp. Furthermore, the lighting of the rainbow color when the symbol "3" or "2" is displayed in a swaying manner continues during the subsequent period when the symbol is determined. In this way, during the short symbol determination period, the lamp control corresponding to the fanfare part is performed without preparing a special brightness data table for lamp control. There is no need to increase capacity excessively.

[Re-lottery performance 8]
The pattern feeding according to a predetermined pattern is to send the temporarily stopped symbol to the next symbol in order, and after the last symbol is sent, return to the temporarily stopped symbol again, and then move to the next symbol in order. It is a performance that seems to send to
The predetermined pattern is a pattern that loops in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8.

Specifically, in the symbol sending performance in the re-lottery performance, all decorative symbols are sent in order of "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1". , again, all the decorative patterns are sent in order, ``2'', ``3'', ``4'', ``5'', ``6'', ``7'', ``1''. In this way, since the numbers of the decorative designs are sent in order, it is possible to clearly see the flow of a series of effects.

[Re-lottery performance 9]
While the symbols are being fed in a predetermined pattern, all of the sent decorative symbols are displayed at the same resolution as when the decorative symbols were temporarily stopped.

Specifically, in the symbol feeding performance in the re-lottery performance, all symbols are displayed with the transparency of the symbols when temporarily stopped, and the transparency is increased during fluctuation. Specifically, the "2" symbol with 0% transparency, the "2" symbol with 50% transparency, the "3" symbol with 0% transparency, the "3" symbol with 50% transparency, and the "3" symbol with 50% transparency. The symbols change, such as a "4" symbol with a transparency of 0% and a "4" symbol with a transparency of 50%. According to this, all the symbols can be clearly displayed with low transparency during the symbol feeding performance, so that it is possible to grasp what kind of symbol is being sent.

[Re-lottery performance 10]
After symbol feeding is started, the display time of each of the plurality of types of decorative symbols is the same until notification of whether or not to promote is made.

Specifically, in the symbol sending performance in the re-lottery performance, all decorative symbols are sent in order of "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1". However, each symbol is displayed for the same amount of time. According to this, all the symbols can be displayed for a certain period of time, and the flow of a series of effects can be clearly shown.

[Re-lottery performance 11]
The motion promotion display is performed during symbol feeding,
The motion promotion display is performed at a position that does not overlap with the symbol being fed.

Specifically, during the symbol feeding performance, a promotion display formed from a button image and a time gauge is displayed. The position where the promotion display is displayed is a position that does not overlap with the position where the fluctuation of the decorative symbols during the symbol feeding performance is displayed. In this way, since the promotion display does not overlap with the decorative symbols during the symbol feeding performance, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the symbol feeding. Note that a part of the promotion display may partially overlap with a decorative pattern during the pattern feeding performance.

[Re-lottery performance 12]
The movement promotion display is started during symbol feeding, and is started during the second loop of a predetermined pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 176 and 177, the promotion display is displayed at (A24) and (A25) after repeating twice the variation in which all decorative symbols are displayed during the symbol feeding effect. Begins. Since the promotion image is not displayed until the predetermined pattern of symbol feeding is repeated twice in this way, the player can be made to clearly recognize the pattern of pattern feeding.

[Re-lottery performance 13]
When symbol feeding starts from the symbol "1", the timing at which the movement promotion display is performed is, for example, the symbol "5",
When symbol feeding is started from the symbol "4", the timing at which the movement promotion display is performed is, for example, at the symbol "8".

Specifically, the symbols at the start of the re-lottery performance may be other than two symbols. Even in such a case, the timing at which the button image is displayed as an action promotion display is constant. For example, in the case of 2 symbols, the timing at which the movement promotion display is displayed is the timing at which 2 symbols are displayed again. Similarly, in the case of 5 symbols, the timing at which the movement promotion display is displayed may be the timing at which 5 symbols are displayed again. In other words, no matter which symbol is used to start the re-lottery performance, the number of symbols sent is the same. According to this, the control can be made constant, so that the processing load can be reduced.

[Re-lottery performance 14]
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance that notifies whether or not the control is controlled to an advantageous state;
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance consists of an introduction part until the propriety of controlling to an advantageous state is announced, a propriety notification part in which the propriety is notified, and a notification part that informs that the control is to be controlled to an advantageous condition after the propriety is notified. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed when the
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The performance execution means are
When it is determined that the second advantageous state will be controlled, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, after displaying the first symbol in the first half part, a replacement display is performed in which the first symbol is replaced with another symbol. , it is possible to execute the first re-lottery effect that displays the second symbol in the second half,
When it is determined that the first advantageous state will be controlled, a second re-lottery effect that performs the replacement display in the first half of multiple types of re-lottery effects and displays the first symbol again in the second half. is executable,
When it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state, after displaying the second symbol in the first half part, a repeated display is performed in which the second symbol is repeatedly displayed, and the second symbol is displayed again in the second half part. It is possible to perform the third re-lottery effect,
The first re-lottery performance, the second re-lottery performance and the third re-lottery performance have the same length,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow lighting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect to correspond to the first re-lottery effect. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance or a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance;
At a specific timing in the second half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. control the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and continue to control the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode during the subsequent symbol determination period;
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare performance, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. .

Specifically, a pattern in which an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) is displayed after which an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) is displayed, a pattern in which an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) is displayed and then an odd numbered symbol (for example, 3 symbols) is displayed. was set up. In addition to this, a pattern may be provided in which an odd numbered symbol (for example, 7 symbols) is displayed after an odd numbered symbol (for example, 7 symbols) is displayed. In a performance in which symbols are sent from an odd numbered symbol to an odd numbered symbol, all the same odd numbered symbols may be sent at the time of symbol feeding. However, regardless of the pattern, the length of the performance during the symbol feeding period in the re-lottery performance may be designed to be the same. According to this, it is possible to provide a suitable re-lottery effect for any pattern without increasing the data capacity. In addition, when the winning symbol is temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part, after the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors, the re-lottery effect is executed with the light turned off, and the symbol is displayed shaking. Based on the brightness data corresponding to the lottery performance (for example, RGB data in the grandchild table W25), the frame lamp blinks in red in a lighting manner different from the smooth rainbow color. This prevents the player from being misled into thinking that the winning symbol that was temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part has been determined, depending on the lighting manner of the frame lamp. Furthermore, the lighting of the rainbow color when the symbol "3" or "2" is displayed in a swaying manner continues during the subsequent period when the symbol is determined. In this way, during the short symbol determination period, the lamp control corresponding to the fanfare part is performed without preparing a special brightness data table for lamp control. There is no need to increase capacity excessively.

[Re-lottery performance 15]
The re-lottery effect displays a combination of display data other than decorative patterns and display data of various decorative patterns, and reproduces each pattern of multiple types of re-lottery effects.
By using common display data in each re-lottery performance, the length of the performance is common between each re-lottery performance, and only the type of symbol being sent and the symbol issued in each re-lottery performance are the same. The lottery performance is different.

Specifically, in the lottery performance, there is a pattern in which an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) is displayed and then an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) is displayed, and an odd numbered symbol (for example, 3 symbols) is displayed after an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) is displayed. Common data is used regardless of whether the pattern is a pattern that displays an odd number of symbols (for example, 7 symbols) or a pattern that displays an odd number of symbols (for example, 7 symbols) after displaying an odd number of symbols (for example, 7 symbols). In other words, the production data is the same, but the design is such that the data related to the decorative design is changed depending on the pattern. According to this, there is no need to provide a dedicated pattern, so the amount of data can be reduced.

[Re-lottery performance 16]
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance that notifies whether or not the control is controlled to an advantageous state;
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance consists of an introduction part until the propriety of controlling to an advantageous state is announced, a propriety notification part in which the propriety is notified, and a notification part that informs that the control is to be controlled to an advantageous condition after the propriety is notified. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed when the
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The performance execution means are
When it is determined that the second advantageous state will be controlled, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, the first re-lottery effect displays the first symbol in the first half part and then displays the second symbol in the second half part. is executable,
When it is determined that the first advantageous state is controlled, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, a second re-lottery effect that displays the first symbol in the first half part and then displays the first symbol again in the second half part. It is possible to perform a lottery performance,
Displaying the first symbol with the same or almost the same animation when displaying the first symbol once in the epilogue part and when displaying the first symbol again in the second half of the second re-lottery performance,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for rainbow light emitting mode,
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow lighting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect to correspond to the first re-lottery effect. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect;
At a specific timing in the second half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. control the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and continue to control the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode during the subsequent symbol determination period;
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare performance, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. .

Specifically, the pattern placement in the portions of FIGS. 141 (A1) to 142 (A5) and the pattern placement in the portions of FIGS. 161 (C1) to 162 (C5) described above are executed using approximately the same video. be done. Specifically, the same image is used for the pattern display and effect image using the "2" pattern, and the pattern pattern is executed in such a manner that the background portions are different. According to this, since the images of the symbols appearing can be made substantially the same, it is possible to clearly show to the player that the symbols have not been promoted to the variable probability symbols. Note that the images of the pattern portion including the background may be made completely the same. In addition, when the winning symbol is temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part, after the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors, the re-lottery effect is executed with the light turned off, and the symbol is displayed shaking. Based on the brightness data corresponding to the lottery performance (for example, RGB data in the grandchild table W25), the frame lamp blinks in red in a lighting manner different from the smooth rainbow color. This prevents the player from being misled into thinking that the winning symbol that was temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part has been determined, depending on the lighting mode of the frame lamp. Further, the lighting of the rainbow color when the symbol "3" or "2" is displayed in a swaying manner continues during the subsequent period when the symbol is determined. In this way, during the short pattern determination period, the lamp control corresponding to the fanfare part is performed without preparing a special brightness data table for lamp control, so the data There is no need to increase capacity excessively.

[Re-lottery performance 17]
The animation when displaying the first identification information includes an animation from when the symbol is displayed to when it is enlarged and reaches the first position.

Specifically, in the above-mentioned pattern display, a series of effects is performed in which the pattern is once enlarged and then displayed in its normal size at the center of the screen. According to this, by enlarging and reducing the symbols, it is possible to suitably display a series of symbols.

[Re-lottery performance 18]
The display means refers to common display data when temporarily stopping the decorative pattern arrangement before the re-lottery is executed, and when notifying whether or not the decorative pattern arrangement will be promoted in the notification part,
By combining the common display data and display data of a plurality of types of decorative patterns, a display of a plurality of types of pattern placement is performed.

Specifically, in the above-mentioned symbol presentation performance, common symbol presentation data may be used in the data for the symbol presentation performance in the winning epilogue part and the data for the symbol presentation performance in the re-lottery presentation. Then, a series of symbol presentation effects may be executed using the common symbol presentation data and a combination of a plurality of decorative patterns. According to this, it is possible to reduce the data capacity while presenting a suitable design effect. It should be noted that substantially the same data may be used in the data for the symbol presentation performance in the winning epilogue part and the data for the symbol presentation performance in the re-lottery presentation.

[Re-lottery performance 19]
In the event that you are not promoted in the re-lottery performance,
The light emitting mode in putting out symbols is the same when the arrangement of decorative symbols is temporarily stopped before the re-lottery is executed and when notification is given that the arrangement of the ornamental symbols is not promoted in the re-lottery.

Specifically, the child table WD21 of the re-lottery part has the same lamp control as the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 of the winning epilogue part when the symbol is finally determined after the re-lottery. Grandchild table W1 is used. As a result, there is no need to prepare separate grandchild tables for lighting in rainbow colors for the winning epilogue part and the re-drawing part, reducing the amount of data used for lamp control, and creating a sense of unity even when the parts (timings) are different. A certain performance can be shown to the player. As a result, the performance in the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part can be shown better to the player while reducing the data capacity.

[Re-lottery performance 20]
In the event that you are promoted in the re-lottery performance,
The light emitting mode in drawing out the symbols is different between when the arrangement of decorative symbols temporarily stops before the re-lottery is executed and when the notification that the arrangement of the ornamental symbols is promoted in the re-lottery is carried out.
The light emitting mode in drawing out the symbols is more intense when notification that the arrangement of decorative symbols is promoted in the re-lottery is performed than when the arrangement of the ornamental symbols is temporarily stopped before the re-lottery is executed.

Specifically, in the child table WD20 of the re-lottery part, the same rainbow color as the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 of the winning epilogue part is used as lamp control when the symbol is finally determined after the re-lottery part. , the frame lamp lights up, but when the "2" symbol is promoted and replaced with the "3" symbol by re-drawing, the rainbow color lights up from time tB5 to tB9, once the "2" symbol is lit in the winning epilogue part. The lighting pattern is more intense than the smooth rainbow-colored lighting that occurs when the symbol is temporarily stopped. As a result, the player can more effectively congratulate the player on the promotion of winning symbols in the re-lottery, depending on the lighting manner of the frame lamp.

[Re-lottery performance 21]
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance that notifies whether or not the control is controlled to an advantageous state;
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance consists of an introduction part until the propriety of controlling to an advantageous state is announced, a propriety notification part in which the propriety is notified, and a notification part that informs that the control is to be controlled to an advantageous condition after the propriety is notified. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed when the
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The performance execution means are
When it is determined that the second advantageous state will be controlled, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, the first re-lottery effect displays the first symbol in the first half part and then displays the second symbol in the second half part. is executable,
When it is determined that the first advantageous state is controlled, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, a second re-lottery effect that displays the first symbol in the first half part and then displays the first symbol again in the second half part. It is possible to perform a lottery performance,
After the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part until the symbol confirmation period is reached, the first symbol will be shaken by changing the display mode of the first symbol to the first mode, second mode, and third mode. performs a shaking display that displays the first symbol as if it were
After the second symbol is displayed in the second half part until the symbol confirmation period, the second symbol is swayed by changing the display mode of the second symbol to the first mode, second mode, and third mode. Performs a shaking display that displays the second symbol as if it were
The first aspect is an aspect in which the symbols are easier for the player to visually recognize than either the second aspect or the third aspect,
The performance execution means are
In the re-lottery part, it is possible to display an action promotion display that encourages the player to take action.
If the action is performed at the first timing while the action promotion display is being executed in the first re-lottery performance, the second Displaying the second symbol in a shaking display while maintaining the shaking speed of the shaking display of the second symbol so that the symbol is in the second mode,
When the action promotion display is executed in the first re-lottery performance, if the action is performed at a second timing different from the first timing, the predetermined timing will be displayed after the performance corresponding to the first re-lottery performance is executed. displaying the second symbol in a oscillating manner while maintaining the oscillating speed of the oscillating display of the second symbol so that the second symbol becomes the third mode when
When the movement promotion display is executed in the first re-lottery performance, a display that makes it difficult to see the shaking display of the second symbol from a predetermined timing regardless of whether the movement is performed at the first timing or the second timing. After that, the second symbol is displayed in a shaking display again, and then, when the symbol confirmation period comes, the second symbol is displayed in the first mode while maintaining the shaking speed of the shaking display of the second symbol. stop display,
If the action is performed at the first timing while performing the action promotion display in the second re-lottery performance, the first Displaying the first symbol in a shaking display while maintaining the shaking speed of the shaking display of the first symbol so that the symbol is in the second mode,
If the action is performed at the second timing while the action promotion display is being executed in the second re-lottery performance, the first Displaying the first symbol in a shaking display while maintaining the shaking speed of the shaking display of the first symbol so that the symbol is in a third mode,
When the movement promotion display is executed in the second re-lottery performance, a display that makes it difficult to see the shaking display of the first symbol from a predetermined timing regardless of whether the movement is performed at the first timing or the second timing. After that, the first symbol is displayed in a shaking display again, and then, when the symbol confirmation period comes, the first symbol is displayed in the first mode while maintaining the shaking speed of the shaking display of the first symbol. stop display,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for rainbow light emitting mode,
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow lighting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect to correspond to the first re-lottery effect. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect;
At a specific timing in the second half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. control the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and continue to control the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode during the subsequent symbol determination period;
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare performance, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. .

Specifically, as shown in (L1) to (L3) in FIG. 267, an action promotion display using a button image and a time gauge is displayed during symbol feeding in the re-lottery performance. When the player operates the push button 31B during the period in which the movement promotion display is displayed, the common symbol presentation effects shown in (L4) to (L6) are executed. No matter at which timing the push button 31B is operated, a common pattern display effect is performed by enlarging and reducing the pattern as shown in (L4) to (L5). Thereafter, the symbols are shaken during the symbol shake period. The shaking period of the symbol differs depending on the button operation timing. Therefore, after the symbol shaking period, for example, at the first operation timing, the symbol will be in a position facing the right side, at the second operation timing, the symbol will be in a position facing left, and at the third operation timing, the symbol will be in a position facing to the left. , the design may be in a position facing forward. However, regardless of the operation timing, a white-out effect is then interposed as a common effect from (J1) to (J18), and an effect in which the symbol swings after rotation and reduction of the symbol is performed. According to this, by performing a common effect regardless of when the push button 31B is operated, the symbols can be stopped neatly, and a series of effects can be presented suitably.

[Re-lottery performance 22]
When the operation is performed at the first timing of the valid period of the operation, after the promotion or not is announced, the decorative pattern will be displayed flickering until the predetermined timing of the change comes.
When the action is performed at the second timing earlier than the first timing of the effective period of the action, the action will be performed at the first timing until the predetermined timing of the change is reached after the promotion or not is announced. Decorative patterns will be displayed flickering in proportion to the speed of the game, and the time will be absorbed.

Specifically, when the push button 31B is operated at the first timing during the valid operation period, after the notification of whether or not to be promoted is executed, the decorative pattern is displayed swaying (FIG. 267 (L3) example without operation). When the push button 31B was operated at the second timing earlier than the first timing during the operation validity period, the display of the decorative pattern shaking was earlier than the first timing after the notification of whether or not to be promoted was executed. (The operation in FIG. 267 (L2) is an example of the second timing). When the push button 31B was operated at the third timing earlier than the second timing during the valid operation period, after the notification of whether or not to be promoted was executed, the display of the decorative pattern shaking was earlier than the second timing. (example where the operation in FIG. 267 (L1) is the first timing). In this way, even if the push button 31B is operated at any timing, the duration of the performance can be absorbed by the shaking time of the symbols. By performing a common effect after that, the symbols can be stopped neatly, and a series of effects can be displayed suitably.

[Re-lottery performance 23]
The predetermined performance starts after the swaying decorative pattern is rotated while being enlarged while flashing in white.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 267, after a whiteout is executed as a common effect, a different effect from the previous pattern is performed in which the swaying decorative pattern is enlarged and rotated once. According to this, no matter what position the symbol is in when the symbol is shaken during shaku absorption, by performing a different style of presentation after the whiteout, the flow of the presentation until the symbol stops is changed. This can be done so that it does not make you feel uncomfortable.

[Re-lottery performance 24]
In the swaying display of the decorative pattern, the decorative pattern is displayed swaying around the first position,
In the shaking display, the decorative patterns are displayed in the following order: 1st position, 2nd position, 3rd position, 2nd position, 1st position, 4th position, 5th position, 4th position, 1st position, and 2nd position. The predetermined effect is designed so that when the fixed period is reached, the decorative symbols are always displayed swinging in the order of the second position, first position, and so on.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 267, during the symbol swing period, the symbol swings toward the back from (J10) to (J12), and then swings toward the front from (J13) to (J14). changes to the initial position. Thereafter, the symbol swings toward the front from (J15) to (J16), and then swings toward the back from (J17) to (J18), thereby changing to the initial position. Such a series of movements may be repeated multiple times. However, during the period in which the symbols are determined, the design is such that the symbols are always located at the initial position facing forward as shown in (J18). According to this, the symbols can be fixed and stopped in a manner that does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

[Re-lottery performance 25]
The starting point for causing the light emitting means to emit rainbow light during the second part is to cause the light emitting means to emit rainbow light at the start of a predetermined performance.

Specifically, the game effect lamp 9 is designed to light up in rainbow colors at the whiteout timing (J1) in FIG. 267. The timing (J1) is a performance that is executed as a common performance regardless of the operation timing. By setting the point where such a common effect is performed as the starting point for changing the game effect lamp 9, the designer can easily determine the start timing. Note that the timing (J2) at which the common start display is started may be used as the start trigger instead of the timing (J1), and the start trigger may be any timing of the commonly executed performance.

[Re-lottery performance 26]
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance that notifies whether or not the control is controlled to an advantageous state;
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance consists of an introduction part until the propriety of controlling to an advantageous state is announced, a propriety notification part in which the propriety is notified, and a notification part that informs that the control is to be controlled to an advantageous condition after the propriety is notified. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed when the
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The performance execution means are
When it is determined that the second advantageous state will be controlled, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, the first re-lottery effect displays the first symbol in the first half part and then displays the second symbol in the second half part. is executable,
When it is determined that the first advantageous state is controlled, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, a second re-lottery effect that displays the first symbol in the first half part and then displays the first symbol again in the second half part. It is possible to perform a lottery performance,
In the epilogue part, when displaying the first symbol, the display mode of the first symbol is changed to the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode, so that the first symbol appears to be shaking. It displays the first pattern,
When transitioning from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part, the first symbol is displayed in the first mode, and when transitioning from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part, the first symbol is displayed in the second mode. There are times when the epilogue part is shifted to the re-lottery part at the timing, and there are times when the epilogue part is shifted to the re-lottery part at the timing when the first symbol is displayed in the third mode,
The production execution means performs a re-drawing from the epilogue part at the timing when the first symbol is displayed in the first mode and when moving from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part, and at a timing when the first symbol is displayed in the second mode. Both when transitioning to the part and when transitioning from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part at the timing when the first symbol is displayed in the third mode, perform a specific display that makes the first symbol difficult to see, Displaying the first symbol in a common display mode and executing the first re-lottery performance or the second re-lottery performance,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for rainbow light emitting mode,
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow lighting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect to correspond to the first re-lottery effect. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect;
At a specific timing in the second half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. control the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and continue to control the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode during the subsequent symbol determination period;
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare performance, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 266, when the image indicating the stick controller 31A and the time gauge are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, no matter which timing the stick controller 31A is operated, after that, It is also possible to provide a period of symbol fluctuation for absorbing the length in the time up to a predetermined timing when the re-lottery performance is executed (symbol fluctuation period from (K4)). Then, when the re-lottery effect is executed at a predetermined timing, a common effect with whiteout as shown in (K8) to (K17) may be executed. According to this, no matter at which timing the stick controller 31A is operated, the re-lottery effect is executed after the symbols are displayed in a shaking manner and then a common effect involving whiteout is executed, so that the re-lottery effect is executed at the start of the re-lottery. It is possible to prevent the movement of the symbols from causing a sense of discomfort, and it is possible to present a series of effects in a suitable manner.

[Re-lottery performance 27]
The re-lottery effect is the same no matter which one of the multiple introduction parts wins.

Specifically, from the time the whiteout screen appears until the re-lottery effect is executed, any of the plurality of reaches may be the same. According to this, the data capacity of the performance data can be reduced.

[Re-lottery performance 28]
The movement of the decorative pattern after the specific display is an extension of the movement in which the decorative pattern was once swaying and displayed before the specific display.

Specifically, the movement of the symbols after the white-out screen may be an extension of the movement of the symbols before the white-out screen. For example, if the movement of the design in front of the whiteout screen is a movement that swings from the front side to the back side by rotating the axis around the vertical direction of the design, the movement after the whiteout screen is It may be a movement in which the image is rotated clockwise around the vertical direction of the pattern while being enlarged. According to this, by displaying a whiteout in between movements that are extensions of the same axis rotation, it is possible to prevent the movement of the design from feeling strange, and to make a series of effects appear more suitable. be able to.

[Re-lottery performance 29]
The plurality of types of introduction parts include a predetermined introduction part that is a branch of notification as to whether or not the control is controlled to an advantageous state and is not notified due to the operation of the operating means,
In the predetermined introduction part, there is no point where the scale shifts, so if it is determined that the predetermined introduction part will be controlled in an advantageous state, the temporary stop of the decorative symbols until the re-lottery effect is executed. There is no shake in the display, but the same re-lottery effect is performed as in the reach where the length is off.

Specifically, the plurality of SP reaches include those for which no promotion of operation such as button operation is reported at the branch when determining whether or not to be controlled to an advantageous state. With such an SP reach, there is no difference in scale due to operation. However, even in such an SP reach, a re-lottery effect similar to the SP reach where a scale deviation occurs may be executed. According to this, it is possible to avoid causing a sense of discomfort even when there is only one re-lottery effect due to the common effect regardless of the presence or absence of a scale shift. In addition, data capacity can be reduced by using only one re-lottery effect.

[Re-lottery performance 30]
In the flow that goes to the re-lottery performance after the shaking display of the decorative symbols at the jackpot in the predetermined introduction part,
The timing of transition to the re-lottery performance is designed so that the movement is an extension of the decorative pattern after the specific display.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 266, the timing is set so that the movement of the symbols after the white-out screen is an extension of the movement of the symbols before the white-out screen. For example, the movement of the symbol in front of the whiteout screen is any position in a series of movements in which the symbol moves from the right position (K3) to the front position (K5) to the left position (K6). It is designed to be. In other words, when one of the series of movements in which the symbol swings clockwise occurs, a whiteout is performed by the re-lottery effect, and then the symbol continues to enlarge and rotate clockwise. According to this, it is possible to prevent a feeling of discomfort from occurring in the movement of the symbols due to the series of clockwise movement of the symbols from the period of symbol fluctuation to the re-lottery performance.

<Explanation of terms>
The gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has been described above. Below, some terms used in this specification will be explained.

"Variable display" (variable display) includes variable display of multiple types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), multiple types of normal symbols, and multiple types of decorative symbols.

"Fluctuation" of symbols includes the updated display of multiple types of symbols, such as multiple types of special symbols (1st special symbol, 2nd special symbol), multiple types of normal symbols, and multiple types of decorative symbols, and Scroll display, transformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, lighting/blinking/turning off of lamps (4th symbol unit 9050, special symbol 1 variable display section 9053, special symbol 2 variable display section 9054, etc.) Including.

The "decorative symbols" include symbols that are variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game.

A "reduced pattern" is a pattern in which a decorative pattern is reduced, and includes a pattern smaller than the decorative pattern. When the reduced symbols are stopped and displayed, the same numerical symbols as the decorative symbols are displayed smaller than the decorative symbols at the edge of the screen.

The "small design" includes a design corresponding to the variable display of the decorative design that is displayed in a smaller size than the decorative design. The small designs are the decorative patterns displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative patterns displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C, and the decorative patterns displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R. The symbols corresponding to each of the ornamental symbols are arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction.

"Design confirmation" means that the fluctuations of the 4th symbol unit 9050, special symbol 1 variable display section 9053, special symbol 2 variable display section 9054, and decorative symbols, etc., which were fluctuating, stop, and finally the special symbol game This includes determining the design in . For example, the state in which the fluctuations of the decorative symbols that fluctuate in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the decorative symbols that fluctuate in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C, and the decorative symbols that fluctuate in the right decorative symbol display area 5R have stopped. include.

In the "design confirmation period", the display result is determined by stopping the fluctuations of the 4th symbol unit 9050, special symbol 1 variable display section 9053, special symbol 2 variable display section 9054, and decorative symbols. Including period. For example, the decorative patterns that change in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative patterns that change in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, and the decorative patterns that change in the right decorative pattern display area 5R stop and are displayed. Includes a state in which the results are displayed definitively.

"Reach" means that when the decorative symbols that have been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination, the variable display of the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed continues to be displayed. For example, a decorative pattern "2" is stopped in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, a decorative pattern "2" is stopped in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, but the inside decorative pattern display area 5C This includes a state in which the variable display of decorative patterns is still continuing.

"Lights out" of the lighting means (light emitting means) includes a state in which the value of the brightness data for lighting (lighting) the lamp (lighting means, light emitting means) is "0" (a value indicating the lowest brightness). In addition, "lights out" of the lighting means (light emitting means) refers to the brightness data corresponding to turning off the light, such as the value of the brightness data for lighting (light emission) the lamp (lighting means, light emitting means), such as "1" or "2". It may include a state where the value is close to "0". Note that a state where the value of the brightness data for lighting (lighting) the lamp (lighting means, light emitting means) is close to "0", such as "1" or "2", is the brightness data corresponding to turning off the lamp, as " It may also be included in "lights on" or "slightly off".

"Lighting" or "light emission" of the lighting means (light emitting means) is a state in which the value of the brightness data for lighting (light emitting) the lamp (lighting means, light emitting means) is higher than when the lamp is turned off, and the value of the brightness data is higher than when the lamp is turned off. This includes a state in which the value is greater than or equal to the luminance data value ("0") corresponding to "lights out" described above. "Lighting" includes constant lighting, in which the lamp is always on, wave lighting, in which multiple lamps are switched from off to on in sequence, and hazy lighting, in which the lamps are dimly lit while changing the brightness.

"Flashing" of the lighting means (light-emitting means) means that the lamp (lighting means, light-emitting means) is in a state other than "off", "almost off", or "on", and when the lamp is "on" and "off". This includes repeating the process over time. Furthermore, "blinking" of the lighting means (light emitting means) includes the lamp repeating "lighting up" and "substantially extinguishing" over time.

"Brightness" is a value indicating the brightness of a lamp (lighting means, light emitting means), and in this embodiment, brightness data is expressed in hexadecimal as data corresponding to brightness. For example, if the brightness data used to control a predetermined lamp is "0", the lamp control is performed so that the predetermined lamp has the lowest brightness (the lamp is darkest), and the predetermined lamp is controlled. When the brightness data used for this is "F", lamp control is performed so that the predetermined lamp has the highest brightness (the lamp is brightest). As mentioned above, the brightness data corresponds to the value of the current flowing through the lamp, and when the brightness data used to control a given lamp is "0", the current flowing through the given lamp is the smallest. , when the brightness data used to control a predetermined lamp is "F", the current flowing through the predetermined lamp becomes the largest. Note that the term "lamp" is not limited to LED (light emitting diode) lamps, but includes any type of lamp, such as EL (electroluminescence) lamps and incandescent lamps.

The "lighting color" or "emission color" of a lamp includes the color represented by the light emission of one or more light emitting elements included in the lamp. For example, if a lamp is composed of LEDs consisting of three light emitting elements such as "R" (red), "G" (green), and "B" (blue), the three light emitting elements are adjusted by the LED driver based on the brightness data. The three light emitting elements emit light due to the current applied to one light emitting element, thereby lighting up the LEDs in various colors. Note that the "lighting color" of the lamp varies depending on the color of the light emitting element. For example, in the case of an LED consisting of only "W" (white) light emitting elements, the lamp lights up in white, although the brightness varies depending on the flowing current; In the case of an LED consisting of only red light emitting elements, the lamp lights up in red, although the brightness varies depending on the current flowing.

Among the lamp lighting colors, "rainbow colors" (seven colors) include colors made up of seven types of colors. For example, "rainbow colors" include red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and violet. Note that the "rainbow colors" are not limited to the above-mentioned colors, but may be composed of seven other colors. Even if the same "rainbow color" is used, the lighting mode is different between smooth lighting based on the brightness data table (grandchild table) shown in Figure 225 and blinking based on the brightness data table (grandchild table) shown in Figure 256. In addition, the lighting mode using rainbow colors may differ depending on the set brightness data.

The "colors corresponding to characters" include colors predetermined for each character appearing in the performance of the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, there are colors set for each character, such as green for the character Yumu-chan, purple for Jam-chan, and red for Bakuchu.

The "emission color corresponding to the character" is the lighting color (emission color) of the game effect lamp 9, and includes a predetermined color for each character appearing in the performance of the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the "emission color corresponding to the character" is the lighting color (emission color) of the game effect lamp 9 in green corresponding to the character Yumu-chan, and the lighting color (light emission color) of the game effect lamp 9 in purple corresponding to the character Jam-chan. (emission color), the lighting color of the game effect lamp 9 in red corresponding to Bakushu (emission color), etc.

The "line sounds" include sounds corresponding to the words that are output in synchronization with the timing at which the characters appearing in the pachinko game machine 1 utter the words. In the pachinko game machine 1, sounds (speech sounds) corresponding to words uttered by the characters are outputted in accordance with images of characters appearing in the performance.

"Serif subtitles" include characters corresponding to the serif sounds displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 when the serif sounds are output. Serif subtitles are also called subtitle display.

"Physical sounds" include physical sounds produced by the actions of objects such as characters and things that appear in the performance. In the pachinko game machine 1, physical sounds (physical sounds) that would be produced by the movements of objects such as characters and objects that appear in the performance are output in accordance with images of the objects.

"Onomatopoeia" includes pseudo sounds that express the actions of objects such as characters and things that appear in the performance. In the pachinko game machine 1, a pseudo sound (onomatopoeic sound) expressing the motion of the object is outputted in accordance with the image of an object such as a character or an object that appears in the performance.

The "character action" includes a performance in which a character appearing in the performance of the pachinko game machine 1 performs some kind of action. For example, this includes the action of Yumu-chan's character chasing Bakuchu's character.

The "re-lottery effect" is a temporary jackpot symbol that does not result in a variable probability jackpot in the variable display of decorative symbols (for example, an even number symbol such as a "2" symbol) that is temporarily stopped and displayed, and then the normal jackpot symbol becomes a variable probability jackpot. It includes an effect that is executed before the symbol is determined in order to encourage whether or not the symbol will be promoted to a symbol (for example, an odd number symbol such as a "3" symbol).

The ``replacement display'' is a performance included in the ``re-lottery performance'' and includes a display of an image in which a temporarily stopped decorative pattern is sequentially replaced with another pattern, so that the decorative pattern is switched one after another. In this embodiment, the "replacement display" is a display in which the "2" symbol changes at high speed and is sequentially replaced by other symbols, until the "2" or "3" symbol finally stops. include.

"Repeated display" refers to repeating the same display, and refers to repeating display using the same animation. This is a performance included in the "re-lottery performance" and includes a display in which a temporarily stopped decorative pattern is repeatedly displayed with the same animation. As an example, the "repeated display" includes a display in which the "7" symbol changes at high speed and is sequentially replaced by other symbols, and finally the "7" symbol stops.

The "shaking display" is to display a decorative pattern while shaking it, indicating that the fluctuation is not finished but is in progress.

"Stop display" means to display the decorative pattern in a stationary state without moving it, and indicates that the variation has ended.

"Swinging speed" refers to the speed at which the decorative pattern moves from the first position to the second position when it is displayed swinging.

The "first aspect of the design," the "second aspect of the design," and the "third aspect of the design" are aspects that indicate the position of the decorative design. For example, when displaying a decorative pattern swinging up and down, if the first aspect is the center position, the second aspect is the upper position, and the third aspect is the lower position. Further, when the decorative pattern is displayed swinging in the front-back direction, when the first mode is the front position, the second mode is the left-facing position, and the third mode is the right-facing position.

The "fanfare performance" is a performance that is executed at the start of the jackpot game state to notify that the jackpot game state has entered.

"Advancement of a movable object (accessory object)" is an operation in which an accessory object as a movable object moves from its initial position. The position at the end of the movable area where the accessory moves is the advancing position.

"Retreating" a movable object (accessory object) is an operation in which an accessory object as a movable object moves from an advanced position to an initial position. The initial position of the movable area in which the accessory moves is the retracted position.

"Effect display for movable body movement" is a display for enhancing the visual effect around the accessory on the screen as the accessory moves to the advanced position as a movable body. For example, an effect image is displayed to make the action of the accessory stand out in accordance with the action of the accessory when the reach develops in the latter half or when a jackpot is announced.

"Story development" refers to the progression of a story or a series of performances. That is, the story is continuously displayed to the player without interruption due to scene changes or the like.

"Part, scene" refers to the groups that make up the production, and parts are larger groups than scenes. Parts are divided by role.

"Scene switching" mainly refers to switching of the display, and particularly refers to switching of the displayed background, characters, etc.

"Cut-in display" is an effect in which another image is displayed cutting into the currently displayed image. Further, the cut-in display can also indicate the degree of jackpot expectation by the color of the cut-in display. For example, when the cut-in display is red, the expectation of a jackpot is higher than when it is green.

The "switching display (eye-catch display)" is an effect that is displayed when the scene changes. In this embodiment, the eye-catching display is used when the scene changes from a state indicating a loss to a state of normal gaming. The eye-catching display has the role of making it easy to understand that the super reach has ended.

"Occupation display (shutter display)" means that the image display device 5 displays an image such as a shutter so as to cover the entire area displayed by the image display device 5, and the image that was displayed before the occlusion display is displayed. This is a display that shields the In the shielding display, the image may be shielded by displaying something other than the shutter.

"The luminance data is switched" means that the luminance data timer defined in the grandchild table becomes 0 and the next luminance data is used. By switching the luminance data, the light emitting mode of the lamp changes. By switching the light emission mode of the lamp, the player is given the impression that the storyline of the currently displayed scene has been updated.

"The luminance data is not switched" means that the luminance data timer defined in the grandchild table does not become 0, and the luminance data continues to be used. Since the brightness data does not change, the light emission mode of the lamp remains constant. Since the light emitting mode of the lamp is constant, it gives the player the impression that the story development of the currently displayed scene is not updated and has stopped.

"Video data" is data for displaying a video including animation. The images displayed on the image display device 5 are switched at high speed by several tens of images per second to give the illusion of movement. The video data may be stored after being compressed.

"First video data" is video data that is created using many images in order to make a character move among the video data.

"Second video data" is video data that is created using a small number of images in order to make the character move among the video data.

"Movement of a specific character" refers to a motion corresponding to a specific character among a plurality of characters appearing in the production.

"Blackout" is an effect that darkens (blacks out) by displaying a black image in the display area in order to make the image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 invisible. The blackout may be configured such that the expectation level (reliability) for a jackpot varies depending on the duration of the blackout state.

“Whiteout” is an effect in which a white image is displayed in the display area (whiteout) in order to make the image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 invisible. The whiteout may be configured such that the expectation level (reliability) for a jackpot varies depending on the duration of the white image being displayed.

"Specific display that makes it difficult to see" means that an image is displayed on the screen to make the displayed decorative pattern invisible to the player. For example, by displaying a white image entirely on the screen (whiteout), the decorative pattern becomes invisible to the player.

"Fade effect" refers to fade-in and fade-out used in video technology. Fade-in means that a state in which a background image or the like is displayed gradually changes to a state in which a predetermined image is visible. In this embodiment, for example, images showing dialogue are gradually displayed from a state in which a room background is displayed. Gradually displaying means gradually lowering the transparency of the image showing the dialogue and displaying it. For example, after displaying a dialogue image with 100% transparency, the dialogue image is displayed after 1 second by decreasing the transparency by 10% every 0.1 seconds. Further, "fade out" is the opposite of "fade in", and means that a state in which a predetermined image is visible overlapping the background image gradually changes to only the background image. In this embodiment, for example, from a state in which an image showing lines is displayed on the room background, the image showing lines is gradually hidden. Gradually hiding means gradually increasing the transparency of the image showing the lines. For example, after displaying a dialogue image with a transparency of 0%, by increasing the transparency by 10% every 0.1 seconds, the dialogue image becomes hidden after 1 second. Furthermore, the fade effect includes a cross-fade in which images are replaced by fading in and fading out at the same time.

<Example of time-saving control without going through hit>
Next, as a time saving state, an example will be described in which time saving control is executed without going through a win (big hit, small hit, etc.).
(Example of time-saving control using time-saving symbols)

(A1) In each of the characteristic parts and modifications described above, the transition to the time saving state (high base state) is always performed via the jackpot state or small win state in which the special variable winning ball device 7A operates. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed as a special symbol, the time-saving state (high base (state). In other words, as the time saving state, time saving control that does not involve winning (big hit, small winning, etc.) may be executed.

(A2) As the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, these time-saving symbols may be part of the losing symbols or may be part of the small winning symbols.

(A3) In addition, when performing lottery processing related to the derivation display of time-saving symbols, the lottery may be performed using random numbers dedicated to the time-saving symbol lottery, or lottery random numbers for losing symbols may be used for these lottery processing. The lottery may be performed using other random numbers for performing a lottery, such as a lottery random number for a jackpot symbol, a lottery random number for a small win symbol, a random number for determining a jackpot lottery, or a lottery random number for a falling lottery.

(A4) Furthermore, these time-saving symbols may be of a plurality of types, and may also be used in conjunction with a combination of symbols displayed as other symbols such as small winning symbols and losing symbols. In this case, whether or not to shift to the time saving state may be determined based on the small winning symbols used together. However, when the time saving symbol is won, there is no further lottery to determine whether or not there will be a transition to the time saving state, nor will there be a lottery to determine the number of time reductions.

(A5) In addition, when drawing a time-saving symbol and the setting value can be changed, the probability of drawing a time-saving symbol does not change according to the setting value. The lottery probabilities of these time saving symbols are the same, but the lottery probabilities of these time-saving symbols may be different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

(A6) Also, regarding the timing of obtaining random numbers when drawing time-saving symbols, whether you use a dedicated random number or another random number, It is acceptable to win a prize in the winning opening (the winning opening, the second starting winning opening).

(A7) In addition, for winning when drawing time-saving symbols, if special random numbers (time-saving random numbers) are used, the winning value is the lottery result using the dedicated random numbers (time-saving random numbers), and When using a small winning symbol random number, a specific small winning symbol random number can be used as a winning value, and when using a random number for a fall lottery judgment value in a time saving symbol lottery, a random number for a falling lottery judgment value can be used as a winning value. , a lottery using a structure, for example, a time-saving area may be provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7A, and the passage of the game ball through the time-saving area may be regarded as a winning of the time-saving symbol.

(A8) In addition, when the lottery of time-saving symbols is carried out using a structure, when the small winning symbol is used together with the time-saving symbol, the variable number of times the time-saving state is displayed (time-saving number) depends on whether or not the time-saving area is passed. Avoid changing.

(A9) In addition, regarding winning when drawing time-saving symbols, if a losing symbol random number is used in the time-saving symbol drawing, a specific losing symbol random number is used as the winning value, and a jackpot symbol random number is used in the time-saving symbol drawing. In this case, a specific jackpot symbol random number value can be used as the winning value. However, if these random numbers are used as winning values, performance other than the jackpot probability will vary depending on the settings, so this is only possible if the set values cannot be changed.

(A10) Moreover, the determination timing of the lottery result of the time-saving symbol may be executed at the timing after the jackpot determination. In addition, no matter which random number the random number used for the lottery is, the time-saving symbol lottery is not executed in the time-saving state (high base) or in the high probability state, but only in the low probability low base state. . However, even if the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed in a time-saving state, the difference between resetting the time-saving number and not drawing a lottery may be determined for each gaming machine.

(A11) Also, regarding the number of time saving times when the time saving symbols are derived and displayed, it is possible to have a plurality of predetermined number of time saving times depending on the winning value (symbol) and each gaming state. Further, the time saving granting conditions can be made different for each time saving symbol.

(A12) Furthermore, when the number of time-saving symbols differs depending on the time-saving symbol, the lottery for distributing the time-saving symbol can be changed between special symbol 1 and special symbol 2.

(A13) Furthermore, even when the same time saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of times saved may be given differently depending on the gaming state at that time. However, it is required that it be predetermined for the gaming state.

(A14) Moreover, a lottery result of "time saving number of times 0" can be included as a lottery result of a time saving symbol in a low probability low base state.

(A15) In addition, a lottery for deriving the time-saving end symbol (time-saving end lottery) is executed, and the number of times is set as the number of times after the time-saving start until the time-saving end symbol is derived and displayed, or until the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. good. In other words, the number of time reductions may not be set, but may be unlimited in principle.

(A16) Further, the number of times of time saving and the granting conditions may be different between the time saving state controlled by the time saving symbol and the time saving state controlled by the occurrence of a jackpot.

(A17) Furthermore, when the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is when the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, in the case where a small winning symbol random number is used for the lottery of time saving symbols, and when the small winning is won and the time saving state is to be entered, the end of the small winning operation is the timing at which the time saving state is controlled.

(A18) In addition, in the case of a lottery using a structure, the timing at which the time saving state is controlled is the timing at which the operation of the structure ends in the game state in which the structure is operated (for example, the small winning state).

(A19) In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that is controlled to a high probability low base state for a predetermined variable display number of times after winning a jackpot (so-called fixed number fixed variable display machine (ST machine)), the high probability It is a low base state, and after the high probability low base state is finished after variable display is executed a predetermined number of times, the time saving state may be controlled.

(A20) In addition, when a time-saving limiter function is installed and a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of times of the time-saving limiter is updated.

(A21) Also, the symbol confirmation time of the time saving symbol may be set to a different time from the symbol confirmation time of other symbols.

(Other time-saving control examples using time-saving symbols)
As other time saving control using time saving symbols, the following control may be executed.

(B1) Based on the fact that a variable display result (special display result) of a time-saving symbol is displayed with a special symbol in the normal state, game control is performed to shift from the normal state to a time-saving state (special state), and the special symbol is displayed in the time-saving state. Based on the variable display result of the time-saving symbol being displayed, game control is not performed to move from the time-saving state to a similar time-saving state (even if the time-saving symbol is displayed, the time-saving state is overwritten (time-saving It may also be possible to control switching of the gaming state so that it occurs again. Then, different effects may be performed when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed with the special symbol in the normal state and when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed with the special symbol in the time-saving state (decorative symbol (For example, in the normal state, a special symbol is displayed as a time-saving symbol, and in the time-saving state, a general losing symbol is displayed.) Thereby, suitable control is possible depending on the state when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed (for example, the interest is improved by performing the performance depending on whether or not the state has changed).

(B2) In a gaming machine that controls (B1), when the display result of a special symbol is a time-saving symbol, the special symbol displays a common time-saving symbol in the normal state and the time-saving state, and the decorative symbol is in the normal state. Different symbols may be displayed as a display result depending on the time-saving state and the time-saving state (for example, in the normal state, a decorative symbol displays a special symbol corresponding to the time-saving symbol, but in the time-saving state, it displays a simple losing symbol, etc.). (e.g., not displaying the pattern corresponding to the pattern). This prevents the player from feeling a loss due to the display results of the decorative symbols in the time-saving state, and can suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(B3) In the gaming machine that controls (B1), in the normal state, an effect is performed that suggests whether or not the display result of the decorative symbol will be a special symbol (time-saving symbol); however, in the time-saving state, the decorative symbol It may be arranged not to perform an effect that suggests whether or not the display result will be a special symbol (time-saving symbol). This prevents the player from feeling a loss due to the display result of the decorative symbols due to the performance in the time-saving state, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(B4) In the gaming machine that controls (B1), the fixed display time of the decorative pattern (the time to maintain the display state after displaying the fixed surface result) is now different between the normal state and the time-saving state. May be controlled. This prevents the player from feeling a loss due to the display of decorative symbols in a time-saving state, and can suppress a decline in game interest.

(B5) After performing the first variable display using the first special symbol and after performing the second variable display using the second special symbol, it is possible to control to an advantageous state that is advantageous for the player, and the normal state Based on the fact that a variable display result (special display result) of a time-saving symbol is displayed with a special symbol, game control is performed to shift from a normal state to a time-saving state (special state), and in the time-saving state, a time-saving symbol is variable with a special symbol. Based on the display result, do not perform game control that moves the time-saving state to a similar time-saving state (such as overwriting the time-saving state even if a time-saving symbol is displayed (so that the time-saving state will occur again). (b) without controlling the switching of the gaming state. The second variable display has a higher rate of displaying the variable display results of the time-saving symbols than the first variable display, and the information regarding the variable display is stored as pending memory information, and when the time-saving state ends, the variable display result is displayed. It is possible to execute different effects depending on whether the information is stored (it is possible to specify that the time saving control will continue to be displayed when shifting to the time saving control, and that the time saving control will not be executed when not shifting to the time saving control) During the time-saving state, a right-handed game is played in response to the right-handed notification (information that instructs right-handed hitting), and when the time-saving state ends, a variable display based on the stored pending memory information is displayed. Until it's all over. It may be arranged not to provide left-handed hitting notification (notification instructing left-handed hitting). This enables suitable control depending on the state when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed (for example, the interest is improved by executing the performance depending on whether or not the state has changed).

(B6) After performing the first variable display using the first special symbol and after performing the second variable display using the second special symbol, it is possible to control to an advantageous state that is advantageous for the player, and the normal state Based on the fact that a variable display result (special display result) of a time-saving symbol is displayed with a special symbol, game control is performed to shift from a normal state to a time-saving state (special state), and in the time-saving state, a time-saving symbol is variable with a special symbol. Based on the display result, do not perform game control that moves the time-saving state to a similar time-saving state (such as overwriting the time-saving state even if a time-saving symbol is displayed (so that the time-saving state will occur again). (b) without controlling the switching of the gaming state. Then, the second variable display has a higher rate of displaying the variable display results of the time-saving symbols than the first variable display, and the information regarding the variable display is stored as pending memory information, and when the time-saving state ends, the variable display result is displayed. It is possible to perform different effects depending on whether or not the information is stored (it is possible to specify that the time saving control will continue to be displayed when shifting to the time saving control, and that the time saving control will not be executed when not shifting to the time saving control) During the time saving state, a right-handed game is played in response to the right-handed notification, until all variable displays based on the remaining pending storage information stored when the time saving state ends are completed. It is also possible to not provide left-handed hitting notification (notification that instructs left-handed hitting). Thereby, suitable control is possible depending on the state when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed (for example, the interest is improved by performing the performance depending on whether or not the state has changed).

(B7) Execute the left-handed hit notification in the variable display (first variable display) that is executed after the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reservation storage information stored when the time saving state ends. It's okay. As a result, instructions on how to hit the ball are given in a suitable manner, allowing the game to proceed smoothly and making the game more interesting.

(B8) When the display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed in the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reservation memory information stored when the time-saving state ends, and when the variable display based on the remaining reservation memory information is displayed. In the case of a hit (small hit, jackpot) in the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when it is executed, the notification mode of the right-hand hit notification that is executed in response to the hit is different. It may be different. This prevents the player from feeling a loss due to the display result of the decorative symbol due to the performance of the right-hand hit notification mode, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(B9) In the remaining pending memory information stored when the time saving state ends, there is a common effect between when there is pending memory information in which the display result of the time saving symbol is displayed and when there is no such pending memory information. It is possible to execute a different effect after executing (For example, when there is pending memory information in which the display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed in the fourth pending memory information among the four remaining pending memories, the third pending memory Until the variable display based on the information, a common effect suggesting whether or not to return to the time-saving state is executed, and in the variable display based on the fourth suspended memory information, a time-saving state return effect different from the common effect is executed. possible). This prevents the player from feeling a loss due to the display result of the decorative symbol due to the performance of the right-hand hit notification mode, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(B10) An effect upon transition to the time saving state based on the display result of the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reservation memory information stored when the time saving state ends, and a variable display based on the remaining reservation memory information. The notification mode of the right-hand hit notification that is executed in response to a win is different from the presentation at the time of transition to the time-saving state based on the display result of the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when it is executed. You can do it like this. As a result, the performance changes depending on the gaming state, so it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

(B11) The final display time of the display result in the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining storage information stored when the time saving state ends (the display state is maintained after displaying the final surface result) The final display time of the display result in the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when the variable display based on the remaining pending storage information is executed may be the same. This makes it possible to suppress an increase in control data.

(B12) During the period in which the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining pending storage information stored when the time saving state ends, right-handed notification is not executed, and the variable display based on the remaining pending storage information is executed. When the display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed on the display, the right hit notification may be executed during the initial period of the start of the next variable display. As a result, instructions on how to hit the ball are given in a suitable manner, allowing the game to proceed smoothly and making the game more interesting.

(B13) Based on the fact that a variable display result (special display result) of a time-saving symbol is displayed with a special symbol in the normal state, game control is performed to shift from the normal state to a time-saving state (special state), and the variable display result is small. It is possible to perform a common specific performance (reach performance, preview performance) in the case of a winning pattern (specific display result) such as a winning pattern or jackpot pattern, and in the case of a time-saving pattern (special display result), and multiple The proportion of time-saving symbols (special display results) may vary depending on which common specific performance is executed among the types of common specific performances. Then, when the display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed in the variable display, the right hit notification may be executed during the initial period of the start of the next variable display. Thereby, it is possible to suitably control the performance according to the gaming state when the time-saving symbols (special display results) are displayed.

(B14) After executing the common specific performance, the display result may be a winning symbol (specific display result) or a time-saving symbol (special display result). Thereby, variations in the performance results of the variable display are enriched, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(B15) The CPU 103 for game control uses a common fluctuation pattern in the case of a winning symbol (specific display result), the case of a time-saving symbol (special display result), and the case of a losing symbol (predetermined display result). Even if the production control CPU 120 receives a command specifying the same variation pattern from the game control CPU 103, the production control CPU 120 can select a different production in the variable display depending on the type of symbol specification command that specifies the display result. may be made executable. As a result, variations in the effects of the variable display are enriched, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(B16) After executing the common specific effect, it is possible to execute a special effect that can be executed when a time-saving symbol (special display result) is obtained. Thereby, the interest of the game can be improved by the special performance after the execution of the common specific performance.

(B17) Depending on the type of the common specific performance, there may be cases in which a special effect that can be executed when a time-saving symbol (special display result) is obtained, and cases in which it is not executed (for example, multiple types of special effects may be executed). (For example, when performing a super reach performance that has a high expectation of winning, a special performance is not executed.) As a result, the feeling of anticipation of winning is maintained without execution of a performance that only excessively stimulates the time-saving state, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(B18) Depending on the type of the common specific performance, the degree of expectation (ratio) of the time-saving symbol (special display result) when the special performance is executed may be different. As a result, the feeling of anticipation of winning is maintained without execution of a performance that only excessively stimulates the time-saving state, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(B18) Depending on the type of the common specific performance, the degree of expectation (ratio) of the time-saving symbol (special display result) when the special performance is executed may be different. As a result, the feeling of anticipation of winning is maintained without execution of a performance that only excessively stimulates the time-saving state, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(B19) A predetermined performance different from the common specific performance (for example, an active display whose display mode can be changed depending on the degree of expectation for a win (a display that has been moved from the display position of the pending display to another display position, and is currently being executed) The expectation level (proportion) of the time-saving symbol (special display result) is made to differ depending on the performance mode of the display display that can suggest the expectation level of winning corresponding to the variable display of Good too. As a result, the feeling of anticipation of winning is maintained without execution of a performance that only excessively stimulates the time-saving state, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(B20) In the special performance that can be executed when the time-saving design (special display result) occurs, after executing the performance (time-saving suggestion performance, etc.) that suggests the time-saving design (special display result), the winning symbol (specific It may also be possible to perform a performance (such as a special jackpot with a higher gaming value than in a time-saving state) that notifies the player of the display result). As a result, the feeling of anticipation of winning is maintained without execution of a performance that only excessively stimulates the time-saving state, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(B21) The CPU 103 for game control can control the time-saving states (special states) in which the number of time-savings (time-saving continuation period) differs depending on the type of time-saving symbols (special display results) provided in plural types (for example, the (1st time saving symbol: 50 time savings, 2nd time saving symbol: 100 time savings, etc.), the performance control CPU 120 is given when the time saving symbol stops depending on the type of performance executed (for example, the type of reach performance, etc.) It is also possible to perform effects with different number of time reductions (duration periods). As a result, depending on the type of performance, the player's attention is drawn to the number of times that the game is shortened after that, and it is possible to improve the game's interest.

(B22) Controls the progress of the game by controlling the game to shift from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state) based on the fact that the variable display result (special display result) of the time-saving symbol is displayed with the special symbol in the normal state. A command is transmitted from the game control CPU 103 (game control means), and the performance control CPU 120 (performance control means) that receives the command can execute the performance based on the command. The transmitted commands include a special command that can specify transition (control) from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state), and the production control CPU 120 sends multiple types of commands including the special command. When received, based on the pre-reading of the pending memory information, it is specified that a variable display that can shift to a time-saving state (special state) will be executed. Execution may be restricted (not executed at all, only rarely executed, etc.). Thereby, performance control can be suitably executed according to the gaming state when the time-saving symbols (special display results) are displayed.

(B23) Based on the pre-reading of the pending storage information, pre-reading of the pending storage information that has occurred after the pending storage information where it has been specified that a variable display that can be shifted (controlled) to a jackpot gaming state (specific gaming state) will be executed. Execution of the preview performance may be restricted. Then, as the pre-read preview performance while the execution of such a pre-read preview performance is restricted, a common mode of performance may be made possible. Thereby, by restricting performance control that does not correspond to the actual gaming state from being executed as the gaming state changes, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(B24) When the variable display whose prefetch target is based on pending memory information is a variable display in which a time-saving symbol (special display result) is displayed, and when the variable display that is not displayed as if the time-saving symbol (special display result) is displayed. In both the case of display and the case of display, the execution of a prefetch preview effect for pending storage information generated after the relevant pending storage information may be restricted. Thereby, by restricting performance control that does not correspond to the actual gaming state from being executed as the gaming state changes, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(B25) The prefetched preview performance while the execution of the prefetched preview performance is restricted does not execute a performance whose expectation level is higher than a specific expectation level (for example, if the expectation level of the color of the pending display is blue < green < red, the prefetched preview performance is suspended) (such as not changing the display color to red). Thereby, by restricting performance control that does not correspond to the actual gaming state from being executed as the gaming state changes, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(B26) The prefetched preview performance while the execution of the prefetched preview performance is restricted does not execute a specific type of performance (for example, if the expectation level of the pending display color is blue < green < red, the color of the pending display is set to red. etc.). Thereby, by restricting performance control that does not correspond to the actual gaming state from being executed as the gaming state changes, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(Example of time-saving control using a variable number of displays that resulted in a predetermined display result, such as a variable display number of losers)
Next, an example of time saving control using the number of variable displays (the number of consecutive variable displays resulting in a loss) that resulted in a predetermined display result (loss display result, small win display result that does not become a jackpot, etc.) in the normal state will be described. As shown below, the time saving state (special state) is when the number of consecutive variable displays with a predetermined display result (loss display result, small win display result that is not a jackpot, etc.) reaches a special number (for example, 1000 times). It may be possible to execute the following condition. Note that the predetermined result may be such that a time saving state (special state) can be executed on the condition that the number of continuations of the variable display resulting in a losing display result reaches a special number of times.

(C1) After performing the first variable display using the first special symbol and after performing the second variable display using the second special symbol, the game is played based on the fact that the variable display result becomes the specific display result. The numerical information of the number of executions of the variable display that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the user and that resulted in a predetermined display result (loss display result, small win display result that is not a jackpot, etc.) in the normal state is updated, and the numerical information is updated. Based on the above, when a special condition is established in which the number of executions (continuation number) of the variable display that resulted in the predetermined display result reaches a special number (for example, 1000 times, etc.), the normal state changes to the time saving state (special state). You may control the game to transfer. The numerical information may be updated both when the predetermined display result is achieved in the first variable display and when the predetermined display result is achieved in the second variable display. As a result, even in situations where either the first variable display or the second variable display is executable, the numerical information of the number of times the predetermined display result is obtained continues to be updated, making it easier for players to be relieved in a time-saving state. , it is possible to increase the player's desire to play. Therefore, it is possible to suitably realize relief for the player due to the time saving condition.

(C2) The special condition is established when it is determined based on the numerical information that a predetermined display result different from the specific display result has been displayed a special number of times (for example, 1000 times, etc.). You may also do so. Thereby, when display results that are unfavorable to the player continue, the player can be rescued by shifting to the time saving state (special state), so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(C3) The numerical information may be updated when variable display is executed even in a state different from the normal state (variable probability state, time saving state). This makes it possible to suitably rescue the player when display results that are disadvantageous to the player occur consecutively.

(C4) The numerical information may be initialized when a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied. Such an initialization condition may be established by being controlled to the advantageous state. Thereby, it is possible to suppress bailing out when there is no need to bail out the player, such as when the player is in an advantageous situation, and it is possible to prevent the gambling nature from increasing more than necessary.

(C5) When a special display result (time-saving symbol) different from the specific display result is displayed as a variable display result in the normal state, control to shift to the time-saving state (special state) is executable, and the predetermined condition is may be established when the special display result is displayed. As a result, it is possible to suppress bailing out when there is no need to rescue the player, such as when a time-saving state (special state) that is advantageous to the player occurs, and to prevent the gambling nature from increasing more than necessary. Can be done.

(C6) The predetermined condition may be satisfied when variable display is executed a special number of times. This makes it possible to control the time saving state (special state) until the next advantageous state substantially occurs, thereby increasing the degree of relief to the player.

(C7) When a power outage occurs due to a power outage, etc., various data including the numerical information can be stored as a backup, and when a specific condition such as an initialization operation when the power is turned on is met, the data stored in the backup can be stored. The data may be initialized, and the numerical information may be initialized when the specific condition is satisfied. As a result, the numerical information backed up at the time of power outage is initialized at the time of data initialization and does not remain, thereby suppressing disadvantages to the gaming parlor side.

(C8) Based on the fact that the numerical information has reached the special number of times (for example, 1000 times, etc.), it is possible to control to a time saving state (special state) for a period equal to or more than the special number of times (for example, further 1000 times or more, etc.); During the time saving state (special state), the time saving state (special state) can be controlled again based on the numerical information becoming the special number of times, and the first time saving state (special state); A different effect may be performed in the second time saving state (special state). As a result, in a game that is in an extremely disadvantageous state such as being controlled by the second time saving state (special state), the variable display time is shorter in the second time saving state than in the first time saving state. It becomes possible to change the appearance of the performance, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. Note that, without performing such a performance, the same performance may be performed in the first time saving state (special state) and the second time saving state (special state). This makes it possible to prevent players from becoming more aware of the fact that they are in an extremely disadvantageous state, such as being controlled to a second time-saving state (special state), thereby suppressing a decline in gaming interest. be able to.

(C9) When the value of the special figure process flag is the first numerical value (0 to 2), the first process related to variable display is executed, and when the value of the special figure process flag is a second numerical value (4 or more) different from the first numerical value, ), the second process related to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) is executed, and the special condition is satisfied when the value of the special figure process flag is a third numerical value (3) different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value. A third process for controlling to a time saving state (special state) based on the above is executed. Also. It is possible to separate the game balls into the first route (left side gaming area) and the second route (right side game area), and in the normal state, the game ball is hit in the first route, and in the time saving state (special state), the game ball is hit in the second route. A game is played by hitting a game ball into a path. During execution of the third process, although the time saving state (special state) is not controlled, a notification to the effect that firing should be made to the second route (for example, a right-hand firing notification by a right-hand firing lamp, etc.) is made. You may also do so. Further, while the third process is being executed, a notification may be made to notify that the time saving state (special state) will be entered. This makes it possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed on the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated. For example, by lighting the right-handed lamp by the CPU 103 for game control, it is possible to perform a presentation that notifies the firing direction earlier (before the actual time saving change starts) when actually transitioning to the time saving state (special state). becomes.

(C10) When the specific display result is displayed in a variable display where the special condition is satisfied, the second process may be executed after the first process, and the third process may not be executed. . As a result, control to an advantageous state is given priority over control to a time-saving state (special state) based on the establishment of special conditions, so the result is not more advantageous to the player, and the player's interest in playing is reduced. The decrease can be suppressed.

(C11) The numerical information is updated when variable display is started, and based on the updated numerical information becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, the numerical information becomes a specific value. After the variable display ends (the next variable starts, waiting for a customer), the time saving state (special state) is controlled, and when the updated numerical information reaches a specific value corresponding to the special number, the special information (special number reached) flag) from the first numerical value to the second numerical value (flag set), and when controlling to the time saving state (special state), the special information concerned is changed from the second numerical value to the first numerical value (flag reset). It's okay. Thereby, by managing the special information, control for transitioning to the time saving state (special state) can be suitably executed.

(C12) The game control CPU 103 selects and determines a variation pattern of the variable display, and selects and decides a variation pattern of symbol confirmation time that is different between when the special information is the first information and when the second information is the special information. You can do it like this. Thereby, when the variable display of the special number of times is performed, it becomes possible to suitably perform the effect.

(C13) When the value of the special figure process flag is the first numerical value (0 to 2), the first process regarding variable display is executed, and when the value of the special figure process flag is a second numerical value (4 or more) different from the first numerical value, ), the second process related to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) is executed, and when the value of the special pattern process flag is a third numerical value (3) different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value, the special condition is established. A third process for controlling to the original time saving state (special state) is executed. Also. A command is transmitted from the game control CPU 103 (game control means) that controls the progress of the game, and the performance control CPU 120 (performance control means) that receives the command can execute the performance based on the command. Then, it may be possible to transmit specific information (background designation, variation pattern) depending on whether the value of the special figure process flag is the second numerical value or the third numerical value when in the special state. . This makes it possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed on the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated. For example, since different game states can be suitably identified, game control becomes easier. Then, by changing the command according to the game state identified at that time, the performance control CPU 120 (performance control means) can execute suitable performance control according to the game state.

(C14) During the time saving state (special state), when the special condition is satisfied, the value of the special drawing process flag is set to a fourth numerical value different from the first numerical value, the second numerical value, and the third numerical value. By doing so, it may be possible to control the time saving state (special state) again. This makes it possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed on the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated.

(C15) During the time saving state (special state), there is a case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the above-mentioned specific display result (winning symbol) being displayed, and a case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the above-mentioned special condition (variable number of display times). It may be possible to perform a different effect depending on when the condition) is satisfied and the time-saving state (special state) is controlled (for example, when the time-saving state is entered under the condition that the variable display number is greater than or equal to the special number of times). (For example, when the time saving state is reached after the end of the jackpot game state, a time saving state performance is performed in which the fluctuation time is shorter than when the time saving state is entered.) This makes it possible to perform a time-saving state (special state) according to the game situation, and improves the interest in the game.

(C16) During the time saving state (special state), there is a case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the specific display result (winning symbol) being displayed, and a case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the above-mentioned special display result (variable number of display times). It may be possible to make it possible to execute the same effect when the condition) is satisfied and the time saving state (special state) is controlled (for example, the time saving state is entered under the condition that the variable display number is equal to or greater than the special number). (For example, the variation time is the same when the time is shortened and when the time is shortened after the jackpot ends.) As a result, new performance data and the like are not required, so the development cost does not increase, and the player's interest in the game can be improved by not confusing the player.

(C17) During the time saving state (special state), there is a case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the above special display result (time saving symbol) being displayed, and a case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the above special display result (time saving symbol), and a case where the above special condition (variable display number of times is It may be possible to perform a different effect depending on when the condition) is satisfied and the time-saving state (special state) is controlled (for example, when the time-saving state is entered under the condition that the variable display number is greater than or equal to the special number of times). (For example, when the time is shortened, the fluctuation time is shorter than when the time is shortened after the jackpot ends.) This makes it possible to perform a time-saving state (special state) according to the game situation, and improves the interest in the game.

(C18) During the time saving state (special state), there are cases where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the above special display result (time saving symbol) being displayed, and a case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the above special display result (time saving symbol), and a case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the above special condition (variable display number of times). It may be possible to make it possible to execute the same effect when the condition) is satisfied and the time saving state (special state) is controlled (for example, the time saving state is entered under the condition that the variable display number is equal to or greater than the special number). (When a jackpot is over, the time saving state is performed with a shorter fluctuation time than when the time saving state is reached after the jackpot ends.) As a result, new performance data and the like are not required, so the development cost does not increase, and the player's interest in the game can be improved by not confusing the player.

(C19) When the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., various data including the numerical information can be stored as a backup, and when the power is turned on, the game control CPU 103 stores predetermined information ( A ram clear command at the time of a cold start, a command notifying the number of fluctuation display until the end of the time saving state at the time of a hot start) can be sent to the production control CPU 120, and the production control CPU 120, based on receiving the predetermined information, Suggestions regarding the number of times the variable display has been executed in a predetermined period after the power is turned on (so-called effects that suggest that the number of times the variable display is executed are different in the morning, the background image is different, and that within 100 revolutions variation is far or near) are executed. (e.g. easy to execute). Since the player is given an incentive to play first thing in the morning, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be increased and the processing load can be prevented from increasing.

(C20) The game control CPU 103 can transmit specific information (a command that can specify information regarding the time saving state) to the performance control CPU 120 in connection with the execution of the variable display, and the performance control CPU 120 It may be possible to perform a special performance (such as a performance suggesting the end of the number of time-saving states) related to being controlled into a special state based on the establishment of a special condition based on the specific information. As the specific information, first specific information (first background designation, dedicated countdown effect information) and second specific information (such as a command to count down every 100 rotations) that can specify that the difference between the number of times the variable display has been executed and the special number of times is greater than a predetermined value (for example, 127). Good too. Thereby, by periodically suggesting functions to the player, it is possible to reduce the risk of unknowingly causing a loss, and it is possible to suitably realize command processing.

(C21) The performance control CPU 120 enters a time saving state (special state) when a special condition is satisfied based on the fact that variable display has been performed a first predetermined number of times (for example, 300 times, etc.) smaller than the special number of times. It is possible to execute a suggestive effect (for time-saving state suggestive effect control) that suggests that the control is to be performed, and before the variable display of the special number of times is executed, a second predetermined number of times (for example, Suggestive effects can be executed every time variable display (such as 100 times) is executed. This makes it possible to reduce the risk of unknowingly causing a loss by periodically suggesting functions to the player.

(C22) When the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., various data including the numerical information can be stored as a backup, and the game control CPU 103 can store the data when a specific condition such as an initialization operation when the power is turned on is satisfied. , the backup stored data can be initialized, and the production control CPU 120 sets the special condition (variable) after the backup stored data is initialized and before the specific display result is displayed. When the time-saving state (special state) is controlled based on the establishment of the conditions (conditions for the number of display times), and after the specific display result (winning symbol) is displayed after the backup stored data is initialized, the special state is Different performances (such as different performances when shifting to the time saving state) are performed when the special state is controlled based on the establishment of a condition and when the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the establishment of a condition. This makes it possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed on the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated. In addition, since the player can determine whether or not the backup stored data has been initialized based on the different effects, for example, in the case of a gaming machine that allows the setting of the jackpot probability to be changed, the setting will not be changed. Since it is possible to grasp that there is a possibility that the setting has been changed, the number of factors for guessing the settings increases, and the game enjoyment can be improved.

(C23) It is possible to back up and store various data including the numerical information when the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., and the game control CPU 103 can store the data when a specific condition such as an initialization operation when the power is turned on is satisfied. , the backup stored data can be initialized, and the production control CPU 120 sets the special condition (variable) after the backup stored data is initialized and before the specific display result is displayed. When the time-saving state (special state) is controlled based on the establishment of the conditions (conditions for the number of display times), and after the specific display result (winning symbol) is displayed after the backup stored data is initialized, the special state is Different performances are executed when the special state is controlled based on the establishment of conditions and after the time saving state (special state) is controlled (the performance after shifting to the time saving state is different, etc.). This makes it possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed on the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated. In addition, since the player can determine whether or not the backup stored data has been initialized based on the different effects, for example, in the case of a gaming machine that allows the setting of the jackpot probability to be changed, the setting will not be changed. Since it is possible to grasp that there is a possibility that the setting has been changed, the number of factors for guessing the settings increases, and the game enjoyment can be improved.

(D1) The execution rate of the group preview presentation may be made different depending on whether the result of the variable display is a time-saving symbol, a jackpot, or a loss.

This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention. Each configuration regarding the characteristics of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be combined with a part or all of the configurations regarding other characteristic parts as appropriate. Features combined in this way, or individual features that are not combined, may be combined with some or all of the configurations of other features, as appropriate.

The pachinko game machine 1 described above is a payout type game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings, but it is a payout type game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings. It may also be a gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine (for example, a big bonus, The present invention is also applicable to slot machines that are equipped with one or more of regular bonuses, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonuses, etc.).

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "higher", "lower", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, one of the ratios is "0%" and the other is "100%" or a ratio of less than "100%."

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within the scope of the present invention, in addition to the above-mentioned embodiments and other embodiments described below.

Further, all or some of the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modification example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment example and each modification example described below may be combined arbitrarily.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiments and the later-described embodiments disclosed this time are illustrative in all respects and should not be considered restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description and the following description, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and range equivalent to the claims are included.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention executes variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed, it is useful for the player. A gaming machine (e.g., gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) and can be controlled to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state. a state control means, and an updating means capable of updating numerical information based on execution of the variable display, and a notification effect (for example, whether or not it will be a jackpot) that informs whether or not the control is controlled to the advantageous state. The notification effect includes an introductory part (for example, an inciting part) until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled, and a notification effect that informs whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. and an epilogue part (for example, a winning epilogue part) that is executed later when it is determined that the advantageous state will be controlled, and the notification performance includes a first notification performance (for example, SP second half reach A notification performance) and a second notification performance (for example, SP final reach notification performance), and both the first notification performance and the second notification performance output dialogue sounds uttered by the character. In both the first notification effect and the second notification effect, there are times when dialogue subtitles are displayed in response to dialogue sounds emitted by characters, and times when dialogue subtitles are not displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 175). (There are times when subtitles are displayed for dialogue sounds and times when they are not), and the number of lines uttered by the character is different between the first notification effect and the second notification effect (for example, the number of lines uttered by the character is different from the number of lines shown in FIG. 175). (number), the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds emitted by the character in the epilogue part of the first notification performance is the same as displaying dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds emitted by the character in the introduction part of the first notification performance. (For example, the ratio of adding subtitles to the hit epilogue part of SP second half reach A in FIG. 175 is higher than the ratio of subtitles adding subtitles to the inciting part of SP second half reach A), and the epilogue part of the second notification performance. The ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds uttered by characters is higher than the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds uttered by characters in the introduction part of the second notification effect (for example, SP (The proportion of subtitles in the epilogue part of the final reach is higher than the proportion of subtitles in the incitement part of the SP final reach), and the state control means specifies that the numerical information updated by the updating means corresponds to the special number of times. The update means can be controlled to a special state when a special condition is satisfied by changing the value to a value, and the updating means is configured to control when a variable display of the first identification information is executed and when a variable display of the second identification information is executed. An example of this is a gaming machine that updates numerical information (for example, as shown in FIG. 281-16, the part that executes step 120IWS84 in the gaming control microcomputer 100).

According to such a configuration, a series of performances to be performed can be shown more suitably. Furthermore, relief for the player can be suitably realized. Specifically, even if the gaming state changes and any identification information is displayed variably, the numerical information continues to be updated, making it easier for the player to be rescued and increasing his or her desire to play. Can be done.

In other words, in both the first and second announcement performances, in the epilogue part, dialogue subtitles are firmly attached to make it easier to understand what the characters are saying, emphasizing the feeling of blessing, and introducing In the part, there are many picture changes, so by placing the priority on conveying the message through pictures and using supplementary subtitles so that they do not get in the way, it is possible to create a suitable production, and also to Since the numerical information is updated depending on whether the variable display of the identification information is executed or the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed, for example, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are The numerical information reaches the special number of times more easily than when the numerical information is updated only when one of them is executed, and the player is more likely to be rescued, so that the motivation for playing the game can be increased. In other words, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that, when installed in a gaming parlor, can display a series of effects in a notification effect in a more suitable manner and can improve a player's desire to play.

Further, as an example of a form of a gaming machine that can show a series of performances executed more suitably and improve a player's desire to play, there are variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information. A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed, and a variable display is executed more than the normal state. a state control means capable of controlling to a special state (for example, a time saving state) that is easy to control, and an updating means capable of updating numerical information based on execution of variable display, the state control means When a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, the special condition can be controlled, and the updating means is capable of controlling the first identification information when variable display of the first identification information is executed. and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed, the numerical information is updated (for example, the part that executes step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 281-16). Can be mentioned.

Further, as an example of a form of a gaming machine that can display a series of performances executed more suitably and can suitably control in a situation where both a special state and a special state occur, the first identification Variable display of identification information including information (for example, first special symbol) and second identification information (for example, second special symbol) is performed, and when a specific display result (for example, jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed, the game A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and a special state control means that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time-saving state) in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state. For example, the part that executes steps 120IWS150, S160, and S537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the updating means that can update numerical information (for example, the relief time reduction counter) based on the variable display being executed , a part that executes step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the special state control means is configured to set the numerical information updated by the updating means to a specific value (for example, 900 times) corresponding to the special number of times (900 times). For example, when the special condition is established (for example, relief time reduction is established) by becoming "0"), it is possible to control to a special state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS150), The updating means updates numerical information depending on whether variable display of the first identification information is executed or when variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, when variable display of the first special symbol is executed). Regardless of whether the variable display of the second special symbol is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the value of the relief time reduction counter is uniformly updated), a special display result different from the above-mentioned specific display result. When a small winning symbol (for example, a small winning symbol) is derived and displayed, a special state control means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to a special state (such as a small winning gaming state) different from the advantageous state. 120IWS114 to S116), a special counting means for counting the number of times the special state has occurred in the special state (for example, a part that executes step 120IWS73 in the game control microcomputer 100), The special state terminating means is further provided with a special state terminating means (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step 120IWS143), and the special state terminating means is configured to complete the special state when the number of times the special state counted by the special counting means is It is possible to end the special state based on a specific number of times (for example, once) (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a time saving end flag in step 120IWS75 when the result is Y in step 120IWS74). (and determines Y in step 120IWS141 and executes step 120IWS143), when the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display where the special condition is satisfied, the special state control means can be controlled to the special state during the special state based on the derived display (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 can provide relief with 120IWS148 at the end of the symbol confirmation period even if there is a small hit fluctuation). If the time saving determination flag is set, step 120IWS150 is executed and the subsequent small winning game state is controlled to time saving state C), the special counting means is configured to display the special display in the variable display where the special condition is satisfied. Do not count the special state based on the result being derived and displayed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS73 at the start of fluctuation, subtracts 1 from the small hit counter, and changes when the relief time is shortened. At the end of the process, step 120IWS149 is executed to set the small hit number counter, so in the small hit fluctuation where the relief time reduction is realized, after the small hit number counter is set in step 120IWS149, the small hit number counter is immediately set on the fluctuation display. An example is a gaming machine (which is never subtracted). Below, one example of the form of these gaming machines will be explained as another example of the form.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 274 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 274, on the right side of the gaming area), a variable display (also called a special pattern game) of special symbols (also called a special pattern) as multiple types of special identification information is provided. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special design may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described below, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “second special symbol”. Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". Note that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electro luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern which are executed synchronously is collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are also collectively referred to as variable display compatible displays that correspond to variable displays.

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. Further, the sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

Furthermore, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. Accordingly, the first pending memory number is displayed, and the second pending display 25B displays the second pending memory number according to the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable prize winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 275). The variable prize winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position, so that the tips of the movable wing pieces are comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and enters a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening enters a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the movable wing pieces of the variable winning ball device 6B are in the tilted position, so that the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning hole (second starting winning ball). It is also said that the prize opening will be open.) When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the second special symbol game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one that includes an electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 274, four places below the left and right sides of the game area), general winning holes 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 275), and has a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 274, on the left side of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided above the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects, etc. are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for game effects are provided around the gaming area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 274), a movable body 32 is provided that operates according to the performance.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). A batted ball supply tray (lower tray) is provided below the upper tray from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 275).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 275).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Summary of game progress)
When a player rotates a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, a game ball is launched toward a game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passage gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol losing". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting prize opening (wins) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when it is controlled in the jackpot game state or small winning game state (described later) (the starting prize has occurred) If the special pattern game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special pattern game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Further, if a special symbol (a losing symbol, for example "-") different from the jackpot symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "loser".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "small win", the game is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses, or the timing until the number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

In addition, the jackpot type is set in "Jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and upper limit opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc., described later), and the jackpot can be adjusted accordingly. Type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or hardly any prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small winning gaming state, the opening mode is the same as the jackpot gaming state for some jackpot types (the number of openings of the big winning opening is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same). etc.), the big prize opening will be open. In addition, similar to the jackpot type, a small hit type may also be provided for "small hit".

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called number-cutting (number-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability variable, etc.).

A normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", will be returned to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable-probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the display result of the special figure game continues to be controlled to the previous game state when it became a "small win" (However, if a "small win" occurs) If the special figure game of the hour is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above-mentioned number cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that the display result of the special figure game does not need to be a "small win".

Note that the gaming state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the control may be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 This may be done by turning on/off the light, moving the movable body 32, etc.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is changed after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "small win", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1 3 5" etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "small hit"). As an example, decorative symbols constituting a chance are displayed in a stopped state on predetermined active lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot" for some jackpot types (jackpot type in a jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state) and when it becomes a "small win". , a common determined decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special pattern game is a "lose", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, if the display result is a "lose", after the variable display mode of the decorative design becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss") is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The fixed decorative pattern (also referred to as "decorative pattern") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "reach loss").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small winning game state, a small winning performance for notifying the small winning gaming state is executed. In addition, the jackpot game during the small win game state and some jackpot types (jackpot type of the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state, for example, the jackpot type that makes the subsequent gaming state a high probability state). By performing a common performance depending on the state, the player may not be able to tell whether the player is currently in a small win game state or a jackpot game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small win gaming state and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between a high probability state and a low probability state. It's okay.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 275, for example. In addition, various other boards are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, a power supply board, and the like.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, small winning gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big prize opening, occurrence of winnings, number of pending memories, game status), occurrence of errors, etc. are included.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 276 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 in the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 276, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process to clear the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a production control command instructing initialization to the production control board 12 (step S9). When receiving the performance control command, the performance control CPU 120 displays a screen on the image display device 5, for example, to notify that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or the like (power outage), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes unable to operate due to the power supply stop. In this power supply stop processing, processing for turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, data protection processing for the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes adding error detection codes (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data for proceeding with the game (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.), as well as backup flag states and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and no backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a data check on the backed up data (performed using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S4). S5). In step S5, it is determined whether the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, for example, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the gaming state is restored to the state at the time of power supply stoppage, and if the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols will be restarted from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. That will happen.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a production control command to the production control board 12 to instruct recovery from the power outage (step S7). In line with this, a performance control command that specifies the backed-up gaming state before the power outage, or a performance control command that specifies the display result of the special game that is currently being executed if the special game is being executed. A command may also be sent. These commands can be the same as the commands that are set to be sent in the special design process described later. When the performance control CPU 120 receives a performance control command that specifies the time of recovery from a power outage, it notifies the image display device 5, for example, that recovery from a power outage has been completed or that recovery from a power outage is in progress. Display the screen to do so. The performance control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the performance control command.

After completing the restoration process or initialization process and transmitting the production control command to the production control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the gaming control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 277. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 277, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to control the gate switch 21, first starting port switch 22A, and second starting port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormality, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number updating process is executed to update at least a part of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of jackpot gaming state, small winning gaming state, control of gaming state, etc. (For details, see (described later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The normal pattern game is executed by driving the normal pattern display 20, and the number of normal patterns pending is displayed by lighting the normal pattern pending display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 278 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 277 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, a process of pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to send the production control command to the production control board 12 to specify the determination results such as the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and the pre-read judgment. . The performance control command at the time of start winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is transferred from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 277 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random value for determining the display result, it is determined whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small win" and the type of jackpot when it is determined to be a "jackpot". is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (any of a jackpot symbol, a small prize symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also referred to as special pattern 2 priority consumption). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the production control board 12. In the production control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this fluctuation pattern setting process, based on the pre-determined result of whether the display result will be a "big hit" or "small hit", a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is used to select one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns. It includes the process of determining the In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (the presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off and the display result is a "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "lost", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is a "small hit" or "loss", the game state is also updated when the time-saving state or the variable probability state is controlled and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds to open the jackpot has reached the set upper limit number of runs, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of runs has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The small hit opening preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small win opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the large winning opening to be open in the small winning gaming state based on the display result being "small winning". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small winning opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small win opening process includes a process that measures the elapsed time since the big winning opening was opened, and a timing that returns the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. This includes processing to determine whether or not the When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the timing for ending the small winning game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10" and the small winning opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small win ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which a performance operation to notify the end of the small win game state has elapsed. Here, when the small winning gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before entering the small winning gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning ending process ends.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 279. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit). In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and checking a predetermined operation.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI order). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process processing, for example, the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the content of control of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 280 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 279 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 280, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the production control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting the output. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative patterns has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state or a small win game state. Then, when receiving a production control command that specifies the start of the jackpot game state or the small win game state, if the command specifies the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special drawing game is a "lose". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The small hit performance process in step S90174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance control process flag is "4". In this small win performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small win game state, and executes various performance controls in the small win game state based on the setting content. . In addition, in the small hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the small win game state, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small win ending production. It is updated to a certain "5" and the small hit performance process is ended.

The small hit end production process in step S90175 is a process that is executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit end performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, for example, and performs various performance controls at the end of the small win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end performance process is ended.

The jackpot performance process in step S176 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the ending production process. 7” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S177 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Variation example of basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of a winning, but the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a winning. It may also be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1 on a removable recording medium, but are provided in advance in a form such as a computer device, etc. The software may be distributed by being installed on the storage device of the user. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing section, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in internal memory, etc. It may also be executed directly using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "higher", "lower", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, one of the ratios may be "0%" and the other ratio may be "100%" or a ratio less than "100%."

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 120IW)
Next, the characteristic part 120IW of this embodiment will be explained. In this feature section 120IW, the gaming state is controlled to either a normal state (non-time saving state) or a time saving state. In this example, in the time saving state, the average special symbol fluctuation time is shortened compared to the normal state, the average regular symbol fluctuation time is shortened compared to the normal state, and the average regular symbol fluctuation time is shortened compared to the normal state. The probability of winning a ``Puzu'' in the ``Puzu'' game increases. For example, in the normal state, the probability of hitting a common symbol is 10%, but in the time saving state, the probability of hitting a common symbol is increased to 90%, and a game ball enters the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting prize opening). It becomes easier to do. In addition, not only in such an aspect, but for example, in the time saving state, by lengthening the open time of the variable winning ball device 6B compared to the normal state, the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port) can be opened. It may be configured so that it is easier for game balls to win prizes.

In addition, in this example, in addition to the case where the variable display result is a jackpot and the time-saving state is controlled after the end of the jackpot game, even when the variable display result is a loss, the time-saving winning symbol is derived and displayed. In some cases, it may be controlled to shorten the time based on the following.

Furthermore, in this example, even after the power is turned on to the gaming machine, after a jackpot occurs, or after a time cut is missed, the next jackpot or time cut miss occurs even after the fluctuating display has finished a predetermined number of times (in this example, 900 times). Even if this is not done, the time saving state (relief time saving) may be controlled.

In addition, in the time saving state, (1) control to increase the probability of hitting a normal symbol, (2) control to shorten the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and (3) opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port). (4) control to shorten the variation time of the special symbol can be performed, but all of these controls (1) to (4) may be performed, or (1) to (4) may be performed. Some of the controls in (4) may not be performed. For example, which one of (1) to (4) is controlled may be different in a time saving state via a jackpot, a time saving state via a time saving loss, and a time saving state via a rescue time saving, They may be the same.

Note that it is preferable that the number of fluctuations n until the rescue time is controlled to be shortened and the number of times N of time reduction in the rescue time reduction are defined as follows.
2.5P≦n≦3.0P
0.4P≦N≦3.8P
(P = denominator of jackpot probability ML, n = number of operations, N = number of time savings)
Specifically, for example, if the jackpot probability is 1/300, the number of fluctuations n will be 750 to 900, and the number of time savings N will be 120 to 1140.

In addition, in this example, in the time saving state, the variable display of the second special symbol is likely to be executed, but as will be described later, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the small hit probability is increased. Therefore, the time saving state is a state that is easily controlled to a small winning game state.

(Board configuration)
FIG. 281-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the feature section 120IW. In the pachinko game machine 1 in the feature section 120IW, in the game area, the first path of the flowing paths along which the game ball flows is mainly provided in the area on the left side of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front, A second path different from the first path among the downstream paths along which the balls flow down is mainly provided in an area on the right side of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front.

Hitting the game ball into the left side area (left side game area) of the image display device 5 in order to cause the game ball to flow down the first path is called left-handed hitting. Hitting the game ball into the right side area (right side game area) of the image display device 5 in order to cause the game ball to flow down the second path is called right-handed hitting. The first route is a route in which the game ball can flow down by hitting the game ball to the left side of the game area, so it may be called a left-handed route. Further, the second route is a route in which the game ball can flow down by hitting the game ball to the right side of the game area, so it may be called a right-handed route.

Note that the first route and the second route may be configured as different routes, or may be partially shared routes. The left gaming area and the right gaming area may be separated by, for example, the end face of the image display device 5 or the arrangement of the gaming nails within the gaming area.

When the game ball that is fired from the ball launcher and hit into the game area in response to the operation of the ball operation handle 30 is guided to the left game area, it is guided, for example, along the array of game nails. Therefore, it becomes impossible or difficult to guide the player to the right gaming area. Further, when the game ball is guided to the right game area, it becomes impossible or difficult to guide it to the left game area because it is guided along the arrangement of the game nails, for example.

A winning ball device 6A constituting a first starting winning opening is provided as a structure into which the game balls that have been distributed can enter the left gaming area of the gaming area.

The structures that allow the game balls that are divided into the right game area of the game area to enter include a passage gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B that constitutes a second starting winning opening, and a special variable winning opening that constitutes a special winning opening. A ball device 120IW17 and a special variable winning ball device 7 that constitutes a big winning hole are provided.

In the left gaming area, game nails are planted so that game balls are guided to the winning ball device 6A of the winning hole structure. Therefore, when aiming to cause a game ball to enter the winning ball device 6A, the player only has to hit the game ball to the left. In addition, in the right gaming area, game nails are placed so that game balls are guided to the variable winning ball device 6B, passage gate 41, special variable winning ball device 120IW17, and special variable winning ball device 7 among the winning opening structures. It is planted. Therefore, when aiming to cause a game ball to enter the variable winning ball device 6B, the passage gate 41, the special variable winning ball device 120IW17, and the special variable winning ball device 7, the player can hit the game ball to the right. good.

It should be noted that it may be possible to make it possible for the game balls that are distributed to the right game area to enter the winning ball device 6A, but from the viewpoint of playability, this possibility is lower than the possibility that the game balls that are distributed to the left game area enter the winning ball device 6A. It is desirable that they be extremely low compared to the probability that a ball will enter them. Conversely, it may be possible to allow the game balls that have been hit in the left game area to enter the passage gate 41 and the variable winning ball device 6B, but from the perspective of playability, this possibility is limited to the right side. It is desirable to make the probability extremely low compared to the possibility that the game balls that are divided into the game areas will enter them.

The special variable winning ball device 120IW17 is a device for determining the V winning of game balls, which is a condition for generating a jackpot when a small hit occurs.

Furthermore, in the pachinko game machine 1 in the feature section 120IW, in addition to the board configuration of the pachinko game machine 1 shown in FIG. 274, as shown in FIG. It is provided. Further, as shown in FIG. 281-1, a right-handed hitting notification LED 120IW20 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5.

(Special variable winning ball device)
FIG. 281-2 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 in this feature section 120IW. As shown in FIG. 281-2, the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 is provided with a plate-shaped bottom member 120IW17a that is formed as the bottom of the channel through which the game balls flow, and in the small winning game state, the bottom member 120IW17a By moving the bottom member 120IW17a backward from the closed state in which it is moved forward, the special winning opening which becomes the winning area is brought into the open state. The game ball that has entered the special winning hole is detected by the special winning hole switch 120IW24.

In addition, in this example, when a game ball enters the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole) and is detected by the count switch 23, 15 winning balls are obtained, whereas the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole) receives 15 winning balls. When a game ball enters the ball device 120IW17 (special winning hole) and is detected by the special winning hole switch 120IW24, three prize balls are obtained.

Further, the bottom member 120IW17a is controlled from the closed state to the open state by driving the solenoid 120IW83 by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103).

In this characteristic part 120IW, as shown in FIG. 281-2, the game balls that have won in the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 (special winning hole) are further guided through a guide path provided on the right side of the special variable winning ball device 120IW17. Guided to 120IW01. The guide route 120IW01 further branches into two routes 120IW02, 03, and the game ball guided to the guide route 120IW01 is guided to the left route 120IW02 or the right route 120IW03. The left path 120IW02 is a V-winning port, and the game ball that enters the V-winning port is detected by the V-winning port switch 120IW20a.

As shown in FIG. 281-2, a V winning opening opening/closing plate 120IW20 is provided near the entrance of the left route 120IW02 (V winning opening), and when the V winning opening opening/closing plate 120IW20 is in the open state, the guidance The game ball guided to the path 120IW01 enters the left path 120IW02 (V winning hole), and the V winning hole is possible. Further, when the V winning opening opening/closing plate 120IW20 is in the closed state, the game ball guided to the guide path 120IW01 enters the right path 120IW03 and is discharged to the back side of the game area.

In addition, the V winning a prize opening opening/closing plate 120IW20 is controlled from the closed state to the open state by driving the solenoid 120IW84 by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103).

In addition, in this feature section 120IW, when the small winning gaming state is controlled, the game ball enters the V winning opening 120IW02 during the small winning gaming state and is detected by the V winning opening switch 120IW20A, on the condition that: After the end of the small winning game, the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state.

In addition, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 is formed with a plurality of regulating pieces that reduce the speed of the game balls flowing down on the bottom member 120IW17a. In this example, the regulating piece is provided in the special variable winning ball device 120IW17, so that the downward direction of the game ball can be controlled so that the game ball flowing down from the upper right to the lower left meander with the movement of the front and back component. change so that the time it takes for its flow to flow is slower than it would be without the restriction piece.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 281-2, in the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 (special winning opening), a special winning opening switch 120IW24 is provided on the upstream side, and a V winning opening and a discharge opening are provided on the downstream side. Although the case is shown in which the V winning a prize opening switch 120IW20A is provided on the V winning a prize opening side by branching into the V winning a prize mouth side, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the upstream side of the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 (special winning opening) is branched into a V winning opening side and a general winning opening side, and the V winning opening switch 120IW20A is provided on the V winning opening side, and the general It may be configured such that a special winning opening switch 120IW24 is provided on the winning opening side.

(Substrate configuration)
FIG. 281-3 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like in the feature section 120IW. As shown in FIG. 281-3, in this characteristic part 120IW, the switch circuit 110 includes the gate switch 21, the starting port switch (the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B), the count switch 23, and the special winning port. Detection signals from the switch 120IW24 and the V winning a prize opening switch 120IW20a (such as a detection signal indicating that the game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) are taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 receives a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81, solenoid 82, solenoid 120IW83, and solenoid 120IW84) from the game control microcomputer 100, and converts it to the solenoid 81 for ordinary electric accessories or the big prize. It is transmitted to the solenoid 82 for the opening door (special variable winning ball device 7), the solenoid 120IW83 for the special variable winning ball device 120IW17, and the solenoid 120IW84 for the V winning opening opening/closing plate 120IW20.

(Jackpot probability, small hit probability, miss probability)
FIG. 281-4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot probability and small win probability for each set value. Of these, FIG. 281-4(A) shows the jackpot probability and small win probability when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. Further, FIG. 281-4(B) shows the jackpot probability and small win probability when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

In this example, the setting value can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values that have different advantages for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities), and when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to execute setting confirmation processing and setting change processing to check current setting values and change setting values. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 281-4, this example shows a configuration in which the settings can be changed in six stages from setting values "1" to "6". It should be noted that the configuration is not limited to the case where the settings can be changed in 6 stages, but may be configured so that the settings can be changed in 2 to 5 stages, or the settings can be changed in 7 stages or more, for example.

As shown in Figure 281-4 (A), when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the setting value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability of "205/65536" and is the most disadvantageous for the player. It is set. The jackpot probability increases in the order of setting value "2", setting value "3", setting value "4", and setting value "5", and for setting value "6", the jackpot probability is "328/65536", which is the highest. This is the most advantageous setting for players.

On the other hand, regarding the small hit, as shown in Figure 281-4 (A), when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, regardless of the setting value "1" to "6" , the small hit probability is constant at "164/65536" (approximately 1/400).

In addition, as for the deviation with time saving, as shown in Figure 281-4 (A), when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, it is related to which of the set values ``1'' to ``6''. The small winning probability is constant at "328/65536" (approximately 1/200).

On the other hand, regarding the failure without time saving, as shown in Figure 281-4 (A), in the case of time saving, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the setting value "1" is a jackpot. The highest probability is "64839/65536", and the probability decreases in the order of set value "2", set value "3", set value "4", and set value "5", and the set value "6" is missed. The probability is the lowest at "64716/65536".

In addition, as shown in Figure 281-4 (B), when executing the variable display of the second special symbol, when the setting value is "1", the jackpot probability is "205/65536", the lowest, and the highest for the player. This is an unfavorable setting. The jackpot probability increases in the order of setting value "2", setting value "3", setting value "4", and setting value "5", and for setting value "6", the jackpot probability is "328/65536", which is the highest. This is the most advantageous setting for players.

On the other hand, regarding the small hit, as shown in Figure 281-4 (B), when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, regardless of the setting value "1" to "6" , the small hit probability is constant at "9362/65536" (approximately 1/7).

In addition, as for the deviation with time saving, as shown in Figure 281-4 (B), when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, it is related to which of the set values ``1'' to ``6''. The small winning probability is constant at "164/65536" (approximately 1/400).

On the other hand, regarding the failure without time saving, as shown in Figure 281-4 (B), in the case of time saving, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the setting value "1" is a jackpot. The highest probability is "55805/65536", and the probability decreases in the order of set value "2", set value "3", set value "4", and set value "5", and the set value "6" is missed. The probability is the lowest at "55682/65536".

As shown in Figure 281-4, in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the small hit probability is approximately 1/400, whereas the variable display of the second special symbol is When executed, the probability of a small win is as high as about 1/7.

(Jackpot type determination table, small hit type determination table)
FIGS. 281-5 (A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. Of these, FIG. 281-5(A) shows a specific example of the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol. Further, FIG. 281-5(B) shows a specific example of the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 281-5(A), the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol is based on the random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. This table is referred to in order to determine the type of jackpot as either "6R time-saving jackpot A" or "6R time-saving jackpot B."

As shown in FIG. 281-5(B), the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol is based on the random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result will be a jackpot symbol. This table is referred to in order to determine the type of jackpot as "10R time saving jackpot".

"6R time-saving jackpot A" is a jackpot that controls the jackpot game state for 6 rounds and shifts to the time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends. "6R time-saving jackpot B" is a jackpot that controls the jackpot game state for 6 rounds and shifts to the time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends. In addition, "6R time-saving jackpot A" and "6R time-saving jackpot B" differ in the stop symbols of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol derived and displayed. The "10R time-saving jackpot" is a jackpot that controls the game to be in a jackpot gaming state for 10 rounds, and then shifts to the time-saving state after the jackpot gaming state ends.

As shown in FIG. 281-5 (A), in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and results in a jackpot, it is determined that "6R time-saving jackpot A" is determined with a 70% probability, and 30 % probability is determined as "6R time saving jackpot B". In addition, as shown in Figure 281-5 (B), in this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and a jackpot is achieved, it is determined to be a "10R time-saving jackpot" with a 100% probability. .

FIGS. 281-5(C) and (D) are explanatory diagrams showing the small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. Of these, FIG. 281-5(C) shows a specific example of the small hit type determination table for the first special symbol. Moreover, FIG. 281-5(D) shows a specific example of the small hit type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in Figure 281-5 (C), the small hit type determination table for the first special symbol is based on the random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result will be a small hit symbol. This table is referred to in order to determine the type of small win as "small win A."

As shown in Figure 281-5 (D), the small hit type determination table for the second special symbol is based on the random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result will be a small hit symbol. This table is referred to in order to determine the type of small win as "small win A" or "small win B."

"Small win A" means that on the condition that you win a V prize during the small win game (first round), the jackpot game state is controlled in the second to sixth rounds, and after the end of the jackpot game state, the time is reduced. It is a small win that moves the state. "Small win B" means that on the condition that you win a V prize during the small win game (first round), the jackpot game state is controlled from the 2nd round to the 10th round, and after the end of the jackpot game state, the time is shortened. It is a small win that moves the state.

As shown in FIG. 281-5(C), in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small win is achieved, "small win A" is determined with a 100% probability. In addition, as shown in Figure 281-5 (D), in this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and a small hit occurs, it is determined as "small hit A" with a probability of 30%. , a "small hit B" is determined with a probability of 70%.

(Time saving type determination table)
FIGS. 281-6(A) and 281-6(B) are explanatory diagrams showing the time saving type determination table stored in the ROM 101. Among these, FIG. 281-6(A) shows a specific example of the time saving type determination table for the first special symbol. Further, FIG. 281-6(B) shows a specific example of the time saving type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in Figure 281-5 (A), the time saving type determination table for the first special symbol is based on the random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a time saving losing symbol. , is a table that is referred to in order to determine the type of time saving deviation as either "time saving deviation A", "working time saving deviation B", or "work saving deviation C".

As shown in Figure 281-5 (B), the time saving type determination table for the second special symbol is based on the random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a time saving losing symbol. , is a table that is referred to in order to determine the type of time saving deviation as either "time saving deviation A", "working time saving deviation B", or "work saving deviation C".

As shown in FIG. 281-6 (A), in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the time saving is missed, it is determined that the time saving is missed with a probability of about 33%, With a probability of about 33%, it will be determined that the time saving will be delayed B, and with a probability of approximately 33%, it will be determined that the time saving will be delayed C. In addition, as shown in Figure 281-6 (B), in this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and the time saving is missed, it is determined that the time saving is missed with a probability of about 33%. Then, with a probability of about 33%, it is determined that "time reduction B" is determined, and with a probability of approximately 33%, it is determined that "time reduction C" is determined.

(Design judgment table)
FIGS. 281-7 and 281-8 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of symbol determination tables stored in the ROM 101. Of these, FIG. 281-7(A) shows a specific example of the symbol determination table for 6R time-saving jackpot A. Moreover, FIG. 281-7(B) shows a specific example of the symbol determination table for 6R time-saving jackpot B. Moreover, FIG. 281-7(C) shows a specific example of the symbol determination table for the 10R time-saving jackpot. Further, FIG. 281-7(D) shows a specific example of the symbol determination table for small win A. Further, FIG. 281-7(E) shows a specific example of the symbol determination table for small win B. Further, FIG. 281-8(F) shows a specific example of the symbol determination table for time saving loss A. Further, FIG. 281-8 (G) shows a specific example of the symbol determination table for time saving loss B. Further, FIG. 281-8 (H) shows a specific example of the symbol determination table for time saving loss C. Further, FIG. 281-8(I) shows a specific example of a symbol determination table for a miss (no time saving).

As shown in Figure 281-8, the symbol determination table is a table that is referenced to determine the stop symbols of special symbols based on random numbers for symbol determination according to the jackpot type, small hit type, time saving type, etc. It is.

As shown in FIG. 281-7(A), in the case of "6R time-saving jackpot A", the symbol "3" is determined with a 100% probability. As shown in FIG. 281-7(B), in the case of "6R time-saving jackpot B", the symbol "5" is determined with a 100% probability. As shown in FIG. 281-7(C), in the case of a "10R time-saving jackpot", the symbol "7" is determined with a 100% probability. As shown in FIG. 281-7(D), when the "small hit A" is reached, the symbol "1" is determined with a 100% probability. As shown in FIG. 281-7(E), in the case of "small hit B", the symbol "9" is determined with 100% probability.

As shown in FIG. 281-8(F), when the "time saving error A" occurs, the symbol "6" is determined with a 50% probability, and the symbol "8" is determined with a 50% probability. As shown in FIG. 281-8 (G), when the "time saving is missed B", the symbol "4" is determined with a 100% probability. As shown in FIG. 281-8 (H), when the result is "time saving C", the symbol "9" is determined with a 100% probability. As shown in FIG. 281-8 (I), if the result is a miss (no time saving), the symbol "-" is determined with 100% probability.

In addition, the specific example of the stop symbol of a special symbol is not limited to what was shown in this example. For example, in this example, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B each consist of one 7-segment LED, and the stop symbol of the special symbol is represented by a one-digit number. However, it may be configured with two 7-segment LEDs, and the stop symbols of the special symbols may be represented by two-digit numbers. In this case, for example, "6R time-saving jackpot A", "6R time-saving jackpot B", "10R time-saving jackpot", "small hit A", "small hit B", "time-saving loss B", "time-saving loss C", " Even in the case of "missing (no time saving)", it may be configured to be able to determine the stopping symbols of a plurality of types of special symbols.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 281-7 and 281-8, a case is shown in which the stopping symbols of the special symbols are determined using the random numbers for symbol determination, but this is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the random number for type determination may also be used to determine the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the random number for type determination is used for multiple purposes, for example, when the jackpot type is determined to be "6R time-saving jackpot A", this is the case when the value of the random number for type determination is 0 to 125 (Figure 281- 5(A)), the symbol determination table for 6R time-saving jackpot A may be constructed by allocating 0 to 125 as symbol determination values in FIG. 281-7(A). Also, for example, if "time saving failure A" is determined as the time saving type, this is because the value of the random number for type determination is 0 to 59 (see Figure 281-6), and Figure 281-8 ( In F), the symbol determination table for time saving loss A may be constructed by allocating 0 to 29 to the symbol "6" and 30 to 59 to the symbol "8" as symbol determination values.

(Opening pattern for small winning games)
Next, the opening pattern of the small winning game will be explained. FIG. 281-9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening pattern of the small winning game. As shown in FIG. 281-9, after starting the small winning game at timing S1, when 8 seconds have elapsed (timing S2), the V winning opening opening/closing plate 120IW20 is controlled to be in the open state, and then 8 seconds have elapsed. The open state of the V winning opening opening/closing plate 120IW20 continues until (see FIG. 281-9(C)).

In the case of a small win (small win A, small win B), the time before opening the special winning opening (fanfare time) from the start of the small winning game until the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 is controlled to the open state. A time period of 8 seconds is set, and at the same time as the V winning opening/closing plate 120IW20 is controlled to be open, the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 (special winning opening) is controlled to be open. In addition, as shown in FIG. 281-9(A), during the period in which the V winning opening opening/closing plate 120IW20 is controlled in the open state, the opening of the special winning opening for 0.016 seconds is performed four times. Therefore, in the case of small winnings (small winning A, small winning B), the opening of the special winning opening for 0.016 seconds will be performed four times during the period in which V winning is possible.

In addition, in this example, the opening time of each special winning hole in the small winnings (small winning A, small winning B) is extremely short, 0.016 seconds, but as already explained, the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 is formed with a plurality of regulating pieces, and about 2 to 3 game balls flow down in a meandering manner on the bottom member 120IW17a of the special variable winning ball device 120IW17, so even if the opening time is short, the bottom member 120IW17a If it is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball on the bottom member 120IW17a will fall into the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 and can win a prize.

If the game ball enters the special winning hole and wins a V prize, the jackpot will be won after the final opening of the special winning hole is completed, the closing time of the specified period (interval time) and the end time of the small hit (ending time) have elapsed. Shifting to the gaming state, as shown in FIG. 281-9(B), the special variable prize winning ball device 7 is controlled to the open state from the second round to the sixth round or the tenth round.

In addition, in this example, when the final opening of the special winning opening is completed in the small winning game, the small winning game is ended based on the elapse of the closing time (interval time) and the small winning end time (ending time). Although this example is illustrated, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, a detection switch capable of detecting game balls is provided in the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 (special winning hole) at two locations, one on the upstream side and one on the downstream side, and after the last closing time (interval time) has elapsed, the upstream After waiting until the number of detections by the detection switch on the side and the detection switch on the downstream side match (all the winning game balls are ejected into the special prize opening), the small hit end time (ending time) is reached, and the small win is won. The small winning game may be configured to end when the end time (ending time) has elapsed.

In addition, in this example, a configuration is shown in which it is possible to win a V prize during a small winning game in both small winning A and small winning B, but in cases where it is difficult or impossible to win a V during a small winning game. It may also be configured to provide a winning type.

(Fluctuation pattern table)
FIG. 281-10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern table in the feature section 120IW. Of these, FIGS. 281-10 (A) and (B) show specific examples of the variation pattern table for the first special symbol. Moreover, FIGS. 281-10(C) and (D) show a specific example of the variation pattern table for the second special symbol. Further, FIGS. 281-10(E) and (F) show a specific example of a variation pattern table for time saving deviation (for non-time saving state). Further, FIG. 281-10(G) shows a specific example of a variation pattern table for saving time.

First, the variation pattern of the first special symbol will be explained using FIGS. 281-10(A) and (B). As shown in FIG. 281-10(A), in this example, when performing a variable display of the first special symbol, if the first special symbol is off during the normal state, the variable pattern PT1-1 (normal variation), variation pattern PT1-2 (shortened variation), variation pattern PT1-3 (normal reach), or variation pattern PT1-4 (super reach). In addition, when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, if a jackpot occurs during the normal state, the variable pattern will be either variable pattern PT1-5 (normal reach) or variable pattern PT1-6 (super reach). determined. In addition, when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, if a small hit occurs during the normal state, either the variable pattern PT1-7 (normal reach) or the variable pattern PT1-8 (super reach) is selected as the variable pattern. Determined by

As shown in FIG. 281-10(B), in this example, when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, if the change occurs during the time saving state, the variable pattern PT2-1 (high-speed It is determined by the deviation fluctuation). Further, when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, if a jackpot occurs during the time saving state, the variable pattern PT2-2 (high-speed jackpot variation) is determined as the variable pattern. Furthermore, when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, if a small hit occurs during the time saving state, the variable pattern PT2-3 (high-speed small hit variation) is determined as the variable pattern.

Next, the variation pattern of the second special symbol will be explained using FIGS. 281-10(C) and (D). As shown in FIG. 281-10(C), in this example, when performing the variable display of the second special symbol, if the change occurs during the normal state, the variable pattern PT4-1 (normal variation), variation pattern PT4-2 (shortened variation), variation pattern PT4-3 (normal reach), and variation pattern PT4-4 (super reach). In addition, when performing a variable display of the second special symbol, if a jackpot occurs during the normal state, the variable pattern is either variable pattern PT4-5 (normal reach) or variable pattern PT4-6 (super reach). determined. In addition, when performing the variable display of the second special symbol, if a small hit occurs during the normal state, either the variable pattern PT4-7 (normal reach) or the variable pattern PT4-8 (super reach) is selected as the variable pattern. Determined by

As shown in FIG. 281-10 (D), in this example, when performing the variable display of the second special symbol, the loss occurs during the time saving state (including both the first time saving state and the second time saving state). In this case, the variation pattern is one of variation pattern PT5-1 (shortening variation), variation pattern PT5-2 (super shortening variation), variation pattern PT5-3 (normal reach), and variation pattern PT5-4 (super reach). determined. In addition, when performing the variable display of the second special symbol, if a jackpot occurs during the time saving state (including both the first time saving state and the second time saving state), the variation pattern PT5-5 ( Normal reach), variation pattern PT5-6 (super reach) is determined. In addition, when performing a variable display of the second special symbol, if a small hit occurs during the time saving state (including both the first time saving state and the second time saving state), the variation pattern PT5-7 (Normal reach) or variation pattern PT5-8 (Super reach).

Next, using FIGS. 281-10(E) and (F), a variation pattern of time saving deviation (for non-time saving state) will be explained. As shown in FIG. 281-10 (E), in this example, when the time saving is A to C (symbols "2", "4", "6") in the non-time saving state, the variation pattern is Either pattern PT6-1 (normal variation) or variation pattern PT6-2 (time-saving effect) is determined.

As shown in FIG. 281-10 (F), in this example, when the time saving is off A (symbol "8") in the non-time saving state, the variation pattern PT7-1 (normal variation), variation pattern PT7-1 (normal variation), Either pattern PT7-2 (time-saving effect) or variable pattern PT7-3 (time-saving revival effect) is determined.

Note that in this example, when the time saving is off A to C in the time saving state, a variation pattern similar to that of the off (no time saving) is determined.

Next, a variation pattern of relief time reduction will be explained using FIG. 281-10(G). As shown in FIG. 281-10 (G), in this example, when the relief time is shortened, if there is a small hit or miss, the fluctuation pattern PT8-1 (relief time shortening effect) is determined as the fluctuation pattern. Ru.

Further, in this example, in the normal symbol process processing (step S26), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol is a hit (ordinary symbol hit), and based on the determination result, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol is a hit (ordinary symbol hit). Control is performed to execute the variable display, but in this example, in the normal state, it is decided that the probability of hitting a normal figure is 10%, and in the case of the time saving state, the probability is 90%. We decide to hit the normal map based on the probability. In addition, the CPU 103 controls the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning hole) to be in an open state based on the determination that the normal symbol has been won in the normal symbol process process (step S26).

(Production control command)
FIGS. 281-11 and 281-12 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the content of the production control command sent to the production control CPU 120. In the examples shown in FIGS. 281-11 and 281-12, command 80XX(H) is an effect control command that specifies a variation pattern of decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols. (variable pattern command). Note that the performance control command that specifies the variation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of variation. Therefore, upon receiving any of the commands 80XX(H), the production control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols.

Command 9001 (H) is a performance control command (display result 1 designation command) (missing designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is a non-time saving deviance. Command 9002 (H) is a production control command (display result 2 specification command) (display result 2 specification command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is time saving deviation A (symbol "8"). command)). Command 9003 (H) is a production control command (display result 3 specification command) (display result 3 specification command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is time saving deviation A (symbol "6"). command)). Command 9004 (H) is a production control command (display result 4 specification command) (display result 4 specification command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is time saving deviation B (symbol "4"). command)). Command 9005 (H) is a production control command (display result 5 specification command) (display result 5 specification command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is time saving deviation C (design "2"). command)).

Command 9006 (H) is a production control command (display result 6 specification command (6R time-saving jackpot A specification command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is 6R time-saving jackpot A. It is. Command 9007 (H) is a production control command (display result 7 specification command (6R time-saving jackpot B specification command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is 6R time-saving jackpot B. It is. Command 9008 (H) is a production control command (display result 8 specification command (10R time-saving jackpot specification command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is a 10R time-saving jackpot. .

Command 9009 (H) is a production control command (display result 9 designation command (small win A designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern command is small hit A. . Command 900A (H) is a production control command (display result 10 designation command (small win B designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is small hit B. .

Command A000(H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation A designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol and also specify that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds. Command A001 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation B designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol and also specify that the symbol confirmation period is 10 seconds. Command A002 (H) is a production control command (first symbol confirmation C specified command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol and also specify that the symbol confirmation period is 0.5 seconds. be.

Command A100 (H) is a performance control command (second symbol confirmation A designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol and also specify that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds. Command A101 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation B designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol and also specify that the symbol confirmation period is 10 seconds. Command A102 (H) is a production control command (second symbol confirmation C designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol and also specify that the symbol confirmation period is 0.5 seconds. be.

Command B000 (H) is an effect control command (jackpot start specification command: fanfare specification command) that specifies the start of a jackpot game. Command B001 (H) is a production control command (jackpot end specification command: ending specification command) that specifies the end of the jackpot game.

Command B1XX(H) is an effect control command (big winning opening display command) that specifies the display during a round during the jackpot game. Note that the number of rounds to be displayed is set in "XX". Command B2XX(H) is an effect control command (display command after opening of the jackpot opening) that specifies the display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) during the jackpot game.

Command B300 (H) is a performance control command (small win start designation command) that specifies the start of a small win game. Command B301 (H) is a performance control command (small win end designation command) that specifies the end of the small win game.

Command B400 (H) is a performance control command (big winning opening winning designation command) that specifies that a game ball has won in the big winning opening. Command B401 (H) is a performance control command (special winning opening designation command) that specifies that a game ball has won a prize in the special winning opening. Command B402 (H) is a performance control command (V winning hole winning designation command) that specifies that a game ball has won a prize in the V winning hole in the special winning hole.

Command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first pending memory number addition designation command) that specifies that the first pending memory number is increased by one. Command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second pending memory number addition designation command) that specifies that the second pending memory number is increased by one. Command C100 (H) is an effect control command (first pending memory number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the first pending memory number is decreased by one. Command C101 (H) is an effect control command (second pending memory number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the second pending memory number is decreased by one.

Command E000(H) is an effect control command (normal state designation command) that designates that the gaming state is controlled to the normal state. Command E001 (H) is a performance control command (time saving state A designation command) that specifies that the gaming state is controlled to a time saving state at the end of the jackpot game. Command E002 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state B designation command) that specifies that the gaming state is controlled to the time saving state when the time saving is over. Command E003 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state C designation command) that specifies that the gaming state is controlled to be in a time saving state during rescue time saving.

Command E100 (H) is a production control command (right-handed hitting notification start designation command) that specifies to start right-handed hitting notification. Command E101 (H) is a production control command (right-handed hitting notification end designation command) that specifies ending the right-handed hitting notification.

Command E2XX(H) is an effect control command (setting value command) that specifies the set value that has been set. Note that the setting value set to "XX" is set. For example, if the setting value is set to "1", command E201(H) is transmitted, and if the setting value is set to "6", command E206(H) is transmitted.

When the production control CPU 120 (specifically, production control CPU 120) mounted on the production control board 12 receives the production control command described above from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, The display state of the image display device 5 is changed according to the contents shown in FIG. 281-11 and FIG. Note that production control commands other than the production control commands shown in FIGS. 281-11 and 281-12 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. For example, a more detailed performance control command regarding the jackpot game and a performance control command indicating the game state (for example, a performance control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

(Game control main processing)
FIG. 281-13 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing in the feature section 120IW. In this example, the processing in steps S1 to S2, the processing in steps S3 to S9, and the processing in steps S10 to S12 are similar to those shown in FIG. 276.

In this example, when the initial setting is performed in step S2, the CPU 103 performs a setting change/confirmation process (step 120IWS11). In the setting change/confirmation process, it is possible to confirm or change the current setting values. Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a setting value command corresponding to the currently set setting value to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS12).

Further, when the production control command instructing the initialization is transmitted in step S9, the CPU 103 sets the relief time reduction counter to "900" (step 120IWS13). Therefore, in this example, when the RAM clearing process is executed when the gaming machine is powered on, "900" is set in the rescue time reduction counter. That is, in this example, after the RAM clearing process is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, if neither a jackpot nor a time saving error occurs even after 900 fluctuation displays are executed, the relief time is shortened and the time saving state is entered. will be controlled by. In this example, it is possible to specify the initial value to be set in the relief time reduction counter based on the effect control command instructing initialization transmitted in step S9.

In addition, in this example, when the RAM clearing process is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, the rescue time reduction counter is set to "900" and initialized, but this is not the case. First, the configuration may be such that the rescue time reduction counter is not initialized when the RAM clear process is executed. With such a configuration, the game can be started from the continuation of the value of the previous day's relief time reduction counter, so the investment amount until the relief time is shortened can be reduced, and the configuration is such that it is not disadvantageous to the player. be able to.

In addition, in the case of the above configuration, the configuration is such that the initial setting of the rescue time reduction counter is not performed only when the ON of the clear switch is detected (Y in step S3) and the RAM clearing process is executed. When an abnormality is detected (N in steps S4 and S5) and the RAM clearing process is executed, the rescue time saving counter may be initialized.

(Special design process processing)
FIG. 281-14 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing in the feature section 120IW. In this example, the starting winning determination process (step 120IWS101) is almost the same as the starting winning determining process (step S101) shown in FIG. 278. Further, the special symbol normal processing (step 120IWS110) to the special symbol stop processing (step 120IWS113) are generally the same as the special symbol normal processing (step S110) to the special symbol stop processing (step S113) shown in FIG. However, in this example, when the small winning symbol is derived and displayed, the process moves to the small winning opening preprocessing (step 120IWS114). Further, when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed (in the case of a so-called direct hit), the process moves to jackpot release preprocessing (step 120IWS117).

Small hit release preprocessing (step 120 IWS114): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The game control microcomputer 100 executes the process of controlling the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 to the open state, and changes the internal state (specifically, the value of the special symbol process flag) to the small hit opening process (step 120IWS115) to a value (5 in this example).

Small hit opening process (step 120 IWS115): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. If the opening time elapses while the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 is open, the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 is controlled to the closed state, and if the closing time elapses while the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 is closed and it is still open. If the number of times remains, the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 is controlled to be in an open state. In addition, when it is time to open the V winning opening opening/closing plate 120IW20, the V winning opening opening/closing plate 120IW20 is controlled to open, and when it is the timing to close the V winning opening opening/closing plate 120IW20, the V winning opening opening/closing plate 120IW20 is controlled to open. 120IW20 is controlled to be in a closed state. Also, it is confirmed whether or not the V winning opening switch 120IW20a is turned on, and if the V winning opening switch 120IW20a is turned on, a V winning flag is set. When all openings of the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 are completed and the closing time (interval time) has also elapsed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is changed to a value corresponding to the small hit post-closing process (step 120IWS116). In this example, update to 6).

Small hit closing post-processing (step 120 IWS116): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. When the V winning flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (7 in this example) corresponding to the jackpot release preprocessing (step 120 IWS117). If the V winning flag is not set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step 120 IWS110).

The jackpot release preprocessing (step 120IWS117) to the jackpot end processing (step 120IWS120) are generally the same as the jackpot release preprocessing (step S114) to the jackpot end processing (step S117) shown in FIG. 278.

In addition, in this example, after a jackpot is determined and the jackpot/small win symbol is derived and displayed, or after a V win occurs during a small win game and the small win game ends, the case immediately shifts to the jackpot game. is shown, but is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, instead of immediately transitioning to the jackpot game, the configuration may be such that the transition to the jackpot game is made on the condition that the game ball passes through an operating gate (which may also be used as the passing gate 41) provided in the gaming area. Good too.

(Special design normal processing)
FIGS. 281-15 and 281-16 are flowcharts showing special symbol normal processing (step 120IWS110) in the special symbol process processing. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage number (step 120IWS51). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total number of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number is checked. If the total number of pending memories is not 0, the CPU 103 checks whether the second number of pending memories is 0 (step 120IWS52). Specifically, it is checked whether the value of the second pending storage counter for counting the second pending storage number is 0 or not. If the second pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 uses the special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process is being performed for the first special symbol or the second special symbol) Data indicating "second" is set in (step 120IWS53). If the second pending memory number is 0 (that is, if only the first pending memory number is accumulated), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "first" in the special symbol pointer (step 120IWS54).

In this feature section 120IW, by executing the processing of steps 120IWS52 to S54, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol. In other words, the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled to be satisfied in priority to the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

In addition, the aspect shown in this example is not limited, and for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol may be executed in the order in which the game ball wins in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole. It may be configured as follows.

Next, in the RAM 102, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved memories = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 120IWS55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first pending memory number = 1 in the first pending memory number buffer. The numerical value is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending memory number = 1 in the second pending memory number buffer. and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the pending storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 120IWS56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first pending memory number counter, and stores each storage area in the first pending memory number buffer. Shift the contents of . Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second pending memory number counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second pending memory number buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 saves the storage area corresponding to the first pending memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first pending memory number buffer of the RAM 102. Each random value stored in is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number=n-1. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second pending memory number buffer of the RAM 102. Each random value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number=n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number) is extracted is always based on the first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number). The second pending storage number) is arranged to match the order of 1, 2, 3, and 4.

Then, the CPU 103 reduces the value of the total number of pending memories by one. That is, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is subtracted by 1 (step 120IWS57). Note that the CPU 103 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is subtracted by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a setting value command that can specify the currently set setting value to the production control CPU 120 (step 120IWS58). Note that this example shows a case where a set value command is sent at the start of the fluctuation every time the fluctuation display is executed, but this is not the only option. may be configured.

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number for hit determination from the random number buffer area (step 120IWS61) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 120IWS62). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random numbers for winning determination extracted in the starting winning determination process (step 120IWS101) and stored in the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer in advance to determine the jackpot. The jackpot determination module is a program that compares a predetermined jackpot determination value and a random number for hit determination, and executes a process of determining a jackpot when they match. In other words, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process. When the value of the random number for hit determination matches any jackpot determination value, the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot. If it is determined to be a jackpot (Y in step 120IWS63), the process moves to step 120IWS64. On the other hand, if it is determined not to be a jackpot (N in step 120IWS63), the process moves to step 120IWS66. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a jackpot means deciding whether to shift to a jackpot gaming state, but also deciding whether to make a stop symbol on the special symbol display a jackpot symbol. There is also.

In step 120IWS64, the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot. Further, the CPU 103 selects the jackpot type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer (step 120IWS65). In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "first", select the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol shown in Figure 281-5 (A), and set the value of the special symbol pointer to If "second" is indicated, the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 281-5(B) is selected. Then, using the selected jackpot type determination table, the CPU 103 selects a type (6R time-saving jackpot A, 6R time-saving jackpot B, 10R time-saving jackpot jackpot) is determined as the type of jackpot (step 120IWS91). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the type determination random number extracted in the starting winning determination process (step 120IWS101) and stored in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer in advance, and determines the jackpot type. Further, the CPU 103 sets data indicating the determined type of jackpot in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102. Then, the process moves to step 120IWS92.

On the other hand, in step 120IWS66, the CPU 103 selects the small hit determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer. In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "1st", select the small hit determination table for the 1st special symbol, and if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "2nd" , select the small hit determination table for the second special symbol. Then, the CPU 103 uses the selected small hit determination table to perform a lottery process based on the random number for hit determination, and determines whether or not to make a small win (step 120 IWS67). In this example, as shown in FIGS. 281-4(A) and (B), when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the probability of a small hit is approximately 1/400, which is small. When a win is determined and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, a small win is determined with a probability of about 1/7.

If it is determined to be a small win (Y in step 120IWS68), the CPU 103 sets a small win flag indicating that it is a small win (step 120IWS69). Then, the CPU 103 selects the small hit type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer (step 120IWS70). In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "first", select the small hit type determination table for the first special symbol shown in Figure 281-5 (C), and select the value of the special symbol pointer. When indicates "second", the small hit type determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 281-5(D) is selected. After selecting the small hit type determination table, the process moves to step 120IWS71.

If it is not determined to be a small hit (N in step 120IWS68), the CPU 103 moves to step 120IWS71.

In step 120IWS71, the CPU 103 checks whether or not a small win counter for counting the number of times the small win has been controlled during the time saving state is 0 (step 120IWS71). If the value of the small hit counter is 0, the process moves to step 120IWS76.

If the value of the small hit number counter is not 0, the CPU 103 checks whether the small hit flag is set (step 120IWS72). If the small hit flag is not set, the process moves to step 120IWS76.

If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the small win counter (step 120IWS73).

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the small hit count counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 120IWS74). If the value of the small hit count counter is not 0, the process moves to step 120IWS76.

If the value of the small hit number counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a time saving end flag indicating that the time saving state is ended at the end of the fluctuation (step 120IWS75). Then, the process moves to step 120IWS76.

In step 120IWS76, the CPU 103 checks whether any time saving flag is set (step 120IWS76). If none of the time saving flags is set, the process moves to step 120IWS83. If any of the time saving flags is set, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the total time saving counter (step 120IWS77).

Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the count value of the total time saving number counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 120IWS74), and if it is 0, the process moves to step 120IWS82. If the count value of the total time saving counter after the subtraction is not 0, the CPU 103 checks whether it is time to start variable display of the second special symbol (step 120IWS79). It should be noted that whether or not it is time to start the variable display of the second special symbol can be determined, for example, by checking whether data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer. If the variable display of the second special symbol is not to be started, the process moves to step 120IWS83.

When starting the variable display of the second special symbol, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the second time saving number counter (step 120 IWS80), and checks whether the count value of the second time saving number counter after the subtraction is 0 or not. Confirm (step 120IWS81). If the count value of the second time saving number counter after the subtraction is not 0, the CPU 103 moves to step 120IWS83, while if the count value of the second time saving number counter after the subtraction is 0, the process moves to step 120IWS82.

In step 120IWS82, the CPU 103 sets a time-saving end flag indicating that the time-saving state is ended at the end of the fluctuation (step 120IWS82).

Note that this example shows a case where steps 120IWS76 to S82 are executed to subtract the time reduction counter before the process of counting the number of fluctuations until relief time reduction after step 120IWS83, but such a processing mode is not applicable. Not limited to. For example, the process of subtracting the time saving number counter may be performed after the process of counting the number of fluctuations until the relief time saving from step 120IWS83 onwards is executed. In this case, for example, in the case of a variable display that results in a relief time saving, if the subtraction process is executed after setting the time saving number counter to "900" (see step 120 IWS149), the value of the time saving number counter will increase by 1. Since the value is subtracted, in a variable display that shortens the relief time, the value of the time saving number counter may be incremented by 1 again after the subtraction process. Alternatively, the time reduction counter may be set to "901", which is one more, in advance.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (step 120IWS83). If the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0, the process moves to step 120IWS87. If the value of the relief time reduction number counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the relief time reduction number counter (step 120IWS84). In addition, in this example, by executing the process of step 120IWS83, the value of the relief time saving number counter is uniformly updated regardless of whether the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. In addition, in this example, by executing the process of step 120IWS83, regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. , the value of the relief time reduction counter is uniformly updated.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 120 IWS85). If the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is not 0, the process moves to step 120IWS87. If the value of the relief time reduction count counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a relief time reduction determination flag indicating that the time reduction state is to be controlled at the end of the variation based on the occurrence of relief time reduction (step 120 IWS86). . Then, the process moves to step 120IWS87.

In addition, in this example, the processing of steps 120IWS83 to S86 is executed not only in the case of a loss variation but also in the case of a small hit variation, so the value of the relief time reduction number counter becomes 0 and a relief time reduction occurs. In some cases, the fluctuation display is a small hit fluctuation. On the other hand, in this example, in the case of a jackpot fluctuation, the processing of steps 120IWS83 to S86 is not executed, so if the fluctuation display that should cause a relief time reduction is a jackpot fluctuation, the relief time reduction control is not performed. Normal jackpot control is performed.

In step 120IWS87, the CPU 103 checks whether the small hit flag is set (step 120IWS87). If the small hit flag is set, the process moves to step 120IWS91. In this case, the CPU 103 uses the small win type determination table selected in step 120IWS70 to determine the type (small win A or small win B) corresponding to the value that matches the value of the random number for type determination stored in the random number buffer area. is determined as the type of small win (step 120IWS91). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the type determination random number extracted in the starting winning determination process (step 120IWS101) and stored in the second pending storage buffer in advance, and determines the small winning type. Further, the CPU 103 sets data indicating the determined small win type in the small win type buffer in the RAM 102. Then, the process moves to step 120IWS92.

If the small hit flag is not set, the CPU 103 uses the time saving loss determination table to determine whether or not the time saving loss is determined, and performs a lottery process based on the random number for determining the time saving loss, and determines whether the time saving loss is determined. It is determined whether or not (step 120IWS88). In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "1st", the time saving error determination table for the first special symbol is selected, and it is determined that the time saving error is determined with a probability of about 1/200. (See Figure 281-4(A)). In addition, when the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the time saving error determination table for the second special symbol is selected, and it is determined that the time saving error has a probability of approximately 1/400 ( (See Figure 281-4(B)). If it is not decided to cancel the time saving (if it is decided to cancel without the time saving), the process moves to step 120IWS93.

If it is determined that the time saving is missed (Y in step 120IWS89), the CPU 103 selects the time saving type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer (step 120IWS90). In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "first", select the time saving type determination table for the first special symbol shown in Figure 281-6(A), and set the value of the special symbol pointer to If "second" is indicated, the time saving type determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 281-6(B) is selected. Then, the CPU 103 determines the type (time saving failure A, time saving failure B, time saving failure C) corresponding to the value that matches the value of the type determination random number stored in the random number buffer area as the time saving failure type (step 120IWS91). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the type determination random number extracted in the start-up winning determination process (step S101) and stored in the first suspension storage buffer or the second suspension storage buffer in advance, and determines the time saving type. Then, the process moves to step 120IWS92.

After completing the process in step 120IWS91, the CPU 103 selects a symbol determination table (see FIGS. 281-7(A) to 281-8(H)) according to the result of the type determination performed in step 120IWS91 (step 120IWS92 ). In addition, in the case of no time saving, the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 281-7(I) is selected as it is, and the process moves to step 120IWS93.

In step 120IWS93, the CPU 103 determines a symbol corresponding to a value that matches the value of the random number for symbol determination stored in the random number buffer area (step 120IWS93).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step 120IWS94).

(Fluctuation pattern setting process)
FIG. 281-17 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step 120IWS111) in the special symbol process process. In the variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) checks whether the story has been set (step 120IWS1701). In addition, a story is a fluctuation pattern and a fluctuation time according to the number of fluctuations of the symbol, and whether or not the story has been set depends on whether the flags and data that are set according to the story when a jackpot occurs are set. Check to see if there are any.

If the story has been set, the CPU 103 checks whether the relief time saving determination flag (see step 120IWS86) is set (step 120IWS1702). If the relief time reduction determination flag is set, the CPU 103 selects the relief time reduction variation pattern table (see FIG. 281-10(G)) and proceeds to step 120IWS1710.

If the story has not been set, or if the relief time reduction determination flag is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the time reduction is over (step 120IWS1704). If it is not a time saving error, the CPU 103 selects a variation pattern table (see FIGS. 281-10 (A) to (D)) according to the special symbol, gaming state, and display result (step 120IWS1709), and moves to step 120IWS1710. . Therefore, in this example, even if the variation display is for shortening the rescue time, if the story is not set, the normal variation pattern is uniformly determined instead of the variation pattern for saving the rescue time.

If the time saving is over, the CPU 103 checks whether the time saving flag (see step 120IWS150, step 120IWS160, step 120IWS537) is set (step 120IWS1705). If the time saving flag is set, the CPU 103 selects a variation pattern table (see FIGS. 281-10 (A) to (D)) according to the special symbol, gaming status, and display result (step 120IWS1709), and steps 120IWS1710. Therefore, in this example, even if it is determined that the time saving is off, if the time saving state is in progress, the same fluctuation pattern as the case where the time saving is off (no time saving) is determined.

If the time saving flag is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether the symbol is determined to be "8" in the symbol determination (see step 120IWS93) (step 120IWS1706). If the symbol "8" is not selected, the CPU 103 selects a variation pattern table (see FIG. 281-10(E)) for short-time misses (symbols other than "8") (step 120IWS1707), and proceeds to step 120IWS1710. If the symbol is "8", the CPU 103 selects the variation pattern table (see FIG. 281-10(F)) for the short time loss (symbol "8") (step 120IWS1708), and proceeds to step 120IWS1710.

In step 120IWS1710, the CPU 103 uses the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps 120IWS1703, S1707, S1708, and S1709 and the random number for variation pattern determination stored in the reserved storage buffer indicated by the special symbol pointer. , it is determined which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 281-10 will be used (step 120IWS1710). In this example, the variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is determined by determining the variation pattern. Note that after determining the fluctuation time, a fluctuation pattern in which the determined fluctuation time is set may be selected from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns.

After determining the fluctuation pattern, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a fluctuation pattern command indicating the determined fluctuation pattern to the production control CPU 120 (step 120IWS1711).

Further, when the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is determined in step 120IWS1710, the CPU 103 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the fluctuation time timer to measure the fluctuation time. (Step 120IWS1712), and starts variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (Step 120IWS1713). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step 120IWS1714).

(Special symbol variation processing)
FIG. 281-18 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process (step 120IWS112) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol variation process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first determines whether or not it will be a jackpot, if it has not yet been transmitted, and then determines whether or not it will be a small win. Based on the result, the determination result of whether or not to make a time saving difference, the determination result of the jackpot type, the determination result of the small hit type, and the determination result of the time saving loss type, select one of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command ~ Control is performed to transmit the display result 10 designation command) to the production control CPU 120 (step 120IWS1121).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the variable time timer (step 120IWS1122), and when the variable time timer times out (step 120IWS1123), the CPU 103 checks whether the relief time reduction determination flag (see step 120IWS86) is set (step 120IWS1124). ). Note that if the variable time timer has not timed out, the process moves to step 120IWS1139.

If the relief time saving determination flag is set, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed LED 120IW10 (step 120IWS1125). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a right-handed hitting notification start designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS1126).

By executing the process of step 120IWS1126, in this example, when a relief time reduction occurs, lighting of the right hit LED 120IW10 is started at the start of the symbol determination period.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to "20 seconds" to a symbol confirmation period timer for measuring the fixed display period of the stop symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (step 120IWS1127). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a first symbol determination A designation command or a second symbol determination A designation command that can specify that the symbol determination period is 20 seconds to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS1128). In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to send the first symbol confirmation A designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to transmit a second symbol confirmation A designation command. Then, the process moves to step 120IWS1139.

On the other hand, if the relief time saving flag is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not it has been decided to cancel the time saving (step 120IWS1129). It should be noted that whether or not it is decided to skip the time saving can be determined, for example, by checking the stop symbols of the special symbols stored in the stop symbol storage area in step 120IWS93.

If it is decided to skip the time saving, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed LED 120IW10 (step 120IWS1130). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a right-handed hitting notification start designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 120IWS1131).

By executing the process of step 120IWS1131, in this example, when a time saving losing symbol is derived and displayed, lighting of the right hit LED 120IW10 is started at the start of the symbol determination period.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the time saving flag A, the time saving flag B, or the time saving flag C is set (step 120IWS1132). If none of the time saving flag A, time saving flag B, and time saving flag C are set (that is, in the normal state), the CPU 103 sets the fixed display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. A value corresponding to "20 seconds" is set in a symbol determination period timer for measurement (step 120IWS1133). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a first symbol confirmation A designation command or a second symbol determination A designation command that can specify that the symbol determination period is 20 seconds to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS1134). In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to send the first symbol confirmation A designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to transmit a second symbol confirmation A designation command. Then, the process moves to step 120IWS1139.

If the time saving flag A, the time saving flag B, or the time saving flag C is set (that is, if the time saving flag is in the time saving state), the CPU 103 measures the fixed display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. A value corresponding to "10 seconds" is set in the symbol determination period timer for the purpose (step 120IWS1135). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a first symbol determination B designation command or a second symbol determination B designation command that can specify that the symbol determination period is 10 seconds to the production control CPU 120 (step 120IWS1136). In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to transmit the first symbol confirmation B designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to transmit a second symbol confirmation B designation command. Then, the process moves to step 120IWS1139.

Unless it is determined that the time is shortened (N in step 120IWS1129), the CPU 103 sets the symbol confirmation period timer to "0" for measuring the fixed display period of the stop symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. .5 seconds" (step 120IWS1137). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a first symbol confirmation C designation command or a second symbol determination C designation command that can specify that the symbol determination period is 0.5 seconds to the production control CPU 120 (step 120IWS1138). . In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to send the first symbol confirmation A designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to transmit a second symbol confirmation A designation command. Then, the process moves to step 120IWS1139.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop processing (step S113) (step 120IWS1139).

(Special pattern stop processing)
FIGS. 281-19 to 281-21 are flowcharts showing the special symbol stop processing (step S113) in the special symbol process processing. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 first subtracts 1 from the value of the symbol determination period timer (step 120IWS131), and checks whether the value of the symbol determination period timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 120IWS132). .

If the value of the symbol confirmation period timer after the subtraction is not 0 (that is, if the fixed display period of the stop symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol has not yet ended), the special symbol stop processing ends. do. If the value of the symbol confirmation period timer after the subtraction is 0 (that is, if the fixed display period of the stop symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol has ended), the CPU 103 sets the jackpot flag. It is confirmed whether or not it is set (step 120IWS133). If the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 controls the time saving flags (time saving flag A, time saving flag B, time saving flag C), and the time saving flag for counting the number of executions of the fluctuation display during the time saving state. The time saving number counter is reset (step 120IWS134).

In addition, as the time saving number counter, a special 2 time saving number counter corresponding to the number of changes of the second special symbol and a total time saving number counter corresponding to the number of changes of both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are provided. ing. When simply referred to as "time saving counter", it refers to both the special time saving number counter and the total time saving number counter.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the relief time reduction counter to "900" (step 120IWS135). Therefore, in this example, when the jackpot is triggered, the relief time reduction counter is set to "900", and even if the fluctuation display is executed 900 times after the jackpot game ends, neither the next jackpot nor the time reduction error occurs. , the rescue time is shortened and the time is controlled to shorten the time.

In addition, this example shows a case where when a jackpot is achieved by executing the process of step 120IWS135, the rescue time shortening counter is initialized by setting "900" at the start of the fanfare period of the jackpot. However, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the relief time reduction counter may be set to "900" during a round of a jackpot game, and the relief time reduction counter may be initialized to "900" at the start or end of the ending period of a jackpot game. It may be configured as follows.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed LED 120IW10 (step 120IWS136). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a right-handed hitting notification start designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 120IWS137).

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a jackpot start designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS138). Next, the CPU 103 sets a timer for time before the opening of the big winning opening to measure the time before opening the big winning opening (fanfare time) until the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to be in the open state (step 120IWS139). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot release preprocessing (step S144) (step 120IWS140).

If the jackpot flag is not set (N in step 120IWS133), the CPU 103 checks whether the time saving end flag is set (step 120IWS141). If the time saving end flag is not set, the process moves to step 120IWS148. If the time saving end flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the time saving end flag (step 120IWS142). Next, the CPU 103 resets any of the set time saving flags (any of the time saving flags A to C) and ends the time saving state (step 120IWS143).

Next, if the value has been set, the CPU 103 resets the small hit count counter, the total time saving count counter, and the special 2 time saving count counter (step 120IWS144), and performs control to end the lighting of the right-handed LED 120IW10 (step 120IWS145). ). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a right-hand hit notification end designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS146). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a normal state designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 120IWS147). Then, the process moves to step 120IWS148.

In addition, in this example, by executing the processing of steps 120IWS141 to S147, a transition is made to the normal state at the end of the symbol confirmation period in the time shortening final fluctuation, and the right hit notification is ended. It is not limited to this aspect. For example, in the time saving final variation, it may be configured to shift to the normal state and end the right hit notification at the start of the variation or the start of the symbol confirmation period.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the relief time saving determination flag is set (step 120IWS148). When the relief time reduction determination flag is set, the CPU 103 sets "900" to the special 2 time reduction number counter, "900" to the total time reduction number counter, "900" to the relief time reduction number counter, and sets "900" to the small hit number counter. are set to "1" (step 120IWS149). Further, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag C and controls the time saving state (step 120 IWS150). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a time saving state C designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 120IWS151). Then, the process moves to step 120IWS164.

In this example, even if there is a small hit fluctuation, if the relief time saving determination flag is set in 120IWS148 at the timing of the end of the symbol confirmation period, step 120IWS150 is executed, and in the subsequent small hit gaming state, the time saving state is executed. Controlled by C.

If the relief time saving flag is not set, it is confirmed whether or not it has been decided to cancel the time saving (step 120IWS152). It should be noted that whether or not it is decided to skip the time saving can be determined, for example, by checking the stop symbols of the special symbols stored in the stop symbol storage area in step 120IWS93.

If it is decided to skip the time saving, the CPU 103 checks whether any of the time saving flags (time saving flags A to C) is set (step 120IWS153). If none of the time saving flags are set (that is, in the normal state), if the time saving is A (Y in step 120 IWS154), the CPU 103 sets "100" to the special 2 time saving counter, and sets the total time saving number to "100". Each counter is set to "900" (step 120IWS155). Then, the process moves to step 120IWS160.

If the time saving is not A, and if the time saving is B (Y in step 120IWS156), the CPU 103 sets the special 2 time saving number counter to "50" and the total time saving number counter to "900" (step 120IWS157). . Then, the process moves to step 120IWS160.

If the time reduction is not B (N in step 120 IWS156), that is, if the time reduction is C, the CPU 103 sets the special 2 time reduction number counter to "30" and the total time reduction number counter to "900" (step 120IWS158). Then, the process moves to step 120IWS160.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag B and controls the time saving state (step 120 IWS160).

Next, the CPU 103 sets the relief time reduction counter to "900" (step 120IWS161). Therefore, in this example, the relief time reduction counter is set to "900" when the time cut is missed, and even if the fluctuation display is executed 900 times after the time cut is missed, neither the next jackpot nor the time cut miss occurs. , the rescue time is shortened and the time is controlled to shorten the time.

Further, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the small hit number counter (step 120IWS162), and performs control to transmit a time saving state B designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS163). Then, the process moves to step 120IWS164.

Further, if any time saving flag is set (Y in step 120IWS153), the process moves to step 120IWS164. Therefore, in this example, even if the time saving is interrupted, if the time saving state is still in progress, a new time saving state is not set based on the time saving change, and the current time saving state is continued (therefore, The values of the special 2 time reduction counter and the total time reduction counter will continue to be at their current values.)

In step 120IWS164, the CPU 103 checks whether the small hit flag is set (step 120IWS164). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed LED 120IW10 (step 120IWS165). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a right-handed hitting notification start designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS166).

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a small hit start designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS167). Next, the CPU 103 sets a special winning opening pre-opening timer (step 120IWS168). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit release preprocessing (step S118) (step 120IWS169).

If the small hit flag is not set, the CPU 103 resets the relief time saving determination flag if it is set (step 120 IWS170).

In step 120IWS171, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S110) (step 120IWS171).

(Small hit release preprocessing)
FIG. 281-22 is a flowchart showing the small win release preprocessing (step 120IWS114) in the special symbol process processing. In the small win pre-opening process, the CPU 103 first checks whether the special winning opening pre-opening timer has timed out (step 120IWS401). If the special winning a prize opening pre-opening time timer has not timed out (that is, if the fanfare time has not elapsed), the process ends as is.

If the special winning opening pre-opening timer has timed out (that is, if the fanfare time has elapsed), the CPU 103 starts driving the solenoid 120IW83 and controls the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 to the open state. (Step 120IWS402). Further, the CPU 10103 sets a value corresponding to the first opening time of the special winning opening (in this example, 0.016 seconds) in the opening time timer (step 120IWS403).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit opening process (step 120IWS115) (step 120IWS404).

(Processing during small hit release)
FIG. 281-23 is a flowchart showing the small winning opening process (step 120IWS115) in the special symbol process process. In the small winning opening process, the CPU 103 first checks whether the special winning opening switch 120IW24 is turned on (step 120IWS421). If the special winning opening switch 120IW24 is in the ON state (that is, if winning of a game ball to the special winning opening is detected), the CPU 103 sends a special winning opening winning designation command to the performance control CPU 120. Control is performed to transmit (step 120IWS422).

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the V winning a prize opening switch 120IW20a is turned on (step 120IWS423). If the V winning hole switch 120IW20a is in the ON state (that is, if winning of a game ball to the V winning hole is detected), the CPU 103 sends a V winning hole winning designation command to the performance control CPU 120. Control is performed to transmit (step 120IWS424). Further, the CPU 103 sets a V winning flag indicating that a V winning has been won (step 120IWS425).

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether it is time to open the V winning opening opening/closing board 120IW20 (step 120IWS426). In addition, whether or not it is time to open the V winning opening opening/closing board 120IW20 can be determined by, for example, setting a timer when starting the small winning game, and determining whether the time from starting the small winning game is a predetermined time (in this example, , 8 seconds). If it is the opening timing of the V winning opening opening/closing plate 120IW20, the CPU 103 starts driving the solenoid 120IW84 and controls the V winning opening opening/closing plate 120IW20 to an open state (step 120IWS427).

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether it is time to close the V winning opening opening/closing plate 120IW20 (step 120IWS428). In addition, whether or not it is time to close the V winning opening opening/closing board 120IW20 can be determined by, for example, setting a timer when starting to open the V winning opening opening/closing board 120IW20, and starting to open the V winning opening opening/closing board 120IW20. This determination can be made by checking whether the time since then has reached a predetermined time (8 seconds in this example). If it is the closing timing of the V winning opening opening/closing plate 120IW20, the CPU 103 stops driving the solenoid 120IW84 and controls the V winning opening opening/closing plate 120IW20 to the closed state (step 120IWS429).

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the opening time timer for measuring the opening time of the special winning hole is 0 (step 120IWS430). If the value of the open time timer is not 0 (that is, if the special winning hole is being opened), the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the open time timer (step 120IWS431), and the value of the open time timer after the subtraction is Check whether it is 0 (step 120IWS432). If the value of the open time timer is 0, the CPU 103 stops driving the solenoid 120IW83 and controls the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 to be in a closed state (step 120IWS433). Further, the CPU 103 sets a predetermined closing time (a value corresponding to an interval time) to a closing time timer for measuring the closing time after opening the special winning opening (step 120IWS434).Then, the process ends.

If the opening time timer is 0 in step 120IWS430 (that is, if the special winning opening is closed), the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the closing time timer (step 120IWS435), and the value of the closing time timer after the subtraction. It is confirmed whether or not is 0 (step 120IWS436). If the value of the closing time timer is 0, the CPU 103 checks whether all the special winning openings have already been opened (step 120IWS437). In this example, if the special winning opening has already been opened four times, it is determined as Y in step 120IWS437, and the process moves to step 120IWS440.

If all the special winning holes have not been opened (that is, if the second to fourth openings remain), the CPU 103 starts driving the solenoid 120IW83 and sets the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 in the open state. (Step 120IWS438). Further, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the opening time (in this example, 0.016 seconds) in the closing time timer (step 120IWS439). Then, the process ends.

If all the special winning openings have been opened (Y in step 120IWS437), the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small winning closing post-processing (step 120IWS116) (step 120IWS440). ).

(Processing after small hit closure)
FIG. 281-24 is a flowchart showing the small winning closure post-processing (step 120IWS116) in the special symbol process processing. In the small win closing post-processing, the CPU 103 checks whether the small win end display timer is set (step 120IWS451), and if the small win end display timer is set, the process moves to step 120IWS453. If the small hit end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 sets the small hit end display timer to a display corresponding to the time during which the small hit end display is performed on the image display device 5 (small hit end display time). A value corresponding to the time is set (step 120IWS452), and the process ends.

In step 120IWS453, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the small winning end display timer. Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the small win end display timer is 0, that is, whether the small win end display time has elapsed (step 120IWS454). If the time has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the small winning end display time has elapsed, the CPU 103 checks whether the V winning flag is set (step 120IWS455). If the V winning flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the time saving flag and the time saving number counter (step 120IWS456). Further, the CPU 103 resets the V winning flag (step 120IWS457). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a jackpot start designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 120IWS458). Further, the CPU 103 sets a timer for the time before opening the big prize opening (step 120IWS459).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot start pre-processing (step 120IWS117) (step 120IWS460).

If it is confirmed in the process of step 120IWS456 that the V winning flag is not set, the CPU 103 resets the small winning flag (step 120IWS461). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a small hit end designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 120IWS462). Then, if set, the CPU 103 resets the relief time saving determination flag (step 120IWS463), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step 120IWS110) (step 120IWS464). .

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 281-25 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step 120IWS121) in the special symbol process process. In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 checks whether the jackpot end display timer is set (step 120IWS531), and if the jackpot end display timer is set, the process moves to step 120IWS535. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 resets the jackpot flag or the small win flag (step 120IWS532), and performs control to transmit a jackpot end designation command (step 120IWS533). Then, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot end display timer to a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the jackpot end display is performed on the image display device 5 (jackpot end display time) (step 120IWS534), and executes the process. finish.

In step 120IWS535, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot end display timer. Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 120IWS536). If the time has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step 120IWS536), the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag A (step 120IWS537) and checks whether the rescue time saving flag is set (step 120IWS538). If the relief time shortening flag is set, if the fluctuation display that caused the relief time saving is a small hit fluctuation, a V win occurs during that small winning game and the transferred jackpot game is ended. be. In this case, the CPU 103 resets the relief time saving flag (step 120IWS539), sets the special 2 time saving number counter to "1", sets the total time saving number counter to "99", and sets the small hit number counter to "1". is set (step 120IWS540). Next, the CPU 103 performs story setting processing (step 120IWS546).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step 120IWS110) (step 120IWS547).

On the other hand, if the relief time saving flag is not set, it is confirmed whether or not it is a jackpot that occurred in the time saving state (step 120IWS541). In addition, whether or not it is a jackpot that occurred in a time-saving state can be determined by, for example, whether the time-saving flag is set before the processing of step 120IWS134 or step S120IWS456 is executed at the start of the jackpot game and the time-saving flag is reset. If the time saving flag is set, a jackpot time saving flag indicating that the time saving state was in effect when the jackpot occurs is set, and in step 120IWS541, whether the jackpot time saving flag is set or not is set. This can be determined by checking.

If the jackpot occurred in the time saving state, the CPU 103 sets the special 2 time saving number counter to "7", sets the total time saving number counter to "99", and sets the small winning number counter to "1". (Step 120 IWS540). Next, the CPU 103 performs story setting processing (step 120IWS546).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step 120IWS110) (step 120IWS547).

In addition, if the jackpot does not occur in the time saving state (in the case that the jackpot occurs in the normal state), it is confirmed whether the ended jackpot game state is based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol (step 120 IWS543). . It should be noted that whether or not it is a jackpot based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol can be determined, for example, by checking whether data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer. If the completed jackpot game state is based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol, the CPU 103 sets the special 2 time saving number counter to "1", sets the total time saving number counter to "99", and sets the number of small winnings. The counter is set to "1" (step 120IWS544). Next, the CPU 103 performs story setting processing (step 120IWS546).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step 120IWS110) (step 120IWS547).

If the finished jackpot game state is not based on the variation of the first special symbol (if it is based on the variation of the second special symbol), the CPU 103 sets the special 2-time reduction counter to "99" and totals the number of times. The time saving number counter is set to "99", and the small winning number counter is set to "1" (step 120IWS545). Next, the CPU 103 performs story setting processing (step 120IWS546).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step 120IWS110) (step 120IWS547).

In addition, in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed by executing the above processing, if the jackpot is hit during the normal state, the time saving state is changed to one time saving state. (see step 120 IWS544), and if a jackpot occurs during the time saving state, the time saving state is controlled to the number of time saving times of 7 (see step 120 IWS542). Therefore, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is more advantageous to hit the jackpot during the time saving state than to hit the jackpot during the normal state. (many times).

In addition, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, if a jackpot occurs during the normal state, the time saving state is controlled to a time saving state of 99 times (see step 120 IWS545), and if a jackpot occurs during the time saving state. If this happens, the time saving state is controlled to a time saving state where the number of time saving times is 7 (see step 120 IWS542). Therefore, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, it is more advantageous to hit the jackpot during the normal state than to hit the jackpot during the time-saving state (in this example, the time-saving state is (many times).

Furthermore, in this example, when the fluctuation display in which the relief time reduction has occurred is a small hit fluctuation, when a V winning occurs during the small winning game and the transferred jackpot game is ended, the number of time reductions is 1. It is controlled to shorten the time (step 120, see IWS540). Therefore, when the fluctuation display that caused the relief time reduction is a small hit fluctuation, when a V winning occurs during the small winning game and the transferred jackpot game is ended, the time reduction with the lower advantage is state (in this example, the number of time reductions is as small as one time).

For example, if the fluctuation display that caused the relief time reduction is a small hit fluctuation, and when a V winning occurs during the small winning game and the transferred jackpot game ends, it will be displayed as the second special symbol. In the case of a V winning due to the small winning fluctuation based on the fluctuation display, the configuration may be such that the time saving state is controlled to be 99 time saving times (therefore, the time saving state is highly advantageous).

(state transition)
Next, the state transition in this feature section 120IW will be explained. FIGS. 281-26 are state transition diagrams for explaining state transitions in the feature section 120IW. As shown in FIG. 281-26, in the normal state, if a jackpot occurs, the time saving state A (time saving state via jackpot) is controlled (see step 120 IWS537). In addition, in the normal state, even if it is a loss, if a time saving loss symbol is derived and displayed, it is controlled to the time saving state B (time saving state via the time saving loss) (see step 120 IWS160). Furthermore, even if the result is a loss, if the relief time is shortened (after RAM clear processing, jackpot or time shortening failure, the number of fluctuations reaches 900 without the next jackpot or time shortening failure occurring) case), the time saving state C (time saving state via relief time saving) is controlled (see step 120 IWS150).

Further, as shown in FIG. 281-26, if a jackpot occurs in time saving state A, control is again made to time saving state A (time saving state via jackpot) (see step 120 IWS537). In addition, as shown in FIG. 281-26, in the time saving state A, if a small win occurs, the control is controlled to a small win state (see step 120 IWS69), and if a V prize is won in a small win state, the system goes through the jackpot state. Then, the time saving state A (time saving state via jackpot) is controlled (see step 120 IWS537). In addition, in the time saving state A, even if the result is a loss, if the time saving loss symbol is derived and displayed, the time saving state B (time saving state via the time saving loss) is controlled (see step 120 IWS160). In addition, in time saving state A, even if a small hit does not occur, if the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is completed 1, 7, or 99 times without a jackpot, the control is returned to the normal state. (see step 120IWS82, S143). Further, in the time saving state A, when a small hit occurs once, the control is returned to the normal state (see steps 120IWS73 to 75).

Further, as shown in FIG. 281-26, if a jackpot occurs in the time saving state B, the time saving state A (time saving state via the jackpot) is controlled (see step 120 IWS537). In addition, in the time saving state B, if a small hit occurs, the small win state is controlled (see step 120 IWS69). In addition, in time saving state B, even if a small hit does not occur, if the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is finished 30, 50, 100, or 200 times without a jackpot, it will return to the normal state. (see steps 120IWS82 and S143). In addition, in the time saving state B, even if it is a loss, if the time saving loss symbol is derived and displayed, it is controlled to the time saving state B (time saving state via the time saving loss) (see step 120 IWS160). Further, in the time saving state B, when a small hit occurs once, the control is returned to the normal state (see steps 120IWS73 to 75).

Further, as shown in FIG. 281-26, when a jackpot occurs in the time saving state C, the time saving state A (time saving state via the jackpot) is controlled (see step 120 IWS537). In addition, in the time saving state C, if a small hit occurs, the small win state is controlled (see step 120 IWS69). Further, in the time saving state C, when the variable display is completed 900 times without a jackpot occurring, the time saving state C is controlled again (see step 120IWS150). Further, in the time saving state C, when the number of fluctuations reaches 900 times, the time saving state C is controlled again (see step 120IWS149, 150). Further, in the time saving state C, when a small hit occurs once, the control is returned to the normal state (see steps 120IWS73 to 75).

In addition, if a small win occurs in the time saving state A but a V prize is not won, the time saving state A continues as it is after the small winning game ends. Further, if a small win occurs in the time saving state B but a V prize is not won, the time saving state B continues as it is after the small winning game ends. Further, if a small win occurs in the time saving state C but a V prize is not won, the time saving state C continues as it is after the small winning game ends.

(Command analysis processing)
Next, the operation of the production control means will be explained. 281-27 to 281-28 are flowcharts showing specific examples of the command analysis process (step S75). The production control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the production control CPU 120 checks the contents of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the performance control CPU 120 first checks whether the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 120IWS611). Whether the command is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter and the read pointer. If both match, the received command is not stored. If the received command is stored in the command reception buffer, the performance control CPU 120 reads the received command from the command reception buffer (step 120IWS612). Note that after reading, the value of the read pointer is incremented by 2 (step 120IWS613). The reason for adding +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read out at a time.

If the received effect control command is a variable pattern command (step 120IWS614), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variable pattern command in the variable pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 120IWS615). Then, a variable pattern command reception flag is set (step 120IWS616).

If the received production control command is a display result specification command (step 120IWS617), the production control CPU 120 stores the received display result specification command in the display result specification command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 120IWS618). ).

The received production control command is one of the symbol confirmation designation commands (first symbol confirmation A specification command, first symbol confirmation B specification command, first symbol confirmation C specification command, second symbol confirmation A specification command, second symbol confirmation B designation command, second symbol confirmation C designation command) (step 120IWS619), the performance control CPU 120 sets a confirmation command reception flag according to the received symbol confirmation designation command (step 120IWS620). For example, when the first symbol confirmation A designation command is received, the first confirmation A command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the first symbol confirmation B designation command is received, the first confirmation B command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the first symbol confirmed C designation command is received, the first confirmed C command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when a second symbol confirmation A designation command is received, a second confirmation A command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when a second symbol confirmation B designation command is received, a second confirmation B command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when a second symbol confirmed C designation command is received, a second confirmed C command reception flag is set.

If the received performance control command is a jackpot start designation command (step 120IWS621), the performance control CPU 120 sets a jackpot start designation command reception flag (step 120IWS622). If the received performance control command is a jackpot end designation command (step 120IWS623), the performance control CPU 120 sets a jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 120IWS624).

If the received production control command is a large winning slot prize designation command (step 120IWS625), the production control CPU 120 sets a large winning slot prize designation command reception flag (step 120IWS626). If the received production control command is a special winning opening winning designation command (step 120IWS627), the production control CPU 120 sets a special winning opening winning designation command reception flag (step 120IWS628). If the received production control command is a V winning slot winning designation command (step 120IWS629), the production control CPU 120 sets a V winning slot winning designation command reception flag (step 120IWS630).

If the received production control command is a normal state designation command (step 120IWS631), the production control CPU 120 displays a background image corresponding to the normal state (for example, a blue background image corresponding to the sea mode) in the image display device 5. Control is performed to switch to (step 120IWS632).

If the received performance control command is a time-saving state A designation command (step 120IWS633), the performance control CPU 120 displays a background image (for example, sunset) corresponding to the time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot) in the image display device 5. Control is performed to switch to a yellow background image (according to the mode) (step 120IWS634).

If the received production control command is a time saving state B designation command (step 120IWS635), the production control CPU 120 displays a background image (for example, Control is performed to switch to a green background image corresponding to the forest mode (step 120IWS636).

If the received production control command is a time saving state C designation command (step 120 IWS637), the production control CPU 120 determines whether a special production mode flag indicating that the production mode is set to the special production mode is set. (Step 120IWS638). If the special effect mode flag is not set, the image display device 5 switches to a background image corresponding to the time saving state C (time saving state via relief time saving) (for example, an orange background image corresponding to the tangerine field mode). Control is performed (step 120IWS638). On the other hand, if the special effect mode flag is set, the image display device 5 performs control to switch to a background image corresponding to the special effect mode (for example, a red background image corresponding to the flame mode) (step 120IWS640). .

If the received effect control command is a set value command (step 120IWS641), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to store the set value in the set value storage area (step 120IWS642).

If the received production control command is a right-handed notification start designation command (step 120IWS643), the production control CPU 120 performs control to start lighting the right-handed notification LED 120IW20 (step 120IWS644). In addition, in this example, the right hit notification start designation command is transmitted at the start of the symbol confirmation period when a time-saving missed symbol is derived and displayed or when a rescue time is shortened (see steps 120IWS1126 and S1131). , At the start of the symbol confirmation period, the right hit notification LED 120IW20 starts lighting up.

If the received performance control command is a right-handed hitting notification end designation command (step 120IWS645), the performance control CPU 120 performs control to end lighting of the right-handed hitting notification LED 120IW20 (step 120IWS646), and executes the left-handed hitting notification performance. Start (step 120IWS647).

If the received production control command is another command, the production control CPU 120 executes processing such as storing the received production control command or setting a flag according to the received production control command (step 120IWS648 ). Then, the process moves to step 120IWS611.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 281-29 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the production control process shown in FIG. 280. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first reads the variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 120IWS801). Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines the display result (stop) of the decorative pattern according to the variation pattern command read out in step 120IWS801 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command). symbol) is determined (step 120IWS802). That is, by executing the process of step 120IWS802 by the production control CPU 120, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stopping of the decorative pattern) is determined according to the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determining means. A display result determining means for determining a symbol) is realized. In addition, when a pseudo series is specified by the fluctuation pattern command, the production control CPU 120 selects a chance symbol (for example, "223" or "445") as a temporary stop symbol of the pseudo series in step 120IWS802. , combinations of jackpot symbols that do not reach reach and symbols that are off by one symbol) are also determined. Note that the performance control CPU 120 stores data indicating the stop symbols of the determined decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display result storage area. In addition, in step 120IWS802, the production control CPU 120 may determine whether or not it is a jackpot based on the received variation pattern command, and may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based only on the variation pattern command. .

In step 120IWS802, if the received display result designation command indicates a "big hit" or if the received display result designation command indicates a "small win", the production control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative symbols (jackpot symbol, small prize symbol) in which three symbols are the same as the stop symbols. In addition, in this example, a case is shown in which a combination of decorative symbols in which three symbols are the same for both the jackpot symbol and the small prize symbol is determined, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, when the received display result designation command indicates a "small win", the production control CPU 120 is configured to determine a combination of decorative symbols "135" as the stop symbol as the small win symbol. It's okay.

Then, in the case of "missing", a combination of decorative symbols other than the above is determined. However, if a reach effect is involved, a combination of decorative symbols in which the two left and right symbols are aligned is determined. Moreover, even if it is a loss, if it is a "time-saving loss", a combination of decorative symbols of the loss symbol including a special symbol (for example, a star symbol) is determined. In addition, it may be configured to determine a combination of decorative symbols of missed symbols including special symbols (for example, a heart-shaped symbol or a diamond-shaped symbol) that differ depending on the time saving type.

For example, the production control CPU 120 extracts a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other, and determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbols are determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to numerical values that match the extracted random numbers.

Regarding the decorative patterns, a stop pattern that reminds you of a jackpot (a combination of patterns whose left, middle, and right sides are all the same pattern) is called a jackpot pattern. Also, a stop symbol that reminds you of a miss is called a miss symbol.

Next, the production control CPU 120 determines whether the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command read in step 120IWS801 is the variation pattern PT8-1 (see FIG. 281-10 (G)) that specifies the rescue time-saving entry production. (Step 120IWS803). In the case of the variation pattern PT8-1, the production control CPU 120 changes the setting value based on the setting value specified by the setting value command (the setting value stored in the setting value storage area (see step 120 IWS642). It is confirmed whether the setting value is one of the settings "4" to "6" (step 120IWS804).If the setting value is not one of the settings "4" to "6", the process moves to step 120IWS808.

When the set value is one of the settings "4" to "6", the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is a rescue setting performance and The type is determined (step 120IWS805). Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether it has been decided to execute the rescue setting performance (step 120IWS806). If it is determined not to execute the rescue setting effect, the process moves to step 120IWS808. If it is determined to execute the relief setting effect, the effect control CPU 120 sets a special effect mode flag (step 120IWS807), and proceeds to step 120IWS808.

In step 120IWS808, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table including the rescue setting suggestion performance when it is decided to execute the rescue time-saving entry performance or the rescue setting suggestion performance (step 120IWS808). Then, the process moves to step 120IWS814.

On the other hand, if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command read in step 120IWS801 is not variation pattern PT8-1, the production control CPU 120 determines that the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command read in step 120IWS801 is Check whether it is the variation pattern PT6-2 (see Figure 281-10 (E)) that specifies a time-saving promotion effect or the variation pattern PT7-2 (see Figure 281-10 (F)) that specifies a time-saving promotion effect. (Step 120IWS809). If it is the variation pattern PT6-2 or the variation pattern PT7-2, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the time-saving promotion (step 120IWS810). Then, the process moves to step 120IWS814.

On the other hand, if the variation pattern PT6-2 or the variation pattern PT7-2 is not the variation pattern PT6-2, the production control CPU 120 determines that the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern command read in step 120IWS801 is the variation pattern PT7- specifying the time-saving revival production. 3 (see FIG. 281-10(F)) (step 120IWS811). If the variation pattern is PT7-3, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the time-saving revival performance (step 120IWS812). Then, the process moves to step 120IWS814. If the variation pattern is not PT7-3, the performance control CPU 120 selects a normal process table according to the variation pattern (step 120IWS813). Then, the process moves to step 120IWS814.

Next, the production control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the process table selected in step 120IWS808, step 120IWS810, step 120IWS812, and step 120IWS813 (step 120IWS814).

The process table is a table in which process data referred to by the production control CPU 120 when controlling the production device is set. That is, the performance control CPU 120 controls performance devices (performance components) such as the image display device 5 according to process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation mode that constitutes the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative pattern. Specifically, data related to changing the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. Further, the process timer setting value has a variation time set in the manner of variation. The performance control CPU 120 refers to the process table and performs control to display the decorative pattern in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer setting value. Further, the process table is stored in the ROM in the effect control board 80. Further, process tables are prepared according to each variation pattern.

In addition, the process table used when executing performance control for a fluctuation pattern that involves a reach performance has a function that stops displaying the left symbol when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, and stops displaying the right symbol when a further predetermined time has elapsed. Process data indicating display is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, images for displaying the symbols are synthesized and generated according to the determined stopping symbols and the temporary stopping symbols in pseudo-runs and sliding effects. It's okay.

In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the performance devices (the image display device 5 as production components, the image display device 5 as production components, Control of various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R (as performance components) is executed (step 120IWS815). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. Further, in order to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this characteristic part 120IW, the performance control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative pattern is displayed variably according to the variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern command. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to .

Next, the production control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command in the variation time timer (step 120IWS816).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 sets the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display performance process (step S172) (step 120IWS817).

(Suggestion effect setting table at the time of rescue)
FIG. 281-30 is an explanatory diagram of the relief setting suggestion effect determination table used in step 120IWS805 of FIG. 281-29 when the fluctuation pattern is fluctuation pattern PT8-1 (see FIG. 281-10 (G)). be.

As shown in Figure 281-30, in the rescue setting suggestion effect determination table, when the setting value is set to "4", the selection rate of no rescue setting suggestion effect is 50%, and the selection of rescue setting suggestion effect A is selected. The determination values are allocated such that the ratio is 40%, the selection ratio of the rescue setting suggestion performance B is 5%, and the selection ratio of the rescue setting suggestion performance C is 5%.

In addition, when the setting value is set to "5", the selection rate of no setting suggestion effect at the time of rescue is 30%, the selection rate of the setting suggestion effect at the time of rescue A is 10%, and the selection rate of the setting suggestion effect B at the time of rescue is 50%. %, and the determination value is allocated so that the selection ratio of the setting suggestion effect C at the time of rescue is 10%.

In addition, when the setting value is set to "6", the selection rate of no setting suggestion effect at the time of rescue is 10%, the selection rate of setting suggestion effect A at the time of rescue is 15%, and the selection rate of setting suggestion effect B at the time of rescue is 15%. %, and the determination value is assigned so that the selection ratio of the rescue setting suggestion effect C is 60%.

Therefore, in this example, if the rescue setting suggestion effect A is executed, it is suggested that the setting value is likely to be set to "4", and if the rescue setting suggestion effect B is executed, the setting value is "4". It is suggested that there is a high possibility that the set value is set to "5", and if rescue setting suggestion effect C is executed, it is suggested that there is a high possibility that the set value is set to "6".

The rescue setting suggestion effect is a setting value suggestion effect that is executed on the image display device 5 when executing the rescue time shortening entry effect.

In addition, in this example, the setting suggestion effect at the time of rescue is configured to be executable when the setting value is set to "4" to "6", so the setting suggestion effect at the time of rescue is set to a relatively high setting. It is a setting that suggests that something is happening.

(Variable display processing)
FIGS. 281-31 and 281-32 are flowcharts showing the variable display performance process (step S172) in the performance control process process shown in FIG. 280. In the variable display performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 120IWS841), and also subtracts 1 from the value of the variable time timer (step 120IWS842). When the process timer times out (step 120IWS843), the process data is switched. That is, the next set process timer setting value in the process table is set in the process timer (step 120IWS844). Furthermore, the control state for the production device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data set next (step 120IWS845).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol determination A designation command is received (step 120IWS846). Specifically, in the command analysis process, it is checked whether the first confirmed A command reception flag or the second confirmed A command reception flag is set. If the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command is received, the production control CPU 120 controls the mode transition production (production that notifies the transition to the time-saving state (time-saving mode)) and the right-handed hit. A process table corresponding to the notification is selected (step 120IWS847). Next, the production control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 120IWS848). In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the performance devices (the image display device 5 as production components, the image display device 5 as production components, Control of various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R (as performance parts) is executed (step 120IWS849). In addition, the production control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 20 seconds to a fixed production period timer for measuring the symbol fixed period on the production control means side (step 120IWS850). Then, the process moves to step 120IWS867.

If neither the first symbol confirmation A specification command nor the second symbol confirmation A specification command has been received, the production control CPU 120 determines whether the first symbol confirmation B specification command or the second symbol confirmation B specification command has been received. (Step 120IWS851). Specifically, in the command analysis process, it is checked whether the first confirmed B command reception flag or the second confirmed B command reception flag is set. If the first symbol confirmation B designation command or the second symbol confirmation B designation command is received, the production control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the continuous production (production that notifies that the time saving state continues). (Step 120IWS852). Next, the production control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 120IWS853). In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the performance devices (the image display device 5 as production components, the image display device 5 as production components, Control of various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R (as performance components) is executed (step 120IWS854). In addition, the production control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 10 seconds to a fixed production period timer for measuring the pattern fixed period on the production control means side (step 120IWS855). Then, the process moves to step 120IWS867.

If neither the first symbol confirmation B designation command nor the second symbol confirmation B designation command has been received, the production control CPU 120 determines whether the first symbol confirmation C designation command or the second symbol confirmation C designation command has been received. (Step 120IWS861). Specifically, in the command analysis process, it is checked whether the first confirmed C-command reception flag or the second confirmed C-command reception flag is set. If the first symbol confirmed C designation command or the second symbol determined C designation command is received, the process moves to step 120IWS863.

If neither the first symbol confirmation C specification command nor the second symbol confirmation C specification command is received, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the variable time timer has timed out (step 120IWS862). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

When the first symbol confirmation C designation command or the second symbol confirmation C designation command is received (Y in step 120IWS861), or when the variable time timer has timed out (Y in step 120IWS862), the production control CPU 120 normally A process table corresponding to the symbol confirmation display is selected (step 120IWS863). Next, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 120IWS864). In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the performance devices (the image display device 5 as production components, the image display device 5 as production components, Control of various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R (as performance parts) is executed (step 120IWS865). In addition, the production control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 0.5 seconds to a fixed production period timer for measuring the symbol fixed period on the production control means side (step 120IWS866). Then, the process moves to step 120IWS867.

In addition, in this example, in addition to the case where the symbol confirmation designation command is received, also when the variable time timer times out (see step 120IWS862), the process moves to step 120IWS862 and subsequent steps to enter the symbol confirmation period. However, normally, unless the symbol confirmation designation command is missed, there is no case where a determination of Y is made in step 120IWS862 and the process proceeds to steps 120IWS862 and subsequent steps.

Then, the production control CPU 120 updates the value of the production control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure waiting process (step S173) (step 120IWS867).

(Special drawing waiting process)
FIGS. 281-33 and 281-34 are flowcharts showing the special symbol per waiting process (step S173) in the production control process shown in FIG. 280. In the special figure waiting process, the production control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the confirmed production period timer (step 120IWS871), and checks whether the value of the confirmed production period timer after the subtraction has timed out ( Step 120IWS872). If the value of the determined performance period timer after the subtraction has not timed out, the value of the process timer is subtracted by 1 (step 120IWS873), and the contents of process data n (display control execution data n, lamp control execution data n, sound number data Control of the presentation device (the image display device 5 as the presentation component, various lamps as the presentation component, and the speakers 8L and 8R as the presentation component) is executed according to (step 120IWS874).

Moreover, when the process timer times out (step 120IWS875), the production control CPU 120 switches the process data (step 120IWS876). Further, the production control CPU 120 sets the next set process timer setting value in the process table to the process timer, and starts the process timer (step 087IWS877).

Next, the production control CPU 120 checks whether or not the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is being displayed in a fixed manner (step 120IWS878). If the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is being displayed in a fixed manner, the process is immediately terminated. If the stop symbols of the decorative symbols are not being displayed in a fixed manner, the production control CPU 120 performs control to stop display the determined stop symbols (non-time saving losing symbols, time saving losing symbols, jackpot symbols, small winning symbols). Step 120IWS879).

When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step 120IWS879 (Y in step 120IWS880), the performance control CPU 120 sets a jackpot stop flag indicating that the jackpot symbol has been confirmed and displayed (step 120IWS881). Then, the process ends.

When the small winning symbols are stopped and displayed in the process of step 120IWS879 (Y in step 120IWS882), the performance control CPU 120 sets a small winning stop flag indicating that the small winning symbols have been confirmed and displayed (step 120IWS883A). Then, the performance control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start executing a V winning promotion performance that encourages winning of game balls to the V winning opening (step 120IWS883B), and ends the process.

If the value of the confirmed production period timer after the subtraction has timed out (that is, if the symbol confirmation period has passed), the production control CPU 120 checks whether the jackpot stop flag is set (step 120IWS884). If the jackpot stop flag is set, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether or not a jackpot start designation command has been received (step 120IWS885A). In addition, whether or not the jackpot start designation command has been received can be determined by, for example, checking whether the jackpot start designation command reception flag (see step 120 IWS622) is set. If the jackpot start designation command has not been received, the process ends immediately.

If the jackpot start designation command has been received, the production control CPU 120 resets the jackpot stop flag (step 120IWS885B). Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence or absence and type of the jackpot setting suggestion effect based on the setting value specified by the setting value command (the setting value stored in the setting value storage area (see step 120 IWS642)). (Step 120IWS886).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table for the performance during the jackpot depending on the presence or absence of the setting suggestion performance during the jackpot and its type (step 120IWS887). Then, the production control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 120IWS888), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number In accordance with data 1), control of the presentation device (image display device 5 as presentation component, various lamps as presentation component, and speaker 27 as presentation component) is executed (step 120IWS889).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot performance process (step 120IWS890).

If the jackpot stop flag is not set, the production control CPU 120 checks whether the small hit stop flag is set (step 120IWS891). If the small hit stop flag is set, the production control CPU 120 checks whether or not the small hit start designation command has been received (step 120IWS892). In addition, whether or not the small hit start designation command has been received can be determined by, for example, checking in the command analysis process whether or not a flag indicating that the small hit start designation command has been received is set. If the small winning start designation command has not been received, the process ends as is.

If the small hit start designation command has been received, the production control CPU 120 resets the small hit stop flag (step 120IWS893). Next, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the small hit performance (step 120IWS894). Then, the production control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 120IWS895), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number Control of the presentation device (the image display device 5 as the presentation component, various lamps as the presentation component, and the speaker 27 as the presentation component) is executed according to the data 1) (step 120IWS896).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit performance process (step 120IWS897).

If the small hit stop flag is not set (that is, if a non-time saving losing symbol or a time saving losing symbol is stopped and displayed), the production control CPU 120 changes the value of the production control process flag to the variable display start waiting process ( It is updated to a value corresponding to step S170) (step 120IWS898).

(Jackpot setting suggestion performance decision table)
FIG. 281-35 is an explanatory diagram of the jackpot setting suggestion effect determination table used in step 120IWS886.

As shown in Figure 281-35, in the jackpot setting suggestion effect determination table, when the setting value is set to "1", the selection ratio of no jackpot setting suggestion effect is 65%, and the selection of jackpot setting suggestion effect A is The ratio is 10%, the selection ratio of jackpot setting suggestion performance B is 5%, the selection ratio of jackpot setting suggestion performance C is 5%, the selection ratio of jackpot setting suggestion performance D is 5%, the selection ratio of jackpot setting suggestion performance E Judgment values are allocated such that the selection ratio of the jackpot setting suggestion effect F is 5%, and the selection ratio of the jackpot setting suggestion effect F is 5%.

In addition, when the setting value is set to "2", the selection rate of no setting suggestion effect at the time of jackpot is 65%, the selection rate of setting suggestion effect A at the time of jackpot is 5%, and the selection rate of setting suggestion effect B at the time of jackpot is 10. %, the selection ratio of jackpot setting suggestion performance C is 5%, the selection ratio of jackpot setting suggestion performance D is 5%, the selection ratio of jackpot setting suggestion performance E is 5%, the selection ratio of jackpot setting suggestion performance F Judgment values are assigned such that 5%.

In addition, when the setting value is set to "3", the selection rate of no setting suggestion effect at the time of jackpot is 65%, the selection rate of setting suggestion effect A at the time of jackpot is 5%, and the selection rate of setting suggestion effect B at the time of jackpot is 5%. %, the selection ratio of jackpot setting suggestion performance C is 10%, the selection ratio of jackpot setting suggestion performance D is 5%, the selection ratio of jackpot setting suggestion performance E is 5%, the selection ratio of jackpot setting suggestion performance F Judgment values are assigned such that 5%.

In addition, when the setting value is set to "4", the selection rate of no setting suggestion effect at the time of jackpot is 60%, the selection rate of setting suggestion effect A at the time of jackpot is 5%, and the selection rate of setting suggestion effect B at the time of jackpot is 5%. %, the selection ratio of jackpot setting suggestion performance C is 5%, the selection ratio of jackpot setting suggestion performance D is 15%, the selection ratio of jackpot setting suggestion performance E is 5%, the selection ratio of jackpot setting suggestion performance F Judgment values are assigned such that 5%.

In addition, if the setting value is set to "5", the selection rate of no setting suggestion effect at the time of jackpot is 60%, the selection rate of setting suggestion effect A at the time of jackpot is 5%, and the selection rate of setting suggestion effect B at the time of jackpot is 5. %, the selection ratio of jackpot setting suggestion performance C is 5%, the selection ratio of jackpot setting suggestion performance D is 5%, the selection ratio of jackpot setting suggestion performance E is 15%, the selection ratio of jackpot setting suggestion performance F Judgment values are assigned such that 5%.

In addition, when the setting value is set to "6", the selection rate of no setting suggestion effect at the time of jackpot is 60%, the selection rate of setting suggestion effect A at the time of jackpot is 5%, and the selection rate of setting suggestion effect B at the time of jackpot is 5%. %, the selection ratio of jackpot setting suggestion performance C is 5%, the selection ratio of jackpot setting suggestion performance D is 5%, the selection ratio of jackpot setting suggestion performance E is 5%, the selection ratio of jackpot setting suggestion performance F Judgment values are assigned such that 15%.

Therefore, in this example, if jackpot setting suggestion effect A is executed, it is suggested that the setting value is relatively likely to be set to "1", and if jackpot setting suggestion effect B is executed, the setting value is set to "1". It is suggested that there is a relatively high possibility that the value is set to "2", and if jackpot setting suggestion effect C is executed, it is suggested that there is a relatively high possibility that the value is set to "3". If the jackpot setting suggestion effect D is executed, it is suggested that there is a relatively high possibility that the set value is set to "4", and if the jackpot setting suggestion effect E is executed, the setting value is "5". It is suggested that there is a relatively high possibility that the set value is set to "6", and if the jackpot setting suggestion performance F is executed, it is suggested that the possibility that the set value is set to "6" is relatively high.

The jackpot setting suggestion performance is a setting value suggestion performance executed when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the image display device 5.

(Example of production)
Next, a specific example of the presentation mode of the relief time-saving entry effect and the relief setting suggestion effect when transitioning to the time-saving state C, which is the relief time-saving state, will be described. FIGS. 281-36 to 281-37 are explanatory diagrams for explaining specific examples of presentation modes up to the transition to the time saving state. In addition, in FIGS. 281-36 to 281-37, the effect screen changes in the order of (A), (B), (C), . . . (G).

As shown in FIG. 281-36(A), it is assumed that the variable display of the decorative pattern 120IW100 is started one change before the variable display shifts to the relief time saving mode.

As shown in FIG. 281-36(B), when the variable display of the decorative pattern 120IW100 is started, the relief time-saving rush effect is started. In the relief time-shortening rush performance, first, a rush suggestion display 120IW105 suggesting a rush to rescue time-shortening, such as "Very hot!", is displayed during the variable display of the decorative pattern 120IW100, and the relief time-shortening rush performance is started. Note that from now on, in the rescue time saving rush performance, the decorative pattern 120IW100 is not displayed, and only the small pattern 120IW101 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 281-36(C), an operation suggestion image 120IW106 that suggests operating (pressing) the push button 31B (see FIG. 281-1) is displayed. For example, in the operation suggestion image 120IW106, the words "Press" are displayed together with an image urging the user to press the push button 31B.

Then, as shown in FIG. 281-36(D), when the push button 31B is operated when the operation suggestion image 120IW106 is displayed, or when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation suggestion image 120IW106 was displayed, "V A character display 120IW107 "STOCK x 1" is displayed to notify that the relief time reduction will start. Further, a right-handed hitting instruction display 120IW108 for instructing right-handed hitting is displayed next to the small symbol 120IW101. Furthermore, if it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect at the time of rescue, the setting suggestion effect at the time of rescue is executed, and a setting value suggestion display 120IW200 suggesting a setting value is displayed at the lower right of the screen. This suggests that the setting value is one of settings "4" to "6".

For example, when executing setting suggestion effect A at the time of rescue, the setting value suggestion display 120IW200 is displayed in blue display color, and when executing setting suggestion effect B at the time of rescue, the setting value suggestion is displayed in green display color. Display 120IW200, and when executing setting suggestion effect C at the time of rescue, display the setting value suggestion display 120IW200 in red display color, and change the display color of the setting value suggestion display according to the type of setting suggestion effect at the time of rescue. It may be configured to be different.

In addition, the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, when executing setting suggestion effect A at the time of rescue, a triangular setting value suggestion display 120IW200 is displayed, and when executing setting suggestion effect B at the time of rescue, a diamond-shaped setting value suggestion display 120IW200 is displayed. The setting value suggestion display 120IW200 is displayed, and when executing setting suggestion presentation C at the time of rescue, a star-shaped setting value suggestion display 120IW200 is displayed, and the setting value suggestion display 120IW200 is displayed depending on the type of setting suggestion presentation at the time of rescue. The display shape may be configured to be different.

In addition, in this example, even if a jackpot is achieved, it is possible to perform an effect of displaying the characters "V STOCK x 1" in the same manner as in FIG. 281-36(D). In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) performs a pre-reading judgment process on whether or not there will be a jackpot and the type of variation pattern in the starting winning judgment process (step S101), and Sends a prefetch judgment result specification command that allows the result to be specified. Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes a performance similar to that shown in FIG. 281-36 (D) (so-called suspended continuous performance) based on the received prefetch determination result designation command. For example, if it is determined that there is one jackpot in the pending memory based on the received look-ahead judgment result designation command, the pending consecutive performance is displayed by displaying the text "V STOCK x 1". Execute. Also, for example, if it is determined that there are two jackpots in the pending memory based on the received look-ahead judgment result designation command, the text display of "V STOCK x 2" will be displayed. Execute a continuous performance.

On the other hand, in the case of shortening the rescue time, there is a high percentage that a fluctuation display with an extremely short fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is executed during the time shortening state via the rescue time shortening (see Figure 281-10 (B)). ), the fluctuating display is digested extremely quickly, and it is easy to hit the jackpot relatively quickly. Therefore, in the variable display where the relief time is shortened (in this example, the symbol confirmation period), the character display "V STOCK x 1" shown in Figure 281-36 (D) is displayed without particularly checking the look-ahead judgment result. The effect to be displayed is executed. Therefore, the effect of displaying the characters "V STOCK x 1" shown in Figure 281-36 (D) is similar to the pseudo-hold continuous effect, and also shortens the rescue time. The performance is intended to inform the public.

In addition, if the fluctuation that has reached the relief time reduction is a jackpot fluctuation, for example, secure 30 seconds as the fluctuation time and execute the same effect as shown in Figure 281-36 to temporarily shorten the relief time. After the game is executed, an effect to notify the jackpot may be executed.

Although the case where the display of the right-hand hitting instruction display 120IW108 starts from the display timing of the character display 120IW107 "V STOCK x 1" has been shown, the display start timing of the right-hand hitting instruction display 120IW108 is limited to that shown in this example. do not have. For example, the display of the right hit instruction display 120IW108 may be started from the timing of the final display of the previous stopped symbol, and various modes are possible.

In addition, this example shows a case where the setting suggestion effect is executed when the relief time is shortened and a pseudo-held continuous effect is executed, but the setting suggestion effect is not limited to such an aspect. The configuration may be such that the setting suggestion performance is executed even when executing the above, or the configuration may be configured such that the setting suggestion performance is not executed when a jackpot is achieved and the holding continuous performance is executed. In addition, when executing a setting suggestion effect when a jackpot is achieved and a pending continuous effect is executed, the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect may be different from that when the rescue time is shortened, and the execution mode of the setting suggestion effect may be different. may be different.

Then, as shown in FIG. 281-37(E), a mode selection screen 120IW109 for selecting a rescue time saving effect mode is displayed. For example, a screen for selecting one of modes A to D is displayed. The mode selection is performed by moving the cursor by operating the stick controller 31A, and is confirmed by operating the push button 31B. Note that if a predetermined period of time has elapsed without selecting a production mode, the production mode that the cursor matches is automatically determined. Further, even when the mode selection screen 120IW109 is displayed, the right-hand hitting instruction display 120IW108 remains displayed next to the small pattern 120IW101. In addition, the setting suggestion effect at the time of relief is also continuously executed, and the setting value suggestion display 120IW200 is displayed on this screen as well.

Then, as shown in FIG. 281-37(F), when the selection of the production mode is completed, a start notification screen 120IW110 is displayed to notify that the relief time reduction will start. For example, the words "Relief time reduction entry" are displayed. At this time, the small pattern 120IW101 stops.

Then, as shown in FIG. 281-37 (G), when the next fluctuation is started, a transition is made to the time saving state C, and the relief time saving is started. At this time, the background image is changed to a background image (red) for special effect mode.

In addition, in this example, the rescue time shortening effect is executed one change before entering the rescue time shortening, but before that change, the number of rotations remaining until the rescue time shortening, an explanation of the rescue time shortening effect, and a countdown are performed. It may also be displayed.

In addition, this example shows a case where a pattern confirmation period is secured for 20 seconds in a variable display that shortens the relief time and the mode transition effect and right hit notification are executed, but the pattern confirmation period is the usual 0.5 seconds. It may be configured to directly shift to the time saving state via the relief time saving mode without performing any mode transition effect or the like.

In addition, this example shows a case where the rescue time reduction counter is initially set to "900" when executing the RAM clearing process, when a jackpot is hit, or when the time reduction is missed. If the configuration is configured to execute a story (such as a story with high-speed fluctuation, etc.), the selection buffer and story counter of that story may also be cleared. Further, it may be configured such that a story can be set when the relief time reduction is activated, or a different story can be set depending on the game state.

(Modification 1)
The characteristic part 120IW above shows a case where the time saving state is continued until one small hit uniformly occurs in time saving state A via jackpot, time saving state B via time saving loss, and time saving state C via relief time saving. However, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, depending on whether it is time saving state A via jackpot, time saving state B via time saving, or time saving state C via relief time saving, the time saving state may be continued until a different number of small hits occur. may be configured. Below, a modification example in which the time saving state continues until a different number of small hits occur depending on whether it is time saving state A via jackpot, time saving state B via time saving loss, or time saving state C via relief time saving. 1 will be explained.

FIG. 281-38 is a flowchart showing special symbol stop processing in Modification 1. In addition, in modification 1, the processing of steps 120IWS131 to S148 of the special symbol stop processing is the same as those shown in FIG. 281-19 and FIG. 281-20. In modification example 1, if the relief time saving determination flag is set (Y in step 120IWS148), the CPU 103 sets "900" to the special 2 time saving number counter, "900" to the total time saving number counter, and sets "900" to the relief time saving number counter. "900" is set to "900" and "2" is set to the small hit counter (step 120IWS149X). Note that the processes after step 120IWS150 are similar to those shown in FIG. 281-20.

By executing the above processing, in modification example 1, in the case of time saving state A via jackpot and time saving state B via time saving loss, the time saving state continues until a small hit occurs once. In the case of time saving state C via relief time saving, the time saving state continues until a small hit occurs twice.

In addition, the mode shown in this example is not limited, but for example, even between time saving state A via jackpot and time saving state B via time saving, the time saving state may be continued until a different number of small hits occur. It may be configured as follows. In addition, in this example, in the case of time saving state C via relief time saving, the time saving state is configured to continue until the small hit occurs twice, but the time saving state continues until the small hit occurs another number of times, such as 3 times. may be configured so that it continues.

(Modification 2)
In the feature section 120IW described above, a case has been shown in which the subtraction process of the small hit number counter (see steps 120IWS71 to S75) is executed at the start of fluctuation of the small win fluctuation, but the process is not limited to such a mode. For example, the subtraction process of the small winning number counter may be executed at the end of the small winning game after the small winning change. Hereinafter, a second modification example will be described in which the subtraction process of the small winning number counter is executed at the end of the small winning game after the small winning change.

FIG. 281-39 is a flowchart showing the small winning closing post-processing in Modification 2. In modification 2, the processes in steps 120IWS451 to S463 are similar to those shown in FIG. 281-24. Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the small hit number counter is 0 (step 120IWS463A). If the value of the small hit counter is 0, the process moves to step 120IWS464.

If the value of the small hit number counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the small hit number counter (step 120IWS463B).

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the small hit count counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 120IWS463C). If the value of the small hit count counter is not 0, the process moves to step 120IWS464.

If the value of the small winning number counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 resets the set time saving flags (time saving flags A to C) and ends the time saving state (step 120IWS463D). Then, the process moves to step 120IWS464.

Note that the process in step 120IWS464 is similar to the process shown in FIG. 281-24.

(Modification 3)
In addition, in the feature section 120IW described above, a case is shown in which the time saving state is uniformly controlled at the end of the symbol confirmation period when the relief time is shortened, but this is not limited to such a mode. In the case of winning fluctuations, it may be configured to control the time saving state at the end of the small winning game. Hereinafter, a third modification example will be described in which when the relief time saving variation display is a small winning variation, the time saving state is controlled at the end of the small winning game.

FIG. 281-40 is a flowchart showing the small winning closing post-processing in Modification 3. In addition, in modification 3, in the special symbol stop processing, even if the relief time saving determination flag is set in step 120IWS148, if the small hit flag is set, the processing in steps 120IWS149 to S151 is not executed. .

In modification 3, the processes in steps 120IWS451 to S462 are similar to those shown in FIG. 281-24. Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the relief time saving determination flag is set (step 120IWS462A). If the relief time saving determination flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the set relief time saving determination flag (step 120IWS462B). In addition, the CPU 103 sets the special 2 time saving number counter to "900", the total time saving number counter to "900", the rescue time saving number counter to "900", and the small winning number counter to "1" (step 120IWS462C). Further, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag C and controls the time saving state (step 120IWS462D). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a time saving state C designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 120IWS462E). Then, the process moves to step 120IWS464.

Note that the process in step 120IWS464 is similar to the process shown in FIG. 281-24.

(Modification 4)
In addition, in the feature section 120IW, when the fluctuation display in which the relief time reduction occurs is a small hit fluctuation, when a V winning occurs during the small winning game and the transferred jackpot game is ended, Although the case where control is performed to the time saving state with the lower advantage (the time saving state in which the number of time reductions is performed once) has been shown, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, it may be configured to control to a less advantageous time saving state (for example, a time saving state with 7 time saving times). Below, if the fluctuation display that caused the relief time reduction is a small hit fluctuation, and when a V winning occurs during that small winning game and ends the transferred jackpot game, the time reduction that has a higher advantage will be used. Modification 4 in which control is performed to the state (time saving state with 7 time saving times) will be described.

FIG. 281-41 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process in Modification 4. In modification 4, in the jackpot end process, the processes in steps 120IWS531 to S539 are the same as those shown in FIG. 281-25. Next, the CPU 103 sets the special 2 time saving number counter to "7", sets the total time saving number counter to "99", and sets the small winning number counter to "1" (step 120IWS540X). Note that the processing in steps 120IWS541 to S541 is similar to those shown in FIG. 281-25.

In modification example 4, by executing the above processing, when the fluctuation display that caused the relief time reduction is a small hit fluctuation, the jackpot game that was transferred due to the V winning occurring during the small winning game is displayed. When the process ends, the time saving state is controlled to a time saving state where the number of time saving times is 7 (see step 120 IWS540). Therefore, considering the case where the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, if the variable display in which the relief time reduction occurs is a small hit variation, the jackpot that is transferred due to the V winning occurring during the small winning game. When ending the game, the time saving state with the higher advantage is controlled (in this example, the time saving state is 7 times, which is more than 1 time saving time). On the other hand, when considering the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, if the variable display that caused the relief time reduction is a small hit variation, a V winning occurs during the small win game and is transferred. When ending the jackpot game, the time saving state with the lower advantage is controlled (in this example, the time saving state where the number of time saving times is 7 times less than 99 times).

(Modification 5)
In addition, in the feature section 120IW, after the relief time is shortened, if 900 fluctuating displays are completed without a jackpot or small hit occurring during the time saving state C via the relief time shortening, the relief time is shortened again. Although a case has been shown in which the relief time saving loops, the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and the configuration may be such that the time saving state C via the relief time saving ends once. Hereinafter, a fifth modification will be described in which the time saving state C via the relief time saving is temporarily terminated.

FIG. 281-42 is a flowchart showing special symbol normal processing in modification 5. In modification 5, in the special symbol normal process, the processes of steps 120IWS51 to S85 are the same as those shown in FIGS. 281-15 and 281-16. In modification 5, if the value of the relief time saving number counter after the subtraction is 0 (Y in step 120IWS85), the CPU 103 checks whether the time saving flag C is set (step 120IWS85A). If the time saving flag C is set (that is, if the fluctuation display is completed 900 times without a jackpot or small hit during the time saving state C via the rescue time saving), the CPU 103 sets the rescue time saving number counter. is set to "900" (step 120IWS85B). Note that the processes after step 120IWS86 are similar to those shown in FIG. 281-16.

FIG. 281-43 is a flowchart showing special symbol stop processing in modification 5. In modification 5, in the special symbol stop process, the processes of steps 120IWS to S148 are similar to those shown in FIGS. 281-19 and 281-20. In modification 5, when the relief time saving determination flag is set (Y in step 120IWS148), the CPU 103 sets "900" to the special 2 time saving number counter, "900" to the total time saving number counter, and sets the small winning number. Each of the number counters is set to "1" (step 120IWS149Z). That is, in the fifth modification, the relief time reduction count is not counted at the end of the variable display in which the relief time reduction has occurred. Note that the processes after step 120IWS150 are similar to those shown in FIGS. 281-20 and 281-21.

By executing the above processing, in modification example 5, the relief time reduction counter is not set at the end of the variable display in which relief time reduction has occurred, and after that, a jackpot or small hit occurs during the time reduction state C via relief time reduction. When the 900-time variation display is completed without becoming , the relief time reduction number counter is set. Therefore, in modification example 5, even after 900 fluctuating displays are completed without a jackpot or small hit occurring during the time saving state C via the rescue time saving, the time saving state C ends once. However, the relief time reduction does not loop.

(Modification 6)
In the above modification 5, when the relief time is shortened, the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes 0, so during the time saving state C via the relief time reduction, in the special symbol normal processing, it is determined as Y in step 120IWS83, The process of subtracting the relief time reduction counter in step 120IWS84 is not executed. Note that the subtraction process of the rescue time reduction counter may be configured to be performed even during the time reduction state C via the rescue time reduction. Hereinafter, a modification 6 will be described in which the subtraction process of the relief time saving counter can be executed even during the time saving state C via the relief time saving.

FIG. 281-44 is a flowchart showing special symbol normal processing in modification 6. In modification 6, in the special symbol normal process, the processes of steps 120IWS51 to S82 are the same as those shown in FIGS. 281-15 and 281-16. In the sixth modification, there is no process of determining the value of the relief time saving counter in step 120IWS83, and the CPU 103 directly subtracts 1 from the value of the relief time saving counter (step 120IWS84).

Next, the CPU 130 checks whether the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is a value smaller than 0 (ie, a negative value) (step 120IWS84A). If the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is smaller than 0, the CPU 103 sets the relief time reduction number counter to "0" (step 120IWS84B). Then, the process moves to step 120IWS87.

If the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is not a value smaller than 0, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 120IWS84C). If the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is not 0, the process moves to step 120IWS87.

If the value of the relief time saving number counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 checks whether the time saving flag C is set (step 120IWS84D). If the time saving flag C is set (that is, if the fluctuation display is completed 900 times without a jackpot or small hit during the time saving state C via the rescue time saving), the CPU 103 sets the rescue time saving number counter. is set to "900" (step 120IWS84E). Note that the processes after step 120IWS86 are similar to those shown in FIG. 281-16.

By executing the above processing, in Modification Example 6, similarly to Modification Example 5, the relief time reduction counter is not set at the end of the variation display in which relief time reduction has occurred, and thereafter, the time reduction via relief time reduction is performed. When the fluctuating display is completed 900 times without a big hit or a small hit during state C, the relief time reduction counter is set. Therefore, in modification 6, even after the rescue time is shortened, even if 900 fluctuation displays are completed without any jackpot or small hit during the time saving state C via the rescue time saving, the time saving state C is temporarily terminated. However, the relief time reduction does not loop.

(Modification 7)
In the above-mentioned modification 5 and modification 6, it may be configured such that a pre-read preview effect can be executed. Further, it may be configured to limit the look-ahead preview performance in a predetermined period and a specific period before and after ending the time-saving state C via the relief time-saving mode. Hereinafter, a seventh modification example will be described in which the pre-read notice performance is restricted in a predetermined period and a specific period before and after ending the time-saving state C via the relief time-saving mode.

In modification example 7, in the start winning determination process (step 120IWS101) of the special symbol process process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) determines whether or not it will be a jackpot or a small win. , A pre-read judgment is made as to whether or not there will be a time saving error, jackpot type, small hit type, time saving type, variation pattern type, etc. Then, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a prefetching determination result specifying command that can specify the prefetching determination result to the production control CPU 120. In the prefetch notice setting process (step S161) of the production control process, the performance control CPU 120 determines the presence or absence and type of a prefetch preview performance based on the received prefetch determination result designation command, and determines whether or not the variable display of the preview target is to be performed. Control is performed to execute a pre-read preview performance over one or more variable displays before execution.

FIG. 281-45 is a timing chart showing the timing of the pre-read preview performance restriction period in Modification 7. As shown in Figure 281-45, after the relief time reduction counter is set, if the fluctuating display is completed 900 times without a big hit, small hit, or time reduction, a relief time reduction occurs and the time reduction state C is controlled. Ru. Next, when the fluctuation display is completed 900 times without becoming a jackpot or small hit during the time saving state C via the rescue time reduction (that is, the 1800th fluctuation display is counted after the rescue time reduction counter is set). ), the time saving state C is ended.

Further, the performance control CPU 120 limits the execution of the pre-read preview performance during a predetermined period and a specific period before and after the time saving state C ends. In this example, since the upper limit of the total number of pending memories is 8, the predetermined period from the fluctuation display 8 fluctuations before the end of time saving state C until relief time reduction is reached, and the period from when relief time reduction is reached to time saving state C Execution of the pre-read preview effect is restricted for a specific period until the variable display after 8 changes after the end. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 281-45, when counting after the relief time reduction counter is set, execution of the pre-read preview effect is determined from the 1792nd variable display to the 1808th variable display.

In addition, the "restriction of advance notice performances" may be controlled so that the advance notice performance is not performed at all, the probability of execution of the advance notice performance is reduced, or some of the multiple types of advance notice performances may be controlled. It may also be possible to make it possible to execute only different types of pre-read preview effects.

(Modification 8)
Further, in the above-described feature section 120IW and each modification example, control to a plurality of time-saving states may be configured to be able to be executed in parallel at the same time. FIG. 281-46 is a timing chart showing the timing of control of various time saving states in Modification 8. In the example shown in FIG. 281-46, when the jackpot game state is ended (timing T1), a case is shown in which a transition is made to the time saving state A where the number of time saving times is 99.

Next, at timing T2 while the time saving state A continues, it is assumed that a new time saving occurrence condition (in this example, the occurrence of a time saving lapse) is established. In this case, in Modification 8, as shown in FIG. 281-46, in parallel with the control of time saving state A, control of time saving state B (in this example, the number of time saving times is 30) based on the time saving change is started. be done. Then, when the 30 times of variable display is completed (timing T3), the control to the time saving state B is ended. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 281-46, since the 99th variable display has not yet been completed at the stage of timing T3, the control in the time saving state A is continued. Note that during the period from timing T2 to T3, in terms of internal processing, control processing for time saving state A and control processing for time saving state B are executed in parallel, but visually the time saving state remains unchanged. It appears to be continuing.

Next, at timing T4 while the time saving state A continues, it is assumed that a new time saving occurrence condition (in this example, the occurrence of a time saving lapse) is satisfied. In this case, in Modification 8, as shown in FIG. 281-46, in parallel with the control of time saving state A, control of time saving state B (in this example, the number of time saving times is 30) based on the time saving change is started. be done. Then, at timing T5 before the end of the 30th variable display, the 99th variable display after being controlled to the time saving state A is ended, and the control to the time saving state A is ended. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 281-46, since the 30th variable display has not yet been completed at timing T5, the time saving state B control is continued. Then, when the 30 times of variable display is finished (timing T6), the control to the time saving state B is finished. Therefore, in terms of internal processing, the time saving state A is ended at timing T5 after the jackpot game is finished, but the control of the time saving state B is also executed in parallel. It appears that time has been controlled to be shorter than usual.

(Modification 9)
In addition, in the above-mentioned characteristic unit 120IW, in the variation pattern setting process, by determining Y in step 120IWS1702 and executing steps 120IWS1703 and S1710, even if the time saving will be incorrect, if the relief time will be shortened, Although a case has been shown in which the configuration is such that a common variation pattern can be determined, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, it may be configured such that a different variation pattern can be determined even when the time saving is delayed and the relief time is shortened.

(Modification 10)
In addition, in the feature section 120IW described above, a case is shown in which the setting suggestion effect can be executed even after the variable display that shortens the rescue time by switching to the background image according to the special effect mode, but such a mode is not applicable. Not limited to. For example, based on the look-ahead determination result, a setting suggestion performance can be executed by executing an inciting performance such as "Special performance mode??" in the variable display before the variable display in which the relief time reduction is established. Good too.

As explained above, the present characteristic part 120IW and each modification include the following (means A1) to (means A10), (means B1) to (means B6), and (means C1) to (means C5). , and (means D1) to (means D5) are shown.

(Means A1) Variable display of identification information including first identification information (for example, first special symbol) and second identification information (for example, second special symbol) is performed, and a specific display result (for example, jackpot symbol) is displayed. A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the derived display, and a special state (for example, a time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state. A special state control means (for example, a part of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 120IWS150, S160, and S537) that can be controlled to perform numerical information (for example, a relief time reduction counter) based on the variable display being executed. ), and the special state control means is configured to update the numerical information updated by the updating means a special number of times (for example, 900 times). ) can be controlled to a special state when a special condition is established (for example, relief time reduction is established) by becoming a specific value (for example, "0") corresponding to (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 Step 120IWS150), the updating means updates the numerical information (for example, the first special symbol Regardless of whether the variable display of the second special symbol is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol, the value of the relief time reduction counter is uniformly updated), which is different from the specific display result. Special state control means (for example, game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling to a special state (for example, a small win game state) different from an advantageous state when a special display result (for example, a small winning symbol) is derived and displayed. A special counting means (for example, a part that executes step 120IWS73 in the game control microcomputer 100) that counts the number of times the special state has occurred in the special state (a part that executes steps 120IWS114 to S116 in the game control microcomputer 100), and The special state terminating means further includes special state terminating means (e.g., a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step 120IWS143), and the special state terminating means is configured such that the number of special states counted by the special counting means is a specific number of times (e.g., (For example, when the game control microcomputer 100 returns Y in step 120IWS74, it sets the time saving end flag in step 120IWS75, and in step 120IWS141, the special state is terminated. When a special display result is derived and displayed in a variable display where the special condition is satisfied, the special state control means performs a special state control based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed. It is possible to control to a special state during the state (for example, even if the game control microcomputer 100 has a small hit fluctuation, if the relief time shortening determination flag is set in 120IWS148 at the timing of the end of the symbol confirmation period, Step 120IWS150 is executed, and the subsequent small winning game state is controlled to time saving state C), and the special counting means counts the special state based on the special display result being derived and displayed in the variable display where the special condition is satisfied. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS73 at the start of the fluctuation to subtract 1 from the small hit number counter, and when the relief time is shortened, executes step 120IWS149 at the end of the fluctuation to set the small hit number counter. Therefore, after the small hit number counter is set in step 120IWS149 in the small hit fluctuation in which the relief time reduction is established, the small hit number counter is not immediately subtracted in the fluctuation display). According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform suitable control in a situation where both a special state and a special state occur. For example, it is possible to avoid a situation where a special display result is displayed and the special state is immediately terminated even though the special condition is established and the special state is controlled, thereby preventing the player from being at a disadvantage.

In addition, in this example, regarding "Can be controlled to special state during special state", if the fluctuation display that shortens the relief time is a small hit fluctuation, the time saving state C is entered at the end of the symbol confirmation period, and after that, Although the case is shown in which the time saving state C is controlled even during the small winning game, the timing of shifting to the time saving state C is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, it may be configured to shift to the time saving state C from the start of the fluctuation of the small winning fluctuation that shortens the relief time, or it may be configured to shift to the time saving state C from the middle of the small winning game. It is sufficient if there is a period in which the time saving state C is controlled in some form during the small winning game. In addition, in the case of configuring to shift to the time saving state C from the start of fluctuation of the small hit fluctuation, it is sufficient to configure so that the subtraction process of the small win number counter is also executed at the time of the start of the fluctuation of the small win fluctuation.

Furthermore, although this example shows a case in which the "specific number of times" is one, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the time saving state may be configured to end based on the occurrence of a small hit a plurality of times, such as two or three times, during the time saving state, or a plurality of times may be set as the specific number of times.

(Means A2) In means A1, the special state terminating means is configured to terminate the special state when the number of special states counted by the special counting means reaches a specific number (for example, 1 time), and when the special state reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 1 time) in the special state. When the variable display (7 times, 99 times, 900 times) is executed, the special state is ended (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the time saving end flag in step 120IWS75 when the result is Y in step 120IWS74). However, the time saving end flag may be set in step 120IWS82 when step 120IWS78 is Y and step 120IWS81 is Y, and step 120IWS141 is determined to be Y and step 120IWS143 is executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform suitable control in a situation where both a special state and a special state occur. For example, it is possible to avoid a situation where a special display result is displayed and the special state is immediately terminated even though the special condition is established and the special state is controlled, thereby preventing the player from being at a disadvantage.

(Means A3) In the means A1 or A2, the special state control means is capable of controlling to the special state based on the advantageous state after being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a game control microcontroller). (The computer 100 executes step 120IWS537), the special state ending means is controlled to be in a special state based on the establishment of a special condition, and when it is controlled to be in a special state based on being controlled to an advantageous state. When the number of special states counted by the special counting means reaches the same number of times (for example, 1 time), the special state is ended (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the small hit in step 120IWS149). The number counter may be set to "1"). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the special condition controlled from becoming too advantageous. For example, it is possible to prevent the game from being controlled to a special advantageous state.

(Means A4) In any of the means A1 to A3, the special state control means is capable of controlling to the special state based on the control to the advantageous state after being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, The game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS537), and the special state ending means is configured to terminate the special state when the special state is controlled based on the establishment of the special condition, and when the special state is controlled based on the establishment of the special condition. The special state is terminated when the number of special states counted by the special counting means becomes a different number of times (for example, 2 times) than when the special state is controlled by the game control micro The computer 100 may be configured to set the small hit number counter to "2" in step 120IWS149X. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the special condition controlled from becoming too advantageous when the special condition is satisfied. For example, it is possible to prevent the game from being controlled to a special advantageous state.

Note that it may be difficult for the player to immediately notice the time saving state via relief time saving, but in Modification Example 1, in the normal time saving state, the time saving state ends after one small hit, whereas the time saving state via rescue time saving Since it is configured so that the time saving state ends after two small hits only when the time saving state is controlled by Even if you miss charging the reserved memory), you can be given another chance to win in the second starting prize opening.

In addition, in Modification 1, in the normal time saving state, the number of time saving times is often small, such as 1 or 7 times, and there are relatively few cases where the time saving state ends due to the occurrence of a small hit. In the time saving state, the number of time saving times is as high as 900, and there are many cases where the time saving state ends when a small win occurs. Therefore, by ensuring that the time saving state ends when a small win occurs, it is possible to prevent the player from making a strategy attack. can.

(Means A5) In any one of means A1 to means A4, the special state control means counts the special state based on the derivation and display of the special display result in the variable display where the special condition is satisfied (for example, deformed In example 2, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS463B at the end of the small winning game, so in the small winning fluctuation where the relief time reduction is established, after the small winning number counter is set in step 120IWS149, the fluctuation is displayed. (the small hit number counter is immediately decremented). According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform suitable control in a situation where both a special state and a special state occur. For example, if a special condition is established and a winning element remains in the special state by controlling the special state, it becomes a winning element for the player, and it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game center will be at a disadvantage.

(Means A6) In any of means A1 to means A5, when a special display result is derived and displayed in a variable display where a special condition is satisfied, the special state control means controls whether the special display result is derived and displayed. (For example, in modification 3, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS462D at the end of the small winning game, so the small winning variation that shortens the rescue time is possible. (The time saving state C is controlled at the end of the small winning game). According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform suitable control in a situation where both a special state and a special state occur. For example, when a special condition is satisfied and the special state is controlled, it is possible to wait until the start of control of the special state, thereby making it easier to perform various controls.

(Means A7) In any of the means A1 to A6, the special state control means is capable of controlling to a first special state (for example, a time saving state with one time saving number) after being controlled to an advantageous state in the normal state. (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS537 and S544), and after being controlled to be advantageous in the special state, a second special state that is more advantageous than the first special state (for example, time-saving (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS537 and S542), and the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display where the special condition is satisfied, and the special When the special state based on the derived display of the display result is controlled to an advantageous state based on the passing of the game medium through a specific area, it is possible to control to the first special state after the advantageous state ( For example, the game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to execute steps 120IWS537 and S540. According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize special state control that is not too advantageous for the player (that is, not too disadvantageous for the gaming parlor).

(Means A8) In any of the means A1 to A6, the special state control means is capable of controlling the normal state to an advantageous state and then to the first special state (for example, a time-saving state with one time-saving number). (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS537 and S544), and after being controlled to be advantageous in the special state, a second special state that is more advantageous than the first special state (for example, time-saving (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS537 and S542), and the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display where the special condition is satisfied, and the special In a special state based on the display result being derived and displayed, when the game medium passes through a specific area and is controlled to an advantageous state, it is possible to control to a second special state after the advantageous state ( For example, in modification 4, the game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to execute steps 120IWS537 and S540X. According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize special state control that is not too advantageous for the player (that is, not too disadvantageous for the gaming parlor).

(Means A9) In any of the means A1 to A6, the special state control means is capable of controlling the normal state to an advantageous state and then to the first special state (for example, a time saving state of 99 time saving times). (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS537 and S545), and after the special state is controlled to an advantageous state, a second special state with a lower advantage than the first special state (for example, time saving (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS537 and S542), and the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display where the special condition is satisfied, and the special When the special state based on the derived display of the display result is controlled to an advantageous state based on the passing of the game medium through a specific area, it is possible to control to the first special state after the advantageous state ( For example, when executing steps 120IWS537 and S542, if the game control microcomputer 100 has won a V prize due to a small winning fluctuation based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the game control microcomputer 100 is in a time saving state with a time saving number of 99 times. control). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize special state control that is not too advantageous for the player (that is, not too disadvantageous for the gaming parlor).

(Means A10) In any of the means A1 to A6, the special state control means is capable of controlling the normal state to an advantageous state and then to the first special state (for example, a time saving state of 99 time saving times). (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS537 and S545), and after the special state is controlled to an advantageous state, a second special state with a lower advantage than the first special state (for example, time saving (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS537 and S542), and the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display where the special condition is satisfied, and the special In a special state based on the display result being derived and displayed, when the game medium passes through a specific area and is controlled to an advantageous state, it is possible to control to a second special state after the advantageous state ( For example, in modification 4, the game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to execute steps 120IWS537 and S540X. According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize special state control that is not too advantageous for the player (that is, not too disadvantageous for the gaming parlor).

(Means B1) Variable display of identification information including first identification information (for example, first special symbol) and second identification information (for example, second special symbol) is performed, and a specific display result (for example, jackpot symbol) is displayed. A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the derived display, and a special state (for example, a time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state. A special state control means (for example, a part of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 120IWS150, S160, and S537) that can be controlled to perform numerical information (for example, a relief time reduction counter) based on the variable display being executed. ) (for example, the part that executes step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100), and a performance execution means that can execute the performance in response to the variable display (for example, step 170 in the performance control CPU 120). ~ S173), and the special state control means is configured to control when the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value (for example, "0") corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 900 times). When a special condition is established (for example, relief time reduction is established), control is possible to enter the special state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS150), and the updating means is configured to change the first identification information. The numerical information is updated when the display is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, whether the variable display of the first special symbol is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed). Regardless of whether the display is executed or not, the value of the relief time reduction counter is uniformly updated), and the special state control means is configured to display a special display result different from the specific display result (for example, a time reduction missed symbol). When a special display result is derived and displayed, it can be controlled to a special state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS160), and when a special display result is derived and displayed in a variable display where special conditions are met, The special display result is a first special display result (for example, a symbol "6" of the time saving difference A) and a second special display result (for example, a symbol "8" of the time saving difference A). The special state control means can control to the same special state when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, The control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS160 regardless of whether the symbol "6" is derived and displayed or the symbol "8" is derived and displayed). When a variable display in which a special condition is not satisfied in the state is executed, different effects are executed when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, , the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS1707 and S1710 when the result of step 120IWS1706 is N, and executes steps 120IWS1708 and S1710 when the result of step 120IWS1706 is Y, so that different fluctuation patterns can be determined), in the normal state. When a variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is executed, a common effect is executed when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, game control The microcomputer 100 is capable of determining a common variation pattern by determining Y in step 120IWS1702 and executing steps 120IWS1703 and S1710 if the time saving will be shortened even if the time saving is missed. It is characterized by According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably control even in a situation where both the special state is controlled by the establishment of the special condition and the special state is controlled by the derivation display of the special display result. Can be done. For example, when a special condition is established and the game is controlled to a special state, a suitable effect can be produced.

In addition, in this example, as the "same special state", regardless of whether the symbol "6" is derived and displayed or the symbol "8" is derived and displayed, in the case of time saving deviation A, Although the case is shown in which the time saving state B is controlled to have the same number of time saving times of 100 (see steps 120IWS155 and S160), the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, as the "same special state", (1) controlling to the same time reduction number, (2) determining the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol using the same fluctuation pattern table, (3) using the same fluctuation pattern table and (4) controlling the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning hole) to the open state using the same opening pattern. The configuration may be such that all of (1) to (4) are executed.

Further, in this example, a case is shown in which different variation patterns are determined as "execution of different effects", but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, it may be configured such that different addition times are added to the fluctuation time indicated by the fluctuation pattern depending on when the symbol "6" is derived and displayed and when the symbol "8" is derived and displayed. Furthermore, for example, the configuration may be configured to execute either (1) the process of determining different fluctuation patterns, or (2) the process of adding different addition times, or the configuration may be configured to execute both. You may.

Further, for example, in addition to varying the variation time, the symbol confirmation period at the end of variation may be configured to be different.

(Means B2) In means B1, the effect executing means is capable of executing a common effect in the special state when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed. (For example, if the game control microcomputer 100 is Y in step 120IWS1704 and Y in step 120IWS1705, it can execute steps 120IWS1709 and S1710 and determine a common fluctuation pattern.) good. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably control even in a situation where both the special state is controlled by the establishment of the special condition and the special state is controlled by the derivation display of the special display result. Can be done. For example, when a special condition is established and the game is controlled to a special state, a suitable effect can be produced.

In addition, in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is determined that the time saving is missed with a probability of approximately 1/200, and when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability is determined to be approximately 1/400. However, the case is not limited to such an aspect. For example, when the second special symbol variation display is executed, the probability of time saving failure is determined to be lower (for example, 1/ 800), it may be configured to make it difficult for the time saving to occur during the time saving state.

In addition, for example, if the probability of time saving failure is increased when the second special symbol fluctuation display is executed, and there is a second pending memory when the time saving state ends, the second special symbol fluctuation display after the time saving state ends. The configuration may be such that the revival effect is more likely to be executed.

(Means B3) The means B1 or B2 includes a display result determining means (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step 120IWS93) for determining the display result, and the display result determining means controls the display result to an advantageous state. A common process is executed for determining the type of display result that will be controlled in an advantageous state when the , the game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to execute step 120IWS93 in common when determining jackpot symbols and when determining time-saving losing symbols. According to such a configuration, an increase in program capacity can be suppressed by sharing processing.

(Means B4) Any one of the means B1 to B3 includes variable display control means (for example, a portion that executes steps 120IWS110 to S113 in the game control microcomputer 100) for controlling the variable display, and The display control means determines a variable display period that is a period during which a variable display is performed according to the type of display result (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 determines a fluctuation pattern), and determines a variable display period in which a variable display is performed depending on the type of display result (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 determines a fluctuation pattern), and when special conditions are set in a normal state. When a variable display is executed in which the first special display result is derived and displayed, different variable display periods are determined for the case where the first special display result is derived and displayed (for example, when the second special display result is derived and displayed). The microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS1707 and S1710 when the result of step 120IWS1706 is N, and executes steps 120IWS1708 and S1710 when the result of step 120IWS1706 is Y, so that different fluctuation patterns can be determined), and variable display is performed in the special state. When the first special display result is derived and displayed, a common variable display period is determined for the case where the first special display result is derived and displayed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 Even if the result is a failure, if the relief time is shortened, it is determined as Y in step 120IWS1702, steps 120IWS1703 and S1710 are executed, and a common variation pattern can be determined. . According to such a configuration, the display results and variable display period can be made suitable depending on the situation.

(Means B5) In any of the means B1 to B4, the effect execution means is configured to perform a case where the first special display result is derived and displayed when the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is executed in the normal state. A different effect is executed depending on when the second special display result is derived and displayed. may be configured such that different fluctuation patterns can be determined. According to such a configuration, the display results and variable display period can be made suitable depending on the situation.

(Means B6) Any one of the means B1 to B5 includes variable display control means (for example, a portion that executes steps 120IWS110 to S113 in the game control microcomputer 100) for controlling the variable display, and The display control means determines the final display period of the display result, and the final display period can be changed depending on the type of display result (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 performs steps 120IWS1127, S1133, S1135, S1137). ). According to such a configuration, the display results and variable display period can be made suitable depending on the situation.

In addition, although this example shows a case where the symbol confirmation period is varied depending on whether the relief time shortening has occurred or the display result, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the symbol confirmation period may be set to be constant (for example, 0.5 seconds) regardless of whether the relief time shortening occurs or the display result.

(Means C1) Variable display of identification information including first identification information (for example, first special symbol) and second identification information (for example, second special symbol) is performed, and a specific display result (for example, jackpot symbol) is displayed. A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the derived display, and a special state (for example, a time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state. A special state control means (for example, a part of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 120IWS150, S160, and S537) that can be controlled to perform numerical information (for example, a relief time reduction counter) based on the variable display being executed. ) that can be updated (for example, the part that executes step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100), and a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values "1" to "6" that have different ratios of being controlled to an advantageous state). ), and the special state control means is equipped with a setting means (for example, a part that executes step 120IWS11 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of the setting values of When the information becomes a specific value (e.g., "0") corresponding to the special number of times (e.g., 900 times) and a special condition is established (e.g., relief time reduction is established), it is possible to control to a special state (e.g., , the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS150), the updating means updates the numerical information in the case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed. (For example, regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the value of the relief time reduction counter is uniformly updated. ), notification performance execution means (for example, performance control CPU 120 (a portion that executes steps 120IWS808 and S845), and a suggestion effect execution means (for example, a part in the effect control CPU 120) that can execute a suggestion effect that suggests the setting value set by the setting means (for example, a setting suggestion effect at the time of rescue). The suggestive effect execution means is capable of executing the suggestive effect when the notification effect is executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes steps 120 IWS808 and S845). When the relief time-saving entry effect is executed, the relief setting suggestion effect can be executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably control even in a situation where both the special state is controlled by the establishment of the special condition and the special state is controlled by the derivation display of the special display result. Can be done. For example, when a special condition is established and the game is controlled to a special state, a suitable effect can be produced. In addition, since the rate at which the special conditions are met changes depending on the set value, it is possible to increase the player's interest when the special condition is controlled by executing suggestive effects according to the rate at which the special conditions are met. can.

In addition, in this example, the jackpot probability differs depending on the setting value, so as a result, the ease with which the relief time shortening occurs also differs, and the relief time shortening occurs more when the setting value is set to a low value. It will be easy to do. Therefore, when the relief time shortening occurs, the player may feel that the setting value may have been set to a low value. Therefore, in this example, by executing a relief setting suggestion effect that makes it possible to feel even a little that the setting value is high when the relief time is shortened, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to lose interest in the game. Therefore, in this example, the configuration is configured such that the rescue setting suggestion effect can be executed when the setting value is relatively high, ie, "4" to "6", and other timings such as the jackpot setting suggestion effect can be executed. The execution rate is different from the setting suggestion effect executed in .

(Means C2) In the means C1, the setting suggestion performance execution means executes the suggestion performance when the special condition is satisfied and the variable display is not controlled to an advantageous state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is configured to provide relief in case of jackpot fluctuations). It may also be configured such that no time-saving processing is performed. According to such a configuration, the suggestive performance can be executed without interfering with other performances.

In addition, in this example, the relief time shortening process is not performed for jackpot fluctuations, while the relief time shortening process is performed for small hit fluctuations, but it is not limited to such a mode. The configuration may be such that the above processing is not performed.

(Means C3) In the means C1 or C2, the setting suggestion effect execution means executes the suggestion effect even after the special condition is established (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes step 120IWS640 when Y in step 120IWS638 ) may be configured as follows. With such a configuration, it is possible to suggest setting values over a long period of time, thereby increasing interest.

(Means C4) In any one of the means C1 to C3, the setting suggestion effect execution means executes the suggestion effect before the special condition is established (for example, in Modification 10, the effect control CPU 120 reads in advance Based on the determination result, the setting suggestion effect may be executed in the variable display before the variable display in which the relief time reduction is achieved. With such a configuration, it is possible to suggest setting values over a long period of time, thereby increasing interest.

(Means C5) In any one of the means C1 to C4, the setting suggestion performance execution means executes other suggestion performances that can be executed at a timing different from the suggestion performance when the special condition is satisfied (for example, the setting at the time of jackpot). (For example, the performance control CPU 120 executes steps 120IWS887, S889, and step S176) (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes steps 120IWS887, S889, and step S176), and a setting in which the suggestion performance when the special condition is satisfied is more advantageous than other suggestion performances. It is easy to execute a suggestion effect that suggests a value (for example, as shown in FIG. Therefore, the setting suggestion effect at the time of rescue may be configured as a setting suggestion effect suggesting that the setting is relatively high. According to such a configuration, the more advantageous the setting value, the lower the probability that the special condition will be satisfied, so by executing the suggestive effect, it is possible to improve the player's interest when the special condition is satisfied.

In addition, this example shows a case where the jackpot setting suggestion performance is executed during the fanfare period of the jackpot game, but it is not limited to such a mode, and it can also be executed during the round period or ending period of the jackpot game. may be configured.

(Means D1) Variable display of identification information including first identification information (for example, first special symbol) and second identification information (for example, second special symbol) is performed, and a specific display result (for example, jackpot symbol) is displayed. A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the derived display, and a special state (for example, a time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state. (for example, the part that executes steps 120IWS150, S160, and S537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the initial value set based on the variable display being executed (for example, The special state control means includes an updating means (for example, a part that executes step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can subtract and update numerical information (for example, a relief time reduction counter) from "900"), and the special state control means includes: When the numerical information subtracted and updated by the updating means becomes a specific value (for example, "0"), it can be controlled to a special state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS150), and the updating means The numerical information is subtracted and updated when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed (The value of the relief time reduction counter is uniformly updated regardless of whether the variable display of the second special symbol is executed), and the numerical information subtracted and updated by the updating means indicates that a predetermined condition is satisfied. (For example, in Modifications 5 and 6, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS85B and S84E), and the special state control means specifies the numerical information subtracted and updated by the update means. After controlling from the normal state to the special state based on the value, until the predetermined condition is satisfied and the initial value is set, the numerical information subtracted and updated by the updating means becomes the specific value. (For example, in modification 5, the game control microcomputer 100 does not execute the processing in steps 120IWS84 to S86 when the result in step S120IWS83 is Y. In modification 6, The control microcomputer 100 does not execute the processing in steps 120IWS84D to S86 when the result in step S120IWS84A is Y or the result in step 120IWS84C is N. ). According to such a configuration, when performing control to transition to a special state according to the number of variable displays, the process of subtracting and updating can be performed in common before and after numerical information reaches a specific value, so that the program In addition to being able to prevent the capacity from increasing, suitable control becomes possible. For example, if the transition is not made to a special state when the numerical information reaches a specific value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in capacity due to preparing a dedicated program for after the numerical information reaches a specific value.

Note that the predetermined conditions include the case where the rescue time saving number counter is set at the end of the time saving state via the rescue time saving by executing steps 120IWS85B and S84E, and also the case where step 120IWS13 is set when the initialization process is executed when the power is turned on. This also includes a case where the rescue time reduction number counter is set by executing the step 120IWS135 when a jackpot occurs and a case where the rescue time reduction number counter is set.

When setting the relief time reduction counter when a jackpot occurs, it may be set at the start of the jackpot game, during a round of the jackpot game, or at the end of the jackpot game.

Furthermore, when setting the rescue time reduction counter when performing the initialization process when the power is turned on, the process may be different depending on whether the settings have been changed or not. For example, if you change the settings and execute the initialization process, the rescue time reduction counter is set, but if you execute the initialization process without changing the settings, the current value of the rescue time reduction counter is set. It may be configured to maintain. Conversely, if the settings are changed and the initialization process is executed, the current value of the relief time reduction counter is maintained; however, if the initialization process is executed without changing the settings, the relief time reduction counter is maintained. It may also be configured to set a number of times counter.

(Means D2) In the means D1, the updating means performs variable display when the numerical information updated by subtraction is a value larger than a specific value, and variable display when the numerical information updated by subtraction is a specific value. is executed, numerical information can be subtractively updated (for example, in modification 6, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS84), and the subtractively updated numerical information is larger than the specific value. If it is a value, the numerical information is updated to the numerical information after subtraction (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS84C to S86 when it is N in step 120IWS84A), and the numerical information updated by subtraction is When the value is smaller than a specific value, the numerical information may be updated to a specific value (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to execute step 120IWS84B when Y in step 120IWS84A). . According to such a configuration, when performing control to transition to a special state according to the number of variable displays, the process of subtracting and updating can be performed in common before and after numerical information reaches a specific value, so that the program In addition to being able to prevent the capacity from increasing, suitable control becomes possible. For example, if the transition is not made to a special state when the numerical information reaches a specific value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in capacity due to preparing a dedicated program for after the numerical information reaches a specific value.

(Means D3) In the means D1 or the means D2, an operation means (for example, a clear switch) for performing an operation, and an initial value setting means (for example, , a part that executes step 120IWS13 in the game control microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, it is possible to select whether or not to set the initial value by operating the operating means, thereby increasing operational convenience.

Note that a dedicated operating means (button or switch) different from the clear switch may be provided as the operating means for changing settings and setting the rescue time reduction counter.

(Means D4) In any of the means D1 to D3, the special state control means can control to a special state when a special display result different from the specific display result (for example, a time saving symbol) is displayed. Yes (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS160), even when the numerical information subtracted and updated by the updating means is a specific value, it is possible to control to a special state when a special display result is displayed. Even after the numerical information subtracted and updated by the updating means becomes a specific value, it is possible to control the special state when the special display result is displayed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 It may be configured such that step 120IWS88 can be executed regardless of whether or not it is in time saving state C via relief time saving. According to such a configuration, since there is a possibility that the subtracted and updated numerical information becomes a specific value again, the special state is controlled, so that it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

(Means D5) In any one of the means D1 to the means D4, a determining means (for example, a part that executes step 120IWS62 in the game control microcomputer 100) for determining whether to control to an advantageous state, and a determining means Before the decision is made, a judgment means (for example, a part of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step 120IWS101) judges whether or not the control will be controlled in an advantageous state, and a pre-read preview effect is created based on the judgment result of the judgment means. A pre-reading notice performance execution means (for example, a portion of the performance control CPU 120 that executes step S161) capable of executing the above, a predetermined period before the numerical information subtractively updated by the updating means reaches a specific value, and a predetermined period before the numerical information subtractively updated by the updating means becomes a specific value; During a specific period after the numerical information has reached a specific value, a look-ahead notice performance limiting means (for example, in modification 7, as shown in FIG. 281-45, when the time saving state C is Execution of a pre-read notice effect for a predetermined period from the fluctuation display before the 8 fluctuations to end until the relief time is shortened, and for a specific period from the time the relief time is shortened to the fluctuation display after the 8 fluctuations after the end of the time saving state C. ). According to such a configuration, since there is a possibility that the subtracted and updated numerical information becomes a specific value again, the special state is controlled, so that it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In addition, in the above characteristic part 120IW and each modification, the case where the number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is uniformly 900 is shown, but it is not limited to such an aspect. It may be configured such that the relief time is shortened based on the number of times a variable display has been executed. For example, if the setting value is "1" to "5", relief time reduction will occur based on the fact that 900 fluctuation displays have been executed without a big hit, small hit, or time reduction. If the value is "6", it may be configured so that the relief time reduction occurs based on 600 fluctuation displays being executed without a big hit, small hit, or time reduction loss, and specific settings may be applied. It may be configured such that only in the case of a value, the number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is different.

Further, for example, for all of the setting values "1" to "6", the number of fluctuations until the relief time becomes short may be made different for each setting value. In this case, for example, the ratio between the denominator of the jackpot probability and the number of fluctuations until the rescue time becomes short may be configured to be approximately three times the same. Also, for example, the number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened may be varied within the range of 2.5P≦n≦3.0P (P = denominator of jackpot probability, n = number of fluctuations until the relief time is controlled to be shortened). It's okay.

In addition, even if the time saving state is via the relief time saving, the time saving state may not necessarily continue until the next jackpot occurs, and in this case, as shown in the feature section 120IW above, the time saving state may not necessarily continue until the next jackpot occurs. The time saving state may be configured to end, and as shown in Modifications 5 and 6, the time saving state is ended based on the end of the variable display a prescribed number of times (in this example, 900 times). It may be configured as follows.

In addition, as shown in Modifications 5 and 6, after completing the variable display for the specified number of times (900 times in this example) in the time-saving state via relief time-saving and transitioning to the normal state, further jackpots and small hits may occur. , it may be configured so that if the fluctuation display is completed a specified number of times (for example, 900 times) without the time saving being deviated, the relief time will be shortened again and the state will shift to the time saving state, or the relief time will not be shortened again. may be configured. In this case, if the configuration is such that the relief time reduction will not occur again, for example, if the value of the relief time reduction counter reaches 0, the control may be such that the relief time reduction counter is not subtracted from the next process. However, the counter may be configured to subtract the relief time reduction counter from the next processing, and when it becomes a negative value, return it to 0.

Furthermore, the configurations shown in (means 1A) to (means 10A) below may be applied to the above-described characteristic portion 120IW and each modification.

(Means 1A) Variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information are performed, and based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol), an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game The game machine is a game machine that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state. A part that executes S160 and S537) and an updating means (for example, a part that executes step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can update the numerical information based on the variable display being executed, The state control means can control the special state when a special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, step 120IWS85 in the game control microcomputer 100). , S86. A part that executes step 120IWS150 in the game control microcomputer 100. It may be configured to update the numerical information (for example, the part that executes step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, relief for the player can be suitably realized. Specifically, even if the gaming state changes and any identification information is displayed variably, the numerical information continues to be updated, making it easier for the player to be rescued and increasing his or her desire to play. Can be done.

(Means 2A) In means 1A, the special condition is established based on the fact that a predetermined display result different from the specific display result (for example, a missed symbol) is derived and displayed a special number of times in succession as a display result of the variable display ( For example, a part that executes steps 120IWS85 and S86 in the game control microcomputer 100. A part that executes step 120IWS150 in the game control microcomputer 100. According to such a configuration, relief is provided when display results that are disadvantageous to the player are continuously derived and displayed, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(Means 3A) In the means 1A or 2A, the updating means updates the numerical information (for example , the part that executes step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, relief for the player can be suitably realized. Specifically, numerical information is updated fairly, and even after being controlled to a special state, it can be controlled to the special state again, so it is possible to control the special state until it is controlled to a substantially advantageous state. , Thereby, it is possible to suppress the player's investment and prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

(Means 4A) In any of the means 1A to 3A, the updating means sets numerical information to an initial value when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, steps 120IWS13, S135, S149 in the game control microcomputer 100, The part that executes S161) may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, when the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, the situation becomes advantageous for the player, and there is no need to rescue the player, so it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming unnecessarily high.

(Means 5A) In the means 4A, the predetermined condition may be configured such that the predetermined condition is to be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, the part that executes step 120IWS135 in the game control microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, when the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, the situation becomes advantageous for the player, and there is no need to rescue the player, so it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming unnecessarily high.

(Means 6A) In the means 4A, the state control means is capable of controlling to a special state (for example, game control The predetermined condition is that a special display result is derived and displayed (for example, the part that executes step 120IWS161 in the game control microcomputer 100). It's okay. According to such a configuration, when the special state is controlled, the situation becomes advantageous for the player and there is no need to rescue the player, so it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming more intense than necessary.

(Means 7A) In the means 4A, the predetermined condition may be configured such that the variable display is executed a special number of times (for example, the part that executes step 120IWS149 in the game control microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to substantially control the special state until the next advantageous state, so that the degree of relief for the player can be increased.

(Means 8A) In the means 4A, when the power supply is stopped, a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of retaining the numerical information to be updated by the updating means even if the power supply is stopped, and the updating means , when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, execution of initialization processing), the numerical information held by the backup storage means is set to an initial value (for example, the part that executes step 120IWS13 in the game control microcomputer 100). , the predetermined condition may be configured such that a specific condition is satisfied (for example, the part that executes step S8 and step 120IWS13 in the game control microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, if the numerical information up to the special number of times is retained when initialization is performed at the gaming parlor, it may be too disadvantageous for the gaming parlor. It can be made easier.

(Means 9A) Any one of the means 1A to 8A is provided with a performance control means (for example, a part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the performance control CPU 120) corresponding to variable display, and the state control means is configured to control the special number of times. Based on the execution of the variable display, it is possible to control the special state for a specific period more than the special number of times (for example, the part that executes steps 120IWS83 to S86, S150 in the game control microcomputer 100), and in the special state Based on the execution of the variable display of the number of times, it is possible to control the special state for a specific period again (for example, the part that executes steps 120IWS83 to S86 and S150 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the effect control means, It may be configured to perform different effects during the first specific period and the second specific period. According to such a configuration, when the special state is controlled in the second specific period, it is a situation where the control is not in an advantageous state for a long period of time, so it is necessary to take measures such as shortening the execution time of the variable display. By changing the presentation mode, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming less interesting.

(Means 10A) Any one of the means 1A to 8A is provided with an effect control means (for example, a part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the effect control CPU 120) corresponding to variable display, and the state control means is configured to control the special number of times. Based on the execution of the variable display, it is possible to control the special state for a specific period more than the special number of times (for example, the part that executes steps 120IWS83 to S86, S150 in the game control microcomputer 100), and in the special state Based on the execution of the variable display of the number of times, it is possible to control the special state for a specific period again (for example, the part that executes steps 120IWS83 to S86 and S150 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the effect control means, It may be configured to perform a common effect during the first specific period and the second specific period. According to such a configuration, when the special state is controlled during the second specific period, the situation is such that it has not been controlled to be in an advantageous state for a long period of time, so by intentionally executing the same performance, it is possible to maintain an advantageous state for a long period of time. It is possible to prevent the player from being more aware of the uncontrolled situation than necessary, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Furthermore, the configurations shown in (Means 1B-1), (Means 1B-2) to (Means 5B) below may be applied to the above-mentioned characteristic portion 120IW and each modification.

(Means 1B-1) Variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information are performed, and an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a gaming machine that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state), and a gaming area that can play game media separately into a first route (for example, a left-handed route) and a second route (for example, a right-handed route); A state control means (for example, a part that executes steps 120IWS150, S160, and S537 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state, and a variable display. A plurality of types of updating means (for example, a part that executes step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can update numerical information based on the execution of A process execution means that updates a data value indicating the game progress state necessary for executing the process and executes the process corresponding to the data value (for example, a part that executes step S25 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the state control means is capable of controlling to a special state when a special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, when the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times). The part that executes steps 120IWS85 and S86 in the computer 100. The part that executes step 120IWS150 in the game control microcomputer 100. When the variable display is executed, the numerical information is updated (for example, the part that executes step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the processing execution means updates the numerical information regarding the variable display when the data value is the first numerical value. 1 process (for example, the part that executes steps S110 to S113 in the game control microcomputer 100), and when the data value is a second numerical value different from the first numerical value, a second process related to an advantageous state is executed (for example, , the part that executes steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100), when the data value is a third numerical value different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value, the state control means controls to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to execute a next fluctuation postponement process.) In the normal state, the game medium is ejected to the first path. A game is played, and in a special state, the game is played by ejecting the game medium to the second path, and during execution of the third process, a firing that executes a release promotion notification to the effect that the game medium should be ejected to the second path. It may be configured to include a promotion notification means. According to such a configuration, even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be performed. For example, by giving a firing promotion notification to the second route before being controlled to the special state, it is possible to perform effects related to the firing promotion notification earlier when the special state is being controlled.

(Means 1B-2) Perform variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol), an advantageous state (for example, A game machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state), and a state control means that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, steps in the game control microcomputer 100) 120IWS150, S160, S537), an updating means (for example, a part that executes step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of updating numerical information based on execution of the variable display; A processing execution means (for example, (a part of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step S25), and the state control means is configured to control the state when the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times. It is controllable to a special state (for example, a part that executes steps 120IWS85 and S86 in the game control microcomputer 100; a part that executes step 120IWS150 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the updating means updates the first identification information. The processing execution means updates the numerical information between when the variable display of the second identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the part that executes step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100). , when the data value is the first numerical value, the first process regarding the variable display is executed (for example, the part that executes steps S110 to S113 in the game control microcomputer 100), and when the data value is the first numerical value, the second numerical value is different from the first numerical value. When the second process related to the advantageous state is executed (for example, the part that executes steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100), and when the data value is a third numerical value different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value, The state control means executes a third process for controlling to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to execute a next fluctuation postponement process), It may be configured to include a presentation execution means for executing a notification presentation for notifying that the special state is controlled during execution of the third process. According to such a configuration, even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be performed. For example, by giving a firing promotion notification to the second route before being controlled to the special state, it is possible to perform effects related to the firing promotion notification earlier when the special state is being controlled.

(Means 2B) In the means 1B-1 and 1B-2, the processing execution means executes the second processing after the first processing when the specific display result is derived and displayed in the variable display where the special condition is satisfied. It may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, priority is given to controlling the advantageous state, so that no disadvantageous result is produced for the player, and a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

(Means 3B) In the means 1B-1, the means 1B-2, or the means 2B, the updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display is started (for example, executes step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100). (part), the processing execution means changes the special information from the first information to the second information when the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value, and changes the special information from the first information to the second information when the state control means controls the special state. may be configured to change from the second information to the first information, and to perform different processing depending on whether the special information is the first information or the second information. According to such a configuration, by managing the special information, it is possible to suitably execute the process of transitioning to the special state.

(Means 4B) The means 3B includes variable display pattern determining means (for example, a portion that executes step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100) for determining the variable display pattern of the variable display, and the variable display pattern determining means is It may be configured such that different variable display patterns are determined when the information is the first information and when the information is the second information. According to such a configuration, when the variable display of the special number of times is executed, the effect can be suitably executed.

(Means 5B) The means 3B includes variable display pattern determining means (for example, a portion that executes step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100) that determines the variable display pattern of the variable display, and the variable display pattern determining means has a special The variable display pattern may be configured such that the display result determination time differs when the information is the first information and when the information is the second information. According to such a configuration, when the variable display of the special number of times is executed, the effect can be suitably executed.

Further, the configurations shown in (Means 1C) to (Means 6C) below may be applied to the above-described characteristic portion 120IW and each modification example.

(Means 1C) Variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information are performed, and an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game The game machine is a game machine that can control the state), and includes a game control means that can control the game (for example, a part that executes step S25 in the game control microcomputer 100), and a performance that is compatible with variable display. The game control means is equipped with a performance control means (for example, a part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the performance control CPU 120), and the game control means is in a special state (for example, a time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state. state control means (for example, a part of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 120IWS150, S160, and S537), and an update means (for example, a part that can update numerical information based on execution of variable display). , a part that executes step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100), and state information control means that controls state information that can specify the state controlled by the state control means, and the state control means is variable. It is possible to control to a special state after being controlled to an advantageous state based on the specific display result being derived and displayed as a display result (for example, the part that executes step 120IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100), and is updated. When the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, the special state can be controlled (for example, the part that executes steps 120IWS85 and S86 in the game control microcomputer 100) .The part that executes step 120IWS150 in the game control microcomputer 100.), the updating means updates the numerical information in the case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed. (for example, the part that executes step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the state information control means sets the state information as the first value in the normal state, and updates the specific display result as the display result of the variable display. When controlled to a special state after being controlled to an advantageous state based on what has been derived and displayed, the state information is the second numerical value, and when controlled to a special state based on the fulfillment of the special condition, the state information is is a third numerical value different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value, and the game control means can transmit specific information to the performance control means, and when in a special state, when the state information is the second numerical value and the third numerical value It may be configured such that specific information can be transmitted depending on the case where the information is a numerical value. According to such a configuration, even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be performed. For example, since different game states can be suitably identified, control becomes easy, and if the specific information is also changed at that time, when the performance control means executes a different performance, the performance can be suitably executed.

(Means 2C) In means 1C, when the special condition is established again after being controlled to a special state based on the establishment of the special condition, the status information control means changes the status information to the first numerical value, the second numerical value, and the second numerical value. The fourth numerical value may be configured to be different from the third numerical value. According to such a configuration, even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be performed. For example, since different game states can be suitably identified, control becomes easy, and if the specific information is also changed at that time, when the performance control means executes a different performance, the performance can be suitably executed.

(Means 3C) In the means 1C or 2C, the effect control means controls when the state control means performs control to a special state based on the derived and displayed specific display result, and when the state control means realizes that the special condition is satisfied. It may be configured such that different effects can be executed when the special state is controlled based on what has happened. According to such a configuration, it is possible to efficiently perform variable display in a controlled special state when special conditions are established, so it is possible to perform effects according to the situation, and to improve the interest of the game. be able to.

(Means 4C) In any of the means 1C to 3C, the effect control means controls the special state based on the derivation and display of the specific display result, and the state control means It may be configured such that a common effect can be executed (for example, a common background image is displayed) when the special state is controlled based on the fulfillment of a condition. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the effect in the controlled special state the same every time when the special condition is established, and this prevents an increase in development costs because new effects are not required. At the same time, since the player is not confused, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Means 5C) In any of the means 1C to 4C, the state control means is capable of controlling the state to a special state when a special display result (for example, time saving error) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state. Yes (for example, the part that executes step 120IWS160 in the game control microcomputer 100), the production control means controls the state when the state control means controls the special state based on the derivation and display of the special display result. The control means may be configured to be able to perform different effects when controlling to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition. According to such a configuration, it is possible to efficiently perform variable display in a controlled special state when a special condition is established, so it is possible to execute a performance according to the situation, and to improve the interest of the game. be able to.

(Means 6C) In any of the means 1C to 4C, the state control means is capable of controlling to a special state when a special display result different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state, and the effect control means is , when the state control means controls the special state based on the derivation and display of the special display result, and when the state control means controls the special state based on the establishment of the special condition. (for example, displaying a common background image). According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to make the effect in the controlled special state the same every time when the special condition is established, and thereby prevents an increase in development costs since new effects are not required. At the same time, since the player is not confused, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the configurations shown in (Means 1D) to (Means 4D) below may be applied to the above-described characteristic portion 120IW and each modification.

(Means 1D) Variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information are performed, and an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game The game machine is a game machine that can control the state), and includes a game control means that can control the game (for example, a part that executes step S25 in the game control microcomputer 100), and a performance that is compatible with variable display. The game control means is equipped with a performance control means (for example, a part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the performance control CPU 120), and the game control means is in a special state (for example, a time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state. state control means (for example, a part of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 120IWS150, S160, and S537), and an update means (for example, a part that can update numerical information based on execution of variable display). , a part that executes step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100), and a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) that can hold numerical information regarding the number of executions of the variable display when power supply is stopped. The state control means can control the special state when a special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, when the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times) The part that executes steps 120IWS85 and S86. The part that executes step 120IWS150 in the game control microcomputer 100. When executed, the numerical information is updated (for example, the part that executes step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the game control means transmits predetermined information to the production control means when power supply is started. Even if the effect control means is configured to be able to execute a suggestive effect regarding the number of execution times of the variable display in a predetermined period after the power supply is started, based on receiving the predetermined information. good. According to such a configuration, even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be performed. For example, players are motivated to play games from the start of business at the gaming parlor, and the operating rate of the gaming machines can be increased.

(Means 2D) In the means 1D, the game control means is configured to be capable of transmitting specific information that can identify the numerical information held by the backup storage means to the performance control means when power supply is started. You can leave it there. According to such a configuration, even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be performed. For example, it gives players an incentive to play games from the start of business at the gaming parlor, increasing the operating rate of the gaming machines and suppressing an increase in the processing load.

(Means 3D) In the means 1D or 2D, the game control means can transmit specific information to the performance control means in relation to the execution of the variable display, and the performance control means transmits specific information based on the establishment of special conditions. A special effect related to being controlled to a special state can be executed based on specific information, and the specific information can specify that the difference between the number of executions of the variable display and the special number is less than a predetermined value. It includes first specific information (for example, a command for specifying 1 number of rescue time reductions), and second specific information that can specify that the difference between the number of times the variable display is executed and the special number of times is larger than a predetermined value (for example, a command for specifying the number of times the relief time reduction The command may be configured as follows (number of times 2 designation command). According to such a configuration, even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be performed. For example, by periodically suggesting functions to the player, it is possible to reduce the risk of unknowingly incurring losses and to suitably implement processing related to specific information.

(Means 4D) In any of the means 1D to 3D, the effect control means is controlled to be in a special state when a special condition is satisfied based on the first predetermined number of variable displays being executed, which is smaller than the special number of times. It is possible to execute a suggestive effect that suggests that a special number of variable displays is executed, and the suggestive effect can be executed every time a variable display is executed a second predetermined number of times less than the first predetermined number of times before a special number of variable displays are executed. It may be configured to be. According to such a configuration, even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be performed. For example, by periodically suggesting functions to players, it is possible to reduce the risk of unknowingly incurring losses.

Furthermore, the configurations shown in (means 1E-1) and (means 1E-2) below may be applied to the above-described characteristic portion 120IW and each modification.

(Means 1E-1) Perform variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol), an advantageous advantageous state (for example, It is a gaming machine that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state), and includes a gaming control means (for example, a part that executes step S25 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) that can control the gaming, and a variable display. The game control means is equipped with a performance control means for controlling the performance (for example, a part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the performance control CPU 120), and the game control means is configured to perform a special state in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state (for example, in a time-saving state). state control means (for example, a part of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 120IWS150, S160, and S537), and an updating means that can update numerical information based on execution of variable display. (for example, the part that executes step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100), and a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) that can hold numerical information regarding the number of executions of the variable display when the power supply is stopped. , an initialization means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 100) that can initialize the storage contents of the backup storage means, including information regarding the number of times a predetermined display result has been continuously derived and displayed, when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The state control means can control the special state when the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times. For example, the part that executes steps 120IWS85 and S86 in the microcomputer 100 for game control. The part that executes step 120IWS150 in the microcomputer 100 for game control. and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the part that executes step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100), the performance control means updates the storage contents of the backup storage means. When the state is controlled to a special state by the state control means based on the establishment of special conditions before a specific display result is derived and displayed after initialization, and when the storage contents of the backup storage means are initialized and specified It may be configured such that different effects are executed when the display result is derived and displayed and then controlled to be in a special state by the state control means based on the establishment of a special condition, and when controlled to be in a special state at . . According to such a configuration, even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be performed. For example, since it is possible to know that the contents stored in the backup storage means have been initialized, the number of factors such as estimating setting values increases, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Means 1E-2) Perform variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol), an advantageous advantageous state (for example, It is a gaming machine that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state), and includes a gaming control means (for example, a part that executes step S25 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) that can control the gaming, and a variable display. The game control means is equipped with a performance control means for controlling the performance (for example, a part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the performance control CPU 120), and the game control means is configured to perform a special state in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state (for example, in a time-saving state). state control means (for example, a part of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 120IWS150, S160, and S537), and an updating means that can update numerical information based on execution of variable display. (for example, the part that executes step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100), and a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) that can hold numerical information regarding the number of executions of the variable display when the power supply is stopped. , an initialization means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 100) that can initialize the storage contents of the backup storage means, including information regarding the number of times a predetermined display result has been continuously derived and displayed, when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The state control means can control the special state when the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times. For example, the part that executes steps 120IWS85 and S86 in the microcomputer 100 for game control. The part that executes step 120IWS150 in the microcomputer 100 for game control. and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the part that executes step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100), the performance control means updates the storage contents of the backup storage means. When the state is controlled to a special state by the state control means based on the establishment of special conditions before a specific display result is derived and displayed after initialization, and when the storage contents of the backup storage means are initialized and specified It may be configured to execute different effects when the display result is derived and displayed and then controlled to the special state by the state control means based on the establishment of special conditions, and after being controlled to the special state. According to such a configuration, even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be performed. For example, since it is possible to know that the contents stored in the backup storage means have been initialized, the number of factors such as estimating setting values increases, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 090IW)
Next, the characteristic part 090IW of this embodiment will be explained. In this feature section 090IW, the gaming state is controlled to be either a normal state (non-time saving state) or a time saving state. As will be described in detail later, it is possible to control from the normal state to the time saving state via the small winning game state based on the small winning symbols being derived and displayed. In addition, the display result of a small win includes a display result of a small win A or a small win B that can be controlled in a time-saving state, and a display result that is a small win C that cannot be controlled in a time-saving state. Then, a case where a variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a display result resulting in a small hit is derived and displayed, and a case where a variable display of the second special symbol is executed and a display result resulting in a small hit is derived and displayed. The ratio at which the display result of small win A or small win B is derived and displayed differs.

(Jackpot type determination table, small hit type determination table)
FIGS. 282-1 (A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. Of these, FIG. 282-1(A) shows a specific example of the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol. Further, FIG. 282-1(B) shows a specific example of the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in Figure 282-1 (A), the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol is based on the random number for determining the hit type when it is determined that the variable display result will be a jackpot symbol. , is a table that is referred to in order to determine the type of jackpot as "10R time-saving jackpot".

As shown in Figure 282-1 (B), the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol is based on the random number for determining the hit type when it is determined that the variable display result will be a jackpot symbol. , is a table that is referred to in order to determine the type of jackpot as "10R time-saving jackpot".

The "10R time-saving jackpot" is a jackpot that controls the game to be in a jackpot gaming state for 10 rounds, and then shifts to the time-saving state after the jackpot gaming state ends. Once you enter the time saving state, the time saving state will be maintained until the next jackpot occurs.

As shown in FIG. 282-1(A), in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and results in a jackpot, it is determined that the 10R time-saving jackpot has a 100% probability. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 282-1(B), in this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and a jackpot is achieved, it is determined that the 10R time-saving jackpot is achieved with a 100% probability.

Note that the jackpot type is not limited to the embodiment shown in this example. For example, you can provide multiple types of time-saving jackpots with different numbers of time-savings (for example, 3 or 5 rounds), or provide multiple types of time-saving jackpots with different numbers of rounds (for example, 2 rounds or 4 rounds). good. In addition, this example shows a case where only a time-saving jackpot that shifts to the time-saving state after the jackpot game ends is provided, but it is also possible to provide a non-time-saving jackpot (normal jackpot) that does not shift to the time-saving state after the jackpot game ends. may be configured. In addition, in this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, there is a 100% probability that a 100R time-saving jackpot is determined, but if the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Even in the case of a game, it may be configured such that a plurality of types of jackpots are determined.

FIG. 282-1(C) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. As shown in Figure 282-1 (C), the small hit type determination table determines the small hit based on the random number for determining the hit type when it is determined that the variable display result will be used as a small win symbol. This table is referred to in order to determine the type as either "small hit A", "small hit B", or "small hit C".

"Small hit A" means that the game ball that entered the special winning hole during the small winning game (first round) did not win the V prize (detected by the non-V winning hole switch and did not pass through the V winning hole) This is a small win that shifts to a time saving state after the small win game ends, on the condition that the small win is detected. Once the time saving state is entered, the time saving state is maintained until the 10 times of variable display is completed. In addition, "Small win A" is a small win that controls the jackpot game state of the second to fourth rounds on the condition that a V prize is won, and shifts to the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game state. However, when the "small win A" is reached, the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device is controlled so as not to win a V prize.

"Small hit B" means that the game ball that entered the special winning hole during the small winning game (first round) did not win the V prize (detected by the non-V winning hole switch and did not pass through the V winning hole). This is a small win that shifts to a time-saving state after the small win game ends, on the condition that the small win is detected. Once the time saving state is entered, the time saving state is maintained until the variable display is completed five times. In addition, "Small win B" is a small win that controls the jackpot game state of the second to fourth rounds on the condition that a V prize is won, and shifts to the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game state. However, when the "small win B" is reached, an opening pattern is first controlled to open the special variable winning ball device so as not to win a V prize.

"Small hit C" means that the game ball that entered the special winning hole during the small winning game (first round) did not win the V prize (detected by the non-V winning hole switch, and did not pass through the V winning hole). This is a small win that does not shift to the time saving state after the small win game ends even if it is detected that there is a small win. In addition, "Small win C" is a small win that controls the jackpot game state of the second to fourth rounds on the condition that a V prize is won, and shifts to the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game state. Then, when the "small win C" is reached, the opening pattern for opening the special variable winning ball device is controlled so that V winning occurs in most cases.

As shown in Figure 282-1 (C), in this example, 25% of the cases where the first special symbol is displayed as a small hit and result in a small hit are determined to be “small hit A”; A "small hit B" is determined, and 50% is determined as a "small hit C."

As shown in Figure 282-1(D), in this example, 5% of the cases where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and a small hit results in a small hit are determined as "small hit A", and 5% are A "small hit B" is determined, and 90% is determined as a "small hit C."

In addition, the small hit type is not limited to the aspect shown in this example. For example, a plurality of types of time-saving jackpots with different number of time-saving wins (for example, 3 or 5 times) may be provided. Further, it may be configured to provide a small win without a V win, in which it is virtually impossible to win a V prize during a small win game, and there is no transition to a jackpot game after the small win game.

Also, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of a small hit is higher than when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, so when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. , the probability of a small hit A or B (that is, a small hit with a time saver) is higher, but when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the small win with a time saver is 100% of the time. You can hit it.

(Opening pattern for small winning games)
Next, the opening pattern of the small winning game will be explained. FIG. 282-2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening pattern of the small winning game. As shown in FIG. 282-2, after starting the small winning game at timing S1, when the pre-opening period t1 (fanfare time) has elapsed, the special variable winning ball device is controlled to be in the open state at timing S2.

As shown in Figure 282-2 (A), in the case of small hit A or B (with time saving), when the V winning opening opening/closing plate is controlled to the closed state, a special variable of 0.05 seconds is applied. After opening the winning ball device (special winning opening), after a closing time of 1 second, the opening and closing operation of the special winning opening is performed again for 0.05 seconds, and after a closing time of 12 seconds, the special winning opening is opened twice in the same way. Perform opening and closing actions.

In addition, as shown in Figure 282-2 (B), in the case of small hit C (no time saving), when the V winning opening opening/closing plate is controlled in the open state, the special variable winning ball device (special winning opening) By repeating the operation of opening the special winning hole for 0.05 seconds, closing the special winning hole for 1 second, and then opening the special winning hole for 0.05 seconds so that the opening is controlled in the open state, one small If you win, the special prize opening will be opened 10 times.

The operation of the V winning opening opening/closing board is the same for small win A or B (with time saving) and small win C (no time saving), and is opened for 8 seconds in both cases.

In addition, in this example, the opening time of each special winning hole in the small hit is extremely short, 0.05 seconds, but as already explained, the special variable winning ball device is formed with a plurality of regulating pieces. , Since about 2 to 3 game balls are flowing down in a meandering manner on the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device, even if the opening time is short, if the bottom member is controlled to be in the open state, the number of game balls on the bottom member A game ball can fall and enter the special variable winning ball device.

In the case of small hit C (no time saving), the special variable winning ball device is in the open state when the V winning hole opening/closing plate is in the open state, so it is not possible to put the game ball into the V winning hole. It is possible. Also, in the case of small hit A or B (with time saving), the special variable winning ball device will be in the open state when the V winning opening opening/closing board is in the closed state, so the game ball will be placed in the V winning opening. It is impossible or difficult to do so.

In the case of small hit C (no time saving), if the game ball that enters the special winning hole does not pass through the V winning hole, the time saving state will not be controlled, but small hit A or B (with time saving) When the game ball enters the special winning hole and the game ball does not pass through the V winning hole, the time saving state is controlled. As a result, when the small hit is C (no time saving), there is a high possibility that the game ball will pass through the V winning hole and be controlled to the jackpot state, but it will not be controlled to the time saving state, and the small winning A or B (With time saving), there is a very low possibility that the game ball will be controlled to a jackpot state without passing through the V winning hole, but a high possibility that it will be controlled to a time saving state.

If the game ball enters the special winning hole and wins a V prize, after the last opening of the special winning hole is completed, a predetermined period of closing time (interval time) and small winning end time (ending time) have elapsed. , the game enters the jackpot game state, and the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the open state from the second round to the fourth round.

In addition, in both cases of small hit A or B (with time reduction) and small hit C (no time reduction), the ending period shifts from timing S3 to S4, but the small hit A or B (with time reduction) shifts to the ending period from timing S3 to S4. The ending period t3 in the case of ) is longer than the ending period t4 in the case of the small win C (no time saving). For example, the ending period t3 is 10 seconds longer than the ending period t4. As a result, in the case of small win A or B (with time saving), it is possible to secure time to display the start screen of the time saving state (see FIG. 282-9 (N)).

In addition, in the case of small hit A or B (with time saving), the ending period may be changed depending on whether or not the game ball has won in the V winning hole (that is, whether or not to shift to the time saving state). Specifically, when the game ball does not enter the V winning hole, the time is controlled to be shortened, so in this case, the ending period is lengthened.

In this way, in this example, when the display result of small hit A or small hit B is derived and displayed, and when the display result of small hit C is derived and displayed, the pattern is different (in this example, The special variable winning ball device can be controlled to be in an open state depending on the number of times). Therefore, it is possible to suitably control whether or not to control the time saving state.

Specifically, in this example, the V win performs a common operation when the display result of small win A or B is derived and displayed and when the display result of small win C is derived and displayed. Equipped with a opening/closing board, if the display result of small hit A or small winning B is derived and displayed, special operation is required when the V winning opening/closing board is in a state that obstructs the passage of game balls to the V winning opening. When the variable winning ball device is controlled in the open state and the display result of small hit C is derived and displayed, when the V winning hole opening/closing plate is in a state that does not obstruct the passage of game balls to the V winning hole. The special variable winning ball device is controlled to be in the open state. Therefore, it is possible to suitably control whether or not to control the time saving state.

(Fluctuation pattern table)
FIG. 282-3 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern table in the feature section 090IW. Of these, FIG. 282-3 shows a specific example of the variation pattern table for the first special symbol. Moreover, FIG. 282-4 shows a specific example of the variation pattern table for the second special symbol.

First, the variation pattern of the first special symbol will be explained using FIG. 282-3. As shown in FIG. 282-3, in this example, when performing a variable display of the first special symbol, if it is out of order during the normal state, the variable pattern PA1-1 (normal variation), Variation pattern PA1-2 (non-reach in normal variation → development effect), variation pattern PA1-3 (shortened variation), variation pattern PA1-4 (non-reach in shortened variation → development effect), variation pattern PA2-1 ( Normal reach), variation pattern PA2-2 (normal reach→development effect), variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach α), and variation pattern PA2-4 (super reach β). In addition, when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, if it misses during the time saving state, the variable pattern PA1-5 (shortening variation), the variation pattern PA1-6 (non-shortening variation), Reach → development effect), variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PA2-2 (normal reach → development effect), variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach α), variation pattern PA2-4 (super reach β) Determined by

In addition, as shown in FIG. 282-3, in this example, when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, if a jackpot occurs during the normal state, the variable pattern PB1-1 (normal reach) is used as the variable pattern. , variation pattern PB1-2 (super reach α), or variation pattern PB1-3 (super reach β). In addition, when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, if a jackpot occurs during the time saving state, the variable patterns are variable pattern PB1-1 (normal reach), variable pattern PB1-2 (super reach α), variable pattern PB1-2 (super reach α), One of patterns PB1-3 (super reach β) is determined.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 282-3, in this example, when performing a variable display of the first special symbol, if a small hit C (no time saving) occurs during the normal state, the variable pattern is displayed as a variable pattern. It is determined to be one of PC1-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PC1-2 (super reach α), and variation pattern PC1-3 (super reach β). In addition, when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, if a small hit C occurs during the time saving state, the variable patterns are variable pattern PC1-1 (normal reach), variable pattern PC1-2 (super reach α). , variation pattern PC1-3 (super reach β).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 282-3, in this example, when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, if the small hit A or B (with time saving) occurs during the normal state, as a variable pattern, Decided to be either variation pattern PC1-4 (normal variation non-reach → development performance), variation pattern PC1-5 (shortened variation non-reach → development performance), variation pattern PC1-7 (normal reach → development performance) be done. In addition, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, if the small hit A or B (with time saving) occurs during the time saving state, the variation pattern PC1-6 (non-reach in shortening variation → Development performance), variation pattern PC1-7 (normal reach → development performance) is determined.

Next, the variation pattern of the second special symbol will be explained using FIG. 282-4. As shown in FIG. 282-4, in this example, when performing a variable display of the second special symbol, if it is out of order during the normal state, the variable patterns PA3-1, PA3- 2 (non-reach with normal fluctuation → development performance) is determined. In addition, when performing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it misses during the time saving state, the variable pattern PA3-3 (shortening variation), the variation pattern PA3-4 (non-shortening variation), Reach → development effect), variation pattern PB3-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PB3-2 (normal reach → development effect), variation pattern PB3-3 (super reach α,) variation pattern PB3-4 (super reach β) Determined by

Also, as shown in Figure 282-4, when executing the variable display of the second special symbol, if a jackpot occurs during the normal state, the variable pattern PA3-5 (normal reach) is determined as the variable pattern. . In addition, when executing the variable display of the second special symbol, if a jackpot occurs during the time saving state, the variable patterns are variable pattern PC3-1 (normal reach), variable pattern PC3-2 (super reach α), variable pattern PC3-2 (super reach α), variable pattern One of the patterns PC3-3 (super reach β) is determined.

In addition, as shown in Figure 282-4, when performing the variable display of the second special symbol, if the small hit A to C occurs during the normal state, the variable pattern PA3-6 (normal reach) is used as the variable pattern. determined. In addition, if a small hit C occurs during the time saving state, the following fluctuation patterns are available: fluctuation pattern PD3-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PD3-2 (super reach α), and fluctuation pattern PD3-3 (super reach β). It will be decided either way.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 282-4, in this example, when performing a variable display of the second special symbol, if a small hit A or B (with time saving) occurs during the time saving state, as a variation pattern, Either the variation pattern PD3-4 (non-reach in shortened variation → development performance) or the variation pattern PD3-5 (normal reach → development performance) is determined.

Further, in this example, in the normal symbol process processing (step S26), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol is a hit (ordinary symbol hit), and based on the determination result, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol is a hit (ordinary symbol hit). Control is performed to execute the variable display, but in this example, in the normal state, it is decided that the probability of hitting a normal figure is 10%, and in the case of the time saving state, the probability is 90%. We decide to hit the normal map based on the probability. In addition, the CPU 103 controls the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning hole) to be in an open state based on the determination that the normal symbol has been won in the normal symbol process process (step S26).

In this way, in this example, when the display result of small win A or small win B is derived and displayed, and when the display result of small win C is derived and displayed, the specific effect is changed during variable display. The rate at which development effects are executed differs. Specifically, in the case of a small win A or B, a pasting effect is performed, but in the case of a small win C, an extended effect is not performed. Therefore, inconsistency between the pre-read preview performance and the performance after the jackpot game state or the time-saving state can be avoided, so that the pre-read preview performance can be suitably executed.

In addition, in the case of small hit A or small hit B (with time saving), a common fluctuation pattern may be provided for small hit C (without time saving), loss or jackpot.

(Processing after small hit closure)
FIG. 282-5 is a flowchart showing the small hit closure post-processing (step 090IWS116) in the special symbol process process in the feature section 090IW. In the small win closing post-processing, the CPU 103 checks whether the small win end display timer is set (step 090IWS451), and if the small win end display timer is set, the process moves to step 090IWS453. If the small hit end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 sets the small hit end display timer to a display corresponding to the time during which the small hit end display is performed on the image display device 5 (small hit end display time). A value corresponding to the time is set (step 090IWS452), and the process ends.

In step 090IWS453, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the small winning end display timer. Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the small win end display timer is 0, that is, whether the small win end display time has elapsed (step 090IWS454). If the time has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the small winning end display time has elapsed, the CPU 103 checks whether the V winning flag is set (step 090IWS455). If the V winning flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the time saving flag and the time saving number counter (step 090IWS456). Further, the CPU 103 resets the V winning flag (step 090IWS457). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a jackpot start designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 090IWS458). Further, the CPU 103 sets a timer for the time before opening the big prize opening (step 090IWS459).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot start pre-processing (step 090IWS117) (step 090IWS460).

When it is confirmed in the process of step 090IWS456 that the V winning flag is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not it is a small win A (step 090IWS461). In the case of small win A, it is checked whether the non-V winning flag is set (step 090IWS461a). If the non-V winning flag is not set, the process moves to step 090IWS465. If the non-V winning flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag (step 090IWS462). The time saving number counter is set to "10" (step 090IWS463). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a small hit end designation A command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 090IWS464). Next, the process moves to step 090IWS465.

Further, when the CPU 103 confirms that the small win is not A (N in step 090IWS461), it checks whether the small win is B (step 090IWS467). In the case of small win B, it is checked whether the non-V winning flag is set (step 090IWS467a). If the non-V winning flag is not set, the process moves to step 090IWS465. If the non-V winning flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag (step 090IWS468). The time saving number counter is set to "5" (step 090IWS469). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the small hit end designation B command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 090IWS470). Next, the process moves to step 090IWS465.

Moreover, when the CPU 103 confirms that it is not a small hit B (N in step 090IWS467), it performs control to transmit a small hit end designation C command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 090IWS471). Next, the process moves to step 090IWS465.

In step 090IWS465, the CPU 103 resets the small hit flag (step 090IWS465). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a small hit end designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 090IWS462). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step 090IWS110) (step 090IWS463).

In addition, a value is set in the timer that measures the ending period after the closing of the small hit depending on whether it is a small hit A or B (with time saving) or small winning C (no time saving), but in case of small hit A. Alternatively, the value is set so that the ending period in the case of B (with time reduction) is longer than the ending period in the case of small hit C (without time reduction).

(Special drawing waiting process)
FIG. 282-6 and FIG. 282-7 are flowcharts showing the special symbol per waiting process (step S173) in the production control process shown in FIG. 280 in the characteristic section 090IW. In the special figure hit waiting process, the production control CPU 120 first checks whether the jackpot stop flag is set (step 090IWS871). The jackpot stop flag is a flag indicating that the jackpot symbol has already been derived and displayed, but before the jackpot start designation command is received, and is set in step 090IWS875, which will be described later. If the jackpot stop flag is set, the process moves to step 090IWS876.

If the jackpot stop flag is not set, the production control CPU 120 checks whether the small hit stop flag is set (step 090IWS872). The small hit stop flag is a flag indicating that the small winning symbols have already been derived and displayed, but before the small winning start designation command is received, and is set in step 090IWS883, which will be described later. If the small hit stop flag is set, the process moves to step 090IWS885.

If the small hit stop flag is not set, the performance control CPU 120 performs control to stop and display the determined stop symbols (loss symbols, jackpot symbols, small win symbols) (step 090IWS873).

When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step 090IWS873 (Y in step 090IWS874), the performance control CPU 120 sets a jackpot stop flag (step 090IWS875). Next, the production control CPU 120 checks whether or not a jackpot start designation command has been received (step 090IWS876). It should be noted that whether or not the jackpot start designation command has been received can be determined by, for example, checking whether the jackpot start designation command reception flag (see step 090 IWS622) is set. If the jackpot start designation command has not been received, the process ends immediately.

If the jackpot start designation command has been received, the production control CPU 120 resets the jackpot stop flag (step 090IWS877). Next, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the jackpot performance (step 090IWS878). Then, the production control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 090IWS879), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number Control of the presentation device (image display device 5 as presentation component, various lamps as presentation component, and speaker 27 as presentation component) is executed according to data 1) (step 090 IWS880).

Then, the production control CPU 120 updates the value of the production control process flag to a value corresponding to the production process during the jackpot (step 090IWS881).

If the jackpot symbol has not been stopped and displayed in the process of step 090IWS873 (N in step 090IWS874), the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the small win symbol has been stopped and displayed in the process of step 090IWS882 (step 090IWS882). . When the small hit symbols are stopped and displayed in the process of step 090IWS882 (Y in step 090IWS882), the production control CPU 120 sets a small hit stop flag (step 090IWS883). Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether or not the small hit start designation command has been received (step 090IWS885). In addition, whether or not the small hit start designation command has been received can be determined by, for example, checking in the command analysis process whether or not a flag indicating that the small hit start designation command has been received is set. If the small winning start designation command has not been received, the process ends as is.

If the small hit start designation command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 resets the small hit stop flag (step 090IWS886). Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether it is a small hit A or a small hit B (with time saving) (step 090IWS887a). If it is a small hit A or B, a process table for a small hit notification effect that notifies a small hit and a right hit instruction A that instructs a right hit is selected (step 090IWS887b). In addition, if it is not small hit A or small hit B, that is, if it is small hit C (no time saving), there will be a V winning promotion performance that encourages the game ball to enter the V winning hole and a right hit instruction B that instructs right hitting. process data (step 090IWS887b). Note that the right-handed hitting instruction A and the right-handed hitting instruction B have different modes. Further, the right-handed hitting instruction is different from the right-handed hitting instruction C in the time saving state. For example, the difference in aspect is the size, position, and content of the image for instructing right-handed batting.

Then, the production control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 090IWS888), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number Control of the presentation device (the image display device 5 as the presentation component, various lamps as the presentation component, and the speaker 27 as the presentation component) is executed according to the data 1) (step 090IWS889). Further, the performance control CPU 120 sets a small win performance period measurement timer for measuring the performance period during the small win game (step 090IWS890).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit performance process (step 090IWS891).

In addition, in this example, the special variable winning ball device is controlled to be in the open state during the small winning game, so in the small winning performance processing, a performance corresponding to the opening of the special variable winning ball device is performed as a small winning performance. executed.

If it is determined that there will be neither a jackpot nor a small hit (N in step 090IWS882), that is, if it is determined that it is a loss, the production control CPU 120 changes the value of the production control process flag. It is updated to a value corresponding to the display start waiting process (step S170) (step 090IWS895).

(Example of production)
Next, specific examples of effects will be described in the case of small win A or B (with time saving) and in the case of small win C (with no time saving).

FIGS. 282-8 to 282-10 show the screen transition when a small win A or a small win B (with time saving) occurs in the normal state (low probability/low base state).

As shown in FIG. 282-8(A), when controlled in the normal state (low probability/low base state), the image display device 5 displays the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the upper left corner. The small pattern 090IW100 on the left middle right is displayed. In this example, since most starting winnings occur in the first starting winning hole in the normal state, an example is shown in which a game ball enters the first starting winning hole and the variable display of small symbols 090IW100 is started. . Then, in conjunction with the variable display of the small pattern 090IW100, the decorative pattern 090IW101 on the left center right, which is larger than the small pattern 090IW100, starts to change at the center of the screen.

As shown in FIGS. 282-8(B) and (C), it is assumed that the left and right ornamental symbols 090IW101 have stopped and become normal reach due to the jackpot symbol. At this time, the small pattern 090IW100 remains displayed in a variable manner.

As shown in FIG. 282-8(D), it is assumed that the decorative pattern 090IW101 inside has stopped and the missing pattern has stopped. At this time, the decorative pattern 090IW101 is not in a completely stopped state but in a temporarily stopped state with shaking. Note that the small design 090IW100 remains displayed in a variable manner.

As shown in FIG. 282-8(E), the temporarily stopped decorative pattern 090IW101 is once erased and the development effect is executed. In this example, the characters 090IW102 indicating that the time saving state is being controlled are displayed larger than the small pattern 090IW100 in the center of the screen. Note that the small design 090IW100 remains displayed in a variable manner.

As shown in FIG. 282-8(F), after the development effect shown in FIG. 282-8(E) is executed, the temporarily stopped decorative pattern 090IW101 is again displayed in a variable manner. At this time, the small pattern 090IW100 remains displayed in a variable manner.

As shown in FIGS. 282-8(G) and (H), it is assumed that the left and right decorative symbols 090IW101 have stopped and become a ready-to-win state for small win A or small win B. At this time, the small pattern 090IW100 remains displayed in a variable manner.

As shown in FIG. 282-9(I), it is assumed that the remaining decorative symbols 090IW101 have stopped and the small winning symbol "135" of small winning A or small winning B has stopped. At this time, the small pattern 090IW100 also stops at "135" at the same time.

As shown in FIG. 282-9 (J), when the small winning pattern "135" stops in the small pattern 090IW100 and the decorative pattern 090IW101, the small winning occurs in the pre-opening time before the special variable winning ball device is in the open state. The characters 090IW103 indicating that the game has started are displayed larger than the small symbol 090IW100 in the center of the screen.

As shown in Figure 282-9 (K), when the small winning game starts, the background A indicating that the small winning is in progress is displayed, and the text "Small winning" is displayed to notify that the small winning game is in progress. 090IW105 is displayed. In addition, in the case of small win A or small win B, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the V winning hole, making it difficult to generate a jackpot. For this reason, although it is more unfortunate for the player than small win C, which is more likely to generate a jackpot, in the case of small win A or small win B, the time is controlled to be shortened by V non-winning. Therefore, in order to make the game ball enter the special variable winning ball device, the right-hand hit instruction display (right-hand hit instruction A) 090IW106 is displayed, and the right-hand hit instruction is also displayed so as not to unnecessarily provoke the player and make him feel disappointed. Display (right-handed instruction A) 090IW106 is displayed in a small and inconspicuous manner at the bottom right of the screen. The right-handed hitting instruction display 090IW106 is composed of the words "right-handed hitting" and one right-pointing arrow. In order to make the right hit instruction display 090IW106 less noticeable, the small winning medium background A has a flashy background that attracts the player's interest, such as by featuring a character.

As shown in FIG. 282-9(L), when the small winning game state ends without winning the V winning slot, an end screen is displayed during the ending period of the small winning. For example, the background and characters corresponding to the end screen are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 282-9(M), after the end screen of the small winning game is displayed, the start screen of the time saving state is displayed. For example, an image indicating that the time saving state has started and the number of changes in the time saving state are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 282-9 (N), when the display of the start screen of the time saving state is finished, the variable display of the small pattern 090IW100 and the decorative pattern 090IW101 on the left middle right is started, and the control of the time saving state is started. When control of the time saving state is started, the background of the time saving state is displayed, and the remaining number of fluctuations in the time saving state 090IW107 is displayed at the upper right of the screen. Furthermore, during the time saving state, a right-hand hit instruction display (right-hand hit instruction C) 090IW108 is displayed at the top of the screen in order to cause the game ball to enter the passage gate 41 and the variable winning ball device 6B. The right-hand hitting instruction display 090IW108 during the time-saving state is composed of the words "right-hand hitting" and two right-pointing arrows. Note that the right-handed hitting instruction display 090IW108 is larger than the right-handed hitting instruction display 090IW106, and the display position is also different.

As shown in FIGS. 282-9(O) and 282-10(P)(Q), it is assumed that the decorative pattern 090IW101 has stopped, the small pattern 090IW100 has stopped, and the missed pattern has stopped.

As shown in FIG. 282-10(R), the next variation is then started, and when the variation display of the ornamental symbol 090IW101 and the small symbol 090IW100 is started, the remaining number of variations 090IW107 is subtracted. Thereafter, similar control is performed until the time saving state ends.

FIGS. 282-11 and 282-12 show the screen transition when the small hit C (no time saving) occurs in the normal state (low probability/low base state).

As shown in FIG. 282-11(A), when the image display device 5 is controlled to the normal state (low probability/low base state), the upper left corresponds to the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The small pattern 090IW100 on the left middle right is displayed. In this example, since most starting winnings occur in the first starting winning hole in the normal state, an example is shown in which a game ball enters the first starting winning hole and the variable display of small symbols 090IW100 is started. . Then, in conjunction with the variable display of the small pattern 090IW100, the decorative pattern 090IW101 on the left center right, which is larger than the small pattern 090IW100, starts to change at the center of the screen.

As shown in FIGS. 282-11(B), (C), and (D), it is assumed that the decorative pattern 090IW101 on the left center right has stopped, and the small winning pattern "357" of small winning C has stopped. At this time, the small pattern 090IW100 also stops at "357" at the same time.

As shown in FIG. 282-11(E), when the small winning pattern "357" stops in the small pattern 090IW100 and the decorative pattern 090IW101, the small winning will occur in the pre-opening time before the special variable winning ball device is in the open state. The characters 090IW103 indicating that the game has started are displayed larger than the small symbol 090IW100 in the center of the screen.

As shown in Figure 282-11 (F), when the small winning game starts, the background B during the small winning is displayed, and the game ball is launched aiming at the V winning hole of the special variable winning ball device. The characters 090IW109, "Aim for V!", are displayed to notify you of this. In addition, in the case of small win C, it is easy for the game ball to enter the V winning hole, making it easy to generate a jackpot. Therefore, players are happy because they can get a large amount of balls. Therefore, in order to cause the game ball to enter the special variable winning ball device and generate a jackpot, the right-handed hitting instruction display (right-handed hitting instruction B) 090IW110 is displayed, and the right-handed hitting instruction display 090IW110 is displayed in a manner that stands out greatly in the center of the screen. Display in . The right-handed game instruction display 090IW110 is composed of the words "right-handed game" and three right-pointing arrows. In order to make the right hit instruction display 090IW107 more conspicuous, the small winning medium background B is a simple screen without characters or the like, and is a plain background that does not attract the player's interest. Note that the right-hand hitting instruction display 090IW110 is larger than the right-hand hitting instruction display 090IW106 in small hit A or small hit B and the right hitting instruction display 090IW108 during time saving, and the display position is also different.

In this way, the right-hand hitting instruction display 090IW106 for small win A or small hit B, the right-hand hitting instruction display 090IW110 for small hit C, and the right-hand hitting instruction display 090IW108 during time saving are different in size, display position, display mode ( number of arrows) are both different.

As shown in Figure 282-11 (G), it is suggested that when a prize is entered in the V winning hole and the small winning game state ends, a winning occurs in the V winning hole and a jackpot occurs during the ending period of the small winning. The character "V" 090IW104 is displayed in the center of the screen.

As shown in FIG. 282-12(H), next, the letters 090IW111 indicating that the jackpot game (second round) has started are displayed larger than the small symbol 090IW100 in the center of the screen.

As shown in FIG. 282-12(I), when the jackpot game (second round) is started, the background of the jackpot is displayed, and the game is played in the jackpot game state. The same goes for the third and fourth rounds. In addition, in this example, we will explain an example in which a small hit C occurs during the normal state, but even if a small hit C occurs during the time saving state, the same effect as described above will be performed during the small win game, and the small win will be A larger right-hand hit instruction display is displayed than in the case of hit A or small hit B. Further, different performances may be performed and the size of the right-hitting instruction display may be made different depending on whether a small hit C occurs during the normal state or when a small hit C occurs during the time saving state.

In this way, in this example, the special variable winning ball device is in the open state when the display result of small hit A or small hit B is derived and displayed, and when the display result of small hit C is derived and displayed. The effects that are executed when controlled by are different. Specifically, when the small win is A or B, the characters 090IW105 indicating that the small win is in progress are displayed during the small win game (Fig. 282-9). K)), the characters 090IW109 "Aim for V!" are displayed to inform that the game ball will be fired aiming at the V winning hole of the special variable winning ball device (FIG. 282-11(F)). Therefore, when a display result that results in a small win is derived and displayed, an effect can be suitably executed.

Further, in this example, the variable prize winning ball device 6B is provided so that a game ball passing through a right-handed hitting path can be entered by hitting the game ball to the right side of the game area so that the game ball can flow down. Then, a launch promotion display related to promoting the launch of the game ball to the right-handed path is performed, and when the display result of small hit A or small hit B is derived and displayed, and the display result of small hit C is derived and displayed. The firing promotion display is performed in different ways depending on the time. Specifically, when it is a small hit C, it is easier to generate a jackpot unlike when it is a small hit A or B, so when it is a small hit A or B, the right hit instruction display 090IW106 (Figure 282-9 (K) (see FIG. 282-11(F)) is displayed, and when the small hit is C, a right hit instruction display 090IW110 (see FIG. 282-11(F)) is displayed. Therefore, the game can be progressed suitably.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 282-8(E), it is possible to execute a performance that suggests that the time saving state will be controlled as a preview performance of a small hit. That is, the characters 090IW102 indicating that the advanced effect is executed and the time saving state is controlled are displayed. As a result, the variety of pre-read preview presentations increases, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Modified example)
Next, a modified example of the effect executed in this feature section 090IW will be explained. In the following, in the modified example, in FIG. 282-2, when the display result of small hit A or small hit B is derived and displayed, and when the display result of small hit C is derived and displayed, the special variable prize We have given an example in which the ease with which a game ball enters the V-winning hole is varied by varying the opening pattern of the ball device, and whether or not the time-saving state is controlled is controlled. The special variable winning ball device is opened with the same pattern when the display result of A or small hit B is derived and displayed and when the display result of small hit C is derived and displayed, but the special variable winning ball is By varying the time before opening the device, the ease with which a game ball enters a V winning hole is varied, and it is controlled whether or not to control the time saving state. Note that description of parts common to FIG. 282-2 will be omitted.

FIG. 282-13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening pattern of the small winning game. The operation of the V winning opening opening/closing board is the same for small win A or B (with time saving) and small win C (no time saving).

As shown in FIG. 282-13 (A), in the case of small win A or B (with time reduction), after starting the small win game at timing S1, when the pre-opening period t1 (fanfare time) has elapsed, at timing S2. The special variable winning ball device is controlled to be in the open state. In this way, by setting the pre-opening period t1, the special variable winning ball device is controlled to be in the open state when the V winning opening opening/closing plate is being controlled to be in the closed state. Then, by repeating the operation of opening the special winning hole for 0.05 seconds, closing it for 1 second, and opening the special winning hole again for 0.05 seconds, the special winning hole can be opened 10 times with one small hit. It will be released.

As shown in FIG. 282-12 (B), in the case of small win C (no time saving), after starting the small win game at timing S1, the pre-release period t2 (fanfare time), which is shorter than the pre-release period t1, After the elapse of time, the special variable winning ball device is controlled to be in the open state at timing S2. In this way, by setting the pre-opening period t2, the special variable winning ball device is controlled to be in the open state when the V winning a prize opening/closing plate is controlled to be in the open state. Then, by repeating the operation of opening the special winning hole for 0.05 seconds, closing the special winning hole for 1 second, and then opening the special winning hole for 0.05 seconds again according to the same pattern as in Figure 282-13 (A), A special prize opening will be opened 10 times with one small hit.

As mentioned above, in this example, when the display result of small hit A or small hit B is derived and displayed, and when the display result of small hit C is derived and displayed, special variable winning balls are used in the same pattern. The device can be controlled in an open state. Therefore, it is possible to suitably control whether or not to control the time saving state, and it is possible to prevent the display result from being derived and displayed as a small win from being known in advance.

In addition, in this example, the V winning opening/closing board performs a common operation when the display result of small hit A or small win B is derived and displayed and when the display result of small hit C is derived and displayed. The special variable winning ball device is controlled to be in the open state when the display result of small hit A or small hit B is derived and displayed and when the display result of small hit C is derived and displayed. The period until is different. Therefore, it is possible to suitably control whether or not to control the time saving state.

(Other variations)
In addition, in this characteristic part 090IW, it is possible to provide a plurality of types of small winnings in which it is impossible to win a game ball into the V winning hole. And, as multiple types of small wins, a small hit that enters the special winning hole but enters the V winning hole but shifts to a time saving state when the game ball does not enter the V winning hole, and a small hit that enters the special winning hole but enters the V winning hole. A small win that does not shift to a time-saving state when a ball does not win is provided. Then, there is a small hit that enters the special winning slot but the game ball does not enter the V winning slot, which shifts to the time saving state, and a small hit that enters the special winning slot but the game ball does not enter the V winning slot. It is possible to perform a different performance depending on the small hit that does not shift to the time saving state. The performance may be made different between the fluctuating state and the small winning game state, or both may be different.

In addition, in each of the characteristic parts and modifications described above, the transition to the time saving state (high base state) is always exemplified through the jackpot state or small win state, but the present invention The invention is not limited to this, and for example, when a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed as a special symbol, the transition to the time-saving state (high base state) may be made without operating the special variable winning ball device 7. .

In addition, as the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, these time-saving symbols may be part of the winning symbol or may be a part of the small winning symbol.

In addition, when performing lottery processing related to the derivation display of time-saving symbols, the lottery may be performed using special random numbers for the time-saving symbol lottery, or lottery random numbers for losing symbols or jackpot symbols may be used for these lottery processing. The lottery may be performed using other random numbers for performing a lottery, such as a lottery random number for small winning symbols, a random number for jackpot lottery determination, a lottery random number for a falling lottery.

Further, these time-saving symbols may be of a plurality of types, and may be used in combination with other symbol combinations that are displayed as missed symbols.

In addition, when drawing a time-saving symbol, if the setting value can be changed, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol does not change according to the setting value, that is, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol at all setting values. are the same, but the lottery probabilities of these time-saving symbols may be different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In addition, regarding the timing of obtaining random numbers when drawing time-saving symbols, whether using a special random number or another random number, the starting opening (first starting winning opening), It is sufficient to win at the time of winning in the second starting prize opening).

In addition, for winnings when drawing time-saving symbols, if special random numbers (time-saving random numbers) are used, the winning value is the lottery result using the dedicated random numbers (time-saving random numbers), and the small winning symbol is used in the time-saving symbol lottery. When using random numbers, the random number of a specific small winning symbol can be used as the winning value, and when the random number for the fall lottery judgment value is used for the time saving symbol lottery, the random number for the fall lottery judgment value can be used as the winning value. For example, a time saving area may be provided inside the special variable prize winning ball device 7, and the passage of the game ball through the time saving area may be regarded as a winning of the time saving symbol.

In addition, regarding winning when a time-saving symbol is drawn, if a winning symbol random number is used in the time-saving symbol lottery, a specific losing symbol random number is used as the winning value, and if a jackpot symbol random number is used in the time-saving symbol lottery, a specific winning symbol is used as the winning value. The jackpot symbol random number value can be used as the winning value. However, if these random numbers are used as winning values, performance other than the jackpot probability will vary depending on the settings, so this is only possible if the set values cannot be changed.

Moreover, the determination timing of the lottery result of the time-saving symbol may be executed at the timing after the jackpot determination. In addition, the time-saving symbol lottery is not executed in the time-saving state (high base) or in the high probability state, but only in the low probability low base state, no matter which random number is used for the lottery. . However, if the time saving symbol is derived and displayed in a time saving state, even if the number of time saving times is reset or the lottery is not selected, this may be determined for each gaming machine.

Further, the number of time saving times when the time saving symbols are derived and displayed can be a plurality of predetermined times depending on the winning value (symbol) and each gaming state. Further, the time-saving granting conditions can be made different for each time-saving symbol.

In addition, when the number of time-saving symbols differs depending on the time-saving symbol, the lottery for distributing the time-saving symbol can be changed between the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2.

Further, even when the same time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time-savings awarded may be different depending on the gaming state at that time. However, it is required that it be predetermined for the gaming state.

Moreover, a lottery result of "time saving number of times" can be included as a lottery result of a time saving symbol in a low probability low base state.

In addition, a drawing lottery for the time-saving end symbol (time-saving end lottery) may be executed, and the number of time-saving times may be set as the number of times after the time-saving start until the time-saving end symbol is derived and displayed, or until a jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. In other words, the number of time reductions may not be set, but may be unlimited in principle.

Further, the number of times of time saving and the granting conditions may be different between the time saving state controlled by the time saving symbol and the time saving state controlled by the occurrence of a jackpot.

Further, when the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is when the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, in the case where a small winning symbol random number is used for the lottery of time saving symbols, and when the small winning is won and the time saving state is to be entered, the end of the small winning operation is the timing at which the time saving state is controlled.

Further, in the case of a lottery using a structure, the timing at which the time saving state is controlled is the timing at which the operation of the structure ends in a game state in which the structure is operated (for example, a small winning state).

In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that is controlled to a high probability low base state for a predetermined variable display number of times after hitting a jackpot (so-called fixed number fixed variable display machine (ST machine)), the high probability low base state is controlled when the gaming hall opens. After the high probability low base state is finished after variable display has been performed a predetermined number of times, the time saving state may be controlled.

In addition, when a time-saving limiter function is installed and a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of times of the time-saving limiter is updated.

Further, the symbol confirmation time of the time saving symbol may be set to be a different time from the symbol confirmation time of other symbols.

In addition, in this example, it is possible to configure so that when the number of variations of the symbol in the normal state reaches a predetermined number of times, the time saving state is controlled (so-called ceiling). Specifically, a counter is provided to count the number of fluctuations until the time-saving state is controlled, and the counter starts counting when the RAM is initialized (when operating the clear switch, when changing settings, etc.) or when the jackpot ends. do. Then, when the counted number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number, the time saving state is controlled. The counting method is to subtract the value set in the counter every time there is a change and determine whether the count value becomes 0 or not, thereby determining whether the number of changes has reached a predetermined number. Alternatively, the value of the counter may be incremented each time there is a change, and it may be determined whether the number of changes has reached a predetermined number. Note that the predetermined number of times until the time saving state is controlled may be determined by lottery. This makes it impossible to know when the time-saving state is controlled, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, the predetermined number of times n, which is the number of times the symbol changes until the time saving state is controlled, is, for example, when the denominator of the jackpot probability is P (for example, when the jackpot probability is 1/319, P = 319), It is possible to satisfy 2.5P≦n≦3.0P. In addition, the predetermined number of times N, which is the number of times the symbol changes until the time saving state is controlled, is, for example, when the denominator of the jackpot probability is P (for example, when the jackpot probability is 1/319, P = 319), It is possible to satisfy 0.4P≦N≦3.8P. Note that these are just examples, and P is not limited to these ranges.

Further, the setting of the predetermined number of times P during RAM initialization (when operating a clear switch, changing settings, etc.) and when hitting a jackpot may be carried over from the number before initialization. In this case, it can be expected that the number of fluctuations will reach the predetermined number P soon after the start of the game, and the time will be controlled to be shortened, so that the operating rate of the pachinko game machine can be increased.
On the other hand, when initializing the RAM (when operating a clear switch, changing settings, etc.) or setting the predetermined number of times P when hitting a jackpot, the number of times before initialization may not be carried over. In this case, any player can play the game under fair conditions.

Also, when the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number and the time saving state is controlled, the time saving state may be ended when the number of fluctuations reaches the upper limit number of times, or the time saving state may be continued until the next jackpot. good.

Note that counting of the number of fluctuations may be started again when the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number. If configured in this way, for example, if an upper limit number of times of the time saving state is set and the upper limit number of times is set larger than a predetermined number of times until the time saving state is controlled, the count value will reach the predetermined number of times during the time saving state. Since the upper limit number of times is set again, it is possible to continue the time saving state until the next jackpot while setting the upper limit number of times.

It is also possible to not count the number of fluctuations during the time saving state. In this case, if an upper limit number of times of the time saving state is set, the time saving state ends when the number of fluctuations reaches the upper limit number of times.

In addition, when the number of fluctuations in the normal state reaches the first number, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to control the time saving state, and if the lottery is not won, the time reduction is performed when the number of fluctuations reaches the second number. (a so-called pattern that reaches the ceiling via a false ceiling).

In addition, if a ceiling is provided in the characteristic part IW090 and it is configured to be controlled to a time-saving state when the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number, regardless of whether it is a small hit A or a small hit B (with time reduction). The counter value continues counting without being reset. In the case of small win C (no time saving), if a jackpot does not occur, the counter value continues counting without being reset. As a result, in the case of a small win A or B (with time saving), the count value may reach a predetermined number of times during the time saving after the small winning game ends, and the time saving state may be extended. Therefore, it is possible to create a sense of expectation for the development after the end of the small winning game. In addition, even if a small hit C (no time saving) occurs and a jackpot does not occur, there is a possibility that the time saving state will be controlled immediately after the small winning game ends, so please look forward to the development after the small winning game ends. You can have it.

As explained above, this feature section 090IW discloses the configurations of the gaming machine shown in (Means 1) to (Means 8) shown below.

(Measure 1)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) based on a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) being derived and displayed,
a state control means capable of controlling a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state;
It has a special area (e.g., V prize opening) and is controlled into a first state (e.g., open state) in which game media can easily enter and a second state (e.g., closed state) in which game media cannot enter or it is difficult to enter. Possible variable means (for example, special variable winning ball device),
A production execution means capable of executing production (for example, as shown in FIG. 280, a portion of the production control CPU 120 that executes step S76),
When a special display result different from the specific display result (for example, a small winning symbol) is displayed, the variable means can be controlled to the first state (for example, as shown in FIG. 282-1, the variable means for game control the part that executes step S118 in the microcomputer 100),
The special display results include a first special display result (for example, a display result that results in a small win A or B) and a second special display result that is different from the first special display result (for example, a small win C). (display results);
The state control means includes:
In the normal state, if the game medium does not pass through the special area when the first special display result (for example, the display result of small win A or small win B) is derived and displayed, the special state is entered. (For example, as shown in FIG. 282-5, the part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes the process of step 090IWS462 when Y in step 090IWS461a and the process of step 090IWS468 when Y in step 090IWS467a),
In the normal state, if the game medium does not pass through the special area when the second special display result (for example, the display result of small win C) is derived and displayed, the control to the special state is not performed ( For example, as shown in FIG. 282-5, when step 090IWS467 in the game control microcomputer 100 is N, the processing of step 090IWS461a and step 090IWS462, step 090IWS467a and step 090IWS468 is not executed),
The ease with which the game medium passes through the special area differs between when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 282-2). (part shown),
The effect execution means performs different effects when the variable means enters the first state in a case where the first special display result is derived and displayed and a case where the second special display result is derived and displayed. It is executable (for example, as shown in FIG. 282-7, the part that executes steps 090IWS887b and 887c in the production control CPU 120, the part shown in FIG. 282-9 (K) and FIG. 282-11 (F)).
According to such a configuration, when the special display result is derived and displayed, it is possible to suitably perform the effect.

In addition, in this example, an example was given in which the state is shifted to the time saving state after the end of the small winning game on the condition that a prize is won in the special winning opening but the V prize is not won, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, in the case of a small win, the time saving state may be entered after the small win game ends on the condition that the game ball does not enter the special winning opening.

(Means 2) In means 1,
The rate at which the specific performance is executed in the performance that is being variablely displayed differs between the case where the first special display result is derived and displayed and the case where the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, 3. As shown in Figure 282-4, the development effect is performed when there is a small win A or B, but is not performed when there is a small win C).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid inconsistency between the pre-read preview performance and the post-advantageous state or special state performance, so that the pre-read preview performance can be suitably executed.

(Means 3) In means 1 or 2,
The variable prize winning device is provided so that game media passing through a predetermined route (for example, a right-handed route) can enter,
A firing promotion display means for displaying a firing promotion display (for example, displaying a right-handed instruction) regarding promoting the firing of game media to the predetermined route. For example, as shown in FIG. 282-7, steps 090IWS887b and 887c are executed in the performance control CPU 120 ),
The firing promotion display means performs the firing promotion display in different manners when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, FIG. 282 282-9 (K) and FIG. 282-11 (F)).
According to such a configuration, the game can be suitably progressed.

In addition, in this example, at the time of small win A or small win B, which shifts to the time saving state after the small win game ends on the condition that there is no V win, the special variable winning ball device is set to the open state so as not to win a V prize. However, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, a small win may be provided in which the special variable winning ball device is opened to make it easier to win a V prize, as well as to shift to a time saving state after the end of the small win game on the condition that a V prize has not been won.

(Means 4) In any of means 1 to 3,
The variable winning means can be controlled to the first state using different patterns when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, (portion shown in Figure 282-2).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably control whether or not to control to a special state.

(Means 5) In any of means 1 to 4,
The variable winning means can be controlled to the first state using the same pattern when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably control whether or not to control the special state, and it is possible to prevent which special display result will be derived and displayed from being known in advance.

(Means 6) In any of means 1 to 5,
The variable winning means includes a movable member (for example, a V winning opening/closing plate) that performs a common operation when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed. ),
When the first special display result is derived and displayed, the variable winning means is controlled to the first state when the movable member is in a state of obstructing passage of game media to the special area,
When the second special display result is derived and displayed, the variable winning means is controlled to the first state when the movable member does not obstruct passage of game media to the special area. For example, the part shown in Figure 282-2).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably control whether or not to control the special state.

(Means 7) In any of means 1 to 6,
The variable winning means includes a movable member (for example, a V winning opening/closing plate) that performs a common operation when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed. ),
The period until the variable winning means is controlled to the first state differs depending on whether the first special display result is derived and displayed or when the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 282-13).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably control whether or not to control the special state.

(Means 8) In any of means 1 to 7,
a plurality of types of special display results in which the game medium does not pass through the special area;
The plurality of types of special display results include the special display result in which the game medium is controlled to the special state when the game medium does not pass through the special area, and the special display result in which the game medium is controlled to the special state when the game medium does not pass through the special area. The special display result is not controlled by a state,
When the special display result is derived and displayed, the special display result is controlled to be in the special state when the game medium does not pass through the special area, and when the game medium is not passed through the special area, it is controlled to be in the special state. A different effect is performed when the special display result that is not displayed is derived and displayed.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably control whether or not to control to a special state.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 113IW)
Next, the characteristic part 113IW of this embodiment will be explained. In this feature section 113IW, the gaming state is controlled to be either a normal state, a time saving state, or a variable probability state (also controlled in a time saving state). In this example, in the time saving state, the average special symbol fluctuation time is shortened compared to the normal state, the average regular symbol fluctuation time is shortened compared to the normal state, and the average regular symbol fluctuation time is shortened compared to the normal state. The probability of winning a ``Puzu'' in the ``Puzu'' game increases. For example, in the normal state, the probability of hitting a common symbol is 10%, but in the time saving state, the probability of hitting a common symbol is increased to 90%, and a game ball enters the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting prize opening). It becomes easier to do. In addition, not only in such an aspect, but for example, in the time saving state, by lengthening the open time of the variable winning ball device 6B compared to the normal state, the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port) can be opened. It may be configured so that it is easier for game balls to win prizes.

Furthermore, in this example, in the variable probability state, the probability of hitting the jackpot (jackpot probability) is increased compared to the normal state and the time saving state. In addition, in this example, when controlled to the variable probability state, it is also controlled to the time saving state.

In addition, in this example, in addition to the case where the fluctuating display result is a jackpot and the jackpot game is controlled to a variable probability state or time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game, even when the fluctuating display result is a loss, the time-save winning symbol is derived and displayed. It may be controlled to shorten the time based on what has been done.

Furthermore, in this example, after the gaming machine is powered on (when RAM clear processing is executed) or after a jackpot occurs, even if the fluctuating display ends a predetermined number of times (in this example, 800 times), the next jackpot will not be displayed. Even if this does not occur, the system may be controlled to a time-saving state (relief time-saving). This relief time reduction is provided to help players who have not won a jackpot despite playing games for a long period of time (for example, to reduce investment in games). , a gaming state called "play time."

Hereinafter, the time-saving state that is controlled based on the occurrence of a jackpot will be referred to as "time-saving state A" or "time-saving state via jackpot", and the time-saving state that is controlled based on the stoppage of the losing symbol will be "time-saving state". "B" or "time saving state via time saving failure", in this example, after the power is turned on to the gaming machine (RAM clearing processing is executed) or after a jackpot occurs, a predetermined number of times (in this example, 800 times). A time saving state that is controlled when the next jackpot does not occur even after the variable display ends is sometimes referred to as a "time saving state C" or a "time saving state via rescue time saving".

In addition, in the time saving state, (1) control to increase the probability of hitting a normal symbol, (2) control to shorten the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and (3) opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port). (4) control to shorten the variation time of the special symbol can be performed, but all of these controls (1) to (4) may be performed, or (1) to (4) may be performed. Some of the controls in (4) may not be performed. For example, which one of (1) to (4) is controlled may be different in a time saving state via a jackpot, a time saving state via a time saving loss, and a time saving state via a rescue time saving, They may be the same.

Also, for example, the probability of hitting a normal pattern in a non-time saving state (normal state) is set to 100% (no deviation of a normal pattern), or the probability of hitting a normal pattern is substantially set to 100% by making the probability of a deviation of a normal pattern extremely low, In the time-saving state, some or all of (2) to (4) may be controlled without performing the control in (1) (that is, without changing the probability of hitting a regular symbol from the non-time-saving state). good.

Note that it is preferable that the number of fluctuations n until the rescue time is controlled to be shortened and the number of times N of time reduction in the rescue time reduction are defined as follows.

2.5P≦n≦3.0P
0.4P≦N≦3.8P
(P = denominator of jackpot probability ML, n = number of fluctuations, N = number of time savings)
Specifically, for example, if the jackpot probability is 1/300, the number of fluctuations n will be 750 to 900, and the number of time savings N will be 120 to 1140. In this example, since the jackpot probability differs for each set value s, the number of fluctuations ns for each set value (set value s: 1 to 6) is as follows. Since the jackpot probability when the set value is "1" is approximately 1/319, the number of fluctuations n1 is 797.5 to 957. Since the jackpot probability when the set value is "2" is approximately 1/310, the number of fluctuations n2 is 775 to 930. Since the jackpot probability when the set value is "3" is about 1/300, the number of fluctuations n3 is 750 to 900. Since the jackpot probability when the set value is "4" is approximately 1/290, the number of fluctuations n4 is 725 to 870. Since the jackpot probability when the set value is "5" is about 1/280, the number of fluctuations n5 is 700 to 840. Since the jackpot probability when the set value is "6" is approximately 1/270, the number of fluctuations n6 is 675 to 810. The following explanation will be given assuming that "800", which can be applied to any setting value, is set as the number of fluctuations n. Similarly, "800", which can be applied regardless of which setting value is set, is set as the number of time reductions N.

In addition, as the number of fluctuations n, we have set a value that can be applied regardless of which setting value is set, but it is applicable when the setting value "1" with the lowest probability of jackpot is set. It is sufficient to set the value to be obtained (as described above, the number of fluctuations n1 is 797.5 to 957). In other words, a value such as "900" may be set as the number of fluctuations n.

Similarly, the number of time savings N is set to a value that can be applied regardless of which setting value is set, but it is applicable when the setting value "1" with the lowest jackpot probability is set. Any value that can be set is sufficient.

In this example, it is assumed that the number of fluctuations n and the number of time reductions N are the same value, 800, but the number of fluctuations n may be greater than the number of time reductions N, or conversely, even if the number of fluctuations n is less than the number of time reductions N. good.

(Fluctuation pattern table)
FIGS. 283-1 and 283-2 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of variation pattern tables in the feature section 113IW. Of these, FIG. 283-1(A) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table A for jackpots excluding the relief time-shortening fluctuation. Further, FIG. 283-1(B) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table B for deviations in the normal state. Further, FIG. 283-1(C) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table C for the loss during the time saving state controlled via the jackpot. Further, FIG. 283-1(D) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table D for the time-saving state time control controlled via the time-saving difference.

Further, FIG. 283-1(E) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table E for failures in the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving. Further, FIGS. 283-2 (F) and (G) show specific examples of variation pattern tables F and G for deviations within the last 10 variations that shorten the relief time. Among these, the variation pattern table F shown in FIG. 283-2(F) is a variation pattern table immediately before relief time reduction that is selected when the number of pending memories (for example, the total number of pending memories) is 3 or less. Further, the variation pattern table F shown in FIG. 283-2 (G) is a variation pattern table immediately before relief time reduction that is selected when the number of pending memories (for example, the total number of pending memories) is 4 or more.

In addition, if the deviation occurs within 10 fluctuations immediately before the shortening of the relief time, a fluctuation pattern is selected using the fluctuation pattern tables F and G shown in FIGS. 283-2 (F) and (G). During the period from when the RAM is cleared until the jackpot is reached, a fluctuation pattern is selected using the fluctuation pattern table B shown in Figure 283-1 (B) even if it is within the 10 fluctuations immediately before the shortening of the relief time. It is.

Further, FIG. 283-2 (H) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table H for failure in the variable probability state. However, in this example, even in the variable probability state or the time saving state, if the number of pending memories is not 1 or more (if there is no pending memory), the variation pattern is determined using the variation pattern table B.

Further, FIGS. 283-2 (I) and (J) show specific examples of variation pattern tables I and J for failure in the relief time shortening entry variation. Among these, the variation pattern table I shown in FIG. 283-2(I) is a variation pattern table selected in the non-time saving state (normal state). Further, a variation pattern table J shown in FIG. 283-2 (J) is a variation pattern table selected when the time is shortened.

In addition, if the relief time shortening entry fluctuation results in a failure, the fluctuation pattern is selected using the fluctuation pattern tables I and J shown in Figures 283-2 (I) and (J). In the period from when the winning occurs to when the jackpot is reached, a fluctuation pattern is selected using the fluctuation pattern table B shown in FIG.

Further, FIGS. 283-2 (K) and (L) show specific examples of the fluctuation pattern tables K and L for the jackpot in the rescue time shortening rush fluctuation. Among these, the variation pattern table K shown in FIG. 283-2(K) is a variation pattern table selected in the non-time saving state (normal state). Further, a variation pattern table L shown in FIG. 283-2(L) is a variation pattern table selected when the time is shortened.

In addition, in the case of a jackpot in the relief time shortening fluctuation, the fluctuation pattern is selected using the fluctuation pattern tables K and L shown in Figures 283-2 (K) and (L), but if the RAM is cleared, In the period from when the winning occurs to when the jackpot is reached, a fluctuation pattern is selected using the fluctuation pattern table A shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 283-1(A), in this example, in the case of a jackpot, the variation patterns include variation pattern PB2-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PB2-2 (super reach α), variation pattern PB2 -3 (super reach β). In addition, the variation pattern for the jackpot has a special symbol variation time that is 10,000 ms longer than the variation pattern for the loss that performs the same reach effect. After performing a reach effect with the same length as the loss variation, a blessing effect to celebrate the jackpot or a re-draw effect to make it appear as if the lottery is being held again (for example, 10R jackpot A). This is to perform a re-lottery performance in which the jackpot symbol shown is temporarily stopped and changed to the jackpot symbol showing 10R jackpot B.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 283-1 (B), in this example, when there is a deviation in the normal state, the variation patterns are variation pattern PA1-1 (normal variation), variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach). , variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 283-1 (C), in this example, if there is a deviation during the time-saving state controlled via the jackpot, the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra shortening fluctuation), fluctuation pattern The pattern is determined to be one of pattern PA1-3 (shortening variation), variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), and variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 283-1 (D), in this example, if there is a deviation during the time saving state controlled via the time saving deviation, the variation pattern PA1-2 (ultra shortening variation), The variation pattern PA2-3 (shortened variation), the variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), the variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or the variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) is determined.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 283-1(E), in this example, if there is a deviation during the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving, the variation pattern PA1-4 (extremely shortened variation) is used as the variation pattern. , variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

As shown in FIGS. 283-1(C), 283-1(D), and 283-1(E), in this example, in the time shortening state, the variation pattern PA1-2 (very shortened variation) and the variation pattern Pattern PA1-3 (shortening variation) and variation pattern PA1-4 (extremely shortening variation) are determined at a high rate, and the average variation time is shorter than in the normal state. Furthermore, even in the same time-saving state, when the time-saving state is controlled via a time-saving error, the selection probability of variation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortening variation) is 80% compared to when the time-saving state is controlled via a jackpot. %, and the average fluctuation time is short. In addition, in the time saving state controlled via relief time saving, the selection rate of variation pattern PA1-4 (extremely shortening variation) is as high as 99%, compared to the time saving state controlled via time saving or jackpot. In comparison, the average fluctuation time is even shorter.

In addition, as shown in Figure 283-2 (F), in this example, if the failure occurs within 10 fluctuations immediately before the shortening of the relief time, even if the number of pending memories (for example, the total number of pending memories) is 3 or less, For example, the fluctuation pattern is one of fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), and fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β). The probability of determining the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation) is as high as 90%. In addition, as shown in Figure 283-2 (G), in this example, if the failure occurs within 10 fluctuations immediately before the shortening of the relief time, even if the number of pending memories (for example, the total number of pending memories) is 4 or more. For example, the variation pattern is one of variation pattern PA1-3 (shortened variation), variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), and variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β). The probability of determining the variation pattern PA1-3 (shortened variation) is as high as 90%.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 283-2 (H), in this example, if there is a deviation in the variable probability state, the variation patterns are variation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortening variation), variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach variation), and variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach variation). ), variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

In addition, as shown in Figures 283-1 (C) and (E), when determining the fluctuation pattern of the loss fluctuation, the time saving state via the relief time saving is shorter than the time saving state via the jackpot gaming state. The selection rate of variation patterns having variation time is high. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when the rescue time shortening is reached after playing the game for a long period of time.

In addition, as shown in Figures 283-1 (C) and (E), when determining the fluctuation pattern of the loss fluctuation, the time saving state via the relief time saving is better than the time saving state via the jackpot gaming state. The selection rate of fluctuating patterns with effects is low. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when the rescue time shortening is reached after playing the game for a long period of time.

As shown in FIG. 283-2 (H), in this example, in the variable probability state, the variation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened variation) is determined with a high probability of 90%, and the average variation time is further reduced than in the time-saving state. is shorter.

In addition, as shown in Figure 283-2 (I), in this example, if the rescue time-saving entry fluctuation results in a failure in the non-time-saving state, the fluctuation pattern PA3-1 (time-saving entry failure) is determined as the fluctuation pattern. be done. When the variation pattern PA3-1 is determined, a time-saving entry effect is performed to notify the transition (entering) to the time-saving state via the relief time-saving mode.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 283-2 (J), in this example, if the rescue time-saving entry fluctuation results in a failure in the time-saving state, the fluctuation pattern PA3-2 (time-saving promotion is lost) is determined as the fluctuation pattern. Ru. When the variation pattern PA3-2 is determined, a time-saving promotion effect is performed to notify the transition (promotion) to the time-saving state via the relief time-saving mode. Hereinafter, the transition from the time-saving state via time-saving failure to the time-saving state via relief time-saving may be referred to as "promotion."

Note that the time-saving entry performance and the time-saving promotion performance are both performances performed when the time-saving state C is controlled, but the content of the performance is different. Specifically, in the time-saving entry performance, a character string indicating control to the time-saving state C is displayed on the image display device 5 (see FIG. 283-12 (G)), while in the time-saving promotion performance, the character string is changed to the time-saving state C. A character string indicating control and promotion is displayed on the image display device 5 (see FIG. 283-15(D)). Furthermore, in the time-saving entry performance, a right-handed hitting notification image is displayed to encourage right-handed hitting (see Figure 283-12 (H)), while in the time-saving promotion performance, the right-handed hitting notification image is not displayed. (See Figure 283-15(D)). In this way, the notification mode for controlling to time-saving state C is different between when the normal state is controlled to time-saving state C and when it is controlled (promoted) from time-saving state B to time-saving state C. ing. Thereby, it is possible to give the player a special feeling when the time-saving state is promoted, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

In addition, in the case where the normal state is controlled to the time-saving state C and the case where the time-saving state B is controlled (promoted) to the time-saving state C, the notification mode of the control to the time-saving state C is common. Good too. For example, in any case, the variation pattern PA3-1 may be selected to perform a time-saving rush effect. Thereby, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of variation patterns and the number of performance data, and to save storage capacity.

In addition, as shown in Figure 283-2 (K), in this example, when a jackpot occurs due to the rescue time-saving change in the non-time-saving state, the change pattern PA3-3 (time-saving change pretending to be a jackpot) is used as the fluctuation pattern. It is determined. If the variation pattern PA3-3 is determined, a time-saving entry effect is performed to notify the transition (entering) to the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving mode, and then a jackpot is announced, and a congratulatory performance is performed. A re-lottery performance will be held. Note that the performance performed after the time-saving rush performance may be a performance that can be performed even when another variation pattern is selected, but it may not be performed when another variation pattern is selected. This can give the player a sense of surprise and specialness.

In addition, as shown in Figure 283-2 (L), in this example, when a jackpot occurs due to the relief time-saving rush fluctuation in the non-time-saving state, the fluctuation pattern PA3-4 (time-saving promotion fake jackpot) is used as the fluctuation pattern. It is determined. If the variation pattern is determined to be PA3-4, a time-saving promotion performance is performed to notify the transition (promotion) to a time-saving state via relief time-saving, and then a jackpot is announced and a congratulatory performance is performed. A re-lottery performance will be held. Note that the performance performed after the time-saving promotion performance may be a performance that can be performed even when another variation pattern is selected, but it may not be performed when another variation pattern is selected. This can give the player a sense of surprise and specialness.

In addition, the length of the fluctuation time is different depending on the case where you lose due to the relief time shortening fluctuation and the case where you win the jackpot due to the relief time shortening fluctuation, but the fluctuation pattern with the same length of fluctuation time or the common A variation pattern may be selected. This allows storage capacity to be reduced.

Note that the method of setting the fluctuation pattern table shown in Figures 283-1 and 283-2 is an example, and various ways are possible.

In addition, in this example, as shown in Figure 283-1 (E), during the time saving state via relief time saving, the selection rate of the variation pattern PA1-4 of extremely shortening variation of 1.5 seconds is high, and the variation display Because the digestion speed is fast, there are few types of executable preview performances and advance preview performances. For example, when in a time saving state via relief time saving, an effect image may be displayed at the edge of the display screen of the image display device 5, a lamp or LED may be turned on, a predetermined effect sound, or a normal effect may be displayed. Performances such as outputting different fluctuating stop sounds are performed.

In addition, in this example, a case is shown in which a variation pattern table E is provided exclusively during the time saving state via relief time saving, but the variation pattern table E is not provided exclusively during the time saving state via relief time saving, and for example, when The variation pattern may be determined using the variation pattern table C (see FIG. 283-1(C)) during the time saving state.

Additionally, in this example, when the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less, the case is shown in which the changeover pattern tables are switched to fluctuation pattern tables F and G (see Figures 283-2 (F) and (G)). , but is not limited to such embodiments. For example, the variation pattern table may be configured to be switched so that the reach ratio gradually decreases as the number of remaining variations until the relief time becomes short becomes smaller, or the number of breaks such as 100 or 200 remaining variations may be configured. It may be configured such that the remaining number of fluctuations can be suggested by switching the fluctuation pattern table only in this case.

(Test terminal processing)
FIGS. 283-3 and 283-4 are flowcharts showing processing examples related to the output of each test signal in test terminal processing. Note that the test terminal process is executed in the game control timer interrupt process.

In the test terminal process, the CPU 103 first clears the bits of each signal in the test signal output buffer of the output port buffers (step 113IWS31). Then, if it is during the jackpot symbol confirmation period (Y in step 113 IWS32), if it is in the jackpot period including the fanfare period and ending period (Y in step 113 IWS33), or if any of the time saving flags is set ( Step 113IWS34: Y), the bit of the firing position designation signal 3 in the test signal output buffer is set (Step 113IWS35). The time-saving flags include a time-saving flag A indicating that the time-saving state is A, a first time-saving flag B indicating that the time-saving state is B, and a time-saving flag C indicating that the time-saving state C is in effect. It will be done.

If it is not during the jackpot symbol confirmation period, is not during the jackpot period including the fanfare period and the ending period, and none of the time saving flags is set (N in step 113 IWS34), the bit of the firing position designation signal 1 in the test signal output buffer is set (step 113 IWS36).

In addition, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the normal state, the firing position designation signal 3 is output when the symbol stop period starts (Y in step 113 IWS32), while the time-saving winning symbol is stopped in the normal state. If the symbol is displayed, the time saving flag B is set when the symbol stop period of the symbol whose time is shortened ends, so the firing position designation signal 3 is output at the end of the symbol stop period (step 113, IWS34). Y). In other words, the switching timing of the firing position designation signal is configured to differ depending on the trigger for controlling the shift to the time saving state.

In addition, by switching the output of the firing position designation signals 1 and 3, information indicating which way the player is expected to play in the game state can be reported to the external device (test device). However, by setting/resetting control of a single firing position designation signal, information indicating the game state in which the player is expected to play is sent to an external device (test device). This may be a possible configuration. For example, by configuring the process to proceed to step 113IWS37 without performing the process in step 113IWS36 when the result of step 113IWS34 is N, or by not performing the process in step 113IWS31 and specifying the firing position instead of the process in step 113IWS36. By performing the process of clearing the bit of signal 3, information indicating the game state in which the player is expected to play depending on whether or not the bit of firing position designation signal 3 is set is obtained. It may also be configured to be able to notify an external device (test device).

Further, when the CPU 103 is in the jackpot symbol confirmation period for the first special symbol (Y in step 113IWS37A), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the special symbol 1 hit signal (step 113IWS37B), and sets the bit of symbol 1 data bit 2 ( Step 113IWS37C).

In addition, when the time reduction in the first special symbol is during the symbol confirmation period (Y in step 113IWS37D), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the special symbol 1 time reduction difference signal (step 113IWS37E), and sets the bit 1 of the symbol 1 data bit 1. (Step 113IWS37F). Note that the processing in steps 113IWS37E and S37F can be output even when the relief time reduction counter reaches 0. As will be described later, when the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed in the rescue time saving entry fluctuation, the time saving state via the relief time saving is controlled preferentially over the time saving state via the time saving loss, but even in that case, the time saving A signal indicating that the missed symbol has been stopped and displayed is appropriately output to the outside.

Moreover, when the CPU 103 is in the symbol confirmation period without time saving in the first special symbol (Y in step 113IWS37G), the CPU 103 sets the bit of symbol 1 data bit0 (step 113IWS37H).

Further, when the CPU 103 is in the jackpot symbol determination period for the second special symbol (Y in step 113IWS38A), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the special symbol 2 hit signal (step 113IWS38B), and sets the bit of symbol 2 data bit 2 ( Step 113IWS38C).

In addition, when the time reduction in the second special symbol is in the symbol determination period (Y in step 113IWS38D), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the special symbol 2 time reduction error signal (step 113IWS38E), and sets the bit in symbol 2 data bit 1. (Step 113IWS38F). Note that the processing in steps 113IWS38E and S38F can be output even when the relief time reduction counter reaches 0. As will be described later, when the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed in the rescue time saving entry fluctuation, the time saving state via the relief time saving is controlled preferentially over the time saving state via the time saving loss, but even in that case, the time saving A signal indicating that the missed symbol has been stopped and displayed is appropriately output to the outside.

Further, when the second special symbol is in the no-time saving symbol confirmation period (Y in step 113IWS38G), the CPU 103 sets the bit of symbol 2 data bit0 (step 113IWS38H).

Further, when the CPU 103 reaches the relief time reduction number based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol (Y in step 113IWS39A), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the special symbol 1 relief number arrival signal (step 113IWS39B). Further, when the CPU 103 reaches the relief time reduction number based on the fluctuation of the second special symbol (Y in step 113IWS39C), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the special symbol 2 relief number arrival signal (step 113IWS39D). Specifically, when the time saving flag C is set, a flag is set depending on which data, "first" or "second", is set in the special symbol pointer, and based on the flag, which special It is possible to specify whether the number of relief time reductions has been reached based on the fluctuation of the symbols. In addition, in this example, when the number of relief time shortening is reached based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol, the special symbol 1 relief number reaching signal is output instantaneously. The special symbol 1 rescue count reaching signal may be continuously output during the period when the time saving state is controlled via the time saving mode. Similarly, in this example, when the number of rescue times shortened is reached based on the variation of the second special symbol, the special symbol 1 rescue number reaching signal is instantaneously output. The special symbol 2 relief count reaching signal may be output continuously during the period in which the time saving state via the relief time saving is controlled.

Further, when the CPU 103 is controlling the probability variable state based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol (Y in step 113IWS40A), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the special symbol 1 high probability state signal (step 113IWS40B). Further, when the CPU 103 is controlling the probability variable state based on the fluctuation of the second special symbol (Y in step 113IWS40C), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the special symbol 2 high probability state signal (step 113IWS40D). Specifically, when setting the variable probability flag, a flag is set depending on which data, "first" or "second", is set in the special symbol pointer, and which special symbol is selected based on the flag. It is possible to specify whether the control has been controlled to a variable state based on the fluctuation of .

Further, when the CPU 103 is controlling the time reduction state based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol (Y in step 113IWS41A), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal (step 113IWS41B). Further, when the CPU 103 is controlling the time reduction state based on the fluctuation of the second special symbol (Y in step 113IWS41C), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the special symbol 2 fluctuation time reduction state signal (step 113IWS41D). Specifically, when the time saving flag is set, a flag is set depending on whether the data of "first" or "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, and which special symbol is selected based on the flag. It is possible to specify whether the control has been controlled to a variable state based on the fluctuation of .

Further, when the time saving flag A is set (Y in step 113IWS42A), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the winning easy state designation signal 1 (step 113IWS42B). Further, when the time saving flag B is set (Y in step 113IWS42C), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the winning easy state designation signal 2 (step 113IWS42D). Further, when the time saving flag C is set (Y in step 113IWS42E), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the winning easy state designation signal 3 (step 113IWS42F). In addition, as described later, when a jackpot occurs in the time saving state, each time saving flag is reset at the stop timing of the jackpot fluctuation, and the time saving flag A can be set at the end of the jackpot, so in the time saving state A. When the 10R jackpot A occurs, the winning easy state designation signal 1 is temporarily turned off during the period from the timing when the jackpot fluctuation stops to the timing when the jackpot ends.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits each signal as a test signal to the test signal terminal by outputting the contents of the test signal output buffer to the output port (step 113IWS43). By outputting the test signal in this manner, the internal state of the gaming machine can be specified on the testing device side.

(Customer waiting demonstration production control process)
FIG. 283-5 is a flowchart showing the customer waiting demonstration performance control process. The customer waiting demonstration performance control process is a process that is performed after step S161 in the performance control process process and before steps S170 to S177. That is, the customer waiting demonstration performance control process is a process that is performed every time the performance control process process is performed. In the customer waiting demonstration performance control process, if 10 seconds have passed since receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command, the performance control CPU 120 performs a telop display execution lottery process to determine whether or not to execute the telop display performance. (Y of step 113 IWS250, S251). Specifically, using a telop display execution lottery table according to the set values that have been set, it is determined whether or not to execute the telop display effect.

FIGS. 283-6(A) and 283-6(B) are explanatory diagrams showing a telop display execution lottery table. In the telop display execution lottery table, a determination value corresponding to whether or not to execute the telop display effect is assigned for each remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened, but in the examples shown in FIGS. 283-6 (A) and (B), , the percentage of assigned decision values is shown to simplify the explanation. The performance control CPU 120, for example, extracts a random number for the telop display execution lottery, and determines the determination item to which a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

FIG. 283-6(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a telop display execution lottery table used when the setting value "1" is set. FIG. 283-6(B) is an explanatory diagram showing a telop display execution lottery table used when the setting value "6" is set. The illustration of the telop display execution lottery table used when the setting values "2" to "5" are set is omitted.

When the telop display execution lottery table shown in Figure 283-6(A) (setting value "1") is used, if the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is 201 or more, the telop display performance is 30% , and it is determined at a rate of 70% that the subtitle display effect will not be executed. When the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is 101 or more and 200 or less, it is decided at a rate of 40% to execute the telop display effect, and it is decided at a rate of 60% not to execute the telop display effect. When the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is 11 or more and 100 or less, it is determined at a 50% rate that the telop display performance is to be executed, and it is determined at a 50% rate that the telop display performance is not executed. When the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened is 10 or less, it is decided at a rate of 55% to execute the telop display effect, and it is decided at a rate of 45% not to execute the telop display effect.

When the telop display execution lottery table shown in Figure 283-6(B) (setting value "6") is used, if the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is 201 or more, the telop display performance is 60% It is determined at a rate of 40%, and it is determined at a rate of 40% that the subtitle display effect will not be executed. When the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened is 101 or more and 200 or less, it is determined at a rate of 70% to execute the telop display effect, and it is determined at a rate of 30% not to execute the telop display effect. When the remaining number of times until relief time is shortened is 11 or more and 100 or less, it is determined at a rate of 80% to execute the telop display performance, and it is determined at a rate of 20% not to execute the telop display performance. When the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened is 10 or less, it is decided at a rate of 85% to execute the telop display effect, and it is decided at a rate of 15% not to execute the telop display effect.

In this way, the execution ratio of the telop display performance is configured to be higher when the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened is 10 or less than when the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened is 11 or more. As a result, it is possible to improve interest by making players look forward to reaching the number of fluctuations in the relief time reduction, and it is also possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages to players due to the end of the game just before the number of fluctuations in the relief time reduction is reached. can.

Further, in this way, the telop display effect is executed at a higher rate when the set value is set to "6" than when the set value is set to "1". Thereby, the player can predict the set value based on the frequency of execution of the telop display performance.

Further, the system is configured such that the fewer the number of fluctuations remaining until the rescue time is shortened, the higher the rate at which the telop display effect is executed. Thereby, the player can predict the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened based on the execution frequency of the telop display effect.

Note that the remaining number of times until relief time reduction can be specified by a relief time reduction number 2 designation command. In other words, before the command to specify the number of rescue time reductions 2 indicating that there are 200 times left until relief time reduction is received, a lottery is performed assuming that the number of times remaining until relief time reduction is 201 or more. After the Relief Time Shortening Number 2 designation command indicating that the number of relief time reductions has been received, but before the Relief Time Reduction Number 2 designation command indicating that there are 100 times left until relief time reduction is received, the remaining number of times until relief time reduction is received. is 101 or more and 200 or less, and after receiving the Relief time reduction number 2 designation command indicating that there are 100 times until relief time reduction is received, a lottery is performed assuming that the number of times remaining until relief time reduction is 100 or less. I do.

If it is determined to execute the telop display effect, the effect control CPU 120 performs a telop display mode determination lottery process to determine the effect mode of the telop display effect (step 113 IWS253). Specifically, the performance mode of the telop display performance is determined using a telop display mode determination lottery table according to the set values that have been set.

FIGS. 283-6(C) and (D) are explanatory diagrams showing a telop display mode determination lottery table. In the subtitle display mode determination lottery table, a judgment value corresponding to the display mode of the subtitle display (color of the frame of the subtitle display area, blue, red) is assigned for each remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened. In the examples shown in -6 (C) and (D), the ratio of the assigned judgment values is shown to simplify the explanation. The performance control CPU 120, for example, extracts a random number for a telop display mode determination lottery, and determines the decision item to which a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

FIG. 283-6(C) is an explanatory diagram showing a telop display mode determination lottery table used when the setting value "1" is set. FIG. 283-6(D) is an explanatory diagram showing a telop display mode determination lottery table used when the setting value "6" is set. The illustration of the subtitle display mode determination lottery table used when the setting values "2" to "5" are set is omitted.

When the telop display mode determination lottery table shown in Figure 283-6 (C) is used (setting value "1"), if the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened is 201 or more, the color of the frame of the telop display area is changed to red. It is determined at a rate of 40% that the subtitle is displayed in blue, and it is determined at a rate of 60% that the frame color of the subtitle display area is displayed in blue. If the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened is 101 or more and 200 or less, it is decided at a rate of 70% that the frame color of the telop display area is displayed in red, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in blue. is determined at a rate of 30%. If the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened is 11 or more and 100 or less, it is determined at a rate of 80% that the frame color of the caption display area is displayed in red, and the color of the frame of the caption display area is displayed in blue. is determined at a rate of 20%. If the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened is 10 or less, the color of the frame of the caption display area is determined to be displayed in red at a rate of 85%, and the color of the frame of the caption display area is determined to be displayed in blue at a rate of 15%. Determined as a percentage.

When the telop display mode determination lottery table shown in Figure 283-6(D) (setting value "6") is used, if the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened is 201 or more, the color of the frame of the telop display area is changed to red. 70% of the time, it is determined that the subtitle is displayed in blue, and 30% of the time, it is determined that the frame of the telop display area is displayed in blue. If the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened is 101 or more and 200 or less, it is decided at a rate of 80% that the frame color of the caption display area should be displayed in red, and the color of the frame of the caption display area should be displayed in blue. is determined at a rate of 20%. If the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is 11 or more and 100 or less, it is decided at a 90% rate that the frame color of the telop display area will be displayed in red, and the color of the frame of the telop display area will be displayed in blue. is determined at a rate of 10%. If the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened is 10 or less, the color of the frame of the caption display area is determined to be displayed in red at a rate of 95%, and the color of the frame of the caption display area is determined to be displayed in blue at a rate of 5%. Determined as a percentage.

In this way, the frame color of the subtitle display area is displayed in red at a higher rate when the number of times remaining until the rescue time is shortened is 10 or less than when the number of times remaining until the rescue time is shortened is 11 or more. It is configured so that Thereby, it is possible to improve interest by making the player look forward to reaching the number of fluctuations in saving time.

Also, as shown above, the frame color of the caption display area will be displayed in red at a higher rate when the setting value is set to ``6'' than when the setting value is set to ``1''. It is configured. This allows the player to predict the set value based on the performance mode of the telop display performance.

In addition, in this way, the lower the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened, the higher the rate at which the frame of the telop display area is displayed in red. As a result, the player can predict the number of fluctuations remaining until the rescue time is shortened, based on the performance mode of the telop display performance.

Thereafter, the performance control CPU 120 starts a telop display performance that displays the telop display area in the determined manner (step 113IWS254).

Further, if three minutes have elapsed since receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command, the performance control CPU 120 starts displaying the demo movie (Y in step 113IWS255, S256).

Note that the display of the caption and demo movie displayed here will end based on the game ball passing through the starting port, the start of the next variation, or the detection of the player's operation. It is something to do.

FIG. 283-7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a prefetch notice setting process. In the pre-read notice setting process shown in FIG. 283-7, the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not a new starting winning command has been received (step 113IWS1011), and if it has not been received, the pre-read notice is directly Finish the setting process.

The start winning command is a command that is used by the game control microcomputer 100 to determine display results (including jackpot type) and fluctuation patterns when there is a starting winning to the winning ball device 6A or the variable winning ball device 6B. This is a command that extracts a numerical value and indicates a winning determination result that is determined by pre-reading the display results and fluctuation patterns based on the extracted random numerical value. The starting winning command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 when there is a starting winning to the winning ball device 6A or the variable winning ball device 6B. Examples of starting winning commands include a symbol designation command, a variable category command, a starting winning designation command, and a total pending memory number designation command.

The symbol designation command is an effect control command that indicates whether or not it will be a jackpot and the type of jackpot among the winning determination results. The fluctuation category command is an effect control command that indicates the determination result (determination result of the fluctuation pattern type) as to which determination value range the value of the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern type falls within among the winning determination results. The starting prize designation command is an effect control command that indicates which of the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole a starting prize has occurred. The total pending memory number designation command is an effect control command that specifies the total number (total pending memory number) that is the sum of the first pending memory number and the second pending memory number.

In this embodiment, based on the variation category command, re-variation is performed if the variation involves a super reach, a variation involves a normal reach, a variation involves a pseudo-run, or a variation involves a pseudo-run. It is possible to specify whether the fluctuation is accompanied by a pseudo-run, or whether the fluctuation is undetermined. Undetermined is a case where the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the random number for fluctuation pattern determination acquired at the time of the starting winning differs depending on the number of pending memories at the time of the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the starting winning.

The starting winning command received from the game control microcomputer 100 is temporarily stored in the starting winning command storage area formed in the RAM. Specifically, in the command analysis process (step S75), the production control CPU 120 stores the commands in the first vacant storage area of the start winning command storage area in the order received. Each command stored in the start winning command storage area is stored in the first storage area 1 each time the variable display of decorative symbols is started (each time a command for subtracting the total pending memory number is received). The contents of the starting winning command storage area are shifted.

In step 113IWS1011, when a new starting winning command is received, the production control CPU 120 starts displaying a new pending display (step 113IWS1012). Then, it is determined whether or not a prefetch flag indicating that a prefetched notice performance is being executed is set (step 113 IWS1013), and if it is set, the prefetched notice setting process is immediately terminated. If not set, it is determined whether or not the time saving state is being controlled (step 113IWS1014), and if the time saving state is being controlled, the process moves to step 113IWS1016.

If the time saving state is not controlled, the number of pending memories is compared with the remaining number of times until saving time is shortened (step 113 IWS1015), and if the number of pending memories is a larger value than the remaining number of times until saving time is shortened, the process continues. The reading notice setting process ends. If the number of pending memories is less than or equal to the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened, it is determined whether the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less (step 113 IWS1016). If the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is 10 times or less, the pre-read notice setting process is ended. If the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is not 10 times or less, a pre-read performance execution lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute the pre-read notice performance. Specifically, a pre-read preview performance execution lottery table is used to determine whether or not to execute the pre-read preview performance.

In the pre-reading notice performance execution lottery table, for each prize winning determination result (big hit, time saving, no time saving), whether or not the pre-reading notice performance is to be executed and the performance mode of the pre-reading notice performance (first mode, second mode) when executed. ) has been assigned a judgment value.

The first aspect of the lookahead preview performance is a performance that counts down in red the number of fluctuations until the change of the notice target of the lookahead preview performance starts, and the lookahead preview performance of the second aspect is a lookahead preview performance of the lookahead preview performance. This is a display that counts down the number of changes until the target starts changing in blue text.

For example, when the winning determination result is a jackpot, it is decided to perform the first type of pre-read preview effect at a rate of 70%, and it is decided not to perform the pre-read preview effect at a rate of 30%. If the winning determination result is that the winning time is short, it is decided to perform the second mode of pre-read preview performance at a rate of 40%, and it is decided not to perform the pre-read preview performance at a rate of 60%. If the winning determination result is ``no time saving'', it is decided to perform the first type of pre-reading preview performance at a rate of 4%, and it is decided to perform the second type of pre-reading preview performance at a rate of 6%, It is decided not to perform a preview preview performance at a rate of 90%.

In this way, the first aspect of the look-ahead preview performance can be executed both in the case of a jackpot and in the case of a loss with no time saving, so it is a look-ahead preview performance that suggests control for a jackpot. In addition, since the pre-read notice performance of the second aspect can be executed both when the time is shortened and when the time is not shortened, it is a pre-read notice performance that suggests that the control is to be carried out in a time-shortened manner.

When it is decided to execute the prefetch preview performance, the performance control CPU 120 displays a prefetch display area and a countdown display on the image display section 5 (step 113IWS1019), and sets a prefetch flag (step 113IWS1020).

In this way, by performing the process in step 113IWS1015, if the number of pending memories is larger than the remaining number of times until the relief time shortening, in other words, the pending memory stored before reaching the change in relief time shortening is Therefore, the system is configured to restrict (prohibit) the execution of a look-ahead preview performance that targets a pending memory corresponding to a change that is performed after being controlled to a time-saving state via a relief time-saving mode. As a result, it is possible to restrict the execution of the pre-read notice performance that spans before and after the rescue time reduction control, and it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a problem in the performance.

Furthermore, by performing the process in step 113IWS1016, if the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is 10 times or less, the execution of the pre-read preview performance is restricted (prohibited). This prevents the countdown performance corresponding to the rescue time reduction control and the prefetched notice performance from being executed at the same time.

For example, in a gaming machine that is capable of displaying a countdown when the number of changes in relief time reduction is reached and displaying a countdown as a look-ahead preview effect, the display as a countdown display when the number of changes in relief time reduction is reached and a countdown display as a look-ahead notice effect. If the countdown display can be executed at the same time as the countdown display, it is expected that the presentation will become complicated. In particular, if the performance that shows the number of times remaining until the rescue time is shortened and the look-ahead preview performance are both performances that involve countdown displays, it becomes difficult to understand which countdown display to focus on, which reduces the performance effect. It is possible that this could happen. Therefore, by configuring so that the performance indicating the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened and the look-ahead preview performance are not executed in duplicate, it is possible to prevent the performance effect from being reduced.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 283-8 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the production control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first reads the variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 113IWS801). Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines the display result (stop) of the decorative pattern according to the variation pattern command read out in step 113IWS801 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command). symbol) is determined (step 113 IWS802). That is, by executing the process of step 113IWS802 by the production control CPU 120, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stopping of the decorative pattern) is determined according to the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determining means. A display result determining means for determining a symbol) is realized. In addition, when a pseudo series is specified by the fluctuation pattern command, the production control CPU 120, in step 113IWS802, selects a chance pattern (such as "223" or "445") as a temporary stop symbol of the pseudo series. , combinations of jackpot symbols that do not reach reach and symbols that are off by one symbol) are also determined. Note that the performance control CPU 120 stores data indicating the stop symbols of the determined decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display result storage area. In addition, in step 113IWS802, the performance control CPU 120 may determine whether or not it is a jackpot based on the received variation pattern command, and determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based only on the variation pattern command. .

In step 113IWS802, if the received display result designation command indicates "10R jackpot A", the production control CPU 120 selects a decorative symbol in which three symbols are the same even-numbered symbol as a stop symbol. Determine the combination (10R jackpot A symbol). In addition, when the received display result designation command indicates "10R jackpot B", the performance control CPU 120 selects a combination of decorative symbols (10R jackpot B symbol) in which three symbols are the same odd numbered symbols as the stop symbol. Determine.

Then, in the case of "missing", a combination of decorative symbols other than the above is determined. However, if a reach effect is involved, a combination of decorative symbols in which the two left and right symbols are aligned is determined. Moreover, even if it is a loss, if it is a "time-saving loss", a combination of decorative symbols of the loss symbol including a special symbol (for example, a star symbol) is determined. In addition, it may be configured to determine a combination of decorative symbols of missed symbols including special symbols (for example, a heart-shaped symbol or a diamond-shaped symbol) that differ depending on the time saving type.

For example, the production control CPU 120 extracts a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other, and determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbols are determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to numerical values that match the extracted random numbers.

Regarding the decorative patterns, a stop pattern that reminds you of a jackpot (a combination of patterns whose left, middle, and right sides are all the same pattern) is called a jackpot pattern. Also, a stop symbol that reminds you of a miss is called a miss symbol.

Further, the performance control CPU 120 performs a preview performance setting process for setting a preview performance that indicates the reliability of controlling the jackpot game state (step 113IWS802A). Specifically, in the preview performance setting process, whether or not to execute the preview performance is determined using a preview performance execution lottery table according to the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened, and if it is determined to execute the preview performance In this step, the performance mode of the preview performance to be executed is determined using a preview performance mode determination lottery table according to the number of variations remaining until the relief time is shortened, and execution of the preview performance of the determined performance mode is set. Although not shown, the process table including the preview effect set here is selected in steps 113IWS804, S806, and S807, which will be described later.

In the preview performance execution lottery table, a determination value corresponding to whether or not the preview performance is to be executed is assigned to each variable display result (big hit, miss). The performance control CPU 120, for example, extracts a random number for a preview performance execution lottery, and determines the determination item to which a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

When the preview performance execution lottery table (remaining number of fluctuations until relief time reduction > 10) is used, if the variable display result is a jackpot, it is decided to execute the preview performance at a 70% rate, and the preview performance is executed. 30% decide not to do so. If the variable display result is negative, it is determined at a rate of 10% that the preview performance will be executed, and determined at a rate of 90% that the preview performance will not be executed.

When the preview performance execution lottery table (number of fluctuations remaining until relief time reduction ≦10) is used, if the variable display result is a jackpot, it is decided to execute the preview performance at a rate of 70%, and the preview performance is executed. 30% decide not to do so. If the variable display result is negative, it is determined at a rate of 1% that the preview performance will be executed, and determined at a rate of 99% that the preview performance will not be executed.

In this way, the configuration is such that it is easier to execute the preview performance in the case of a jackpot variation than in the case of a loss variation.

In addition, in this way, when the number of fluctuations remaining until the rescue time is shortened is 10 or less, it is better to display a preview effect when the variable display result is a failure than when the number of fluctuations remaining until the rescue time is shortened is greater than 10. The configuration has a low execution rate. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest during a period in which the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less.

In the preview performance mode determination lottery table, a determination value corresponding to the performance mode of the preview performance (color of displayed character: blue, red) is assigned for each variable display result (jackpot, miss). The performance control CPU 120, for example, extracts a random number for a lottery for determining a preview performance mode, and determines a decision item to which a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

When the preview performance mode determination lottery table is used, if the variable display result is a jackpot, red will be determined at a rate of 70% as the color of the character displayed in the preview performance; , blue is determined at a rate of 30%. If the variable display result is wrong, red is determined as the color of the character to be displayed in the preview performance at a rate of 10%, and blue is determined as the color of the character to be displayed in the preview performance at a rate of 90%.

When the preview performance mode determination lottery table is used, if the variable display result is a jackpot, red will be determined at a rate of 70% as the color of the character displayed in the preview performance; , blue is determined at a rate of 30%. If the variable display result is wrong, red is determined as the color of the character to be displayed in the preview performance at a rate of 1%, and blue is determined as the color of the character to be displayed in the preview performance at a rate of 99%.

In this way, the configuration is such that red is more likely to be selected as the color of the character displayed in the preview performance in the case of a jackpot variation than in the case of a loss variation.

In addition, in this way, when the number of changes remaining until the rescue time is shortened is 10 or less, the color of the character is changed when the variable display result is a failure than when the number of changes remaining until the rescue time is shortened is greater than 10. The configuration is such that red is likely to be selected. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest during a period in which the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less.

Next, if the prefetching flag is set, the performance control CPU 120 updates the countdown display in the prefetch preview performance (steps 113IWS802B, S802C). Then, it is checked whether the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, or 700 (step 113 IWS803). In addition, whether the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, or 700 can be determined by, for example, using the relief time shortening number 2 designation command. This can be determined by checking whether or not it is being received.

If the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, or 700, the production control CPU 120 will change the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened. A process table including an inciting effect according to the number of fluctuations is selected (step 113 IWS804). For example, if the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 2 designation command is "01 (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until relief time reduction is 100), the remaining number of fluctuations is "100". Select the process table that includes the appropriate inciting effect. Also, for example, if the received EXT data of the command to specify the number of times of saving time reduction 2 is "07 (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until the time saving is reduced is 700), the remaining number of fluctuations is "800 times". ” Select a process table that includes an inciting effect according to ``. Then, the process moves to step 113IWS808.

If the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is not 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, or 700, the production control CPU 120 will change the number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened. It is checked whether the remaining number of fluctuations is 10 or less (step 113 IWS805). In addition, to check whether the remaining number of fluctuations until relief time reduction is 10 or less, for example, check whether the value of the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 1 designation command is 10 or less. It can be determined by

If the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table including a countdown performance and effect performance according to the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time is shortened. (Step 113IWS806). For example, if the received EXT data of the command specifying the number of rescue time reductions 1 is "0A (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time is shortened is 10), the count number until the rescue time is shortened is "0A (H)". Select a process table that includes a countdown effect corresponding to "10". Also, for example, if the received EXT data of the command specifying the number of rescue time reductions 1 is "01 (H)" (the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 1), the count until the relief time reduction is reached. A process table including a countdown effect corresponding to the number "1" is selected. Then, the process moves to step 113IWS808.

In addition, in this example, the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time is shortened is determined based on the EXT data of the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command and the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command, and an inciting effect or a countdown effect is executed. Although shown, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, when a background specification command that specifies a background image is configured to be sent, a value corresponding to the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time is shortened is set in the EXT data of the background specification command and then sent. It's okay. Then, the performance control CPU 120 side may be configured to determine the remaining number of fluctuations based on the EXT data of the received background designation command, and execute an inciting performance or a countdown performance.

In addition, in this example, even if the number of fluctuations for shortening relief time is reached, if the jackpot fluctuation occurs, the same fluctuation pattern for jackpot as usual is used, but only in such a mode. First, the variable display may be configured to be executed using a variation pattern that specifies a reach effect with a short variation time.

Further, in this example, if the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less, an effect effect is performed in which an effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. For example, an effect performance is performed such that the smaller the number of remaining variations until the relief time is shortened, the wider the display range of the effect image on the image display device 5 becomes.

Further, the processing of steps 113IWS803 to S806 can be performed regardless of the gaming state. As a result, even when controlled in time-saving state B, it is possible to perform incitement effects, countdown effects, and effect effects according to the remaining number of times, in the same way as when controlled in the normal state. Also, it is possible to improve the interest by providing a northern check that the relief time is shortened.

If the remaining number of variations until the relief time is shortened is not less than 10 (N in step 113IWS805), the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the variation pattern (step 113IWS807). Then, the process moves to step 113IWS808.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 113IWS808).

The process table is a table in which process data referred to by the production control CPU 120 when controlling the production device is set. That is, the performance control CPU 120 controls performance devices (performance components) such as the image display device 5 according to process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation mode that constitutes the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative pattern. Specifically, data related to changing the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. Further, the process timer setting value has a variation time set in the manner of variation. The performance control CPU 120 refers to the process table and performs control to display the decorative pattern in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer setting value. Further, the process table is stored in the ROM in the effect control board 80. Further, process tables are prepared according to each variation pattern.

In addition, the process table used when executing performance control for a fluctuation pattern that involves a reach performance has a function that stops displaying the left symbol when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, and stops displaying the right symbol when a further predetermined time has elapsed. Process data indicating display is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, images for displaying the symbols are synthesized and generated according to the determined stopping symbols and the temporary stopping symbols in pseudo-runs and sliding effects. It's okay.

In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the performance devices (the image display device 5 as production components, the image display device 5 as production components, Control of various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R (as performance parts) is executed (step 113IWS809). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. Further, in order to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this characteristic part 113IW, the performance control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative pattern is displayed variably according to the variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern command. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to .

Next, the production control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command in the variation time timer (step 113IWS810).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 sets the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display performance process (step S172) (step 113IWS811).

(Variable display processing)
FIGS. 283-9 and 283-10 are flowcharts showing the variable display effect processing (step S172) in the effect control process shown in FIG. 280. In the variable display performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 113IWS841), and also subtracts 1 from the value of the variable time timer (step 113IWS842). When the process timer times out (step 113 IWS843), the process data is switched. That is, the next set process timer setting value in the process table is set in the process timer (step 113IWS844). Furthermore, the control state for the production device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data set next (step 113IWS845).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol determination A designation command is received (step 113IWS846). Specifically, in the command analysis process, it is checked whether the first confirmed A command reception flag or the second confirmed A command reception flag is set. If the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command is received, the production control CPU 120 controls the mode transition production (production that notifies the transition to the time-saving state (time-saving mode)) and the right-handed hit. A process table corresponding to the notification is selected (step 113 IWS847). Next, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 113IWS848). In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the performance devices (the image display device 5 as production components, the image display device 5 as production components, Control of various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R (as performance parts) is executed (step 113IWS849). In addition, the production control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 20 seconds to a fixed production period timer for measuring the symbol fixed period on the production control means side (step 113IWS850). Then, the process moves to step 113IWS861A.

In addition, in this example, when the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command is received, there are cases where the time shortening occurs during the normal state and cases where the rescue time shortens. However, in step 113 IWS 847, if the time saving is missed during the normal state, a mode transition effect for the time saving is missed and a process table corresponding to the right hit notification is selected, and if the saving time becomes short, the process table for the relief time saving is selected. Select a process table according to the mode transition effect and right-handed notification. In addition, whether or not the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command is received due to the relief time reduction is determined, for example, if the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 1 designation command is "00 ( This can be determined by checking whether or not H).

If neither the first symbol confirmation A specification command nor the second symbol confirmation A specification command has been received, the production control CPU 120 determines whether the first symbol confirmation B specification command or the second symbol confirmation B specification command has been received. (Step 113 IWS856). Specifically, in the command analysis process, it is checked whether the first confirmed B command reception flag or the second confirmed B command reception flag is set. If the first symbol confirmation B designation command or the second symbol confirmation B designation command is received, the process moves to step 113IWS858.

If neither the first symbol confirmation B designation command nor the second symbol confirmation B designation command is received, the production control CPU 120 checks whether the variable time timer has timed out (step 113 IWS857). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

When the first symbol confirmation B designation command or the second symbol confirmation B designation command is received (Y in step 113IWS856), or when the variable time timer has timed out (Y in step 113IWS857), the production control CPU 120 normally A process table corresponding to the symbol confirmation display is selected (step 113 IWS858). Next, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 113IWS859). In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the performance devices (the image display device 5 as production components, the image display device 5 as production components, Control of various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R (as performance parts) is executed (step 113IWS860). In addition, the production control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 0.5 seconds to a fixed production period timer for measuring the symbol fixed period on the production control means side (step 113IWS861). Then, the process moves to step 113IWS861A.

In addition, in this example, in addition to when the symbol confirmation designation command is received, when the variable time timer times out (see step 113 IWS857), the process moves to step 113 IWS858 and subsequent steps to enter the symbol confirmation period. However, normally, unless the symbol confirmation designation command is missed, there is no case where a determination of Y is made in step 113IWS857 and the process proceeds to steps 113IWS858 and subsequent steps.

In step 113IWS861A, the performance control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is a target change of the pre-read preview performance (step 113IWS861A). For example, set the value of the number of pending memories when the prefetched notice effect is started as the number of executions K for the prefetched preview effect, and subtract 1 from the execution count K at the start of the variation, and the variation where the subtraction result becomes 0 is the prefetched preview. It can be determined that this is a change in the target of the performance. If it is a target change of the pre-read preview performance, the pre-read flag is reset (step 113IWS861B) and the process moves to step 113IWS862. In this way, a look-ahead flag is set when a look-ahead notice performance is started, and the look-ahead flag is reset when the fluctuation of the notice target of the look-ahead notice performance stops, and the suspended memory that occurred while the look-ahead flag was set is targeted. By configuring the system so that the prefetched preview performance is not performed, multiple prefetched preview performances are prevented from being executed redundantly. Note that a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of pre-read preview effects can be executed in duplicate.

Then, the production control CPU 120 updates the value of the production control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure waiting process (step S173) (step 113IWS862).

(Example of production)
Next, a specific example of the performance mode until the transition to time saving state C, which is a relief time saving, will be explained. FIGS. 283-11 to 283-15 are explanatory diagrams for explaining specific examples of presentation modes up to the transition to the time saving state. In addition, in FIG. 283-11 to FIG. 283-15, the effect screen changes in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

FIGS. 283-11 to 283-14 show specific examples of presentation modes when the normal state is controlled to the time saving state C. FIG. 283-15 shows a specific example of the performance mode when controlled from the time saving state B to the time saving state C.

As shown in FIG. 283-11(A), the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is displayed every 100 revolutions when the symbol stops. In this example, in the image display device 5, a decorative pattern 113IW100 is displayed at the center of the screen, and a small pattern 113IW101 is displayed at the upper right. For example, when there are 700 rotations remaining until the transition to relief time saving, it is assumed that the decorative pattern 113IW100 and the small pattern 113IW101 stop and a missed pattern (in this example, a combination of "134" symbols) is derived and displayed. At this time, a remaining rotation number display 113IW102 is displayed in the upper left corner saying, "700 rotations left to start saving time!". At this time, an explanation of the relief time saving effect is displayed at the bottom of the screen by means of a telop display 113IW103.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 283-11(B), for example, when there are 600 rotations remaining until the transition to the relief time saving mode, the decorative pattern 113IW100 and the small pattern 113IW101 stop and the missing pattern (in this example, "423") It is assumed that a combination of symbols) is derived and displayed. At this time, similar to FIG. 283-11(A), a remaining rotation number display 113IW102 is displayed in the upper left corner that reads, "Relief time reduction starts in 600 rotations!". At this time, an explanation of the relief time saving effect is displayed at the bottom of the screen by means of a telop display 113IW103.

In addition, in this example, as shown in Figures 283-11 (A) and (B), a case is shown in which an inciting effect suggesting the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is executed every 100 fluctuations. It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, if the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened is 400 to 700 times, the inciting effect will not be performed, and if the remaining number of times is 300 times or less (therefore, the remaining number of times is 300, 200, or 100 times), the inciting effect will not be performed. It may be configured to run.

In addition, instead of always executing the inciting effect when the remaining number of fluctuations is reached, for example, when a command to specify the number of rescue time reductions 2 is received, a lottery process is performed based on random numbers, and when it is decided to execute the inciting effect, It may be configured to perform the inciting effect in the manner shown in FIGS. 283-11(A) and (B). Further, in this case, it is desirable to configure such that as the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time is shortened decreases, the execution rate of the inciting effect increases.

Then, as shown in Figures 283-11(C) to 283-12(E), after 10 rotations remaining until the transition to relief time saving, the decorative pattern 113IW100 is not displayed when the pattern stops, and only the small pattern 113IW101 is displayed. is displayed, and a countdown display 113IW104 corresponding to the remaining number of rotations is displayed at the center of the screen. For example, in the countdown display 113IW104, a countdown from "10" to "1" is displayed each time the fluctuating display of symbols ends and the symbols stop. It should be noted that each figure shows an example in which missing symbols (in this example, a combination of symbols "653", "844", "278", and "216") are derived and displayed.

In addition, as shown in Figures 283-11 (C) to 283-12 (E), after 10 rotations remaining until the transition to the rescue time shortening, the effect image of the display range according to the number of remaining changes until the rescue time shortening is displayed. At the same time, as shown in Figures 283-12 (F) to 283-12 (H), in a variation where the number of variations remaining until relief time reduction is 0, a time reduction entry effect is performed. Then, the symbols stop and the missing symbols (in this example, a combination of "254" symbols) are stopped and displayed. At this time, the decorative symbols may not be displayed, and the missed symbols may be displayed only in the small symbols. Note that FIGS. 283-12 (G) and (H) show a period in which the missing symbols as small symbols are temporarily stopped, and the special symbols continue to fluctuate. FIGS. 283-13 (I) to 283-14 (M) show a period in which the missing symbols as small symbols are displayed as confirmed, and the special symbols also have stopped changing.

Further, in FIG. 283-12(G), control to the time saving state C is notified by displaying on the image display device 5 a character string indicating that the time saving state will be controlled 800 times. Then, in FIG. 283-12(H), a right-handed driving promotion image for promoting right-handed hitting is displayed on the image display device 5. Note that since this example shows the case of controlling from the normal state to the time-saving state C, an image promoting right-handed hitting is displayed, but when controlling from the time-saving state B to the time-saving state C, right-handed hitting is already performed. Since this is the case, the display of the right hit notification image is restricted when the symbol is stopped (see FIG. 283-15(D)).

Then, as shown in FIG. 283-13(I), when the symbol determination period begins, a mode effect start display 113IW105 of "Very hot!" is displayed, and the mode transition effect is started. Note that from now on, in the mode transition performance, the decorative pattern 113IW100 is not displayed, and only the small pattern 113IW101 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 283-13(J), when the mode transition effect is started, an operation suggestion image 113IW106 that suggests operating (pressing) the push button 31B is displayed. For example, in the operation suggestion image 113IW106, the words "Press" are displayed together with an image urging the user to press the push button 31B.

Then, as shown in FIG. 283-13(K), when the push button 31B is operated when the operation suggestion image 113IW106 is displayed, or when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation suggestion image 113IW106 was displayed, "V A character display 113IW107 "STOCK x 1" is displayed to notify that the relief time reduction will start. Further, a right-handed hitting instruction display 113IW108 for instructing right-handed hitting is displayed next to the small symbol 113IW101.

In addition, in this example, even if a jackpot is achieved, the system can be configured to execute an effect of displaying the characters "V STOCK x 1" similarly to FIG. 283-13(K). In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) performs a pre-reading judgment process on whether or not there will be a jackpot and the type of variation pattern in the starting winning judgment process (step S101), and Sends a prefetch judgment result specification command that allows the result to be specified. Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes a performance similar to that shown in FIG. 283-13(K) (so-called suspended continuous performance) based on the received prefetch determination result designation command. For example, if it is determined that there is one jackpot in the pending memory based on the received look-ahead judgment result designation command, the pending consecutive performance is displayed by displaying the text "V STOCK x 1". Execute. Also, for example, if it is determined that there are two jackpots in the pending memory based on the received look-ahead judgment result designation command, the text display of "V STOCK x 2" will be displayed. Execute a continuous performance.

On the other hand, in the case of shortening the rescue time, there is a high rate of displaying fluctuations with an extremely short fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds during the time shortening state via the shortening rescue time (see Figure 283-1 (E)). ), the fluctuating display is digested extremely quickly, and it is easy to hit the jackpot relatively quickly. Therefore, in the variable display where the rescue time is shortened (in this example, the symbol confirmation period), the character display "V STOCK x 1" shown in Figure 283-13 (K) is displayed without particularly checking the look-ahead judgment result. The effect to be displayed is executed. Therefore, the effect of displaying the characters "V STOCK x 1" shown in Figure 283-13 (K) is similar to the pseudo-hold continuous effect, and it also shortens the rescue time. The performance is intended to inform the public.

In addition, if the fluctuation that has reached the relief time reduction is a jackpot fluctuation, for example, 30 seconds is secured as the fluctuation time, and once a performance that shortens the rescue time is executed, and then a performance that announces a jackpot is executed. It's okay.

Although the case where the display of the right-hand hitting instruction display 113IW108 starts from the display timing of the character display 113IW107 "V STOCK x 1" has been shown, the display start timing of the right-hand hitting instruction display 113IW108 is limited to that shown in this example. do not have. For example, the display of the right hit instruction display 113IW108 may be started from the timing of the final display of the stop symbol shown in FIG. 283-12(H), and various modes are possible.

Then, as shown in FIG. 283-13(L), a mode selection screen 113IW109 for selecting a production mode with shortened rescue time is displayed. For example, a screen for selecting one of modes A to D is displayed. The mode selection is performed by moving the cursor by operating the stick controller 31A, and is confirmed by operating the push button 31B. Note that if a predetermined period of time has elapsed without selecting a production mode, the production mode that the cursor matches is automatically determined. Further, even when the mode selection screen 113IW109 is displayed, the right-hand hitting instruction display 113IW108 remains displayed next to the small pattern 113IW101.

Then, as shown in FIG. 283-14(M), when the selection of the production mode is completed, a start notification screen 113IW110 is displayed to notify that the relief time reduction will start. For example, the words "Relief time reduction entry" are displayed. Then, when the next fluctuation is started, a transition is made to the time saving state C, and the relief time saving is started.

In this example, when the symbol is stopped, the number of rotations remaining until the relief time is shortened, the performance in the relief time shortening is explained, and a countdown is displayed, but it may be displayed when the symbol starts to fluctuate or while the symbol is fluctuating.

In addition, this example shows a case where a pattern confirmation period is secured for 20 seconds in a variable display that shortens the relief time and the mode transition effect and right hit notification are executed, but the pattern confirmation period is the usual 0.5 seconds. It may be configured to directly shift to the time saving state via the relief time saving mode without performing any mode transition effect or the like.

In addition, this example shows a case where the rescue time reduction counter is initially set to "800" when executing the RAM clearing process or when hitting a jackpot. If the program is configured to execute a story (such as "Story"), it may also be configured to clear the selection buffer and story counter for that story. Further, it may be configured such that a story can be set when the relief time reduction is activated, or a different story can be set depending on the game state.

In this way, FIGS. 283-11 to 283-14 show the case where control is performed from the normal state to time-saving state C, but FIG. 283-15 shows the case where control is performed from time-saving state B to time-saving state C. A specific example of the presentation mode will be shown. For example, Figures 283-15 (A) and (B), which show display examples of timings when there are 10 rotations remaining and 1 rotation remaining until transition to relief time reduction in time saving state B, indicate that there are 10 rotations remaining and 1 rotation remaining until transition to relief time reduction in normal state. In addition to the displays shown in Figures 283-11 (C) and 283-12 (E), which show examples of the timing of 10 rotations and 1 rotation remaining, a right-handed hit notification effect (right-pointing arrow image display) is being performed. This right-handed hitting notification performance is continuously performed while the time-saving state is controlled. Note that the value of the time-saving state counter in FIG. 283-15(A) is 60, and the value of the time-saving state counter in FIG. 283-15(B) is 51.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 283-15(C) and (D), a time-saving promotion effect is performed when the value of the relief time-saving counter becomes 0. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 283-15(D), a character string indicating promotion is displayed. At this time, unlike in FIG. 283-12(H), since the time saving state has already been controlled, the right-handed hit notification image is not displayed again.

Note that the countdown performance and effect performance are executed only when the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened reaches 10, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, by performing a countdown effect and an effect effect at a timing other than when the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened is 10 (performing a so-called fake effect), players are expected to enter the relief time shortening. It is also possible to do so. In that case, for example, a variation in which the value of the time saving number counter is 50 is ended, a countdown display and an effect display are started at the same time as the next variation is started, and a countdown display and an effect display are performed over multiple variations, The countdown display and effect display may be ended at a predetermined timing (in the illustrated example, the third change after the start of the countdown display and effect display). This fake performance is not limited to the one performed when the value of the time saving number counter is 50, but may be performed when the value of the time saving number counter is 100 or 200.

Furthermore, the execution rate of the false effect may be different depending on the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened, and for example, the occurrence rate may be higher as the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened is smaller. This allows the player to feel that the time for relief is approaching, thereby increasing interest. Further, this false effect may not be performed when a variation pattern with a long variation time (for example, a variation pattern with SP reach) is selected.

As explained above, this feature section 113IW includes the inventions described below.

Conventionally, as described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2005-95449, the number of changes in the symbol is counted, and the count result reaches a value corresponding to a special number of times (for example, 1000 times) without a jackpot. There are some that are controlled to a variable probability state based on (that is, based on a special number of fluctuations (for example, 1000 times) without a jackpot occurring). Similarly, there have been systems that control the gaming state to a special state (for example, a time-saving state where symbol variations are executed frequently) based on the count result reaching a specific value. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2005-95449, which can be controlled to a special state based on the variable number of times of display, there is room for improvement in performance control. Therefore, the following gaming machines (means 113-1) to (means 113-7) are described in this feature section 113IW.

(Means 113-1) Perform variable display of first identification information (for example, first special symbol) and variable display of second identification information (for example, second special symbol), and display specific display results (for example, jackpot symbol) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player based on the derived and displayed
Based on the fact that the starting conditions (for example, the winning of the game ball in the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole) are met, and the starting conditions (for example, neither the jackpot gaming state nor the fluctuating state) are satisfied. a variable display execution means (for example, a portion that executes steps S110 to S113 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing a variable display by
Suspension storage means (for example, a first suspension memory number buffer, a second suspension memory number buffer) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as suspension information when the start condition is met but the start condition is not satisfied;
a determining means capable of determining control in an advantageous state;
A determining means (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step S101) that can determine that the control is in an advantageous state before the determination by the determining means;
A specific suggestive effect that suggests control to be in an advantageous state based on the determination result by the determination means (for example, the first aspect of the pre-read preview effect. Specific examples of the pre-read preview effect are not limited to countdown displays, but also special decorative patterns) Specific suggestion performance execution means capable of executing (a performance that stops displaying the (opportunity number), a hold change effect that changes the color or shape of the hold display, a zone effect that displays a special background display, etc.) (For example, the part that executes step 113IWS1019 in the production control CPU 120),
a state control means capable of controlling to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which starting conditions are more likely to be met than in a normal state;
an updating means capable of updating numerical information (for example, a relief time reduction counter),
The updating means updates the numerical information when variable display of the first identification information is executed and when variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the numerical information When the symbol changes and when the second special symbol changes, the relief time shortening counter is updated),
The state control means is configured such that the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value (for example, the value of the relief time reduction counter is "0") corresponding to a special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of executions of the variable display. By this, it is possible to control to a special state when a special condition is established,
Special suggestion performance execution means (for example, steps 113IWS804, S806, and S254 in the performance control CPU 120) capable of executing special suggestion performances (for example, inciting performance, countdown performance, effect performance, and telop display performance) related to the establishment of special conditions. The execution part) is further provided,
The specific suggestion performance execution means is
Among the variable displays corresponding to the pending information stored before the special condition is met, it is possible to restrict the execution of a specific suggestion effect that targets variable displays after the variable display for which the special condition is met (for example, , If step 113IWS1015 is Y, the performance control CPU 120 does not execute 113IWS1019, thereby prohibiting the execution of the first aspect of the pre-read preview performance that spans before and after the start of control to shorten the relief time).
A predetermined period of time until the numerical information updated by the updating means reaches a specific value from a predetermined value (for example, the value of the relief time reduction counter is "10") corresponding to a predetermined number of times (for example, 790 times) smaller than the special number of times. (For example, if step 113IWS1016 is Y in the performance control CPU 120, step 113IWS1019 is not executed, thereby restricting the execution of the specific suggestion effect.) A game machine characterized by prohibiting execution of a performance.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming complicated and to suppress a decrease in interest while avoiding production defects.

In addition, in this example, when the time saving state is already controlled, the execution of the pre-read notice performance that spans before and after the start of the control to save time saving is not prohibited (if it is Y in step 113IWS1014, step 113IWS1015 is not performed). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the time saving state is controlled, the execution of the pre-read notice effect before and after the start of the control to shorten the rescue time may be prohibited.

In addition, in this example, a special suggestion performance is executed during a predetermined period until the numerical information updated by the updating means reaches a specific value from a predetermined value corresponding to a predetermined number of times smaller than the special number of times, and a specific suggestion is performed during the predetermined period. We decided to restrict the execution of the performance. Specifically, the execution of the countdown performance is started from the timing when the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened reaches 10, and the execution of the pre-read preview performance is prohibited. As a result, the special suggestion performance and the specific suggestion performance are not performed at the same time, so that it is possible to prevent the performance from becoming complicated and to suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, in this example, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect before and after the start of the control to shorten the relief time is prohibited, but the restriction method is not limited to this. For example, in a gaming machine that is capable of executing multiple types of advance notice performances, execution of some of the multiple types of advance notice performances may be prohibited if they extend before and after the start of control to shorten relief time. On the other hand, other pre-read advance notice effects may not be prohibited from being executed (or may be executed) even when they extend before and after the start of control to shorten the relief time.

Similarly, in this example, the execution of the pre-read notice performance in the fluctuation immediately before the control to shorten the relief time is prohibited, but the restriction method is not limited to this. For example, in a gaming machine that is capable of executing multiple types of advance notice performances, some of the multiple types of advance notice performances may be prohibited from being executed in a change immediately before being controlled to shorten the relief time; Other pre-read notice effects may not be prohibited from being executed in the fluctuation immediately before being controlled to shorten the relief time (which may be executable).

(Means 113-2) In the means 113-1, the state control means is capable of controlling the state to a special state when a special display result (for example, a time saving symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state. ,
The advantage of the special state that is controlled when the special condition is satisfied is higher than the advantage of the special state that is controlled when the special display result is derived and displayed;
When a special condition is established and a special display result is derived and displayed, the state control means can control the state to a special state with an advantage corresponding to the establishment of the special condition (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 can By giving priority to the control to the time saving state via relief time reduction than the control to the time saving state via failure, the time reduction failure symbol stops at the fluctuation that results in relief time reduction (the variation where the relief time reduction number counter = 0). If displayed, control to short-time state via short-time relief),
A special suggestion performance execution means (for example, the CPU 120 for performance control further comprising a part for executing step 113IWS1019),
The special suggestion performance execution means selects a specific value from a predetermined value (e.g., the value of the relief time reduction counter is "10") corresponding to a predetermined number of times (e.g., 790 times) smaller than the special number of times for which the numerical information updated by the updating means is smaller than the special number of times. The execution of the special suggestion effect is restricted during a predetermined period until the time limit is reached. It is also possible to prohibit the execution of the pre-read preview effect of the second aspect.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the performance from becoming complicated, suppress a decrease in interest, and increase the degree of relief for the players.

(Means 113-3) In the means 113-1 or 113-2, the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied (for example, the period in which the number of times remaining until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less) is longer than the predetermined period. The execution rate of the special suggestion performance may be higher (see Figures 283-6 (A) and (B)) than in a previous period (for example, a period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is 11 or more). .

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest by making the player look forward to the fulfillment of the special condition, and it is also possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages to the player due to termination of the game immediately before the establishment of the special condition.

(Means 113-4) In any of the means 113-1 to 113-3, the special suggestion performance execution means executes a plurality of performance modes according to the number of executions of the variable display (for example, the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened). The ratio of which special suggestion effect is executed may be different (see FIGS. 283-6(C) and (D)).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player look forward to the fulfillment of the special condition, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition to the telop display, if there is a configuration in which the execution or non-execution of the incitement display, countdown display, and effect display that indicates the number of times remaining until the rescue time is shortened is determined by lottery, the number of times remaining until the rescue time is shortened is determined. The execution ratio may be different.

(Means 113-5) Any one of the means 113-1 to 113-4 is provided with an explanatory effect execution means capable of executing an explanatory effect regarding the special state based on the establishment of the special condition (FIG. 283-11(A), (See (B)).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

In addition, regarding the explanation performance, the execution rate and the selection rate of the performance mode may also be different depending on the number of times remaining until the relief time is shortened. For example, the explanation performance may be performed at a higher rate as the number of times remaining until the rescue time is shortened is smaller. In addition, if the number of times remaining until the rescue time is shortened is 10 or less, the execution rate of the explanation performance is lowered, thereby reducing the performance effect of the countdown performance and effect performance that suggest the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened. It is also possible to suppress this.

(Means 113-6) In any of the means 113-1 to 113-5, the special suggestion performance execution means sets the number of executions of the variable display until the special condition is satisfied as a first display that is easy to specify. A special suggestive display (e.g., inciting display, countdown display) and a second special suggestive display (e.g., effect display, telop (display effect)) (see FIGS. 283-11(C) to 283-12(E)).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

(Means 113-7) In any of the means 113-1 to 113-6, when the variable display is not executed and the suspension information is not stored in the suspension storage means, a predetermined image (for example, a demo movie) is displayed. A predetermined image display means capable of displaying (for example, a portion of the performance control CPU 120 that executes step 113IWS256),
The special suggestive effect execution means is capable of executing a special suggestive effect (for example, a telop display effect) when a predetermined image is displayed (for example, is capable of executing a telop display effect and a demo movie effect at the same time). (The display of the predetermined image and the suggestive effect may be performed either first or at the same time.) Depending on the number of times variable display is performed until the special condition is met. , the rate at which special suggestion effects are executed when a predetermined image is displayed may be different (see FIGS. 283-6(A) and (B)).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest by drawing attention to whether or not the special suggestion performance is being executed, and it is also possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, the selection ratio of the production mode of the special suggestion production when a predetermined image is displayed is varied depending on the number of executions of the variable display until the special condition is satisfied (Fig. 283-6 (C), (D ) may also be used. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest by drawing attention to the aspect of the special suggestion performance, and it is also possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, conventionally, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-95449, the number of changes in the symbol is counted, and the count result reaches a value corresponding to a special number of times (for example, 1000 times) without a jackpot occurring. There are some machines that are controlled to a variable probability state based on this (that is, based on a special number of fluctuations (for example, 1000 times) without a jackpot occurring). Similarly, there have been systems that control the gaming state to a special state (for example, a time-saving state where symbol variations are executed frequently) based on the count result reaching a specific value. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2005-95449, the gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state based on the variable display number of times is insufficiently entertaining when the special condition of the variable display number is satisfied. Met. Therefore, the following gaming machines (means 114-1) to (means 114-8) are described in this feature section 113IW.

(Means 114-1) Perform variable display of first identification information (for example, first special symbol) and variable display of second identification information (for example, second special symbol), and display a specific display result (for example, jackpot symbol) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player based on the derived and displayed
a state control means capable of controlling a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state;
an updating means capable of updating numerical information (for example, a relief time reduction counter),
The updating means updates the numerical information when variable display of the first identification information is executed and when variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the numerical information When the symbol changes and when the second special symbol changes, the relief time shortening counter is updated),
The state control means is
When the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value (for example, the value of the relief time reduction counter is "0") corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of executions of the variable display, the special condition is set. When established, it can be controlled to a special state,
When a special display result different from a specific display result (for example, a time-saving missed symbol) is derived and displayed in the normal state, it can be controlled to a special state,
The advantage of the special state that is controlled when the special condition is satisfied is higher than the advantage of the special state that is controlled when the special display result is derived and displayed;
The state control means controls the advantage level corresponding to the establishment of the special condition based on the fact that the special condition is satisfied when the special state is controlled to have the advantage degree corresponding to the derivation and display of the special display result. can be controlled to a special state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 changes to the time saving state via the relief time reduction based on the fact that a variation in the relief time reduction has been reached while being controlled to the time reduction state via the relief time reduction). control (promote)),
When a special condition is established, a notification performance execution means (for example, performing steps 113IWS806, S809, and S845 in the performance control CPU 120) that can execute a notification performance (for example, a time-saving entry performance, a time-saving promotion performance) that notifies the establishment of the special condition. further comprising:
The notification effect execution means is capable of executing the notification effect based on the establishment of a special condition while being controlled to a special state with an advantage corresponding to the derivation and display of the special display result (for example, A gaming machine characterized in that the performance control CPU 120 executes a time-saving promotion performance when the variation pattern PA3-2 is selected.

According to such a configuration, when the special condition is satisfied when the special condition is controlled to be in a special state with an advantage corresponding to the derivation and display of the special display result, it is possible to give a special feeling by the notification effect, It can improve your interest.

(Means 114-2) In the means 114-1, the notification performance execution means is capable of executing the notification performance when the special condition is satisfied in the normal state, and when the special condition is satisfied in the normal state, and when the special condition is satisfied. (For example, the performance control CPU 120 executes steps 113IWS806, S809, and S845 to enter time-shortening state C when the normal state is controlled to short-time state C.) It is also possible to execute the performance and perform the time-saving promotion performance when the time-saving state B is controlled from the time-saving state C.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a special feeling to the player and increase his interest by performing the notification effect in a manner that suits the situation.

In addition, in this example, the notification performance (time-saving entry performance, time-saving promotion performance) performed during the fluctuation is a variation in which the rescue time reduction number counter = 0 in the normal state and a variation in which the rescue time reduction number counter = 0 in the time reduction state. Although the performance mode is different, the execution timing of the notification performance is not limited to the period of fluctuation. For example, a variation in which the relief time reduction number counter = 0 in the normal state and a variation in which the relief time reduction number counter = 0 in the time reduction state, during the symbol confirmation period from stopping the symbol to starting the next variation. The presentation mode of the notification presentation may be different. In that case, a common performance may be performed during the changes.

(Means 114-3) In the means 114-1 or 114-2, a firing promotion notification that promotes the firing of game media toward a special route (for example, display of the right-hand hit notification image shown in FIG. 283-12(H)) ) (for example, a portion of the performance control CPU 120 that performs steps 113IWS806, S809, and S845),
The launch promotion notification means can execute the launch promotion notification when a special condition is satisfied in the normal state, and restricts the execution of the launch promotion notification when the special condition is satisfied in the special state (for example, the firing promotion notification means is for performance control). The CPU 120 displays the right-handed hit notification image based on the control from the normal state to the time-saving state C (see FIG. 283-12 (H)), and based on the control from the time-saving state B to the time-saving state C. does not display the right-handed hitting notification image (see Figure 283-15 (D)). In addition, in Figure 283-15 (D), the right-handed hitting promotion image (under the small pattern) is displayed based on the time saving state B. Although the displayed right-pointing arrow) is displayed, this right-handed hitting promotion image is different from the right-handed hitting notification image that is displayed based on the time-saving state C.) Good too.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the complexity of the performance.

Furthermore, when the special condition is established in the special state, as long as it restricts the execution of the launch promotion notification, even if it prohibits the execution of the launch promotion notification as shown in Figure 283-15 (D). Alternatively, the launch promotion notification may be executed in a more passive manner than when the special condition is satisfied in the normal state. For example, the display range may be made smaller or the arrow may be made transparent to provide firing promotion notification. Further, when the special condition is satisfied in the normal state, firing promotion notification is performed on the image display device 5 where the player's attention level is high, while when the special condition is satisfied in the special state, the player's attention level is high on the image display device 5. The firing promotion notification may be performed using a light emitting member or speakers 8L, 8R that are lower than the above.

The firing promotion notification means also includes a first firing promotion notification (for example, FIG. 283-12 (H)) that promotes the firing of the game media toward a special route when a special condition is established in the normal state. 283-15 (A) to (D)), and a second firing promotion notification (for example, the right-pointing arrow in FIGS. 283-15 (A) to (D)) that promotes the firing of game media toward the special route during the control of the special state. , respectively, and may be executed in different ways, and when a special condition is satisfied in a special state, the first launch promotion notification may not be executed, but the second launch promotion notification may be executed. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the complexity of the presentation while providing notification according to the situation.

(Means 114-4) In any of the means 114-1 to 114-3, the performance mode of the notification performance is the same when the special condition is satisfied in the normal state and when the special condition is satisfied in the special state. (For example, the effect executed when being controlled from the normal state to the time-saving state C and the effect executed when being controlled from the time-saving state B to the time-saving state C may be the same).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of variation patterns and the number of performance data, and to reduce the storage capacity.

(Means 114-5) In any of the means 114-1 to 114-4, when transitioning from a normal state to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition, the variable display to be executed after the establishment of the special condition is subject to advance notice. (For example, if the result of step 113IWS1014 is N, the performance control CPU 120 executes step 113IWS1015.) Based on the establishment of special conditions, a special state with a low advantage (for example, When transitioning from time-saving state B) with 100 time-savings to a special state with a high advantage (for example, time-saving state C with 800 time-savings), a specific suggestion for advance notice of the variable display that will be executed after the special condition is established. The effect may be executed (for example, if the effect is Y in step 113IWS1014, the effect control CPU 120 may be able to execute step 113IWS1019).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately perform a specific suggestion performance while suppressing the occurrence of problems in the performance.

(Means 114-6) In any of the means 114-1 to 114-5, in a special state, a special suggestion performance execution means (for example, a performance control CPU 120 It is also possible to include a part in which step 113IWS806 is executed regardless of whether or not the time saving state is present.

According to such a configuration, in the special state, it is possible to improve interest by making the player look forward to the fulfillment of the special condition.

Note that the presentation mode of the special suggestion presentation may be different between the normal state and the time saving state. For example, the font color of the countdown effect and the effect color and pattern of the effect effect may be different.

(Means 114-7) In any of the means 114-1 to 114-6, a predetermined variable display pattern (for example, a variation pattern other than the variation patterns PA1-2 to PA1-4) and a variable display pattern that is more variable than the predetermined variable display pattern Variable display pattern determining means (for example, a game control micro a part of the computer 100 that performs step S111),
The variable display pattern determining means is configured such that a special state that is controlled when a special condition is satisfied is more likely to cause a display result of a variable display to be non-displayable than a special state that is controlled based on a special display result being derived and displayed. It may also be possible that when a specific display result is obtained, the proportion of the shortened variable display pattern being determined is high (see FIGS. 283-1 (D) and (E)).

According to such a configuration, a decrease in interest can be suppressed. For example, if after playing a game for a long time, even though the relief time is shortened, a high rate of selection of the outliers of the fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time is expected to cause stress to the player. Therefore, the stress on the player can be reduced by configuring the system so that a variation pattern with a short variation time is likely to be selected in the deviation variation of the time saving state via the relief time saving.

(Means 114-8) In any of the means 114-1 to 114-7, a plurality of variable displays including a specific variable display pattern (for example, variable patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3) corresponding to execution of the reach effect Comprising a variable display pattern determining means (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 that performs step S111) that determines a variable display pattern from the pattern,
The variable display pattern determining means is configured such that a special state that is controlled when a special condition is satisfied is more likely to cause a display result of a variable display to be non-displayable than a special state that is controlled based on a special display result being derived and displayed. In the case of a specific display result, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern may be low (see FIGS. 283-1(D) and (E)).

According to such a configuration, a decrease in interest can be suppressed. For example, if a high percentage of out-of-reach options are selected after playing for a long time even though the relief time has been shortened, it is expected that this will cause stress to the player, so By configuring the game in such a time-saving state that the variable pattern of out-of-reach is unlikely to be selected, stress on the player can be reduced.

In addition, conventionally, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-95449, the number of changes in the symbol is counted, and the count result reaches a value corresponding to a special number of times (for example, 1000 times) without a jackpot occurring. There are some machines that are controlled to a variable probability state based on this (that is, based on a special number of fluctuations (for example, 1000 times) without a jackpot occurring). Similarly, there have been systems that control the gaming state to a special state (for example, a time-saving state where symbol variations are executed frequently) based on the count result reaching a specific value. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-95449, which can be controlled to a special state based on the variable number of times of display, there is room for improvement in control. Therefore, the following gaming machines (means 115-1) to (means 115-4) are described in this feature section 113IW.

(Means 115-1) Perform variable display of first identification information (for example, first special symbol) and variable display of second identification information (for example, second special symbol), and display specific display results (for example, jackpot symbol) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player based on the derived and displayed
A first passage area (for example, a first starting winning prize) provided at a position where a game medium (for example, a game ball) can pass through a specific path (for example, a left side area) among a plurality of paths along which a game medium (for example, a game ball) can move. mouth) and
a second passage area (for example, a second starting prize opening) provided at a position where game media passing through a special route (for example, the right side area) different from the specific route can pass;
As the variable display of the identification information, there is a variable display of the first identification information based on the first starting condition (for example, winning of a game ball in the first starting prize opening), and a second starting condition (for example, the second starting condition). Variable display execution means (for example, executes steps S110 to S113 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can execute the variable display of the second identification information based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning hole) is established. part) and
a state control means capable of controlling to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which the second starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the normal state;
an updating means capable of updating numerical information (for example, a relief time reduction counter),
The updating means updates the numerical information when variable display of the first identification information is executed and when variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the numerical information When the symbol changes and when the second special symbol changes, the relief time shortening counter is updated),
The second starting condition is established based on the game medium passing through the second passing area,
The state control means is
When the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value (for example, the value of the relief time reduction counter is "0") corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of executions of the variable display, the special condition is set. When established, it can be controlled to a special state,
It is possible to control to a special state after being controlled to an advantageous state based on the specific display result derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 saves time by performing step 113IWS537). control to state A),
A special state that is controlled after an advantageous state (for example, a time-saving state (time-saving state A) via a jackpot) and a special state that is controlled when special conditions are established (for example, a time-saving state (time-saving state C) via a rescue time-saving state). ))) and a special output means (for example, a part that performs steps 113IWS42B and S42F in the game control microcomputer 100) that can perform a special output (for example, output of the winning easy state designation signals 1 and 3). ,
In the special state, specific output means (for example, in the game control microcomputer 100) that can perform a specific output (for example, output of the launch position designation signal 3) that can specify that the game media should be launched toward a special route. , a part for performing step 113IWS35),
The specific output means can perform a specific output in common in the special state that is controlled after the advantageous state and the special state that is controlled when the special condition is established (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 A gaming machine characterized in that step 113IWS35 is performed in common even when any time saving flag is set.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to externally specify the trigger for controlling the special state, and it is also possible to standardize the specific signal. For example, it may be possible to externally specify whether the trigger for controlling the time saving state is the occurrence of a jackpot or saving time saving.

In addition, in this example, a signal is output to the test device that can distinguish the time saving state via the jackpot and the time saving state via the relief time saving, and the time saving state via the jackpot and the time saving state via the relief time saving are output. Even when the machine is controlled by the player, it is possible to commonly output a signal that can specify that the ball should be hit to the right, but it is also possible to output a signal that can specify that the ball should be hit to the right. In addition to outputting a signal that can distinguish between the time-saving state via jackpot and the time-saving state via relief time-saving, it is also possible to specify that the player should hit right when the control is in either the time-saving state via jackpot or the time-saving state via rescue time-saving. It may also be possible to output signals in common. As a result, the hall management computer will be able to perform operational analysis such as the rate of relief time reduction achieved during actual operations and the customer demographics of players when relief time reduction is reached, as well as standardization of signals. be able to.

(Means 115-2) In the means 115-1, the state control means is capable of controlling the state to a special state when a special display result (for example, a time saving wrong symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state. ,
The special output means is configured to output a special state (for example, a time-saving state (time-saving state B) via a time-saving failure) that is controlled when a special display result is derived and displayed, and a special state that is controlled when a special condition is satisfied ( For example, it is possible to perform a special output (for example, output of easy-to-win state designation signals 2 and 3) that can be distinguished from the time-saving state via rescue time-saving (time-saving state C) (for example, in the game control microcomputer 100 , step 113IWS42D, S42F).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to externally specify the trigger for controlling the special state. For example, it is possible to externally specify whether the trigger for controlling the time saving state is a stoppage of time saving symbols or a rescue time saving.

(Means 115-3) In the means 115-1 or the means 115-2, the state control means is configured to control the state when a special display result different from the specific display result (for example, a time saving symbol) is derived and displayed in the normal state. can be controlled to
The advantage of the special state that is controlled when the special condition is satisfied is higher than the advantage of the special state that is controlled when the special display result is derived and displayed;
When a special condition is established and a special display result is derived and displayed, the state control means can control to a special state with an advantage corresponding to the establishment of the special condition (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 can By giving priority to the control to the time saving state via relief time reduction than the control to the time saving state via failure, the time reduction failure symbol stops at the fluctuation that results in relief time reduction (the variation where the relief time reduction number counter = 0). If the message is displayed, control may be performed to shorten the time via the shortened rescue time.

According to such a configuration, the degree of relief for the player can be increased.

(Means 115-4) In any of the means 115-1 to 115-3, when a special display result different from the specific display result (for example, a time-saving missed symbol) is derived and displayed in the normal state, the state control means can be controlled in a special state,
The advantage of the special state that is controlled when the special condition is satisfied is higher than the advantage of the special state that is controlled when the special display result is derived and displayed;
When a special condition is established and a special display result is derived and displayed, a signal control means (for example, in the game control microcomputer 100, It is also possible to include a part in which step 113IWS37E is performed when the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed even if the variation results in saving time saving.

According to such a configuration, display results can be appropriately notified to the outside.

Further, the contents shown in the feature section 113IW may be applied to the configurations of the gaming machines shown in (Means 105-1) to (Means 107-15) below.

(Means 105-1) Perform variable display of first identification information (for example, first special symbol) and variable display of second identification information (for example, second special symbol), and display a specific display result (for example, jackpot symbol) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) based on the derived display, and is controlled to a special state (for example, a time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state. and updating means capable of updating numerical information (for example, a relief time reduction counter) based on execution of the variable display, and the state control means specifies as a display result of the variable display. It is possible to control to a special state after being controlled to an advantageous state based on the display result derived and displayed, and the numerical information updated by the updating means is a special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of executions of the variable display. can be controlled to a special state when a special condition is satisfied by setting a specific value corresponding to the first identification information (for example, the value of the rescue time reduction counter: 0), and the updating means is configured to perform variable display of the first identification information. The numerical information is updated depending on the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 saves the relief time when the first special symbol changes and when the second special symbol changes). There are multiple types of advantageous states including specific advantageous states (for example, 10R jackpot A) and special advantageous states (for example, 10R jackpot B), and the control is controlled to which one of the plurality of types is advantageous. The advantage of a special state that is controlled after being controlled to a particularly advantageous state is different depending on whether the special state is controlled to a particular advantageous state, and Higher than the advantage of the controlled special state (for example, after 10R jackpot A, it is mainly controlled to a time-saving state of 100 times, and after 10R jackpot B, it is mainly controlled to a time-saving state until the next jackpot occurs. ), the advantage of the special state that is controlled when the special condition is established is higher than the advantage of the special state that is controlled after being controlled to a specific advantageous state (for example, after 10R jackpot A, the advantage is mainly 100 The game may be controlled to a time-saving state of 800 times, and may be controlled to a time-saving state of 800 times as a time-saving state via a relief time reduction.With such a configuration, the degree of relief for the player can be increased.

(Means 105-2) When controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information and when controlled to the advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information, the control is controlled to an advantageous state. After that, the rate at which the special state with a special advantage (for example, a time-saving state that continues until the next jackpot occurs) is controlled is different (for example, the jackpot type varies depending on when the first special symbol changes and when the second special symbol changes). The selection ratio is different, and a special condition is established when controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information and when controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information. The number of executions of the variable display is the same for the special number of times (for example, after a jackpot is achieved based on a change in the first special symbol, and after a jackpot is achieved based on a change in the second special symbol) The number of changes required to shorten the time may be the same (800 times). According to such a configuration, when the first identification information is variably displayed and when the second identification information is variably displayed. While increasing the interest by exhibiting different gameplay characteristics, the gambling nature is excessively high because the special number of times is common between the case where the first identification information is displayed variably and the case where the second identification information is variably displayed. It is possible to suppress the increase in

(Means 105-3) An unfavorable setting value (for example, a setting value "1") in which the probability of being controlled to be in an advantageous state is a first probability (for example, about 1/319), and control to be in an advantageous state than the first probability. A setting in which any one of a plurality of setting values can be set, including an advantageous setting value (for example, setting value "6") that has a second probability (for example, about 1/270) that the probability of It is easier for the special condition to be satisfied if the means is provided and set to a disadvantageous setting value than if it is set to an advantageous setting value, and the advantageous degree of the special state that is controlled when the special condition is satisfied is as follows. Higher than the advantage of the special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, after 10R jackpot A, it is mainly controlled to a 100-time time-saving state, and as a time-saving state via relief time-saving, it is 800 times It may also be controlled to shorten the time. According to such a configuration, even when a disadvantageous setting value is set, the advantageous degree of the special state that is controlled when the special condition is satisfied is Since the degree of advantage is higher than that of the special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state, it is possible to rescue the player more effectively.

(Means 105-4) A setting means is provided that can set any one of a plurality of setting values having different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and after being controlled to an advantageous state, any of the plurality of setting values is set. Whether the special state of advantage is controlled is the same regardless of which setting value is set (for example, the selection ratio of the jackpot type is the same regardless of which setting value is set). The advantage of the special state that is controlled when the special condition is satisfied is the same when any setting value is set (for example, the length of the time-saving state via relief time-saving is This may be the same regardless of whether the set value is set. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the improvement in the gambling experience due to the set value, and realize a healthy gaming experience. be able to.

(Means 105-5) When controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information and when controlled to the advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information, one of the plurality of types is selected. The ratio of which advantageous state is controlled is different, and a special condition is established in response to the variable display of the first identification information, and a special condition is established in response to the variable display of the second identification information. The advantage of the special state that is controlled after the special condition is established is the same (for example, when controlling to the time saving state via relief time saving based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol, and when controlling to the time saving state via the relief time saving based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol, It may also be possible to control to the time saving state 800 times based on the fluctuation of the first identification information. Although the game performance is different depending on whether the second identification information is displayed variably or when the second identification information is variably displayed, which setting value is set for the advantage of the special state that is controlled when the special condition is satisfied? Sometimes, by being common, it is possible to suppress the increase in gambling nature and to provide an appropriate degree of relief.

(Means 105-6) A predetermined variable display pattern (for example, variation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3) and a shortened variable display pattern (for example, variation pattern PA1-2) whose variable display period is shorter than that of the predetermined variable display pattern. - PA1-4), the variable display pattern determining means (for example, the part that executes step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100). is a shortened variable when the display result of the variable display becomes a non-specific display result, when the special state that is controlled when the special condition is satisfied is better than the special state that is controlled after the special condition is controlled to an advantageous state. The percentage of display patterns determined is high (for example, in a losing variation, in a time saving state via relief time saving, a variation pattern is selected using the variation pattern table E shown in Figure 283-1 (E), and in a time saving state via jackpot). A variation pattern may be selected using variation pattern tables C and H shown in FIGS. 283-1(C) and 283-1(H). According to such a configuration, a decrease in interest can be suppressed by shifting to a special state where the gaming speed is faster (for example, a time-saving state with short fluctuation time) based on the fact that the game has been played for a long period of time. .

(Means 105-7) Variable display pattern determining means ( For example, the variable display pattern determining means includes a part (for example, a part that executes step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the variable display pattern determining means controls the special state that is controlled when the special condition is satisfied after the special state is controlled to be more advantageous. When the display result of variable display becomes a non-specific display result, the rate of determining the specific variable display pattern is lower than in the special state where the display result is non-specific. The fluctuation pattern may be selected using the fluctuation pattern table E shown in (E), and the fluctuation pattern may be selected using the fluctuation pattern table H shown in Figure 283-2 (H) in the time saving state via jackpot. . According to such a configuration, a decline in interest is suppressed by shifting to a special state where the gaming speed is faster (for example, a time-saving state where the frequency of occurrence of reach is suppressed) based on the fact that the game has been played for a long period of time. be able to.

(Means 105-8) The updating means is capable of updating specific numerical information (for example, a time saving counter) that is different from numerical information based on the variable display being executed in the special state, and the state control means is The special state can be controlled by setting information (for example, a time saving flag), and the special state can be terminated by canceling the setting of the special information. , 100 times), the special state is terminated based on a predetermined value (for example, the value of the time saving number counter: 0), and the numerical information and specific numerical value are updated by the updating means even if the power supply is stopped. A backup storage means (e.g., RAM 102) capable of holding information and setting information of special information, and a backup storage means (e.g., RAM 102) capable of holding information and setting information of special information, and a backup storage means (e.g., RAM 102) that can store the initialization means capable of initializing the storage contents of the storage means, the initialization means initializing the setting information of the special information and the specific numerical information, and initializing the numerical information when a predetermined condition is satisfied. (For example, while the setting of the time saving flag and the value of the time saving number counter are reset, the value of the relief time saving number counter may not be reset.) According to such a configuration, even when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the degree of relief for the player can be increased.

(Means 106-1) Perform variable display of first identification information (for example, first special symbol) and variable display of second identification information (for example, second special symbol), and display specific display results (for example, jackpot symbol) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) based on the derived display, and is controlled to a special state (for example, a time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state. an updating means capable of updating numerical information (for example, a relief time reduction counter) based on execution of a variable display, and a starting condition (for example, a first starting winning opening or a second starting winning opening); A variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on the fact that a game ball enters the mouth) is satisfied and a start condition (for example, neither a jackpot game state nor a fluctuating state) is satisfied, and a start condition. is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, a suspension storage means (for example, a first suspension memory number buffer, a second suspension memory number buffer) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as suspension information, and the power supply is stopped. When a backup storage means (e.g., RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information and pending information is established, and a predetermined condition (e.g., the output signal from the clear switch is on when the power is turned on) is satisfied, Initialization means capable of initializing the storage contents of the backup storage means, numerical information updated by the updating means based on the storage contents of the backup storage means when power supply is started, and suspension information stored in the suspension storage means. and a recovery means (for example, a part that executes step S6 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) capable of executing recovery control for restoring the data. It is possible to control to the special state when the special condition is satisfied by setting a specific value (for example, the value of the rescue time reduction counter: 0) corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of executions, and recovery is possible. After the control is executed, when a special condition is established based on the execution of the variable display corresponding to the restored pending information, the control is possible to enter the special state, and the updating means executes the variable display of the first identification information. The numerical information is updated depending on the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the numerical information when the first special symbol changes and when the second special symbol changes. It is also possible to update the time saving number counter). According to such a configuration, it is possible to optimize control through initialization while suppressing disadvantages to the player when a power outage occurs.

(Means 106-2) Controlled to an advantageous state when controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information and controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information. After that, the rate at which the special state with a special advantage (for example, a time-saving state that continues until the next jackpot occurs) is controlled is different (for example, the jackpot type varies depending on when the first special symbol changes and when the second special symbol changes). The selection ratio is different, and a special condition is established when controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information and when controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information. The number of executions of the variable display is the same for the special number of times (for example, after a jackpot is achieved based on a change in the first special symbol, and after a jackpot is achieved based on a change in the second special symbol) The number of changes required to shorten the time may be the same (800 times). According to such a configuration, when the first identification information is variably displayed and when the second identification information is variably displayed. While increasing the interest by exhibiting different gameplay characteristics, the gambling nature is excessively high because the special number of times is common between the case where the first identification information is displayed variably and the case where the second identification information is variably displayed. It is possible to suppress the increase in

(Means 106-3) An unfavorable setting value (for example, a setting value "1") in which the probability of being controlled to be in an advantageous state is a first probability (for example, about 1/319), and control to be in an advantageous state than the first probability. A setting in which any one of a plurality of setting values can be set, including an advantageous setting value (for example, setting value "6") that has a second probability (for example, about 1/270) that the probability of It is easier for the special condition to be satisfied if the means is provided and set to a disadvantageous setting value than if it is set to an advantageous setting value, and the advantageous degree of the special state that is controlled when the special condition is satisfied is as follows. Higher than the advantage of the special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, after 10R jackpot A, it is mainly controlled to a 100-time time-saving state, and as a time-saving state via relief time-saving, it is 800 times It may also be controlled to shorten the time. According to such a configuration, even when a disadvantageous setting value is set, the advantageous degree of the special state that is controlled when the special condition is satisfied is Since the degree of advantage is higher than that of the special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state, it is possible to rescue the player more effectively.

(Means 106-4) A setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values having different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and which one of the plurality of types after being controlled to an advantageous state is provided. Whether the special state of advantage is controlled is the same regardless of which setting value is set (for example, the selection ratio of jackpot type is the same regardless of which setting value is set). The advantage of the special state that is controlled when the special condition is satisfied is the same when any setting value is set (for example, the length of the time-saving state via relief time-saving is This may be the same regardless of whether the set value is set. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the improvement in the gambling experience due to the set value, thereby realizing a healthy gaming experience. be able to.

(Means 106-5) When controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information and when controlled to the advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information. The ratio of which advantageous state is controlled is different, and a special condition is established in response to the variable display of the first identification information, and a special condition is established in response to the variable display of the second identification information. The advantage of the special state that is controlled after the special condition is established is the same (for example, when controlling to the time saving state via relief time saving based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol, and when controlling to the time saving state via the relief time saving based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol, It may also be possible to control to the time saving state 800 times based on the fluctuation of the first identification information. Although the game performance is different depending on whether the second identification information is displayed variably or when the second identification information is variably displayed, which setting value is set for the advantage of the special state that is controlled when the special condition is satisfied? Sometimes, by being common, it is possible to suppress the increase in gambling nature and to provide an appropriate degree of relief.

(Means 106-6) A predetermined variable display pattern (for example, variation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3) and a shortened variable display pattern (for example, variation pattern PA1-2) whose variable display period is shorter than that of the predetermined variable display pattern. ~PA1-4), the variable display pattern determining means is configured to determine a special state that is controlled when a special condition is satisfied. , when the display result of the variable display becomes a non-specific display result, the rate of deciding on the shortened variable display pattern is higher than in the special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. In the time-saving state via the route, a variation pattern is selected using the variation pattern table E shown in Figure 283-1 (E), and in the time-saving state via the jackpot, the variation pattern is selected using the variation pattern table H shown in Figure 283-2 (H). (selecting a pattern). According to such a configuration, a decrease in interest can be suppressed by shifting to a special state where the gaming speed is faster (for example, a time-saving state with short fluctuation time) based on the fact that the game has been played for a long period of time. .

(Means 106-7) Variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern (for example, variable patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3) corresponding to execution of a reach effect. In addition, the variable display pattern determining means is configured such that the display result of the variable display is more likely to be a non-specific display result in a special state that is controlled when a special condition is established than in a special state that is controlled after the special condition has been controlled to an advantageous state. In this case, the rate of deciding on a specific variable display pattern is low (for example, in case of a failure variation, in a time reduction state via relief time reduction, a variation pattern is selected using the variation pattern table E shown in Figure 283-1 (E)). , in the time saving state via jackpot, the variation pattern may be selected using the variation pattern table H shown in FIG. 283-2(H)). According to such a configuration, a decline in interest is suppressed by shifting to a special state where the gaming speed is faster (for example, a time-saving state where the frequency of occurrence of reach is suppressed) based on the fact that the game has been played for a long period of time. be able to.

(Means 106-8) The updating means can update specific numerical information (for example, a time saving counter) that is different from numerical information based on the variable display being executed in the special state, and the state control means The special state can be controlled by setting information (for example, a time saving flag), and the special state can be terminated by canceling the setting of the special information. , 100 times), the special state is terminated based on a predetermined value (for example, the value of the time saving number counter: 0), and the numerical information and specific numerical value are updated by the updating means even if the power supply is stopped. A backup storage means (e.g., RAM 102) capable of holding information and setting information of special information, and a backup storage means (e.g., RAM 102) capable of holding information and setting information of special information, and a backup storage means (e.g., RAM 102) that can store the initialization means capable of initializing the storage contents of the storage means, the initialization means initializing the setting information of the special information and the specific numerical information, and initializing the numerical information when a predetermined condition is satisfied. (For example, while the setting of the time saving flag and the value of the time saving number counter are reset, the value of the relief time saving number counter may not be reset.) According to such a configuration, even when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the degree of relief for the player can be increased.

(Means 107-1) Perform variable display of first identification information (for example, first special symbol) and variable display of second identification information (for example, second special symbol), and display specific display results (for example, jackpot symbol) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) based on the derived display, and is controlled to a special state (for example, a time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state. and an updating means capable of updating numerical information (for example, a relief time reduction counter) based on execution of the variable display, and the state controlling means can update the numerical information updated by the updating means. can be controlled to a special state when a special condition is satisfied by setting a specific value (for example, the value of the relief time reduction counter: 0) corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of executions of the variable display. The updating means updates the numerical information depending on whether the first identification information is variably displayed and the second identification information is variably displayed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 When the first special symbol changes and when the second special symbol changes, the relief time shortening counter is updated), and a suggestive performance related to the establishment of the special condition (for example, inciting performance, countdown performance, effect performance, telop display performance) is performed. The suggestive effect execution means is further provided with an executable suggestive effect execution means, and the suggestive effect executes the suggestive effect at a different rate among a plurality of presentation modes depending on the number of executions of the variable display (for example, a countdown effect). The selection ratio of the numbers to be displayed is different (100% of the numbers are selected according to the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened, but the values to be displayed are selected by lottery according to the number of times remaining until the relief time is shortened). ), and the range in which the effect is displayed differs in the effect production (it is displayed at 100% in the range according to the number of times remaining until the rescue time is shortened, but depending on the number of times remaining until the rescue time is shortened). (The range to be displayed may be decided by lottery based on the ratio of , it is also possible to indicate the period until the special condition is satisfied (see FIGS. 283-11 and 283-12). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest by drawing attention to the performance mode of the suggestive performance, and to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

(Means 107-2) The presentation mode of the suggestive presentation (for example, countdown presentation) is such that the number of executions of the variable display until the special condition is satisfied can be specified (see FIG. 283-11 and FIG. 283-12). It may also be a thing. According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player of the number of executions of the variable display until the special condition is satisfied.

(Means 107-3) The suggestive effect is an effect that displays a specific image (for example, an effect effect that displays an effect image), and the specific image includes color and size (the size of a single image, and the size of multiple images). (including the size of the display range) is displayed in a plurality of different ways, and the period until the suggested special condition is satisfied differs depending on which way it is displayed (Figures 283-11 and 283- (see 12). According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the aspect of a specific image and improve interest.

(Means 107-4) The starting condition (for example, the winning of a game ball in the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole) is satisfied, and the starting condition (for example, neither the jackpot game state nor the fluctuating state) variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on the fact that 1 pending memory number buffer, 2nd pending memory number buffer), and a predetermined buffer capable of displaying a predetermined image (for example, a demo movie) when variable display is not being executed and no pending memory is stored in the pending storage means. image display means, and the suggestive effect execution means is capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a subtitle display effect) when a predetermined image is displayed (for example, a subtitle display effect and a demo movie effect). (Can be executed overlappingly.The display of a predetermined image and the suggestion effect can be executed in either order first or at the same time.), variable display until special conditions are met. The rate at which the suggestive effects are executed when a predetermined image is displayed may vary depending on the number of executions (see FIGS. 283-6(A) and 283-6(B)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase interest by drawing attention to whether or not the suggestive performance is being executed, and it is also possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

(Means 107-5) The starting condition (for example, the winning of a game ball in the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole) is satisfied, and the starting condition (for example, neither the jackpot game state nor the fluctuating state) variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on the fact that 1 pending memory number buffer, 2nd pending memory number buffer), and a predetermined buffer capable of displaying a predetermined image (for example, a demo movie) when variable display is not being executed and no pending memory is stored in the pending storage means. image display means, and the suggestive effect execution means is capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a subtitle display effect) when a predetermined image is displayed (for example, a subtitle display effect and a demo movie effect). (Can be executed overlappingly.The display of a predetermined image and the suggestion effect can be executed in either order first or at the same time.), variable display until special conditions are met. Depending on the number of executions, when a predetermined image is displayed, the rate at which the suggestion effect is executed in a predetermined manner may vary (see FIGS. 283-6(C) and (D)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest by drawing attention to the presence or absence of the mode of suggestive performance, and it is also possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

(Means 107-6) The starting condition (for example, the winning of a game ball in the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole) is satisfied, and the starting condition (for example, neither the jackpot game state nor the fluctuating state) variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on the fact that 1 pending memory number buffer, 2nd pending memory number buffer), and a predetermined buffer capable of displaying a predetermined image (for example, a demo movie) when variable display is not being executed and no pending memory is stored in the pending storage means. image display means, and the suggestive performance execution means detects that the operation means (for example, the ball batting operation handle 30) is operated while the predetermined image is displayed, and detects that the operation means (for example, the ball batting operation handle 30) is operated, Based on at least one of the detection that the gaming medium has passed through the winning opening or the second start winning opening), it is possible to perform a suggestive performance (for example, a dialogue performance by outputting a voice). Good too. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a suggestive effect to a player who actually plays a game, and it is possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

(Means 107-7) A setting means is provided that can set any one of a plurality of setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and the suggestive effect execution means is configured to set to which one the setting value is set. The rate at which the suggestive effect (for example, telop display effect) is performed may be different depending on the situation (see FIGS. 283-6(A) and (B)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest by drawing attention to whether or not the suggestion effect is to be executed, and it is also possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine by suggesting the set value.

(Means 107-8) A setting means is provided that can set any one of a plurality of setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and the suggestive effect execution means is configured to set to which one the setting value is set. The rate at which the suggestive effect (for example, telop display effect) is executed may vary depending on the specific mode (for example, "red") depending on the color of the fish (see FIGS. 283-6(C) and (D)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the player's interest by drawing attention to the mode of the suggestion effect, and it is also possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine by suggesting the set value.

(Means 107-9) A setting means that can set any one of a plurality of setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and a setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value. A setting suggestion performance execution means (for example, a part of the performance control CPU 120 of modification 1 that executes a setting suggestion performance as a fluctuating performance), and the setting suggestion performance execution means can be set to any setting value. The rate of execution of the setting suggestion effect may differ depending on whether the setting suggestion effect is set, and the suggestion effect execution means may have the same rate of execution of the suggestion effect no matter which setting value is set. . According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest by drawing attention to whether or not the suggestive effect is being executed, and it is also possible to suppress complexity of control.

(Means 107-10) A setting means that can set any one of a plurality of setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and a setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value. A setting suggestion performance execution means (for example, a part of the performance control CPU 120 of modification 1 that executes a setting suggestion performance as a fluctuating performance), and the setting suggestion performance execution means can be set to any setting value. The rate at which setting suggestion effects are executed varies depending on the special mode (for example, the second mode), and the suggestion effect execution means executes the specific mode (for example, the second mode) regardless of the setting value. It may also be possible that the rate at which the suggestive effects are executed is common. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest by drawing attention to the mode of the suggestive performance, and it is also possible to suppress complication of control.

(Means 107-11) The suggestive performance execution means is configured to perform a suggestive effect during a specific period after the power supply is started, in a case where the initialization process is executed when the power supply is started and a case where the recovery process is executed. The rate at which the suggestion effect (for example, the display of the initial result depending on the number of times until the rescue time is shortened) may be performed may be different. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest by drawing attention to whether or not the suggestive performance is being executed, and it is also possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

(Means 107-12) Variable display pattern determining means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100), the variable display pattern determining means is capable of determining the special variable display pattern when the special condition is satisfied, and is capable of determining the special variable display pattern before the special condition is satisfied. When the variable display is not determined (for example, the variation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2 can be varied only when the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes 0) and the variable display using the special variable display pattern is being executed. , it is also possible to further include a specific notification performance execution means capable of executing a specific notification performance (for example, a time-saving entry performance) for notifying that the special state is controlled. According to such a configuration, it is possible to inform the player that the special state is controlled due to the establishment of the special condition, and also to clearly inform the player of the change in the gaming state, and to increase the interest when the special condition is satisfied. can be improved.

(Means 107-13) A predetermined variable display pattern (for example, variable patterns PA1-1 to PA1-4 without a reach effect) and a specific variable display pattern with a variable display period longer than the predetermined variable display pattern (for example, a reach effect) variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including variable patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3, PB2-1 to PB2-3), the variable display pattern determining means comprising: In both cases where the display result of the variable display is a specific display result and when it is not a specific display result, it is possible to determine the specific variable display pattern (see Figures 283-1 and 283-2). When the display result of the display is a specific display result, the proportion of the specific variable display pattern being determined is higher than that of the predetermined variable display pattern (see Figure 283-1 (A)), and the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied ( For example, a variable period in which the remaining number of times until relief time is shortened is 10 or less) is more variable than a period before the predetermined period (for example, a variable period in which the remaining number of times until relief time is shortened is 11 or more). When the display result does not match the specific display result, the rate of determining the specific variable display pattern is low. Select a variation pattern using the pattern table, and when the remaining number of times until relief time is shortened is 10 or less, select the selection ratio of variation patterns PA2-2 and PA2-3 in Figures 283-2 (F) and (G). The variation pattern may be selected using the variation pattern table changed to 0%. According to such a configuration, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

(Means 107-14) A notice performance execution means capable of executing a notice performance for notifying that a specific display result will be derived and displayed when the variable display is executed, the notice performance execution means being capable of displaying the variable display. The preview effect can be executed in both cases where the result is a specific display result and when the result is not a specific display result, and the specific display result is better when the display result of the variable display is the specific display result. In the case where the proportion of execution of preview effects is higher than in the case where this is not the case, and the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result in the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied than in the period before the predetermined period. In addition, it may be possible that the rate at which preview effects are executed is low. According to such a configuration, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

(Means 107-15) Preview performance execution means capable of executing a preview performance that foretells that a specific display result will be derived and displayed when the variable display is executed (for example, executes step 113IWS802A in the performance control CPU 120) The preview performance execution means is configured to display a specific mode (for example, "red") and a predetermined mode in both cases where the display result of the variable display is a specific display result and when it is not a specific display result. (for example, "blue"), and when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result, the proportion of performing the preview effect in the specific mode is higher than in the predetermined mode, and the special condition is satisfied. In the predetermined period before the predetermined period, when the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result, the ratio of performing the preview performance in the specific mode may be lower than in the period before the predetermined period. According to such a configuration, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 116IW)
Next, the characteristic part 108IW of this embodiment will be explained. In this feature section 108IW, the gaming state is controlled to be one of a low probability/low base state (normal state), a low probability/high base state, a high probability/high base state, and a high probability/low base state. In this example, in the high base state, the average special symbol fluctuation time is shortened compared to the normal state, and the average regular symbol fluctuation time is shortened compared to the normal state. The probability of winning a ``Puzu'' in the ``Puzu'' game increases. For example, in the normal state, the probability of hitting a regular symbol is 10%, but in the time saving state, the probability of hitting a regular symbol is increased to 90%, and the game ball is placed in the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab (first starting prize opening), which will be described later. becomes easier to win. In addition, not limited to such an aspect, for example, in the high base state, by lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab (first starting winning hole) compared to the normal state, the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab (first starting winning hole) It may be configured so that it is easier for game balls to win. In addition, in the configuration in which the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning hole) shown in FIG. 274 is provided, in the high base state, the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning hole) It may also be possible to make it easier for game balls to win.

Furthermore, in this example, in the high probability state, the probability of hitting the jackpot (jackpot probability) is increased compared to the low probability state. Hereinafter, in this example, the high base state will also be referred to as the time saving state, and the high probability state will also be referred to as the variable probability state.

In addition, in this example, in addition to the case where the fluctuating display result is a jackpot and the time-saving state (high base state) is controlled after the end of the jackpot game, even when the fluctuating display result is a loss, the time-save losing symbol is The time saving state (high base state) may be controlled based on the derived display. Hereinafter, the time-saving state (high base state) that is controlled after the fluctuating display result becomes a jackpot and the jackpot game ends is also referred to as the time-saving state via jackpot, and the time-saving state that is controlled based on the time-saving losing symbol being derived and displayed. (High base state) is also referred to as a time-saving state via time-saving failure.

Furthermore, in this example, after the power is turned on to the gaming machine or after a jackpot occurs, even if the fluctuating display ends a predetermined number of times (in this example, 800 times), the next jackpot does not occur. (Hereinafter, the time-saving state (high-base state) controlled in this way is also referred to as the time-saving state via relief time reduction, or simply the relief time-saving state. ). In addition, in this example, after the relief time shortening occurs, even if the fluctuating display is completed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 800 times) without the occurrence of the next jackpot, the configuration is such that the relief time shortening is not controlled again. However, not limited to this configuration, if the fluctuation display is completed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 800 times) without the next jackpot occurring even after the relief time shortening occurs, the relief time shortening is controlled again. It may be configured so that there are cases where For example, even if the next jackpot or time saving error does not occur even after the fluctuation display has finished a predetermined number of times (in this example, 800 times) after a time saving error occurs, the time saving state (relief time saving) is controlled. It may be configured so that there are cases where

In addition, in the high base state, (1) control to increase the probability of hitting a normal symbol, (2) control to shorten the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and (3) variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab (first starting winning hole) and variable Control to lengthen the opening time of the winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port) and (4) control to shorten the fluctuation time of the special symbols can be performed, but these (1) to (4) All the controls may be performed, or some of the controls (1) to (4) may not be performed. For example, which one of (1) to (4) is controlled may be different in a time saving state via a jackpot, a time saving state via a time saving loss, and a time saving state via a rescue time saving, They may be the same.

Further, for example, in the low base state, the probability of winning a common symbol may be set to 1/1, or the probability of losing may be extremely low, and the probability of winning a common symbol may be substantially 1/1. In other words, when the relief time is shortened, even if the control in (1) above is not performed, some or all of the controls in (2) to (4) above are performed, so that a high base state is achieved. It's okay.

Note that it is preferable that the number of fluctuations n until the rescue time is controlled to be shortened and the number of times N of time reduction in the rescue time reduction are defined as follows.
2.5P≦n≦3.0P
0.4P≦N≦3.8P
(P = denominator of jackpot probability ML, n = number of fluctuations, N = number of time savings)
Specifically, for example, if the jackpot probability is 1/300, the number of fluctuations n will be 750 to 900, and the number of time savings N will be 120 to 1140. As will be described later, in this example, when the set value "6" has the highest jackpot probability, the jackpot probability is approximately 1/270, so the number of fluctuations n is 675 to 810, and the number of time savings N is 108 to 108. It becomes 1026. Further, in the case of the set value "1" which has the lowest jackpot probability, the jackpot probability is about 1/319, so the number of fluctuations n is 797 to 957, and the number of time savings N is 127 to 1212. In this example, the number of fluctuations n and the number of time reductions N are both set to "800", and the above regulations are satisfied no matter which setting value they are set to. Note that the configuration is not limited to the configuration shown in this example, and may be configured to satisfy the above regulation at least when the set value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine 1 of this feature part 108IW, it is possible to perform the variable display of the 1st special symbol and the variable display of the 2nd special symbol simultaneously in parallel.

(First embodiment)
Next, a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the feature section 116IW will be described.

(time saving type)
FIG. 284-1 is an explanatory diagram showing time saving types in the first embodiment of the feature section 116IW. In this example, the time saving state (high base state) is the time saving state A which is the time saving state (low probability/high base state) via jackpot, and the time saving state A which is the time saving state (low probability/high base state) via time saving. It is possible to distinguish between state B and time-saving state C, which is a time-saving state (low probability/high base state) via rescue time-saving.

In addition, as shown in Figure 284-1, in this example, if the 6R jackpot A occurs during the normal state (low base state) and the time saving state (high base state) is controlled, the number of time saving times is 100. When the 6R jackpot A occurs during the time saving state (high base state) and the time saving state (high base state) is controlled, the time saving state is controlled to the number of time saving times of 200 times. That is, in this example, the advantage of the time-saving state controlled after the jackpot game is configured to differ depending on the gaming state when the jackpot occurs. With such a configuration, the degree of advantage can be varied depending on the gaming state, and the interest can be improved. In addition, in this example, if any of the 6R jackpots B to D occurs, the time will be shortened until the next jackpot occurs after the jackpot game, regardless of whether the occurrence state is a normal state or a time-saving state. state (high base state).

In addition, as shown in Figure 284-1, in this example, when a time saving deviation occurs during the normal state and the time saving state (high base state) is controlled, the time saving state (high base state) with the number of time reductions of 100 times is controlled. state). On the other hand, if a time saving error occurs during the time saving state (high base state), the number of time saving times is not updated. In other words, when the time saving state (high base state) is in effect and the remaining number of times to be controlled to the time saving state (high base state) is 50, even if a time saving error occurs, the time saving state (high base state) is controlled. The remaining number of times to be used remains 50 and is not updated. Therefore, in this example, the time saving deviation that occurs during the time saving state (high base state) is substantially invalidated. Furthermore, in this example, as will be described later, there is no case where it is determined that the time reduction is off in a variable probability state (high probability state).

Note that the method of controlling the number of time reductions when the time reduction is delayed is not limited to that shown in FIG. 284-1. For example, if a time reduction error occurs during the time saving state (high base state), the remaining number of times to be controlled in the time saving state (high base state) is set again (for example, set to 100 times). Alternatively, if a time saving deviation occurs only during the time saving state (high base state) via the time saving state (high base state), the time saving state (high base state) is controlled. It may be configured such that the remaining number of times to be used is set again. Also, for example, even if a time saving symbol is derived and displayed, if it is in the normal state, the number of time reductions is controlled to be 100, and if it is in the time saving state, it is controlled to be 0 times (i.e., the number of time reduction is controlled to be 0). It may also be configured such that the state falls from the normal state to the normal state. Various aspects can be considered as a method of controlling the number of time reductions when the time reduction is delayed in this way.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 284-1, in this example, in the normal state and the time saving state, in the case of saving time saving, the time saving state is controlled to the number of time saving times of 800 times. In this way, in this example, the time saving state via rescue time saving is more advantageous than the time saving state via jackpot and the time saving state via time saving loss because the number of times saved is greater.

In addition, although the details will be described later, in this example, if a relief time reduction occurs during a time reduction state (high base state) via a jackpot or a time reduction loss, the number of time reductions is updated while the relief time reduction is If a time saving error occurs during the time saving state (high base state), the number of time saving times is not updated. With such a configuration, in this example, it is possible to ensure the advantage of the time saving state via the relief time saving, and it is possible to increase the degree of relief for the player (for example, to suppress the player's investment amount).

In this example, even after the time saving state is controlled to a time saving state of 800 times by saving time, even if the fluctuating display ends 800 times without a jackpot occurring, the saving time is not controlled to be shortened again.

Here, the relief time reduction attainment rate for each set value will be explained. The relief time reduction attainment rate is the rate at which the time reduction state is controlled via the relief time reduction. Since the time saving state via the relief time saving is controlled by performing fluctuations n times (800 times in this example) without being controlled by the jackpot gaming state, the relief time saving attainment rate K is as follows. It can be calculated as follows.
K=(1-ML)n={(P-1)÷P}n
(K=Relief time saving attainment rate, P=Denominator of jackpot probability ML, n=Number of operations)

Specifically, for example, if the setting value is "1", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/319, so the relief time saving attainment rate K is 8.1%, and if the setting value is "2", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/319. Since it is about 1/310, the rescue time saving attainment rate K is 7.5%, and if the setting value is "3", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/300, so the rescue time saving attainment rate K is 6.9%, If the setting value is "4", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/290, so the relief time saving attainment rate K is 6.3%, and if the setting value is "5", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/280. The rescue time saving attainment rate K is 5.7%, and if the set value is "6", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/270, so the rescue time saving attainment rate K is 5.1%.

In this way, the lower the set value of the jackpot probability, the higher the relief time shortening attainment rate. Thereby, even if the jackpot probability is set to a low value, it is possible to rescue the player.

(Fluctuation pattern table)
FIGS. 284-2 to 284-4 are explanatory diagrams showing variation patterns (variation times) of special symbols and ornamental symbols in the first embodiment of the characteristic portion 116IW. EXT shown in FIGS. 284-2 to 284-4 is the second byte data of the production control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each variation pattern.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 284-2 to 284-4, there are 14 types of first variation patterns #A to #N for the first special symbol and the decorative symbol, and a second variation pattern for the second special symbol and the decorative symbol. Thirteen types, #A to #M, are used.

When performing a variable display of the first special symbol, in the case of a low probability/low base state (normal state), the first special symbol for the low probability/low base state shown in Figure 284-2 (A) The variation pattern table A is selected and a variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 284-2(A), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the low probability/low base state (normal state), the first variation patterns #A to # F is determined.

In addition, when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, in the high probability/low base state (first probability variable state), the high probability/low base state shown in Figure 284-2 (B) The first special symbol variation pattern table B is selected and a variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 284-2(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the high probability/low base state (first probability variable state), the first variation pattern #G ~#I is determined.

In the first special symbol variation pattern table B shown in FIG. 284-2(B), each first variation pattern #G is compared with the first special symbol variation pattern table A shown in FIG. 284-2(A). ~ The fluctuation time specified by #I is extremely long, 10 minutes or 5 minutes. Therefore, in this example, when a variable display of the first special symbol is executed in a high probability/low base state (first probability variable state), a variable display of a long variation with a variation time of 10 minutes or 5 minutes is executed. be done.

In addition, when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, in the high probability/high base state (second probability variable state), the high probability/high base state shown in Figure 284-2 (C) is displayed. The first special symbol variation pattern table C is selected and a variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 284-2(C), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the high probability/high base state (second probability variable state), the first variation pattern #A In addition to #F, either the first variation pattern #J or #K is determined.

As shown in Figure 284-2 (C), in the high probability/high base state (second probability variable state), if the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol is a miss or a small hit, the When the number of 1 pending memories is 0, the first fluctuation patterns #J and #K with the fluctuation time of 10 seconds are determined. On the other hand, if the first pending storage number is 1 or more, the first fluctuation patterns #A and #D in which the fluctuation time is 5 seconds are determined.

In addition, when performing a variable display of the first special symbol, in the case of a low probability/high base state, the first special symbol variation for the low probability/high base state shown in Figure 284-3 (D) Pattern table D is selected and a variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 284-3(D), when the first special symbol is displayed in a low probability/high base state, in addition to the first variation patterns #A to #F, The first variation pattern is determined to be one of #J, #K, and #L.

As shown in Figure 284-3 (D), in the low probability/high base state, if the display result of the first special symbol fluctuation display is a miss or a small hit, the first reserved memory number is 0. In this case, the first variation patterns #J and #K are determined in which the variation time is 10 seconds. On the other hand, if the first pending storage number is 1 or more, the first fluctuation patterns #A and #D in which the fluctuation time is 5 seconds are determined. Furthermore, as will be explained later, the low probability/high base state ends after the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined number of times, but when performing the fluctuation display of the final fluctuation of the low probability/high base state, the fluctuation time is The first variation pattern #L (special variation pattern) of 5 seconds is determined.

In addition, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, if the variable display is a relief time reduction (when the value of the relief time reduction counter described later becomes 0), the display shown in Fig. 284-3 (E) The first special symbol variation pattern table E for when relief time saving is established shown in is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 284-3 (E), when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable display that shortens the rescue time, either the first variable pattern #M or #N is selected. determined.

As shown in FIGS. 284-2 and 284-3, the first fluctuation patterns #M and #N are not used for fluctuation displays that do not result in shortening the rescue time, but are used only for fluctuation displays that shorten the rescue time. This is a fluctuation pattern exclusive to the time. In this example, if the first variation pattern #M (relief time reduction entry is missed) is determined, as will be described later, the time reduction state is controlled (i.e., the relief time reduction is controlled to a low probability/high base state). ) is performed (for example, see FIGS. 284-23(B) and (C)). With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the rescue time is shortened and the time is controlled to a short time state (low probability/high base state), and it is possible to improve the interest when the rescue time is shortened. be able to.

In addition, when the first variation pattern #N (relief time reduction spurious jackpot) is determined, the time reduction will notify that the time reduction state will be controlled (that is, the time reduction will be controlled to a low probability/high base state as a rescue time reduction). After performing a performance similar to the rush performance (for example, see FIGS. 284-23(B) and (C)), a performance notifying that a jackpot has been achieved is performed. With such a configuration, after the player once recognizes that the rescue time has been shortened, he is informed that he will win the jackpot, so it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and improve his interest.

When performing the variable display of the second special symbol, if the high probability/low base state (first probability variable state) is executed, the second special symbol for the high probability/low base state shown in Figure 284-4(A) is displayed. The special symbol variation pattern table A is selected and a variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 284-4(A), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability/low base state (first probability variable state), the second variation pattern #A In addition to #F, one of second variation patterns #J and #K is determined.

As shown in Figure 284-4 (A), in the high probability/low base state (first probability variable state), if the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol is a miss or a small hit, the 2. If the number of pending memories is 0, the second variation patterns #J and #K with a variation time of 10 seconds are determined. On the other hand, if the second pending storage number is 1 or more, second fluctuation patterns #A and #D in which the fluctuation time is 5 seconds are determined.

In addition, when performing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it is not in the high probability/low base state (first probability variable state), the The second special symbol variation pattern table B is selected and a variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 284-4(B), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed when the variable display is not in the high probability/low base state (first variable probability state), the second variable pattern #G~ #I is determined.

In the second special symbol variation pattern table B shown in FIG. 284-4(B), each second variation pattern #G is compared with the second special symbol variation pattern table A shown in FIG. 284-4(A). ~ The fluctuation time specified by #I is extremely long, 10 minutes or 5 minutes. Therefore, in this example, in states other than the high probability/low base state (first variable probability state) (low probability/low base state, high probability/high base state (second variable probability state), low probability/high base state) When a variable display of the second special symbol is executed, a variable display of a long variation with a variation time of 10 minutes or 5 minutes is executed.

In addition, when executing the variable display of the second special symbol, if the variable display is a relief time reduction (when the value of the relief time reduction counter described later becomes 0), the display shown in Fig. 284-4 (C) The second special symbol variation pattern table E for when relief time saving is established shown in is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 284-4 (C), when the variable display shortens the relief time and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, either the second variable pattern #L or #M determined.

As shown in FIG. 284-4, the second fluctuation patterns #L and #M are not used for fluctuation displays that do not result in shortening of rescue time, but are fluctuation patterns dedicated to the establishment of shortening of rescue time and are used only for fluctuation displays that shorten rescue time. It is. In this example, when the second fluctuation pattern #L (relief time reduction entry is missed) is determined, as will be described later, the time reduction state is controlled (that is, the relief time reduction is controlled to a low probability/high base state). ) is performed (for example, see FIGS. 284-23(B) and (C)). With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the rescue time is shortened and the time is controlled to a short time state (low probability/high base state), and it is possible to improve the interest when the rescue time is shortened. be able to. In addition, when the second variation pattern #M (relief time shortening spurious jackpot) is determined, the time reduction will notify that the time reduction state will be controlled (that is, the time reduction will be controlled to a low probability/high base state as a rescue time reduction). After performing a performance similar to the rush performance (for example, see FIGS. 284-23(B) and (C)), a performance notifying that a jackpot has been achieved is performed. With such a configuration, after the player once recognizes that the rescue time has been shortened, he is informed that he will win the jackpot, so it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and improve his interest.

In addition, in this example, the same fluctuation pattern table is used in all cases for the time saving state via jackpot, the time saving state via losing time saving, and the time saving state via rescue time saving (that is, the average variation time is the same). ), but is not limited to such an aspect. For example, different fluctuation pattern tables may be used (that is, the average fluctuation times are different) for the time saving state via jackpot, the time saving state via loss time saving, and the time saving state via rescue time saving. For example, in the time saving state via relief time reduction, the rate of determination is higher in a variation pattern with a shorter variation time than in the time reduction state via jackpot or loss time reduction, and the average variation time is shortened. Good too. With this configuration, when the relief time is shortened (that is, when no jackpot has occurred for a long period of time), the period until the next jackpot is controlled will be shortened, thereby reducing interest. It can be suppressed. Also, for example, when in a time-saving state controlled via a relief time-saving method, unlike when in a time-saving state controlled via a time-saving loss or a jackpot, a fluctuation pattern is determined in which a reach (or a particularly high-expected reach) occurs when the loss occurs. (or the determined rate is low), so that the average fluctuation time is shortened. With this configuration, if the redemption time is shortened (that is, if there is no jackpot for a long period of time), you will not miss the reach (or the reach with a particularly high expectation), so you can suppress the decline in interest. Can be done.

(1st special symbol normal processing)
FIGS. 284-5 to 284-7 are flowcharts showing the first special symbol normal processing (step S110A) in the first embodiment of the feature section 116IW. The state in which the first special symbol normal process is executed is when the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A. Incidentally, when the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A, it is a state where the first special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display device 4A.

In the first special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first checks whether the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120). It is confirmed whether or not (step 061IWS50A). In addition, when the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the value indicating the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. This is a case where the value indicating the end processing (step S128) is not reached, and the case is not during a jackpot game (opening the special variable winning ball device 7 a predetermined number of times) or during a small winning game (opening the special variable winning ball device 17). be.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 checks the value of the first pending storage number (step 061IWS51A). Specifically, the count value of the first pending storage counter is checked. If the first pending storage number is 0, a first customer waiting demo display designation command is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS52A).

If the first pending memory number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads out each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the pending memory number = 1 in the first pending memory number buffer of the RAM 102 and stores it in the RAM 102. (step 061IWS53A), decreases the value of the first pending memory number by 1 (subtracts the count value of the first pending memory number counter by 1), and shifts the contents of each storage area. (Step 061IWS54A). That is, each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first pending memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first pending memory number buffer of the RAM 102 is converted to the first pending memory number = n - Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which the random values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each first pending memory number are extracted always matches the order of the first pending memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It looks like this. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition for variable display is satisfied, so it is possible to specify the order in which each random number value is extracted. In addition, in this example, each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to the first pending memory number and each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to the second pending memory number are The extracted order is also stored in an identifiable manner.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a setting value command indicating the setting value set in the RAM 102 to the production control board 12 (step 061IWS55A). Note that in this example, the setting value command is transmitted each time variable display is started by executing the process in step 061IWS55A, but the setting change process (processing to change the setting value) is performed when the power is turned on. A setting value command is also sent when you execute .

Note that the timing at which the set value command is sent is not limited to that shown in this example; for example, the set value command may be configured to be sent every time the fluctuation display ends, or the set value command may be sent during the fluctuation display. It may also be configured to do so.

After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS56A). Specifically, when the variable probability flag and high base flag are off, it is determined that the state is low probability/low base, and the low probability/low base background specification command is issued. In some cases, it is determined that the state is low probability/high base state and a low probability/high base background specification command is issued.If the probability change flag is on and the high base flag is on, it is determined that the state is high probability/high base state. If the probability change flag is on and the high base flag is off, it is determined that the state is high probability/low base and the high probability/low base background designation command is issued. Send.

In addition, regarding the process of step 061IWS56A (and step 061IWS56B described later) which sends a background designation command according to the current gaming state to the production control CPU 120, the first special symbol normal process (and the second special symbol normal process described later) ) may be executed after the updating process of the relief time reduction counter and the high base count counter and the control process regarding the high base flag have been performed. In other words, at the start of the fluctuation, if the rescue time reduction count counter is updated and the rescue time reduction is established and the time reduction state (low probability/high base state) is controlled, a low probability/high base background specification command is immediately sent. When the background is changed or the high base frequency counter is updated and the time saving state (low probability/high base state) ends and the control returns to the normal state, immediately send a low accuracy/low base background specification command. The background may also be changed.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the probability change flag is set (step 061IWS5601A). If the variable probability flag is set, that is, if the variable probability state is a variable probability state (high probability state), the process moves to step 061IWS5617A.

In this example, by executing the process of step 061IWS5601A (and step 061IWS5601B described later), if the state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), the number of times of saving time reduction after step 061IWS5602A (and step 061IWS5602B described later) Do not perform counter update processing. Therefore, in this example, when the variable probability state (high probability state) is executed, the number of remaining variations until the relief time is shortened does not decrease even if the variation display is executed, and when the variable probability state is non-probable variable state (low probability state) Only, when the fluctuation display is executed, the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened decreases. Note that the configuration is not limited to this example, and even in a variable probability state (high probability state), it may be configured such that when the variation display is executed, the number of remaining variations until the relief time is shortened uniformly decreases.

If the probability change flag is not set, that is, if the probability is low, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (step 061IWS5602A). If the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0, the process moves to step 061IWS5617A. If the value of the relief time reduction number counter is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the relief time reduction number counter (step 061IWS5603A). In addition, in this example, by executing the process of step 061IWS5603A and the process of step 061IWS5603B, which will be described later, it is possible to execute the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol. The value of the relief time reduction counter is uniformly updated regardless of the case. That is, in this example, the relief time reduction counter can be updated at the timing when the variable display of the first special symbol starts and the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol starts. With such a configuration, in a configuration where the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel, it is possible to optimize the update of the relief time reduction counter.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is 127 or more (step 061IWS5604A). If the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is 126 or less (N in step 061IWS5604A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a value corresponding to the value of the relief time reduction number counter in the EXT data, and performs the relief time reduction. Control is performed to send the number 1 designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS5605A). For example, when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 1, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a command 9501 (H) as a relief time reduction number 1 designation command. Further, when the value of the rescue time reduction number counter is 126, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a command 957E (H) as a rescue time reduction number 1 designation command.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 061IWS5606A). If the value of the relief time reduction counter after the subtraction is not 0, the process moves to step 061IWS5617A. If the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is 0, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a high base flag based on the occurrence of relief time reduction (step 061IWS5607A). In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 sets "800" to the high base number counter that indicates the remaining number of times of the total number of variable displays of the first special symbol and variable display of the second special symbol that can be executed in the high base state. (Step 061IWS5608A).

In this example, when the value of the relief time reduction counter subtracted at the start of fluctuation becomes 0 and relief time reduction occurs through the processing of steps 061IWS5606A to S5608A (and steps 061IWS5606B to S5608B described later), the time reduction state of 800 time reductions occurs. (low probability/high base state). In addition, if the state in which the relief time reduction occurs is a time reduction state (low probability/high base state) via a jackpot or time reduction failure, the time reduction state (low probability/high base state) with 800 time reductions is again performed. controlled. Therefore, in this example, if the next jackpot does not occur even after executing the fluctuation display 800 times after the RAM clearing process or after the end of the jackpot game, a relief time reduction occurs and the time reduction state is controlled. It turns out.

As mentioned above, in this example, as shown in Figure 284-1, the time saving state via rescue time saving is more advantageous than the time saving state via jackpot and the time saving state via time saving loss because the number of times saved is greater. is high. In this example, in the process of steps 061IWS5606A to S5608A (and steps 061IWS5606B to S5608B described later), if a relief time reduction occurs during a time reduction state (high base state) via a jackpot or a time reduction loss, the number of time reductions is determined. is configured to be updated. For example, if you are in a time saving state (high base state) via jackpot or time saving loss and the remaining number of times to be controlled by the time saving state (high base state) is 50, if a relief time reduction occurs, the time saving state (high base state) The remaining number of times controlled by the base state) is updated to 800 times. On the other hand, in this example, if a time reduction error occurs during a time reduction state (high base state) including relief time reduction through the processing of steps 061IWS2030A to S2031A (and steps 061IWS061IWS2030B to S2031B), which will be described later, the number of time reductions is updated. is configured so that it does not occur. For example, if you are in a time saving state (high base state) via relief time saving and the remaining number of times to be controlled in the time saving state (high base state) is 500, even if a time reduction occurs, the time saving state (high base state) The remaining number of times controlled by the state) remains at 500 and is not updated. With such a configuration, in this example, in a configuration where the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel, it is possible to ensure the advantage of the time saving state via the rescue time saving. Therefore, the degree of relief for the player can be increased (for example, the amount of investment for the player can be suppressed).

In addition, in this example, the processing time is reduced in the variable display where the relief time reduction is realized by the processing of steps 061IWS5606A to S5608A (and steps 061IWS5606B to S5608B described later) and the processing of steps 061IWS2030A to S2031A (and steps 061IWS061IWS2030B to S2031B) described later. When a failure is derived and displayed, the system is configured to be controlled to a time-saving state due to relief time-saving, which is more advantageous than a time-saving failure. Specifically, when the fluctuating display of the first special symbol for which relief time saving is established (time saving failure) starts, the time saving state changes from the normal state (low probability/low base state) to the time saving state (low probability/high base state). Control for the transition is performed (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS5606A to S5607A). Then, the time saving error is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol in which the rescue time saving is realized, but at this time, the time saving number is not updated due to the time saving error (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS2030B to S2031B). With such a configuration, even if a time reduction deviation is derived and displayed in the variable display that results in a relief time reduction, it is possible to secure the advantage of the time reduction state due to the relief time reduction, and increase the degree of relief for the player (for example, the player investment amount can be suppressed).

In addition, in this example, when the value of the relief time reduction number counter subtracted at the start of fluctuation becomes 0 and relief time reduction occurs, the value of the high base number counter is set to "800", but the value of the relief time reduction number counter is Not set. When a relief time reduction occurs, the value of the relief time reduction counter is set to "800" when RAM clear processing is executed after the relief time reduction occurs or when a jackpot occurs. Therefore, in this example, even if the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined number of times (800 times in this example) without a jackpot after the occurrence of the relief time reduction, the relief time reduction will not occur (that is, the relief time reduction will not occur after the number of time reduction is 800 times). (not controlled continuously in a short period of time).

Specifically, when the fluctuation display for 800 times of time reduction is executed without a jackpot occurring in the relief time reduction, the relief time reduction ends and shifts to the normal state (low probability/low base state) (i.e. (No new relief time reduction will occur). Further, even if the variable display is executed 800 times without a jackpot occurring in the normal state that has been transferred, the relief time reduction does not occur. After the relief time reduction has occurred, the relief time reduction will occur again. For example, after the relief time reduction has occurred, a jackpot occurs and the value of the relief time reduction counter is set to "800", and after the jackpot game ends, the 800 time reduction occurs. If the next jackpot does not occur even after executing the fluctuation display, or after a relief time reduction occurs, RAM clear processing is executed and the value of the relief time reduction counter is set to "800", and after the RAM clear processing, it becomes 800. This is a case where the next jackpot does not occur even after performing the fluctuation display twice.

Note that this is not limited to the configuration of this example. For example, when a relief time reduction occurs, the value of the relief time reduction number counter is set to "800," and each time a variable display is executed in the relief time reduction, the value of the relief time reduction number counter is set to 1. By subtracting, a new relief time reduction is established at the same time as the relief time reduction ends, and it may be configured such that the relief time reduction is controlled continuously until the next jackpot occurs.

In addition, for example, when the relief time reduction is established, the relief time reduction counter is set to "800," and the updating process of the relief time reduction counter is not executed during the relief time reduction, so that a jackpot occurs in the relief time reduction. Even if the fluctuation display is executed 800 times without doing so, the relief time reduction will not be controlled (in other words, the relief time reduction will not be controlled continuously for 800 times), but after the relief time reduction ends, a jackpot will occur. If the variable display is executed 800 times without any error, the relief time may be shortened.

In addition, for example, by configuring that when the relief time reduction is achieved, the relief time reduction number counter is set to ``800'' and the high base number counter is set to ``200'', a jackpot will not occur in the relief time reduction. When the fluctuation display for 200 times of time reduction is executed, the rescue time reduction ends and the state returns to the normal state (low probability/low base state), and in the transitioned normal state, the fluctuation display is performed 600 times without a jackpot occurring. When executed, the relief time may be shortened.

Furthermore, in this example, a case is shown where the process of step 061IWS5608A (and step 061IWS5608B described later) is executed to set the number of time reductions to 800, which is the same as the number of fluctuations until relief time reduction occurs. It is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, in step 061IWS5608A (or step 061IWS5608B described later), the high base frequency counter may be set to a value greater than "800" or a value smaller than "800".

Further, in step 061IWS5608A (and step 061IWS5608B to be described later), a configuration may be configured such that values corresponding to a plurality of types of time saving times can be set in the high base number counter. For example, if the relief time is shortened the first time, the high base frequency counter is set to "100", and if the relief time is shortened the second time, the high base frequency counter is set to "800". You may.

Furthermore, for example, the number of time savings may be determined by performing a lottery process based on random numbers, and in step 061IWS5608A (and step 061IWS5608B, which will be described later), a value corresponding to the number of time savings determined by the lottery process is set in the high base number counter. It may also be configured to set. In this case, for example, the number of time reductions may be determined to be 100 times with a probability of 10%, and 800 times with a probability of 90%. In addition, when the number of time savings is determined by lottery processing, the number of time savings may be determined by using the type determination random number used for determining the jackpot type and time saving type, or the number of time savings may be determined using a dedicated random number. You may.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a relief variation flag indicating that the relief time reduction is a variation display that is established (step 061IWS5609A). Through the process of step 061IWS5609A, in the first variation pattern setting process to be described later, it is possible to specify that the variation display is one in which the relief time reduction is established, and to determine a variation pattern exclusively for when the relief time reduction is established.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to start lighting the right-handed player indicator 26 (step 061IWS5610A), and performs control to send a right-handed player lighting start designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS5610A). 061IWS5611A). Then, the process moves to step 061IWS57A.

In this example, by executing the processing of steps 061IWS5610A to S5611A (and steps 061IWS5610B to S5611B described later), lighting of the right-hand hit indicator 26 is started when the relief time saving is established. That is, in this example, in the low probability/high base state, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in a normal variation time, whereas the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in a long variation. However, since it is in a high base state, the probability of hitting a common symbol is as high as 999/1000, and the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab is frequently in the open state. Therefore, in order to win the game ball into the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab as the first starting winning hole and execute the variable display of the first special symbol, the game ball is fired (hit right) aiming at the right side of the gaming area. It is advantageous for the player to do this, and the right hit indicator 26 is lit. Note that if the right-hand indicator 26 is already lit, such as when a relief time saver occurs in the time saver state, the processing of steps 061IWS5610A to S5611A (and steps 061IWS5610B to S5611B described later) may be omitted.

If the value of the relief time reduction number counter after subtraction is 127 or more (Y in step 061IWS5604A), the game control microcomputer 100 uniformly sets 7F (H) as EXT data and issues the relief time reduction number 1 designation command. Control is performed to send a command 957F (H) to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS5614A). Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened in units of 100 (in this example, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, or 800 times) (step 061IWS5615A). Note that whether or not the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is in units of 100 can be determined by checking the value of the relief time reduction number counter. If the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time reduction is the number of times in units of 100, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a value corresponding to the value of the relief time reduction counter in the EXT data, and sets the relief time reduction number 2. Control is performed to send the designated command to the production control CPU 120 (step 061IWS5616A). For example, when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 100, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit command 9601 (H) as the relief time reduction number 2 designation command. Further, when the value of the rescue time reduction number counter is 800, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a command 9608 (H) as a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command. Then, the process moves to step 061IWS5617A.

Note that this example shows a case where the game control microcomputer 100 side counts the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time reduction and sends a relief time reduction number 1 designation command and a relief time reduction number 2 designation command. It is not limited to this aspect. For example, the performance control CPU 120 counts the number of fluctuations remaining until the rescue time is shortened, and a performance that suggests that the rescue time is shortened, or a performance that suggests the number of fluctuations remaining until the rescue time is shortened (for example, an inciting performance that will be described later). It may also be configured to perform a countdown effect.

For example, unlike the configuration of this example, in a configuration where relief time reduction can occur continuously, the relief time reduction number 1 designation command or the relief time reduction number 2 designation command may be sent only when the relief time reduction occurs for the first time. With such a configuration, when the relief time is shortened from the second time onward, the relief time reduction number 1 designation command and the relief time reduction number 2 designation command may not be transmitted.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter is "0" (step 061IWS5617A), and if it is "0", it moves to step 061IWS57A.

In this example, the control is performed to one of the low probability/low base state, low probability/high base state, high probability/high base state, and high probability/low base state, so when the high base state is, the low probability /High base state and high probability/High base state. However, in the high probability/high base state (second probability variable state), the high probability/high base state (second probability variable state) is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (steps 061IWS2204 to S2206, S2269, (See S2274), the number of executions of the fluctuation display in the high base state is not managed, and the value of the high base number counter is set to "0". Therefore, if the value of the high base count counter is not "0", the low probability/high base state is controlled.

In addition, in the first embodiment, as will be described later, the high base flag is set and the number of executions of the fluctuation display in the high base state is managed at the end of the jackpot game based on 6R jackpot A with low probability. / high base state, low probability/high base state via time reduction, and low probability/high base state via relief time reduction. In this example, when controlled to a low probability/high base state, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed a predetermined number of times in total (in this example, 100, 200, or 800 times). (See Figure 284-1) Based on what has been executed, the low probability/high base state is terminated and the state is transitioned to the normal state (low probability/low base state).

If the value of the high base number counter is not "0", that is, if it is a low probability/high base state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts "1" from the value of the high base number counter (step 061IWS5618A), It is determined whether the value has become "0" (step 061IWS5619A). If the value of the high base count counter does not become "0", the process moves to step 061IWS57A. In addition, in this example, by executing the process of step 061IWS5618A and the process of step 061IWS5618B, which will be described later, it is possible to execute the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol. The value of the high base count counter is updated regardless of whether the

When the value of the high base number counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating the high base state (step 061IWS5620A). In this example, if it is determined Y in step 061IWS5619A (or step 061IWS5619B described later), the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol will be displayed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times, 200 times, or 800 times). (refer to Figure 284-1), the process of step 061IWS5620A (or step 061IWS5620B described later) is executed, the low probability/high base state is ended, and the normal state (low probability/low base state) is executed. will be moved to

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) indicating that the lighting of the right-handed display 26 is extended until the end of the variation (step 061IWS5621A). Note that the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is used to continue the right-handed hit notification and continue the right-handed hit state until the variable display ends.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the second special symbol is changing in jackpot (step 061IWS57A). Specifically, when the second jackpot flag indicating a jackpot is set based on the fluctuating display of the second special symbol, it is determined that the second special symbol is fluctuating. If it is determined that the second special symbol is in the middle of a jackpot change, the process moves to step 061IWS71A without performing the processes after step 061IWS58A. As a result, when the first special symbol starts varying during the jackpot variation of the second special symbol, the system is configured to forcibly result in a loss regardless of whether the jackpot determination value is stored.

Note that the method of forcibly displacing is not limited to the method described above. For example, when the jackpot of the second special symbol is fluctuating in step 061IWS57A, a random number (fixed value) is set as the random number for determining the hit, and by moving to step 061IWS59A, when the starting prize is won, It may be possible to forcibly cause a win regardless of which random number for hit determination has been acquired.

Also, for example, when the second special symbol is fluctuating in the jackpot at step 061IWS57A, a random value (fixed value) of the loss may be set as the random number for hit determination without performing the processing at steps 061IWS58A to S63A. By performing the hit determination, it may be possible to forcibly cause a win regardless of which random number for hit determination was obtained at the time of starting winning.

When the jackpot of the second special symbol is not changing, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the random number for hit determination from the first random number storage buffer (step 061IWS58A) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 061IWS59A). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines a jackpot when the random number for hit determination matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. In addition, in step 061IWS59A, it is determined whether or not to make a jackpot using either the non-probability variable jackpot determination table or the probability variable jackpot determination table, taking into consideration the gaming state.

As described above, in this example, the advantage of the time-saving state controlled after the jackpot game is configured to differ depending on the gaming state when the jackpot occurs. Specifically, when a 6R jackpot A occurs during the normal state (low base state) and the time saving state (high base state) is controlled, the time saving state is controlled to a time saving state of 100 times, and the time saving state ( When the 6R jackpot A occurs during the high base state) and the time saving state is controlled to the time saving state (high base state), the time saving state is controlled to the time saving state of 200 times. With such a configuration, in this example, the execution of the jackpot determination module of step 061IWS59A (described later and step 061IWS59B) is executed by the execution of the relief time reduction number counter of steps 061IWS5602A to S5608A (described later and steps 061IWS5602B to S5608B). It is configured to be executed after the update process and the high base flag setting process.

Therefore, in this example, if the display result of the variable display in which the relief time saving is established is a jackpot, the advantage of the time saving state that is controlled after the end of the jackpot game is determined, assuming that the jackpot has occurred in the time saving state due to the relief time saving. Ru. Specifically, if the display result of the variable display in which the relief time reduction is established is 6R jackpot A, assuming that 6R jackpot A occurs in the time reduction state due to the relief time reduction, the time reduction state with the number of time reductions of 200 after the end of the jackpot game. (a portion that executes the processing of steps 061IWS2284, S2286 to S2287, which will be described later). With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of rescue of the player by shortening the rescue time (for example, to suppress the investment amount of the player).

If it is determined to be a jackpot (step 061IWS60A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a first jackpot flag indicating that it will be a jackpot based on the variable display of the first special symbol (step 061IWS61A). . Then, based on the random number for determining the hit type, it is determined whether the jackpot type is 6R jackpot A, 6R jackpot B, 6R jackpot C, or 6R jackpot D (step 061IWS62A), and the jackpot type is stored (step 061IWS63A). ), the process moves to step 061IWS71A.

Further, if the jackpot is not determined in step 061IWS60A, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step 061IWS64A). The small hit determination module is a program that determines a small hit when a random number for hit determination (or a random number for small hit determination may be used) matches a predetermined small hit determination value. If it is determined to be a small win (step 061IWS65A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a first small win flag indicating that it will be a small win based on the variable display of the first special symbol ( Step 061IWS66A). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the small win type based on the random number for determining the win type (step 061IWS67A), and stores the small win type (step 061IWS68A). Then, the process moves to step 061IWS71A. In addition, regarding the small winning type, a plurality of small winning balls may be provided, each with a different opening pattern (i.e. ease of winning) of the variable winning ball device 061IW17 (special winning hole), or only one may be provided. . If there is only one small winning type, the processing of steps 061IWS67A to S68A may be omitted.

Further, if the small hit is not determined in step 061IWS65A, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the probability variation flag is set (step 061IWS69A). If the probability variation flag is set (that is, if the probability variation state (high probability state) is established), the process moves to step 061IWS71A. In this example, when the process of step 061IWS69A (and step 061IWS69B described later) is executed and the state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), the time reduction determination process of step 061IWS70A (and step 061IWS70B described later) is performed. It was decided that the project would be canceled without any time savings.

If the probability variation flag is not set (that is, if it is in a low probability state), the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not to shorten the time by using the time shortening failure determination table for determining whether or not to shorten the time. A lottery process is performed based on the random number used to determine whether or not the time reduction is to be decided (step 061IWS70A). In this case, it is decided that the time will be shortened with a probability of approximately 1/400. Then, the process moves to step 061IWS71A.

In addition, in this example, if a time saving deviation occurs during the time saving state (high base state), the number of time saving times is not updated (see steps 061IWS2030A to S2031A described later), so that it is substantially invalidated. For example, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and for example, when the time saving state (high base state) is present, the time saving judgment process of step 061IWS70A (and step 061IWS70B described later) may not be executed, and the time saving judgment may be made as is. It may also be configured such that it is determined as follows.

For example, among the time saving state via jackpot, the time saving state via time saving loss, and the time saving state via relief time saving, in the case of the time saving state via relief time saving, the judgment of time saving loss in step 061IWS70A (and step 061IWS70B described later) The processing may not be executed, and in the case of a time saving state via a jackpot and a time saving state via a time saving loss, the time saving loss determination process of step 061IWS70A (and step 061IWS70B to be described later) may be executed. In other words, in the case of the time saving state via the relief time saving, the time saving error does not occur, and in the case of the time saving state via the jackpot and the time saving state via the time saving error, the time saving error may occur.

In addition, when configuring multiple types of time saving deviations to have different advantages (for example, the number of time saving times), for example, if a value corresponding to the value of the random number for type determination stored in the random number buffer area is The type is determined to be a time saving type. Further, in this case, the game control microcomputer 100 reads out the type determination random number extracted in the first starting winning determination process (step S101A) and stored in the first pending storage buffer in advance, and determines the time saving type. Moreover, in this case, in addition to the jackpot type determination and the small hit type determination, the determination process may be performed using a common type determination random number also in the time saving type determination.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the stop symbols of the special symbols according to the determination results of the jackpot type and time saving type (step 061IWS71A). In this case, for example, if it is determined to be a 6R jackpot A, the stopping symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "1", and if it is determined to be a 6R jackpot B, the stopping symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "3". ”, and when it is decided to make 6R jackpot C, the stopping symbol of the special symbol is determined to be “5”, and when it is decided to be 6R jackpot D, the stopping symbol of the special symbol is determined to be “7”. ”, and if it is decided to make a small hit, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be “9”, and if it is decided to be a time-saving loss, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be “2”. If it is determined to be a miss (no time saving), the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "-". Further, the game control microcomputer 100 stores the determined special symbol stop symbols in the stop symbol storage area provided in the RAM 102 (step 061IWS72A).

Then, in step 061IWS89A, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process (step 061IWS89A).

(First fluctuation pattern setting process)
FIG. 284-8 is a flowchart showing the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) in the first embodiment of the feature section 116IW. In the first variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first confirms whether the relief variation flag is set (step 061IWS17091A).

When the relief fluctuation flag is set, that is, when the relief time reduction is established, the game control microcomputer 100 resets the relief fluctuation flag (step 061IWS17092A) and performs a process for determining the fluctuation pattern. As the variation pattern table, the first special symbol variation pattern table E shown in FIG. 284-3(B) for the time when relief time reduction is established is selected (step 061IWS17093A). Then, the process moves to step 061IWS1717A.

If the relief variation flag is not set, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the probability variation flag is set (step 061IWS1710A). If the probability variation flag is not set, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the high base flag is set (step 061IWS1711A). If the high base flag is not set (that is, if it is in a low probability/low base state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses the table shown in FIG. 284-2 (A) as a fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern. The first special symbol variation pattern table A for the low probability/low base state shown in (step 061IWS1712A) is selected. If the high base flag is set (that is, low probability/high base state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 284-3 (D ) is selected for the first special symbol variation pattern table D for the low probability/high base state (step 061IWS1713A).

If the probability change flag is set, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the high base flag is set (step 061IWS1714A). If the high base flag is not set (that is, if it is in a high probability/low base state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 284-2 (B) for determining the fluctuation pattern. The first special symbol variation pattern table B for the high probability/low base state shown in (step 061IWS1715A) is selected. If the high base flag is set (that is, if it is in a high probability/high base state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses the table shown in FIG. 284-2 (C) as a fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern. The first special symbol variation pattern table C for the high probability/high base state shown in (step 061IWS1716A) is selected.

Then, the game control microcomputer 100 uses the fluctuation pattern table determined to be used in steps 061IWS17093A, 061IWS1712A, S1713A, S1715A, and S1716A and the random number for fluctuation pattern determination stored in the first special symbol determination buffer. Based on this, it is determined which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIGS. 284-2 and 284-3 should be used (step 061IWS1717A).

After determining the fluctuation pattern, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a fluctuation pattern command indicating the determined fluctuation pattern to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS1704A).

Further, when the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) of the first special symbol is determined in step 061IWS1717A, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the first fluctuation time timer, and sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time to the first fluctuation time timer. At the same time as starting measurement of (step 061IWS1705A), variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is started (step 061IWS1706A). Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol variation process (step 061IWS1707A).

By executing the above processing, in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, if the gaming state is high probability/low base state, the first special symbol variation pattern table B is selected and a long fluctuation fluctuation display is executed. On the other hand, if the gaming state is other than the high probability/low base state, the first special symbol variation pattern table A is selected and a normal variation time variation display is executed. In addition, in the case of the variable display of the first special symbol in which the relief time reduction is realized, the first special symbol variation pattern table E is selected and the variable display exclusively for the relief time reduction is executed.

(1st special symbol variation processing)
FIG. 284-9 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first checks whether the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120) (step 061IWS1120A). In addition, when the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the value indicating the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. This is a case where the value indicating the end processing (step S128) is not reached, and the case is not during a jackpot game (opening the special variable winning ball device 7 a predetermined number of times) or during a small winning game (opening the special variable winning ball device 17). be.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the CPU 103 sends the determination result of whether or not to be a jackpot, and the jackpot type, if it has not been sent yet. Based on the determination result, control is performed to transmit one of the display result designation commands to the production control CPU 120 (step 061IWS1121A).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first variable time timer (step 061IWS1122A), and when the first variable time timer times out (step 061IWS1123A), performs control to transmit the first symbol confirmation designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 061IWS1122A). Step 061IWS1124A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing (step S113A) (step 061IWS1130A).

If the first variable time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 061IWS1125A). In addition, whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is determined by, for example, the value of the second special symbol process flag being a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing, and This can be determined by checking whether or not a second jackpot flag indicating a jackpot is set based on the variable display of the second special symbol.

If the jackpot symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small win symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 061IWS1126A). In addition, whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is determined by, for example, the value of the second special symbol process flag being a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing. This can be determined by checking whether or not the second small hit flag indicating a small hit is set based on the variable display of the second special symbol. If the small winning symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the process is immediately terminated.

When a jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (Y in step 061IWS1125A), or when a small win symbol is derived and displayed (Y in step 061IWS1126A), the CPU 103 causes the performance control CPU 120 to 1. Control is performed to send a forced symbol confirmation designation command (step 061IWS1129A). In this case, if the first jackpot flag or the first small win flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the first jackpot flag or the first small win flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing (step S113A) (step 061IWS1130A).

By executing the processing of steps 061IWS1125A to S1126A and S1129A, this feature section 116IW can handle cases where the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a jackpot while the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, or when the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a jackpot or a small hit. When this occurs, the fluctuating display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped to prevent a situation in which a jackpot or small win occurs simultaneously with the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this case, on the CPU 120 side for performance control, if the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is forcibly removed, the fluctuation of the decorative symbol will be changed based on the second forced symbol confirmation designation command sent in step 061IWS1129A. Control is performed to forcibly stop and display the missing symbol as a display result.

In addition, in this example, when the second special symbol display device 4B derives and displays a variable display stop symbol that shortens the rescue time, control to transmit the first forced symbol confirmation designation command is not performed. In addition, even when the first special symbol display device 4A derives and displays a variable display stop symbol that shortens the relief time, the control to transmit the second forced symbol confirmation designation command is not performed (steps 061IWS1125B to S1126B, which will be described later). (See S1129B). That is, in this example, even if relief time reduction is established by executing the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is being executed, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed in a variable manner. Do not forcibly stop the fluctuating display of special symbols.

In this example, if the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit while the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the first special symbol will be forcibly stopped regardless of the display result. However, the configuration is not limited to this. For example, if the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, if the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol is a jackpot, or if it is a jackpot, And if it is a jackpot type with a high advantage (for example, 6R jackpot B), the first special symbol fluctuation display may not be forcibly stopped, and the first special symbol fluctuation processing may be ended as it is. . In this case, based on the variable display of the second special symbol becoming a small hit, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the small win release pre-processing (step S126), and the small win game to move to. Therefore, after the next timer interrupt, the determination in step 061IWS1120A is N, the processing in steps 061IWS1121A to S1130A is skipped, and the first variable time timer in step 061IWS1122A is not updated. Therefore, if the variable display of the second special symbol results in a small hit and the variable display of the first special symbol is in progress, resulting in a jackpot with a high advantage, during the small win game, the first The update of the variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol continues to be executed. Then, when the small winning game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the updating of the first variable time timer is restarted.

In addition, in this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit while the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, and the variable display of the first special symbol that becomes a miss or a small hit is executed, Even if there is, the first special symbol variation process is ended as is (see N in step 061IWS1127A). Therefore, even if the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is a small hit and the fluctuating display of the first special symbol is in progress, resulting in a loss or a small hit, the first fluctuation The update of the time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed, and when the small winning game is finished, the update of the first variable time timer is restarted.

(1st special symbol stop processing)
FIGS. 284-10 and 284-11 are flowcharts showing the first special symbol stop process. In the first special symbol stop process, first, the CPU 103 checks whether the lighting extension flag is set (step 061IWS2010A). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the set lighting extension flag (step 061IWS2011A). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to end the lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 061IWS2012A), and controls to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2013A).

In this example, by executing steps 061IWS5617A to S5621A and S5617B to S5621B, the time saving state ( At the same time, the processing of steps 061IWS2010A to S2013A, S2010B to S2013B is executed for a predetermined time (100th time, 200th time, When the variable display for the 800th or 800th time (see FIG. 284-1) ends, the right-hand hit indicator 26 is turned off.

Next, the CPU 103 derives and displays the stop symbol of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 061IWS2014A). In addition, in this case, if the first forced symbol confirmation designation command was sent in step 061IWS1129A of the first special symbol variation process, the forced symbol will be sent as the stop symbol of the first special symbol regardless of the decision result at the start of variation. A symbol that misses the target is derived and displayed.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the first jackpot flag is set (step 061IWS2015A). If the first jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 sets a jackpot start flag indicating that a jackpot is to be started (step 061IWS2016A). Further, the CPU 103 clears the first jackpot flag (step 061IWS2017A).

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 061IWS2018A), and performs control to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2019A). Then, the process moves to step 061IWS2027A.

By executing the processing of steps 061IWS2018A and S2019A, in this example, when a jackpot is achieved in the variable display of the first special symbol, the right hit indicator 26 starts lighting up. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole) is provided on the right side of the gaming area, it is more advantageous for the player to perform a right-handed operation during a jackpot game. , and the right-hand hit indicator 26 is lit.

In addition, in this example, after the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the jackpot game starts based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41, so when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the right hit It may be configured to start lighting the indicator 26.

If the first jackpot flag is not set (N in step 061IWS2015A), the CPU 103 determines whether the first small hit flag is set (step 061IWS2020A). When the first small hit flag is set, control is performed to transmit a small hit start designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2021A). Further, the CPU 103 clears the first small hit flag (step 061IWS2022A). Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the small winning release preprocessing (step 061IWS2026A). Then, the process moves to step 061IWS2027A.

In step 061IWS2027A, the CPU 103 sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal process (step 061IWS2027A).

If the first small hit flag is not set (N in step 061IWS2020A), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not it has been decided to lose the time saving (step 061IWS2030A). It should be noted that whether or not it is decided to skip the time saving can be determined, for example, by checking the stop symbols of the special symbols stored in the stop symbol storage area in step 061IWS72A.

If it is decided to skip the time reduction, the CPU 103 checks whether the high base flag is set (step 061IWS2031A). Then, if the high base flag is set (that is, in the low probability/high base state), the process moves to step 061IWS2036A.

If the high base flag is not set (in this example, the time saving is not changed in the variable probability state (high probability state), so if the state is normal (low probability/low base state)), the CPU 103 Based on the occurrence of a deviation, a high base flag is set (step 061IWS2032A). Further, the CPU 103 sets the high base number counter to "100" (step 061IWS2033A).

In this example, when a time saving error occurs in the normal state (low probability/low base state), the time saving state (low probability/high When a time saving error occurs in the time saving state (low probability/high base state), the time saving state (low probability/high base state) continues, and the number of time saving times (i.e. the value of the high base number counter) is controlled by the time saving state (low probability/high base state). Not updated.

In this example, in the process of steps 061IWS2030A to S2033A (and steps 061IWS2030B to S2033B described later), if a time saving error occurs during a time saving state (high base state) including relief time saving, the number of time saving times is not updated. It is configured. With such a configuration, in this example, in a configuration where the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel, it is possible to ensure the advantage of the time saving state via the rescue time saving. Therefore, the degree of relief for the player can be increased (for example, the amount of investment for the player can be suppressed).

In this example, if a time reduction error occurs in the time reduction state (low probability/high base state), the number of time reductions (i.e., the value of the high base number counter) is configured not to be updated. For example, if a time saving loss occurs in the time saving state (low probability/high base state) via jackpot or time saving loss in the time saving state (low probability/high base state) (or If the remaining number of time reductions is less than 100 times due to a time reduction error), the number of time reductions (i.e., the value of the high base number counter) is updated, and the control is again set to the time reduction state (low probability/high base state) with the number of time reductions of 100 times. It is also possible to do so.

In addition, in step 061IWS2033A (and step 061IWS2033B, which will be described later), it may be configured such that values corresponding to a plurality of types of time saving times can be set in the high base number counter. For example, if the time reduction is missed the first time, the high base frequency counter is set to "100", and if the time reduction is missed the second time, the high base frequency counter is set to "200". You may.

Further, for example, the number of time savings may be determined by performing a lottery process based on random numbers, and in step 061IWS2033A (and step 061IWS2033B, which will be described later), a value corresponding to the number of time savings determined by the lottery process is set in the high base number counter. It may also be configured to set. In this case, for example, the number of time reductions may be determined to be 100 times with a probability of 90%, and 200 times with a probability of 10%. In addition, when the number of time savings is determined by lottery processing, the number of time savings may be determined by using the type determination random number used for determining the jackpot type and time saving type, or the number of time savings may be determined using a dedicated random number. You may.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 061IWS2034A), and performs control to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2035A). Then, the process moves to step 061IWS36A.

By executing the processing of steps 061IWS2034A to S2035A (and steps 061IWS2034B to S2035B described later), in this example, lighting of the right-hand drive indicator 26 is started when a time saving error occurs.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal process (step 061IWS2036A).

Note that this example shows a case where the value of the relief time reduction counter is not set to "800" (that is, the remaining number of times until relief time reduction is not reset) when a time reduction error occurs, but this is not limited to such a configuration. First, even when a time reduction occurs, such as when a jackpot occurs or when a relief time reduction occurs, the value of the relief time reduction counter is set to "800" (that is, the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction is reset). Good too.

As shown in FIGS. 284-10 to 284-11, in this example, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol, and when a time saving error occurs, the player is directed to the right side of the gaming area. The player is configured to be able to issue a right-handed hit notification that prompts the player to shoot the game ball. In addition, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol, gate notification can be executed to prompt the player to shoot the game ball aiming at the passing gate 41 as a right hit notification. It's okay.

In addition, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol, the right hit notification or gate notification will not be executed, and if the game ball enters the first starting winning hole in that state, the right hit notification or gate notification will be executed. (In this case, since the game ball is waiting to pass through the gate, even if the game ball enters the first starting prize opening, the variable display of the first special symbol does not start immediately and becomes the first pending memory.) You may.

Conversely, when the passing of the game ball at the passing gate 41 is detected in the normal state (low probability/low base state) (that is, when there is a possibility that a right-handed operation is being performed), the recognition level is The player may be configured to use a low-volume sound output or small-screen display to notify the player of a left-handed hit to encourage the player to shoot the game ball to the left of the gaming area. . On the other hand, in the normal state (low probability/low base state), if it is detected that the game ball enters the second start winning hole (or the special winning hole provided on the right side of the gaming area) (that is, the right-handed operation is the intention) If it is presumed that the player is playing a left-handed hit), the player may be configured to notify the left-handed hit in a manner that has a high degree of recognition (for example, outputting a loud sound or displaying on a large screen). With such a configuration, accurate firing notification can be performed. In particular, with the above configuration, for a player who accidentally shoots a game ball to the right of the gaming area, a slight left-handed notification is sent to the player in a manner in which the degree of awareness of the surroundings of the gaming machine is low. For a player who intentionally performs a right-handed operation, it may be configured such that the left-handed player is notified in a manner that increases the degree of awareness of the surroundings of the gaming machine. With such a configuration, a player who intentionally performs a right-handed operation can be prompted by a clerk at the game parlor to return to a left-handed operation.

Further, in the above case, it may be configured such that left-handed hitting notification is performed when the number of game balls detected on the right side of the game area, such as the passage gate 41 and the second starting prize opening, reaches a certain number. In addition, at the passage gate 41, if a game ball is detected multiple times (for example, 5 times) within a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 minute), a left-handed hit notification is issued, It may be configured such that when a specific number (for example, one) or more game balls smaller than a predetermined number are detected in the special winning hole), a left-handed hit notification is performed.

In addition, this feature section 116IW performs a demonstration display when a specific condition is met, but when the demonstration display is performed in the normal state, the passing gate 41 or the second starting prize opening (or the gaming area When it is detected that a game ball has won a prize (a special prize opening provided on the right side), the demonstration display that has been being executed may be terminated and a left-handed hit notification may be performed.

(2nd special symbol normal processing)
FIGS. 284-12 to 284-14 are flowcharts showing the second special symbol normal processing in the first embodiment of the feature section 116IW. The state in which the second special symbol normal process is executed is when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal process. In addition, when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing, there is a state in which the second special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner on the second special symbol display device 4B.

In the second special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first checks whether the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120). It is confirmed whether or not (step 061IWS50B). In addition, when the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the value indicating the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. This is a case where the value indicating the end processing (step S128) is not reached, and the case is not during a jackpot game (opening the special variable winning ball device 7 a predetermined number of times) or during a small winning game (opening the special variable winning ball device 17). be.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 checks the value of the second pending storage number (step 061IWS51B). Specifically, the count value of the second pending storage counter is checked. If the second pending storage number is 0, a second customer waiting demo display designation command is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS52B).

If the second pending memory number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the pending memory number = 1 in the second pending memory number buffer of the RAM 102, and (step 061IWS53B), decreases the value of the second pending memory number by 1 (subtracts the count value of the second pending memory number counter by 1), and shifts the contents of each storage area. (Step 061IWS54B). That is, each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second pending memory number buffer of the RAM 102 is converted to the second pending memory number = n - Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which the random values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each second pending memory number are extracted always matches the order of the second pending memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It looks like this. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition for variable display is satisfied, so it is possible to specify the order in which each random value is extracted.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a setting value command indicating the setting value set in the RAM 102 to the production control board 12 (step 061IWS55B). Note that in this example, by executing the process of step 061IWS55B, a setting value command is sent every time variable display is started, but the setting change process (processing to change the setting value) is performed when the power is turned on. A setting value command is also sent when executed.

After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the production control CPU 120 (step 061IWS56B). In addition, the specific method of transmitting the background designation command is the same as the process shown in step 061IWS56A of the first special symbol normal process.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the probability change flag is set (step 061IWS5601B). If the variable probability flag is set, that is, if the variable probability state is a variable probability state (high probability state), the process moves to step 061IWS5617B.

If the probability change flag is not set, that is, if the probability is low, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (step 061IWS5602B). If the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0, the process moves to step 061IWS5617B. If the value of the relief time reduction number counter is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the relief time reduction number counter (step 061IWS5603B).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is 127 or more (step 061IWS5604B). If the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is 126 or less (N in step 061IWS5604B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a value corresponding to the value of the relief time reduction number counter in the EXT data, and performs the relief time reduction. Control is performed to send the number 1 designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS5605B).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 061IWS5606B). If the value of the relief time reduction counter after the subtraction is not 0, the process moves to step 061IWS5617B. If the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is 0, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a high base flag based on the occurrence of relief time reduction (step 061IWS5607B). In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 sets "800" to the high base number counter that indicates the remaining number of times of the total number of variable displays of the first special symbol and variable display of the second special symbol that can be executed in the high base state. (Step 061IWS5608B).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a relief variation flag indicating that the relief time reduction is a variation display that is realized (step 061IWS5609B).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 061IWS5610B), and performs control to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS5610B). 061IWS5611B). Then, the process moves to step 061IWS57B.

If the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is 127 or more (Y in step 061IWS5604B), the game control microcomputer 100 uniformly sets 7F (H) as EXT data and issues the relief time reduction number 1 designation command. Control is performed to send command 957F (H) to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS5614B). Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened in units of 100 (in this example, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, or 800 times) (step 061IWS5615B). If the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time reduction is the number of times in units of 100, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a value corresponding to the value of the relief time reduction counter in the EXT data, and sets the relief time reduction number 2. Control is performed to send the designated command to the production control CPU 120 (step 061IWS5616B).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter is "0" (step 061IWS5617B), and if it is "0", it moves to step 061IWS57B.

If the value of the high base number counter is not "0", that is, if it is a low probability/high base state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts "1" from the value of the high base number counter (step 061IWS5618B), It is determined whether the value has become "0" (step 061IWS5619B). If the value of the high base count counter does not become "0", the process moves to step 061IWS57B.

When the value of the high base number counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating the high base state (step 061IWS5620B).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) indicating that the lighting of the right-handed player indicator 26 is extended until the end of the variation (step 061IWS5621B).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the first special symbol is changing in jackpot (step 061IWS57B). Specifically, when the first jackpot flag indicating a jackpot is set based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, it is determined that the first special symbol is fluctuating. If it is determined that the first special symbol is in the midst of a jackpot change, the process moves to step 061IWS71B without performing the processes after step 061IWS58B. As a result, when the second special symbol starts varying during the jackpot variation of the first special symbol, the system is configured such that the jackpot is forcibly missed regardless of whether the jackpot determination value is stored.

Note that the method of forcibly causing the disc to be removed is not limited to the method described above. For example, if the jackpot of the first special symbol is fluctuating in step 061IWS57B, by setting a random value (fixed value) that is a failure as the random number for determining a hit, and moving to step 061IWS59B, it is possible to It may be possible to forcibly cause a win regardless of whether a random number for determining a hit has been obtained.

For example, if the jackpot of the first special symbol is fluctuating in step 061IWS57B, a random value (fixed value) of the loss may be set as the random number for hit determination without performing the processing in steps 061IWS58B to S63B. By performing the hit determination, it may be possible to forcibly cause a win regardless of which random number for hit determination was obtained at the time of starting winning.

When the jackpot of the first special symbol is not changing, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the random number for hit determination from the second random number storage buffer (step 061IWS58B) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 061IWS59B). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines a jackpot when the random number for hit determination matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. In addition, in step 061IWS59B, it is determined whether or not to make a jackpot using either the non-probability variable jackpot determination table or the probability variable jackpot determination table, taking into consideration the gaming state.

If it is determined to be a jackpot (step 061IWS60B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second jackpot flag indicating that it will be a jackpot based on the variable display of the second special symbol (step 061IWS61B). . Then, based on the random number for determining the hit type, it is determined whether the jackpot type is 6R jackpot A, 6R jackpot B, 6R jackpot C, or 6R jackpot D (step 061IWS62B), and the jackpot type is stored (step 061IWS63B). ), the process moves to step 061IWS71B.

Further, if the jackpot is not determined in step 061IWS60B, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step 061IWS64B). The small hit determination module is a program that determines a small hit when a random number for hit determination (or a random number for small hit determination may be used) matches a predetermined small hit determination value. If it is determined to be a small hit (step 061IWS65B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second small win flag indicating that it will be a small win based on the variable display of the second special symbol ( Step 061IWS66B). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the small win type based on the random number for determining the win type (step 061IWS67B), and stores the small win type (step 061IWS68B). Then, the process moves to step 061IWS71B. In addition, regarding the small winning type, a plurality of small winning balls may be provided, each with a different opening pattern (i.e. ease of winning) of the variable winning ball device 061IW17 (special winning hole), or only one may be provided. . If there is only one small winning type, the processing of steps 061IWS67B to S68B may be omitted.

Further, if the small hit is not determined in step 061IWS65B, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the probability variation flag is set (step 061IWS69B). If the probability variation flag is set, that is, if the probability variation state (high probability state) is established, the process moves to step 061IWS71B. In this example, by executing the process in step 061IWS69B, if the state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), the process of determining whether the time saving is missed in step 061IWS70B is not performed, and the result is determined to be the result without any time saving. It is determined.

If the probability change flag is not set, that is, if it is in a low probability state, the game control microcomputer 100 uses the time saving failure determination table for determining whether or not the time saving failure occurs, and sets the random number for time saving failure determination. A lottery process is performed based on the above, and it is determined whether or not the time reduction is decided (step 061IWS70B). In this case, it is decided that the time will be shortened with a probability of approximately 1/400. Then, the process moves to step 061IWS71B.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the stop symbols of the special symbols according to the determination results of the jackpot type and time saving type (step 061IWS71B). In this case, for example, if it is determined to be a 6R jackpot A, the stopping symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "1", and if it is determined to be a 6R jackpot B, the stopping symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "3". ”, and when it is decided to make 6R jackpot C, the stopping symbol of the special symbol is determined to be “5”, and when it is decided to be 6R jackpot D, the stopping symbol of the special symbol is determined to be “7”. ”, and if it is decided to make a small hit, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be “9”, and if it is decided to be a time-saving loss, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be “2”. If it is decided to be a miss (no time saving), the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "-". Further, the game control microcomputer 100 stores the determined special symbol stop symbols in the stop symbol storage area provided in the RAM 102 (step 061IWS72B).

Then, in step 061IWS89B, the value of the second special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second fluctuation pattern setting process (step 061IWS89B).

(Second fluctuation pattern setting process)
FIG. 284-15 is a flowchart showing the second variation pattern setting process in the first embodiment of the feature section 116IW. In the second fluctuation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first checks whether the relief fluctuation flag is set (step 061IWS17091B).

When the relief variation flag is set, that is, when the relief time reduction is established, the game control microcomputer 100 resets the relief variation flag (step 061IWS17092B) and performs a process for determining the variation pattern. As the variation pattern table, the second special symbol variation pattern table C shown in FIG. 284-4(C) for the time when relief time reduction is established is selected (step 061IWS17093B). Then, the process moves to step 061IWS1717B.

If the relief variation flag is not set, it is checked whether the probability variation flag is set (step 061IWS1710B). If the probability variation flag is set, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the high base flag is set (step 061IWS1711B). If the high base flag is not set (that is, if it is in a high probability/low base state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses the table shown in FIG. 284-4 (A) as a fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern. The second special symbol variation pattern table A for the high probability/low base state shown in (step 061IWS1712B) is selected. If the probability variation flag is not set (N in step 061IWS1710B) or if the high base flag is set (Y in step 061IWS1711B), the gaming control microcomputer 100 sets the As the variation pattern table, the second special symbol variation pattern table B for times other than the high probability/low base state shown in FIG. 284-4(B) is selected (step 061IWS1713B).

Then, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the pattern based on the fluctuation pattern table determined to be used in steps 061IWS1712B and S1713B and the random number for fluctuation pattern determination stored in the second special symbol determination buffer. 284-4 is determined (step 061IWS1717B).

After determining the fluctuation pattern, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a fluctuation pattern command indicating the determined fluctuation pattern to the production control CPU 120 (step 061IWS1704B).

Further, when the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) of the second special symbol is determined in step 061IWS1717B, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the second fluctuation time timer, and sets the fluctuation time At the same time as starting measurement of (step 061IWS1705B), variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is started (step 061IWS1706B). Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol variation process (step 061IWS1707B).

By executing the above processing, in this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, if the gaming state is the high probability/low base state, the second special symbol variation pattern table A is selected and a normal variable time display is executed. On the other hand, if the gaming state is other than the high probability/low base state, the second special symbol variation pattern table B is selected and a long variation variation display is executed. In addition, in the case of the variable display of the second special symbol in which the relief time reduction is established, the second special symbol variation pattern table C is selected and the variable display exclusively for the relief time reduction is executed.

(Second special symbol variation processing)
FIG. 284-16 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation process in the second special symbol process process. In the second special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first checks whether the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120) (step 061IWS1120B). In addition, when the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the value indicating the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. This is a case in which the value indicating the end processing (step S128) is not reached, and the case is not in a jackpot game (opening the special variable winning ball device 7 a predetermined number of times) or in a small winning game (opening the special variable winning ball device 17). .

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the CPU 103 sends the determination result of whether or not to be a jackpot, and the jackpot type, if it has not been sent yet. Based on the determination result, control is performed to transmit one of the display result designation commands to the production control CPU 120 (step 061IWS1121B).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the second variable time timer (step 061IWS1122B), and when the second variable time timer times out (step 061IWS1123B), performs control to send a second symbol confirmation designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 061IWS1122B). Step 061IWS1124B). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing (step 061IWS1130B).

If the second variable time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 061IWS1125B). In addition, whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is determined by, for example, the value of the first special symbol process flag being a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing, and This can be determined by checking whether or not the first jackpot flag indicating a jackpot is set based on the variable display of the first special symbol.

If the jackpot symbol is not derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the small win symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 061IWS1126B). In addition, whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is determined by, for example, the value of the first special symbol process flag being a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing. This can be determined by checking whether or not the first small hit flag indicating a small hit is set based on the variable display of the first special symbol. If the small winning symbol is not derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the process is immediately terminated.

When a jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (Y in step 061IWS1125B), or when a small win symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (Y in step 061IWS11256), The CPU 103 performs control to transmit a second forced symbol confirmation designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS1129B). In addition, in this case, if the second jackpot flag or the second small jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the second jackpot flag or the second small jackpot flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing (step 061IWS1130B).

By executing the processes of steps 061IWS1125B to S1126B and S1129B, this feature section 116IW can handle cases where the fluctuating display of the first special symbol becomes a jackpot while the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is being executed, or when a small hit occurs. When this occurs, the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped, thereby preventing a situation in which a jackpot or small win occurs simultaneously with the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this case, on the production control CPU 120 side, if the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly removed, the variation of the decorative symbol is changed based on the second forced symbol confirmation designation command sent in step 061IWS1129B. Control is performed to forcibly stop and display the missing symbol as a display result.

In addition, in this example, if the variable display of the first special symbol becomes a small hit while the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the second special symbol will be forcibly stopped regardless of the display result. However, the configuration is not limited to this. For example, if the variable display of the first special symbol becomes a small hit while the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol is a jackpot, and the jackpot has a high advantage. In the case of the type (for example, 6R jackpot C), the variable display of the second special symbol may not be forcibly stopped, and the second special symbol variation process may be ended as it is. In this case, based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol becoming a small hit, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the small win release pre-processing (step S126), and the small win game to move to. Therefore, after the next timer interrupt, the determination in step 061IWS1120B is N, the processing in steps 061IWS1121B to S1130B is skipped, and the second variable time timer in step 061IWS1122B is not updated. Therefore, when the variable display of the first special symbol becomes a small hit and the variable display of the second special symbol that becomes a probability variable jackpot is being executed, the second variable time timer is activated during the small win game. The update is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol continues to be executed. Then, when the small winning game ends, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and updating of the second variable time timer is restarted.

In addition, in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol becomes a small hit while the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, and while the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a loss or a small hit, Even if there is, the second special symbol variation process is ended as is (see N in step 061IWS1127B). Therefore, even if the variable display of the first special symbol is a small hit and the variable display of the second special symbol is in progress, resulting in a loss or a small hit, the second variable The update of the time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed, and when the small winning game is finished, the update of the second variable time timer is restarted.

In this example, in the normal state (low probability/low base state), the player enters the game ball into the winning ball device 061IW6Aa as the first starting winning hole and executes the fluctuating display of the first special symbol. Since the game ball is fired (left-handed) aiming at the left side of the game area, the game ball enters the second starting prize opening provided on the right side of the game area and the game ball enters the second special symbol. The fluctuation display is not performed, but the player mistakenly performs the firing operation (or even if a long fluctuation is executed, the player intentionally displays the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, which has a higher advantage than the fluctuation display of the first special symbol) Aiming) A variable display of the second special symbol may be performed. That is, there is a risk that a jackpot symbol may be derived and displayed in a variable display that the player does not intend, or that the player may intentionally aim for the second starting prize opening.

Therefore, in this example, while executing the variable display of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, based on the fact that the small winning symbol is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other special symbol, In the variable display of one of the special symbols, it is configured such that a defective symbol can be forcibly derived and displayed. For example, in the normal state (low probability/low base state), even if a winning occurs in the second starting winning hole that the player does not intend and a variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the second special symbol If the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol becomes a small hit, the variable display will be forcibly stopped at a missed symbol. In addition, in the normal state (low probability/low base state), the player intentionally performs a firing operation (hitting right) with the aim of winning the second starting prize opening, and the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is executed. Even so, the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is a long fluctuation (for example, a fluctuation time of 10 minutes), so the fluctuating efficiency is extremely poor. Then, while the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, if the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit symbol is derived and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly changed to a missed symbol. It will be suspended. With this configuration, it is possible to avoid a jackpot symbol being derived and displayed in an unintended variable display of special symbols, and it is also possible to minimize the effect of the player's intentional strategy.

(Second special symbol stop processing)
FIGS. 284-17 and 284-18 are flowcharts showing the second special symbol stop processing. In the second special symbol stop processing, first, the CPU 103 checks whether the lighting extension flag is set (step 061IWS2010B). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the set lighting extension flag (step 061IWS2011B). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to end the lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 061IWS2012B), and controls to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2013B).

Next, the CPU 103 derives and displays the stop symbol of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 061IWS2014B). In addition, in this case, if the second forced symbol confirmation designation command was sent in step 061IWS1129B of the second special symbol variation process, it will be forced as the stop symbol of the second special symbol, regardless of the decision result at the start of variation. A symbol that misses the target is derived and displayed.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the second jackpot flag is set (step 061IWS2015B). If the second jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 sets a jackpot start flag (step 061IWS2016B). Further, the CPU 103 clears the second jackpot flag (step 061IWS2017B).

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 061IWS2018B), and performs control to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2019B). Then, the process moves to step 061IWS2027B.

By executing the processing of steps 061IWS2018B and S2019B, in this example, when a jackpot is achieved in the variable display of the second special symbol, the right hit indicator 26 starts lighting up. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole) is provided on the right side of the gaming area, it is more advantageous for the player to perform a right-handed operation during a jackpot game. , and the right-hand hit indicator 26 is lit.

If the second jackpot flag is not set (N in step 061IWS2015B), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second small win flag is set (step 061IWS2020B). When the second small hit flag is set, control is performed to transmit a small hit start designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2021B). Further, the CPU 103 clears the second small hit flag (step 061IWS2022B).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the small winning release preprocessing (step 061IWS2026B). Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal process (step 061IWS2027B).

If the second small hit flag is not set (N in step 061IWS2020B), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not it has been decided to lose the time saving (step 061IWS2030B).

If it is decided to skip the time reduction, the CPU 103 checks whether the high base flag is set (step 061IWS2031B). Then, if the high base flag is set (that is, in the low probability/high base state), the process moves to step 061IWS2036B.

If the high base flag is not set (that is, in the normal state (low probability/low base state)), the CPU 103 sets the high base flag based on the occurrence of the time saving error (step 061IWS2032B). Further, the CPU 103 sets the high base count counter to "100" (step 061IWS2033B).

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 061IWS2034B), and performs control to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2035B). Then, the process moves to step 061IWS36B.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal process (step 061IWS2036B).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal process (step 061IWS2037B).

(External output signal)
FIG. 284-19 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an external output signal externally output from the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this example, in step S23, a process is performed to output a signal as shown in FIG. 284-19 to an external device such as a hall management computer. As shown in FIG. 284-19, in this example, the external output signals include jackpot 1 signal, jackpot 2 signal, jackpot 3 signal, jackpot 4 signal, fluctuation stop signal, security signal, door open signal, prize ball signal, and Out ball signal is output. Among these, the jackpot 1 signal is a signal that is output externally during the jackpot game. Further, the jackpot 2 signal is a signal that is output externally during the jackpot game and during the high base state. Moreover, the jackpot 3 signal is a signal that is externally output during the symbol determination period of the time saving loss. Further, the jackpot 4 signal is a signal that is output externally at the start of the variable display that shortens the rescue time. Further, the fluctuation stop signal is a signal that is output externally at the start of the symbol confirmation period. Furthermore, the security signal is a signal that is output to the outside when an error is detected. Further, the door open signal is a signal that is output to the outside when the door is detected to be open. Further, the prize ball signal is a signal that is output to the outside when 10 prize balls are issued. Further, the out ball signal is a signal that is output to the outside when 10 out balls are detected. In an external device such as a hall management computer, the number of jackpots can be measured using the jackpot 1 signal, the number of consecutive hits can be measured using the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal, and the jackpot 3 signal allows high base control via time-saving loss. The number of times can be measured, and the number of high base control via relief time reduction can be measured by the jackpot 4 signal.

In this example, in addition to being transferred to the high base state at the end of the jackpot game, the state may also be transferred to the high base state when a time-saving losing symbol is derived and displayed, so the time-saving losing symbol is derived and displayed. In this case, external output of the jackpot 3 signal is started at the end of the symbol confirmation period. In addition, even if the relief time is shortened, the state may be shifted to the high base state, so if a fluctuation display that shortens the relief time is executed, the external output of the jackpot 4 signal will start at the start of the fluctuation display. be done. For example, if the time-saving losing symbol is derived and displayed and the transition is made to the high base state, the signal is output from a dedicated terminal different from the terminal that outputs the jackpot signal 2, thereby reducing the time-saving. It may also be possible to externally specify that the time-saving state has been entered upon the derivation and display of a missed symbol. Also, for example, the jackpot 2 signal is output externally during a jackpot game and during the high probability/high base state, and the jackpot 3 signal and the jackpot 4 signal are output at the start of the low probability/high base state (or at the beginning of the low probability/high base state). The high probability/high base state and the low probability/high base state may be externally output by outputting the high probability/high base state during the low probability/high base state.

In this example, when the relief time is shortened, the external output of the jackpot 4 signal is started in response to the start of the fluctuation display that will shorten the relief time, and the output of the jackpot 4 signal is started at the start of the symbol confirmation period in response to the end of the fluctuation display. A stop signal is output externally. With this configuration, it is possible to output to the outside at an appropriate timing a signal that can specify that the high base state is controlled based on the shortening of the rescue time. Further, when outputting the four jackpot signals and the fluctuation stop signal, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of signals being missed externally. Furthermore, the number of times the rescue time is shortened by outputting the jackpot 4 signal can be externally specified. In this way, external devices such as hall management computers can identify the trigger, timing, and number of times that the high base state is controlled. It becomes possible to analyze the operation of gaming machines at a gaming parlor, such as what kind of customer group the players are.

In addition, in this example, when the variable display for shortening the relief time is started, the high base flag is set and the transition is made to the time saving state (low probability/high base state). When the variable display stops being displayed, or at the start or end of the symbol confirmation period, the high base flag is set and the system is configured to shift to a short time state (low probability/high base state). Alternatively, external output of the jackpot 4 signal may be started when the high base flag is set and the time saving state (low probability/high base state) is entered.

Note that the jackpot 3 signal and the jackpot 4 signal may be configured to be output even during the jackpot game. In addition, this example shows a case where separate external output signals (3 jackpot signals and 4 jackpot signals) are output in the case where the time saving is missed and the case where the rescue time is shortened, but the dual-purpose external output signal It may be configured to output .

Further, the jackpot 3 signal and the jackpot 4 signal may be configured to be output at a timing after outputting the fluctuation stop signal during the pattern determination period.

For example, a fluctuation stop signal may be output at the start of the symbol confirmation period for a losing symbol, and three jackpot signals may be output during the symbol confirmation period after outputting the fluctuation stop signal, or a variation display that shortens the relief time. A fluctuation stop signal may be output at the start of the symbol determination period, and four jackpot signals may be output during the symbol determination period after outputting the fluctuation stop signal. With such a configuration, when outputting the fluctuation stop signal and the jackpot 3 signal or jackpot 4 signal at the same time, it is possible to avoid signal failure from occurring externally.

Further, the jackpot 3 signal may be configured to be continuously output during the high base state via the time saving loss. Further, the jackpot 4 signal may be configured to be continuously output during the high base state via the relief time reduction. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably determine the type of time saving even during the high base state.

(Transition of gaming state)
Next, the transition of the gaming state in the first embodiment of the feature section 116IW will be explained. FIG. 284-20 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the gaming state changes in the first embodiment of the feature section 116IW. In the first embodiment, in the low probability/low base state (normal state), the fluctuating display of the first special symbol is executed in the normal fluctuating time, whereas the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is executed for a long time. Runs with fluctuations. In addition, since it is in a low base state, the probability of hitting a common symbol is as low as 1/1000, and the frequency of the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab being in the open state is low. Therefore, in order to win a game ball to the winning ball device 061IW6Aa as the first starting winning hole and execute the variable display of the first special symbol, the player aims at the left side of the gaming area and performs a firing operation of the game ball (left (beat) Therefore, in the low probability/low base state (normal state), starting winnings to the winning ball device 061IW6Aa as the first starting winning hole mainly occur, and a variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. Further, since the first special symbol is mainly displayed in a variable manner, when a jackpot occurs in a low probability/low base state, a 6R jackpot A or a 6R jackpot B mainly occurs.

As shown in FIG. 284-20, when 6R jackpot B occurs in the low probability/low base state, if the game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, after the jackpot game ends, the high probability/ The state shifts to a low base state (first variable probability state), and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 061IWS2204 to S2206 and S2240). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, if 6R jackpot A occurs in the low probability/low base state, after the end of that jackpot game, the state shifts to the low probability/high base state and the next jackpot occurs or a predetermined number of times (in this example, 100 times). The low probability/high base state is maintained until the fluctuation display of ) is finished (see steps 061IWS2284, S2286, and S2288).

In addition, as shown in Figure 284-20, even if the result is a loss in the low probability/low base state (normal state), if the short time losing symbol is derived and displayed, the low probability/high base state (see step 061IWS2032A, S2032B). Furthermore, even if the result is a loss, if the relief time is shortened (after the RAM clearing process or jackpot game, the number of fluctuations reaches 800 without the next jackpot occurring), It is controlled to a low probability/high base state (see steps 061IWS5607A and S5607B).

When transitioning to the high probability/low base state (first probability variable state), the variable display of the 2nd special symbol is executed in the normal variation time, whereas the variable display of the 1st special symbol is executed in the long variation. Ru. In addition, since it is in a low base state, the probability of hitting a common symbol is as low as 1/1000, and the frequency of the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab being in the open state is low. Therefore, in order to win a game ball to the winning ball device 061IW6B as the second starting winning hole and execute the fluctuating display of the second special symbol, the player aims at the right side of the gaming area and performs a firing operation of the game ball (right (beat) Therefore, in the high probability/low base state (first probability variable state), starting winnings mainly occur to the winning ball device 061IW6B as the second starting winning hole, and a variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. Moreover, since the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed, when a jackpot occurs in the high probability/low base state, a 6R jackpot C or a 6R jackpot D mainly occurs.

As shown in FIG. 284-20, when a 6R jackpot C occurs in the high probability/low base state, if the game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the probability is high again after the jackpot game ends. The high probability/low base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 061IWS2204 to S2206, S2253 to S2260). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, if a 6R jackpot D occurs in the high probability/low base state, after the end of that jackpot game, it will shift to the high probability/high base state (second probability variable state), and the probability will be high until the next jackpot occurs. /The high base state (second variable probability state) is maintained (see steps 061IWS2204 to S2206, S2269, and S2274).

When transitioning to the high probability/high base state (second probability variable state), the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the normal variation time, whereas the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the long variation. Ru. However, since it is in a high base state, the probability of hitting a common symbol is as high as 999/1000, and the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab is frequently in the open state. Therefore, in order to win a game ball into the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab as the first starting winning hole and execute the variable display of the first special symbol, the player aims at the right side of the gaming area and operates the game ball to fire ( right-handed). Therefore, in the high probability/high base state (second probability variable state), starting winnings mainly occur to the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab as the first starting winning hole, and a variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. Further, since the first special symbol is mainly displayed in a variable manner, when a jackpot occurs in a high probability/high base state, a 6R jackpot A or a 6R jackpot B mainly occurs.

As shown in FIG. 284-20, when 6R jackpot B occurs in the high probability/high base state, if the game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, after the jackpot game ends, the high probability/ The state shifts to a low base state (first variable probability state), and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 061IWS2204 to S2206 and S2240). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, if 6R jackpot A occurs in the high probability/high base state, after the end of that jackpot game, the state shifts to the low probability/high base state and the next jackpot occurs or a predetermined number of times (in this example, 200 times). The low probability/high base state is maintained until the fluctuation display of ) is finished (see steps 061IWS2284 to S2286 and S2288).

When shifting to the low probability/high base state, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in a normal variation time, whereas the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in a long variation. However, since it is in a high base state, the probability of hitting a common symbol is as high as 999/1000, and the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab is frequently in the open state. Therefore, in order to win a game ball into the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab as the first starting winning hole and execute the variable display of the first special symbol, the player aims at the right side of the gaming area and operates the game ball to fire ( right-handed). Therefore, in the low probability/high base state, starting winnings mainly occur to the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab as the first starting winning hole, and a variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. Furthermore, since the first special symbol is mainly displayed in a variable manner, when a jackpot occurs in a low probability/high base state, a 6R jackpot A or a 6R jackpot B mainly occurs.

As shown in FIG. 284-20, when 6R jackpot B occurs in the low probability/high base state, if the game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, after the jackpot game ends, the high probability/ The state shifts to a low base state (first variable probability state), and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 061IWS2204 to S2206 and S2240). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, if 6R jackpot A occurs in the low probability/high base state, after the end of that jackpot game, the state shifts to the low probability/high base state again, and the next jackpot occurs or the predetermined number of times (in this example, 200 The low probability/high base state is maintained until the variable display of 2 times) is completed (see steps 061IWS2284 to S2286 and S2288).

In addition, as shown in Figure 284-20, in the low probability/high base state, if the relief time is shortened (after RAM clear processing or jackpot play, the number of fluctuations reaches 800 without the next jackpot occurring) ), the process is again controlled to a low probability/high base state with a time saving count of 800 (see steps 061IWS5607A to S5608A, S5607B to S5608B).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 284-20, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed a predetermined number of times in the low probability/high base state, the low probability/high base state and transition to the low probability/low base state (normal state).

Specifically, when the state is controlled to a low probability/high base state via a time saving error, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed a total of 100 times, the low probability The probability/high base state is ended and the process moves to the low probability/low base state (normal state) (steps 061IWS2030A to S2033A, S5617A to S5620A, S2030B to S2033B, S5617B to S5620B).

In addition, if the state is controlled to a low probability/high base state via a jackpot that occurs in a low base state, the fluctuating display of the first special symbol and the fluctuating display of the second special symbol will be executed a total of 100 times. , ends the low probability/high base state and moves to the low probability/low base state (normal state) (steps 061IWS2284, S2286, S2288, S5617A to S5620A, S5617B to S5620B). Also, if the state is controlled to a low probability/high base state via a jackpot that occurs in a high base state, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol will be executed a total of 200 times. , the low probability/high base state is ended, and the transition is made to the low probability/low base state (normal state) (steps 061IWS2284, S2286, S2287, S5617A to S5620A, S5617B to S5620B).

In addition, when controlled to a low probability/high base state via relief time reduction, if the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed a total of 800 times, the low probability/high probability The base state is ended and the process moves to a low probability/low base state (normal state) (steps 061IWS5607A to S5608A, S5617A to S5620A, S5607B to S5608B, S5617B to S5620B).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 284-20, in this example, in the high probability/low base state (first variable probability state), the 6R jackpot C occurs and the control returns to the high probability/low base state (first variable probability state). Otherwise, it becomes a 6R jackpot D and is controlled to a high probability/high base state (second variable probability state), so even if a jackpot occurs, the probability variable state will return with a 100% probability. Therefore, it can be said that in the high probability/low base state (first variable probability state), the occurrence of at least two more jackpots is guaranteed during the variable probability state (two-time loop). On the other hand, in the high probability/high base state (second probability variable state), if it becomes 6R jackpot B, it will be controlled to the high probability/low base state and the probability variable state will continue, but if it becomes 6R jackpot A, the probability variable state will continue. The variable probability state ends when the state shifts to the probability/high base state. Therefore, in the high probability/high base state (second variable probability state), it can be said that the state is a state (one loop) in which only one more jackpot is guaranteed to occur during the variable probability state.

In addition, in this example, a case is shown in which 6R jackpots A to D, which are all 6-round jackpots, are provided as jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, in this example, when the 6R jackpot A is reached, the control is made to a low probability/high base state, but even if the control is made to the same low probability/high base state, the number of rounds It may be configured to provide a 4R jackpot A that is a jackpot of 4 rounds with different values, or a 10R jackpot A that is a jackpot of 10 rounds. Similarly, even when controlled to the same high probability/high base state, for example, it may be configured to provide a 4R jackpot D, which is a 4-round jackpot, or a 10R jackpot D, which is a 10-round jackpot. Many different aspects are conceivable.

As shown in FIGS. 284-2 to 284-4 and FIG. 284-19, in this example, low probability/low base state (normal state), low probability/high base state, and high probability/high base state (second In the 2-probability variable state), the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in a normal variable time, whereas the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in a long variation. In other words, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in a shorter variable time than the variable display of the second special symbol (or is executed at a higher rate). Therefore, in this example, in the low probability/low base state (normal state), the low probability/high base state, and the high probability/high base state (second probability variable state), the variable display of the first special symbol is changed to the second special symbol. This is a state in which there is a high rate of variation display with a shorter variation time than the variation display of symbols (hereinafter, such a state is also referred to as a first shortened state). In addition, in this example, the first special symbol is Although the proportion of the variable display having a shorter variation time than the variable display of the second special symbol is 100%, the structure is not limited to such a proportion. For example, in the first shortened state, the rate at which the fluctuating display of the first special symbol is a fluctuating display with a shorter fluctuation time than the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is lower than 100%, but at least in the second shortening state described later. It may be configured so that it is higher than that.

In addition, in this example, in the high probability/low base state (first probability variable state), the variable display of the first special symbol is executed with long variation, whereas the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with normal variation. executed in time. In other words, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in a shorter variable time than the variable display of the first special symbol (or is executed at a higher rate). Therefore, in this example, the high probability/low base state (first probability variable state) is a state in which the rate at which the variable display of the second special symbol is a variable display with a shorter variation time than that of the first special symbol is high ( Hereinafter, such a state will also be referred to as a second shortened state). In addition, in this example, in the high probability/low base state (first probability variable state) which is the second shortened state, the variable display of the second special symbol is a variable display with a shorter variation time than the variable display of the first special symbol. Although the ratio is 100%, the configuration is not limited to such a ratio. For example, in the second shortened state, the rate at which the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is a fluctuating display with a shorter fluctuation time than the fluctuating display of the first special symbol is lower than 100%, but at least higher than the first shortened state. It may be configured to be higher.

In this example, in the first shortened state, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner on the image display device 5 mainly in response to the variable display of the first special symbol, and in the second shortened state, the decorative symbols are displayed mainly in response to the variable display of the second special symbol. In response to the fluctuating display, a fluctuating display of decorative patterns is executed on the image display device 5.

As mentioned above, in this example, even if relief time reduction is established by executing the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is being executed. , is configured so as not to forcibly stop the variable display of the one special symbol. In such a configuration, for example, in the normal state, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in a long variation, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the relief time reduction is established, and the relief time reduction ( (high base state), the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is continued without being forcibly stopped. Here, as a control to shorten rescue time (high base state), control to increase the probability of hitting a normal symbol, control to shorten the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and increase the opening time of the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab (first starting winning hole) In addition to the control related to the normal symbols, the second special symbol is controlled to shorten the fluctuation time (in other words, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is a fluctuation display with a shorter fluctuation time than the fluctuation display of the first special symbol. When control regarding the special symbol is performed (control to the second shortened state with a high ratio), the fluctuation time will be shortened until the fluctuating display of the second special symbol in progress (for example, fluctuation time of 10 minutes) ends. It is not possible to execute the variable display of the second special symbol that has been changed (that is, the variation efficiency has been improved), and the user cannot receive the benefit of shortening the relief time. If such a situation occurs, even if the rescue time is controlled to be short, the progress of the game will be significantly delayed and the interest will be reduced.

Therefore, in this example, when the rescue time shortening is established, control to shorten the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (in other words, the first special symbol Control related to special symbols, such as controlling to a first shortened state (in this example, a low probability/high base state) in which the variation display of the second special symbol has a high probability of being a variation display of a shorter variation time than the variation display of the second special symbol. is configured to take place. With this configuration, when the relief time reduction is established, the first shortening state (low probability/high base state) is controlled, so even if the fluctuating display (long fluctuation) of the second special symbol being executed continues. , it is possible to perform a variable display of the first special symbol in which the variation time is shortened (that is, the variation efficiency is improved), and it is possible to benefit from shortened relief time. Furthermore, when the rescue time is controlled to be short, the game can proceed smoothly and the game can be more interesting.

In addition, the fluctuation display (long fluctuation) of the second special symbol being executed continues even after transitioning to the relief time reduction (high base state) of the first shortened state, but the first special symbol whose fluctuation time has been shortened When a jackpot occurs due to the fluctuating display of , the game is forcibly stopped at a missed symbol (e.g., corresponds to the processing of steps 061IWS1125B and S1129B).

(Example of control of gaming state)
Next, an example of controlling the gaming state will be explained. FIG. 284-21 is a time chart for explaining an example of controlling the gaming state in the first embodiment.

Of FIG. 284-21, in FIG. 284-21(A), in the normal state (low probability/low base state), the variable display of the second special symbol that is time-shortened is started, and the second special symbol is An example of control of the gaming state is shown in which a variable display (missing (no time saving)) of the first special symbol in which relief time saving is established is started during execution of the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 284-21(A), when the variable display of the first special symbol in which relief time reduction is established starts (T1 timing), the time reduction state (low probability/low base state) changes from the normal state (low probability/low base state). (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS5606A to S5607A).

After that, as shown in FIG. 284-21 (A), a missed symbol is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol in which the relief time reduction is realized (T2 timing), but at this time, the second special symbol that is being executed is Symbols that are forcibly removed during variable display are not derived and displayed.

In addition, as shown in Figure 284-21 (A), after the relief time reduction is established and the transition is made to the time reduction state (low probability/high base state) via the relief time reduction, the first special symbol for which the relief time reduction is established. Although the time saving difference is derived and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol that was started before the variable display (T3 timing), at this time, the time saving number is not updated due to the time saving difference (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS2030B to S2031B) ). In other words, the time-saving state due to relief time-saving, which has a greater number of time-savings and is more advantageous than the time-saving failure, is maintained.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 284-21(A), the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol in which the relief time saving is realized is incorrect (no time saving), but the variation of the first special symbol in which the relief time saving is realized. Even if the displayed result is wrong in terms of time saving, the control of the gaming state remains unchanged. Specifically, when the variable display (time reduction off) of the first special symbol for which relief time reduction is established starts (T1 timing), the time reduction state (low probability/high probability) changes from the normal state (low probability/low base state). Control is performed to shift to the base state (corresponding to steps 061IWS5606A to S5607A). Then, the time saving error is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol in which the rescue time saving is established (T1 timing), but at this time, the time saving number is not updated due to the time saving error (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS2030B to S2031B). In other words, the time-saving state due to relief time-saving, which has a greater number of time-savings and is more advantageous than the time-saving failure, is maintained.

Of FIG. 284-21, FIG. 284-21(B) shows an example of controlling the gaming state when the time saving state due to rescue time saving ends at the start of the variable display that results in the time saving being missed.

As shown in Figure 284-21 (B), in the time saving state (low probability/high base state) due to relief time saving, the high base frequency counter is updated at the start of the fluctuation display that causes the time saving to be 0. When this happens (timing t1), control is performed to end the rescue time reduction and transition to the normal state (low probability/low base state) (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS5617A to S5620A).

After that, as shown in Figure 284-21 (B), when the time saving deviation is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol (t2 timing), the time saving state due to the time saving deviation from the normal state (low probability / high base state ) is performed (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS2030A to S2033A).

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 284-22 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the production control process shown in FIG. 280. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first reads the variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 100IWS801). Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines the display result (stop) of the decorative pattern according to the variation pattern command read out in step 100IWS801 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command). symbol) is determined (step 100IWS802). That is, by executing the process of step 100IWS802 by the performance control CPU 120, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stopping of the decorative pattern) is determined according to the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determining means. A display result determining means for determining a symbol) is realized. In addition, when a pseudo series is specified by the variation pattern command, the performance control CPU 120 selects a chance pattern (for example, "223" or "445") as a temporary stop symbol of the pseudo series in step 100IWS802. , combinations of jackpot symbols that do not reach reach and symbols that are off by one symbol) are also determined. Note that the performance control CPU 120 stores data indicating the stop symbols of the determined decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display result storage area. In addition, in step 100IWS802, the production control CPU 120 may determine whether or not it is a jackpot based on the received variation pattern command, and may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based only on the variation pattern command. .

In step 100IWS802, for example, if the received display result designation command indicates 6R jackpot A, the production control CPU 120 selects a decorative symbol in which three symbols are the same even-numbered symbol as a stop symbol. Determine the combination (usually jackpot symbols). Further, for example, when the received display result designation command indicates 6R jackpot B to D, the performance control CPU 120 selects a combination of decorative symbols (probable variable jackpot symbol) in which three symbols are the same odd-numbered symbol as the stop symbol. ) to determine. Further, when the received display result designation command indicates "small win", the performance control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative symbols "135" (small win symbol) as the stop symbol.

Then, in the case of "missing", a combination of decorative symbols other than the above is determined. However, if a reach effect is involved, a combination of decorative symbols in which the two left and right symbols are aligned is determined. Moreover, even if it is a loss, if it is a "time-saving loss", a combination of decorative symbols of the loss symbol including a special symbol (for example, a star symbol) is determined. When providing a plurality of time saving loss types, it may be configured to determine a combination of decorative symbols of the losing symbols including different special symbols (for example, heart-shaped designs and diamond patterns) according to the time saving loss types.

However, in this example, even if a time saving error occurs in a high base state, it is effectively invalidated, so if the received display result specification command indicates a "time saving error" while in a high base state. However, it is not a combination of decorative patterns that include a special pattern (for example, a star pattern), but a combination of decorative patterns for a "miss" pattern. In addition, in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, even if a time saving error occurs in a high base state, a special symbol corresponding to the time saving error is displayed.

For example, the production control CPU 120 extracts a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other, and determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbols are determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to numerical values that match the extracted random numbers.

Regarding the decorative patterns, a stop pattern that reminds you of a jackpot (a combination of patterns whose left, middle, and right sides are all the same pattern) is called a jackpot pattern. Also, among the jackpot symbols, a stop symbol (a combination of symbols whose left, middle, and right sides are all the same odd-numbered symbols) that is reminiscent of a probability-variable jackpot is called a probability-variable jackpot symbol. Also, among the jackpot symbols, a stop symbol (a combination of symbols whose left, middle, and right sides are all the same even-numbered symbols) that is reminiscent of a regular jackpot (non-probable variable jackpot) is called a non-probable variable jackpot symbol. Also, a stop symbol that reminds you of a miss is called a miss symbol.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 performs execution settings for a preview performance to be executed during the variable display (step 108IWS802A). As a preview effect, for example, a timer effect can be executed in which a countdown is started after the start of fluctuation, and when the count reaches "0", an effect image indicating the degree of jackpot expectation is displayed, and in step 108IWS802A, the timer effect You may also configure the execution settings.

In this example, the preview effect can be executed both when the display result is a jackpot and when it is a loss. It is configured to have a high execution rate. Therefore, by executing the preview performance, it is suggested that there is a high degree of expectation of a jackpot.

In such a configuration, the predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less) The system is configured such that when the display result is a failure, the rate at which the preview performance is executed is lower than during the period in which the remaining number of times until the time is shortened exceeds 10. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when a jackpot is not achieved even though the preview performance is executed during a predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less). Can be done. In addition, regarding the look-ahead notice performance, the predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less) It may be configured such that the rate at which the pre-read preview performance is performed is lower when the display result is a failure than during a period in which the remaining number of times until the time is shortened exceeds 10.

In addition, it is configured to be able to execute an effect (for example, a countdown effect) that suggests that the relief time will be shortened during a predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, a period in which the number of times remaining until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less). In this case, by restricting the execution of the timer effect as a preview effect at this time, it is possible to avoid displaying a plurality of numerical values indicating the counter, and it is possible to prevent them from interfering with each other.

In addition, in this example, the preview effect can be executed using a red effect mode (for example, a red effect image is displayed) and a blue effect mode (for example, a blue effect image is displayed), The system is configured such that the ratio of execution of the preview performance based on the red performance mode is higher in the case of a jackpot than in the case of a loss. Therefore, by executing the preview presentation in the red presentation mode, it is suggested that the expectation level of a jackpot is high.

In such a configuration, the predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less) The system is configured such that when the display result is a failure, the rate at which the preview performance is executed is lowered by the red performance mode than during the period in which the remaining number of times until the time is shortened exceeds 10. With this configuration, the interest when the preview performance is executed in the red performance mode during the predetermined period before the rescue time is shortened (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened is 10 or less) but does not result in a jackpot. can suppress the decline in In addition, regarding the look-ahead notice performance, the predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less) It may be configured such that when the display result is a failure, the proportion of execution of the pre-read preview performance in a form with a high degree of expectation is lower than in the period in which the remaining number of times until the time is shortened exceeds 10.

In addition, if multiple types of preview performances (and advance preview performances) with different jackpot expectations are configured to be executable, only the type of preview performance with a high jackpot expectation level (and advance preview performances) will be shortened in relief time. Execution may be restricted during a predetermined period (in this example, a period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less). For example, when the jackpot expectation level is classified into five levels, execution may be limited to only the types of preview performances (and pre-read preview performances) whose jackpot expectation level is the fourth level or higher. In addition, for example, if a notice effect (and a pre-read notice effect) indicating that the time reduction will be delayed is configured to be executable, the predetermined period before the relief time reduction (in this example, the remaining time until the relief time reduction is During a period in which the number of times is 10 or less), the execution of a preview performance (and a pre-read preview performance) indicating that the time will be shortened may be restricted.

Also, for example, even if the remaining number of times until relief time reduction is 10 or less, if a fluctuating display that results in a jackpot or time reduction is executed, the execution of the preview performance (and advance notice performance) is not restricted. Good too.

In addition, in a time-saving state due to shortened relief time, the execution of the pre-reading notice performance or the notice performance may be restricted (for example, the execution rate may be lowered (or not executed). In this case, the notice performance in case of failure It may be configured so that the execution rate of (or not executed) is reduced (or not executed), or the execution rate of preview performances of types with high expectations may be reduced (or not executed). is a larger value than the remaining number of times until relief time reduction, in other words, it is a suspended memory that was stored before reaching the relief time reduction fluctuation, and it is stored after being controlled to the time reduction state via relief time reduction. It may be configured to restrict (prohibit) the execution of a look-ahead notice performance that targets the pending memory corresponding to the change in the amount of time that will occur.This restricts the execution of a look-ahead notice performance that spans before and after the rescue time reduction control. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of performance problems.In addition, even if the number of pending memories is larger than the number of times remaining until relief time is shortened, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of performance problems. When the vehicle is in a time saving state or a time saving state via a time saving failure), it may be possible to execute a look-ahead notice performance that targets a pending memory corresponding to a change performed after being controlled to a time saving state via a relief time saver.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 0 (step 108 IWS805). In addition, whether or not the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 0 can be determined by, for example, checking whether the value of the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 1 designation command is 0. Can be judged.

If the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time is shortened is 0, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the display result is a jackpot (step 108IWS806A). If the display result is not a jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table including a time-saving entry performance that informs that the time-saving state is controlled by the rescue time-saving (step 100IWS806B). With such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player at an appropriate timing that the game will be controlled to a time-shortening state as a relief time-shortening by means of a time-shortening effect, and it is possible to improve interest when the relief time is shortened.

On the other hand, if the display result is a jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table that includes a time-saving pretense effect that notifies that a jackpot will be achieved after executing the same type of performance as the time-saving effect ( Step 100IWS806C). Then, the process moves to step 108IWS812. With such a configuration, after the player recognizes that the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened is 0, the player is notified that the jackpot has been won, so it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise. It can improve your interest.

In addition, in this example, if the display result becomes a jackpot when the number of fluctuations in the relief time saving is reached, a time-saving rush effect is executed using a dedicated fluctuation pattern (second fluctuation pattern #M). , Not limited to such a mode, for example, a full rotation performance (that is, a jackpot is confirmed) that is not executed except when the number of fluctuations in saving time reduction is reached, in which the three decorative symbols are aligned and fluctuates, may be executed. You can also do this. By configuring the game in this way, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and specialness, and it is possible to increase interest.

Also, for example, if the display result is a jackpot when the number of fluctuations in the relief time reduction is reached, the same fluctuation pattern for the jackpot as usual may be used, or a reach effect with a short fluctuation time may be specified. It may be configured to use a variation pattern.

In addition, in this example, if the display result is a failure when the number of fluctuations in relief time saving is reached, a dedicated fluctuation pattern for relief time saving fluctuation is used; It may be possible to use a variation pattern for losing the same as usual, or it may be configured to use a variation pattern that specifies a reach effect with a short variation time. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the fluctuation pattern common between when and before reaching the number of fluctuations for saving time reduction, and it is possible to reduce the data capacity. In this case, when the next variable display starts, the image display device 5 switches to the background image according to the time saving state (see steps 061IWS56A and S56B), so the change in the background image causes the relief It is possible to notify that the time saving state is controlled by the time saving.

If the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is not 0, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the fluctuation pattern (step 108IWS811). Then, the process moves to step 108IWS812. In addition, if the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time becomes short is 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, or 700 times, the production control CPU 120 changes the number of times until the relief time becomes short. A process table may be selected that includes an inciting effect (for example, an effect that suggests the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened) according to the remaining number of fluctuations. In addition, if the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less, the performance control CPU 120 performs a countdown performance (for example, the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened) according to the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened. Select a process table that includes a countdown of the number of changes remaining until the rescue time is reached) or an effect effect (for example, an effect image that changes depending on the number of changes remaining until the rescue time is shortened). You can also do this.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 108IWS812).

The process table is a table in which process data referred to by the production control CPU 120 when controlling the production device is set. That is, the performance control CPU 120 controls performance devices (performance components) such as the image display device 5 according to process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation mode that constitutes the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative pattern. Specifically, data related to changing the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. Further, the process timer setting value has a variation time set in the manner of variation. The performance control CPU 120 refers to the process table and performs control to display the decorative pattern in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer setting value. Further, the process table is stored in the ROM in the effect control board 12. Further, process tables are prepared according to each variation pattern.

In addition, the process table used when executing performance control for a fluctuation pattern that involves a reach performance has a function that stops displaying the left symbol when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, and stops displaying the right symbol when a further predetermined time has elapsed. Process data indicating display is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, images for displaying the symbols are synthesized and generated according to the determined stopping symbols and the temporary stopping symbols in pseudo-runs and sliding effects. It's okay.

In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the performance devices (the image display device 5 as production components, the image display device 5 as production components, Control of various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R (as performance parts) is executed (step 108IWS813). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. Further, in order to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW, the performance control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern command. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to .

Next, the performance control CPU 120 sets the variable time timer to a value corresponding to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step 108 IWS814).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 sets the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display performance process (step S172) (step 108IWS815).

(Example of production)
Next, a specific example of the performance mode until the transition to time saving state C, which is a relief time saving, will be explained. FIGS. 284-23 are explanatory diagrams for explaining a specific example of the performance mode up to the transition to the time saving state in the first embodiment. In addition, in FIG. 284-23, the effect screen changes in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

In the example shown in FIG. 284-23, as shown in FIG. 284-23(A), after the variable display immediately before the variable display that shortens the relief time is stopped, when the variable display that shortens the relief time is started, As shown in FIG. 284-23(B), a time-saving effect (blackout effect) that makes it difficult to see the effect displayed immediately before on the image display device 5 (for example, decorative pattern 100IW100, etc.) is started. . At this time, a right-handed hitting instruction display 100IW108 is displayed on the image display device 5 to instruct the player to hit right-handed.

Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 284-23(C), an image display (for example, 284-23(C)) and the output of effect sounds are executed.

In the configuration shown in FIG. 284-23, since the time-saving entry effect is executed when the rescue time-saving is started, the notification that the time-saving state will be controlled based on the establishment of the rescue time-saving is executed at an appropriate timing. You can improve your interest.

In addition, in the configuration shown in FIG. 284-23, the time-saving entry effect is executed when the variable display based on the variation pattern (for example, the first variation pattern #M) dedicated to the establishment of the rescue time-saving is executed. It is possible to clearly inform the player by the time-saving entry performance that the time-saving state will be controlled based on the establishment of the time-saving.

In addition, in the configuration shown in FIG. 284-23, when the time-saving entry effect is executed (that is, when the control of the time-saving state due to relief time-saving is started), the right-hitting instruction display 100IW108 is displayed, so that Right-handed hit notification can be executed.

Note that when the time saving state including the relief time saving ends and the state is shifted to the normal state, a left hitting instruction display instructing left hitting may be displayed on the image display device 5.

In addition, in the time-saving production, notifications that are generally made during the ending period of the first win, such as a warning notification for forgetting to take out a prepaid card and a warning notification to prevent addiction, may be made, or the game machine manufacturer's logo may be displayed. In this case, the notification and logo display in the time-saving rush performance may be performed in the same manner as the notification and logo display in the ending period of the first win, or may be performed in a simplified manner. Further, these notifications and logo displays may not be performed during the time-saving rush effect, but may be performed during the ending period of the first jackpot after transitioning to the time-saving state due to the relief time reduction.

In addition, when the display result becomes a jackpot when the number of fluctuations in relief time saving is reached, when executing the time saving effect, as shown in Figure 284-23 (B), the same as the time saving effect may be used. In this mode, a blackout effect that makes it difficult to see the effect display (for example, decorative pattern 100IW100, etc.) that was displayed immediately before on the image display device 5 is started, and at the same time, a right-handed instruction display 100IW108 that instructs the player to play right is displayed. Ru. Then, instead of the performance shown in FIG. 284-23(C), a performance is performed in which the blackout state is eliminated and the jackpot symbols (for example, a combination of "777" symbols) are stopped and displayed. After that, the game shifts to a jackpot game. With this configuration, after the player once recognizes that the relief time reduction has been achieved, he is informed that he has won the jackpot, so it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and increase his interest.

In addition, the configuration of this feature section 116IW can also be used to execute a bonus game in which a game ball wins a prize (V prize) in a specific area (V prize winning area) of the prize during a small prize game. When applied to a gaming machine that is configured to enable this, when the display result of the variable display that shortens the rescue time is a small hit, after the time-saving pretense effect is executed, a notification that the small hit will be made is provided. Good too.

(Modification 1-3)
Next, the configuration of Modified Example 1-3 will be explained. In this example, in the variable display when the relief time saving is established, a time saving rush effect is created to notify that the control of the time saving state (relief time saving) is started. Since the control of the time saving state (relief time saving) is also started at the same time, the time saving entry performance may be executed in the variable display immediately before the variable display in which the rescue time saving is established.

In this case, for example, in the first special symbol normal processing and the second special symbol normal processing, when the value of the relief time reduction number counter after updating is "1", immediately before the fluctuation display where the relief time reduction is established, If the immediately-relief fluctuation flag is set indicating that it is a fluctuation display, and the immediately-relief fluctuation flag is set in the first fluctuation pattern setting process and the second fluctuation pattern setting process, immediately before the fluctuation display where the relief time reduction is established. A dedicated fluctuation pattern (for example, a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the first fluctuation pattern #M and the first fluctuation pattern #N) is determined to be used only for the fluctuation display of. Then, in the variable display start setting process, when the remaining number of times of relief time saving is 1, a process table including a time saving entry effect is selected. Through such processing, it is possible to execute the time-saving entry effect in the variable display immediately before the variable display in which the rescue time-saving is established.

FIG. 284-24 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the performance mode up to the transition to the time saving state in Modification 1-3 of the first embodiment. Note that in FIG. 284-24, the effect screen changes in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

In modification 1-3 shown in FIG. 284-24, the time-saving entry effect is executed in the variable display immediately before the variable display in which the rescue time-saving is established. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 284-24(A), after the variable display two times before the variable display that shortens the relief time is stopped, the variable display immediately before the variable display that shortens the relief time is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 284-24(B), a time-saving effect (blackout effect) that makes it difficult to see the effect display (for example, decorative pattern 100IW100, etc.) that was displayed immediately before on the image display device 5 is generated. will be started. However, at this point, the time saving state has not been entered, so the right-handed hitting instruction display 100IW108 for instructing right-handed hitting is not displayed.

Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 284-24(C), an image display (for example, 284-24(C)) and the output of effect sounds are executed. At this point, the time saving state has not yet been entered, so the right-handed hitting instruction display 100IW108 for instructing right-handed hitting is not displayed.

After that, when the variable display that shortens the relief time is started, the control of the time saving state is started, so as shown in FIG. 284-24(D), a right-handed hitting instruction display 100IW108 instructing right-handed hitting is displayed.

In the configuration of Modified Example 1-3 shown in FIG. 284-24, the time-saving entry effect is executed immediately before the relief time-saving starts, so the player must prepare for the right-handed operation in preparation for the start of the relief time-saving. Can be done. In this respect as well, it is possible to notify at an appropriate timing that the time saving state will be controlled based on the fact that the relief time saving has been established, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, when executing a time-saving entry effect in a variable display immediately before a variable display in which relief time reduction is realized, in the variable display in which relief time reduction is realized, the variation pattern used in other variable displays (i.e., exclusive for relief time reduction A variation pattern (not a variation pattern) is used to perform a variation display. With such a configuration, the variation pattern can be made common between when the relief time reduction is established and before it is established, and the data capacity can be reduced. In addition, for the variable display that executes the time-saving effect (the variable display immediately before the variable display in which the relief time reduction is realized), a variation pattern that is also used in other variable displays (i.e., a variation pattern that is not exclusive to when the relief time reduction is established) is used. Alternatively, the variable display may be performed.

In addition, in the configuration of modification 1-3 shown in FIG. 284-24, the time-saving entry effect is executed immediately before the rescue time-saving starts, but the right hit instruction display 100IW108 starts a variable display in which the rescue time-saving is established. Since it is displayed when the time saving state is started (that is, when the control of the time saving state by the relief time saving is started), it is possible to appropriately execute the right hit notification.

In addition, in the variable display immediately before the variable display in which the rescue time saving is realized, when the display result is a jackpot, a time saving rush effect may be executed. With this configuration, after the player once recognizes that the relief time reduction has been achieved, he is informed that he has won the jackpot, so it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and increase his interest.

In addition, when a variable display in which a relief time reduction is established is executed, or when a variable display immediately before a variable display in which a relief time reduction is established, a structure that enables the execution of a time reduction effect and a time reduction feigned effect is , this feature unit 116IW is not limited to the gaming machine having the configuration shown in the first embodiment, but also includes, for example, a high probability/low base state where small wins occur frequently (small win RUSH) as shown in the second embodiment. It is also applicable to gaming machines with other configurations, such as gaming machines equipped with.

(Second embodiment)
Next, a second embodiment of the feature section 116IW will be described. Note that in this embodiment, detailed explanations of parts having the same configuration and processing as those of the first embodiment will be omitted, and mainly parts that are different from the first embodiment will be described.

The gaming states in the second embodiment of the feature section 116IW include a normal state (low probability/non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small win time) where small wins are more likely to occur than in the normal state. Furthermore, there are two types of KT states, a first KT state and a second KT state, and in the second embodiment of this feature section 116IW, the gaming state includes a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability/non-KT state). KT state: normal state), low probability and first KT state (low probability/first KT state), and high probability and first KT state (high probability/first KT state) There are cases where the state is controlled to a high probability and second KT state (high probability/second KT state).

Among the KT states, in the first KT state, a small hit is likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device 17 is likely to be in the open state, but the upstream variable winning ball device 6B is open for an extremely long time, so even if a small hit occurs, There are very few cases in which a game ball wins in the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side (for example, about 1 ball for every 100 fluctuations). Specifically, in the first KT state, it is controlled to be in a state where small hits are likely to occur, and it is also controlled to be in a high base state, so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be long. Furthermore, in the second KT state among the KT states, the opening time of the upstream variable winning ball device 6B is short, and when a small hit occurs, game balls are likely to win in the downstream special variable winning ball device 17. Specifically, in the second KT state, it is controlled to be in a state where small hits are likely to occur, and it is also controlled to be in a low base state, so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be short.

In addition, in the second embodiment, in the variable display of the first special symbol, when the display result is other than a jackpot and a time-saving loss, it becomes a small hit (or the proportion of small wins is higher than that of a loss (no time-saving)). ). In other words, in the variable display of the first special symbol, the display result will be a jackpot, a small hit, or a time-saving loss, and the display result will not be a loss (no time-saving) (or the display result will be a small hit rather than a loss (no time-saving). (with a high percentage of However, in the non-KT state (normal state), when the variable display of the first special symbol becomes a small hit, the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 is short, and the special variable winning ball device 17 is forced to win the game ball. It is extremely difficult to win a prize (or it is virtually impossible to win a prize).

(Transition of gaming state in the second embodiment)
The transition of the gaming state in the second embodiment of this feature section 116IW will be explained. FIG. 285-1 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the gaming state changes in the second embodiment of the feature section 116IW. First, in this feature section 116IW, in the low probability/low base state (normal state (non-KT state)), the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the normal variable time, whereas the second special symbol Since the variable display is executed in a long variation, the player performs a shooting operation (left-handed hit) of the game ball aiming at the left side of the game area. Therefore, in the normal state, starting winnings to the first starting winning hole mainly occur, and a variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. Furthermore, since the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, when a jackpot occurs in a low probability/low base state, a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variable jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot mainly occurs.

As shown in FIG. 285-1, when a 10R probability variable jackpot occurs in the low probability/low base state, if the game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, after the jackpot game ends, the high probability/ The game moves to a low base state (high probability/second KT state), and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs. However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, if a 6R probability variable jackpot occurs in the low probability/low base state, if the game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability/high base state (high probability/ The high probability/high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs. However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. Also, if a 6R normal jackpot occurs in the low probability/low base state, after the end of that jackpot game, it will shift to the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state) and the next jackpot will occur. The low probability/high base state is maintained until the fluctuation display is completed 50 times.

Also, in the second embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, the time saving state (in this example, the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) ) is controlled by Specifically, as shown in Figure 285-1, even if it is a loss in the low probability/low base state (normal state), if the short time losing symbol is derived and displayed, the low probability/low base state (normal state) It is controlled to a high base state (low probability/first KT state) (for example, corresponds to the part that executes the processing of steps 061IWS2032A and S2032B in the first embodiment). Furthermore, even if the result is a loss, if the relief time is shortened (after the RAM clearing process or jackpot game, the number of fluctuations reaches 800 without the next jackpot occurring), It is controlled to a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) (for example, corresponds to the part that executes the processing of steps 061IWS5607A and S5607B in the first embodiment).

In addition, in the second embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel, and the first special symbol The relief time reduction counter is configured to be able to be updated at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol starts and the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol starts (for example, in steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B in the first embodiment). (corresponds to the part that executes processing).

In the second embodiment of this feature section 116IW, the first special The fluctuating display of the symbols is performed in long fluctuations, while the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is performed in the normal fluctuation time, so the player operates the game ball to aim at the right side of the gaming area. (hitting right-handed). Therefore, in the KT state, starting winnings to the second starting winning hole mainly occur, and a variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. Moreover, since the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed, when a jackpot occurs in the KT state, a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variable jackpot, or a 2R probability variable jackpot mainly occurs.

As shown in Figure 285-1, when a 10R probability variable jackpot or 2R probability variable jackpot occurs in the high probability/high base state (high probability/1st KT state), the game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game. Then, after the jackpot game ends, the game shifts to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state), and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs. However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, if a 6R probability variable jackpot occurs in the high probability/high base state (high probability/1st KT state), if the game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the probability is high after the jackpot game ends. /Transition to a high base state (high probability/first KT state), and the high probability/high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs. However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, in the second embodiment of this feature section 116IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the total probability of a 6R variable jackpot is 50%, so the high probability/high probability is When it comes to the base state, the high probability/high base state will loop at a rate of 50%.

As shown in Figure 285-1, when a 10R probability variable jackpot or 2R probability variable jackpot occurs in the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state), the game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game. Then, after the jackpot game ends, the game shifts to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state), and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs. However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, if a 6R probability variable jackpot occurs in the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state), if the game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the probability is high after the jackpot game ends. /Transition to a high base state (high probability/first KT state), and the high probability/high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs. However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, after the 6R normal jackpot occurs and the state becomes low probability/high base state, if the next jackpot does not occur and the fluctuating display ends 50 times, as shown in Figure 285-1, Transition to low probability/low base state (normal state (non-KT state)).

Further, as shown in FIG. 285-1, in the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, when the relief time is shortened in the low probability/high base state (after RAM clear processing, After a jackpot game, if the number of fluctuations reaches 800 without the next jackpot occurring), the control is re-controlled to a low probability/high base state (first KT state) with a time saving number of 800 times (for example, This corresponds to the part that executes the processing of steps 061IWS5607A to S5608A and S5607B to S5608B in the first embodiment). In addition, the number of time saving times in the second embodiment is the remaining number of times of the total number of variable displays of the first special symbol and variable display of the second special symbol that can be executed in the low probability/high base state (first KT state). corresponds to

Further, as shown in FIG. 285-1, in the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the second special symbol is displayed in a low probability/high base state. When the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times in total, the low probability/high base state is ended and the low probability/low base state (normal state) is entered.

For example, when controlled to a low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state) via time saving error, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed a total of 100 times. Then, the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) is terminated and the transition is made to the low probability/low base state (normal state) (for example, steps 061IWS2030A to S2033A in the first embodiment, This corresponds to the part that executes the processes of S5617A to S5620A, S2030B to S2033B, and S5617B to S5620B).

Also, when controlled to a low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state) via relief time reduction, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed a total of 800 times. Then, the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) is terminated and the transition is made to the low probability/low base state (normal state) (for example, steps 061IWS5607A to S5608A in the first embodiment, This corresponds to the part that executes the processes of S5617A to S5620A, S5607B to S5608B, and S5617B to S5620B).

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 285-1, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs, the configuration is such that control is performed to a low probability/high base state of 50 time reductions, but in the first embodiment Similarly, the advantage of the time-saving state controlled after the jackpot game may be configured to differ depending on the gaming state when the jackpot occurs. For example, if a 6R normal jackpot occurs during the normal state (low base state), it will be controlled to a low probability/high base state with 100 times of time saving, and if a 6R normal jackpot occurs during the high base state, , it may be controlled to a low probability/high base state of 200 time saving times. In this case, as in the first embodiment, if the variable display in which the relief time saving is realized is a jackpot, assuming that the jackpot occurs in the high base state, the low probability that the number of time savings will be 200 after the end of the jackpot game is /High base state (for example, the execution of the jackpot determination module in steps 061IWS59A and S59B in the first embodiment may be changed to the update of the relief time reduction counter in steps 061IWS5602A to S5608A and S5602B to S5608B). processing and setting the high base flag). With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of relief for the player.

As shown in Figure 285-1, when a 10R probability variable jackpot or 2R probability variable jackpot occurs in the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state), the game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game. Then, after the jackpot game ends, the game shifts to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state), and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs. However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, in the second embodiment of this feature section 116IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, if the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the 10R probability variable jackpot or the 2R Since the probability of a variable jackpot is 50%, once the high probability/low base state is reached, the high probability/low base state will loop at a rate of 50%. In addition, if a 6R probability variable jackpot occurs in the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state), if the game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the probability is high after the jackpot game ends. /Transition to a high base state (high probability/first KT state), and the high probability/high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs. However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled.

In addition, in FIG. 285-1, the case where the first special symbol fluctuates is displayed in the low probability/low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) is explained, but the second special symbol fluctuates at a low rate. It is also possible that the display will be executed. In this case, if a 10R variable jackpot or a 2R variable jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, it will shift to the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). become. Further, when a 6R probability variable jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the game will shift to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state).

In addition, in FIG. 285-1, a case was explained in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability/high base state (high probability/1st KT state), but the variable display of the first special symbol is executed at a low rate. It is possible that this could be carried out. In this case, when a 10R variable jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the game will shift to the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). Further, when a 6R probability variable jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the game will shift to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). In addition, if a 6R normal jackpot occurs, it will transition to the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state), and the low probability/high probability will change until the next jackpot occurs or the fluctuating display ends 50 times. The base state will be maintained.

In addition, in FIG. 285-1, a case was explained in which the second special symbol is displayed fluctuating in the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), but the first special symbol is fluctuatingly displayed at a low rate. It is possible that this could be carried out. In this case, when a 10R variable jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the game will shift to the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). Further, when a 6R probability variable jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the game will shift to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). In addition, if a 6R normal jackpot occurs, it will transition to the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state), and the low probability/high probability will change until the next jackpot occurs or the fluctuating display ends 50 times. The base state will be maintained.

In addition, in FIG. 285-1, a case was explained in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state), but the variable display of the first special symbol is executed at a low rate. It is possible that this could be carried out. In this case, when a 10R variable jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the game will shift to the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). Further, when a 6R probability variable jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the game will shift to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). In addition, if a 6R normal jackpot occurs, it will transition to the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state), and the low probability/high probability will change until the next jackpot occurs or the fluctuating display ends 50 times. The base state will be maintained.

As shown in FIG. 285-1, in the second embodiment of the feature section 116IW, in the low probability/low base state (normal state), the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is executed in the normal fluctuation time. On the other hand, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in a long variation. In other words, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in a shorter variable time than the variable display of the second special symbol (or is executed at a higher rate). Therefore, in the second embodiment, in the low probability/low base state (normal state), there is a high probability that the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is a fluctuation display with a shorter fluctuation time than the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. This is the first shortened state. In addition, in the second embodiment, in the low probability/low base state (normal state) that becomes the first shortened state, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is a fluctuation display with a shorter fluctuation time than the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. The display ratio may be configured to be 100%, for example, or may be configured to be lower than 100% but higher than at least the second shortened state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 285-1, in the second embodiment of the feature section 116IW, the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) state) and high probability/low base state (2nd KT state), the variable display of the 1st special symbol is executed with long variation, whereas the variable display of the 2nd special symbol is executed with normal variation time. be done. In other words, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in a shorter variable time than the variable display of the first special symbol (or is executed at a higher rate). Therefore, in the second embodiment, the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), and the high probability/low base state (second KT state) State) is a second shortened state in which the variable display of the second special symbol has a high rate of variation display with a shorter variation time than the variable display of the first special symbol. Note that in the second embodiment, a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), and a high probability/ In the low base state (second KT state), the rate at which the variable display of the second special symbol is a variable display with a shorter variation time than the variable display of the first special symbol is configured to be, for example, 100%. Alternatively, it may be configured to be lower than 100% but higher than at least the first shortened state.

In the second embodiment, when the relief time shortening is established in the normal state, the relief time shortening control includes control to increase the probability of hitting a normal symbol, control to shorten the variation time of the normal symbol, and variable winning ball device 6B (second In addition to the control related to normal symbols, which increases the opening time of the starting winning opening (starting winning opening), the control also shortens the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (in other words, the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is longer than the fluctuating display of the first special symbol). Control regarding the special symbol is performed, in which the second shortening state is controlled to have a high rate of variable display with a short variable time. That is, the state shifts to a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) (for example, corresponds to the part that executes the processing of steps 061IWS5607A and S5607B in the first embodiment).

However, in the second embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, while the variable display of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is being performed, the display of the other special symbol is Even if relief time reduction is achieved by executing the variable display, the variable display of the one special symbol is not forcibly stopped. In such a configuration, for example, in the normal state, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in a long variation, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the relief time reduction is established, and the relief time reduction ( (high base state), the variable display of the second special symbol in progress continues without being forcibly stopped, and the variable display of the second special symbol in progress (for example, the variable time is 10 minutes) It is conceivable that the variable display of the second special symbol whose variation time has been shortened (that is, whose variation efficiency has been improved) cannot be executed until the end of this period, and the user cannot benefit from the shortening of relief time. If such a situation occurs, even if the rescue time is controlled to be short, the progress of the game will be significantly delayed and the interest will be reduced.

Therefore, in the second embodiment, as described above, in the variable display of the first special symbol, when the display result is other than a jackpot or a time-saving loss, it becomes a small hit (or it is a small hit than a loss (no time-saving)). (with a high percentage of cases). In other words, in the variable display of the first special symbol, the display result will be a jackpot, a small hit, or a time-saving loss, and the display result will not be a loss (no time-saving) (or the display result will be a small hit rather than a loss (no time-saving)). (with a high percentage of In addition, in the second embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, while the variable display of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is being performed, the display of the other special symbol is When a small winning symbol is derived and displayed in the variable display, the system is configured such that a winning symbol can be forcibly derived and displayed in the variable display of the one special symbol (for example, step 061IWS1126A in the first embodiment, This corresponds to the part that executes the processing of S1129A, S1126B, and S1129B).

With the combination of these configurations, in the second embodiment, when the relief time reduction is established by executing the variable display of the first special symbol while the variable display (long variation) of the second special symbol is being executed, As a control to shorten relief time (high base state), in addition to the control related to normal symbols, control is performed to shorten the variation time of the second special symbol (that is, the variation display of the second special symbol is shorter than the variation display of the first special symbol). Control regarding special symbols is performed, which is a second shortened state (in this example, controlled to a low probability/high base state (first KT state)) that has a high rate of variable display with a short variable time. At this time, the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol in which the relief time saving is established is a small hit unless it is a jackpot or a time saving. Then, based on the small hit symbol being derived and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display (long variation) of the second special symbol being executed is forcibly stopped at the winning symbol. Therefore, without waiting for the expiration of the long fluctuation fluctuation time (for example, 10 minutes), it is possible to execute the fluctuation display of the second special symbol in which the fluctuation time is shortened (that is, the fluctuation efficiency is improved), You can benefit from shortened relief time. In addition, when the rescue time is controlled to be short, the game can proceed smoothly and the interest can be improved.

(1st special symbol normal processing in modification 2)
FIGS. 285-2 to 285-5 are flowcharts showing the first special symbol normal process in modification 2.

In the second modification, the processes of steps 061IWS50A to S56A are the same as those shown in the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 285-3, in the second modification, the process of step 061IWS5601A shown in the first embodiment is not executed, so the process of updating the relief time reduction counter is executed even in a variable probability state (high probability state). be done. In other words, not only when the variable state is non-probable (low probability state), but also when the variable state is variable (high probability state), when the fluctuation display is executed, the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is uniformly reduced. It is composed of Therefore, in the second modification, when the value of the relief time reduction number counter after subtraction becomes "0", the probability change flag may be set.

When the value of the relief time reduction number counter after subtraction becomes "0", if the variable probability flag is set (Y in step 061IWS56061A), that is, if the relief time reduction is established in the variable probability state, the process goes to step 061IWS5701A. Transition.

Further, in the second modification, the high base number counter is set to "100" after the probability variable jackpot, and each time the variable display is executed, the high base number counter is decremented by 1 through the processing of steps 061IWS5717A to S5719A. Here, when the value of the high base number counter after subtraction becomes "0", if the probability change flag is set, that is, even if the probability variation flag reaches 100 variations in the probability variation state after a jackpot game due to probability variation jackpot, the probability variation flag will be set. If the fall has not occurred, the process of resetting the high base flag (step 061IWS5620A) is not executed. In this case, the high probability state and the high base state are maintained until a probability-variable fall occurs.

On the other hand, if the value of the high base number counter after subtraction becomes "0" and the probability variation flag is not set, that is, in the probability variation state after a jackpot game due to probability variation jackpot, a probability variation fall occurs with less than 100 variations. If only the flag is reset (when the processes of steps 061IWS5705A and S5711A described later are executed), or if it is controlled to a low probability/high base state after a normal jackpot, the high base flag is reset (step 061IWS5620A). According to the process of Step 061IWS56191A, in modification 2, in a variable probability state after a jackpot game due to a variable probability jackpot, if a probability variable fall occurs with less than 100 fluctuations, the variable probability state (high probability state) ends immediately, but the time saving state (High base state) continues until reaching 100 fluctuations.

Note that in the second modification, the processes of steps 061IWS5607A to S5611A, S5614A to S5616A, S5617A to S5619A, and S5620A to S5621A are the same as those shown in the first embodiment. In modification 2, when step 061IWS5621A ends, the process moves to step 061IWS5702A.

In step 061IWS5701A, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a relief time reduction flag indicating that relief time reduction has been established in a variable probability state (step 061IWS5701A).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the probability change flag is set (step 061IWS5702A), and if it is not set, it moves to step 061IWS57A.

If the probability change flag is set (Y in step 061IWS5702A), the game control microcomputer 100 uses the random number for fall determination (the random number for determining the jackpot or the random number for determining the type of jackpot) stored in the random number buffer area. A different random number exclusively used for fall determination is read out, and a fall lottery process is performed based on the random number for fall determination (061IWS5703A). In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 reads out the random number for fall judgment extracted in the starting winning determination process (step S101) and stored in the first holding memory buffer or the second holding memory buffer in advance, and performs the probability change falling lottery judgment. I do. When the game control microcomputer 100 matches the fall determination value, it determines to end the variable probability state. In addition, in the second modification, in the process of step 061IWS5703A, it is determined to end the variable probability state with a probability of 1/800, for example.

If the variable probability does not fall (does not end the variable probability state) (N in 061IWS5704A), the process moves to step 061IWS57A. If it is determined to end the probability variation state (Y in step 061IWS5704A), the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether the variation is less than 100 after the jackpot game (step 061IWS5705A). For example, by providing a counter that can count the number of fluctuations in the probability change state after the jackpot game and checking the counter in step 061IWS5705A, it is possible to determine whether the number of fluctuations after the jackpot game is less than 100 fluctuations.

If the fluctuation is less than 100 after the jackpot game (Y in step 061IWS5705A), the game control microcomputer 100 resets the probability change flag (step 061IWS5711A) and sets the inciting reach A flag indicating that inciting reach A is to be executed. Set (step 061IWS5713A). Thereafter, the process moves to step 061IWS57A.

According to the process of step 061IWS5711A, in the modification 2, only the probability variation flag is reset if the probability variation state after the jackpot game due to the probability variation jackpot becomes a probability variation fall with less than 100 fluctuations. In addition, by the process of step 061IWS5713A, after suggesting whether the display result of the variable display being executed will be a jackpot or a probability variable fall and the probability variable state will end, a stirring reach A is executed to notify that it will be a probability variable fall. Ru.

If the fluctuation is not less than 100 after the jackpot game (N in step 061IWS5705A), the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether the relief time saving flag is set (step 061IWS5706A), and if it is not set, The probability variation flag and high base flag are reset, and the probability variation state and time saving state are ended (step 061IWS5712A). In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 sets an inciting reach A flag indicating that inciting reach A is to be executed (061IWS5713A).

In addition, in this example, the same inciting reach A is executed in the case where the probability change falls after less than 100 variations after the probability variation jackpot game, and in the case where the probability variation fall occurs after 100 variations. The present invention is not limited to this configuration, and for example, in the case of a probability variable fall after a probability variable jackpot game with less than 100 variations, it may be possible to notify that the time saving state will continue after notifying that the probability variable fall will occur. It is possible to prevent a player from being greatly disappointed due to a change in probability in a short period of time.

If the relief time saving flag is set (Y in step 061IWS5706A), the game control microcomputer 100 resets the relief time saving flag (step 061IWS5707A) and sets the high base number counter to "800" (step 061IWS5708A). . Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 100 resets the probability change flag (061IWS5709A). Thereafter, the inciting reach B flag indicating that inciting reach B is to be executed is set (061IWS5710A), and the process moves to step 061IWS57A.

If a relief time reduction is established after a probability change fall, the time reduction state (high base state) is controlled by relief time reduction from the time the relief time reduction is established, and if a relief time reduction is established before a probability change fall, a probability change fall occurs. If the configuration is such that the system is controlled to the normal state from the moment it occurs, the benefits of shortening the rescue time will vary greatly depending on the timing of establishment, and there is a risk that the rescue will be insufficient. Therefore, in the second modification, if the relief time reduction is established in the variable probability state through the processing of steps 061IWS5706A to S5708A, the system is configured such that when the probability variable fall occurs, the control is performed to the time reduction state by the relief time reduction. There is. Therefore, the count of 800 times of time saving due to relief time saving is started not when the relief time saving is established, but after the probability variable fall occurs and the time saving state is entered. With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately receive relief by shortening the relief time.

Further, by the process of step 061IWS5707A, the relief time saving flag is reset when the relief time saving flag is controlled to be in a time saving state by saving relief time when a probability variable fall occurs. With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately manage information indicating that relief time reduction has been achieved in a variable probability state.

Information indicating the state of the relief time saving flag is stored in the RAM 102, for example. Then, when the RAM clearing process is executed, the relief time saving flag and probability change flag are reset. That is, if the RAM clearing process is executed when the game is in a variable probability state where the relief time reduction is established, the gaming state becomes a normal state (low probability/low base state) in which the relief time reduction flag is not set. With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately manage information indicating that relief time reduction has been achieved in a variable probability state.

In addition, in the RAM clearing process, the probability variation flag is reset, but the relief time shortening flag is maintained, and if the probability variation flag is not set at the start of fluctuation, but the relief time saving flag is set, , control may be performed to shorten the rescue time (low probability/high base state). In other words, if the RAM clearing process is executed in a variable probability state where the relief time shortening is established, the gaming state becomes the normal state (low probability/low base state), but when the variable display starts, the relief time shortening occurs. It may be controlled.

In addition, by the process of step 061IWS5710A, after suggesting whether the display result of the variable display being executed will be a jackpot or a probability variable fall and the probability variable state will end, it will once notify that it will be a variable probability fall, and then shorten the rescue time. Inciting reach B is executed to notify that the time saving state (high base state) will be controlled.

As shown in FIG. 285-5, in Modification 2, when a jackpot is determined by executing the jackpot determination module, the relief time saving flag is reset if it is set (step 061IWS631A). Through the process of step 061IWS631A, it is possible to appropriately manage information indicating that relief time reduction has been achieved in a variable probability state. Further, it is possible to prevent excessive relief.

In addition, in the second modification, when it is determined that the jackpot has been won by executing the jackpot judgment module, and the probability variable flag is set (Y in step 061IWS632A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the boost reach C. Set the inciting reach C flag indicating execution (061IWS633A).

Through the processing of steps 061IWS632A to S633A, after suggesting whether the display result of the variable display being executed will be a jackpot or a probability change fall and the probability variation state will end, an inciting reach C is executed to notify that it will be a jackpot. .

Note that in the second modification, the processes of steps 061IWS57A to S63A and S64A to S89A are the same as those shown in the first embodiment.

In the first variation pattern setting process of the second modification, it is determined whether any of the inciting reach A to C is set, and if set, a variation pattern for executing the corresponding inciting reach is determined. do. Other processes are similar to those shown in the first embodiment.

In modification 2, in the second special symbol normal processing and the second variation pattern setting processing, the same processing as the first special symbol normal processing and the first variation pattern setting processing is executed. Therefore, in the second modification, it is possible to execute the probability variable fall lottery or the inciting reach in both cases of the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol.

In addition, in the first fluctuation pattern setting process and the second fluctuation pattern setting process, if any of the inciting reaches A to C is set and the number of fluctuations in the probability change state after the jackpot game exceeds 100 fluctuations, the inciting reach is set. You may also perform reach. In this case, as shown in Figure 285-6, until the number of fluctuations in the probability variation state after the jackpot game reaches 100 variations, a common performance (for example, a common (a background image is displayed). In other words, the player may not be able to recognize whether the probability change is a fall until the 100th change. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 285-6, a variable probability fall determination effect may be executed to notify whether a variable probability fall has occurred or whether the probability variation has continued at the 100th variation.

For example, if the probability of falling has already occurred, the probability variation determination performance of pattern A is executed to notify that the probability of falling has changed. In addition, if the probability variable fall has already occurred but the rescue time is controlled to be shortened, the probability change in the mode of pattern B is notified that the rescue time is controlled to be shortened after the probability variable fall has been reported. A fall judgment effect is executed.
Further, when a jackpot occurs at the 100th variation, a probability variation fall judgment performance in the form of pattern C is executed to notify that a jackpot has been achieved. Further, when the variable probability state continues, a variable probability fall judgment effect in the form of pattern D is executed to notify that the variable probability state continues.

With the configuration shown in FIG. 285-6, it is possible to give the player a sense of tension and improve his interest in the period after the 100th change in the probability change state.

In addition, in modification 2, when the relief time reduction is established in the variable probability state, after the notification that the probability variable fall has occurred, it is configured to notify that the relief time will be shortened. The present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, if the relief time reduction is established in a variable probability state, even if a probability variable fall occurs, it may not be notified at all. In other words, even if the player makes a certain fall, the player may not be notified of the fact or change the performance, and the certain case may occur without the player noticing.

(Example of production in modification 2)
Next, a specific example of the presentation mode of the inciting reach in Modification 2 will be explained. FIG. 285-7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of the performance mode of the inciting Lee in Modification 2. In addition, in Figure 285-7, the inciting reach A is in the order of (1) (2) (3-1), the inciting reach B is in the order of (1) (2) (3-2) (4), and the inciting reach C is The production screen changes in the order of (1), (2), and (3-3).

In the variable probability state, as shown in Figure 285-7 (1), when the left and right decorative symbols are aligned, the ally character 014IW002 and the enemy character 014IW003a are in a reach state, as shown in Figure 285-7 (2). Inciting Reach to conduct a battle will begin.

In the case of inciting reach A, as shown in FIG. 285-7 (3-1), a variable probability fall image 014IW004a is displayed to notify that the ally character 014IW002 has lost the battle and will have a variable probability fall. Thereafter, the state shifts to the normal state (low probability/low base state).

In the case of inciting reach B, as shown in FIG. 285-7 (3-2), a certain fall image 014IW004a is displayed, which informs that the ally character 014IW002 loses the battle and becomes a certain fall. As shown in FIG. 285-7 (4), the words "chance mode entered" informing that the rescue time is controlled to be shortened and the rescue time saving image 014IW004c are displayed. Note that the present invention is not limited to the mode shown in FIG. 285-7(4), and for example, the time-saving rush effect shown in FIG. 284-23 may be executed. Thereafter, it shifts to a time saving state (low probability/high base state).

In the case of inciting reach C, as shown in FIG. 285-7 (3-3), a jackpot image 014IW004b is displayed to notify that the ally character 014IW002 has won the battle and has won a jackpot. Thereafter, the game shifts to a jackpot game state.

In Modification 2, when relief time saving is established in a variable probability state, relief time saving establishment notification is executed to notify that effect. For example, as shown in FIGS. 285-8 (1) and (2), if the relief time reduction is established at the start of the fluctuation, the "chi" icon 014IW003d indicating that the control is set to the chance mode (relief time reduction) is displayed on the image display device 5. displayed in some parts. Note that the relief time saving establishment notification as shown in FIG. When the performance control board 12 side receives the performance control command, this can be realized by performing control to display the "chi" icon 014IW003d on a part of the image display device 5. With such a configuration, the player can recognize that the time-saving state is controlled after the end of the variable probability state, giving the player a sense of security and increasing his interest.

Note that the relief time reduction establishment notification as shown in Figure 285-8 is performed not only in the probability variable state but also when the relief time reduction is established in the normal state or when the time reduction state is controlled by the relief time reduction (or This may be done by drawing lots.

(Example of control of gaming state in modification 2)
Next, an example of controlling the gaming state in Modification 2 will be explained. FIG. 285-9 is a time chart for explaining an example of controlling the gaming state in Modification 2.

As shown in FIG. 285-9 (A), if the relief time reduction has not been established in the variable probability state before the probability variable fall occurs, the probability variation flag and the high base flag are flagged when the probability variable fall occurs (T1 timing). is reset, and the gaming state shifts from the high probability/high base state to the low probability/low base state.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 285-9 (B), if the relief time reduction is established in the variable probability state up to the probability variable fall, for example, the relief time reduction is established at timing t1 in Figure 285-9 (B). If so, the relief time saving flag is set at timing t1. Then, when the probability variable fall occurs (timing t2), the probability variation flag and the rescue time shortening flag are reset, and the high base flag is maintained. That is, the gaming state shifts from a high probability/high base state to a low probability/high base state.

The configuration shown in Modification 2 is applicable to both the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above. When applied to the configuration of the first embodiment, for example, a falling lottery is executed when the state is high probability/high base state (second probability variable state), and if the lottery is won, the state is normal (low probability/low base state). (state). Furthermore, when applied to the configuration of the second embodiment, for example, a fall lottery is executed when the player is in a high probability/high base state (first KT state), and if the lottery is won, the lottery is executed in the normal state (low probability/low probability state). base state).

Note that both the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above are configured so that the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel. The structure is not limited to such a configuration, and there may be a configuration in which the variable display of the special symbols is executed in the order of starting winnings, or a variable display of the first special symbol or a variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority. The configuration shown in Modification 2 can also be applied to the configuration.

In addition, although the feature section 116IW and each modification described above are applied to a gaming machine that controls a jackpot game based on a variable display result, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, a gaming machine configured to be able to execute a jackpot game that controls a jackpot game based on a game ball winning a prize (V winning area) in a specific area (V winning area) of the jackpot during a small winning game; You may apply the structure which controls to the time saving state via the relief time saving shown in the characteristic part 116IW shown above and each modification.

Further, in the characteristic portion 116IW and each modification shown above, the number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is fixed at 800 times, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, depending on whether the RAM clearing process is executed or when a jackpot occurs, the value set in the rescue time reduction counter may be switched to "800" or "900", or the value set in the rescue time reduction counter may be randomly set. It may be switched to "800" or "900".

In addition, in the characteristic part 116IW and each modification shown above, information that can specify the number of occurrences of shortened rescue time may be held. For example, the high base flag that is set when the second relief time is shortened again and the high base flag that is set when the first relief time is shortened may be different.

In addition, in the characteristic part 116IW and each modification shown above, different effects are executed in the time saving state via jackpot, the time saving state via time saving, and the time saving state via rescue (for example, different background displays). may be displayed, or a different variation pattern (variation time) may be determined.

In addition, in the feature section 116IW and each modification shown above, when controlling to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the gaming machine performs variable probability control until the next jackpot occurs (or until a variable probability fall occurs). Although the case where the invention is applied is shown, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, when controlling to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game state, the so-called ST sets the upper limit number of special pattern games in which variable probability control is performed (i.e., variable display of the first special symbol and variable display of the second special symbol). In this case, the configuration for controlling to the time saving state via the relief time saving shown in the characteristic part 116IW and each modification shown above may be applied.

Specifically, as a so-called ST machine, the jackpot probability is about 1/100, the probability variable state is controlled at a rate of 100% after the end of the jackpot game state, and the upper limit number of times of the special figure game in which probability variable control is performed (for example, , 8 times) is applied to a gaming machine configured to set the feature section 116IW shown above and the configuration for controlling the time saving state via the rescue time saving shown in each modification example. In addition, in the gaming machine of the ST machine, multiple types of jackpots (for example, 10R probability variable jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot, etc.) are provided as the display results of the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol. , it is assumed that when a jackpot occurs, a jackpot with the highest degree of advantage (for example, a 10R variable jackpot) occurs at a predetermined rate (for example, 5%). In addition, in the case of a jackpot with the highest degree of advantage, after the end of the jackpot game state, the probability change state (high probability/high base state) is controlled, and the maximum number of times in the special pattern game in which probability change control is performed is 8 times. shall be set. If a jackpot does not occur in 8 special pattern games in which variable probability control is performed, the upper limit number of special pattern games in which the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) is controlled and high base control is performed is set. It is assumed that 249 times is set. In other words, after the end of the jackpot gaming state, if the next jackpot does not occur, the control is controlled to a variable state (high probability/high base state) with a probability variation of 8 times, and then a time saving state (low probability) with a time saving number of 249 times. /high base state).

In the above-mentioned ST game machine, after the power is turned on to the game machine or after a jackpot occurs, the next jackpot does not occur even if the fluctuating display is finished a predetermined number of times (for example, 250 times) in a non-probability variable state (low probability state). If this does not occur, it is assumed that the relief time reduction has been established, and a configuration can be applied in which the time reduction state (low probability/high base state) is controlled.

When such a configuration is applied, when a jackpot with the highest degree of advantage occurs, after the jackpot game state ends, the game is first controlled to a probability variable state (high probability/high base state) with a probability variation number of 8 times. At this time, the value of the relief time reduction counter is reset (for example, set to "250") due to the occurrence of a jackpot. Since the state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), the value of the relief time reduction counter is not updated.

When the probability variable state (high probability/high base state) with the probability variation number of 8 times ends without a jackpot occurring, the time saving state (low probability/high base state) with the number of time saving times of 249 ends. At this time, since the state is non-probability variable (low probability state), each time the special symbol game (i.e., the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol) is executed, the value of the relief time shortening counter changes. updated (eg, subtracted by 1).

When the time saving state (low probability/high base state) ends without a jackpot occurring and the number of time saving times is 249, it is controlled to the normal state (low probability/low base state). However, at this time, the value of the relief time reduction counter is "1". Therefore, when the next special symbol game (fluctuation display of the first special symbol or fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is executed, the rescue time reduction is established and the time reduction state (low probability/high base state) is controlled. It turns out. Here, if there is a pending memory stored during the time saving state (low probability/high base state) of 249 time saving times, a special symbol game (fluctuating display of the first special symbol or second special symbol By executing the variable display), the relief time reduction is established and the time reduction state (low probability/high base state) is controlled. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware of the transition to the low base state (normal state), and it is possible to improve interest.

In addition, when the time saving state (low probability/high base state) ends and the control is once controlled to the low base state (normal state) before the relief time saving occurs, the background image corresponding to the high base state will continue to be displayed. You may also do so. In this case, for example, it is determined whether the number of pending memories stored at the end of the time saving state (low probability/high base state) is greater than the remaining number of fluctuations until the time saving state is realized. , the background image corresponding to the high base state may be continuously displayed when it is determined that the base state is large. Below, after the end of the time saving state of 249 time saving times, and before the relief time saving is established, the normal state (i.e., once controlled after the time saving state, and for a short period of time (for example, the suspended memory stored in the time saving state is The normal state in which the relief time is shortened during the period of time until the repair is completed) is also referred to as a special normal state to distinguish it from other normal states.

Also, for example, when a time saving state (low probability/high base state) controlled after a variable probability state (high probability/high base state) ends and the time saving state (low probability/high base state) is controlled due to relief time reduction. In this case, a mode transition effect may be executed to indicate that control of a time saving state (low probability/high base state) due to rescue time saving is to be started. In this case, after the end of the time saving state (low probability/high base state), the fluctuation display in the low base state (normal state) before the occurrence of the relief time saving (for example, the fluctuation display immediately after the end of the time saving state, the relief time saving The mode transition effect may be executed during the execution of the variable display immediately before the establishment of , or the mode transition effect may be executed during the execution of the variable display in which the relief time is shortened.

For example, in the above-mentioned ST game machine, if a jackpot with a low advantage among multiple types of jackpots (for example, a 5R probability variable jackpot) occurs, the next jackpot will be announced after the jackpot gaming state ends. If it does not occur, the state is controlled to a variable probability state (high probability/high base state) where the number of probability variables is 8, and then to the time saving state (low probability/high base state) where the number of time savings is 32 times. In other words, in the case of a jackpot with a low advantage, even if the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) after the variable probability state (high probability/high base state) ends, the short-term (for example, in the time-saving state) Relief time reduction shall not be realized during the period until the stored pending memory is consumed.

In this case, if the number of time reductions in the time reduction state (low probability/high base state) that is controlled after the variable probability state (high probability/high base state) is 32 (i.e., if relief time reduction is not established within a short period of time) In this case, after the final variation in the time saving state ends, a left-handed hitting notification (for example, a left-handed hitting instruction display instructing left-handed hitting on the image display device 5) corresponding to the normal state (low probability/low base state) is executed. If the number of times of time saving is 249 (that is, if relief time saving is achieved within a short period of time), similar left-handed hitting notification may not be executed after the final variation in the time saving state is completed. That is, when transitioning to the special normal state, left-handed hitting notification (for example, display of a left-handed hitting instruction display that instructs left-handed hitting on the image display device 5) may not be executed. With such a configuration, when the relief time reduction is established within a short period of time after the end of the time reduction state, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware that the game has once transitioned to the low base state (normal state), It can improve your interest.

In addition, if the number of time reductions in the time reduction state (low probability/high base state) that is controlled after the variable probability state (high probability/high base state) is 32 (i.e., if relief time reduction is not achieved within a short period of time) In the case where the number of time reductions is 249 (that is, when the relief time reduction is achieved within a short period of time), for example, a background specification command, a jackpot start specification command, a jackpot end specification command, etc. transmitted from the main board 11 side. By differentiating the types of production control commands, the production control board 12 can distinguish between these time-saving states and perform production control (for example, displaying a corresponding background image, character image, story image, etc.) that matches each time-saving state. , BGM output, etc.). The method of distinguishing the time saving state on the performance control board 12 side is not limited to this method, for example, the type of jackpot or the number of time saving after the jackpot game may be specified based on the received display result designation command.

In addition, when the number of times of time reduction is 249 (that is, when relief time reduction is established within a short period of time), after the final fluctuation in the time reduction state is completed, left hit notification (for example, image display device Even if the configuration is configured such that the display of the left-handed batting instruction display instructing left-handed batting in 5) is not executed, the main board 11 side displays the information that once the state has transitioned to the normal state (i.e., from the right-handed batting state to the left-handed batting instruction display). (for example, turning off the right-handed hitting indicator 26, stopping the output of the right-handed hitting test signal output as a test signal, and changing the firing position designation signal). During the transition to the normal state (that is, the special normal state), the external output of the signal corresponding to the high base state (for example, the jackpot 2 signal) may be temporarily stopped on the main board 11 side. , the external output may be continued. Also, while continuing to externally output the signal corresponding to the high base state (for example, the jackpot 2 signal), the output of the firing position designation signal output as the test signal is changed (or the output of the right-handed test signal is stopped). ).

Further, for example, the performance to be executed may be different between the time saving state (or the time saving state where the number of time saving times is 249 times) and the normal state (or the normal state other than the special normal state). For example, while it is possible to perform a performance (such as a countdown performance) that suggests that a relief time reduction will be realized or the number of times until the relief is realized in a normal state (or a normal state other than a special normal state), it is possible to reduce the remaining time. It may not be executed in a time saving state where the number of times is indicated (or in a time saving state where the number of time saving times is 249). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the performance from becoming complicated.

Note that the configuration that can obtain the above effects is not limited to the configuration of the number of time reductions in the time saving state that is controlled after the variable probability state used in the above explanation, or the number of fluctuations (non-probable variable state) in which the relief time reduction is established. . For example, if the number of variations in which the relief time saving is established (non-probable variable state) is larger than the number of time reductions in the time reduction state, and the number of time reductions in the time reduction state and the starting prize opening that is easy to enter in the time reduction state (for example, the second starting prize opening) It is sufficient that the number is smaller than (or the same as) the sum of the upper limit memory number (for example, 4) of the special drawing game based on the entry into the winning opening. With such a configuration, after the jackpot gaming state ends, even if the state changes to the low base state (normal state) through the variable probability state (high probability/high base state) and the time saving state (low probability/high base state). , Since the relief time reduction can be established without generating a new starting winning in the low base state (normal state), it is necessary for the player to be aware that the transition to the low base state (normal state) has occurred before the relief time reduction is established. It is possible to prevent this from happening and improve the interest.

For example, if the number of fluctuations (non-probable variable state) in which relief time reduction is established is smaller (or the same) as the number of time reductions in the time-saving state, the time reduction will be controlled after the variable probability state (high probability/high base state). Before the state (low probability/high base state) ends, the relief time reduction can be established (that is, the number of time reductions can be updated by the establishment of the relief time reduction).

In addition, in the above-mentioned ST machine gaming machine, when a jackpot occurs due to the variable display of the first special symbol and when a jackpot occurs due to the variable display of the second special symbol, the probability changes after the jackpot gaming state ends. The number of time reductions in the time reduction state (low probability/high base state) that is controlled through the state (high probability/high base state) is different (or the ratio of the number of advantageous time reductions among multiple types of time reduction times is different). It may be configured as follows. In this case, for example, when a jackpot occurs due to the variable display of the first special symbol, after the jackpot game state ends, the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) is controlled via a variable probability state (high probability/high base state). ) is 32 times (or there is a high probability that the number of time savings is 32 times or 32 out of 249 times) and a jackpot occurs due to the variable display of the second special symbol, after the jackpot game state ends. , the number of time reductions in the time reduction state (low probability/high base state) controlled through the variable probability state (high probability/high base state) is 249 times (or the number of time reductions is 32 times, 249 times out of 249 times). (the ratio is high).

In addition, the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state is different depending on when a jackpot occurs due to the variable display of the first special symbol and when a jackpot occurs due to the variable display of the second special symbol (or the number of rounds of multiple types is different). It may be configured such that the ratio of the number of rounds that is advantageous to the player is different. For example, when a jackpot occurs due to the variable display of the first special symbol, the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state is 5 rounds (or 5 rounds, or 5 rounds out of 10 rounds is high), and the second special symbol When a jackpot occurs due to the variable display, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may be 10 (or the number of rounds may be 5 or 10 out of 10). With such a configuration, the degree of advantage can be made different between the game state in which the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the game state in which the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, thereby improving interest. can be done.

In addition, in the above-mentioned ST machine, there is a time saving state (low probability/high base state) that is controlled after a variable probability state (high probability/high base state), and a time saving state (low probability/high base state) due to relief time reduction. ), different variation pattern tables may be used. For example, in a time-saving state (low probability/high base state) due to shortening of rescue time, the fluctuation time is shorter than in a time-saving state (low probability/high base state) that is controlled after a definite variable state (high probability/high base state). A variation pattern table may be used that has a high rate of determination as a variation pattern (and a low rate of determination as a variation pattern in which a reach (or a reach with a particularly high degree of expectation) is executed when a miss occurs). . With this configuration, when the relief time is shortened (that is, when no jackpot has occurred for a long time), the period until the next jackpot is controlled will be shortened, thereby reducing interest. It can be suppressed. In addition, for example, if the redemption time is shortened (i.e., no jackpot has occurred for a long period of time), the percentage of misses in reach (or reach with particularly high expectations) will be lower, which will prevent a decline in interest. be able to.

In addition, in the game machine of the characteristic part 116IW and each modified example shown above, for example, as a jackpot type, after the jackpot gaming state ends, a variable probability state (high probability/high base state) continues until the next jackpot occurs. The probability variable jackpot A is controlled by a time-saving state (low probability/high base state) with a number of time-savings of 100 times, and the non-probable variable jackpot A is controlled by a time-saving state (low probability/high base state) with a number of time-savings of 249 times. Probable variable jackpot B is provided, and if the next jackpot does not occur even after 250 variable displays are completed in a non-probable variable state after the power is turned on to the gaming machine or a jackpot occurs, the relief time shortening is established. It may be configured to do so. In other words, the time saving state is controlled until just before the rescue time saving is established (specifically, the number of time saving times in the time saving state and the entry into the starting prize opening (for example, the second starting winning opening) that is easier to enter in the time saving state) A jackpot type may be provided in which the sum with the upper limit memory number (for example, 4) of the special figure game based on the entry is larger than (or the same as) the number of fluctuations (non-probable variable state) for which the relief time reduction is established. With this configuration, a game state in which the time saving state after a jackpot game is transferred to the time saving state due to relief time saving (actually, it is once controlled to the normal state (i.e. special normal state) before the relief time saving is established) The transition will be performed, and the interest can be improved.

As explained above, the present feature section 116IW and each modification disclose the configurations of the gaming machine shown below (means 116-1-1) to (means 116-6).

(Means 116-1-1) Executes variable display of first identification information (for example, first special symbol) and variable display of second identification information (for example, second special symbol), and executes variable display of first identification information (for example, second special symbol), A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous for the player based on the derivation and display of symbols (symbols), and that is updated so that numerical information (for example, a relief time reduction counter) can be updated. means (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B) and a special state (for example, a high base state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, a low probability/low base state). ) (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2032A, S2032B, S2260, S2274, and S2284); Numerical information is updated at the timing when the variable display of the information starts and the timing when the variable display of the second identification information starts (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B), and the special The state control means is configured such that the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value (for example, the value of the relief time reduction counter is "0") corresponding to a special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of executions of the variable display. By doing this, it is possible to control to a special state when the special condition is satisfied (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5606A to S5607A, S5606B to S5607B), and a variable display where the special condition is satisfied is executed. 284-23), the notification effect execution means (for example, The CPU 120 for effect control further includes a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS806B. According to such a configuration, notification that the special state will be controlled based on the establishment of the special condition can be executed at an appropriate timing, and the interest can be increased.

(Means 116-1-2) Perform variable display of first identification information (for example, first special symbol) and variable display of second identification information (for example, second special symbol), A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous for the player based on the derivation and display of symbols (symbols), and that is updated so that numerical information (for example, a relief time reduction counter) can be updated. means (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B) and a special state (for example, a high base state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, a low probability/low base state). ) (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2032A, S2032B, S2260, S2274, and S2284); Numerical information is updated at the timing when the variable display of the information starts and the timing when the variable display of the second identification information starts (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B), and the special The state control means is configured such that the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value (for example, the value of the relief time reduction counter is "0") corresponding to a special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of executions of the variable display. By this, it is possible to control to a special state when the special condition is satisfied (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5606A to S5607A, S5606B to S5607B), and the control is possible to control the special state immediately before the variable display where the special condition is satisfied. A notification effect that can execute a notification effect (for example, a time-saving rush effect shown in FIG. 284-24) that informs that the special state will be controlled based on the establishment of a special condition while the variable display is being executed. It further includes execution means. According to such a configuration, notification that the special state will be controlled based on the establishment of the special condition can be executed at an appropriate timing, and the interest can be increased.

(Means 116-2) The means 116-1-1 includes a special variable display pattern (for example, the first variation pattern #M (relief time-shortening entry is missed) and the second variation pattern #L (relief time-saving entry is missed)). The variable display pattern determining means is equipped with a variable display pattern determining means (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS1717A and S1717B) that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns, and the variable display pattern determining means is configured such that a special condition is satisfied. When the special variable display pattern is determined (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS17093A and S17093B), the special variable display pattern is not determined before the special condition is satisfied, The notification effect execution means is capable of executing the notification effect when the variable display based on the special variable display pattern is executed (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS17093A and S17093B, and the effect control (The part where the CPU 120 executes steps 108IWS805 and S806B). According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player through the notification effect that the special state will be controlled based on the establishment of the special condition.

(Means 116-3) In the means 116-1-2, variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS1717A and S1717B) When the special condition is satisfied, the variable display pattern determining means determines a variable display pattern that can be determined even before the special condition is satisfied (for example, the configuration of the modified example shown in FIG. 284-24). According to such a configuration, the variable display pattern can be shared between when the special condition is satisfied and before it is satisfied, and the data capacity can be reduced.

(Means 116-4) In any of the means 116-1-1 to 116-3, the special state control means is in an advantageous state in either the special state or the non-special state (for example, the low base state). It is possible to control to a special state with a different advantage after the end of the advantageous state depending on whether the advantageous state is controlled (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes the processing of steps 061IWS2284, S2286 to S2287. During the normal state If a 6R jackpot A occurs in the (low base state) and the time saving state is controlled (high base state), the time saving state is controlled to a time saving state of 100 times, and a 6R jackpot occurs during the time saving state (high base state). When A occurs and the time saving state (high base state) is controlled, the time saving state is controlled to the time saving state of 200 times (see Figure 284-1), the variable display result of the variable display where the special condition is satisfied. is a specific display result, it is assumed that the special state is controlled to be advantageous, and the advantage of the special state that is controlled after the end of the advantageous state is determined (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 performs steps 061IWS59A, The part in which the execution of the jackpot determination module in S59B is executed after the process of updating the relief time reduction counter and the setting process of the high base flag in steps 061IWS5602A to S5608A, S5602B to S5608B). According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of relief for the player.

(Means 116-5) In any of the means 116-1-1 to 116-4, the game medium is provided in the first route (for example, the route for left-handed players) and the second route (for example, the route for right-handed players). A firing promotion notification means (for example, an image display device 5 (a part for displaying a right-handed hitting instruction display 100IW108 or a left-handed hitting instruction display), and the firing promotion notification means includes a part for displaying a right-handed hitting instruction display 100IW108 and a left-handed hitting instruction display), and the firing promotion notification means is configured to notify that the game medium should be fired toward the second path when the notification effect is executed. Launch promotion notification can be executed (for example, when the time-saving entry effect is executed, the right-hit instruction display 100IW108 is displayed. See FIGS. 284-23 (B) and (C)). According to such a configuration, launch promotion notification can be appropriately executed.

(Means 116-6) In any of the means 116-1-1 to 116-5, the special condition is controlled based on the establishment of the special condition in response to the start of the variable display for which the special condition is established. It is possible to output a signal that can identify that the variable display has been executed (for example, a jackpot 4 signal), and also output a signal that can identify that the variable display has been executed (for example, a fluctuation stop signal) in response to the end of the variable display. 284-19). According to such a configuration, a signal that can specify that the special state is controlled based on the establishment of the special condition can be outputted to the outside at an appropriate timing.

In addition, the present feature section 116IW and each modified example disclose the configurations of the gaming machine shown below (means 117-1) to (means 117-5).

(Means 117-1) Perform variable display of first identification information (for example, first special symbol) and variable display of second identification information (for example, second special symbol), and display specific display results (for example, jackpot symbol) is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous for a player based on the derived and displayed information, and an updating means (for example, a relief time reduction counter) that can update numerical information (for example, a relief time reduction counter). For example, in the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B) and in the special state (for example, the high base state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state (for example, the low probability/low base state), Special state control that can be controlled to increase the probability of hitting a normal symbol, shorten the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and extend the opening time of the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab (first starting winning hole) means (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2032A, S2032B, S2260, S2274, and S2284) and variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information in parallel. variable display execution means (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps S25A and S25B), and a variable display in which the variable display of the first identification information is shorter than the variable display of the second identification information. A first shortened state in which the rate of variable display of the period is high (for example, a low probability in the first embodiment in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in a shorter variable time than the variable display of the second special symbol) /low base state (normal state), low probability/high base state, and high probability/high base state (second probability variable state (see Figures 284-2 to 284-4, Figure 284-19)), and the second A second shortened state in which the variable display of the identification information has a high rate of variable display with a shorter variable display period than the variable display of the first identification information (for example, the variable display of the second special symbol is shorter than the variable display of the first special symbol) The high probability/low base state (first probability variable state) in the first embodiment is executed in a short varying time. The update means includes a shortening state control means (for example, a part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2032A, S2032B, S2260, S2274, S2284, S2514, and S2206), and the updating means includes a first identification information The numerical information is updated between when the variable display of the second identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B), and the special state The control means is configured to ensure that the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value (for example, the value of the relief time reduction counter is "0") corresponding to a special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of executions of the variable display. (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5606A to S5607A, S5606B to S5607B), and the variable display execution means can control the first identification information and Based on the fact that a special condition is satisfied by executing the variable display of one of the second identification information during the execution of the variable display of the other identification information, the display result of the variable display of the second identification information. Based on the fact that the specific display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first identification information during the execution of the variable display of the second identification information without being derived and displayed (for example, see FIG. 284-21(A)), In the variable display of the second identification information, a predetermined display result (for example, a lost symbol) different from the specific display result can be derived and displayed (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS1125B and S1129B), The shortened state control means is capable of controlling to the first shortened state when controlled to the special state based on the establishment of special conditions (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5607A and S5607B). part. When the relief time reduction is established, the state shifts to a low probability/high base state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in a shorter variable time than the variable display of the second special symbol. (See Figure 284-20). According to such a configuration, since the game is controlled to the first shortened state after the special condition is satisfied, the game can be smoothly progressed and the interest can be improved.

(Means 117-2) In the means 117-1, the variable display execution means produces a special display result different from the specific display result and the predetermined display result as the display result of the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. The special state control means can control the special state based on the special display result being derived and displayed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 can control the step 061IWS2032A, S2032B), when a special display result is derived and displayed in a variable display where a special condition is satisfied, it is possible to control to a special state based on the fulfillment of the special condition (for example, a part for game control The part where the microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2030A to S2031A, and S2030B to S2031B (see FIG. 284-21(A)), the advantage of the special state that is controlled based on the special display result being derived and displayed. The degree of advantage is lower than the advantage of the special state that is controlled based on the establishment of special conditions (for example, the number of time reductions is 800 in the time reduction state via relief time reduction, whereas the number of time reductions is 800 in the time reduction state via time reduction) The number of time reductions is 100 (see Figure 284-1). According to such a configuration, even if a special display result is derived and displayed in a variable display where a special condition is satisfied, the special state is controlled based on the fact that the special condition is satisfied, so that the degree of relief for the player can be increased. Can be done.

(Means 117-3) In the means 117-1 or 117-2, the special state control means is a variable display of identification information of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, resulting in a special display result. During execution of variable display of identification information, if a special condition is satisfied by executing variable display of the other identification information before the display result of the variable display of one of the identification information is derived and displayed, the special condition is satisfied. Even if the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of one of the identification information, The special display result is not controlled to a special state of advantage based on the derived display (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS2030A to S2031A, S2030B to S2031B). According to such a configuration, in a configuration where the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel, the advantage of the special state based on the establishment of the special condition is ensured. This can increase the degree of relief for the player.

(Means 117-4) In any of the means 117-1 to 117-3, the variable display execution means includes a specific display result and a predetermined display result as a display result of the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. It is possible to derive and display a special display result (for example, a small winning symbol) different from the display result, and while the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information is being performed, the other identification information Based on the derivation and display of the special display result in the variable display of the one, it is possible to derive and display the predetermined display result in the variable display of the one identification information (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 performs step 061IWS1126A, S1129A, S1126B). , S1129B). According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid a specific display result being derived and displayed in an unintended variable display of identification information, and it is also possible to minimize the effect of a player's intentional strategy. .

(Means 117-5) In any of the means 117-1 to 117-4, the updating means determines the timing at which the variable display of the first identification information starts and the timing at which the variable display of the second identification information starts. (For example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B). According to such a configuration, updating of numerical information can be optimized in a configuration in which variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel.

In addition, the present feature section 116IW and each modified example disclose the configurations of the gaming machine shown below (means 118-1) to (means 118-5).

(Means 118-1) Perform variable display of first identification information (for example, first special symbol) and variable display of second identification information (for example, second special symbol), and display specific display results (for example, jackpot symbol) is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous for a player based on the derived and displayed information, and an updating means (for example, a relief time reduction counter) that can update numerical information (for example, a relief time reduction counter). For example, in the first embodiment, steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B are executed), and in special states (for example, high base state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in normal states (for example, low probability/low base state), Special state control that can be controlled to increase the probability of hitting a normal symbol, shorten the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and extend the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning hole) means (for example, the part that executes steps 061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2032A, S2032B, S2260, S2274, and S2284 in the first embodiment), and the variable display of the first identification information is shorter than the variable display of the second identification information. A first shortened state in which the rate of variable display of the variable display period is high (for example, in the second embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in a shorter variable time than the variable display of the second special symbol) low probability/low base state (normal state; see Figure 285-1), and a second state in which the variable display of the second identification information has a high rate of variable display with a shorter variable display period than the variable display of the first identification information. Shortened state (for example, low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) in the second embodiment, in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in a shorter variation time than the variable display of the first special symbol ), a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), and a high probability/low base state (second KT state; see FIG. 285-1). (corresponding to the part that executes steps 061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2032A, S2032B, S2260, S2274, S2284, S2514, S2206 in the embodiment), the updating means is configured to perform variable display of the first identification information. The special state control means updates the numerical information depending on whether the second identification information is displayed variably or when the variable display of the second identification information is performed (for example, in the first embodiment, steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B are executed), and the special state control means updates A special condition is established when the numerical information updated by the means becomes a specific value (for example, the value of the relief time reduction counter is "0") corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of executions of the variable display. (for example, the part that executes steps 061IWS5606A to S5607A, S5606B to S5607B in the first embodiment), and the variable display execution means can control the variable display of the first identification information and the second It is possible to derive and display a special display result (for example, a small winning symbol) different from the specific display result as a display result of the variable display of identification information, and the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information During display execution, based on the derivation and display of the special display result in the variable display of the other identification information, derive a predetermined display result different from the specific display result and the special display result in the variable display of the one identification information. (for example, the part that executes steps 061IWS1126A, S1129A, S1126B, and S1129B in the first embodiment), and the shortened state control means is controlled to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition. In addition, it can be controlled to the second shortened state (for example, controlled to the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) in the second embodiment). According to such a configuration, while the variable display of one of the identification information is being executed, based on the derivation and display of the special display result in the variable display of the other identification information, a predetermined display is performed in the variable display of the one identification information. Since the display result is derived and displayed and the second shortened state is controlled after the special condition is satisfied, the game can be smoothly progressed and the interest can be increased.

(Means 118-2) In the means 118-1, the variable display execution means produces a special display result different from the specific display result and the predetermined display result as the display result of the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. The special state control means can control the special state based on the special display result being derived and displayed (for example, the step in the first embodiment). 061IWS2032A, corresponding to the part that executes S2032B), when a special display result is derived and displayed in a variable display where a special condition is satisfied, it is possible to control to a special state based on the special condition being satisfied (for example, Corresponding to the part that executes steps 061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2030A to S2031A, and S2030B to S2031B in the first embodiment), the advantage of the special state that is controlled based on the derivation and display of the special display result is as follows: It is lower than the advantage of the special state that is controlled based on the establishment of special conditions (for example, the number of time reductions is 800 in the time reduction state via relief time reduction, whereas the number of time reductions is 100 in the time reduction state via time reduction). times (see Figure 285-1). According to such a configuration, even if a special display result is derived and displayed in a variable display where a special condition is satisfied, the special state is controlled based on the fact that the special condition is satisfied, so that the degree of relief for the player can be increased. Can be done.

(Means 118-3) In the means 118-1 or 118-2, the special state control means is a variable display of identification information of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, resulting in a special display result. During execution of variable display of identification information, if a special condition is satisfied by executing variable display of the other identification information before the display result of the variable display of one of the identification information is derived and displayed, the special condition is satisfied. It is possible to control the special state based on the result (e.g., corresponds to the part that executes steps 061IWS5607A and S5607B in the first embodiment), and the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of one of the identification information. Even if the special display result is derived and displayed, the special state of advantage is not controlled (for example, this corresponds to the part that executes steps 061IWS2030A to S2031A and S2030B to S2031B in the first embodiment). According to such a configuration, in a configuration where the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel, the advantage of the special state based on the establishment of the special condition is ensured. This can increase the degree of relief for the player.

(Means 118-4) In any of the means 118-1 to 118-3, the variable display execution means includes a specific display result and a predetermined display result as a display result of the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. It is possible to derive and display a special display result (for example, a small winning symbol) different from the display result, and while the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information is being performed, the other identification information Based on the derivation and display of the special display result in the variable display of the one, it is possible to derive and display the predetermined display result in the variable display of the one identification information (for example, steps 061IWS1126A, S1129A, S1126B in the first embodiment). , S1129B). According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid a specific display result being derived and displayed in an unintended variable display of identification information, and it is also possible to minimize the effect of a player's intentional strategy. .

(Means 118-5) In any of the means 118-1 to 118-4, the updating means determines the timing at which the variable display of the first identification information starts and the timing at which the variable display of the second identification information starts. (For example, this corresponds to the part that executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B in the first embodiment). According to such a configuration, updating of numerical information can be optimized in a configuration in which variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel.

Further, in this feature section 116IW and each modification, the configurations of the gaming machine shown below (means 119-1) to (means 119-6) are disclosed.

(Means 119-1) Perform variable display of first identification information (for example, first special symbol) and variable display of second identification information (for example, second special symbol), and display specific display results (for example, jackpot symbol) is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous for a player based on the derived and displayed information, and an updating means (for example, a relief time reduction counter) that can update numerical information (for example, a relief time reduction counter). For example, in the first embodiment, the part that executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B) and the special state (e.g., high base state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state (e.g., low probability/low base state). A controllable special state control means (for example, the part that executes steps 061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2032A, S2032B, S2260, S2274, and S2284 in the first embodiment) and a specific state that is easily controlled to be more advantageous than the normal state. (e.g., a high probability state) (e.g., the part that executes step 061IWS2206 in the first embodiment); A normal state control means capable of controlling to a normal state (for example, executing steps 061IWS5704A and S5712A in modification 2) based on the determination by the determination means (for example, the part that executes step 061IWS5703A in modification 2) and the end determination means In connection with the control of the specific state, there is a notification effect that can notify whether the specific state ends or a specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, the inciting reach A to C shown in FIG. 285-7). (For example, a part that executes the processing of steps 061IWS5710A, S5713A, and S633A in Modification 2, and the processing of determining a fluctuation pattern based on the states of the inciting reach flags A to C) capable of executing the above. , the updating means updates the numerical information depending on whether variable display of the first identification information is performed or when variable display of the second identification information is performed (for example, steps 061IWS5603A, S5603B), the special state control means specifies that the numerical information updated by the updating means is a specific value (for example, of the relief time reduction number counter) corresponding to the special number of times (e.g., 800 times) as the number of executions of the variable display. By setting the value to "0", it is possible to control to a special state when a special condition is satisfied (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5606A to S5607A, S5606B to S5607B), and the specific state When a special condition is satisfied in , after the special condition is satisfied, the end determining means determines that the specific state will end, and then the special state can be controlled (for example, in the second modification, steps 061IWS56061A, S5701A, S5704A , S5701A to S5709A. (See FIG. 285-9), the notification effect executing means provides a notification effect (for example, FIG. 285-7 (3-2), (4)) that the special state will be controlled when the special condition is satisfied in the specific state. It is possible to notify by the inciting reach B) shown in . According to such a configuration, even if the specific state ends, the notification effect notifies the player that the special state will be controlled based on the fulfillment of the special condition, giving the player a sense of security. It is possible to give children a lot of information and to improve their interest.

(Means 119-2) In the means 119-1, the special information storage means (for example, the RAM 102 ), and the special information is erased based on being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, the part where step 061IWS631A is executed in Modification 2). According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately manage information indicating that the special condition is satisfied in a specific state.

(Means 119-3) In the means 119-1 or 119-2, special information storage capable of storing special information (for example, a relief time saving flag) indicating the establishment of the special condition when the special condition is established in a specific state. The special information is erased based on being controlled by the special state after the specific state ends (for example, the part that executes step 061IWS5707A in modification 2). According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately manage information indicating that the special condition is satisfied in a specific state.

(Means 119-4) In the means 119-1 to 119-3, special information storage capable of storing special information (for example, a relief time saving flag) indicating that the special condition is satisfied when the special condition is satisfied in a specific state. means (for example, RAM 102), and the specific state control means can end the control of the specific state by executing the initialization process (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S8). , the special information is erased by executing the initialization process. According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately manage information indicating that the special condition is satisfied in a specific state.

(Means 119-5) In the means 119-1 to 119-4, a special condition fulfillment notification effect that notifies that a special condition is satisfied in a specific state (for example, a chance mode as shown in FIG. 285-8 (2)) (a "chi" icon 014IW003d indicating that the rescue time is shortened) is displayed on a part of the image display device 5). According to such a configuration, the player can recognize that the special state is controlled after the end of the specific state, giving the player a sense of security and increasing his interest.

(Means 119-6) In the means 119-1 to 119-5, the special state control means controls when the specific state ends before the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) in the specific state. It is possible to control the special state until the variable display is executed for the predetermined number of times (for example, the part where steps 061IWS5705A, S5711A, S5717A to S5720A are executed in Modification 2), and the notification effect execution means can perform the control for the predetermined number of times. When the variable display is executed beyond the limit, it is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether the specific state ends or the specific display result is displayed (for example, in the modification 2, the processing of steps 061IWS5710A, S5713A, and S633A This is the part that executes the process of determining the fluctuation pattern based on the states of the inciting reach flags A to C after the 100th fluctuation after being controlled to the variable probability state (see FIG. 285-6). According to such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of tension and increase interest.

Furthermore, the configurations of the gaming machine shown below (Means 1A) to (Means 8A) may be applied to this feature part 116IW and each modification.

(Means 1A) Variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information are performed, and based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol), an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game A gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state (e.g., a time saving state) in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state, and a state control means that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state), and a numerical value based on the variable display being executed. an updating means capable of updating information (e.g., a counter for the number of times the variable display is executed); The updating means can be controlled to a special state when a special condition is satisfied, and the updating means updates the numerical information depending on whether variable display of the first identification information is executed or when variable display of the second identification information is executed. and a predetermined suggestion performance execution means that can execute a predetermined suggestion performance (for example, a preview performance) while the variable display is being executed, and control of the special state is started based on the establishment of the special condition. The device further comprises special notification performance execution means capable of executing a special notification performance (for example, a time-saving performance) that notifies the user that a special condition is established, and the predetermined suggestion performance execution means executes the predetermined suggestion performance in a period before the special condition is established. (For example, the execution rate of the preview effect does not change between a period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is 10 times or less and a period in which it is 11 times or more.) According to such a configuration, by suddenly executing the special notification effect, it is possible to give surprise to the player and increase interest.

(Means 2A) In means 1A, the special notification performance execution means is capable of executing the special notification performance when the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is started, and the special notification performance is such that the special notification performance is executed in the display means. This is a mode that makes it difficult to see the effect display that is displayed before the start of the change (for example, it is blacked out at the start of the change). According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide surprise to the player and increase interest.

(Means 3A) In the means 1A, a variable display execution means capable of variable displaying identification information for presentation (for example, a decorative pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information is provided. In addition, the special notification performance execution means can execute the special notification performance when the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied ends, and the special notification performance is in a mode that makes the performance identification information difficult to see (for example, , blackout at the end of the fluctuation). According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide surprise to the player and increase interest.

(Means 4A) In the means 1A, the special notification effect execution means is capable of executing the special notification effect when a variable display subsequent to the variable display for which the special condition is satisfied is executed, and the special notification effect is executed on the display. This is an aspect in which the background display in the means is changed to a background display corresponding to a special state (for example, when the next variable display is executed, a background image corresponding to a time saving state due to relief time saving is displayed). According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide surprise to the player and increase interest. Further, it is possible to prevent the performance from becoming complicated.

(Means 5A) Any one of the means 1A to 4A is provided with an explanatory effect execution means capable of executing an explanatory effect regarding the special state based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, an explanation regarding relief time saving (e.g. relief time saving function). Displaying a caption containing the following information (explanation of the effect of shortening rescue time). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

(Means 6A) Variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns in any one of the means 1A to 5A (for example, a portion in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes the variable pattern setting process) ), the variable display pattern determining means determines a variable display pattern that can be determined even before the special condition is satisfied when the special condition is satisfied, and the special notification effect execution means determines the variable display pattern that can be determined even before the special condition is satisfied. After a non-specific display result (for example, a missed symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result, a special notification effect can be executed (for example, in a variable display in which a relief time reduction is established, a variation pattern dedicated to the relief time reduction is established). is not used. Then, after the losing symbol is derived and displayed, it is announced that the relief time reduction has been established). According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the special state is controlled due to the establishment of the special condition, and it is also possible to clearly notify the player of a change in the gaming state, and the special condition It is possible to improve the interest when the event is established.

(Means 7A) In any one of the means 1A to 6A, there is a variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on the establishment of the starting condition and the establishment of the starting condition; Suspension storage means (for example, a first suspension memory number buffer and a second suspension memory number buffer) that can store information regarding variable display as suspension information when the variable display is not established, and a numerical value that the updating means updates even when power supply is stopped. A backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding information and the pending information stored in the pending storage means, and an initialization process capable of initializing the storage contents of the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Initialization means (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S8), numerical information and pending storage updated by the updating means based on the storage contents of the backup storage means when power supply is started. A recovery means (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S6) is provided that can execute a recovery process for restoring the pending information stored by the means. According to such a configuration, while optimizing control through initialization processing, a power outage occurs in a situation where a hold memory corresponding to a special number of variable displays is stored before power supply is stopped. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages to the player when playing the game.

(Means 8A) In any of the means 1A to 6A, a state storage means capable of storing special state information (for example, the state of a high base flag) that can specify that the special state is being controlled; Execution count storage means that can store execution count information (for example, the value of a time saving count counter) that can specify the number of times the variable display has been executed, and special status information, execution count information, and numerical information even when power supply is stopped. backup storage means (e.g., RAM 102) capable of holding data, and initialization means (e.g., a gaming control microcontroller) capable of executing an initialization process to initialize the storage contents of the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is satisfied. (a part in which the computer 100 executes step S8), and the initialization means performs an initialization process when the special state information, the number of execution times information, and the numerical information are held in the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is satisfied. , in the initialization process, the special state information and the execution number information are initialized, but the numerical information is not initialized (for example, while the state of the high base flag and the value of the time saving number counter are initialized, The value of the rescue time reduction counter is not initialized (in other words, the value before power cut is set). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the numerical information from being initialized intentionally, and it is possible to increase the degree of relief for the player.

Furthermore, the configurations of the gaming machine shown below (Means 1B) to (Means 5B) may be applied to this feature section 116IW and each modification.

(Means 1B) Variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information are performed, and an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game A gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state (e.g., a time saving state) in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state, and a state control means that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state), and a numerical value based on the variable display being executed. an updating means capable of updating information; and a variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a specific variable display pattern having a longer variable display period than the predetermined variable display pattern. (For example, a part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes the fluctuation pattern setting process), and the state control means is configured such that the numerical information updated by the updating means corresponds to a special number of times as the number of executions of the variable display. It is possible to control to a special state when a special condition is satisfied by becoming a specific value, and the updating means is used when variable display of the first identification information is executed and when variable display of the second identification information is executed. The variable display pattern determining means can determine the specific variable display pattern in both cases where the display result of the variable display is the specific display result and when it is not the specific display result. Yes (for example, it is possible to determine a variation pattern of reach (or reach with a particularly high degree of expectation) in both cases of jackpot and loss), when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result. In this case, the specific variable display pattern is determined at a higher rate than the predetermined variable display pattern (for example, the variable pattern of reach (or reach with a particularly high expectation level) is determined at a higher rate in the case of a jackpot), and special conditions In the predetermined period before the occurrence of Immediately before this happens, the rate at which the fluctuation pattern of reach (or reach with particularly high expectations) is decided upon is low. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when a specific display result is not derived and displayed although variable display is performed using a specific variable display pattern during a predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied.

(Means 2B) In means 1B, means for executing a suggestion performance that is capable of executing a suggestion performance related to the establishment of special conditions (for example, a countdown performance or effect performance suggesting that relief time reduction is established, or a caption display while waiting for a customer). The suggestive effect executing means executes the suggestive effect at a higher rate during a predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied than during a period before the predetermined period. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player expect that the special condition will be satisfied, and it is possible to increase the interest of the player. Further, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a disadvantage to the player due to the player ending the game immediately before the special condition is satisfied.

(Means 3B) In means 1B or 2B, a telop display containing an explanatory performance regarding the special state based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, an explanation regarding saving time saving (for example, an explanation of the relief time saving function and the presentation of relief time saving) The present invention is equipped with an explanatory presentation execution means capable of executing (performing). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

(Means 4B) In any of the means 1B to 3B, execution of a notice effect capable of executing a notice effect (for example, a timer effect) that foretells that a specific display result will be derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed. The preview performance execution means is capable of executing the preview performance in both cases where the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result and when the display result of the variable display does not result in a specific display result. When the result is a specific display result, the proportion of advance notice performances is higher than when the result is not a specific display result. period), the rate at which the preview effect is executed when the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result is lower than in the period before the predetermined period. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when a preview effect is executed during a predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied, but a specific display result is not derived and displayed.

(Means 5B) In any of the means 1B to 4B, execution of a notice effect capable of executing a notice effect (for example, a timer effect) that foretells that a specific display result will be derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed. The preview effect executing means is configured to display a specific mode (for example, the effect mode "red") and a predetermined display mode in both cases where the display result of the variable display is a specific display result and when the display result is not a specific display result. If the display result of the variable display is a specific display result, the proportion of the preview effect that is executed in the specific mode is higher than that in the predetermined mode. If the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result during the predetermined period before the special condition is established (for example, the period when the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less) than in the period before the predetermined period. Moreover, the percentage of executing preview effects is low depending on the specific aspect. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when a preview effect is executed in a specific manner in a predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied, but a specific display result is not derived and displayed.

In addition, the configurations of the gaming machine shown below (means 1C) to (means 8C) may be applied to this feature section 116IW and each modification.

(Means 1C) Variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information are performed, and an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game A gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state (e.g., a time saving state) in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state, and a state control means that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state), and a numerical value based on the variable display being executed. an updating means capable of updating information; and a variable display pattern determining means (e.g. , a part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes the fluctuation pattern setting process), and the state control means is configured such that the numerical information updated by the updating means is a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of execution times of the variable display. By doing so, it is possible to control to a special state when a special condition is satisfied, and the updating means is configured to change the state between when variable display of the first identification information is executed and when variable display of the second identification information is executed. The numerical information is updated, and the variable display pattern determining means is capable of determining the special variable display pattern when the special condition is satisfied, and does not decide on the special variable display pattern before the special condition is satisfied. The device further includes a specific notification performance execution means capable of executing a specific notification performance (for example, a time-saving entry performance) for notifying that a special state is controlled when a variable display based on a display pattern is executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly inform the player that the special condition is controlled by the establishment of the special condition, and it is possible to increase the interest when the special condition is established.

(Means 2C) In means 1C, the specific notification performance execution means executes the specific notification performance when a variable display in which a special condition is satisfied is executed and a non-specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display. When a variable display is executed in which the special conditions are met and a specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, the specific display result is displayed after performing a production in a manner common to the specific notification production. The device is provided with a special notification performance execution means capable of executing a special notification performance (for example, a time-saving pretense performance) for notifying that ``is derived and displayed.'' According to such a configuration, after the player once recognizes that the special condition has been established, he or she is notified that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, which can provide surprise to the player and improve interest. Can be done.

(Means 3C) In means 1C or 2C, when a variable display in which a special condition is satisfied is executed and a specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, the execution is not performed before the special condition is satisfied. It is provided with a predetermined notification performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined notification performance (for example, a full rotation performance) for notifying that a specific display result is derived and displayed depending on the mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and specialness, and it is possible to increase interest.

(Means 4C) In means 1C or means 2C, when a variable display in which a special condition is satisfied is executed and a specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, the same aspect as before the special condition is satisfied. (For example, even if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0, the jackpot will be activated as well as when the value is not 0.) ) is realized by determining the fluctuation pattern. According to such a configuration, the variable display pattern can be shared between when the special condition is satisfied and before it is satisfied, and the data capacity can be reduced.

(Means 5C) In any of the means 1C to 4C, the display period (for example, 20 seconds) of the display result of the variable display when the special condition is satisfied is the same as the display result of the variable display before the special condition is satisfied. During the display period of the display result of the variable display when the special condition is established, which is longer than the display period (for example, 0.5 seconds), a notification effect (for example, relief time reduction The present invention is provided with a notification effect execution means capable of executing a mode transition effect for notifying the start of time-saving state control. According to such a configuration, it is possible to secure a period for executing the notification performance in the normal state, and it is possible to clarify the performance when switching the gaming state, and to improve the interest.

(Means 6C) In any of the means 1C to 5C, at the start of the display period of the display result of the variable display when the special condition is satisfied, a specific signal (for example, a fluctuation stop signal) corresponding to the start of the display period. and, after outputting the specific signal, a signal output means for outputting a special signal (for example, jackpot 4 signal) corresponding to control of the special state. According to such a configuration, when outputting the specific signal and the special signal at the same time, it is possible to avoid failure of a signal to occur externally.

(Means 7C) In means 6C, the signal output means performs special processing (for example, extending the period until the start of the next fluctuation) that is executed after the display period of the display result of the variable display when the special condition is satisfied has elapsed. A special signal is output at the start of the next fluctuation postponement process. According to such a configuration, when outputting the specific signal and the special signal at the same time, it is possible to avoid failure of a signal to occur externally.

(Means 8C) In any of the means 1C to 6C, a first passage area (for example, a first starting prize opening ), a second passage area (for example, a second starting prize opening) provided at a position where game media passing through a special route (for example, a right-handed route) can pass, and a second passage area (for example, a second starting prize opening) as a variable display of identification information. Variable display execution means capable of variable displaying of first identification information based on the satisfaction of a first starting condition and variable displaying of the second identification information based on the satisfaction of a second starting condition; A special output that can specify that the game medium should be fired at the player (e.g., output of a test signal or external output signal indicating that the player is in a gaming state in which it is assumed that the player will play right-handed, or the first starting condition is established based on the game medium passing through the first passing area, and the second starting condition is established based on the first passing area. 2. The special output means is established based on the game medium passing through the passing area, and the special output means executes special processing (for example, the next fluctuation A special output can be executed at the start of the next change postponement process (to extend the period until the start of the next change postponement process). According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute a special output that can specify that game media should be ejected toward a special route at an appropriate timing.

Furthermore, the configurations of the gaming machine shown below (Means 1D) to (Means 5D) may be applied to this feature section 116IW and each modification.

(Means 1D) Variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information are performed, and an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game A gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state (e.g., a time saving state) in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state, and a state control means that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state), and a numerical value based on the variable display being executed. comprising an updating means capable of updating information, and a variable display pattern determining means (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes a variable pattern setting process) determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns, The state control means is capable of controlling the state to a special state when a special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times as the number of executions of the variable display; , the numerical information is updated depending on when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed, and the variable display pattern determining means updates the numerical information when the special condition is satisfied. A variable display pattern that can be determined even before the condition is met (for example, the first variation pattern #A) is determined, and a non-specific display result (for example, a missed symbol) is derived as the display result of the variable display in which the special condition is met. The apparatus further includes a special notification effect executing means capable of executing a special notification effect (for example, displaying a background image corresponding to shortened rescue time) for notifying that special state control is started after being displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player of a change in the gaming state, and it is possible to increase interest when the special condition is satisfied. Further, it is possible to use a variable display pattern in common between when the special condition is satisfied and before the special condition is satisfied, and the data capacity can be reduced.

(Means 2D) In means 1D, a variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on the establishment of the start condition and the establishment of the start condition (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S112A) and a suspension storage means (for example, a first suspension memory number buffer or a second suspension memory number buffer) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as suspension information when the start condition is met but the start condition is not satisfied; A look-ahead preview effect that targets a variable display that corresponds to the hold information stored in the means (for example, a stop display of a special decorative pattern (opportunity), or a hold change effect that changes the color or shape of the hold display) , a zone effect that displays a special background display, etc.); While it is possible to execute a look-ahead preview performance that targets the variable display when the special condition is met, it also restricts the execution of a look-ahead preview performance that targets the variable display after the variable display where the special condition is met ( For example, execution of a look-ahead preview performance that targets a pending memory that was stored before reaching a change in relief time reduction and corresponds to a change that occurs after being controlled to a time saving state via relief time reduction. (restrict (prohibit)) According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid complicating the control process, and it is also possible to avoid inconsistencies in the content of the presentation.

(Means 3D) In the means 1D or 2D, the special notification performance execution means is capable of executing the special notification performance when a variable display subsequent to the variable display for which the special condition is satisfied is executed, and executes the special notification performance. This is a mode in which the background display on the display means is changed to a background display corresponding to a special state (for example, when the next variable display is executed, a background image corresponding to a time saving state due to relief time saving is displayed). According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide surprise to the players and increase their interest, and it is also possible to prevent the performance from becoming complicated.

(Means 4D) In any of the means 1D to 3D, a suggestive effect related to the establishment of the special condition (for example, a countdown effect or an effect effect indicating that the relief time reduction will be established, a caption display while waiting for a customer, etc.) An executable suggestion performance execution means is provided, and the suggestion performance execution means limits the execution of the suggestion performance in a predetermined period before a special condition is established (for example, a period in which the remaining number of times until relief time is shortened is 10 or less). According to such a configuration, since the special notification effect is suddenly executed, it is possible to provide surprise to the player and increase interest.

(Means 5D) In any of the means 1D to 4D, an explanatory performance execution means capable of executing an explanatory performance regarding the special state based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, an explanation of the rescue time saving function or the performance in the rescue time saving) ). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, the configurations of the gaming machine shown below (Means 1E) to (Means 4E) may be applied to this feature section 116IW and each modification.

(Means 1E-1) Perform variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol), an advantageous advantageous state (for example, A gaming machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state), and a state control means that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state, and a state control device that is based on the fact that the variable display is executed. a variable display pattern that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a shortened variable display pattern whose variable display period is shorter than that of the predetermined variable display pattern; Display pattern determining means (for example, a part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes a variable pattern setting process); can be controlled to a special state after being controlled to an advantageous state, and when the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of executions of the variable display. The updating means updates the numerical information depending on whether variable display of the first identification information is performed or when variable display of the second identification information is performed, and the variable display pattern determining means is a shortened variable display when the display result of the variable display becomes a non-specific display result, when the special state that is controlled when the special condition is satisfied is better than the special state that is controlled after the special condition is controlled to an advantageous state. The rate of determining the pattern is high (for example, the rate of determining the time saving state via relief time saving is higher than the time saving status via jackpot is determined as a variation pattern with a shortened variation time). According to such a configuration, when the number of executions of the variable display reaches a specific number, the rate at which the variable display is executed increases due to the shortened variable display pattern, and the period until the next advantageous state is controlled is increased. Since the time period will be shortened, a decline in interest can be suppressed.

(Means 1E-2) Perform variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol), an advantageous advantageous state (for example, A gaming machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state), and a state control means that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state, and a state control device that is based on the fact that the variable display is executed. and a variable display pattern determination device that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern (for example, a first variable pattern #C) corresponding to execution of a reach effect. means (for example, a part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes the fluctuation pattern setting process), and the state control means is configured to set an advantageous state based on a specific display result being derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display. can be controlled to a special state after being controlled by the update means, and the special state is entered when the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of executions of the variable display. The updating means updates the numerical information depending on whether variable display of the first identification information is performed or when variable display of the second identification information is performed, and the variable display pattern determining means is configured to A special state that is controlled when a condition is met is determined to be a specific variable display pattern when the display result of the variable display becomes a non-specific display result than a special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. (For example, a time-saving state via relief time-saving is determined by a fluctuation pattern in which a reach (or a particularly high-expected reach) occurs when the display result is a failure than a time-saving state via jackpot. percentage is low). According to such a configuration, when the number of executions of the variable display reaches a specific number, the proportion of display results of the variable display based on the specific variable display pattern becoming non-specific display results is low, so that a decrease in interest is prevented. It can be suppressed.

(Means 2E) In means 1E, background display means is capable of displaying different background displays on the display means for a special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state and a special state that is controlled when a special condition is established. (For example, the background image is different between the time saving state via jackpot and the time saving state via rescue time saving). According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player of the difference in the gaming state, and it is possible to increase interest.

(Means 3E) In the means 1E or 2E, a variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on the establishment of the start condition and the establishment of the start condition (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S112A) a holding storage means (for example, a first holding memory number buffer and a second holding memory number buffer) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as holding information when the start condition is met but the start condition is not satisfied. , a look-ahead notice execution means capable of executing a look-ahead notice effect (for example, a chance effect or a hold change effect) that targets a variable display corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold storage means; The method determines the rate at which the pre-reading notice performance is executed in the special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state and the special state that is controlled when the special condition is established, and which pre-reading notice among the plurality of types. The ratio of executing the performance is different (for example, the rate of executing the pre-reading notice performance and which of the multiple types of pre-reading notice performance is executed depending on the time saving state via relief time saving and the time saving state via jackpot) (The ratio of the number of cases to be used is different). According to such a configuration, the execution frequency and the type of pre-read preview performance can be determined between the special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state and the special state that is controlled when the special condition is established. It can be made different and more interesting.

(Means 4E) In any of the means 1E to 3E, there is a variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on the establishment of the starting condition and the establishment of the starting condition; A suspension storage means (for example, a first suspension storage number buffer or a second suspension storage number buffer) that can store information regarding variable display as suspension information when the variable display is not established, and a variable display that corresponds to the suspension information stored in the suspension storage means. A look-ahead preview effect that targets the display (for example, a display that stops displaying a special decorative pattern (opportunity), a hold change effect that changes the color or shape of the hold display, a zone effect that displays a special background, etc.) a pre-read notice execution means capable of executing, the pre-read notice execution means foretelling a variable display when the special condition is satisfied among the variable displays corresponding to the hold information stored before the special condition is satisfied. While it is possible to execute the targeted pre-reading notice performance, it is possible to restrict the execution of the pre-reading notice performance that targets the variable display after the variable display for which the special condition is met (for example, before reaching the change in the shortening of relief time). To restrict (prohibit) the execution of a look-ahead preview performance that targets a stored pending memory and which corresponds to a change performed after being controlled to a time-saving state via a rescue time-saving mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid complicating the control process, and it is also possible to avoid inconsistencies in the content of the presentation.

Note that it is possible to appropriately combine the configuration shown in the characteristic part 120IW with the configuration shown in the characteristic part 090IW, the characteristic part 113IW, and the characteristic part 116IW. For example, when applying the configuration shown in the feature part 090IW above to the configuration shown in the feature part 120IW above, if there is a V prize and a small win during the time saving state, the value of the small win counter is subtracted by 1. While the time saving state is ended, the value of the small winning number counter may not be subtracted if a small win without V winning occurs during the time saving state.

1 Pachinko game machine, 2 Game board, 3 Game machine frame, 5 Image display device, 5C, 5L, 5R Decorative pattern display area, 6A Winning ball device, 6B Variable winning ball device, 7 Special variable winning ball device, 8L, 8R speaker, 9 game effect lamp, 10 general prize opening, 11 main board, 12 effect control board, 13 audio control board, 14 lamp control board, 15 relay board, 9020 special LED board, 21 gate switch, 22A first start mouth switch, 22B second starting mouth switch, 23 count switch, 24 V winning switch, 30 batting ball operation handle, 31A stick controller, 31B push button, 32 movable body, 35A controller sensor unit, 35B push sensor, 41 passing gate, 9050 4th symbol unit, 81, 82, 83 Solenoid, 100 Game control microcomputer, 101, 121 ROM, 102, 122 RAM, 104, 124 Random number circuit, 106 RTC, 110 Switch circuit, 111 Output circuit, 123 Display control section .

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
sound output means;
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
In the success/failure notification part of the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
The light emission control means includes:
In the success/failure notification part, when the movable body advances to the second position, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for moving the movable body, and the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. During the evacuation, the luminance data table for moving the movable body is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part, and the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is used to control the light emitting means,
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part,
The sound output means is
In a specific scene in the introduction part, output the dialogue sounds made by the character and the action sounds corresponding to the character's actions,
In the specific scene, the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output louder than the action sound corresponding to the character's action,
The brightness data table for moving the movable body is configured to use brightness data representing chromatic colors and brightness data representing achromatic colors,
The brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part includes brightness data representing the first chromatic color,
Brightness data representing a second chromatic color, and brightness data representing a plurality of chromatic colors including:
The time used is different between the brightness data representing chromatic colors in the brightness data table for movable body movement and the brightness data representing chromatic colors in the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part,
The light emission control means includes:
When an error occurs, controlling the light emitting means by using an error brightness data table,
In a normal state, controlling the light emitting means by using a normal state background brightness data table,
controlling the light emitting means to give priority to the error brightness data table over the brightness data table for moving the movable body;
controlling the light emitting means so as to give priority to a brightness data table for movable body movement over a brightness data table for normal state background;
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images